Loading...
"CLICK HERE TO JOIN NOUN WHATSAPP GROUP"

"MEET NOUN STUDENTS"

"NOUN TMA FORUM"

NOUN TMA App
Day, Month 00, Year
   
00: 00: 00 AM
     

National Open University of Nigeria NOUN Admission for 2026 Academic Session still ONGOING/ACTIVE. Contact Us for NOUN Admission assistance/enquiry. Whatsapp 08133898192

BFN203-Basic Financial Literacy

NOUN TMA QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
Topic Information

Course Code & Title: BFN203-Basic Financial Literacy

Description: NOUN TMA Q&A


Instructions/Guidelines

    1) Spamming & Irrelevant data is prohibited

    2) Students can paste the exact TMA Question(s) and Options and other users can reply with answer(s)

    3) An expert can provide answer (s) to question (s) and choose to make it public or hide it for a token of fee

    4) As an expert kindly ensured you provide the actual answers to any TMA question(s) you’re replying to. Irrelevant data to reply would lead your account to be suspended.

    5) All hidden answers automatically becomes visible to users at the end of each Semester

    6) For example TMA1 for each Course is comprises of 10 questions. If all these questions are giving you tough time, it's recommended you COPY and PASTE the exact 10 questions and its options from NOUN TMA Portal and make a single Post here

    QUICK REPLY:

    7) For quick REPLY it's advisable you tap the SHARE button to copy the page link and share to students Forums like Whatsapp Groups, Facebook groups, Telegram etc where you can to find students

    8) Another way you can get quick REPLY to your Posts is when you subscribe to our TMA Answers. As a subscriber every of your Posts appears on the “My Posts” Page for quick view. To learn more, login into your Dashboard


    Subscribe TMA Answers My Topics/Payments

Posts

Tutor Image Support
COURSE

GUIDE



ENT 207
BASIC FIANACIAL LITERACY

Course Team	Dr. Sheu Abdullahi Araga (Course Writer) Department of Financial Studies Faculty of Management Sciences National Open University of Nigeria

Prof. Olowe Rufus Ayodeji (Course Editor)

Department of Finance,
University of Lagos

Dr. Lawal Kamaldeen A. A (H.O.D)
Department of Entrepreneurial Studies

Faculty of Management Sciences
National Open University of Nigeria

Dr. Timothy Ishola (Dean)

Faculty of Management Sciences

National Open University of Nigeria























NATIONAL OPEN UNIVERSITY OF NIGERIA


1
 








National Open University of Nigeria

Headquarters
University Village

Plot 91 Cadastral Zone

Nnamdi Azikiwe Expressway
Jabi, Abuja.

Lagos Office

14/16 Ahmadu Bello Way

Victoria Island, Lagos

e-mail: centralinfo@noun.edu.ng
URL:	www.noun.edu.ng

Published by:

National Open University of Nigeria

ISBN:

Printed: 2017

All Rights Reserved
























2
 
CONTENTS

Introduction

Course Contents

Course Aims

Course Objectives

Working through This Course

Course Materials

Study Units

Textbooks and References

Assignment File

Assessment

Tutor-Marked Assignment

Final Examination and Grading

How to get the Best out of this Course

Facilitators/Tutors and Tutorials

Useful Advice

Summary




















3
 
INTRODUCTION

ENT 207: Basic Financial Literacy is a semester course work of two credit units. It will be available to all students in the Department of Entrepreneurial Studies, Faculty of Management. The course consists of 4 modules involving the subject area of Basic Financial Literacy.

The course guide tells you what the course is all about and the relevant materials that you require to make your study very successful. Other vital information contained in this course guide deals with Assessment which consists of the Tutor- Market Assignments, and written examination.

The Course Contents

The course contents consist of basic financial literacy encompassing various areas that are very pertinent to the understanding of finance.

Course Aims

The aims of this course are to expose you to the knowledge of how to evaluate projects either as a project initiator or an evaluator. It aims to sharpen your skills in the evaluation of either new projects or existing projects with a view to deciding whether they meet certain predetermined investment criteria.

Course Objectives

At the end of this course you should be able to:

•	discuss the intricacies of basic finance

•	explain the basic elements of finance

•	make use of knowledge of basic elements of finance.

•	discuss the usefulness of basic financial literacy

The Course Materials

The main components of the course are:

1.	The Course Guide

2.	Study Units

3.	References/Further Readings

4.	Assignments

Study Units

There are 18 units in this course and they should be studied carefully

Module 1

Unit 1: Meaning, Nature And Types Of Investment

Unit 2: Venture Creation

Unit 3: Diversification As A Basis Of Investment Portfolio
Unit 4: Investing Wisely In Capital Market Using Hedging


4
 
Module 2

Unit 5: Investing Wisely In Capital Market Using Arbitrage
Unit 6: Investing Wisely In Capital Market Using Speculation
Unit 7: Investment In Derivatives
Unit 8: Investment Portfolio In Properties And Commodities

Module 3

Unit 9:  Leveraging On Debts & Venture Capital In Creating Wealth
Unit 10: Intellectual Property And Royalties
Unit 11: Financial Market Instruments
Unit 12: Capital Gains And Continuous Cash Flows

Unit 13: Building Personal Cash Flows (Savings)

Module 4

Unit 14: Personal Financial Planning
Unit 15: Maintaining Savings Account For Cash Reserves
Unit 16: Planning For Contingency Fund
Unit 17: Insurance And Risk Hedging
Unit 18: Understanding Tax Issues

Module 1 provides you with the necessary background knowledge on investment. The remaining module 2 to 4 focus attention on the subject matter of basic elements of finance Each study unit will take at least two hours and it includes: introduction, objectives, main content, exercise, conclusion, summary, references and the Tutor-Marked Assignments (TMAs).

You are required to study the materials, reflect on them and do the exercises. You should also read the textbooks and other recommended materials in each study unit.

Assignments

In each unit, you will find some self assessment exercises which you are required to do. The self assessment exercises will enable you to have a better understanding of what you have studied.

Assessment:

As a student of the Open and Distance Learning (ODL) system, you are expected to access your learning ability by the extent of your understanding of the units and the entire course. This assessment prepares you for the final examination. The final examinations will come at the end of the course. You are expected to write this examination whose score together with what you made in the TMAs will form the course grade.






5
 
Tutor-Marked Assignment

In doing the Tutor-Marked Assignments, you are expected to apply what you have learnt in the contents of the study unit. The TMAs are expected to be computer base for grading. They constitute 30% of the total score.

Final Examination and Grading

At the end of the course, you will write the final examination. It will attract the remaining 70%.

This makes the final score to be 100%.

Summary

The course ENT 207 – Basic Financial Literacy will expose you to the knowledge and understanding of how to evaluate projects. When you complete the course, you would have been armed with the necessary knowledge required to evaluate investment opportunities.













































6
 
MAIN

CONTENT


Module 1

Unit 1: Meaning, Nature And Types Of Investment

Unit 2: Venture Creation

Unit 3: Diversification As A Basis Of Investment Portfolio
Unit 4: Investing Wisely In Capital Market Using Hedging
Unit 5: Investing Wisely In Capital Market Using Arbitrage

Module 2
Unit 6: Investing Wisely In Capital Market Using Speculation

Unit 7: Investment In Derivatives
Unit 8: Investment Portfolio In Properties And Commodities

Unit 9:  Leveraging On Debts & Venture Capital In Creating Wealth
Unit 10: Intellectual Property And Royalties

Module 3
Unit 11: Financial Market Instruments

Unit 12: Capital Gains And Continuous Cash Flows
Unit 13: Building Personal Cash Flows (Savings)
Unit 14: Personal Financial Planning
Unit 15: Maintaining Savings Account For Cash Reserves

Module 4
Unit 16: Planning For Contingency Fund
Unit 17: Insurance And Risk Hedging
Unit 18: Understanding Tax Issues

























7
 
UNIT 1: MEANING, NATURE AND TYPES OF INVESTMENT

CONTENTS

1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Meaning and Nature of Investment
3.2	Characteristics of Investment
3.3	Types of Investment
3.3.1	Ownership Investment
3.3.2	Lending Investment
3.3.3	Marketable Security Investment
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This initial study unit of the course material is used to discuss the nature and type of investment. Investment is very important for the fact that it can be used to generate additional income. However, some elements of risk are inherent in any form of investment but risks vary from one investment to another. Therefore, the choice of investment is informed by the degree of risk involved but this can be ameliorated with a combination of investments. In this unit, discussion is on the meaning and nature of investment and the characteristics of investment. In addition, the various types of investment are also discussed.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Explain the term investment

•	Identify and discuss the characteristics of investment
•	Mention and explain types of investment

3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 MEANING AND NATURE OF INVESTMENT

The term investment is fraught with many definitions but such expositions recognize the fact that investment requirements financial commitments, which implies that funds will have to be expended by the person who is investing. In general terms, therefore, investment involves spending of money with the hope of reaping some financial benefits. According to economists, investment is regarded as savings embarked upon as a result of “delayed consumption.”




8
 

Furthermore, investment is also recognized as the deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person?s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future. For instance, investment takes place when certain amount of money is deposited in an account in the bank. According to economists, equipment acquired by a firm for production with which to earn income from its operations in the long run is an investment.

In finance, an investment involves utilization of funds in acquisition of financial assets such as stocks, bonds, bullion, real properties, and precious items. This holds that “practice of investment” implies acquisition of a product of financial value with expectation of generating desired returns in the future. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of market liquidity. In order to assess the value of a financial investment, a mechanism known as valuation becomes relevant.

Beattie (2017) posits that the term investment refers to something that is acquired with money with the expectation to generate income or profit from it. The author identifies three basic groups of investments such as ownership investment, lending investment, and cash investment.


SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Explain the term Investment.

3.2 CHARACTERISTICS OF INVESTMENT

The nature of financial many investments can exhibit the following characteristics or features.

1. Earnings

The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate earnings. In other words, any form of investment is undertaken with the anticipation of making returns, which is the essence of any action in acquiring any financial product or sinking funds in investible commitment. In respect of financial products, the earnings can come in terms of some interest, capital gain over and above the principal amount invested and dividend from stock. The earning from investment can be expressed as follows:

Earnings = Prevailing Price of Stock less Original price

The capital gain as an instance of earnings is measured by the disparity between original price of the investible product and current market of the product. Basically, the earnings from financial products in investment is a function of many factors such as nature of the financial product, type

of stock, the firm?s line of business (petroleum, manufacturing or banking, etc.), state of the economy, and prevailing government policy, among others.

Hence, the essence of investment hinges on expected returns, which may be in form of capital gain or investment income that include dividends, interest, and rental income, among others.


9
 

Investors normally desire higher level of returns but such returns are associated with riskier investments.

2.	Risk of Loss

In most cases, safety of investment can only be guaranteed if is done in financial products such as government security and firms with high networth. Financial products like government loan stock, bonds, treasury bills and treasury certificates, which are normally floated by government are known as gilt-edge securities because of their safety. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as blue chip securities of their yields and high likelihood of safety.

The stocks of banks are generally fraught with some risk of loss of the volatile nature of their operations. Therefore, such stocks command affordable prices. In comparison, the stocks of oil companies are of less risk of loss because of their stable nature of operations. However, such stocks particularly of oil majors command higher prices and higher yields or earnings.

When investing in debt instruments (such as debenture, bond, etc.) of a company in blue chip companies or government authority, the risk of loss of the investment is less as a result of their secured operations, besides the inherent fixed interest payable on them. However, investment in ownership stocks (as financial products) such as equity or preference shares, the risk inherent in them is more. This is as a result of their unsecured nature and variability of their return and agency problem inherent in the companies. Factors such interest rate, tax on capital gains and dividends, inflation also affect returns from such investment.

3. Safety of Investment

Security of investment is very important. Security of investment herein refers to the protection or safety of the amount invested and the expected earnings. Security issue is very germane to choice of investment. While investing, you have to consider the safety of your funds and the probability that the expected gains will be earned invariably. Capital gains, for instance, cannot materialize if the capital itself is lost due to mismanagement of the firm?s affairs by the managers, fraud and fraudulent practices by staff, bad corporate governance, labour unrest, and pilferage of firm?s assets, etc. External factors such as economic downturn, volatile exchange rate, inflationary pressure, high interest rate, and unstable economic policies by the government, among others, can also affect realization of funds or capital invested.

4. Liquidity of Investment

Liquidity means the ease with which an investment can be converted into cash. The level of liquidity of an investment depends on many factors. The investor can always desire to convert the investment into physical cash in meeting urgent commitments. The ability of the investor to do so depends on the level of liquidity of the financial asset being held. The financial assets that are very liquid are the marketable securities such as treasury bills and treasury certificates as well as other government securities and to some extent, the stocks and debentures of blue chip companies.

10
 
SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
Mention and explain the characteristics of Investment.

3.3 TYPES OF INVESTMENT

Beattie (2017) identifies some forms of investment which include ownership investment, lending investment,

3.3.1 Ownership Investment

This type of investment revolves around committing your funds in: capital market securities such as stocks (buying shares in companies through initial public offer (IPO) or stock brokers as dealers in stock exchange, subscribing to loan stocks of government and corporate bodies; establishing your own business entity or going into partnership with others to form business entity; committing your funds in acquisition of landed property (ownership of a real estate); and precious metals and objects.

i) Stocks

These are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities. These shares can be equity stocks for ordinary shareholders or preference shares for preferred treatment for dividends and claims from the business.

ii) Derivatives

A derivative refers to a financial product which has its value dependent on the outcome of the original financial product as investment by the managers of the funds. Derivative products can be used for: insuring against price movements such as in the case of hedging; guiding against exposure to price movements for speculation; and as a means of having leeway to some other hybrid assets or markets (Crawford, and Sen, 1996; Koehler, 2005).

These investible instruments which you can commit your funds into include: common derivatives such as options, swaps, futures, and forwards; and collateralized debt obligations; credit default swaps. All these derivatives are normally traded on a stock exchange or over the counter (Koehler, 2005).

iv) Business Ventures

The money that is used in starting and running a business is an investment. Entrepreneurship is one of the hardest investments to make because it requires more than just money. Consequently, it is also an ownership investment with extremely large potential returns. By creating a product or service and selling it to people who want it, entrepreneurs can make huge personal fortunes. Bill Gates, founder of Microsoft and one of the world's richest men, is a prime example.




11
 
v) Real Estate

This involves investment in buying or building houses, apartments and other landed property with the purpose of leasing them out. Such items of investment can be acquired, restructured and then resell them. The house that you own and make use of as your residence does not qualify as an investment because it is not built or purchased for business purpose; not for generating revenue and profit. However, they are susceptible to some elements of risk such as damage and destruction arising from natural disasters.

vi) Precious Metals and Objects

Some people cultivate the habit of engaging in collection and preserving precious metals (gold, diamond, etc) and objects (such as paintings by renown painters) with the intention of reselling them in the future. The intention is to earn profits from them as their value appreciates. Precious metals and collectibles are not necessarily a good investment for a number of reasons, but they can be classified as an investment nonetheless. However, these objects are also susceptible to some elements of risk such as damage and destruction arising from natural disasters. They is also risk of physical depreciation that requires restoration before their sale invariably. These risks affect their values, and therefore can affect their eventual profits intended in the investment.

3.3.2 Lending Investments

This involves subscribing and investing in debt instruments of corporate entities such as bonds and debentures. These debt investments attract periodic earnings from interest payment by the companies using the funds to run their operations. The principal amount invested in them is paid back to you after their maturity date. Investment in debt instruments (bonds and debentures) is known for relatively lower risk when compared to ownership investments stocks and their returns (interests) are fixed. Stockholders can incur loss by not getting their money back in the event of the firm being declared bankrupt. Nevertheless, bond and debenture holders usually get their invested money back in case of insolvency.

3.3.3 Marketable Security Investment

Marketable securities refer to money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash. There are varieties of these financial instruments in which you can subscribe or invest. Some are called funds being handled by investment companies while others are usually floated by the apex bank (central bank) on behalf of the government. The ones being floated by the apex bank include Treasury bills and Treasury certificates.

i) Treasury bill

According to Investopedia (2012), a Treasury bill (T-bill) refers to short term debt obligation that is taken by the government through the apex bank. T-bill normally has a maturity date of some months but less than one year. It is normally issued by the apex bank on behalf of the government to raise funds for meeting shortfalls in revenue with which to finance recurrent government expenditure. The T-bill is a money market financial instrument that is usually


12
 

denominated in thousands of the country?s currency meant to be purchased in multiples of such denomination. An example can be a denomination of N1,000 in Nigerian currency if issued by the Central Bank of Nigeria for the Nigerian government. Interest is paid on regular basis till the maturity date when the principal amount invested on it by the investors is repaid.

You can purchase new T-bills at auctions as conducted by the apex bank for the government or old ones previously issued and held by investors through the secondary market. The T-bills that are purchased at auctions are normally priced through a competitive bidding process, at a discount from the par value. When you redeem your own T-bills at maturity date, you will be paid the par value or face value; resulting in a difference between the purchase price and the par value, which is the gain.

ii) Treasury Securities

Treasury securities are obligations of the government. They are issued to cover government budget deficits (excess of expenditures over revenues) and to refinance maturing government debt. The most common are bills, notes, and bonds. Treasury bills have original maturities of I year or less, while notes are for 1 to 10 years, and bonds have maturities greater than 10 years.


iii) Government agency securities:

Securities issued by an agency of the federal government particularly in the U.S. with implicit backing of the federal government. Repurchase agreements are essentially collateralized loans. A financial institution with large holdings of Treasury securities sells some portion of them for a predetermined period of time to obtain liquidity and promises to repurchase the securities at the end of that period. On the other side of the transaction is an institution with excess liquidity. The amount of the transaction is relatively large, and the interest rate is below the federal funds rate. The lower rate is justified, because the transaction is collateralized by government securities.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
Differentiate between ownership investment and lending investment.


4.0 CONCLUSION

This unit of the course material has provided you with the basic knowledge about investment. Investment essentially involves deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person?s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future. It also connotes acquiring asset(s) with money in the expectation of generating income or profit from them. Inherent in investment are the elements of risk. Therefore, when investing, you have to assess the risk involved in a financial instrument compared to the expected returns before committing your funds. Generally, therefore, considerations in investment include: risk of loss of investment; expected earnings or return from investment; safety of the funds invested; and liquidity in terms of degree of availability of the funds whenever you need the money.



13
 
5.0 SUMMARY

In this initial study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning and Nature of Investment
•	Characteristics of Investment
•	Ownership Investment
•	Lending Investment

•	Marketable Security Investment

In the next study unit, you will be taken through venture creation.


6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	What is investment?
2.	List and explain the characteristics of investment.
3.	Compare and contrast ownership investment and lending investment

Answers to Self –Assessment Exercises

1. Explain the term Investment

Investment refers to the deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person?s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future. In other words, investment refers to something that is acquired with money with the expectation to generate income or profit from it.

2. Mention and explain the characteristics of Investment

1. Earnings

The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate earnings or any form of investment is normally undertaken with the anticipation of making returns. This return is the essence of any action in acquiring any financial product or sinking funds in investible commitment. The earning from investment can be expressed as follow:

Earnings = Prevailing Price of Stock less Original price

2. Risk of Loss

In most cases, safety of investment can only be guaranteed if is done in financial products such as government security and firms with high networth. Financial products like government loan stock, bonds, treasury bills and treasury certificates, which are normally floated by government are known as gilt-edge securities because of their safety. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as blue chip securities of their yields and high likelihood of safety.





14
 

When investing in debt instruments (such as debenture, bond, etc) of a company in blue chip companies or government authority, the risk of loss of the investment is less as a result of their secured operations, besides the inherent fixed interest payable on them. However, investment in ownership stocks (as financial products) such as equity or preference shares, the risk inherent in them is more.

3. Safety of Investment

Security of investment herein refers to the protection or safety of the amount of investment and the expected earnings. Security issue is very germane to choice of investment. While investing, you have to consider the safety of your funds and the probability that the expected gains will be earned invariably.

4. Liquidity of Investment

Liquidity means the ease with which an investment can be converted into cash. The level of liquidity of an investment depends on many factors. The investor can always desire to convert the investment into physical cash in meeting urgent commitments. The ability of the investor to do so depends on the level of liquidity of the financial asset being held. The financial assets that are very liquid are the marketable securities such as treasury bills and treasury certificates as well as other government securities and to some extent, the stocks and debentures of blue chip companies.


3. Differentiate between ownership investment and lending investment.

Ownership investment involves around committing your funds in: capital market securities such as stocks (buying shares in companies through initial public offer (IPO) or stock brokers as dealers in stock exchange, subscribing to loan stocks of government and corporate bodies; establishing your own business entity or going into partnership with others to form business entity; committing your funds in acquisition of landed property (ownership of a real estate); and precious metals and objects.

On the other hand, lending investment involves subscribing and investing in debt instruments of corporate entities such as bonds and debentures. These debt investments attract periodic earnings from interest payment by the companies using the funds to run their operations. The principal amount invested in them is paid back to you after their maturity date. These investment instruments are known for relatively lower risk when compared to ownership investments stocks and their returns (interests) are fixed. Stockholders can incur loss by not getting their money back in the event of the firm being declared bankrupt. Nevertheless, bond and debenture holders usually get their invested money back in case of insolvency.

7.0 REFERENCES AND FURTHER READINGS

Crawford,  G.  and Sen,  B.  (1996).  Derivatives  for  Decision Makers:  Strategic  Management
Issues, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons

15
 

Investopedia (2012). What is a 'Treasury Bill? Accessed on 10 January, 2017 from http://www.investopedia.com/terms/t/treasurybill.asp#ixzz4dCGLXsAV

Koehler, C. (2005). The Relationship between the Complexity of Financial Derivatives and Systemic Risk, Working Paper: 10–11.


























































16
 
UNIT 2: VENTURE CREATION


CONTENTS
1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Meaning of venture creation
3.2	Process of Venture Creation
3.3	Role of Entrepreneur in Venture Creation
4.0	Conclusion

5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment

7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

The existence of almost all business entities is often as a result of the strategic role of the entrepreneurs. Therefore, the creation of such business undertakings owes it to the actions of the entrepreneurs. Hence entrepreneurs initiate required actions to create business ventures from their uncanny foresights in recognizing the potential requirement or desire for specific products (goods or services) in certain underserved markets. Venture creations result in the subsistence of almost all business entities, emerging from the uncommon attitudes towards assuming risks by some industrialists in every economy around the world. In this study unit of the course material, you are being taken through the discussion on creation of ventures in particular and the strategic role of entrepreneurs in such task generally.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Explain and explain the term venture creation
•	Identify and discuss the stages involved in process of venture creation

•	List and explain responsibilities of entrepreneurs in venture creation

3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 MEANING OF VENTURE CREATION

The connotation of venture creation, as provided by the Cambridge Dictionary (2017), refers to the process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking which can succeed and is invariably capable of attracting investors. This implies that potential entrepreneurs that are interested in identifying possible business ideas normally pay attention to everything in various media (print and electronic) which can be exploited to create business ventures.




17
 
Swier (2007) posits that venture creation refers to an action initiated for starting business venture

with the intent of filling the gap between an initiative and a “capitalized business. Relatedly,

most venture capitalists will only be interested in investing in a venture that portrays great fundamentals such as: competent management, profitable market, novel product, and reasonable quantum of sales revenue or turnover. To lay credence to this view, Gordon (2012) posits that venture creation process is an outcome of two interrelated stages of “discovery and exploitation.”

Furthermore, Swier (2007) observes that venture creation involves a process just like a manufacturing process because venture creation process ideas coupled with necessary productive inputs such as human efforts and technology into desired products for the consumers. Such venture becomes fundable venture once it can meet the current desires, needs, wants and aspirations of the target and potential markets.

Basically, as espoused by Swier (2007), the worth of a venture creation does not just involve creating ventures. More significantly, the establishing ventures should go through a process which decides whether or not the venture possesses a feasible and marketable product in available or emerging market. In addition, the venture should have a plan that is practically attainable based on available resources including the critical one, the capital.

The fundamental approach to venture creation (Bhave, 1994) involves generating business ideas through some stages which include: internally and externally stimulated opportunity recognition; commitment to physical creation; set-up of production technology; organization creation; product creation; connecting with potential markets, and generating customer feedback.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Explain the term venture creation.

3.2 Process of Venture Creation

There are various versions of the process of venture creation as formulated by many writers.
Some of these versions are identified and discussed below.




3.2.1 Deakins Model of Venture Creation Process

The steps involved in venture creation based on the classification by Deakins and Freel (2009), the updated version of Deakins in 1999.

i) Idea Formulation

This involves developing business ideas which can be influenced by family and friends. This calls for creativity in terms of the entrepreneur?s ability to link ideas to business that were not discovered previously (Deakins & Freel, 2009). Formulating business idea is very time-consuming which goes through refinement. The entrepreneur can find it necessary to discuss his



18
 

business ideas with people like family, friends and experts. It is also necessary to research on them before arriving on a selected one.

ii) Opportunity Recognition

This is regarded as the key stage in the new venture process. It involves stumbling on business opportunity and capitalizing on it to form business entity. Opportunity recognition is influenced by factors such as role models, cultural attitudes to risk and failure, changing socio-economic and technical environments. For instance, a business opportunity can be discovered form a change in the environment like a political decision by the government. It is argued that the cultural environment of the entrepreneur should be appropriate towards encouraging him/her to take risks that are associated with new venture. In essence, such an environment is supposed to be facilitative to encourage entrepreneurship. Based on the evaluation of a business opportunity, the entrepreneur takes a decision on whether or not to go ahead in establishing the venture.

iii) Pre-start Planning and Development

This stage involves embarking on market research, scouting for finance, finding partners and social capital for the new venture. The market research and information gathering become critical for establishing the new venture. The other preparatory procedures include raising funds, dealing with legal matters, exploring for a management team, linking skills to responsibilities, planning the entry strategy, and detailing out the business plan.

iv) Establishment and Launch

This stage is embedded in “intellectual property rights process, timing and role of serendipity.” The choice of the entry point on time, according to Deakins and Freel (2009), is critical for the venture?s success when intellectual property rights issues are concerned. During this stage, there are important activities to be carried out. Such actions include: learning in dealing with “customers, suppliers, bank officials, marketing efforts, patenting procedures and gaining experience” generally.

v) Post-Entry Development

This stage requires that the entrepreneur engage in necessary networks and taking appropriate steps for ensuring that the new venture gains credibility. This is the most critical issue that the entrepreneur faces in establishing the new venture in terms of the rating of the venture by customers, suppliers, etc. The first timer as an entrepreneur can make mistakes in respect of administrative and operational decisions. Comparatively, the experienced entrepreneur being brought into the new venture at this stage can help the inexperienced entrepreneur to obliterate such teething problems. The experienced partner can help raise awareness and publicity as well as the much needed network. Marketing efforts in this stage should not be overlooked as it is critical to gain new customers and to keep the existing ones.









19
 
3.2.2 Hult Model of Venture Creation Process

The Hult Model involves an iterative process in which there are five phases as identified and explained below. However, as observed by Brettl, Kleinert and Karamatova (2010), regardless of the sequential approach of the model, it is feasible to go back in the process.

i) Idea Phase

The idea phase represents the beginning of the new venture creation. This does not imply that the business idea is not well developed yet but this stage provides the base towards the penchant of the entrepreneur to establish a new venture.

ii) Test and Persuasion Phase

During this stage, the potential entrepreneur will be interest in testing or discussing his/her business idea with the family, good friends and colleagues. It has been argued that empirical findings provide a favourably feedback from the entrepreneur?s background helps to encourage the achievement of the business idea. Basically, this second stage can be appreciated as a learning phase whereby the entrepreneur acquires the elementary information in legal realm and accounting.

iii) Preparation Phase

This phase requires that the entrepreneur engages in juggling figures (calculations), preparing relevant budgets, analyzing the market situation and invariably assessing the production process. Professional consultants can be contacted by the entrepreneur towards solving some jigsaw puzzles that may arise in the working process.

iv) Start-up Phase

This phase in the creation of the new venture usually calls for a starting point, “a triggering event” that encourages the entrepreneur towards finally implementing his/her business idea. It represents a crucial event, which can turn out to be “positive or negative in nature.” For example, exploring the leasing of business premises, machinery and equipment may pose a daunting task. The response of the owners can be positive or negative and the search continues until success smiles on the face of the entrepreneur.

v) Ongoing Business Phase

During this phase, the entrepreneur is expected to have contacts for resources such as capital funds, personnel, and other productive inputs like technology, raw materials, business premises, machinery and equipment. All these inputs will enable the entrepreneur to continue the implementation of his/her business idea. In the course of the new venture getting stabilised, the entrepreneur is still expected to devote much of his his/her moments and endeavor in steering the affairs of its operations. This becomes obvious so that success of the business can be guaranteed. All the necessary future moves such as entering into new markets by the entrepreneur in the business are expected to be in accordance with professional advice of the consultants.






20
 
3.2.3 Bhave Model of Venture Creation Process

The process of venture creation, according to Bhave (1994), involves stages such as opportunity recognition; commitment to physical creation; set-up of production technology; organization creation; product creation; connecting with potential markets, and generating customer feedback. These stages are discussed below.

i) Opportunity Recognition Stage,

Business concept creation incorporates the opportunity stage of the venture creation process. This is in essence involves converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking, which is the foundation of the creation of any business venture by an entrepreneur. The recognition for business is normally internally and externally stimulated by the entrepreneur. He or she may already be working under an employer in which case the issue of stumbling on the venture idea arises in the course of work, which is called intrapreneurship. The idea of venture creation can even arise during industrial attachment, particularly for the graduates from Polytechnics and universities, during which they learn how to convert theoretical knowledge into practical products that are beneficial to mankind. For instance, engineering students have the opportunity of experiencing the workability of inverter in relation to conserving electricity in practical terms. And this experience can stimulate them to float companies for the production of inverters.

ii) Technology Set-Up Stage

This is embedded in the acquisition and setting up of production technology for the venture. This implies that the stage involves the purchase and establishment of the required (production) technology for the operations of the business undertaking. And it calls for the commitment towards physical creation of the required technological facility for the purpose of production of products (goods or services). All business undertakings in the modern time revolve around technology, which in itself is very dynamic. Since technology keeps on changing, an entrepreneur who wants to establish a new venture must embrace effective and efficient way of carrying out business operations with the latest cutting edge technology. In essence, new ventures must embrace latest technology for efficient production of goods and services, and particularly for timely (online real time) delivery of services to the customers in the target and potential markets.

iii) Organization Stage

This stage involves establishing the management structure of the venture with which to steer the affairs and ensure success and profitable operations of the business. The entrepreneur, more often than not, assumes the leadership position while bringing in some supportive personnel for the operations. The initial organizational structure is the simple line organization while it assumes larger dimension, such as functional structure, over time in the growth process of the venture.




21
 

Swier (2007) succinctly observes that the most significant characteristic of a venture creation is the management. The personnel that stir the daily affairs of the venture must sound pedigrees in terms skills (highly qualified) and uncanny commitment as well as entrepreneurial attitude for the business undertaking to succeed. The basic thing is based on finding very valuable human resources and giving them appropriate orientation regarding their strategic roles in the operations of the venture.

iv) Product Creation Stage

The novel idea inherent in venture creation has this as its core variable because this serves as the base for the operationalisation of the whole essence of the creation. The product to be produced from the venture emanates from the need to serve the gap identified in the existing production and marketing scenario. The gap as identified in the opportunity stage leads to novel idea regarding the type of product to produce and offer to the potential consumers or customers. The creation can be an enhancement in the existing product or a totally new product to satisfy the need and want of the target market.

v) Exchange Stage

This stage involves connecting with potential markets for the products of the venture. At this stage, information already generated from market research becomes very valuable. Marketing, in fundamental terms, involves getting the right products (goods and services) to the right market at the right time at the right price. This implies that after the production of the products from the new venture, the entrepreneur has to determine and fix appropriate price and push them out to the target markets through appropriate channels of distribution. Furthermore, the entrepreneur then takes decisions to deliver the products at appropriate time to the target market. The entrepreneur does not restrict the distribution of the products to only the target market, but he/she takes decision to reach other (potential) markets for the products to ensure marketing stability, expansion, and competitive leverage over competitors in the industry.

vi) Customer Feedback Stage

This stage involves generating information from the customers or users of your product (goods or services) regarding the performance; whether they are meeting their expectation or desires which motivate them to patronize such products.

In most cases, entrepreneurs do introduce distinct elements of novelty at each stage of the process of venture creation particularly in the areas of technological setup, product creation, exchange or connecting with the customers, and dealing with the ideas on improvement from the dealers and customers. Basically, the variations in the product concepts, technological utilization, commercialization of products from the venture, and recognition being accorded to the dealers and customers serve to differentiate one entrepreneurial undertaking from another.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
Identify and discuss the stages involved in venture creation process according to Bhave (1994).


22
 
3.3 Role of Entrepreneur in Venture Creation

The entrepreneur constitutes the driving force for the recognition of a venture idea. Hence he/she assumes an important responsibility in the venture creation process (Brettl, Kleinert and Karamatova, 2010). An entrepreneur, as an industrialist, is regarded as a change agent in terms of acting to assume the risk inherent in the formation of a business venture. In order to create venture by an entrepreneur, he/she must possess uncanny forethought towards recognizing the potential requirement or desire for specific products (goods or services). Basically, creating a venture takes an unremitting progression which requires dogged commitment by the entrepreneur in creating the venture and introducing its products to the target markets effectively and efficiently.

The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following responsibilities.

i) Idea Generation

It is the responsibility of an entrepreneur to begin with the inventing business ideas. This implies that the entrepreneur has onerous task of identifying and evaluating the business opportunities. Since this task is a difficult one, an entrepreneur is expected to search for inputs from all individuals around him/her such as friends, relatives, co-workers, members of the public, business or marketing consultants (if fund is available for it), and the media. The twin element of idea generation is the assessment of such ideas by the entrepreneur to arrive at the most advantageous, feasible and profitable venture prospect.

Fundamental issues inherent in assessment of business ideas include questions such as is the opportunity: worthwhile for investment; satisfactorily advantageous; practically profitable; competitively feasible; fraught with daunting risks; and above all, does the creator possess required personal skills and acumen to initiate and bring the venture into fruition.

ii) Developing a Business Plan:

Another important responsibility of the entrepreneur in venture creation involves the packaging a detailed business plan for the venture. The business plan becomes very significant to the accomplishment of the objectives of any new venture. This is in view of the fact that the business plan serves as the point of reference with which to assess whether the business venture is progressing or not as far as the predetermined goals and objectives are concerned. Some level of commitment is required of the entrepreneur in coming up with the business plan which can measure up to known standards and invariably stand the test of time.

iii) Generating Required Financial and Material Resources

A crucial responsibility of the entrepreneur in venture creation involves generating the needed financial and material resources for the new venture. More often than not, the initial capital of the business which is regarded as seed money is expected to be provided by the entrepreneur. The venture has to be at the stage of startup before the move to raise capital to cope with its


23
 

operational requirements. The initial or seed money, as opined by Swier (2007), is normally required for market research, product development, and building management infrastructure. The entrepreneur is also expected to search for the needed human (personnel), technological and other material resources for the operations of the new venture.

iv) Establishing Management for the Venture

Another crucial responsibility of the entrepreneur in venture creation involves the management of the new venture. The entrepreneur has to employ capable hands with required qualifications, skills, and mental attitudes for the operations of the new venture. Once the required personnel are in place, the entrepreneur takes decisions on the organizational structure that best fits the nature of operations of the new venture

v) Developing Strategic Plans for the Future

This crucial responsibility of the entrepreneur in venture creation involves engaging in strategic planning for the future position of the new venture. The entrepreneur has the onerous task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development. Herein, the entrepreneur becomes proactive in terms of planning for the stability, expansion, and funding of the future growth and development; whether through the use of venture capital, initial public offer or private placement of its shares to prospective investors.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
List and explain responsibilities of entrepreneurs in venture creation.

4.0 CONCLUSION

This unit of the course material has provided you with the basic knowledge about the creation of ventures which arises from the actions of entrepreneurs. This implies that entrepreneurs constitute the architects in the creation of business undertakings because they initiate required actions to create ventures from the preserved need to fill gaps resulting from underserved markets. To create any venture, there is a specific process to follow with stages such as: opportunity recognition; commitment to physical creation; set-up of production technology; organization creation; product creation; connecting with potential markets, and generating customer feedback. In order to ensure the success of the new venture, entrepreneurs assume certain responsibilities like: generating venture idea, developing a business plan; generating required financial and material resources; establishing management for the venture; and developing strategic plans for the future.

5.0 SUMMARY

In this initial study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning of venture creation;
•	Process of Venture Creation; and

•	Role of Entrepreneur in Venture Creation.

24
 

In the next study unit, you will be taken through diversification as a basis of investment portfolio.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	Explain the term venture creation
2.	Compare and contrast the stages of venture creation in Deakins Model and Bhave Model.
3.	Mention reasons why entrepreneur?s role is still very relevant after the creation of a venture.

Answers to Self-Assessment Questions

1. Explain the term venture creation.

Venture creation refers to an action initiated for starting business venture with the intent of filling the gap between an initiative and a “capitalized business. Furthermore, venture creation involves a process just like a manufacturing process because venture creation process ideas coupled with necessary productive inputs such as human efforts and technology into desired products for the consumers. Such venture becomes fundable venture once it can meet the current desires, needs, wants and aspirations of the target and potential markets.

The worth of a venture creation does not just involve creating ventures but establishing ventures should go through a process that decides whether or not the venture possesses a feasible and marketable product in available or emerging market. In addition, the venture should have a plan that is practically attainable based on available resources including the critical one, the capital.

2.	Identify and discuss the stages involved in venture creation process according to Bhave (1994).

The relevant stages in the process of venture creation as identified by Bhave (1994) are discussed as follows:

i) Opportunity Recognition Stage,

Business concept creation incorporates the opportunity stage of the venture creation process. This is in essence involves converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking, which is the foundation of the creation of any business venture by an entrepreneur. The recognition for business is normally internally and externally stimulated by the entrepreneur.

ii) Technology Set-Up Stage

This stage involves the purchase and establishment of the required (production) technology for the operations of the business undertaking. And it calls for the commitment towards physical creation of the required technological facility for the purpose of production of products (goods or services). All business undertakings in the modern time revolve around technology, which in itself is very dynamic. Since technology keeps on changing, an entrepreneur who wants to



25
 

establish a new venture must embrace effective and efficient way of carrying out business operations with the latest cutting edge technology.

iii) Organization Stage

This stage involves establishing the management structure of the venture with which to steer the affairs and ensure success and profitable operations of the business. The entrepreneur, more often than not, assumes the leadership position while bringing in some supportive personnel for the operations. The initial organizational structure is the simple line organization while it assumes larger dimension, such as functional structure, over time in the growth process of the venture.

iv) Product Creation Stage

The novel idea inherent in venture creation has this as its core variable because this serves as the base for the operationalisation of the whole essence of the creation. The product to be produced from the venture emanates from the need to serve the gap identified in the existing production and marketing scenario. The gap as identified in the opportunity stage leads to novel idea regarding the type of product to produce and offer to the potential consumers or customers. The creation can be an enhancement in the existing product or a totally new product to satisfy the need and want of the target market.

v) Exchange Stage

This stage involves connecting with target and potential markets for the products of the venture. At this stage, information already generated from market research becomes very valuable. The entrepreneur takes decisions, after the production of the products from the new venture, to fix appropriate price, select appropriate channels for distribution, and ensuring timely availability of the products in the target and potential markets.

vi) Customer Feedback Stage

This stage involves generating information from the customers or users of your product (goods or services) regarding the performance; whether they are meeting their expectation or desires which motivate them to patronize such products.

3. Role of Entrepreneur in Venture Creation

The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following responsibilities.

i) Idea Generation

It is the responsibility of an entrepreneur to begin with the inventing business ideas. This implies that the entrepreneur has onerous task of identifying and evaluating the business opportunities. Since this task is a difficult one, an entrepreneur is expected to search for inputs from all individuals around him/her such as friends, relatives, co-workers, members of the public,

26
 

business or marketing consultants (if fund is available for it), and the media. The twin element of idea generation is the assessment of such ideas by the entrepreneur to arrive at the most advantageous, feasible and profitable venture prospect.

ii)	Developing a Business Plan:

Another important responsibility of the entrepreneur in venture creation involves the packaging a detailed business plan for the venture. The business plan becomes very significant to the accomplishment of the objectives of any new venture. This is in view of the fact that the business plan serves as the point of reference with which to assess whether the business venture is progressing or not as far as the predetermined goals and objectives are concerned.

iii) Generating Required Financial and Material Resources

A crucial responsibility of the entrepreneur in venture creation involves generating the needed financial and material resources for the new venture. More often than not, the initial capital of the business which is regarded as seed money is expected to be provided by the entrepreneur. The venture has to be at the stage of startup before the move to raise capital to cope with its operational requirements. The initial (seed) money is normally required for market research, product development, and building management infrastructure. The entrepreneur is also expected to search for the needed human (personnel), technological and other material resources for the operations of the new venture.

iv) Establishing Management for the Venture

Another crucial responsibility of the entrepreneur in venture creation involves the management of the new venture. The entrepreneur has to employ capable hands with required qualifications, skills, and mental attitudes for the operations of the new venture. Once the required personnel are in place, the entrepreneur takes decisions on the organizational structure that best fits the nature of operations of the new venture

v) Developing Strategic Plans for the Future

This crucial responsibility of the entrepreneur in venture creation involves engaging in strategic planning for the future position of the new venture. The entrepreneur has the onerous task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development. Herein, the entrepreneur becomes proactive in terms of planning for the stability, expansion, and funding of the future growth and development; whether through the use of venture capital, initial public offer or private placement of its shares to prospective investors.

7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Bhave, M. P. (1994). A process model of entrepreneurial venture creation, Journal of Business Venturing, 9(3): 223-242.



27
 

Brettl, E., Kleinert, V. and Karamatova, L. (2010). The New Venture Creation Process in Cooperation with Science Park Jönköping, Bechelor Thesis in Business Administration, submitted to JÖn Köp Ing Int E Rn At Io Nal Bus Ine S S S Ch Oo L, Jönköping

University. Accessed on from 19 March, 2017 from http://www.diva-portal.org/smash/get/diva2:322911/FULLTEXT01

Cambridge Business English Dictionary (2017). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Accessed on 19 March, 2017 from http://dictionary.cambridge.org/ dictionary/english/ venture-creation.

Corno, F., Lal, R. and Colombo, S. (2014). Entrepreneurship & New Venture Creation Key Elements of the Entrepreneurial Ecosystem Facilitating the Growth of ICT Entrepreneurs in Italy, European Scientific Journal, Special edition, 2: 330-345.

Deakins, D., & Freel, M.S. (2009). Entrepreneurship and small firms (5th ed.). London:
McGraw-Hill.

Gordon, S. R. (2012). Dimensions of the Venture Creation Process: Amount, Dynamics and Sequences of Action in Nascent Entrepreneurship. PhD Thesis submitted to Australian Centre for Entrepreneurship Research, School of Management, QUT Business School, Queensland University of Technology, Australian. Accessed on 19 March, 2017 from http://eprints.qut.edu.au/58078/1/Scott_Gordon_Thesis.pdf

Hult,	M.,	Jerreling,	A.,	&	Lindblom,	G.	(1991).	Öka	nyföretagandet:	teorier,	modeller,
vägledning. Växjö: Högskolan.

Swier, R. (2007). Startup Florida, What is Venture Creation? Accessed on 19 March, 2017 from http://startupflorida.blogspot.com.ng/2007/06/what-is-venture-creation.html.




























28
 
UNIT 3: DIVERSIFICATION AS A BASIS OF INVESTMENT PORTFOLIO




CONTENTS

1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Meaning of Investment
3.2	Value Investment
3.3	Diversification of Investment as a Basis for Portfolio
3.3.1	Meaning of Diversification

3.3.2	Using Diversification in Investment
3.3.3	Advantages and Disadvantages of Diversification
3.3.3.1 Advantages of Diversification
3.3.3.2 Disadvantages of Diversification
3.4	Ways to Avoid Inappropriate Diversification
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This study unit of the course material is used to expose you to the important issue of investment in the capital market. Since your money should stay with generating additional income, you have to invest it on securities being offered in the capital market. Value investment is also discussed in this study because you cannot just hold stocks without monitoring the pulse of the capital market to take advantage of price fluctuations. Furthermore, the study unit is also used to discuss the use of diversification towards ensuring wise investment of your money in the capital market, and the ways to avoid inappropriate diversification.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Define investment
•	Explain value investment
•	Discuss diversification in capital market investment
•	Mention and explain advantages and disadvantages of diversification
•	List and explain ways to avoid inappropriate diversification








29
 
3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 Meaning of Investment

In general terms, investment in finance implies having to commit your money or to allocate your fund money in investible securities, financial instruments or all forms of business ventures (e.g., acquiring rental assets, estate undertaking, etc.) with the expectation of reaping some benefits in the future.

In finance, the major benefit from investment is the return on the fund invested. The return may consist of capital gain and/or investment income that include other financial benefits such as dividends, interest, and rental income, among others. The projected economic return is the appropriately discounted value of the future returns. This is because the future financial benefits are subject to the time value of money causing fluctuation in such value. The historic return comprises the actual capital gain and/or income over a period of time.

Investment generally results in acquiring assets such as financial assets, productive assets, and estate assts. In the case of financial assets, if they are available at prices worth investing, it is normally expected either to generate income or to appreciate in value because they can be sold at higher prices before, their maturity dates.

Generally, you invest with the intention of generating higher returns. Such undertakings are normally associated with riskier investments. Financial assets therefore, range from low-risk, low-return investments, such as government securities (e.g., loan stick and bond) to those with higher risk and higher expected commensurate reward, such as emerging markets stock investments.

Basically, investors are normally or often advised to adopt an investment strategy and diversify their portfolio, combination of investment assets in both the capital market and money market because diversification has the statistical effect of reducing overall risk in investment.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Explain the term Investment.

3.2 Value Investment

A value investor buys undervalued securities while he sells overvalued ones out of his investment portfolio in the capital market. In order to identify undervalued securities, a value investor uses analysis of the financial reports of the issuer to evaluate the security. Basically, value investors employ accounting ratios such as earnings per share and sales growth, to identify securities trading at prices below their worth.

The price to earnings ratio, or earnings multiple, is a particularly significant and recognized fundamental ratio, with a function of dividing the share price of stock, by its earnings per share. This will provide the value representing the sum investors are prepared to expend for each dollar of company earnings. This ratio is an important aspect, due to its capacity as measurement for


30
 

the comparison of valuations of various companies. A stock with a lower price to earnings ratio will cost less per share, than one with a higher price to earnings ratio, taking into account the same level of financial performance; therefore, it essentially means a low price to earnings ratio is the preferred option.

An instance, in which the price to earnings ratio has a lesser significance, is when companies in different industries are compared. An example; although, it is reasonable for a telecommunications stock to show a price to earnings ratio in the low teens; in the case of hi-tech stock, a price to earnings ratio in the 40s range, is not unusual. When making comparisons the price to earnings ratio can give you a refined view of a particular stock valuation.

For investors paying for each dollar of a company's earnings, the P/E ratio is a significant indicator, but the price-to-book ratio (P/B) is also a reliable indication of how much investors are willing to spend on each dollar of company assets. In the process of the P/B ratio, the share price of a stock is divided by its net assets; any intangibles, such as goodwill, are not taken into account. It is a crucial factor of the price-to-book ratio, due to it indicating the actual payment for tangible assets and not the more difficult valuation, of intangibles. Accordingly, the P/B could be considered a comparatively, conservative metric.

A popular valuation metric is earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortization (EBITDA), with application for example to valuing unlisted companies and mergers and acquisition.

For an attractive investment, for example a company competing in a high growth industry, an investor might expect a significant acquisition premium above book value or current market value, which values the company at several times the most recent EBITDA. A private equity fund for example may buy a target company for a multiple of its historical or forecasted EBITDA, perhaps as much as 6 or 8 times.

In certain cases, an EBITDA may be sacrificed by a company, in order for the pursuance of future growth; a strategy frequently used by corporate giants. This is a business decision that can impact negatively on buyout offers, founded on EBITDA and can be the cause of many negotiations, failing. It may be recognized as a valuation breach, with many investors maintaining that sellers are too demanding, while buyers are regarded as failing to realize the long-term potential of, expenditure or acquisitions.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
Explain the term Value Investment.

3.3 Diversification of Investment as a Basis for Portfolio

3.3.1 Meaning of Diversification

Investment diversification is regarded as one of the basic building blocks of a solid portfolio.
Diversification is associated with the cliché that you should “not put all your eggs in one basket.”
This is the basic principle that informs a key element of portfolio diversification.


31
 

In basic terms, diversification is a technique that reduces risk by allocating investments among various financial instruments, industries and other categories. It aims to maximize return by investing in different areas that would each react differently to the same event.

Most investment professionals posit that, although it does not guarantee against loss, diversification is the most important component of reaching long-range financial goals while minimizing risk.

There are mainly two types of risk that are associated with investment in the capital market. These are systemic risk and unsystematic risk. Systematic or the market risk is associated with the firm?s operations; causes of systematic risk include inflation rates, exchange rates, political instability, war and interest rates. This type of risk is not specific to a particular company or industry, and it cannot be eliminated or reduced through diversification. This type of risk is undiversifiable, which implies that investors must accept it. The unsystematic risk is specific to a company, industry, market, economy or country; it can be reduced through diversification. The most common sources of unsystematic risk are business risk and financial risk. These forms of risk are susceptible to diversification such as carrying a portfolio of stocks to obliterate unnecessary losses, and as such they diversifiable. Thus, the aim of diversification is to invest in various assets so that they will not all be affected the same way by market events.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
Explain the term Diversification.

3.3.2 Using Diversification in Investment

A basic diversified portfolio might include several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash. Your allocation to each of these broad categories should be based upon your investment goals, your tolerance for risk, and your time horizon for needing the use of the money. In short your asset allocation should be an outgrowth of your financial plan. Investment diversification involves a portfolio strategy that calls for combining a variety of assets to reduce the overall risk of an investment portfolio.

Reason for diversification of investment is not far-fetched. Assuming you have a portfolio (combination) of only Bank A stocks. If it is brought to the public knowledge that the bank?s workers are going on an indefinite strike, and that all operations and branches of the bank will not be allowed by the union to function. The implication is that share prices of the bank stocks will drop. Your portfolio will experience a noticeable drop in value.

However, if you counterbalanced the banking industry stocks with a couple of oil company stocks, only part of your portfolio (that of Bank A) would be affected. In fact, there is the likelihood that the oil company stock prices would climb, as government announces rise in price of petrol corresponding to rise in the price of crude oil in the world market.

Nevertheless, you could diversify even further because there are many risks that affect both bank and oil. An event that reduces any form of operations in the banking industry hurts Bank A and by extension its stock price. Therefore, to achieve superior diversification, you would want to


32
 

diversify across many industries; not only different types of companies but also different types of industries. The more uncorrelated your stocks are, the better.

Furthermore, it is also important that you diversify among different classes of securities. Different financial assets such as bonds and stocks will not react in the same way to adverse events. A combination of asset classes will reduce your portfolio's sensitivity to market volatility. Generally, the bond and equity markets move in opposite directions. Therefore, if your portfolio is diversified across both areas, unpleasant movements in one will be offset by positive results in another.

Furthermore, there exists additional types of diversification, and many synthetic investment products have been created to accommodate investors' risk tolerance levels. However, these products can be very complicated and are not meant to be created by beginner or small investors. For those who have less investment experience, and do not have the financial backing to enter into hedging activities, bonds are the most popular way to diversify against the stock market.

Nevertheless, even the best analysis of a company and its financial statements cannot guarantee that it could not adverse results from operations, and thereby investment in the firm lost. Hence diversification cannot obliterate a loss, but it can reduce the impact of fraud and bad information on your portfolio.

Basically, owning five stocks (diversification) is better than owning one, but there comes a point when adding more stocks to your portfolio ceases to make a difference. Debate arises over how many stocks are needed to reduce risk while maintaining a high return. The most conventional view argues that an investor can achieve optimal diversification with only 15 to 20 stocks spread across various industries.

In the final analysis, diversification can help you manage risk and reduce the volatility of a financial asset's price movements. However, you have to understand the fact that no matter how diversified your portfolio is, risk can never be eliminated completely in capital market investment.

Fundamentally, you can reduce risk associated with individual stocks, but general market risks affect nearly every stock; so it is also important to diversify among different asset classes. The important point is that you have to find a medium between risk and return. This ensures that you achieve your financial goals while still getting a good rest of mind.

3.3.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of Diversification

3.3.3.1 Advantages of Diversification

The advantages of investment diversification include the following.

i) Risk Management

One advantage of diversification is risk management. Risk management is one of the essentials to successful investing. If you lose in some stocks, such can be counterbalanced with gains from

33
 

other securities or for you to get back to breakeven. Diversification through asset allocation may be the most important investment strategy an investor can master. Basically, therefore, the benefit of diversification involves lowered overall portfolio risk without lowering portfolio returns.

ii) Portfolio Optimization

Portfolio optimization is achieved by placing a larger percentage of high return investments in a diversified portfolio. This is due to the fact that proper diversification lowers the overall risk of a portfolio. You can place more aggressive assets in the portfolio. This implies that an investor who is willing to take a given amount of risk can invest more aggressively with a properly diversified portfolio as opposed to a non-diversified portfolio.

Since investment diversification involves the strategy of combining financial assets in such a way as to reduce the overall risk of a portfolio, it implies that to achieve investment diversification assets are allocated in such a way as to spread them in a variety of stocks industries.

3.3.3.2 Disadvantages of Diversification

i) Diversification Double Dip

This is one fallacy of diversification. Diversification is the sort of thing that suffers from what is called “double dip” because too much of a good thing can turn sour. In fact, empirical evidence portrays that most of the benefit of increased diversification, as measured by the standard deviation of returns, goes away once a portfolio has between 20 and 30 securities in it.

ii)	Diversification’s Downside Danger

This is the second fallacy of diversification. Many investment brokers like to sell the notion of diversification as buying and holding two or more assets whose values don?t rise or fall together. They want investors to imagine it is practicable or possible. The danger is that if there is recession in the economy, almost all the stocks of quoted companies would lose their values. This happens between 1929 and 1932 during the Great Depression in the United States of America due to excessive speculation in the capital market.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 4
Mention and explain advantages and disadvantages of diversification.

3.4 Ways to Avoid Inappropriate Diversification

i) Too many investments

It is very advisable that you keep your stock holdings down to a manageable number of investments; a number as few as 20 and not more than 30, in reasonable amount of funds without investing too much in a few stocks. In addition, the holdings should be diverse in the wisdom that the value of these funds or securities should not be tightly coupled with one another. Buying

34
 

stock in 20 different commercial banks will not diversify your portfolio but acquiring 20 stocks in different sectors and industries will ensure appropriate diversification. Hence having fewer investments in terms of stock investment implies that you will have an easier time making sense of it all.

ii) Buying foreign funds and stocks.

Many foreign-stock investment vehicles have historically performed poorly. If you own stocks in large multinational corporations, you are already getting enormous exposure to overseas economies. Empirical evidence abound to show that investment in such corporations could go awry because of their expose to weakness in the economies of countries apart from their home countries; home country being advance economy while the other countries are mainly developing economies struggling to survive. Managements of such corporations are paying much closer attention and getting far better insights into their overseas business interest than the action you can take to monitor their performance, which may be difficult for to understand. More so, the attention of their management even goes beyond what any foreign-stock mutual fund manager ever could.

iii) Diversifying based on market capitalization

Small rise in market capitalization and large fall in market capitalization should be capitalized for investment diversification. It is advisable to find strong corporate entities such as blue chip companies and invest in them regardless of what the total market capitalization is showing.

iv) Buying illiquid and high-fee investments.

Hedge funds and mutual funds are two favourites of the investment traders who tout diversification. The former are sold as “go-go high-octane vehicles” and the latter as “super-safe dividend” plays with zero volatility. On average, both perform poorly over time.

4.5 Conclusion

Investment in finance implies having to commit your money or to allocate your fund money in investible securities, financial instruments or all forms of business ventures. In value investing, you offload securities with higher prices and buy stocks with lower prices. Diversification involves having a combination of many classes of investment particularly in capital market securities. A basic diversified portfolio might include several investment categories such as stocks, bond and loan stock, among others. In finance, diversification refers to the process of allocating investment funds in such a way that reduces the exposure to any one particular asset or risk. A common path towards diversification is to reduce risk or volatility by investing in a variety of assets. Diversification is one of two general techniques for reducing investment risk.

5.0 SUMMARY

In this study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning of Investment;

35
 
•	Value Investment;
•	Meaning of Diversification;
•	Using Diversification in Investment;

•	Advantages of Diversification;
•	Disadvantages of Diversification; and
•	Ways to Avoid Inappropriate Diversification

In the next study unit, you will be taken through investing wisely in capital market using hedging.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	Explain the term Investment.
2.	Discuss the process of value investment.
3.	Explain the term Diversification.
4.	Mention and explain advantages and disadvantages of diversification.

Answers to Self-Assessment Exercises

1.	Explain the term Investment.

Investment involves allocating your fund or money in investible securities, financial instruments or all forms of business ventures (e.g., acquiring rental assets, estate undertaking, etc.) with the expectation of reaping some benefits in the future. In finance, the major benefit from investment is the return on fund invested. The return may consist of capital gain and/or investment income that include other financial benefits such as dividends, interest, and rental income, among others.

2.	Explain the term Value Investment.

Value investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the capital market. In order to identify undervalued securities, a value investor uses analysis of the financial reports of the issuer to evaluate the security. Basically, value investors employ accounting ratios such as earnings per share and sales growth, to identify securities trading at prices below their worth.

3.	Explain the term Diversification.

Diversification is a technique that reduces risk by allocating investments among various financial instruments, industries and other categories. It aims to maximize return by investing in different areas that would each react differently to the same event.

Most investment professionals posit that, although it does not guarantee against loss, diversification is the most important component of reaching long-range financial goals while minimizing risk.

There is systemic risk or the market risk as associated with the firm?s operations caused by inflation rates, exchange rates, political instability, war and interest rates. This type of risk is not

36
 

specific to a particular company or industry, and it cannot be eliminated or reduced through diversification, that is, undiversifiable.

There is unsystematic risk that is specific to a company, industry, market, economy or country, and it can be reduced through diversification. Sources of this risk include business risk and financial risk, and they diversifiable. Thus, the aim of diversification is to invest in various assets so that they will not all be affected the same way by market events.

4.	Mention and explain advantages and disadvantages of diversification. Advantages of investment diversification include the following.

i) Risk Management

One advantage of diversification is risk management. Risk management is one of the essentials to successful investing. If you lose in some stocks, such can be counterbalanced with gains from other securities or for you to get back to breakeven.

ii) Portfolio Optimization

Portfolio optimization is achieved by placing a larger percentage of high return investments in a diversified portfolio. This is due to the fact that proper diversification lowers the overall risk of a portfolio. You can place more aggressive assets in the portfolio.

Disadvantages of Diversification include the following

i) Diversification Double Dip

Diversification is the sort of thing that suffers from what is called “double dip” because too much of a good thing can turn sour. There is evidence portrays that most of the benefit of increased diversification goes away once a portfolio has between 20 and 30 securities in it.

ii) Diversification?s Downside Danger

Many investment brokers like to sell the notion of diversification as buying and holding two or more assets whose values don?t rise or fall together. The danger is that if there is recession in the economy, almost all the stocks of quoted companies would lose their values.

7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Elton, E. J. and Gruber, M. J. (1977). Risk Reduction and Portfolio Size: An Analytic Solution,
Journal of Business, 50: 415-37

Douglas, M. (1990). The Disciplined Trader, New York: New York Institute of Finance.


Jorion, P. (2009). Financial Risk Manager Handbook (5 ed.), New Jersey: John Wiley and Sons.



37
 

Kenneth G. Winans, K. G. (2015). 5 Big Mistakes Investors Make When They Diversify. Accessed on 14 January, 2017 from http://www.forbes.com/sites/janetnovack/ 2015/02/05/5-big-mistakes-investors-make-when-they-diversify/#2a69136f2f43

Kondor, P. (2009). Risk in Dynamic Arbitrage: Price Effects of Convergence Trading, Journal of
Finance, 64 (2): 638–658.

Lowenstein,	R.	(2000).	When	genius	failed:	The	rise	and	fall	of	Long-Term	Capital
Management, New York: Random House.

Mahdavi	Damghani,	B.	(2013)a.	The	Non-Misleading	Value	of	Inferred	Correlation:	An
Introduction to the Cointelation Model, Wilmott, 2013 (1): 50–61.

Mahdavi Damghani, B. (2013)b. De-arbitraging With a Weak Smile: Application to Skew Risk,
Wilmott, 2013 (1): 40–49.

Niederhoffer, V. (2005).  Practical Speculation, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2005.

Schwager, J. D. (2013). Trading with the Market Wizards: The Complete Market Wizards Series,

New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons 2013.

Siegel, J. (2003). What is an Asset Price Bubble? European Financial Management. 9(1): 11–24

Shleifer, A. and Vishny, R. (1997). The limits of arbitrage, Journal of Finance, 52: 35–55.

Stark, B. J. (1983). Special Situation Investing: Hedging, Arbitrage, and Liquidation, New York,
NY: Dow-Jones Publishers.

Sullivan, A. and Sheffrin, S. M. (2003). Economics: Principles in action, Upper Saddle River,
New Jersey 07458: Pearson Prentice Hall.

Teeter, P. and Sandberg, J. (2017).Cracking the enigma of asset bubbles with narratives,

Strategic Organization. 15 (1): 91–99.

Wohlner, R. (2013). Here's Why Diversification Matters, U.S. News & World Report. Accessed on 14 January, 2017 from http://money.usnews.com/money/blogs/the-smarter-mutual-fund-investor/2013/05/31/heres-why-diversification-matters

Xiong, W. (2001). Convergence trading with wealth effects, Journal of Financial Economics, 62: 247–292.










38
 
UNIT 4: INVESTING WISELY IN CAPITAL MARKET USING HEDGING




CONTENTS

1.0 Introduction
2.0 Objectives
3.0 Main Content
3.1 Meaning of Hedging
3.2 Using Hedging in Investment
3.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of Hedging
3.3.1 Advantages of Hedging

3.3.2 Disadvantages of Hedging
4.0 Conclusion
5.0 Summary
6.0 Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

In respect of investing wisely in capital market, hedging is also useful toward making returns on your fund. It is advisable to engage services of brokerage firms (as traders in financial market) since they are professionals in such market. This study unit of the course material, therefore, is mainly used to expose you to the meaning and process of using hedging in investment as far as the capital market securities are involved. Furthermore, the unit also discusses the advantages and disadvantages of using hedging to ensure investing profitably in the capital market.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Define hedging in capital market;
•	Discuss the process of using hedging for profitable investment in capital market;
•	Mention and explain advantages of hedging; and

•	List and discuss disadvantages of hedging.

3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 Meaning of Hedging

A hedge is an investment which is undertaking in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movements in a financial asset. Normally, a hedge consists of taking an offsetting position in a related security, such as a futures contract. In other words, a hedge is an investment position which is intended for use in offsetting potential losses or gains that may be incurred by a companion investment. In simple terms, a hedge is used to reduce any substantial losses that may occur in investment which has to do with financial assets in the capital market.

39
 

A hedge is an investment position which is intended for use in offsetting potential losses or gains that may be incurred by a companion investment. In simple terms, a hedge is used to reduce any substantial losses that may occur in investment, which has to do with financial assets in the capital market.

A hedge can be constructed from many types of financial instruments, including stocks, exchange-traded funds, insurance, forward contracts, swaps, options, many types of over-the-counter and derivative products, and futures contracts.

Hedging is the practice of taking a position in one market to offset and balance against the risk adopted by assuming a position in a contrary or opposing market or investment.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Explain the term Hedging.

3.2 Using Hedging in Investment

Equity in a portfolio can be hedged by taking an opposite position in futures. To protect your stock picking against systematic market risk, futures are shorted when equity is purchased or a long future when stock is shorted.

One way to hedge is the market neutral approach. In this approach, an equivalent naira amount in the stock trade is taken in futures – for example, by buying N10,000 worth of say First Bank shares and shorting N10,000 worth of All Share Index; the index in which the bank?s share trades in Nigerian Stock Exchange.

Another way to hedge is the beta neutral. Beta is the historical correlation between a stock and an index. If the beta of First Bank stock is 2, then for a N10,000 long position in bank, an investor would hedge with a N20,000 equivalent short position in the All Share Index.

In respect of hedging a stock price, a common hedging technique used in the financial market is the long/short equity technique. The scenario is this:

A stock trader who believes that the stock price of Company A will rise over the next month, due to the company's new and efficient method of producing products, buys Company A shares with the intention to earn profit from their expected price increase, as he believes that shares are currently underpriced. However, if Company A operates in a highly volatile industry, there is a risk of a future event that affects stock prices across the whole industry, including the stock of Company A along with all other companies.

Since the trader is interested in the specific company, rather than the entire industry, he has to hedge out the industry-related risk by short selling an equal value of shares from Company A's direct, yet weaker competitor, Company B.

The first day the trader's portfolio is as given below:



40
 
•	Long 1,000 shares of Company A at N1 each
•	Short 500 shares of Company B at N2 each

The trader has sold short the same value of shares (the value, number of shares × price, is N1, 000 in both cases).

If the trader was able to short sell an asset whose price had a mathematically defined relation with Company A's stock price, for example, a put option on Company A shares, the trade might be essentially riskless. In this case, the risk would be limited to the put option's premium.

On the second day, a favorable news story about the industry?s products is published and the value of all the products stock goes up. Company A?s stock increases by 10% because it is a stronger company, while that of Company B increases by just 5%:

•	Long 1,000 shares of Company A at N1.10 each: N100 gain

•	Short 500 shares of Company B at N2.10 each: N50 loss (in a short position, the investor loses money when the price goes up)

The trader might regret the hedge on day two, since it reduced the profits on the Company A?s position. But on the third day, an unfavorable news story is published about the health effects of the products, and all prices of stocks crash: 50% is wiped off the value of the industry?s products in the course of a few hours. Nevertheless, since Company A is the better company, it suffers less than Company B:

Value of long position (Company A):

•	Day 1: N1,000
•	Day 2: N1,100
•	Day 3: N550 => (N1,000 - N550) = N450 loss

Value of short position (Company B):

•	Day 1: -N1,000
•	Day 2: -N1,050
•	Day 3: -N525 => (N1,000 - N525) = N475 profit

Without the hedge, the trader would have lost N450 (or N900 if the trader took the N1,000 he has used in short selling Company B's shares to buy Company A's shares as well). But the hedge

– the short sale of Company B results in a profit of N25 during a dramatic market collapse.

Hedging can be used in other different ways such as foreign exchange trading. The stock example above represents a typical sort of hedge, known in the industry as a pairs trade due to the trading on a pair of related securities. As the practitioners in the capital market become more sophisticated, along with the mathematical tools used to calculate values or models, the types of hedges have increased greatly.



41
 
SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
Discuss Hedging as it relates to using it for investing wisely in the capital market.


3.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of Hedging

3.3.1 Advantages of Hedging

i) Lower risk of investment

The main advantage of the hedge is that it lowers the risk of an investment significantly. If an investor makes an investment in which variables are out of his control -- as is the case in nearly any investment -- then he stands to lose money if things do not go as he planned. A hedge can help him offset these losses and thus reduce any unwanted risk.

ii) Flexibility in its investment option

Hedge funds are extremely flexible in their investment options because they use financial instruments generally beyond the reach of mutual funds.

iii) Easily best managed investment fund

The flexibility in hedge funds, which includes use of hedging strategies to protect downside risk, gives hedge funds the ability to best managed investment risks. This is linked to performance incentives available for hedge fund managers who manages and shares the rewards as well as risks with the investors.

iv) Exposure to markets that can easily forecast future trends

Hedges are particularly popular with companies that have exposure to certain markets, such as commodities or interest rates. For instance, airlines and railroads spend substantial amounts for fuel for their operations, and so hedging future fuel costs can protect them against a spike in the market price for energy products.

v) Less volatile than individual stocks

Hedge funds can be less volatile than individual stocks or mutual funds because: hedge funds are particularly popular with companies that have exposure to certain markets; it lowers the risk of an investment significantly; and its ability to best managed investment risks because of performance incentives available for hedge fund managers.










42
 
3.3.2 Disadvantages of Hedging

i) Higher minimum investment amount required

Hedge fund normally requires a very high minimum amount, which is way only high networth individuals, pension funds, endowment funds, insurance funds, corporate funds can utilize this investment route.

ii) Higher risk

Hedge funds mostly take higher risk to generate higher returns which increases the risk of losing money. One wrong huge investment decision can lead to huge losses for the entire hedge funds.

iii) Lower liquidity

Hedge funds have lower liquidity compared to other funds in the market. The investors cannot buy or sell instantly whenever they want.

iv) Mispricing

The price of the hedge fund units is decided by the management itself which can lead to mispricing of the hedge fund net asset value, and because of this, buyers can end up paying more than actual or the seller can end up receiving less than the actual amount.

v) Short selling and margin calls

Hedge funds have huge exposures in the short selling and margin calls which carries very high risk of losing money.

vi) Low regulation

All hedge funds are very much unregulated which increases the possibility of unfair trade practices (e.g., trade on insider information) and publishing of wrong information about the performance. Investors have become worst affected.

vii) Lower risk management

Hedge funds normally have very low risk management process in place which makes them more vulnerable during any financial crisis or liquidity crisis situation.

viii) High management fees

Hedge funds normally charge very high management and performance fees if the performance is good, which reduces the effective return to the investors significantly.




43
 
ix) Management section bias

The management normally selects the best performing hedge while publishing the performance report every time and ignore the worst performed hedge funds to make the performance report more attractive to investors. The worst affected hedge funds are withdrawn from the market without anyone noting it except the investors who lose the invested money. The selection of best performing funds is done to attract potential investors and to increase the asset under management which serves as the most important parameter of a hedge fund.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
What are the Advantages and Disadvantages of Hedging?

4.5 Conclusion

Hedging is another strategy that can be used to take advantage of wise investment in the capital market. When you are making a large investment, it is advisable to use a hedge investment. Such investment provides a kind of insurance policy designed to protect you in the event that your large investment collapses. The financial hedge provides protection, guarding you against significant losses. Yet, hedges are not always useful and, if injudiciously purchased, can be a waste of money. The relative advantages and disadvantages of a hedge depend greatly on the situation in which the hedge is applied, as well as the hedge cost. In some situations, a hedge will be absolutely necessary to make sure that you as investor will remain financially solvent, regardless of what happens. In other cases, it merely signals an overcautious investor cutting into his own


5.0 SUMMARY

In this study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning of Hedging;
•	Using Hedging in Investment;
•	Advantages of Hedging; and
•	Disadvantages of Hedging

In the next study unit, you will be taken through investing wisely in capital market by using arbitrage.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	Explain the term Hedging.
2.	Discuss the process of using Hedging in Investment.
3.	Identify and explain advantages and disadvantages of Hedging.








44
 
Answers to Self Assessment Exercises

1. Explain the term Hedging.

A hedge is an investment which is undertaking in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movements in a financial asset. Normally, a hedge consists of taking an offsetting position in a related security, such as a futures contract. In other words, a hedge is an investment position which is intended for use in offsetting potential losses or gains that may be incurred by a companion investment. In simple terms, a hedge is used to reduce any substantial losses that may occur in investment which has to do with financial assets in the capital market.

2. Discuss Hedging as it relates to using it for investing wisely in the capital market.

Equity in a portfolio can be hedged by taking an opposite position in futures. To protect your stock picking against systematic market risk, futures are shorted when equity is purchased or a long future when stock is shorted.

One way to hedge is the market neutral approach. In this approach, an equivalent naira amount in the stock trade is taken in futures – for example, by buying N10,000 worth of say First Bank shares and shorting N10,000 worth of All Share Index; the index in which the bank?s share trades in Nigerian Stock Exchange.

Another way to hedge is the beta neutral. Beta is the historical correlation between a stock and an index. If the beta of First Bank stock is 2, then for a N10,000 long position in bank, an investor would hedge with a N20,000 equivalent short position in the All Share Index.

In respect of hedging a stock price, a common hedging technique used in the financial market is the long/short equity technique.


3. What are the Advantages and Disadvantages of Hedging?

Advantages of Hedging include the following.

i) Lower risk of investment

The main advantage of the hedge is that it lowers the risk of an investment significantly. If an investor makes an investment in which variables are out of his control -- as is the case in nearly any investment -- then he stands to lose money if things do not go as he planned. A hedge can help him offset these losses and thus reduce any unwanted risk.

ii) Flexibility in its investment option

Hedge funds are extremely flexible in their investment options because they use financial instruments generally beyond the reach of mutual funds.



45
 
iii) Easily best managed investment fund

The flexibility in hedge funds, which includes use of hedging strategies to protect downside risk, gives hedge funds the ability to best managed investment risks. This is linked to performance incentives available for hedge fund managers who manages and shares the rewards as well as risks with the investors.

iv) Exposure to markets that can easily forecast future trends

Hedges are particularly popular with companies that have exposure to certain markets, such as commodities or interest rates. For instance, airlines and railroads spend substantial amounts for fuel for their operations, and so hedging future fuel costs can protect them against a spike in the market price for energy products.

v) Less volatile than individual stocks

Hedge funds can be less volatile than individual stocks or mutual funds because: hedge funds are particularly popular with companies that have exposure to certain markets; it lowers the risk of an investment significantly; and its ability to best managed investment risks because of performance incentives available for hedge fund managers.

Disadvantages of Hedging include the following

i) Higher minimum investment amount required

Hedge fund normally requires a very high minimum amount, which is way only high networth individuals, pension funds, endowment funds, insurance funds, corporate funds can utilize this investment route.

ii) Higher risk

Hedge funds mostly take higher risk to generate higher returns which increases the risk of losing money. One wrong huge investment decision can lead to huge losses for the entire hedge funds.

iii) Lower liquidity

Hedge funds have lower liquidity compared to other funds in the market. The investors cannot buy or sell instantly whenever they want.

iv) Mispricing

The price of the hedge fund units is decided by the management itself which can lead to mispricing of the hedge fund net asset value, and because of this, buyers can end up paying more than actual or the seller can end up receiving less than the actual amount.

v) Short selling and margin calls

46
 

Hedge funds have huge exposures in the short selling and margin calls which carries very high risk of losing money.

vi) Low regulation

All hedge funds are very much unregulated which increases the possibility of unfair trade practices (e.g., trade on insider information) and publishing of wrong information about the performance. Investors have become worst affected.

vii) Lower risk management

Hedge funds normally have very low risk management process in place which makes them more vulnerable during any financial crisis or liquidity crisis situation.

viii) High management fees

Hedge funds normally charge very high management and performance fees if the performance is good, which reduces the effective return to the investors significantly.

ix) Management section bias

The management normally selects the best performing hedge while publishing the performance report every time and ignore the worst performed hedge funds to make the performance report more attractive to investors.


7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Elton, E. J. and Gruber, M. J. (1977). Risk Reduction and Portfolio Size: An Analytic Solution,
Journal of Business, 50: 415-37

Douglas, M. (1990). The Disciplined Trader, New York: New York Institute of Finance.


Jorion, P. (2009). Financial Risk Manager Handbook (5 ed.), New Jersey: John Wiley and Sons.

Kenneth G. Winans, K. G. (2015). 5 Big Mistakes Investors Make When They Diversify. Accessed on 14 January, 2017 from http://www.forbes.com/sites/janetnovack/ 2015/02/05/5-big-mistakes-investors-make-when-they-diversify/#2a69136f2f43

Kondor, P. (2009). Risk in Dynamic Arbitrage: Price Effects of Convergence Trading, Journal of
Finance, 64 (2): 638–658.

Lowenstein,	R.	(2000).	When	genius	failed:	The	rise	and	fall	of	Long-Term	Capital
Management, New York: Random House.



47
 
Mahdavi	Damghani,	B.	(2013)a.	The	Non-Misleading	Value	of	Inferred	Correlation:	An
Introduction to the Cointelation Model, Wilmott, 2013 (1): 50–61.

Mahdavi Damghani, B. (2013)b. De-arbitraging With a Weak Smile: Application to Skew Risk,
Wilmott, 2013 (1): 40–49.

Niederhoffer, V. (2005).  Practical Speculation, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2005.

Schwager, J. D. (2013). Trading with the Market Wizards: The Complete Market Wizards Series,

New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons 2013.

Siegel, J. (2003). What is an Asset Price Bubble? European Financial Management. 9(1): 11–24

Shleifer, A. and Vishny, R. (1997). The limits of arbitrage, Journal of Finance, 52: 35–55.

Stark, B. J. (1983). Special Situation Investing: Hedging, Arbitrage, and Liquidation, New York,
NY: Dow-Jones Publishers.

Sullivan, A. and Sheffrin, S. M. (2003). Economics: Principles in action, Upper Saddle River,
New Jersey 07458: Pearson Prentice Hall.

Teeter, P. and Sandberg, J. (2017).Cracking the enigma of asset bubbles with narratives,

Strategic Organization. 15 (1): 91–99.

Wohlner, R. (2013). Here's Why Diversification Matters, U.S. News & World Report. Accessed on 14 January, 2017 from http://money.usnews.com/money/blogs/the-smarter-mutual-fund-investor/2013/05/31/heres-why-diversification-matters

Xiong, W. (2001). Convergence trading with wealth effects, Journal of Financial Economics, 62: 247–292.
























48
 
UNIT 5: INVESTING WISELY IN CAPITAL MARKET USING ARBITRAGE

CONTENTS

1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Meaning of Arbitrage
3.2	Using Arbitrage in Investment
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This study unit of the course material is used to expose you to other strategies that can be employed in respect of investing wisely in capital market. These other strategies include arbitrage and speculation. Just like other ones treated in preceding units, the use of these two strategies, arbitrage and speculation, it is advisable also to engage services of brokerage firms (as traders in financial market) since they are professionals in such market. This study unit, therefore, is mainly used to discuss the concepts of arbitrage and speculation as far as using them in investment in the capital market securities are involved.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Define arbitrage

•	Discuss the process of using arbitrage in investment


3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 Meaning of Arbitrage

Arbitrage refers to the practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets. This involves striking a combination of matching deals that capitalize upon the imbalance between the two financial markets, the profit being the difference between the two market prices. Basically, it is the possibility of a risk-free profit after transaction costs. For instance, an arbitrage is present when there is the opportunity to instantaneously buy a security at a low price in one market and sell at a high price in another market.

Essentially, arbitrage may refer to the expected profit. However, some losses may occur in the process of engaging in arbitrage. And there are always risks in arbitrage, some of which may be minor such as fluctuation of prices that resulting in decreased profit margins. Some of such risks in arbitrage may be major such as devaluation of a currency or derivative.

49
 

In another perspective, an arbitrage involves taking advantage of differences in price of a single asset or identical cash-flows. In common use, it is also employed to denote to differences between similar assets, relative value or convergence trades, as it is the case in merger arbitrage. Arbitrage as a term is mainly applied to trading in financial instruments such as bonds, stocks, derivatives, commodities and currencies.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Explain the term Arbitrage.

3.2 Using Arbitrage in Investment

In respect of conditions for arbitrage, it is only possible when one of these three conditions exit: the same asset (financial security) does not trade at the same price on all markets, known as "the law of one price"; two assets with identical cash flows do not trade at the same price; and an asset with a known price in the future does not today trade at its future price discounted at the risk-free interest rate or the asset has significant costs of storage.

Arbitrage is not simply the act of buying a product in one market and selling it in another for a higher price at some later time. The transactions must occur simultaneously in order to avoid exposure to market risk, or the risk that prices may change on one market before both transactions are complete. In practical terms, this is generally possible only with securities and financial products that can be traded electronically, and even then, when each leg of the trade is executed the prices in the market may have moved. Missing one of the legs of the trade and subsequently having to trade it soon after at a worse price, is called 'execution risk' or more specifically 'leg risk'.

In the simplest example, any good sold in one market should sell for the same price in another. Traders may, for example, find that the price of wheat is lower in agricultural regions than in cities, purchase the good, and transport it to another region to sell at a higher price. This type of price arbitrage is the most common, but this simple example ignores the cost of transport, storage, risk, and other factors. Accurate arbitrage requires that there be no market risk involved. Where securities are traded on more than one exchange, arbitrage occurs by simultaneously buying in one and selling on the other.

Therefore, in order to invest wisely in financial market, arbitrage can be useful toward making returns on your fund. Since banks and brokerage firms (called arbitrageurs) are favourably disposed in engaging in arbitrage, you can make arrangement with the latter (brokerage firm) to trade with your funds in arbitrage on your behalf but at a fee, serving as their own commission.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
Discuss the process of using Arbitrage in investment.









50
 
4.5 Conclusion

The transactions in arbitrage must occur simultaneously in order to avoid exposure to market risk, or the risk that prices may change on one market before both transactions are complete. In practical terms, this is generally possible only with securities and financial products that can be traded electronically, and even then, when each leg of the trade is executed the prices in the market may have moved. It is advisable to engage services of brokerage firms (as traders in financial market) since they are professionals in such market.

5.0 SUMMARY

In this study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning of Arbitrage; and
•	Using Arbitrage in Investment;

In the next study unit, you will be taken through discussion on investment in speculation.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	What is Arbitrage in investment?
2.	Discus the process of using Arbitrage in Investment;


Answers to Self-Assessment Exercises

1. Explain the term Arbitrage.

Arbitrage involves taking advantage of differences in price of a single asset or identical cash-flows. Arbitrage as a term is mainly applied to trading in financial instruments such as bonds, stocks, derivatives, commodities and currencies. The transactions must occur simultaneously in order to avoid exposure to market risk, or the risk that prices may change on one market before both transactions are complete. In practical terms, this is generally possible only with securities and financial products that can be traded electronically, and even then, when each leg of the trade is executed the prices in the market may have moved.

2. Discuss the process of using Arbitrage in investment.

Arbitrage is not simply the act of buying a product in one market and selling it in another for a higher price at some later time. The transactions must occur simultaneously in order to avoid exposure to market risk, or the risk that prices may change on one market before both transactions are complete. In practical terms, this is generally possible only with securities and financial products that can be traded electronically, and even then, when each leg of the trade is executed the prices in the market may have moved. Missing one of the legs of the trade and subsequently having to trade it soon after at a worse price, is called 'execution risk' or more specifically 'leg risk'.




51
 
7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Elton, E. J. and Gruber, M. J. (1977). Risk Reduction and Portfolio Size: An Analytic Solution,
Journal of Business, 50: 415-37

Douglas, M. (1990). The Disciplined Trader, New York: New York Institute of Finance.


Jorion, P. (2009). Financial Risk Manager Handbook (5 ed.), New Jersey: John Wiley and Sons.

Kenneth G. Winans, K. G. (2015). 5 Big Mistakes Investors Make When They Diversify. Accessed on 14 January, 2017 from http://www.forbes.com/sites/janetnovack/ 2015/02/05/5-big-mistakes-investors-make-when-they-diversify/#2a69136f2f43

Kondor, P. (2009). Risk in Dynamic Arbitrage: Price Effects of Convergence Trading, Journal of
Finance, 64 (2): 638–658.

Lowenstein,	R.	(2000).	When	genius	failed:	The	rise	and	fall	of	Long-Term	Capital
Management, New York: Random House.

Mahdavi	Damghani,	B.	(2013)a.	The	Non-Misleading	Value	of	Inferred	Correlation:	An
Introduction to the Cointelation Model, Wilmott, 2013 (1): 50–61.

Mahdavi Damghani, B. (2013)b. De-arbitraging With a Weak Smile: Application to Skew Risk,
Wilmott, 2013 (1): 40–49.

Niederhoffer, V. (2005).  Practical Speculation, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2005.

Schwager, J. D. (2013). Trading with the Market Wizards: The Complete Market Wizards Series,

New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons 2013.

Siegel, J. (2003). What is an Asset Price Bubble? European Financial Management. 9(1): 11–24

Shleifer, A. and Vishny, R. (1997). The limits of arbitrage, Journal of Finance, 52: 35–55.

Stark, B. J. (1983). Special Situation Investing: Hedging, Arbitrage, and Liquidation, New York,
NY: Dow-Jones Publishers.

Sullivan, A. and Sheffrin, S. M. (2003). Economics: Principles in action, Upper Saddle River,

New Jersey 07458: Pearson Prentice Hall.

Teeter, P. and Sandberg, J. (2017).Cracking the enigma of asset bubbles with narratives,

Strategic Organization. 15 (1): 91–99.

Wohlner, R. (2013). Here's Why Diversification Matters, U.S. News & World Report. Accessed on 14 January, 2017 from http://money.usnews.com/money/blogs/the-smarter-mutual-fund-investor/2013/05/31/heres-why-diversification-matters

52
 

Xiong, W. (2001). Convergence trading with wealth effects, Journal of Financial Economics, 62: 247–292.





























































53
 
UNIT 6: INVESTING WISELY IN CAPITAL MARKET USING SPECULATION

CONTENTS

1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Meaning of Arbitrage
3.2	Using Arbitrage in Investment
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This study unit of the course material is used to expose you to other strategies that can be employed in respect of investing wisely in capital market. These other strategies include arbitrage and speculation. Just like other ones treated in preceding units, the use of these two strategies, arbitrage and speculation, it is advisable also to engage services of brokerage firms (as traders in financial market) since they are professionals in such market. This study unit, therefore, is mainly used to discuss the concepts of arbitrage and speculation as far as using them in investment in the capital market securities are involved.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Define arbitrage

•	Discuss the process of using arbitrage in investment


3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 Meaning of Speculation

Another way to invest wisely in financial market involves the use of speculation. Speculation can be useful toward making returns on your fund. It is advisable to engage services of brokerage firms (as traders in financial market) since they are professionals in such market.

This involves investment in stocks, property, bonds, etc., in the hope of gain but with the potential risk of loss. Basically, speculation in finance also refers to the practice of engaging in risky financial transactions in an attempt to earn profit from short term fluctuations in the market value of a tradable financial instrument. This is rather different from attempting to earn profit from the underlying financial attributes embodied in the instrument such as capital gains, dividends, or interest.



54
 
SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Explain the term Speculation.

3.2 Using Speculation in Investing

In speculation, dealers (the speculators) in financial market pay little attention to the fundamental value of a security and instead focus purely on price movement. Speculation can, in principle, involve any tradable good or financial instrument. Speculators are particularly common in the markets for stocks, bonds, currencies, and derivatives, among others.

Speculators play one of four basic roles in financial markets along with: hedgers who engage in transactions to offset some other pre-existing risk; arbitrageurs who seek to profit from situations where fungible instruments trade at different prices in different market segments; and investors who seek profit through long-term ownership of an instrument's underlying attributes.

In essence, speculation is simply a higher risk form of investment. In some literature, speculation is more narrowly as investment posture not characterized by hedging. Therefore, a speculator is a trader in financial market who does not get involved in hedging, but who trades with the objective of achieving profits through the successful anticipation of price movements. The emphasis herein is that speculators serve important market functions, but engaging in excessive speculation is regarded as being harmful to the proper functioning of futures markets.

A prototypical defensive investor refers to the one who is interested mainly in safety plus freedom from anxiety. However, it is argued that some speculation is necessary and unavoidable, for in many common-stock situations, there are substantial possibilities of both profit and loss, and the risks therein must be assumed by someone. Hence many long-term investors, even those who buy and hold for decades may be classified as speculators, except that only the rare few ones who are primarily motivated by income or safety of their principal amount of investment and not eventually selling at a profit.

Speculation usually involves more risks than ordinary investment; it is a hybrid investment undertaking. The price-stabilizing role of speculators is well recognized in the capital market; they take actions which tend to even out price-fluctuations due to changes in the conditions of demand and/or supply, by possessing superior foresight.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2

Discuss the process of using speculation in investment.

3.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of Speculation

3.3.1 Advantages of Speculation

i)	Speculation can be used to mitigate risk in the underlying asset, by entering into a derivative contract whose value moves in the opposite direction to their underlying position and cancels part or all of it out.


55
 

ii)	It can be used to create option ability where the value of the derivative is linked to a specific condition or event, for instance, the underlying asset reaching a specific price level.

iii)	It can be used to access or gain exposure to the underlying asset where it is not possible to trade in the underlying.

iv)	It provides some leverage or gearing such that a small movement in the underlying asset value can cause a large difference in the value of the derivative.

v)	Speculation can be used to make a reasonable level of profit if the value of the underlying asset moves the way they expect; for instance, moves in a given direction, stays in or out of a specified range or reaches a certain level.

vi)	It can be used to switch asset allocations between different asset classes without disturbing the underlying assets, as part of transition management of investment.

vii)	It can be used to avoid paying taxes. This is because it is a derivative contract. Therefore, it can be used by an investor to receive steady payments such as being based, for instance, on London interbank offer rate (LIBOR) while avoiding paying capital gain tax and keeping the stock.

3.3.2 Disadvantages of Speculation

i)	Speculation that goes wrong can wipe out a financial institution such a stock broking firm or bank such that a trader who engages in speculation will make the firm to incur enormous sum of money.

ii)	Speculation can make an individual investor to become bankrupt in loosing enormous amount of money when a natural disaster occurs to destroy the underlying asset of the transaction.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3

List the Advantages of Speculation

4.5 Conclusion

In speculation, the investor or trader in financial market does not get involved in hedging, but who trades with the objective of achieving profits through the successful anticipation of price movements. The emphasis herein is that speculators serve important market functions, but engaging in excessive speculation is regarded as being harmful to the proper functioning of futures markets. Speculation can be useful toward making returns on your fund. It is advisable to engage services of brokerage firms (as traders in financial market) since they are professionals in such market.





56
 
5.0 SUMMARY

In this study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning of Speculation;
•	Using Speculation in Investment;
•	Advantages of Speculation; and
•	Disadvantages of Speculation.

In the next study unit, you will be taken through investment in derivatives.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	Explain the process of using Speculation in Investment.

2.	Mention the advantages and disadvantages of Speculation

Answers to self-assessment exercises

1. Explain the term Speculation.

This involves investment in stocks, property, bonds, etc., in the hope of gain but with the potential risk of loss. Basically, speculation in finance also refers to the practice of engaging in risky financial transactions in an attempt to earn profit from short term fluctuations in the market value of a tradable financial instrument. This is rather different from attempting to earn profit from the underlying financial attributes embodied in the instrument such as capital gains, dividends, or interest.

2. Discuss the process of using speculation in investment.

Speculation can be useful toward making returns on your fund but it is advisable to engage services of brokerage firms (as traders in financial market) since they are professionals in such market. They serve as speculator for capital securities.

The speculator as a trader in financial market does not get involved in hedging, but only trades with the objective of achieving profits through the successful anticipation of price movements. The emphasis herein is that speculators serve important market functions, but engaging in excessive speculation is regarded as being harmful to the proper functioning of futures markets.

3. List the Advantages of Speculation

i)	Speculation can be used to mitigate risk in the underlying asset, by entering into a derivative contract whose value moves in the opposite direction to their underlying position and cancels part or all of it out.

ii)	It can be used to create option ability where the value of the derivative is linked to a specific condition or event, for instance, the underlying asset reaching a specific price level.




57
 

iii)	It can be used to access or gain exposure to the underlying asset where it is not possible to trade in the underlying.

iv)	It provides some leverage or gearing such that a small movement in the underlying asset value can cause a large difference in the value of the derivative.

v)	Speculation can be used to make a reasonable level of profit if the value of the underlying asset moves the way they expect; for instance, moves in a given direction, stays in or out of a specified range or reaches a certain level.

vi)	It can be used to switch asset allocations between different asset classes without disturbing the underlying assets, as part of transition management of investment.

vii)	It can be used to avoid paying taxes. This is because it is a derivative contract. Therefore, it can be used by an investor to receive steady payments such as being based, for instance, on London interbank offer rate (LIBOR) while avoiding paying capital gain tax and keeping the stock.

7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Elton, E. J. and Gruber, M. J. (1977). Risk Reduction and Portfolio Size: An Analytic Solution,
Journal of Business, 50: 415-37

Douglas, M. (1990). The Disciplined Trader, New York: New York Institute of Finance.


Jorion, P. (2009). Financial Risk Manager Handbook (5 ed.), New Jersey: John Wiley and Sons.

Kenneth G. Winans, K. G. (2015). 5 Big Mistakes Investors Make When They Diversify. Accessed on 14 January, 2017 from http://www.forbes.com/sites/janetnovack/ 2015/02/05/5-big-mistakes-investors-make-when-they-diversify/#2a69136f2f43

Kondor, P. (2009). Risk in Dynamic Arbitrage: Price Effects of Convergence Trading, Journal of
Finance, 64 (2): 638–658.

Lowenstein,	R.	(2000).	When	genius	failed:	The	rise	and	fall	of	Long-Term	Capital
Management, New York: Random House.

Mahdavi	Damghani,	B.	(2013)a.	The	Non-Misleading	Value	of	Inferred	Correlation:	An
Introduction to the Cointelation Model, Wilmott, 2013 (1): 50–61.

Mahdavi Damghani, B. (2013)b. De-arbitraging With a Weak Smile: Application to Skew Risk,
Wilmott, 2013 (1): 40–49.

Niederhoffer, V. (2005).  Practical Speculation, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2005.



58
 
Schwager, J. D. (2013). Trading with the Market Wizards: The Complete Market Wizards Series,

New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons 2013.

Siegel, J. (2003). What is an Asset Price Bubble? European Financial Management. 9(1): 11–24

Shleifer, A. and Vishny, R. (1997). The limits of arbitrage, Journal of Finance, 52: 35–55.

Stark, B. J. (1983). Special Situation Investing: Hedging, Arbitrage, and Liquidation, New York,
NY: Dow-Jones Publishers.

Sullivan, A. and Sheffrin, S. M. (2003). Economics: Principles in action, Upper Saddle River,
New Jersey 07458: Pearson Prentice Hall.

Teeter, P. and Sandberg, J. (2017).Cracking the enigma of asset bubbles with narratives,

Strategic Organization. 15 (1): 91–99.

Wohlner, R. (2013). Here's Why Diversification Matters, U.S. News & World Report. Accessed on 14 January, 2017 from http://money.usnews.com/money/blogs/the-smarter-mutual-fund-investor/2013/05/31/heres-why-diversification-matters

Xiong, W. (2001). Convergence trading with wealth effects, Journal of Financial Economics, 62: 247–292.



































59
 
UNIT 7: INVESTMENT IN DERIVATIVES


CONTENTS

1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Meaning of Derivatrives:
3.2	Characteristics of Derivatrives: and
3.3	Types of Derivative
3.3.1	Over-the-Counter (OTC) derivatives
3.3.2	Exchange-Traded Derivatives (ETD)

3.4	Common Variants of Derivatrive Contracts
3.5	Uses of Derivatrives
4.0	Conclusion

5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

In this study, you are being exposed to the discussion on derivative. This is still another way through which you can invest wisely in the financial market, particularly the capital market such as the use of derivative. This is a kind of hedging involving a contract of which its value depends on the performance of the capital market asset involved. The other forms derivatives include index and interest rate, often regarded as fundamental to the contract. Reasons for the use of derivatives include insuring against price movements, which is precisely hedging, increasing exposure to price movements for speculation, and getting access to otherwise complex capital market assets.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Explain derivatives

•	Mention the characteristics of derivatrives
•	List and explain the two types of derivatives
•	Identify and discuss the common variants of derivatrive contracts

•	List uses of derivatrives

3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 Meaning of Derivatrives

Conceptually, a derivative refers to a contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity. This underlying entity refers to financial basics such as asset, index, or

60
 

interest rate. This is often regarded as fundamental. There abound a number of purposes for which derivatives can be used. One purpose involves insuring against price movements, which is hedging. The other purpose involves increasing exposure to price movements for speculation. Furthermore, another purpose involves getting access to otherwise „hard-to-trade? assets or markets. There are common derivatives that include forwards, futures, options, and swaps. There are variations of derivatives that include synthetic collateralized debt obligations and credit default swaps (Crawford and Sen, 1996; Hull, 2006).

Most derivatives are transacted over-the-counter, that is, off-exchange or on a stock exchange, which is found in the Bombay Stock Exchange. Basically, most insurance contracts have developed into a separate industry. Derivatives constitute one of the three main categories of financial instruments, and the other two categories are stocks (such as equities or shares) and debt instruments such as bonds and mortgages (Crawford and Sen, 1996; Hull, 2006).

Derivatives can be used either for risk management, that is, to hedge on underlying asset by providing equalizing compensation in case of an undesired event. This serves as a kind of protection or for speculation, which involves making a financial stake. Hedging herein is a judicious aspect of operations and financial management for many companies across many industries. The protection offers managers and investors a risky opportunity to increase profit, which may not be properly disclosed to stakeholders.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Discuss the term Derivative.

3.2 Characteristics of Derivatrives

Derivatives involve contracts that subsist between two parties, which incorporate specific terms (Kiff, J., Elliott, J., Kazarian, E., Scarlata, J., Spackman, C., 2009; Simkovic, M., 2011) such as the following:

i)	Dates;
ii)	Maturing values;
iii)	Clarifications of the fundamental variables;
iv)	Parties' contractual obligations; and
v)	Notional amount under which payments are to be made between the parties.

The assets as derivatives include commodities, stocks, bonds, interest rates and currencies, but they can also be other types. Basically, the components of a firm's capital structure such as bonds and stock can also be considered derivatives, and they are examples of options, with the underlying being the firm's assets. Financial derivatives can also be regarded as cash flows that are discounted to present value. The market risk associated in the fundamental asset is attached to the financial derivative through contractual agreements, and therefore, the asset can be traded separately. However, the fundamental asset does not have to be acquired (Partnoy, F. and Skeel, Jr., D. A., 2007).

Derivatives therefore allow the breakup of ownership and participation in the market value of an asset. This also provides a considerable amount of freedom regarding the contract design. That contractual freedom provides for the modification of the participation in the performance of the


61
 

underlying asset almost arbitrarily. Thus, the participation in the market value of the fundamental asset, which can be effectively weaker, stronger (leverage effect), or implemented as inverse. This implies that specifically the market price risk of the fundamental asset can be controlled in almost every situation (Partnoy, F. and Skeel, Jr., D. A., 2007).

There are distinct groups of derivative contracts such as highlighted below:

a)	Privately traded over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives such as swaps that do not go through an exchange or other intermediary; and

b)	Exchange-traded derivatives (ETD) that are traded through specialized derivatives exchanges or other exchanges.

c)	Option products like interest rate swaps that provide the buyer the right, but not the obligation to enter the contract under the terms specified.

Derivatives are also broadly categorized in the following ways:

i)	By the relationship between the underlying asset and the derivative (such as forward, option, swap), which as lock products obligate the contractual parties to the terms over the life of the contract;

ii)	The type of underlying asset (such as equity derivatives, foreign exchange derivatives, interest rate derivatives, commodity derivatives, or credit derivatives);

iii)	The market in which they trade (such as exchange-traded or over-the-counter); and

iv)	Their pay-off profile.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
Identify the characteristics.

3.3Types of Derivative
Two broad types of derivative can be identified as mentioned and discussed below.

3.3.1 Over-the-Counter (OTC) derivatives

Over-the-Counter derivatives are contracts that are transacted and privately sold directly between two parties, without going through any stock exchange or any other intermediary as far as the transaction is concerned.

There are some products available in the financial markets that are subject to this type of dealing. Examples of these products include: swaps, forward rate agreements, exotic options as well as and other exotic derivatives. The over-the-counter derivative market seems to be the largest market for derivatives. This market is largely unregulated in relation to disclosure of information between the parties in the dealings. This is because the over-the-counter market comprises banks and other highly well-informed parties like the hedge funds. Information on volume of transactions on over-the-counter is also very difficult. This is due to the fact that transactions do occur in secrecy or private; such activity not being visible on any stock exchange.

3.3.2 Exchange-Traded Derivatives (ETD)

Exchange-traded derivatives refer to those derivatives as financial instruments that are transacted through specialized derivatives exchanges or other exchanges. The derivatives exchange is the


62
 

type of market in which individuals transact homogeneous contracts that have been defined by the exchange. The derivatives exchange acts as an intermediary to all related trades. The exchange takes initial margin from both parties to the trade by serving as a guarantee.

The largest derivatives exchanges in the world by volume of transactions include the following:
i)	Korea Exchange, listing KOSPI Index Futures & Options;
ii)	Eurex listing a wide range of European products such as interest rate and index products;

iii)	CME Group that comprises Chicago Mercantile Exchange, Chicago Board of Trade and New York Mercantile Exchange.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3

Differentiate between Over-the-Counter (OTC) derivatives and Exchange-Traded Derivatives (ETD).

3.4 Common Variants of Derivatrive Contracts

Some of the common variants of derivative (Stever, Upper and von Peter, 2007) contracts are as follows:

i) Forwards

This type of derivative is a personalized contract between two parties in which payment takes place at a specific date in the future at today's pre-determined price as agreed upon by both parties.






ii) Futures

These are derivatives in which the contracts to buy or sell a specified asset on a future date at a price specified today. Hence a futures contract differs from a forward contract in respect of the fact that the futures contract is a homogeneous contract that is normally written by a clearing house which operates an exchange where the deal can take place; purchased and disposed of. This implies that the forward contract is a non-standardized contract written by the parties themselves.

iii) Options

These are contracts that offer the owner the right, but not the obligation, to buy, in respect of a call option or sell in respect of a put option, a specified asset. The price at which the sale takes place is known as the strike price, and is specified at the time the parties enter into the option. The option contract also incorporates a maturity date.




63
 

There are variations in different climes. In respect of a European option, the owner has the right to require the sale to take place on (but not before) the maturity date. And in respect of the US option, the owner can require the sale to take place at any time up to the maturity date. In the event that the owner of the contract exercises this right, the counter-party has the obligation to carry out the transaction.

There are two types of options contract. (i) This is the call option in which the buyer has a right to buy a certain quantity of the underlying asset, at a specified price on or before a given date in the future, but he has no obligation to carry out this right. (ii) There is the put option contract in which the buyer of a put option has the right to sell a certain quantity of an underlying asset, at a specified price on or before a given date in the future, but he has no obligation to carry out this right.

iv) Binary options

These are derivatives in relation to options that are contracts which provide the owner the opportunity for an “all-or-nothing” profit from the contract.

v) Warrants

This is different from the frequently used short-dated options which have a maximum maturity period of one year. The warrants contracts also exist on the basis of long-dated options which are generally transacted over the counter.

vi) Swaps

Swap derivatives refer to contracts which involve the exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future date. This is based on the fundamental value of currencies exchange rates, bonds rates, interest rates, commodities exchange, stocks or other assets. This is also the swaption as frequently associated with swap. This is basically an option on the forward swap. Swaptions are like call and put options, and they are of different types such as receiver and payer. In respect of a receiver swaption, there is an option in which one can receive fixed and pay floating. And in respect of a payer swaption, one has the option to pay fixed and receive floating.

Swaps are basically in two categories such as identified and discussed below.

a)	Interest rate swap:- This mainly necessitates swapping only the interest inherent in the cash flows using the same currency between the two parties.

b)	Currency swap:- In respect of this kind of swapping, the cash flow between the two parties involved incorporates both principal and interest. And the principal amount (money) that is involved in swap is in different currency for both parties.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 4
Mention and explain common variants of Derivatrive Contracts



64
 
3.5 Uses of Derivatrives
Derivatives are used (Mengle, 2007) for the following transactional dimensions:

i)	Hedge or mitigate risk in the underlying asset, by entering into a derivative contract whose value moves in the opposite direction to their underlying position and cancels part or all of it out;

ii)	Create option ability where the value of the derivative is linked to a specific condition or event, for instance, the underlying asset reaching a specific price level;

iii)	Obtain exposure to the underlying asset where it is not possible to trade in the underlying, for instance, weather derivatives;

iv)	Provide leverage (or gearing), such that a small movement in the underlying asset value can cause a large difference in the value of the derivative;

v)	Speculate and make a profit if the value of the underlying asset moves the way they expect (e.g. moves in a given direction, stays in or out of a specified range, reaches a certain level);

vi)	Switch asset allocations between different asset classes without disturbing the underlying assets, as part of transition management; and

vii)	Avoid paying taxes. For example, an equity swap allows an investor to receive steady payments such as being based, for instance, on London interbank offer rate (LIBOR) while avoiding paying capital gains tax and keeping the stock.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 5
Mention various reasons for the use of derivatives.

4.0 Conclusion

Derivative is another way through which you can invest wisely in the capital market, is a kind of hedging that involves a contract in which its value depends on the performance of the capital market asset involved. Hence forms derivatives include asset, index and interest rate that are often regarded as fundamental to their contract. There are peculiar reasons for the use of derivatives by the investors or traders, who are purely speculators. Such reasons include: insuring against price movements, which is precisely hedging; increasing exposure to price movements for speculation; and getting access to otherwise complex capital market or assets. And uses of derivatives also include: mitigate risk in the underlying asset; create option ability where the value of the derivative is linked to a specific condition or event; obtain exposure to the underlying asset where it is not possible to trade in the fundamental; provide leverage (or gearing) on the value of the derivative asset; and speculate and make a profit if the value of the underlying asset moves the way as expected or predicted.





65
 
5.0 SUMMARY

In this study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning of Derivatrives;
•	Characteristics of Derivatrives;

•	Types of Derivative;
•	Common Variants of Derivatrive Contracts; and

•	Uses of Derivatrives.

In the next study unit, you will be taken through investment portfolio in properties and commodities.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	Discuss the term Derivative.
2.	Identify the characteristics.
3.	Mention various reasons for the use of derivatives.

Answers to Self-Assessment Exercises

1. Discuss the term Derivative.

A derivative refers to a contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity. This underlying entity refers to financial basics such as asset, index, or interest rate. This is often regarded as fundamental. There abound a number of purposes for which derivatives can be used. One purpose involves insuring against price movements, which is hedging. The other purpose involves increasing exposure to price movements for speculation. Furthermore, another purpose involves getting access to otherwise „hard-to-trade? assets or markets. There are common derivatives that include forwards, futures, options, and swaps. There are variations of derivatives that include synthetic collateralized debt obligations and credit default swaps

2. Identify the characteristics.
Derivatives have the following characteristics.

i)	Dates
ii)	Maturing values
iii)	Clarifications of the fundamental variables
iv)	Parties' contractual obligations
v)	Notional amount under which payments are to be made between the parties

3.	Differentiate between Over-the-Counter (OTC) derivatives and Exchange-Traded Derivatives (ETD).

Over-the-Counter derivatives are contracts that are transacted and privately sold directly between two parties, without going through any stock exchange or any other intermediary as far as the transaction is concerned.

On the other hand, Exchange-traded derivatives refer to those derivatives as financial instruments that are transacted through specialized derivatives exchanges or other exchanges.

66
 

The derivatives exchange is the type of market in which individuals transact homogeneous contracts that have been defined by the exchange. The derivatives exchange acts as an intermediary to all related trades. The exchange takes initial margin from both parties to the trade by serving as a guarantee.

4. Mention and explain common variants of Derivatrive Contracts

i) Forwards

This type of derivative is a personalized contract between two parties in which payment takes place at a specific date in the future at today's pre-determined price as agreed upon by both parties.

ii) Futures

These are derivatives in which the contract to buy or sell a specified asset on a future date at a price specified today. Hence a futures contract differs from a forward contract in respect of the fact that the futures contract is a homogeneous contract that is normally written by a clearing house which operates an exchange where the deal can take place.

iii) Options

These are contracts that offer the owner the right, but not the obligation, to buy, in respect of a call option or sell in respect of a put option, a specified asset. The price at which the sale takes place is known as the strike price, and is specified at the time the parties enter into the option. The option contract also incorporates a maturity date.

iv) Binary options

These are derivatives in relation to options that are contracts which provide the owner the opportunity for an “all-or-nothing” profit from the contract.

v) Warrants

This is different from the frequently used short-dated options which have a maximum maturity period of one year. The warrants contracts also exist on the basis of long-dated options which are generally transacted over the counter.

vi)Swaps

Swap derivatives refer to contracts which involve the exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future date. This is based on the fundamental value of currencies exchange rates, bonds rates, interest rates, commodities exchange, stocks or other assets.

5.	Mention various reasons for the use of derivatives.



67
 

i)	Hedge or mitigate risk in the underlying asset, by entering into a derivative contract whose value moves in the opposite direction to their underlying position and cancels part or all of it out.

ii)	Create option ability where the value of the derivative is linked to a specific condition or event, for instance, the underlying asset reaching a specific price level.

iii)	Obtain exposure to the underlying asset where it is not possible to trade in the underlying, for instance, weather derivatives.

iv)	Provide leverage (or gearing), such that a small movement in the underlying asset value can cause a large difference in the value of the derivative.

v)	Speculate and make a profit if the value of the underlying asset moves the way they expect (e.g. moves in a given direction, stays in or out of a specified range, reaches a certain level).

vi)	Switch asset allocations between different asset classes without disturbing the underlying assets, as part of transition management, and

vii)	Avoid paying taxes. For example, an equity swap allows an investor to receive steady payments such as being based, for instance, on London interbank offer rate (LIBOR) while avoiding paying capital gains tax and keeping the stock.


7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Crawford,  G.  and Sen,  B.  (1996).  Derivatives for  Decision Makers:  Strategic  Management

Issues, New York: John Wiley & Sons.

Hull, J. C. (2006). Options, Futures and Other Derivatives (6th ed.). New Jersey: Prentice Hall.

Kiff, J., Elliott, J., Kazarian, E., Scarlata, J., Spackman, C. (2009). Credit Derivatives: Systemic Risks and Policy Options, IMF Working Papers (WP/09/254).

Mengle, D. (2007). Credit Derivatives: An Overview, Economic Review (FRB Atlanta), 92(4):
123-153.

Partnoy, F. and Skeel, Jr., D. A. (2007). The Promise and Perils of Credit Derivatives, University of Cincinnati Law Review, 75: 1019–1051.

Simkovic, M. (2011). Leveraged Buyout Bankruptcies, the Problem of Hindsight Bias, and the Credit Default Swap Solution, Columbia Business Law Review, 2011(1): 118-201.

Stever, R, Upper, C. and von Peter, G. (2007). BIS Quarterly Review, Bank for International Settlements.











68
 
UNIT 8: INVESTMENT PORTFOLIO IN PROPERTIES AND COMMODITIES


CONTENTS

1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Investment in Properties
3.1.1	Sources of Information for Investment in Property
3.1.2	Sources of cash flows in Property Investment
3.1.3	Risk Management in Property Investment
3.1.4	Foreclosure in Property investment

3.2	Investment in Commodities
3.2.1	Commodity Investment Channels
3.2.2	Types of Commodities for Investment
3.2.3	Means of Investing in Commodities
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

In the preceding study unit of the course material, we have discussed investment in derivatives. In this study unit, the discussion is on Investment in property and commodities. The former involves investing funds in real estate such as buying a house, renovating it, and reselling necessarily at a price greater than the initial cost, which results in profit. The latter investing in commodities involves committing investment funds in agricultural produce (e.g., soybeans, grains), precious stones, energy, and livestock. The means of investing in commodities include futures, stocks, mutual funds and index funds, and Exchange traded funds and exchange traded notes.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Explain Investment in Properties
•	List and discuss sources of information for investment in property
•	Mention and explain sources of cash flows in property investment
•	Discuss risk management in property investment
•	Explain foreclosure in property investment
•	Discuss investment in commodities

•	Identify and explain commodity investment channels
•	Mention the types of commodities for investment
•	Discuss the means of investing in commodities


69
 
3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 INVESTMENT IN PROPERTIES

Investment in property involves investment which is aimed at diversifying your holdings beside stocks and bonds. For instance, investment in property can take the form of buying a house, renovating it, and reselling necessarily at a price greater than the initial cost, which results in profit. An investor can also acquires a building, renovates the structure, and then rents the apartments in it out to prospective occupiers. This arrangement brings in revenue on monthly, quarterly, half yearly or yearly or the basis of the laid down agreement between the lessor and the leasee. Such building or structure so acquired by the investor can as well be redeveloped into office spaces of different sizes for the purpose of renting them for generating periodic incomes to the investor. Renting of apartments to occupiers either for office accommodation or residential accommodation generates a steady periodic income just like a classic dividend-paying utility stock. Any price appreciation of the property becomes a bonus.

Basically, real estate refers to a form of asset that has some relative limited liquidity when compared to other forms of investment. Investment in real estate involves investment in property. Hence this form of investment involves acquisition on ownership basis for purpose of rental or sale at a price higher than the original cost. In related terms, real estate development involves taking appropriate steps to create some improvement on realty property, which forms an aspect of real estate investment strategy.

In the absence of mortgage financing, real estate investment can be capital intensive. Furthermore, this type of investment is said to be highly dependent on cash flow, that is, calls for streams of cash investment being sunk either for fresh development of structures (buildings) or for restructuring the existing ones for commercial use.

Real estate investment can be risky in nature, as a form of investment. One factor that can make real estate investment to result in failure is the absence of due diligence by the investors before plunging into such investment. However, it should be understood that the initial cash inflows are meant to take care of capital outlay and the preliminary expenses. Therefore, such initial cash inflows do not constitute profits for the investors. Furthermore, there is the issue of “flipping” practice whereby short term profit is desired by the speculators investors in real estate investment without required efforts. This is related to the former factor in some way because investors tend to overlook the fact that every investment has gestation period before profit generation. Profits in investment generally come after using the initial cash inflows to write off the preliminary expenses.

At the instance of locating a desired property for investment, an investor carries out the necessary preliminary investigation and verification of the condition and status of the property; called due diligence. The next step is for the investor to engage in negotiation regarding the price of the property and sale terms, with the owner or the agent. Once an agreement is reached, a contract of sale is then executed.




70
 

Some investors engage the services of real estate agents and real estate lawyers in using their professional status to facilitate the acquisition of the property. In most cases, some property investors prefer the services of lawyers instead of estate agents who could collude with phoney (unauthentic) owners of landed properties to dupe.

In the process of the transactions on real estate, the prospective investor will propose a formal offer to acquire the property and payment of "earnest money" to the seller. This is done at the commencement of negotiation so that to ensure a reserve of the investor's rights to complete the transaction if eventually the price and terms of sale are satisfactorily negotiated. Such initial deposit or payment, in some instances, may or may not be refundable, and it is regarded as a sign of the seriousness of the investor's intent to purchase.

In addition to the initial deposit, there are other terms regarding the offer which usually include some contingencies that give the investor the opportunity and time to carry out the due diligence, inspect the property, and obtain financing, among other requirements before the final purchase. In the interim regarding the contingency period, the investor usually possess the right to void the offer without penalty, and thereby get refund of the initial deposits (earnest money). In case, the period of contingencies elapses, rejecting the offer to purchase usually involves forfeiture of the initial deposits (earnest money). It can also calls for the payment of other penalties.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Describe real estate investment.

3.1.1 Sources of Information for Investment in Property

In many economies, the real estate markets are well structured as comparable to organized markets such as financial markets. This is because the real estate market has many instruments as products. This implies that individual properties are distinctive and cannot be interchanged directly. In essence, this singular factor constitutes an obvious challenge for investors who are prospecting to appraise prices of properties and implied investment opportunities.

Therefore, getting desirable properties in which to commit funds for the investment poses some daunting work and competition among investors in respect of acquisition of individual properties, which may be highly inconsistent because of information asymmetries in the real estate markets.

Such scenario in the real estate market tends to magnify transactional risk. Paradoxically, this also serves as avenue of opportunities for investors towards acquiring properties at good deal prices. Nevertheless, a variety of evaluation techniques are available with which to determine the value of properties before committing funds into it.

The most visible channels through which information on investment in properties can be obtained include the following:






71
 
(i) Market listings

This involves Listing Service, Commercial Information Exchange or publications in the media.

(ii) Property Magazines

In Nigeria, there are some publications that are specifically devoted to property information in the country?s markets.

(iii) Estate Agency Services

The agency services are being provided by the Real estate agents and Real estate brokers. Some legal firms in Nigeria are also involved in providing estate agency services. All these charge appropriate commissions for their services.

(iv) Mortgage Banks and other Banks

Mortgage banks are specifically created to provide information and also facilitate investment in real estate.

(v) Public Auction

This involves announcements by the auctioneers regarding the sale of landed properties or estates in some choice locations in a specific country or other countries around the world.

(vi) Public Information on Private sales

The real estate agents can put up information on the sale of real estate for the owners. The owners of such properties can engage in such sale of their properties without the involvement of estate agents.

(vii) Real estate Speculators

These are regarded as intermediaries who profit from transactions on landed properties without taking possession of such properties. This is the practice of flipping in real estate business or market.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2

Mention and explain the various sources through which information on investment in properties can be obtained.








72
 
3.1.2 Sources of cash flows in Property Investment

An investment in property is capable of generating some revenue in form of cash inflows to the investor. Such sources of cash inflows are in four different ways such as highlighted and explained below.

1. Net operating income

This refers to the summation of all positive cash inflows from rents and other sources of ordinary income generated by a property, then minus the amount of ongoing expenses such as maintenance, utilities, fees, taxes, and other operating costs. The cost of servicing of debt, if acquired through mortgage is normally considered in this respect. On the bsis of this, a capitalization rate can be calculated as the ratio of net operating income to the purchase price of the asset; expressed as a percentage. This capitalization rate is a common measure of the performance of an investment property.

2. Tax shelter offsets

These occur in some three ways such as depreciation, which may sometimes be accelerated, tax credits, and carryover losses which tend to reduce tax liability charged against income from other sources for a period of about three decades. It is instructive to not that some tax shelter benefits can be transferable; it all depends on the laws governing tax liability in a particular economy in which the property is located.

3. Equity build-up

This refers to the increase in the investor's equity ratio as the portion of debt service payments devoted to principal accrue over time. Equity build-up counts as a positive cash flow from the asset where the debt service payment is made out of income from the property, rather than from independent income sources.

4. Capital appreciation

This refers to the rise in the prevailing price (market value) of the property over a period of time, being realized as a cash inflow whenever the property is sold. Capital appreciation can be very unpredictable unless it is part of a development and improvement strategy.

Speculation involves purchasing of a property for which the majority of the projected cash flows are expected from capital appreciation; indicative of rise in prices, rather than other sources is considered and not investment.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3

List and discuss the various sources of cash flows in Property Investment.




73
 
3.1.3 Risk Management in Property Investment

The real estate investment calls for a strategy in terms of management and evaluation of risk involved in the business.

Risks in this form of investment can occur in many different ways regarding every stage of the investment process. Some risks are identified below with strategies for mitigating them in real estate investment.

Figure 1: Risks in Property Investment and strategies for mitigating them


Form of Risk	Strategy for Mitigation				
i. Fraudulent sale		Verification of ownership and taking insurance policy on purchase
		title.					
ii. Adverse possession		Acquire  a  boundary  survey  from  a  licensed  surveyor  or  from
		relevant government department.			
iii. Environmental		Obtain  environmental	survey,	test  for  contaminants  such	as
contamination		lead paint, asbestos, soil contaminants, among others.	
iv. Building system		Ensure full inspection before making the purchase and	
failure		making regular maintenance.			
v. Overpayment in		Use third party judgment and perform discounted flow in purchase
price	analysis; not relying on current market appreciation.		
vi) Economic downturn	Acquire  properties  with  distinct  features  to  stand  out  from
		competition; control cost structure; make tenants sign long term
		leases.					
vii) Destruction of		Screen potential tenants and use experienced estate managers.	
property by tenants						
viii) Market decline		Acquire	properties	based	conservative	approach	on
		understanding that the market might decline and rental income
		may also decrease.				
ix) General wear and tear	Constant  maintenance  using  professionals;  plumbers,  builders,
		electricians, carpenters, etc.			
x) Fire, flood, personal	Take insurance policy on the property for these risks.	

Injury


Source: Wikipedia (2017). Accessed on 10 September, 2017 from


74
 
3.1.4 Foreclosure in Property investment

A property in the possession of buyer can become a foreclosure if he or she (the home owner) fails to make a mortgage payment for at least three months (90 days). Some investors and companies do engage in transactions in respect of purchasing properties that are in foreclosure.

Such properties can be acquired prior to the foreclosure auction (pre-foreclosure) or at the venue of foreclosure auction, normally carried out in the eyes of the public. In case the property is acquired during the process of the foreclosure auction, the property ownership of will be returned back to the lender that originally owns the mortgage on the property.

However, at the instance of the property being sold at the foreclosure auction and the foreclosure process is sealed, the lender may keep the proceeds to satisfy their mortgage and any legal costs that they incurred. The bank that is involved in the foreclosure is under obligation to continue to respect the tenancy agreement if there is a tenant in the property. However, usually as a rule, the bank would desire the property be vacant so as to sell it more easily. This implies that foreclosed property, also known as distressed assets, are regarded as worthwhile investments. This arises from the fact that the bank or mortgage company involved would not be like to sell the property for more than is pledged against it.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 4

Discuss the term Foreclosure in Property Investment.

3.2 Investment in Commodities

Commodities constitute an important channel through which to diversify a portfolio in investment beyond traditional securities such as shares, bonds, debentures, etc. Such investment can be either for the long term, or as a place to invest cash during unusually volatile or bearish stock markets. In most cases, trading in commodities traditionally moves in opposition to stocks.

Gold as a precious metal in the commodity market drives most dealings because of its attractive for reasons such as being reliable, dependable metal with conveyable value. In sharp contrast to securities such as stock and bonds. Hence, investors who try to avoid volatile or bearish stock markets typically find metals attractive which encourages them in terms of scrambling to transfer their funds to precious metals such as gold, which has historically been viewed as a hedge against high inflation and currency devaluation (Credio, 2017).

Energy commodities are also attractive in commodities markets. Global economic developments and reduced oil outputs from wells around the world can lead to upward surges in oil prices, as investors weigh and assess limited oil supplies with ever-increasing energy demands. Economic downturns, production changes by the Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) and emerging technological advances (such as wind, solar and biofuel) that aim to supplant (or complement) crude oil as an energy purveyor should also be considered.




75
 

Grains and other agricultural products have a very active trading market. They can be extremely volatile during summer months or periods of weather transitions. Population growth, combined with limited agricultural supply, can provide opportunities to ride agricultural price increases.

3.2.1 Commodity Investment Channels

Basically, some commodities exchanges (Credio, 2017) have either merged or gone out of business but still there are some multitudes of commodities exchanges around the world. While most of them trade in a few different commodities, some other ones specialize in single group of commodities. The London Metal Exchange only deals in metal commodities, going by its name.

There are some commodities in the U.S but the most popular exchanges include those being managed by CME Group. This emanated from the merger of Chicago Mercantile Exchange and Chicago Board of Trade in 2006. Amongst these exchanges are the New York Mercantile Exchange and Intercontinental Exchange in Atlanta and the Kansas City Board of Trade.

(i)	Abuja Securities and Commodities Exchange
(ii)	Africa Mercantile Exchange
(iii)	Bhatinda Om & Oil Exchange Bathinda
(iv)	Brazilian Mercantile and Futures Exchange
(v)	Chicago Board of Trade
(vi)	Chicago Mercantile Exchange
(vii)	Commodity Exchange Bratislava, JSC
(viii)	Dalian Commodity Exchange
(ix)	Dubai Mercantile Exchange
(x)	Dubai Gold & Commodities Exchange
(xi)	Euronext.liffe
(xii)	Ethiopia Commodity Exchange
(xiii)	Hong Kong Mercantile Exchange
(xiv)	Indian Commodity Exchange
(xv)	Intercontinental Exchange
(xvi)	Iranian Oil Bourse
(xvii)	Kansas City Board of Trade
(xviii)	London Metal Exchange
(xix)	Minneapolis Grain Exchange
(xx)	Multi Commodity Exchange
(xxi)	National Commodity and Derivatives Exchange
(xxii)	National Multi-Commodity Exchange of India Ltd
(xxiii)	National Food Exchange

(xxiv)	National Spot Exchange
(xxv)	New York Mercantile Exchange
(xxvi)	New York Board of Trade
(xxvii)	Rosario Board of Trade
(xxviii)	Tokyo Commodity Exchange
(xxix)	Winnipeg Commodity Exchange



76
 

Commodity trading in the exchanges normally requires predetermined standards towards smooth execution of trades devoid of physical inspection. Hence it the responsibility of all parties to keep to the established norms regarding the terms and conditions that commodities must meet and proper for dealings in such exchanges. This is to avoid bad reputation for the Exchanges and traders themselves. Such established norms include quality, grades, colour, time of delivery, and at times, the country of origin for the commodities, among others.

The basic economic rules also apply in the dealings of commodities such as the interplays of demand and supply, which drive the commodities markets. Hence, when the quantity supplied is low, the demand will be driven upwards, which results in higher prices, and vice versa. Basically, any disruptions in supply of the commodities (e.g., widespread health scare among cattle) might lead to instability generally in markets thus leading to shocks and demand becomes unpredictable for livestock. Similarly, any global economic development and technological advances often impact on prices of the commodities. Fundamentally, therefore, the emergence of economies such as China and India in terms of their significant manufacturing feat has resulted in the declining availability of industrial metals like steel, for the other economies around the world (Credio, 2017).

3.2.2 Types of Commodities for Investment

According to Investopedia (2017), types of commodities that are for dealing in commodities markets include the following categories:

1)	Metals:- these include gold, silver. platinum, diamond, and copper;

2)	Energy:- these include crude oil, heating oil, natural gas and gasoline;

3)	Livestock and Meat:- these include lean hogs, pork bellies, live cattle and feeder cattle; and

4)	Agricultural:- these include corn, soybeans, wheat, rice, cocoa, coffee, cotton and sugar.

3.2.3 Means of Investing in Commodities

1. Futures

Invest in commodities in this wise involves future contract, which is an agreement to buy or sell, in the future, a specific quantity of a commodity at a specific price. Futures are available on every category of commodity. There are two types of investors participating in the futures markets such as: commercial or institutional users of the commodities; and speculators

Commercial or institutional users of the commodities are manufacturers and service providers using futures as part of their budgeting process, to normalize expenses and reduce cash flow-related headaches. They are hedgers using the commodity markets to take a position that will reduce the risk of financial loss due to a change in price. For instance, the airline sector as a large industry secures massive quantity of aviation fuel at stable prices for planning purposes. This makes airline companies to engage in hedging through futures contracts, as they purchase fuel at


77
 

fixed rates (for a period of time) to avoid the market volatility of crude and gasoline. Another example is the farming cooperatives which also utilize futures.

Speculators are mainly individuals who speculate in the hope of profiting from changes in the price of the futures contract. Speculators are fond of typically concluding their stake before the contract is due and never take actual delivery of the commodity, for example, on grain and oil, among others.

2. Stocks

Another way of investing in commodities involves using stocks of companies in industries related to a commodity in some way such as oil which could be directed at drillers, refiners, tanker companies or diversified oil companies. Investors who have been discouraged by the gold bug could purchase stocks in mining companies, smelters or refiners, and any firm that deals with bullion generally.

Equity stocks are regarded as being less prone to volatile price swings when compared with futures. Acquisition of stocks can be easy, which can be held, traded and tracked, while it is possible to stake in a particular sector. It is instructive to note that investors need to carry out research towards ensuring that a particular firm is a good investment as well as a good commodity play.

Stock options requiring only smaller investment compare to buying stocks directly, constitute good invest in commodities. This is because risk is limited to the cost of the option, and the price movement will not usually directly reflect the underlying stock.

3. Mutual Funds and Index Funds

Mutual funds can invest in stocks of companies involved in commodity-related industries, such as energy, agriculture or mining. And just like the stocks they invest in, the fund shares may be affected by factors other than commodity prices, including stock market fluctuations and company-specific risks. A small number of commodity index mutual funds invest in futures contracts and commodity-linked derivative investments, thus providing more direct exposure to commodity prices.

4. Exchange Traded Funds and Exchange Traded Notes

Exchange traded funds (ETFs) and exchange traded notes (ETNs) trade like stocks, and they afford investors to participate in commodity price fluctuations without investing directly in futures contracts. Commodity exchange traded funds usually track the price of a particular commodity or group of commodities that constitute an index by using futures contracts. Exchange traded funds are unsecured debt which are designed to imitate the price fluctuation of a particular commodity or commodity index, and are backed by the issuer. A special brokerage account is not required to invest in any of these investment vehicles.




78
 
SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 5
Mention and explain means of investing in commodities


4.0 CONCLUSION

There are some other ways through investment can be made. These are in the areas of properties and commodities. Investment in property involves investing funds that is aimed at diversifying your investment holdings, which can take the form of real estate investment such as buying a house, renovating it, and reselling necessarily at a price greater than the initial cost, which results in profit. There are many commodity exchanges around the world through which you can investment in commodities of which the Abuja Commodity Exchange is one of them. On the other hand, investing in commodities is in area of committing investment funds in agricultural produce (e.g., soybeans, grains), precious stones, energy, and livestock. The means of investing in commodities include futures, stocks, mutual funds and index funds, and Exchange traded funds (ETFs) and exchange traded notes (ETNs). In these types of investments, expert advice is strong advised to be considered so as to avoid making your funds go down the drain with recovery.


5.0 SUMMARY

In this initial study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Investment in Properties
•	Sources of Information for Investment in Property
•	Sources of cash flows in Property Investment

•	Risk Management in Property Investment
•	Foreclosure in Property investment
•	Investment in Commodities
•	Commodity Investment Channels
•	Types of Commodities for Investment
•	Means of Investing in Commodities

In the next study unit, we shall discuss using leveraging on debts and venture capital in creating wealth .




6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT

1.	Mention and explain the various sources through which information on investment in properties can be obtained.

2.	List and discuss the various sources of cash flows in Property Investment.

3.	Mention and explain means of investing in commodities

79
 
Answers to Self Assessment Exercises

1. Describe real estate investment.

Real estate refers to a form of asset that has some relative limited liquidity when compared to other forms of investment. Investment in real estate involves investment in property. Hence this form of investment involves acquisition on ownership basis for purpose of rental or sale at a price higher than the original cost.

In related terms, real estate development involves taking appropriate steps to create some improvement on realty property, which forms an aspect of real estate investment strategy. Furthermore, this type of investment is said to be highly dependent on cash flow, that is, calls for streams of cash investment being sunk either for fresh development of structures (buildings) or for restructuring the existing ones for commercial use.

2.	Mention and explain the various sources through which information on investment in properties can be obtained.

The most visible channels through which information on investment in properties can be obtained include the following:

(i) Market listings
This involves Listing Service, Commercial Information Exchange or publications in the media.

(ii) Property Magazines

In Nigeria, there are some publications that are specifically devoted to property information in the country?s markets.

(iii) Estate Agency Services

The agency services are being provided by the Real estate agents and Real estate brokers. Some legal firms in Nigeria are also involved in providing estate agency services. All these charge appropriate commissions for their services.

(iv) Mortgage Banks and other Banks

Mortgage banks are specifically created to provide information and also facilitate investment in real estate.

(v) Public Auction

This involves announcements by the auctioneers regarding the sale of landed properties or estates in some choice locations in a specific country or other countries around the world.

(vi) Public Information on Private sales

The real estate agents can put up information on the sale of real estate for the owners. The owners of such properties can engage in such sale of their properties without the involvement of estate agents.



80
 
(vii) Real estate Speculators

These are regarded as intermediaries who profit from transactions on landed properties without taking possession of such properties. This is the practice of flipping in real estate business or market.

3. List and discuss the various sources of cash flows in Property Investment.

An investment in property is capable of generating some revenue in form of cash inflows to the investor. Such sources of cash inflows are in four different ways such as highlighted and explained below.

i. Net operating income

This refers to the summation of all positive cash inflows from rents and other sources of ordinary income generated by a property, then minus the amount of ongoing expenses such as maintenance, utilities, fees, taxes, and other operating costs. The cost of servicing of debt, if acquired through mortgage is normally considered in this respect. On the bsis of this, a capitalization rate can be calculated as the ratio of net operating income to the purchase price of the asset; expressed as a percentage. This capitalization rate is a common measure of the performance of an investment property.

ii. Tax shelter offsets

These occur in some three ways such as depreciation, which may sometimes be accelerated, tax credits, and carryover losses which tend to reduce tax liability charged against income from other sources for a period of about three decades. It is instructive to

not that some tax shelter benefits can be transferable; it all depends on the laws governing tax liability in a particular economy in which the property is located.

iii. Equity build-up

This refers to the increase in the investor's equity ratio as the portion of debt service payments devoted to principal accrue over time. Equity build-up counts as a positive cash flow from the asset where the debt service payment is made out of income from the property, rather than from independent income sources.

iv. Capital appreciation

This refers to the rise in the prevailing price (market value) of the property over a period of time, being realized as a cash inflow whenever the property is sold. Capital appreciation can be very unpredictable unless it is part of a development and improvement strategy. Speculation involves purchasing of a property for which the majority of the projected cash flows are expected from capital appreciation; indicative of rise in prices, rather than other sources is considered and not investment.

4. Discuss the term Foreclosure in Property Investment.

A property in the possession of buyer can become a foreclosure if he or she (the home owner) fails to make a mortgage payment for at least three months (90 days). Some investors and companies do engage in transactions in respect of purchasing properties that are in foreclosure.


81
 

Such properties can be acquired prior to the foreclosure auction (pre-foreclosure) or at the venue of foreclosure auction, normally carried out in the eyes of the public. In case the property is acquired during the process of the foreclosure auction, the property ownership of will be returned back to the lender that originally owns the mortgage on the property. However, at the instance of the property being sold at the foreclosure auction and the foreclosure process is sealed, the lender may keep the proceeds to satisfy their mortgage and any legal costs that they incurred.

5. Mention and explain means of investing in commodities

i. Futures

Invest in commodities in this wise involves future contract, which is an agreement to buy or sell, in the future, a specific quantity of a commodity at a specific price. Futures are available on every category of commodity. There are two types of investors participating in the futures markets such as: commercial or institutional users of the commodities; and speculators

ii. Stocks

Another way of investing in commodities involves using stocks of companies in industries related to a commodity in some way such as oil which could be directed at drillers, refiners, tanker companies or diversified oil companies. Investors who have been discouraged by the gold bug could purchase stocks in mining companies, smelters or refiners, and any firm that deals with bullion generally. Equity stocks are regarded as being less prone to volatile price swings when compared with futures. Acquisition of stocks can be easy, which can be held, traded and tracked, while it is possible to stake in a particular sector. It is instructive to note that investors need to carry out research towards ensuring that a particular firm is a good investment as well as a good commodity play.

iii. Mutual Funds and Index Funds

Mutual funds can invest in stocks of companies involved in commodity-related industries, such as energy, agriculture or mining. And just like the stocks they invest in, the fund shares may be affected by factors other than commodity prices, including stock market fluctuations and company-specific risks. A small number of commodity index mutual funds invest in futures contracts and commodity-linked derivative investments, thus providing more direct exposure to commodity prices.

iv. Exchange Traded Funds and Exchange Traded Notes

Exchange traded funds (ETFs) and exchange traded notes (ETNs) trade like stocks, and they afford investors to participate in commodity price fluctuations without investing directly in futures contracts. Commodity exchange traded funds usually track the price of a particular commodity or group of commodities that constitute an index by using futures contracts. Exchange traded funds are unsecured debt which are designed to imitate the price fluctuation of a particular commodity or commodity index, and are backed by the issuer. A special brokerage account is not required to invest in any of these investment vehicles.







82
 
7.0 REFERENCES AND FURTHER READING

Bytom Lauricella (2009, November 2). Gold Mutual Funds Vs. Gold ETFs: It Depends on the Goal. Wall Street Journal, US.

Credio, G. (2017). Commodities Trading: An Overview, Investopedia. Accessed on 10 January,

2017 from http://www.investopedia.com/investing/commodities-trading-overview/#ixzz4fXERoO2Y


Garner, C. (2010). A Trader's First Book on Commodities, New Jersey: Financial Times Press.

Investopedia (2017). Commodities Trading: An Overview. Accessed on 10 January, 2017 from http://www.investopedia.com/investing/commodities-trading-overview/#ixzz4fXERoO2Y

O'Sullivan, A. and Sheffrin, S. M. (2003). Economics: Principles in Action, Upper Saddle River,
NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall.


Sackheim, M., Schmidtberger, M. and Munsell, J. (2006). DB Commodity Index Tracking Fund:
An Innovative Exchange-Traded Fund, Futures Industry, May/June 2006.

Stringham, E. (2003). The Extralegal Development of Securities Trading in Seventeenth Century

Amsterdam, Quarterly Review of Economics and Finance, 43(2): 321 342.






























83
 
UNIT 9: LEVERAGING ON DEBTS & VENTURE CAPITAL IN CREATING WEALTH




CONTENT

1.0 Introduction

2.0 Objectives
3.0 Main Text

3.1 Equity Capital and Debt Capital
3.1.1 Sources of Debt Capital

3.2 Venture Capital
3.2.1 Advantages of Venture Capital Financing

3.2.2 Nature of Funding from Venture Capitals
3.2.3 Financing Stages of Venture Capital
4.0 Conclusion

5.0 Summary
6.0 Tutor Marked Assignment

7.0 References/Further Reading

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Investment in business implies the use of capital, which is the funding for the operations of the venture. The capital structure is made up of two parts. The first one is the owners? capital or owners? equity and the second one is the debts capital. Debts refer to funds which have to be secured from outside sources such as commercial banks, microfinance banks, private lenders, and cooperative societies, among others. In this study unit, therefore, the discussion is on using debts, other people?s money, and venture capital to create wealth through investment.




2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Differentiate between equity capital and debt capital
•	List and explain sources of debt capital
•	Explain venture capital
•	Mention advantages of venture capital
•	Discuss the nature of funding from venture capitalists

•	List and explain financing stages of venture capital





84
 
3.0 MAIN TEXT

3.1 EQUITY CAPITAL AND DEBT CAPITAL

Equity capital refers to the owners? contribution to the capital funding of the business. Such contribution is normally in form of shareholding called ordinary shares. The ordinary share is a unit of capital ownership in a firm in terms of equity investment by the shareholders. The ordinary shares do attract returns at the end of the trading period (normally 12 months). It accords its holders right of ownership in the asset of the firm. The ordinary shareholder can vote in the annual general meeting of the firm. Currently in a public company no single individual is allowed to own more than ten percent of the total issued shares of the firm. The ordinary share is assets (a financial asset) that are traded at will. Normally dividends can be paid as return to holders of ordinary shares.

Debt capital refers to the amount of funds in the structure of the capital that is borrowed from outside sources of financing. This capital is entitled to periodic interest payment, and principal repayments of the original amount borrowed, from the operations of the business Examples include term loans from commercial banks. Some other debts only attract periodic payment of interest rates while the whole amount of principal is repaid after the maturity date of the debts. Examples are debentures and bonds. There exist also the preference shares. The implication of debt capital is that lenders have a legal right to interest on a loan and repayment of the capital irrespective of the success or failure of a business.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Differentiate between equity capital and debt capital.


3.1.1 SOURCES OF DEBT CAPITAL

1. Preference Shares

The preference shares are debt instruments in a firm. The holders of preference share are not owners of the firm since they cannot vote in the AGM of their firm. Preference share attract fixed dividend or interest. For example, a ten percent preference share of N150,000 will attract a finance interest of N15,000. However, the preference share is also regarded as shares in firm depending on the nature of the preference share. There are several forms of preference shares. There is the cumulative preference share, participating preference share convertible preference share, redeemable preference shares etc.

2. Debentures

These are long term debt securities normally offered for public subscription. They generally attract a fixed rate of return called interest. Most times Debentures are securities in a particular asset of the firm in such case tagged secured debenture. An unsecured debenture is one not secured on any particular asset of the firm. Debentures are mostly sold either at premium or at discount.




85
 
3. Bonds

Bonds are sometimes issued with stock warrants attached. Warrants are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date. Should the bondholder decide to exercise the option and purchase stock, it is not necessary to surrender the underlying bond. Again, bondholders will exercise their warrants only if the market value of the stock exceeds the specified (exercise) price of the warrant. Bonds are an important source of capital for the federal government, states and municipalities, and private corporations. However, private-sector equity financing in the form of common stock has historically been a more important source of financing.

4. Mortgages

Mortgages are long-term loans that are secured by real property. They are long-term liabilities collateralized by real property. Commonly, monthly payments are made that fully repay both principal and interest over the term of the loan. Mortgages are issued to purchase real estate. Commercial mortgages are used to finance real estate for business purposes, such as office buildings and shopping malls. These mortgages have consistently grown faster than multifamily-dwelling mortgages and even faster than home mortgages.

5. Bank Term Loan

This refers to the loan facility being granted by commercial banks, which is meant to be used in the operations of the business for a period of time in years. Such loan is normally repaid on periodic basis; on reducing balance basis until the remaining amount is paid at the end of the repayment period. The loan facility also attracts payment of interest on periodic basis, say, every three months, six months, depending on the term of agreement between the bank and the business.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
List and explain the available sources for raising debt capital.

3.2 VENTURE CAPITAL

New ventures normally generate initial capital called seed capital through personal savings and loans from relations, friends, and cooperative societies. Furthermore, such business setups do also seek funds from angel investors and accelerators. Once the business survives the initial teething problems and grows, it can then seek additional funding from venture capital firms.

Venture capital (VC) is a form of private equity that involves financing being provided by firms which engages in such form of funding businesses. Such funds are normally provided for firms that are deemed to have high growth potential, and actually demonstrate to have high growth in respect of number of employees and annual revenue, or even both indices. The firms that engage in venture capital funding invest in early-stage businesses with the sole intention of taking up part of the equity (an ownership stake) in such companies for their investment.

The venture capitalists assume some risk of financing the risky start-ups with the hopes such firms in which they invest their funds will become successful. More often than not, the venture



86
 

capitalists prefer firms in innovative technology or business model, usually in high technology industries; information technology (IT), clean technology or biotechnology.

Venture capitalists will provide financing in the interest of generating some return through a subsequent exit such as the company selling shares to the public in an initial public offering (IPO) or going into merger and acquisition, which is called a "trade sale" of the company.

The venture capital firms usually secure significant control over the company decisions for their investment because of the high risk that they assume by investing in smaller and early-stage companies. This is besides the significant portion of the companies' ownership and the value. In some companies that are considered to be highly valued startups, venture capitalists contribute more than financing for these early-stage firms. In addition, VCs also often provide strategic advice to the firm's executives on its business model and marketing strategies.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
Explain the term Venture Capital.

3.2.1 Advantages of Venture capital financing

1.	Venture capital fund enhances the growth of new business startups for the fund provided that is purely private equity in nature.

2.	Venture capital funding does not constitute any regular financial obligations for the firm because it is not a debt financing.

3.	The venture capital framework can also be used by both private and public sectors in establishing an institution that can systematically create business networks for the new firms and industries.

4.	The institutional setup can aid in identify promising new firms and thereby offer them with needed funding.

5.	The venture capital firms usually provide technical expertise, mentoring, marketing expertise, and business models.

6.	The venture capital scheme ensures successful operations of the companies in which the capitalists invest their funds.

7.	Venture capital schemes can turn into channels for networks in designing and building products in their domain.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 4
Mention the advantages of venture capital financing.






87
 
3.2.2 Nature of Funding from Venture Capitals

Obtaining venture capital is very much different from raising debt or a loan. Venture capital constitutes an invested in exchange for an equity stake in the business. The return of the venture capitalist as a shareholder depends on the growth and profitability of the business. In general terms, this return can be earned when the venture capitalist sells off its shareholdings in the process of the initial public offer; sale of shares to other investors through the capital market.

There is the issue of being very selective by venture capitalists, when investing in firms because they normally look for the sought-after qualities such as innovative technology, potential for rapid growth, and a well-developed business model as well as an impressive management team. Furthermore, venture capitalists are most interested in ventures with exceptionally high growth potential. They consider such companies as the only opportunities that are mostly capable of providing financial returns and a successful exit within their own required time frame ranging within a period of less a decade.

In order to ensure wise investment, venture capitalists take some other step before providing for funds for illiquid investment. Since they would not want to extend their time frame to gain the required harvest of returns, venture capitalists usually carry out detailed investigation (due diligence) prior to their investment.

The venture capitalists also nurture the companies in which they invest in order to increase the likelihood of reaching an initial public offer stage when market valuations are favourable to them. Basically, the venture capitalists provide assistance at four stages in company's development such as idea generation, startups, ramp up, and exit.

The fact that there are no public exchanges for the listing the securities of venture capitalists, private companies normally meet venture capital firms and other private equity investors in several ways. Such ways include the followings:

i)	Warm referrals from the investors' trusted sources and other business contacts;
ii)	Investor conferences and symposia;
iii)	Summits where companies pitch directly to investor groups in face-to-face meetings;

iv)	“Speed Venturing” that is likened to speed-dating for capital where the investor decides within some minutes whether he wants a follow-up meeting.

v)	Some new private online networks have emerged in provide additional opportunities for meeting investors.

The quest for high returns by the venture capitalists makes venture funding somehow expensive source of capital for companies. It is therefore, most ideal for businesses that have large up-front capital requirements, which cannot be funded through other sources of finance. This is particularly applicable to companies that are associated with intangible assets such as software and other intellectual property businesses; their value is always unverified. Hence, this accounts for the reason why venture capital is mostly found in the fast-growing businesses such as technology and life sciences (biotechnology) areas.



88
 

The venture capitalists are normally interested in companies having the qualities which they desire seek. And such qualities include the following:

i)	a solid business plan;
ii)	a good management team;
iii)	investment and passion from the founders;
iv)	a good potential to exit the investment before the end of their funding cycle; and
v)	a minimum returns in excess of forty percent annually.

3.2.3 Financing stages of Venture Capital

Basically, six stages are involved in venture round financing being provided by venture capitalists. Such phases of funding are said to approximately correspond to the stages of a company's development.

1. Seed funding

This is the earliest round of financing needed to prove a new idea, often provided by angel investors. Equity crowd funding is also available in advanced economies as an option for seed funding.

2. Start-up

This involves the early stage firms that need funding for expenses associated with marketing and product development.

3. Growth (Series A round)

This involves early sales and manufacturing funds. This is where the where typically, the VCs come in for financing. Series A can be likened to the first institutional round. The subsequent forms of investment rounds are regarded as Series B, Series C and so on. This is a period during which most companies will have the most growth.

4. Second-Round

This involves provision of working capital for early stage companies that are selling product, but not yet making profits. This can also be regarded as Series B round and others.

5. Expansion

This is regarded as mezzanine financing. Such funding is meant for the expansion of a company that has just started earning profits







89
 
6. Bridge Financing

This is provided is when a startup seeks funding in between full venture capital rounds. The sole purpose is for the firm concerned to raise smaller amount of money instead of a full round and usually the existing investors participate.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 5
Mention and explain various types of venture capital financing.

4.0 CONCLUSION

You have been taken the discussion on how to make use of debt financing to create wealth through business undertaking. Investment in business implies the use of capital, which is the funding for the operations of the venture. The capital structure is made up of two parts. The first one, as you have seen from the discussion, is the owners? capital or owners? equity while and the second one is the debts capital Debts involves the use of capital funds from outside sources such as commercial banks, microfinance banks, private lenders, and cooperative societies, among others. Venture capital is normally introduced into a business at certain stage of its operations, which can also be used to create wealth in the business.

5.0 SUMMARY

In this study unit, we have discussed topics such as:
3.1 Equity Capital and Debt Capital
3.1.1 Sources of Debt Capital
3.2 Venture Capital
3.2.1 Advantages of Venture Capital Financing
3.2.2 Nature of Funding from Venture Capitals
3.2.3 Financing Stages of Venture Capital

In the next study unit, we shall discuss intellectual property and royalties.


6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	List and explain the available sources for raising debt capital.
2.	Mention and explain various types of venture capital financing.

Answers to SEAs

1. Differentiate between equity capital and debt capital.

Equity capital refers to the owners? contribution to the capital funding of the business. Such contribution is normally in form of shareholding called ordinary shares. The ordinary share is a unit of capital ownership in a firm in terms of equity investment by the shareholders. The ordinary shares do attract returns at the end of the trading period (normally 12 months). It

90
 

accords its holders right of ownership in the asset of the firm. The ordinary shareholder can vote in the annual general meeting of the firm.

Debt capital refers to the amount of funds in the structure of the capital that is borrowed from outside sources of financing. This capital is entitled to periodic interest payment, and principal repayments of the original amount borrowed, from the operations of the business Examples include term loans from commercial banks. Some other debts only attract periodic payment of interest rates while the whole amount of principal is repaid after the maturity date of the debts. Examples are debentures and bonds. There exist also the preference shares. The implication of debt capital is that lenders have a legal right to interest on a loan and repayment of the capital irrespective of the success or failure of a business.

2. List and explain the available sources for raising debt capital.

1. Preference Shares

The preference shares are debt instruments in a firm. The holders of preference share are not owners of the firm since they cannot vote in the AGM of their firm. Preference share attract fixed dividend or interest. For example, a ten percent preference share of N150,000 will attract a finance interest of N15,000. However, the preference share is also regarded as shares in firm depending on the nature of the preference share. There are several forms of preference shares. There is the cumulative preference share, participating preference share convertible preference share, redeemable preference shares etc.

2. Debentures

These are long term debt securities normally offered for public subscription. They generally attract a fixed rate of return called interest. Most times Debentures are securities in a particular asset of the firm in such case tagged secured debenture. An unsecured debenture is one not secured on any particular asset of the firm. Debentures are mostly sold either at premium or at discount.

3. Bonds

Bonds are sometimes issued with stock warrants attached. Warrants are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date. Should the bondholder decide to exercise the option and purchase stock, it is not necessary to surrender the underlying bond. Again, bondholders will exercise their warrants only if the market value of the stock exceeds the specified (exercise) price of the warrant. Bonds are an important source of capital for the federal government, states and municipalities, and private corporations. However, private-sector equity financing in the form of common stock has historically been a more important source of financing.

4. Mortgages

Mortgages are long-term loans that are secured by real property. They are long-term liabilities collateralized by real property. Commonly, monthly payments are made that fully repay both principal and interest over the term of the loan. Mortgages are issued to purchase real estate. Commercial mortgages are used to finance real estate for business purposes, such as office



91
 

buildings and shopping malls. These mortgages have consistently grown faster than multifamily-dwelling mortgages and even faster than home mortgages.

5. Bank Term Loan

This refers to the loan facility being granted by commercial banks, which is meant to be used in the operations of the business for a period of time in years. Such loan is normally repaid on periodic basis; on reducing balance basis until the remaining amount is paid at the end of the repayment period. The loan facility also attracts payment of interest on periodic basis, say, every three months, six months, depending on the term of agreement between the bank and the business.

3. Explain the term Venture Capital.

Venture capital (VC) is a form of private equity that involves financing being provided by firms which engages in such form of funding businesses. Such funds are normally provided for firms that are deemed to have high growth potential, and actually demonstrate to have high growth in respect of number of employees and annual revenue, or even both indices. The firms that engage in venture capital funding invest in early-stage businesses with the sole intention of taking up part of the equity (an ownership stake) in such companies for their investment.

The venture capitalists assume some risk of financing the risky start-ups with the hopes such firms in which they invest their funds will become successful. More often than not, the venture capitalists prefer firms in innovative technology or business model, usually in high technology industries; information technology (IT), clean technology or biotechnology. Venture capitalists will provide financing in the interest of generating some return through a subsequent exit such as the company selling shares to the public in an initial public offering (IPO) or going into merger and acquisition, which is called a "trade sale" of the company.

4. Mention the advantages of venture capital financing.

1.	Venture capital fund enhances the growth of new business startups for the fund provided that is purely private equity in nature.

2.	Venture capital funding does not constitute any regular financial obligations for the firm because it is not a debt financing.

3.	The venture capital framework can also be used by both private and public sectors in establishing an institution that can systematically create business networks for the new firms and industries.

4.	The institutional setup can aid in identify promising new firms and thereby offer them with needed funding.

5.	The venture capital firms usually provide technical expertise, mentoring, marketing expertise, and business models.



92
 

6.	The venture capital scheme ensures successful operations of the companies in which the capitalists invest their funds.

7.	Venture capital schemes can turn into channels for networks in designing and building products in their domain.


5.	Mention and explain various types of venture capital financing.
1.	Seed funding

This is the earliest round of financing needed to prove a new idea, often provided by angel investors. Equity crowd funding is also available in advanced economies as an option for seed funding.

2. Start-up

This involves the early stage firms that need funding for expenses associated with marketing and product development.

3. Growth (Series A round)

This involves early sales and manufacturing funds. This is where the where typically, the VCs come in for financing. Series A can be likened to the first institutional round. The subsequent forms of investment rounds are regarded as Series B, Series C and so on. This is a period during which most companies will have the most growth.

4. Second-Round

This involves provision of working capital for early stage companies that are selling product, but not yet making profits. This can also be regarded as Series B round and others.

5. Expansion

This is regarded as mezzanine financing. Such funding is meant for the expansion of a company that has just started earning profits

6. Bridge Financing

This is provided is when a startup seeks funding in between full venture capital rounds. The sole purpose is for the firm concerned to raise smaller amount of money instead of a full round and usually the existing investors participate.

7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READING

Ante,  S.  E.  (2008).  Creative  Capital:  Georges  Doriot  and  the  Birth  of  Venture  Capital.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard Business School Press.

Metrick, A. (2007). Venture Capital and the Finance of Innovation, New York: John Wiley & Sons.

Ross, W. J. (2008). Corporate Finance, 8th Edition, New Jersey: McGraw-Hill publishing.



93
 

Röhm, P., Köhn, A., Kuckertz, A. and Dehnen, H. S. (2017). A world of difference? The impact of corporate venture capitalists? investment motivation on startup valuation, Journal of Business Economics.





























































94
 
UNIT 10: INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY AND ROYALTIES


CONTENTS

1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Intellectual Property
3.2	Intellectual property rights
3.3	Justification for Intellectual Property
3.3.1	Natural Rights/Justice Argument
3.3.2	Utilitarian-Pragmatic Argument
3.3.3	Personality Argument
3.4	Royalties
3.4.1.	Situations Warranting Payment of Royalties
3.4.2	Factors Determining Rate of Royalty
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

The preceding study unit, we have discussed leveraging on debts and venture capital in creating wealth. There are other ways through which you can create wealth for yourself such as invention and creativity, and engaging in technological advancement, among others with which to earn royalties. In this study unit, therefore, we shall discuss intellectual property and royalties.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Explain the term intellectual property
•	Identify and discuss intellectual property rights

•	Discuss the justification for intellectual property
•	Explain royalties
•	Identify and discuss situations warranting payment of royalties

•	Mention and explain factors determining rate of royalty

3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

Intellectual property is regarded as the creations of the intellect for which a monopoly is granted to the designated owners by law. By implication, intellectual property rights

95
 

constitute the rights conferred on the creators of intellectual property. These rights include trademarks, copyrights patents, industrial designs, and trade secrets, in some jurisdictions. The artistic works include music and literature, discoveries, inventions, words, phrases, symbols, and designs, which all come under the protection of the intellectual property (Bettig, 1996; Arai, 2000).

Intellectual property, according to World Intellectual Property Organization (2017), refers to creations of the mind like inventions, literary and artistic works, designs, symbols, names and images that are used in the world of commerce. Furthermore, the IP organization maintains that Intellectual property is protected in law (e. g., by patents, copyrights, and trademarks) which enables people to earn recognition or financial benefit from their creations. The main purpose of IP system is towards fostering an environment in which creativity and innovation can thrive.

According to The Free Dictionary (2017), intellectual property refers to the intangible rights protecting the products of human intelligence and creation like copyrightable works, patented inventions, trademarks, and trade secrets. In other words, intellectual property is a term that is used to describe a wide variety of property created by musicians, authors, artists, and inventors. The law of intellectual property essentially includes laws on intangibles such as copyrights, patents, and trademarks law, which is for the purpose of encouraging the development of art, science, intellectual ideas, and information technology. This is used to confer certain property rights to all artists and inventors in sciences and technology.

The IP laws grant these rights to artists and inventors towards protecting them from infringement and unauthorized utilization and misuse of their creations. For instance, trademarks and service marks are used to protect distinguishing features like names or package designs that are associated with particular products or services from commercial realm.

Some facts of law in relation to the intellectual property (The Free Dictionary, 2017) are as highlighted below.

i)	Intellectual property laws are not in the category of criminal law jurisdiction per se. However, some copyright laws authorize criminal penalties.

ii)	Although the body of intellectual property law is concerned with prevention and compensation, both of which are in the realm of civil matters. It implies therefore, that the owner and not the government, is responsible for enforcement.

iii)	Intellectual property laws provide the owners with the power to enforce their property rights in civil court.

iv)	Such laws provide for damages when in the cases of unauthorized use or misuse

v)	Such laws also provide for injunctions, or court orders, to prevent unauthorized use or misuse of the rights.



96
 
SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
What is Intellectual Property? Mention the facts of law relating to Intellectual Property.


3.2 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS

The rights for the intellectual property are provided in some laws regulating it. These rights are discussed below based on the various types of intellectual property.

1. Work of Art

The intellectual property right (The Free Dictionary, 2017) confers on the owners some exclusive right to profit from a work for a particular limited period of time. In respect of copyrighted material, the exclusive right lasts for 70 years beyond the death of the author. In the case of the length of the right, it can vary for patents, but in most cases, it lasts for 20 years. Trademark rights are exclusive for ten years and can be continually renewed for subsequent ten-year periods.

The intellectual property that is protected by copyright laws must be fixed in a tangible form. For example, a musician may not claim copyright protection for a melody unless it has been written down or somehow actualized and affixed with a recognizable notation or recorded. Relatedly, a formula or device advanced by intellectuals may not receive patent protection unless it has been presented appropriately, and it must satisfy several tests for such to qualify for patent coverage. A symbol may not receive trademark protection unless it has been placed on goods or used in connection with services.

2. Copyrights

According to WIPO (2017), copyright involves a legal term that is used to describe the rights that creators have over their literary and artistic works. Works covered by copyright range from books, music, paintings, sculpture and films, to computer programs, databases, advertisements, maps and technical drawings.

Infringement of copyright is said to occur whenever someone exercises the exclusive rights of the copyright owner without the owner's permission. The infringement needs not be intentional. The copyright owners usually prove infringement in law court by providing that copying occurred and that such replication amounted to impermissible appropriation. These showings require that an analysis and comparison of the copyrighted work and the disputed work must be shown. However, many basic rules also relate to infringement of certain works. For instance, a character created in a particular copyrighted work may not receive copyright protection unless the character is developed in great detail and the other character in the disputed work closely resembles that original character (The Free Dictionary, 2017).

The copyright laws (The Free Dictionary, 2017) grant to authors, artists, composers, and publishers the exclusive right to produce and distribute expressive and original work. In t6his wise, only the expressive pieces, or writings, may qualify to receive copyright protection. For


97
 

instance, writing needs not be words on paper; in copyright law, it could be a painting, sculpture, or other work of art. It is instructive to note that the writing element merely requires that a work of art, before receiving copyright protection, must be reduced to some tangible form. By implication, this may be on paper, on film, on audiotape, or on any other tangible medium that can be reproduced, that is, copied.

Basically, the writing requirement element is to ensure that copyrighted material is capable of being reproduced. Hence, in the absence of this requirement, artists could not be expected to know whether they were infringing on the original work of another. Furthermore, the writing requirement is also meant to enforce the copyright rule that ideas cannot be copyrighted; only the individualized expression of ideas can be protected.

Fundamentally, the copyrighted material must be original implying that there must be something sufficiently new about the work that sets it apart from previous similar works. Hence, if the variation is substantial, which is more than trivial, the work will merit copyright protection.

A copyrighted material can receive some varying degrees of protection. The scope of protection in this wise is generally limited to the original work that is in the writing. An instance is this: if an artist creates a carving of a natural phenomenon like the moon, he may not prevent others from making sculptures of such. The exception is this: the sculptor may prevent others from creating sculptures of the phenomenon that are exact replicas of his own sculpture.

There are some exclusive rights (The Free Dictionary, 2017) that are conferred in copyright protection, on the copyright holder are as presented below.

(i)	Reproduce the copyrighted work,
(ii)	Create derivative works from the work,
(iii)	Distribute copies of the work,
(iv)	Perform the work publicly, and
(v)	Display the work.

In the case of the first two rights, they are protected whether they are infringed either or violated in public or in private. The last three rights can be infringed on only if they are violated in public. The term public showing is legally recognized as a performance or display to a "substantial number of persons" outside of friends and family (The Free Dictionary, 2017).

Some exceptions abound in exclusive rights of the copyright holder. The most important one is the "fair use" doctrine. This doctrine grants the general public to use copyrighted material without permission in certain situation such as in some educational activities, some literary and social criticism, some parody, and news reporting. The degree of fair in a particular depends on a number of factors like: its usage for profit; the percentage of the copyrighted material used; whether the work is fictional in nature; and what economic effect that the usage has on the copyright owner. The internet sites set up for free downloading of materials cannot an exception to the rule of exclusive rights of copyright owners (The Free Dictionary, 2017).




98
 
3. Patents

A patent, according to WIPO (2017) refers to an exclusive right conferred on an inventor for his invention. In general terms, a patent provides the patent owner with the right to decide how, or whether, the invention can be used by others. Essentially, in exchange for this right, the patent owner makes technical information about the invention publicly available in the published patent document.

In respect of the patent laws, they encourage private individuals towards investment in new technologies. This is because they grant the artists the right to forbid all others to produce and distribute technological information that is new, useful, and non-obvious. Essentially, therefore, the statutory requirements for patent protection are more stringent when compared with those for copyright protection. Furthermore, due to the fact that patent protection for commercial products or processes does confer a tremendous market advantage to businesses, those seeking patents often find opposition to their applications (The Free Dictionary, 2017).

4. Trademarks

The term trademark, according to WIPO (2017), refers to a sign capable of distinguishing the goods or services of one enterprise from those of other enterprises. Trademarks date back to ancient times when craftsmen used to put their signature or "mark" on their products.

Trademark laws, according to The Free Dictionary (2017), allow businesses to protect the symbolic information that relates to their goods and services, by preventing the use of such features by competitors. To receive trademark protection, a mark usually must be distinctive. Distinctiveness generally applies to any coined or fanciful word or term that does not closely resemble an existing mark. A mark generally will not receive trademark protection if it is a common or descriptive term used in the marketplace.

To receive trademark protection, a mark must be used in commerce. If two or more marketers claim ownership of a certain mark, the first user of the mark will usually receive the protection. When the mark is known to consumers only in a limited geographic area, though, it may not receive protection in areas where it is unknown.

Infringement occurs if a mark is likely to cause confusion among consumers. In determining whether confusion is likely, the court examines a number of factors, including the similarity between the two marks in appearance, sound, connotation, and impression; the similarity of the goods or services that the respective marks represent; the similarity of the markets; whether

the sale of the goods or services is inspired by impulse or only after careful consideration by the buyer; the level of public awareness of the mark; whether shoppers are actually confused; the number and nature of similar marks on similar goods or services; the length



99
 

of time of concurrent use without actual confusion on the part of shoppers; and the variety of goods or services that the mark represents.

5. Trade Secrets

Trade secret refers to any formula, pattern, device, or compilation of information that provides a business advantage over competitors who do not use or know of it. A strategy to increase worker productivity, for example, is a trade secret. Trade secrets do not receive patent protection because they are not inventive. Trade secret laws are included in intellectual property laws for the simple fact that, just like other intellectual property laws, they prevent the unauthorized use of certain intangible subject matter.

The right of publicity is the right of a person to control the commercial value and exploitation of his or her name, voice, or likeness. Because right-of-publicity laws promote artistic and commercial pursuits, they are included among intellectual property law. These laws are usually reserved for celebrities and other public figures whose name and image are important to their career. In allowing celebrities the right to control the commercial use of their name, voice, and image, right-of-publicity, the laws protect the commercial potential of such entertainers.

6. Industrial Design

An industrial design constitutes the ornamental or aesthetic aspect of an article. A design may consist of three-dimensional features, such as the shape or surface of an article, or of two-dimensional features, such as patterns, lines or color.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
Mention and explain some Intellectual Property Rights.

3.3 JUSTIFICATION FOR INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

There are several arguments (Moore, 2011) that justify intellectual property such as identified and explain below.

(i)	Personality theory:- This theory posits that intellectual property is an extension of an individual.

(ii)	Utilitarian Theory:- This believes that intellectual property stimulates social progress and pushes people to further innovation.

(iii)	The Lockean argue that intellectual property is justified based on deservedness and hard work of the inventors.

These varied theoretical justifications for private property which have been used to argue for the essence intellectual property are elaborated on as follows:





100
 
3.3.1 Natural Rights/Justice Argument

This view is based on Locke's exposition that a person has a natural right over the labour and/or products which is produced by his/her body. Hence, in appropriating these products is regarded as unjust. However, Locke had never explicitly stated that natural right applied to products of the mind but it is possible to apply his argument to intellectual property rights. Nevertheless, it would be unjust for people to misuse another person's ideas. Locke's argument for intellectual property is based upon the idea that people have the right to control that which they create. Essentially, the argument is that people own their ideas and such this right of ownership extends to what they create. This implies that intellectual property ensures this right when it comes to production (World Intellectual Property Organization, 2011).

3.3.2 Utilitarian-Pragmatic Argument

On this basis of this rationale, it is argued that a society that protects private property is more effective and prosperous than societies that do not. Innovation and invention in the modern American society, for instance, has been attributed to the development of the patent system (Reisman, 1996). In providing innovators with "durable and tangible return on their investment of time, labor, and other resources", intellectual property rights seek to maximize social utility (Spinello, 2007). The presumption is that rights promote public welfare by encouraging the "creation, production, and distribution of intellectual works". On the whole, utilitarians argue that without intellectual property, there would be a lack of incentive to produce new ideas. Hence, systems of protection such as intellectual property optimize social utility (Maskus, 2000; Greenhalgh and Rogers, 2010).

3.3.3 Personality Argument

This view is hinged on basis of argument by Hegel. The philosopher argued that "Every man has the right to turn his will upon a thing or make the thing an object of his will, that is to say, to set aside the mere thing and recreate it as his own". European intellectual property law is shaped by this notion that ideas are an "extension of oneself and of one's personality". Personality theorists argue that by being a creator of something, one is inherently at risk and vulnerable for having their ideas and designs stolen and/or altered. Hence, intellectual property protects these moral claims that have to do with personality (Reisman, 1996; World Intellectual Property Organization, 2011).

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
Mention and explain the three arguments relating to Intellectual Property Rights.








101
 
3.4	ROYALTIES

According to Encyclopedia of Business Terms (2007), royalties refer to some payments that are made by one company (the licensee) to another company (the licensor) in exchange for the right to use intellectual property (or physical assets), which are owned by the licensor. A classical example of intellectual property that qualifies for royalty is the Windows operating system for personal computers invented by the software giant, Microsoft; a means of managing files and performing computer operations. Furthermore, computer manufacturing firms such as IBM and Compaq pay royalties to Microsoft in exchange for their usage of the Windows operating system in their computers.

Furthermore, a royalty has been regarded as a payment that is made by one party such as the user (licensee or franchisee) of a patented right to the owner of the right (called licensor or franchisor) for the continuing usage of that asset. Royalty becomes some form of compensation to the holders of the rights, which is legally binding. Such payments are usually based on agreement in respect of percentage of the earnings (e.g., gross or net revenues) accruing from the usage of the right. The payment can also be based on a fixed price per unit of the product sold in respect of the usage of the unique right

A royalty (Investopedia, 2017) refers to the payment to the holder of a right or owner of an asset for the using the property. Examples of such rights include patents, copyrighted works, franchises or natural resources. The payment is normally made to the legal owner of the property, patent, copyrighted work or franchise. This involves the consideration that must be made by those who desire to put such property into use for purposes of generating revenue or other commercial activities.

3.4.1. Situations Warranting Payment of Royalties

According to Encyclopedia of Business Terms (2007), there are other common situations in which royalties are to be paid to the right holders. These situations are identified and discussed below.

1. Inventions and Discoveries

Royalties are normally paid for the holders of rights for their inventions and discoveries by the various users of the intellectual property. Examples are technological innovations (robots, drones, etc) and internet softwares like the Windows operating system for personal computers invented by Microsoft Corporation.

2. Designing in the Fashion Industry

Designers of fashionable materials such as dresses, shoes and bags, among others, do license the right to use their names on items of clothing to companies, in exchange for royalties. This implies that, for instance, they can sign a contract with fashion firms that produce jeans in order to allow such firms to emboss the designer's name on the products.



102
 
3. Book Publishing

Authors of books and other material prints are normally entitled some payment in advance on future royalties which is based on percentage of sales price. The authors are entitled to receive further royalties on periodic basis necessarily after sufficient sales are made with which to cover the advance payment.

4. Music and Songwriting

Royalties are normally paid to the holders of music copyright and songwriters by radio stations and any other parties who make use of such copyrighted materials for commercial benefits. The royalty for music takes the following forms:

(i)	Royalties from "print rights;"
(ii)	Mechanical royalties from the recording of composed music on CDs and tape;

(iii)	Performance royalties from the performance of the compositions/songs on stage or television through artists and bands; and

(iv)	Synch (for synchronization) royalties from using or adapting the musical score in the movies, television advertisements, etc. and

5. Electronic Media

Royalties are normally paid in the television industry, cable (satellite) network services (e.g., Direct TV and cable television services) to copyright holders so that they can broadcast those channels over their systems.

6. Mining Industry

The oil and gas companies in the petroleum industry do pay landowners or the government some royalties based on rate agreed upon by both parties or at prevailing rates for the right to extract natural resources. This is applicable to crude petroleum and natural gas being extracted from the landowner's property or the government. Such comparable agreements do exist in the mining industry for other minerals like copper and silver.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 4
What is Royalty? Mention and explain situations warranting payment of royalties.

3.4.2 Factors Determining Rate of Royalty

The rate at which a royalty is determined is influenced by many factors. Such factors are as follows:

i)	Market drivers and demand structure
ii)	Territorial extent of rights
iii)	Exclusivity of rights
iv)	Level of innovation and stage of development


103
 
v)	Sustainability of the technology
vi)	Degree and competitive availability of other technologies
vii)	Inherent risk
viii)	Strategic need
ix)	The portfolio of rights negotiated
x)	Fundability
xi)	Deal-reward structure (negotiation strength)

4.0	CONCLUSION

You have been to learn in this study unit that intellectual property involves the creations of the intellect for which a monopoly is granted to the designated owners by law. This implies that intellectual property rights constitute the rights conferred on the creators of intellectual property. These rights include trademarks, copyrights patents, industrial designs, and trade secrets, in some jurisdictions. Closely related to intellectual property is the issue of royalties. These are payments made by one company (the licensee) to another company (the licensor) in exchange for the right to use intellectual property (or physical assets), which are owned by the licensor. A good example of intellectual property that qualifies for royalty is the Windows operating system for personal computers invented by the software giant, Microsoft; a means of managing files and performing computer operations.


5.0	SUMMARY

In this initial study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Intellectual Property
•	Intellectual property rights
•	Justification for Intellectual Property
•	Natural Rights/Justice Argument
•	Utilitarian-Pragmatic Argument

•	Personality Argument
•	Royalties
•	Situations Warranting Payment of Royalties
•	Factors Determining Rate of Royalty

In the next study unit, you will be taken through financial market instruments.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT

1.	What is Intellectual Property? Mention the facts of law relating to Intellectual Property.
2.	Mention and explain some Intellectual Property Rights.
3.	What is Royalty? Mention and explain situations warranting payment of royalties.






104
 
Answers to SAE
1. What is Intellectual Property? Mention the facts of law relating to Intellectual Property.

Intellectual property is regarded as the creations of the intellect for which a monopoly is granted to the designated owners by law. By implication, intellectual property rights constitute the rights conferred on the creators of intellectual property. These rights include trademarks, copyrights patents, industrial designs, and trade secrets, in some jurisdictions. The artistic works include music and literature, discoveries, inventions, words, phrases, symbols, and designs, which all come under the protection of the intellectual property (Bettig, 1996; Arai, 2000).

Some facts of law in relation to the intellectual property (The Free Dictionary, 2017) are as highlighted below.

i)	Intellectual property laws are not in the category of criminal law jurisdiction per se. However, some copyright laws authorize criminal penalties.

ii)	Although the body of intellectual property law is concerned with prevention and compensation, both of which are in the realm of civil matters. It implies therefore, that the owner and not the government, is responsible for enforcement.

iii)	Intellectual property laws provide the owners with the power to enforce their property rights in civil court.

iv)	Such laws provide for damages when in the cases of unauthorized use or misuse

v)	Such laws also provide for injunctions, or court orders, to prevent unauthorized use or misuse of the rights.


2.	Mention and explain some Intellectual Property Rights. i. Work of Art

The intellectual property right (The Free Dictionary, 2017) confers on the owners some exclusive right to profit from a work for a particular limited period of time. In respect of copyrighted material, the exclusive right lasts for 70 years beyond the death of the author. In the case of the length of the right, it can vary for patents, but in most cases, it lasts for 20 years. Trademark rights are exclusive for ten years and can be continually renewed for subsequent ten-year periods.

ii. Copyrights

According to WIPO (2017), copyright involves a legal term that is used to describe the rights that creators have over their literary and artistic works. Works covered by copyright range from books, music, paintings, sculpture and films, to computer programs, databases, advertisements, maps and technical drawings.

Basically, the writing requirement element is to ensure that copyrighted material is capable of being reproduced. Hence, in the absence of this requirement, artists could not be expected to know whether they were infringing on the original work of another. Furthermore, the writing requirement is also meant to enforce the copyright rule that ideas cannot be copyrighted; only the individualized expression of ideas can be protected.


105
 
iii. Patents

A patent, according to WIPO (2017) refers to an exclusive right conferred on an inventor for his invention. In general terms, a patent provides the patent owner with the right to decide how, or whether, the invention can be used by others. Essentially, in exchange for this right, the patent owner makes technical information about the invention publicly available in the published patent document.

iv. Trademarks

The term trademark, according to WIPO (2017), refers to a sign capable of distinguishing the goods or services of one enterprise from those of other enterprises. Trademarks date back to ancient times when craftsmen used to put their signature or "mark" on their products.

v. Trade Secrets

Trade secret refers to any formula, pattern, device, or compilation of information that provides a business advantage over competitors who do not use or know of it. A strategy to increase worker productivity, for example, is a trade secret. Trade secrets do not receive patent protection because they are not inventive. Trade secret laws are included in intellectual property laws for the simple fact that, just like other intellectual property laws, they prevent the unauthorized use of certain intangible subject matter.

vi. Industrial Design

An industrial design constitutes the ornamental or aesthetic aspect of an article. A design may consist of three-dimensional features, such as the shape or surface of an article, or of two-dimensional features, such as patterns, lines or color.

3. Mention and explain the three arguments relating to Intellectual Property Rights.

i. Natural Rights/Justice Argument

This view is based on Locke's exposition that a person has a natural right over the labour and/or products which is produced by his/her body. Hence, in appropriating these products is regarded as unjust. However, Locke had never explicitly stated that natural right applied to products of the mind but it is possible to apply his argument to intellectual property rights. Nevertheless, it would be unjust for people to misuse another person's ideas. Locke's argument for intellectual property is based upon the idea that people have the right to control that which they create. Essentially, the argument is that people own their ideas and such this right of ownership extends to what they create. This implies that intellectual property ensures this right when it comes to production (World Intellectual Property Organization, 2011).

ii. Utilitarian-Pragmatic Argument

On this basis of this rationale, it is argued that a society that protects private property is more effective and prosperous than societies that do not. Innovation and invention in the


106
 

modern American society, for instance, has been attributed to the development of the patent system (Reisman, 1996). In providing innovators with "durable and tangible return on their investment of time, labor, and other resources", intellectual property rights seek to maximize social utility (Spinello, 2007). The presumption is that rights promote public welfare by encouraging the "creation, production, and distribution of intellectual works". On the whole, utilitarians argue that without intellectual property, there would be a lack of incentive to produce new ideas. Hence, systems of protection such as intellectual property optimize social utility (Maskus, 2000; Greenhalgh and Rogers, 2010).

iii. Personality Argument

This view is hinged on basis of argument by Hegel. The philosopher argued that "Every man has the right to turn his will upon a thing or make the thing an object of his will, that is to say, to set aside the mere thing and recreate it as his own". European intellectual property law is shaped by this notion that ideas are an "extension of oneself and of one's personality". Personality theorists argue that by being a creator of something, one is inherently at risk and vulnerable for having their ideas and designs stolen and/or altered. Hence, intellectual property protects these moral claims that have to do with personality (Reisman, 1996; World Intellectual Property Organization, 2011).

4. What is Royalty? Mention and explain situations warranting payment of royalties.

Royalties refer to some payments that are made by one company (the licensee) to another company (the licensor) in exchange for the right to use intellectual property (or physical assets), which are owned by the licensor. A classical example of intellectual property that qualifies for royalty is the Windows operating system for personal computers invented by the software giant, Microsoft; a means of managing files and performing computer operations.

i. Inventions and Discoveries

Royalties are normally paid for the holders of rights for their inventions and discoveries by the various users of the intellectual property. Examples are technological innovations (robots, drones, etc) and internet softwares like the Windows operating system for personal computers invented by Microsoft Corporation.

ii. Designing in the Fashion Industry

Designers of fashionable materials such as dresses, shoes and bags, among others, do license the right to use their names on items of clothing to companies, in exchange for royalties. This implies that, for instance, they can sign a contract with fashion firms that produce jeans in order to allow such firms to emboss the designer's name on the products.

iii. Book Publishing




107
 

Authors of books and other material prints are normally entitled some payment in advance on future royalties which is based on percentage of sales price. The authors are entitled to receive further royalties on periodic basis necessarily after sufficient sales are made with which to cover the advance payment.

iv. Music and Songwriting

Royalties are normally paid to the holders of music copyright and songwriters by radio stations and any other parties who make use of such copyrighted materials for commercial benefits.

v. Electronic Media

Royalties are normally paid in the television industry, cable (satellite) network services (e.g., Direct TV and cable television services) to copyright holders so that they can broadcast those channels over their systems.

vi. Mining Industry

The oil and gas companies in the petroleum industry do pay landowners or the government some royalties based on rate agreed upon by both parties or at prevailing rates for the right to extract natural resources. This is applicable to crude petroleum and natural gas being extracted from the landowner's property or the government. Such comparable agreements do exist in the mining industry for other minerals like copper and silver.

7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READING

Alderman, John. 2001. Sonic Boom: Napster, P2P, and the Battle for the Future of Music. New
York: Perseus.

Arai, H. (2000). "Intellectual Property Policies for the Twenty-First Century: The Japanese Experience in Wealth Creation", WIPO Publication Number 834 (E).

Bettig, R. V. (1996). Critical Perspectives on the History and Philosophy of Copyright. In R. V. Bettig, Copyrighting Culture: The Political Economy of Intellectual Property. (pp. 9–32). Boulder, CO: Westview Press.

Burgunder, Lee B. 2002. "Reflections on Napster: The Ninth Circuit Takes a Walk on the

Wild Side." American Business Law Journal 39 (summer): 683–707.

Byrne,	John G. 1995."Changes on the Frontier of Intellectual Property Law: An Overview of the Changes Required by GATT." Duquesne Law Review 34 (fall): 121–37.







108
 

De George, R. T. (1998). 14 Intellectual Property Rights. In George G. Brenkert and Tom L. Beauchamp (eds.), The Oxford Handbook of Business Ethics, 1st ed.1, Oxford, England: Oxford University Press, 415–416.

Encyclopedia of Business Terms (2007). Royalties. Accessed on 25 September, 2017 from https://www.inc.com/encyclopedia/royalties.html

Goldstein, Paul. 2002. Copyright, Patent, Trademark, and Related State Doctrines: Cases and Materials on the Law of Intellectual Property. 5th ed. New York: Foundation Press.

Greenhalgh, C. & Rogers M., (2010). Innovation, Intellectual Property, and Economic Growth, New Jersey: Princeton University Press.

Gray, Megan E., and Will Thomas DeVries. 2003. "The Legal Fallout from Digital Rights Management Technology." Computer and Internet Lawyer 20 (April): 20– 35.

Investopedia (2017). What is a Royalty? Accessed on 25 September, 2017 from http://www.investopedia.com/terms/r/royalty.asp#ixzz4tmch4yvy


Letterman, G. Gregory. 2001. Basics of International Intellectual Property Law. Ardsley, N.Y.: Transnational Publishers.

Maskus, K. E. (2000). Intellectual Property Rights and Economic Development, Case Western Reserve Journal of International Law, 32(3): 471-506.

McJohn, Stephen M., and Roger S. Haydock. 2003. Intellectual Property: Examples and
Explanations. New York: Aspen.

Merriden, Trevor. 2001. Irresistible Forces: The Business Legacy of Napster and the

Growth of the Underground Internet. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

Moore, Adam, Intellectual Property. The Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy (Summer 2011 Edition), Edward N. Zalta (ed.),

Reisman, G. (1996). Capitalism: A Complete & Integrated Understanding of the Nature & Value of Human Economic Life, Ottawa, Illinois, 388–389

Spinello, Richard A. (January 2007). "Intellectual property rights". Library Hi Tech. 25(1): 12–22



109
 

The Free Dictionary (2017). The Gale Group, Inc. Accessed on 8 September, 2017 from http://legal-dictionary.thefreedictionary.com/Intellectual+Property

Vaidhyanathan,	Siva.	2001.	Copyrights	and	Copywrongs:	The	Rise	of	Intellectual

Property and How It Threatens Creativity. New York: New York Univ. Press.

World	Intellectual Property Organization (2011). Human Rights and Intellectual Property: An Overview.

World Intellectual Property Organization (2017). What is Intellectual Property? Accessed on 25 September, 2017 from http://www.wipo.int/about-ip/en/
















































110
 
UNIT 11: FINANCIAL MARKET INSTRUMENTS

CONTENTS
1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Conceptualization of Financial Market
3.2	Money Market and Instruments
3.3	Capital Market and Instruments
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary
6.0 Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

There are financial instruments that can be issued and used to run the operations of a corporate entity. Such instruments are traded in the financial markets. This implies that financial market refers to the type of market that is being used to deal in financial instruments. Some of these instruments are used for raising short term funds before being repaid back to the investors. There are other ones that are issued and used to raise funds for a long term period. The transactions on the former group of instruments take place in the money market while the transactions on the latter group of instruments take place in the capital market. In this study unit, therefore, we shall discuss all these financial instruments.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Explain financial market

•	List and explain money market instruments
•	Mention and discuss capital market instruments

3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 CONCEPTUALIZATION OF FINANCIAL MARKET

The financial market exists for the purpose of mobilization and intermediation of fund. This implies that through the financial market, funds are transmitted from the surplus sector of the economy to the deficit unit of the economy. The funds as mobilized in this market might be a short term basis or a long term basis, depending on the nature of instrument involved and the method of transaction.

The operations of the financial market involve commercial banks, merchant banks, the development banks, finance houses and individuals such as stock brokers and investors. The Financial markets are generally categorized into two namely: the money market for raising short term funds and the Capital market for raising long term funds.



111
 

The maturity of financial instruments that are traded differentiates markets determines the nature of the market segments. If the securities traded are short-term instruments, the market is called a money market. When maturities exceed one (1) year, the market is considered a capital market. Another differentiation is whether the securities are new (offered in the primary market) or already existing (traded in the secondary market). When bills are sold to the public for the first time, the sale takes place in a primary money market. Investors buy or sell existing bills through dealers and these transactions occur in secondary money markets. A counterpart in the capital market would be an initial public offering of common stock; a primary capital market transaction. The subsequent exchange of stock through stockbrokers occurs in the secondary capital market.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Explain the term Financial Market.

3.1 MONEY MARKET AND INSTRUMENTS

The money market is the financial market in which financial instruments are traded with maturity of up to one (1) year. Money markets enable market participants to borrow or lend liquid assets and thereby meet needs for cash or investment of cash. The money market is characterized by availability of liquid assets. These are assets that may be converted into cash quickly, without significant loss of value. Investing excess liquid assets, that is, lending, reduces the opportunity cost of holding cash or cash equivalents. Borrowing short-term funds eliminates disruption that would be caused by temporary cash flow deficits.

Trading in such instruments also involves opportunity cost in respect of holding cash. The opportunity cost refers to that rate of return that could be earned if the next best alternative to cash were held by an investor, that is, that rate of return that is forgone when an investor holds cash. The federal government uses the money market to implement certain phases of monetary policy such as adjustments to the money supply. It does this through the Central Bank which establishes government objectives with respect to the money supply, interest rates, and credit availability.

The most widely traded money market instruments include Treasury bills, Repurchase agreements, Negotiable certificates of deposit, Commercial paper, and Bankers acceptances. Among all these instruments, the last three are traded in physical form. The remaining instruments are kept track of in book-entry form (electronic record keeping) with written confirmations.

Money market instruments have certain qualities that make them useful for wholesale (large)

transactions such as follows:

i) Liquidity

This describes the ability to convert an asset into cash with relative ease while not significantly depressing its price in the process. It is perhaps the most important quality.






112
 
ii) Default risk

This is the risk of non-payment of principal or interest, which must be minimal in order for the security to be considered a safe haven for excess liquidity.

iii) Short time to maturity

This is given that adverse price movements attributable to interest rate changes are smaller for shorter-term assets, which helps ensure that interest rate changes will not affect the security's market value materially.

Money market instruments include the following:

1.	Treasury Securities

Treasury securities are obligations of the government. They are issued to cover government budget deficits (excess of expenditures over revenues) and to refinance maturing government debt. The most common are bills, notes, and bonds. Treasury bills have original maturities of I year or less, while notes are for 1 to 10 years, and bonds have maturities greater than 10 years.

2.	Treasury bills (T-bills):

Treasury securities are short-term obligations of the government with original maturities of 1 year or less. Treasury bills and other Treasury securities (with less than 1 year of remaining life) are the most important instruments in money markets.

3.	Federal Funds

Federal funds are not formal securities. They are immediately available funds that are loaned or borrowed among financial institutions. Such funds are borrowed between financial institutions, usually for a period of 1 day -overnight.

4.	Call money:

These are loaned funds that are repayable upon the request of either party. All transactions go through one of the licensed companies such as in Japanese. The term of a call money loan can range from a half-day to 7 days. Half- day money is borrowed at 9:00 A.M. and repaid at 1:00 P.M. or borrowed at 1:00 P.M. and repaid at 3:00 P.M. Unconditional money is repaid the following day. Fixed maturity money is repaid in 2 to 7 days.

5.	Overnight call Money and other short-term deposits

These are traded in inter-bank market, an aspect of the money market (short-term exchange of liquid assets) for banks with no intermediary. Overnight call money and other short-term deposits are the common vehicles, and collateral is rarely required.

Some discount houses, or instance, in the United Kingdom have traditionally served to provide short-term credit in the U.K. banking system by entering into call money arrangements with individual banks. Banks with surplus funds lent them to discount houses, and banks in need of liquidity called in their discount house loans. More recently, however, a parallel set of money markets has developed.





113
 
6.	Repurchase agreement (repo):

This is an agreement between buyer and seller in the sale of securities to reverse the transaction in the future at a specified date and price. These transactions commonly involve Treasury securities, but they may also involve government agency securities. Repurchase agreements are typically as short term in nature as federal funds (or call money). Overnight, term, or continuing basis repurchase agreements are all negotiated. Unlike collateralized federal funds transactions, in which title to the securities does not change, in a repurchase agreement title does transfer to the purchaser.

7.	Government agency securities:

Securities issued by an agency of the federal government particularly in the U.S. with implicit backing of the federal government. Repurchase agreements are essentially collateralized loans. A financial institution with large holdings of Treasury securities sells some portion of them for a predetermined period of time to obtain liquidity and promises to repurchase the securities at the end of that period. On the other side of the transaction is an institution with excess liquidity. The amount of the transaction is relatively large, and the interest rate is below the federal funds rate. The lower rate is justified, because the transaction is collateralized by government securities.

8.	Negotiable Certificates of Deposit

This is a financial instrument issued by a bank documenting a deposit, with principal and interest repayable to the bearer at a specified future date. The negotiable certificate of deposit is a bearer instrument and a term deposit but not demand deposit. Overtime, banks were able to increase the rate paid on negotiable CDs to attract more deposits as the need arose. This innovation brought widespread adoption of bank liability management, which enables banks to attract funds by offering higher interest rates and thereby changing their deposit base.


9.	Banker's acceptance:

This is a time draft or postdated instrument payable to a seller of goods, with payment guaranteed by a bank. In these instruments, the credit of the bank substitutes for the credit of the purchaser, and the seller is ensured payment. Further, unlike an open trade credit arrangement (in which the seller provides credit for a period of time), the seller need not wait for payment. A banker's acceptance is immediately negotiable; the seller can either receive discounted payment at the accepting bank or hold the draft until the date of maturity. Banker's acceptances are particularly important in international trade with Maturities are 1, 3, or 6 months. Average maturity is 3 months.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
Mention and explain instruments of money market.


3.3 CAPITAL MARKET AND INSTRUMENTS

These are markets in which financial instruments with maturities greater than 1 year are bought and sold. Corporations secure financing through capital markets by selling long-term claims on their firms, whether in the form of bonds (liabilities) or stock (equity). Governments go to capital



114
 

markets for operating funds, and households use them for residential mortgage financing. This describes the capital market instruments that are issued and traded within national boundaries.

1. Ordinary Shares

The ordinary share is a unit of capital ownership in a firm in terms of equity investment by the shareholders. The ordinary shares do attract returns at the end of the trading period (normally 12 months). It accords its holders right of ownership in the asset of the firm. The ordinary shareholder can vote in the annual general meeting of the firm. Currently in a public company no single individual is allowed to own more than ten percent of the total issued shares of the firm. The ordinary share is assets (a financial asset) that are traded at will. Normally dividends can be paid as return to holders of ordinary shares. There exist also the preference shares.

2. Preference Shares

The preference shares are debt instruments in a firm. The holders of preference share are not owners of the firm since they cannot vote in the annual general meeting of their firm. Preference share attract fixed dividend or interest e.g. ten percent preference share of N150,000 will attract a finance interest of N15,000 . However, the preference share is also regarded as shares in firm depending on the nature of the preference share. There are several forms of preference shares. There is the cumulative preference share, participating preference share convertible preference share, redeemable preference shares etc.

3. Debentures

These are long term debt securities normally offered for public subscription. They generally attract a fixed rate of return called interest. Most times Debentures are securities in a particular asset of the firm in such case tagged secured debenture. An unsecured debenture is one not secured on any particular asset of the firm. Debentures are mostly sold either at premium or at discount.

4. Development Loan Stock

These are financial instruments that allow the government to borrow money for a long period of time up to 25 years, bearing interest and capital repayment, thereon. The principal amount can only be repaid back to the holder after the maturity date but the interest is normally on periodic basis as contained in the prospectus of the offer. The instrument is normally issued by the central bank on behalf of the government.

5. Bonds

Bonds are sometimes issued with stock warrants attached. Warrants are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date. Should the bondholder decide to exercise the option and purchase stock, it is not necessary to surrender the underlying bond. Again, bondholders will exercise their warrants only if the market value of the stock exceeds the specified (exercise) price of the warrant. Bonds are an important source of capital for the federal government, states and municipalities, and private corporations. However, private-sector equity financing in the form of common stock has historically been a more important source of financing.





115
 

Municipal bonds include all debt instruments issued by local, county, and state governments. Issuers use proceeds from the sale of municipal bonds to finance public utilities, school construction, roads, transportation systems, and industrial development. An appealing feature is that municipal bond interest payments to the holder are exempt from federal income taxation.

6. Mortgages

Mortgages are long-term loans that are secured by real property. They are long-term liabilities collateralized by real property. Commonly, monthly payments are made that fully repay both principal and interest over the term of the loan. Mortgages are issued to purchase real estate. Commercial mortgages are used to finance real estate for business purposes, such as office buildings and shopping malls. These mortgages have consistently grown faster than multifamily-dwelling mortgages and even faster than home mortgages.

Self-Assessment Exercise 3
List and explain the various instruments being used to raise funds through the capital market.

4.0 CONCLUSION

The Financial Market exists for the purpose of mobilization funds, which are transmitted from the surplus sector of the economy to the deficit unit of the economy. The funds as mobilized in this market might be a short term basis or a long term basis, depending on the nature of instrument involved and the method of transaction. The financial market is divided into two distinct parts such as capital market and money market. These distinct markets have their peculiar financial instruments, each group reflecting peculiar maturity dates. Such financial instruments are not just for the use of the corporate entities but are also available for government use in raising funds for operations.

5.0 SUMMARY

In this study unit, we have discussed topics such as:

•	Conceptualization of Financial Market;
•	Money Market and Instruments; and
•	Capital Market and Instruments.

In the next study unit, we shall discuss personal financial planning.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	Mention and explain instruments of money market.

2.	List and explain the various instruments being used to raise funds through the capital market.

Answers to Self Assessment Exercises
1. Explain the term Financial Market.

Financial market exists for the purpose of mobilization and intermediation of fund. This implies that through the financial market, funds are transmitted from the surplus sector of the economy to the deficit unit of the economy. The funds as mobilized in this market might be a short term basis or a long term basis, depending on the nature of instrument involved and the method of transaction. The operations of the financial market involve commercial banks, merchant banks,

116
 

the development banks, finance houses and individuals such as stock brokers and investors. The Financial markets are generally categorized into two namely: the money market for raising short term funds and the Capital market for raising long term funds.

2.	Mention and explain instruments of money market. The money market instruments include the following: i) Treasury Securities

Treasury securities are obligations of the government. They are issued to cover government budget deficits (excess of expenditures over revenues) and to refinance maturing government debt. The most common are bills, notes, and bonds. Treasury bills have original maturities of I year or less, while notes are for 1 to 10 years, and bonds have maturities greater than 10 years.

ii) Treasury bills (T-bills):

Treasury securities are short-term obligations of the government with original maturities of 1 year or less. Treasury bills and other Treasury securities (with less than 1 year of remaining life) are the most important instruments in money markets.

iii) Federal Funds

Federal funds are not formal securities. They are immediately available funds that are loaned or borrowed among financial institutions. Such funds are borrowed between financial institutions, usually for a period of 1 day -overnight.

iv) Call money:

These are loaned funds that are repayable upon the request of either party. All transactions go through one of the licensed companies such as in Japanese. The term of a call money loan can range from a half-day to 7 days. Half- day money is borrowed at 9:00 A.M. and repaid at 1:00 P.M. or borrowed at 1:00 P.M. and repaid at 3:00 P.M. Unconditional money is repaid the following day. Fixed maturity money is repaid in 2 to 7 days.

v) Overnight call Money and other short-term deposits

These are traded in inter-bank market, an aspect of the money market (short-term exchange of liquid assets) for banks with no intermediary. Overnight call money and other short-term deposits are the common vehicles, and collateral is rarely required.

Some discount houses, or instance, in the United Kingdom have traditionally served to provide short-term credit in the U.K. banking system by entering into call money arrangements with individual banks. Banks with surplus funds lent them to discount houses, and banks in need of liquidity called in their discount house loans. More recently, however, a parallel set of money markets has developed.

vi) Repurchase agreement (repo):

This is an agreement between buyer and seller in the sale of securities to reverse the transaction in the future at a specified date and price. These transactions commonly involve Treasury securities, but they may also involve government agency securities. Repurchase agreements are typically as short term in nature as federal funds (or call money). Overnight, term, or continuing basis repurchase agreements are all negotiated. Unlike collateralized federal funds transactions,


117
 

in which title to the securities does not change, in a repurchase agreement title does transfer to the purchaser.

vii) Government agency securities:

Securities issued by an agency of the federal government particularly in the U.S. with implicit backing of the federal government. Repurchase agreements are essentially collateralized loans. A financial institution with large holdings of Treasury securities sells some portion of them for a predetermined period of time to obtain liquidity and promises to repurchase the securities at the end of that period. On the other side of the transaction is an institution with excess liquidity. The amount of the transaction is relatively large, and the interest rate is below the federal funds rate. The lower rate is justified, because the transaction is collateralized by government securities.

viii) Negotiable Certificates of Deposit

This is a financial instrument issued by a bank documenting a deposit, with principal and interest repayable to the bearer at a specified future date. The negotiable certificate of deposit is a bearer instrument and a term deposit but not demand deposit. Overtime, banks were able to increase the rate paid on negotiable CDs to attract more deposits as the need arose. This innovation brought widespread adoption of bank liability management, which enables banks to attract funds by offering higher interest rates and thereby changing their deposit base.

ix) Banker's acceptance:

This is a time draft or postdated instrument payable to a seller of goods, with payment guaranteed by a bank. In these instruments, the credit of the bank substitutes for the credit of the purchaser, and the seller is ensured payment. Further, unlike an open trade credit arrangement (in which the seller provides credit for a period of time), the seller need not wait for payment. A banker's acceptance is immediately negotiable; the seller can either receive discounted payment at the accepting bank or hold the draft until the date of maturity. Banker's acceptances are particularly important in international trade with Maturities are 1, 3, or 6 months. Average maturity is 3 months.

3.	List and explain the various instruments being used to raise funds through the capital. The capital market instruments include the following:

i. Ordinary Shares

The ordinary share is a unit of capital ownership in a firm in terms of equity investment by the shareholders. The ordinary shares do attract returns at the end of the trading period (normally 12 months). It accords its holders right of ownership in the asset of the firm. The ordinary shareholder can vote in the AGM (Annual General Meeting) of the firm. Currently in a public company no single individual is allowed to own more than 10% of the total issued shares of the firm. The ordinary share is assets (a financial asset) that are traded at will. Normally dividends can be paid as return to holders of ordinary shares. There exist also the preference shares.

ii. Preference Shares

The preference shares are debt instruments in a firm. The holders of preference share are not owners of the firm since they cannot vote in the AGM of their firm. Preference share attract fixed dividend or interest e.g. 10% preference share of N100,000 will attract a financing interest of N10,000. However, the preference share is also regarded as shares in firm depending on the


118
 

nature of the preference share. There are several forms of preference shares. There is the cumulative preference share, participating preference share convertible preference share, redeemable preference shares etc.

iii. Debentures

These are long term debt securities normally offered for public subscription. They generally attract a fixed rate of return called interest. Most times Debentures are securities in a particular asset of the firm in such case tagged secured debenture. An unsecured debenture is one not secured on any particular asset of the firm. Debentures are mostly sold either at premium or at discount.

iv. Development Loan Stock

These are financial instruments that allow the government to borrow money for a long period of time up to 25 years, bearing interest and capital repayment, thereon. The principal amount can only be repaid back to the holder after the maturity date but the interest is normally on periodic basis as contained in the prospectus of the offer. The instrument is normally issued by the central bank on behalf of the government.

v. Bonds

Bonds are sometimes issued with stock warrants attached. Warrants are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date. Should the bondholder decide to exercise the option and purchase stock, it is not necessary to surrender the underlying bond. Again, bondholders will exercise their warrants only if the market value of the stock exceeds the specified (exercise) price of the warrant. Bonds are an important source of capital for the federal government, states and municipalities, and private corporations. However, private-sector equity financing in the form of common stock has historically been a more important source of financing.

Municipal bonds include all debt instruments issued by local, county, and state governments. Issuers use proceeds from the sale of municipal bonds to finance public utilities, school construction, roads, transportation systems, and industrial development. An appealing feature is that municipal bond interest payments to the holder are exempt from federal income taxation.

vi. Mortgages

Mortgages are long-term loans that are secured by real property. They are long-term liabilities collateralized by real property. Commonly, monthly payments are made that fully repay both principal and interest over the term of the loan. Mortgages are issued to purchase real estate. Commercial mortgages are used to finance real estate for business purposes, such as office buildings and shopping malls. These mortgages have consistently grown faster than multifamily-dwelling mortgages and even faster than home mortgages.


7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Akinde, M. A. O. (2006). Fundamentals and Practice of Business Finance, Lagos:
Abioudun-Kinson Nigeria Ltd.


119
 

Arnold, G.C. (2004). The Financial Times Guide to Investing: The Definitive Companion to
Investment and the Financial Markets, 2nd Edition, London: Financial Times.

Arnold, G. (2005). Corporate Financial Management, London: Financial Times/Prentice Hall Inc.

Blake, D. (2000). Financial Market Analysis, New York: Wiley.

Frank, W. and Alan, S. (2002). Business Accounting, London: Pitman Publishing.

Okijo, Y. (2000). Financial Management, Lagos: Laco Publishers.

Oye, A. (2005). Financial Management, Third edition. Lagos: El-Toda Ventures Ltd.

Robert, O. I. (1999). Financial Management Made Simple, Lagos: ROI Publishers.

Terry, L. (2003). Management Accounting, London: Gulidfold and King?s Lynn.








































120
 
UNIT 12: CAPITAL GAINS AND CONTINUOUS CASH FLOWS




CONTENTS

1.0 Introduction
2.0 Objectives
3.1 Cash Flow and Capital Gains
3.2 Capital Gains Investing
3.2.1 Principles of Capital Gains Investing
3.	3 Leveraging on Debts for Investment in Real Estate
3.3.1 Mortgage Financing in Property Investment
3.3.2 Borrowing from Private Lender for Property Investment
3.3.3 Real Estate Crowding Fund
4.0 Conclusion
5.0 Summary
6.0 Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Cash inflow can be realized from investment assets such as real estate, bonds, and stocks, among others. Such stream of incomes constitutes some kind of wealth, which can be generated from spreads like arbitrage. On the other hand, capital gains are generated from an appreciation on the value of investment assets such as stocks, which involves speculation. In this study unit, we are going to discuss such two issues namely cash flows and capital gains. The essence of the discussion is for you to equip yourself with the knowledge in terms of using it for taking advantage of investments, such as real estate and stock, which can generate for you both constant cash inflows and capital gains.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Differentiate between cash flow and capital gains
•	Explain capital gains investing
•	Identify and discuss principles of capital gains investing
•	Discuss leveraging on debts for investment in real estate
•	Explain mortgage financing in property investment
•	Discuss borrowing from private lender for investment
•	Explain real estate crowding fund








121
 
3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 CASH FLOW AND CAPITAL GAINS

Cash flow involves generating regular income from investment assets such as real estate, bonds, and stocks, among others. Capital gains are generated from an appreciation on the value of investment assets. For example, capital gains can be generated by buying stocks, involves speculation, hoping that the value (market price) appreciates and then selling them at the higher value for a gain. In a similar breadth, an investor can commit funds in assets like real estate, gold, silver, and even commodities with hope that their prices appreciate and then sell them for capital gains (Antone, 2017).

Cash flows constitute some kind of wealth, which can be generated from spreads (arbitrage). Arbitrage, as you have learned from Unit 6 in this study material, comes from leverage because arbitrage is form of leveraged strategy in investment. The analysis herein implies that you can leverage on investments using appropriate strategies to guarantee constant cash flows with which to enhance your personal networth. The constant cash flows serve as some kind of security in case of emergency which involves immediate use of money. The cash inflows constitute liquid asset, which is always available to meet transactional cash demand and precautional needs as well as speculative purposes.

According to Gardon (2014), in the investment world, there are two basic principles such as investing for capital gain and investing for cash flow. In order to ensure successful investment, the investor has to define his purpose by making a choice between the two. The capital gain may take some time to materialize while cash flows from investment can be generated with a short time. For instance, acquiring a building and restructuring it within some months can start generating cash inflows in a short time. Risk involved in property investment is very minimal. This is not comparable to generating cash flows through speculation or arbitrage, which is very risky because the investor can loose all the amount of investment.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1 Distinguish between cash flows and capital gains.

3.2 Capital Gains Investing

According Gardon (2014), there is a remarked difference between capital gains investing and the game of speculation. The author posits that capital gains investing is the art of buying and selling an asset for a profit such as profit realized from buying a stock and sell it at a higher price per share. This implies that that being successful at capital gains investing mainly depends on your ability to identify undervalued assets. Nevertheless, while there is an element of risk of speculation when investing for capital gains, the investing principle is never about speculating.

Successful capital gains investors are not known for engaging in buying and hope that the asset just appreciates for gains. Capital gains investing is a principle of buying below retail value and waiting for the asset to rise (its stage of maturity). This implies that it is not the game of buying at, or even above, retail price and hoping that inflation will occur to make a profit. This involves


122
 

speculating while the initial one is investing. Investors who invest for capital gains engage in researching for assets to be sure that they are trading below their intrinsic value.

Basically, a good way to understand capital gains investing (Gardon (2014) is by reference to value investment. In respect to value investment, investors assess certain aspects of an asset in order to determine the inherent upside potential in the future. Investment for capital gains involves carrying investigation on an asset to make sure that such is not already overpriced. Hence, some criteria would be brought into before investing in it.

For instance, when investing in stocks, you have to take appropriate precaution. Since the stock market is inundated with numerous types of industries, the first thing to do is to only invest in the industries you understand well. Investing in industries like stocks of firms producing mobile phones, which you cannot predict with certainty, should not be contemplated.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
Explain capital gains investing.

3.2.1 Principles of Capital Gains Investing

There are some principles which serve as best practices in capital gains investing. Such principles are as follows:

i)	Sell the stock not just because the value of the share has appreciated. The reason for selling the stock should be such that the asset is not worth the criteria which motivated you to buy it in the first instance.

ii)	Do not sell a particular stock just because the market suffers downturn. You should always keep in mind the market always fixes itself somehow in the course of time.

iii)	Do not engage in speculation. Regardless of the information you receive from analysts regarding taking up some stocks, you need to be sure that it meets your investment criteria before committing your funds. Make sure that the stock is really undervalued. Anything other than that is called speculating.

iv)	Engage in personal research a lot and only buy a few stocks at the same time, and try to diversify your investment portfolio. A successful investor in capital gains investing spends more time researching than investing.

v)	When you are investing for capital gains, you should ensure that you have a positive cash flow. This is because capital gains investing requires due diligence and patience. Speculation becomes tempting in the absence of a positive cash flow.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3

What are the basic principles guiding capital gains investing?



123
 
3. 3 LEVERAGING ON DEBTS FOR INVESTMENT IN REAL ESTATE

Based on leveraging the purchase of an investment property, the required periodic payments to service the debt facility spell some negative cash inflow right from the time of purchase. This is sometimes referred to as the “carry cost” of the investment. Therefore, in order to ensure profitable operations, the real estate investors must take appropriate steps to manage their cash flows to create enough positive returns from the property towards offsetting the carry costs.

3.3.1 Mortgage financing in property Investment

In property investment, in most cases, a large portion of the purchase price is financed using debt financial instrument such as a mortgage loan. Such loan or debt is usually collateralized by the property itself. The amount of the purchase price financed by debt is referred to as leverage. By implication the equity contribution by the investor in real estate is the amount financed by the investor's own capital. Such contribution can be in form of cash or other asset transfers. The ratio of leverage to total appraised value (or loan to value), for a conventional mortgage, refers to the measure of risk that the investor is taking by using leverage to finance the purchase of a property.

Investors in properties usually seek to reduce their equity requirements and increase their leverage. This is to ensure that their return on investment (ROI) is maximized. Commercial banks and other financial institutions as lenders, usually have minimum equity requirements for real estate investments. Such equity contribution in real estate investment in terms of financing can be about one fifth of the appraised value. Furthermore, the investors who are seeking low equity contribution can explore alternate financing arrangements, as part of the purchase of a property, such as seller financing, seller subordination, and private equity sources, among others.

3.3.2 Borrowing from Private Lender for property investment

In the event that the investment in property requires substantial repairs, for instance, traditional lenders like commercial banks may not be willing to lend on a property. One option that is left for the investor is borrowing from a private lender such as utilizing a short term bridge facility like a “hard money loan” from a lender. The term hard money loan is usually a short term loan for which the “hard money lender” charges a much higher interest rate due to the higher risky nature of the facility. Nevertheless, hard money loans are usually at a much lower loan-to-value ratio than the conventional mortgage loans.

3.3.3 Real Estate Crowding Fund

Another means of ensuring investment in real estate with some sort of raising equity financing in smaller amounts is through the real estate crowd funding. This equity financing method involves pooling funds, through accredited investors, together in a special purpose vehicle for all or part of the equity capital needed for the acquisition. This is very much in practice in the US.







124
 
SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 4

Mention and explain the various ways through which an investor can leverage on debts for earning constant cash flows in estate.

4.0 CONCLUSION

You have learned from this study unit that there is basic difference between cash flows investment and capital gains investing. A beginner in investment, from our discussion, is should go into investment for cash flow until such a time that he or she has a constant source of positive cash flow and can manage their emotions and expectations. Furthermore, an indepth understanding of the mechanism of the stock markets is required to make it in capital gains investing. Besides, if you?re planning for retirement, cash flow investing is considered to be better suited for you since it guarantees a constant income. Capital gains investing, on the other hand, is recommended for people who have constant flow of income such as salary, and not yet preparing for retirement. A constant flow of income will enable such people to stick to their investing habits regardless of the situation. Nevertheless, some degree of risk should be expected particularly when investing for capital gains.

5.0 SUMMARY

In this study unit, we have discussed topics such as listed below:

•	Cash Flow and Capital Gains;
•	Capital Gains Investing;
•	Principles of Capital Gains Investing;
•	Leveraging on Debts for Investment in Real Estate;
•	Mortgage Financing in Property Investment;

•	Borrowing from Private Lender for Property Investment; and
•	Real Estate Crowding Fund


6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT

1.	Distinguish between cash flows and capital gains.

2.	Mention and explain the various ways through which an investor can leverage on debts for earning constant cash flows in estate.


Answers to SAEs

1. Distinguish between cash flows and capital gains.

Cash flow involves generating regular income from investment assets such as real estate, bonds, and stocks, among others while capital gains are generated from an appreciation on the value of investment assets. For example, capital gains can be generated by buying stocks, involves

125
 

speculation, hoping that the value (market price) appreciates and then selling them at the higher value for a gain. In a similar breadth, an investor can commit funds in assets like real estate, gold, silver, and even commodities with hope that their prices appreciate and then sell them for capital gains.

2. Explain capital gains investing.

Capital gains investing is the art of buying and selling an asset for a profit such as profit realized from buying a stock and sell it at a higher price per share. This implies that that being successful at capital gains investing mainly depends on your ability to identify undervalued assets. Nevertheless, while there is an element of risk of speculation when investing for capital gains, the investing principle is never about speculating.

Successful capital gains investors are not known for engaging in buying and hope that the asset just appreciates for gains. Capital gains investing is a principle of buying below retail value and waiting for the asset to rise (its stage of maturity). This implies that it is not the game of buying at, or even above, retail price and hoping that inflation will occur to make a profit. This involves speculating while the initial one is investing. Investors who invest for capital gains engage in researching for assets to be sure that they are trading below their intrinsic value.

For instance, when investing in stocks, you have to take appropriate precaution. Since the stock market is inundated with numerous types of industries, the first thing to do is to only invest in the industries you understand well. Investing in industries like stocks of firms producing mobile phones, which you cannot predict with certainty, should not be contemplated.

3. What are the basic principles guiding capital gains investing?

i)	Sell the stock not just because the value of the share has appreciated. The reason for selling the stock should be such that the asset is not worth the criteria which motivated you to buy it in the first instance.

ii)	Do not sell a particular stock just because the market suffers downturn. You should always keep in mind the market always fixes itself somehow in the course of time.

iii)	Do not engage in speculation. Regardless of the information you receive from analysts regarding taking up some stocks, you need to be sure that it meets your investment criteria before committing your funds. Make sure that the stock is really undervalued. Anything other than that is called speculating.

iv)	Engage in personal research a lot and only buy a few stocks at the same time, and try to diversify your investment portfolio. A successful investor in capital gains investing spends more time researching than investing.

v)	When you are investing for capital gains, you should ensure that you have a positive cash flow. This is because capital gains investing requires due diligence and patience. Speculation becomes tempting in the absence of a positive cash flow.

126
 

4.	Mention and explain the various ways through which an investor can leverage on debts for earning constant cash flows in estate.

1. Mortgage financing in property Investment

In property investment, in most cases, a large portion of the purchase price is financed using debt financial instrument such as a mortgage loan. Such loan or debt is usually collateralized by the property itself. The amount of the purchase price financed by debt is referred to as leverage. By implication the equity contribution by the investor in real estate is the amount financed by the investor's own capital. Such contribution can be in form of cash or other asset transfers. The ratio of leverage to total appraised value (or loan to value), for a conventional mortgage, refers to the measure of risk that the investor is taking by using leverage to finance the purchase of a property.

Investors in properties usually seek to reduce their equity requirements and increase their leverage. This is to ensure that their return on investment (ROI) is maximized. Commercial banks and other financial institutions as lenders, usually have minimum equity requirements for real estate investments. Such equity contribution in real estate investment in terms of financing can be about one fifth of the appraised value. Furthermore, the investors who are seeking low equity contribution can explore alternate financing arrangements, as part of the purchase of a property, such as seller financing, seller subordination, and private equity sources, among others.

2. Borrowing from Private Lender for property investment

In the event that the investment in property requires substantial repairs, for instance, traditional lenders like commercial banks may not be willing to lend on a property. One option that is left for the investor is borrowing from a private lender such as utilizing a short term bridge facility like a “hard money loan” from a lender. The term hard money loan is usually a short term loan for which the “hard money lender” charges a much higher interest rate due to the higher risky nature of the facility. Nevertheless, hard money loans are usually at a much lower loan-to-value ratio than the conventional mortgage loans.

3. Real Estate Crowding Fund

Another means of ensuring investment in real estate with some sort of raising equity financing in smaller amounts is through the real estate crowd funding. This equity financing method involves pooling funds, through accredited investors, together in a special purpose vehicle for all or part of the equity capital needed for the acquisition; as is the practice in the US.

7.0 REFERENCES AND FURTHER READING

Antone, G. (2017). Cash Flow vs. Capital Gains. Accessed on 20 September, 2017 from http://www.noteworthyusa.com/cash-flow-vs-capital-gains/

Gardon, M. (2014).  Cash Flow vs. Capital Gains Investing: The Two Investing Paths. Access on

20	September, 2017 from https://www.thesimpledollar.com/cash-flow-capital-gains-investing-the-two-investing-paths/

127
 
UNIT 13: BUILDING PERSONAL CASH FLOWS (SAVINGS)


CONTENTS
1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Meaning of Saving
3.2	Importance of Saving
3.3	Different Methods of Saving Money
3.4	Differences between Saving and Savings
3.5	Reasons for Building Personal Cash Flows
3.5.1 Precautionary Motive

3.5.2 Transaction Motive
3.5.3 Speculative Motive
3.5.4 Portfolio Motive
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary
6.0 Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This study unit of the course material is used to discussed the nature and scope of building personal cash reserves which essentially involves saving of money by individuals for future use. The need to build personal cash reserves can be for specific reasons. These reasons for maintaining personal cash reserves can be explained in relation to the popular economic postulations such as precautionary motive, transaction motive, speculative motive, and portfolio motive. These motives for building personal cash flows in form of maintaining cash reserves, in essence, underscore the importance of savings generally. There are different ways through saving can be effected by individuals, and there are some differences between saving and savings as espoused in this study unit. Lastly, the unit also exposes you to the fact there is immense benefit that can be derived from saving to individuals and the economy at large.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Define and explain the term Saving
•	Discuss the importance of saving.
•	Identify the different methods of saving money
•	Mention the differences between saving and savings
•	List and explain reasons for building personal cash flows







128
 
3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 Meaning of Saving

Building personal cash flows essential involves the act of saving money towards maintaining cash reserves for future utilization. The Chambers Dictionary, 10th edition (2006) explains saving as being economical by reserving money for future use. Furthermore, the dictionary further explains that saving also refers to the money laid or set aside for future use. This implies that saving presupposes that the person involved tries to avoid being extravagant and wasteful in spending. In essence, to build personal cash reserves or maintain savings of money means that a person imbibes thrift instead of engaging in wasteful and unrestrained spending of money. And in order to develop saving habit, a person has to be economical in the use of money; being frugal or engage in frugality.

Savings can also be done with thrift and credit society or a cooperative society. The amount of money saved with any of this society is subject to earnings. A cooperative society as an aggregation of cooperators who pooled their funds together through regular saving does offer a potent means of building the personal cash flows for the members. In agricultural economy, savings might take the form of holding back some quantity of produce harvested as seeds or seedlings meant for in the next planting season. In fact, this is the usual practice among the famers particularly in the developing and underdeveloped economies.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Explain the term Saving.

3.2 Importance of Saving

Saving that gives rise to savings can be used for ensuring investment either by establishing business entity with its funds by the owner of the money or being borrowed by investors and customers for business operations. Nevertheless, increased saving does not always correspond to increased investment.

For instance, if savings are kept under the mattress, that is, otherwise not deposited into a financial intermediary such as a bank, there is no chance for those savings to be recycled as investment by business. This means that saving may increase without increasing investment, possibly causing a short-fall of demand. This does lead to implications such as a pile-up of inventories, a cut-back of production, lull in employment, and low aggregate income in the economy and thus a recession instead of economic growth.

In the short term, if saving falls below investment, it can lead to a growth of aggregate demand and an economic boom. In the long term if saving falls below investment, it eventually reduces investment and detracts from future growth. Future growth is made possible by foregoing present consumption to increase investment. However savings kept in a mattress at home cannot generate additional funds to the owners of the funds. This is because the money is not available as loan to the investors who can recycle the funds through the commercial banks or government through the central bank.


129
 

In respect of earnings on savings in the bank, classical economist posit that interest rates would adjust to equate saving and investment, while avoiding a pile-up of inventories of output in the economy (general overproduction). Furthermore, the classical economists postulate that a rise in saving would cause a fall in interest rates, stimulating investment, and therefore, investment would always equal saving.

In another perspective, Keynesian economists argue that neither saving nor investment is very responsive to interest rates, that is, that both were interest inelastic so that large interest rate changes are needed to re-equate them after overtime. Furthermore, the Keynesians posit that it is the demand for and supplies of stocks of money that determine interest rates in the short run. Thus, saving could exceed investment for significant amounts of time, causing a general and a recession in the economy.

3.3 Different Methods of Saving Money

Saving in another perspective refers to the part of income that is not spent, which involves deferred consumption. There are many methods of saving that include the following:

i)	Putting money aside in a savings account;
ii)	Reserving money in deposit account;
iii)	Setting money aside in a pension account regularly;
iv)	Committing money into an investment fund; and
v)	Putting money into cooperative fund.

Saving is also regarded as the practice of reducing personal expenditures, such as recurring costs. In respect of personal finance, saving generally connotes a low-risk preservation of money, as in a deposit account as opposed to investment in which risk is a lot higher. Broadly in economics terms, saving refers to any income that is not used for immediate consumption but reserved for future use.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3

Mention the different methods of saving money.


3.4 Differences between Saving and Savings

The distinction between saving and savings is often misunderstood to the extent that economists and investment professionals often use the two terms interchangeably. Nevertheless, in some ramifications, saving differs from savings. The differences are highlighted as follows:

i)	Saving is an act of increasing one's assets while the savings refers to one part of one's assets, usually deposits in savings accounts or to all of one's assets.

ii)	Saving refers to an activity occurring over time, which is known as “flow variable.”

On the other hand, savings refers to something that exists at any one time, known as a stock variable.


130
 

iii)	The part of a person's income that is spent on mortgage loan repayments is not spent on present consumption and is, therefore, saving.

iv)	Saving is closely related to physical investment, in that the former (saving) provides a source of funds for the latter (investment). But by not using income to buy consumer goods and services, the cash resources so saved constitute savings, which can be invested to produce fixed capital, such as factories and machinery.

v)	Saving is very vital towards building the amount of savings that an individual can maintain. Such accumulated funds can be utilized for acquisition of fixed capital or committed in outright investment.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 4

Explain the differences between saving and savings.


3.5 Reasons for Building Personal Cash Flows

There are obvious reasons which can motivate or induce you to build your personal cash flows such as savings. These reasons can broadly be categorized into three main purposes such as precautionary motive, transaction motive, speculative motive, and portfolio motive. All these are discussed as follows.

3.5.1 Transaction Motive

The transactions motive for money demand involves the need for liquidity, which refers to the need to hold money for use in day-to-day transactions in the near future. This need arises when income is received only occasionally, for instance, once in every month in discrete amounts but expenditures occur continuously.

Nevertheless, the amount of money a person desires to hold for transactions is also likely to depend on the prevailing nominal interest rate, which is a strong motivating factor. This arises due the lack of synchronization in time between when purchases are desired and when salary is actually paid. In other words, while workers may get their salary paid only once a month they generally make purchases almost on daily basis, and hence need money, over the course of the entire month.

The most well-known example of an economic model that is based on such considerations is the Baumol-Tobin model. In this model, an individual receives his/her income periodically, for example, only once per month. However, the person wishes to make purchases continuously; on daily basis. The person could carry his/her entire income with his/her at all times and use it to make purchases. Nevertheless, in this case the person would be giving up the (nominal) interest rate that he/she can get by holding the income in the bank.

The optimal strategy involves holding a portion of one's income in the bank and portion as liquid money. The money portion is continuously spent (or run down) as the individual makes purchases while he/she makes periodic but costly trips to the bank to replenish the holdings of

131
 

money. Basically, therefore, the demand for money resulting from the Baumol-Tobin model is based on the fact that the demand for real balances depends on both the income and the desired level of transactions, and on the nominal interest rate.

3.5.2 Precautionary Motive

This motive involves a desire to hold cash in order to be able to deal effectively with unexpected events that require cash outlay. In essence, it is the motive for people or firms to

hold money in case of emergencies, as opposed to the transaction motive where they hold money to use for some definite transaction in the future or the speculative motive where they hold money in the form of investments because they hope to make a capital gain.

In another perspective, precautionary motive refers to the desire of individuals to keep money (or cash) for unforeseen contingencies. This implies that people wish to hold some cash with which to provide for the risk of unforeseen events such as sickness, accident, and happenstance that requires urgent financial attention. The amount of money being held under this motive depends on the nature of individual and the conditions in which he/she lives. The demand for money for precautionary purpose is also closely related to the level of income. This implies that the high the level of income, the more money (or cash balances) that will be held for contingencies by the individuals.

In case of transaction motive, money is held for ordinary transactions while in precautionary motive, cash is kept to meet unforeseen transactions for contingencies. These are commitments that are not normally envisaged by individuals. Furthermore, under transaction motive, holding money is very convenient and value of money, in terms of other goods, is relatively certain. However, under precautionary motive, holding money depends on the degree of uncertainty, which implies that money is kept in the events of war or financial and less money during normal conditions. In general, the cash balances held for transaction and precautionary motives are directly dependent on the level of income.

3.5.3 Speculative Motive

Speculative Motive refers to the desire of individuals to keep cash balance as an alternative to financial assets such as bonds. Under this motive, it is presumed that people can hold their wealth either in form of bonds or in the form of cash balances. By implication, the decision to hold money in cash balances or bonds depend on te expectations about changes in the rate of interest or capital value of assets (bond) in future.

This reason for the demand for money is based on the fact that people can take advantage of investing their money or stock of savings in investible instruments in order to generate more money. Keynes (1923), in respect of laying out speculative reasons for holding money, stresses the choice between money and bonds. Accordingly, Keynes argues that if people expect the future nominal interest rate (the return on bonds) to be lower than the current rate they will then reduce their holdings of money and increase their holdings of bonds. Furthermore, Keynes stresses that if the future interest rate falls, then the price of bonds will increase and the investors will have realized a capital gain on the bonds they purchased.


132
 

The above analysis implies that the demand for money, on speculative basis, in any period of time will depend on both the current nominal interest rate and the expected future interest rate. This is in addition to the standard transaction motives which depend on income. In related terms, the fact that the current demand for money can depend on expectations of the future interest rates has implications for volatility of money demand. If these expectations eventually occur, as in Keynes' view, they are likely to change erratically and cause money demand to be quite unstable.

3.5.4 Portfolio Motive

This motive for holding cash is associated with the speculative motive but it entails more than the latter. The portfolio motive also focuses on demand for money over and above that required for carrying out transactions as espoused by Tobin (1956). He considered a situation where people decide to hold their wealth (not consumed) in a form of a low risk–low return asset (money) or high risk–high return asset such as bonds or equity shares. Basically, people desire the choice of a mix of these two types of assets (called portfolio), which is based on the risk associated with the expected return on such assets.

However, for a given expected rate of return, more risk averse individuals will prefer for money as a greater part of the assets in their portfolio. Similarly, given a person's degree of risk aversion, a higher expected return (nominal interest rate plus expected capital gains on bonds) will cause agents to shift away from safe money and into risky assets. Like in the other motivations above, this preference will create a negative relationship between the nominal interest rate and the demand for money.

This discussion is indicative of the fact that the Tobin model is based partly on the subjective rate of risk aversion as well as the objective degree of risk of other assets, which is measured by the standard deviation of capital gains and losses resulting from holding bonds and/or equity shares.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 5

Mention and explain the three main reasons for building personal cash flows in form of saving.


4.0 CONCLUSION

This unit of the course material has provided you with the basic ideas on the nature of building personal cash flows. This is mainly related to savings whereby you set aside some amount of your income for saving in the bank. Alternatively such amount of money can be saved with thrift and credit society or a cooperative society of your choice. There are some advantages accruing from saving your money a cooperative society such earning interest and gaining access to loan or credit facility. The issue of accessing loan or credit facility from a cooperative for which you are a member is easier than obtaining loan form a commercial bank based on your savings. Building personal cash flows, as you have learned from this study unit, is also associated with motives for holding money as opposed to spending all the amount of your income. These reasons include precautionary motive, transaction motive, speculative motive, and portfolio motive.




133
 
5.0 SUMMARY

In this initial study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning of Saving
•	Importance of Saving
•	Different Methods of Saving Money
•	Differences between Saving and Savings

•	Precautionary Motive for Building Personal Cash Flows;
•	Transaction Motive for Building Personal Cash Flows;
•	Speculative Motive for Building Personal Cash Flows; and
•	Portfolio Motive for Building Personal Cash Flows.

In the next study unit, you will be taken through personal financial planning.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	Identify your personal reasons for engaging in savings.
2.	What are methods of saving?
3 Identify the differences between saving and savings
4. Mention and explain the basic motives for holding cash.

Answers to Self-Assessment Exercises

1. Explain the term Saving.

Saving refers money laid or set aside for future use, which implies that saving presupposes that you try to avoid being extravagant and wasteful in spending and thereby building your personal cash reserves.


2. Explain the importance of saving.

Saving that gives rise to savings can be used for ensuring investment either by establishing business entity with its funds by the owner of the money or being borrowed by investors and customers for business operations.

3.	Mention the different methods of saving money. Different methods of saving money are as follows:
i)	Putting money aside in a savings account;
ii)	Reserving money in deposit account;
iii)	Setting money aside in a pension account regularly;
iv)	Committing money into an investment fund; and
v)	Putting money into cooperative fund.








134
 

4.	Explain the differences between saving and savings. The differences are highlighted as follows:

i)	Saving is an act of increasing one's assets while the savings refers to one part of one's assets, usually deposits in savings accounts or to all of one's assets.

ii)	Saving refers to an activity occurring over time, which is known as “flow variable.”

On the other hand, savings refers to something that exists at any one time, known as a stock variable.

iii)	The part of a person's income that is spent on mortgage loan repayments is not spent on present consumption and is, therefore, saving.

iv)	Saving is closely related to physical investment, in that the former (saving) provides a source of funds for the latter (investment). But by not using income to buy consumer goods and services, the cash resources so saved constitute savings, which can be invested to produce fixed capital, such as factories and machinery.

v)	Saving is very vital towards building the amount of savings that an individual can maintain.

5.	Mention and explain the three main reasons for building personal cash flows in form of saving.

The main reasons for building personal cash flows include the following motives.

i)	Precautionary motive:- This motive involves a desire to hold cash in order to be able to deal effectively with unexpected events that require cash outlay. In essence, it is the motive for people or firms to hold money in case of emergencies, as opposed to the transaction motive where they hold money to use for some definite transaction in the future or the speculative motive where they hold money in the form of investments because they hope to make a capital gain.

ii)	Transaction motive: - The transactions motive for money demand involves the need for liquidity, which refers to the need to hold money for use in day-to-day transactions in the near future. This need arises when income is received only occasionally, for instance, once in every month in discrete amounts but expenditures occur continuously.

iii)	Speculative motive: - This reason for the demand for money is based on the fact that people can take advantage of investing their money or stock of savings in investible instruments in order to generate more money. This involves using the amount held for speculating on bonds and other investible (financial) instruments.

iv)	Portfolio Motive:- The portfolio motive also focuses on demand for money over and above that required for carrying out transactions, which holds that people can decide to hold their wealth (not consumed) in a form of a low risk – low return asset (money) or high risk – high return assets such as bonds or equity shares. Basically, people desire the choice of a mix of these two types of assets (called portfolio), which is based on the risk associated with the expected return on such assets.




135
 
7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Benchimol, J. and Fourçans, A. (2012). Money and Risk in a DSGE Framework: A Bayesian
Application to the Eurozone, Journal of Macroeconomics, 34 (1): 95–111.

Benchimol, J., (2015). Money in the production function: a new Keynesian DSGE perspective,
Southern Economic Journal, 82(1): 152-184.

Benchimol, J. (2016). Money and monetary policy in Israel during the last decade. Journal of Policy Modeling, 38 (1): 103–124.

Goldfield, S. M. and Daniel E. Sichel (1990). The Demand for Money, Handbook of Monetary Economics, Elsevier.

Judd, J. P. and Scadding, J. L. (1982). The Search for a Stable Money Demand Function: A
Survey of the Post-1973 Literature," Journal of Economic Literature, 20(3): 993-1023.

Kotlikoff, L. J. (2008). Saving. In Henderson, D. R. Concise Encyclopedia of Economics (2nd ed.), Indianapolis: Library of Economics and Liberty.


Sriram, S. S. (2001). A Survey of Recent Empirical Money Demand Studies, IMF Staff Papers, 47(3). International Monetary Fund. 334-365.

Walsh, C. E. (1998). Monetary Theory and Policy, Cambridge: The MIT Press.
































136
 
UNIT 14: PERSONAL FINANCIAL PLANNING


CONTENTS

1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Meaning of Planning Personal Finances
3.2	Basic Issues in Personal Financial Planning
3.3	Personal Financial Planning Process
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary

6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This study unit of the course material is used to expose you to the workings of planning personal finances, which are necessary towards managing your money in effective and efficient manner. The unit is also used to identify the necessary issues involved in personal financial planning. Such considerations are necessary towards ensuring that you: understand the reason for conserving money; plan for the amount to save on periodic basis; decide on convenient time to start the savings; can use to budget in managing your money; and can diversify investment securities for your fund, among others. Furthermore, the unit also discusses the basic steps that are involved in personal financial planning process.


2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Define planning personal finances

•	List and explain basic issues in personal financial planning
•	Mention and discuss the steps involved in personal financial planning process

3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 Meaning of Planning Personal Finances

Generally, financial planning involves a wide variety of issues in relation to management of money that are cover terms such as budgeting, expenses, debt, saving, retirement and insurance among others. The understanding how these terms are interrelated, and affect each other is imperative towards laying the groundwork for a solid financial foundation for you and your family.




137
 

Personal finance planning refers to the financial management which an individual or a family unit performs with which to budget, save, and spend monetary resources over time. The process takes into consideration various financial risks and future life events. In the process of planning personal finances, it is necessary for the individual to consider the suitability to his or her needs in respect of a range of: banking products; areas of investment; and insurance products. This also calls for participation and monitoring or individual-or employer-sponsored retirement plans, social security benefits (if available), and income tax management. Banking products include deposit account, savings account, credit cards, and consumer loans; investment private equity products include stock, bonds, and mutual funds; and insurance products include life policy, health insurance policy, and disability insurance policy.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
What do you understand by personal finance planning?

3.2 Basic Issues in Personal Financial Planning

There are some important considerations that constitute simple tips for getting what you want from your money in terms of managing it effectively and efficiently.

1. Purpose of Conserving Money

For the initial issue, it is important to understand why money is important to you so as to guide you on every financial planning decision. Once you know the reason for conserving money, you could begin to make financial decisions that can enable you achieve the purpose. For instance, if the purpose of conserving money is for retirement income and spending like annuity, you have to take decision to fully fund the annuity (retirement) savings accounts on regular basis. If it is for the purpose of purchasing a house, you take decision to engage in mortgage savings. Furthermore, if the purpose of conserving money is for future education of the kids, you have take decision on how to create savings account for children education.

2. Decision on Amount of Regular Savings

The Decision on the purpose of conserving money will lead you in taking decision on the amount of money to commit to regular savings. Basically, the amount of money to save on regular basis largely depends on the amount of your income. Furthermore, the amount of regular savings also depend on the amount that you desire to devout to personal expenses at the instance of receiving the income (or salary).

The foundation of the decision is your income. This considers the amount of income that you earn regularly, your total personal expenses, and the net balance of the income; necessarily setting aside an amount of money for contingency regardless of whether you are single or having a family. It is instructive to note that commitments to the extent family members in financial terms should be factored into the equation of income and expenses to arrive at the amount of regular savings.




138
 
3. Decision on the Starting Point

The next issue to consider, after the decision on the amount of money to be committed in regular savings, is to assess your worth financially in respect of when it is feasible for you to commence the savings. The issue of your liabilities particularly the ones that are in form of outstanding debts and the ones that fall due for payment in subsequent periods must be taken cognizance of. So the scope of consideration becomes wider when all the necessary financial commitments to be offset and when they will be totally paid is germane to the decision.

4. Use Budgeting as a Tool

Spending decisions are not to be based on emotional reasons. More often than not, people engage in emotional spending before looking for evidence to support the decision. Budgeting for all your expenses and financial commitments is very germane to effective savings. In essence, you should try to be more deliberate about your purchases. Budgeting is very useful in helping you to turn around bad spending habits.

Budgeting should therefore, be seen as a tool for tracking your personal spending. Basically, the process of tracking your spending actually is hinged on awareness, which affects a behavioural change that enables you to structure your spending to align with your goals.

5. Save as Much as Possible.

When engaging in savings you do not have overstretch your finances by try to deprive yourself of the necessities of life. However, it is necessary to cut unnecessary expenses by not indulging in mundane things. For instance, you can cut down on monthly expenditure on internet data, which only enables you to chat with your friends and relations on social media platforms. Instead of spending amount of N2000 on monthly internet data, you can cut it to only N1000. There are so many other things on which you devout money that are not of necessity to wellbeing. The periodic expenses on such mundane things should be scaled down so that you can have reasonable amount of money to save on periodic basis.

6. Buy Life insurance Policy

It may be necessary to engage in life insurance policy if you so desire and your religion does not forbid you from doing so. The life insurance policy has dual advantage among others. Firstly, the policy can enable you secure loan facility with which to operate a business venture. Secondly, the life insurance policy enables you to pay less income tax because it is tax exempted just like allowances for your family. Therefore, taking life insurance policy provides you with a definite means of savings, which can be recouped in the future by you or your family, depending on the type of policy to which you may subscribe.

7. Utilizing Insurance Policy as Protection and Investment

Generally, insurance involves the analysis of how to protect a household from unforeseen risks.
These risks can be divided into liability, property, death, disability, health and long-term care.


139
 

Some of these risks may be self-insurable while most will require the purchase of an insurance contract. Determining how much insurance to get, at the most cost effective terms requires knowledge of the market for personal insurance. Business owners, professionals, athletes and entertainers require specialized insurance professionals to adequately protect themselves. Since insurance also enjoys some tax benefits, utilizing insurance investment products may be a critical piece of the overall investment planning.

8. Pay off your Debt

It is necessary not to default in paying your debts or postpone repayment of debts deliberately. It has been argued that paying off debts is a great investment. Basically you have to consider the cost associated with borrowing beside the principal amount of repayment. The debts that are not repaid on their due dates or deliberately ignored has two elements of financial implication. Firstly, the principal amount will remain the same or can be compounding if the debt is taken on compound interest basis. Secondly, the interest element too will be rising or compounding. In total sum, the amount that is due for repayment in the future will be so enormous to the extent that the debtor will become helpless; resorting only to bankruptcy. Therefore, the additional money saved from paying debts on regularly basis is available for savings and investment. Hence it is argued that “paying off debt is a great investment.”

9. Invest like a scientist.

The basic formula for successful investment from your savings involves some considerations. Firstly, diversify your portfolio, that is, appropriate combinations of investment. This is because it is too risky to invest in one kind of security. The advice is that you go with index funds or exchange-traded funds that contain hundreds of stocks, instead of one or two or even ten stocks. This strategy goes to lessen the risk that any one stock can hurt you.

Secondly, keep your costs low. Empirical evidence shows that the only one reliable predictor of how well an investment performs is cost. Basically, the more you pay for your investments, the less money you?ll end up keeping. Therefore, look for inexpensive securities. Thirdly, recognize the correlation between risk and reward. The greater risk you take the higher potential return. It is important to recognize that: you?ll likely earn more for stocks than for bonds; you?ll probably make more via small companies than large ones; and you?ll most likely have greater returns from financially weak companies than strong ones.

10. Make use of a Financial Adviser

The real purpose of having a financial adviser is to preclude you from being unemotional about your own money. Smartness in planning and managing your money does not preclude you from being emotional about your money. The financial adviser will help you avoid any potential mistakes.







140
 
11. Stick to Your Goals

You should try to stick to your financial and investment goals; stick to your portfolio of stock. The financial plan in the first place will help you stick to your goals. Another thing is that of automating your decisions so you don?t have to rely on yourself to keep making good choices over and over again. Lastly you have to be sure that you leave your plan alone. You have to cultivate financial and spending discipline. Do not indulge in inanities. Curtail your spending habits by spending only on necessities.

12. Tax planning

Typically, the income tax is the single largest expense in a household. Managing taxes is not a question whether or not taxes will be paid, but when and how much. The government gives many incentives in the form of tax deductions and credits, which can be used to reduce the lifetime tax burden. Most modern governments use a progressive tax. Typically, as one's income grows, a higher marginal rate of tax must be paid. Understanding how to take advantage of the myriad tax breaks when planning one's personal finances can make a significant impact.


SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
List and explain basic issues in Personal Financial Planning.



3.3 Personal Financial Planning Process

The key component of personal finance is financial planning, which is a dynamic process that requires regular monitoring and reevaluation. In general terms, the process involves five steps such as outlined and discussed below.

1) Assessment

A person's financial situation is assessed by compiling simplified versions of financial statements including balance sheet and income statements. A personal balance sheet lists the values of personal assets (e.g., car, house, clothes, stocks, bank account), along with personal liabilities (e.g., credit card debt, bank loan, mortgage). A personal income statement lists personal income and expenses.

2) Goal setting

It is necessary to have multiple goals that include a mix of short- and long-term goals. For example, a long-term goal would be to "retire at age 65 with a personal net worth of some million of naira in the bank account. And a short-term goal would be to save some money for purchasing a new car in the next six months. Setting financial goals helps to direct financial planning. Goal setting is done with an objective to meet specific financial requirements.




141
 
3) Plan Creation

The financial plan details how to accomplish the goals. It could include, for example, reducing unnecessary expenses, increasing the employment income, or investing in the stock market.

4) Execution

Execution of a financial plan often requires discipline and perseverance. It may be necessary to seek assistance from professionals such as accountants, financial analysts, investment advisers, and lawyers.

5) Monitoring and reassessment

On the basis of passage of time in reaction to the financial plan execution, it is advisable that the financial plan is monitored for possible adjustments or reassessments. It may be necessary to institute some milestones for the monitoring and evaluation of the execution of the financial plan.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
Mention and explain five steps involved in personal financial planning process.


4.0 CONCLUSION

This unit of the course material has provided you with insight into the need to plan for your finances in order to have meaningful living during your working days and even after retirement. In addition, the basic issues involved in planning for personal finance such as the amount to save, when to start saving, budgeting for the funds, execution of the plan, and monitoring as well as evaluation, among others, are vital in financial planning. All said, it is also necessary to consider tax plan, paying off debts to avoid financial hiccups, taking up insurance policies for yourself, the family and your property.

5.0 SUMMARY

In this study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning of Planning Personal Finances;
•	Basic Issues in Personal Financial Planning; and
•	Personal Financial Planning Process

In the next study unit, you will be taken through capital gains and continuous cash flows.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	What is Differentiate between cash savings and cash investment.
2.	Discuss the nature of savings account.

3.	Mention the differences between savings account and current account.



142
 
Answers to Self Assessment Exercises

1. What do you understand by personal finance planning?

Personal finance planning refers to the financial management which an individual or a family unit performs with which to budget, save, and spend monetary resources over time. The process takes into consideration various financial risks and future life events. In the process of planning personal finances, it is necessary for the individual to consider the suitability to his or her needs in respect of a range of: banking products; areas of investment; and insurance products.

2. List and explain basic issues in Personal Financial Planning.

i. Purpose of Conserving Money

For the initial issue, it is important to understand why money is important to you so as to guide you on every financial planning decision. Once you know the reason for conserving money, you could begin to make financial decisions that can enable you achieve the purpose.

ii. Decision on Amount of Regular Savings

The Decision on the purpose of conserving money will lead you in taking decision on the amount of money to commit to regular savings. Basically, the amount of money to save on regular basis largely depends on the amount of your income. Furthermore, the amount of regular savings also depend on the amount that you desire to devout to personal expenses at the instance of receiving the income (or salary).

iii. Decision on the Starting Point

The next issue to consider, after the decision on the amount of money to be committed in regular savings, is to assess your worth financially in respect of when it is feasible for you to commence the savings. The issue of your liabilities particularly the ones that are in form of outstanding debts and the ones that fall due for payment in subsequent periods must be taken cognizance of. So the scope of consideration becomes wider when all the necessary financial commitments to be offset and when they will be totally paid is germane to the decision.

iv. Use Budgeting as a Tool

Spending decisions are not to be based on emotional reasons. More often than not, people engage in emotional spending before looking for evidence to support the decision. Budgeting for all your expenses and financial commitments is very germane to effective savings. In essence, you should try to be more deliberate about your purchases. Budgeting is very useful in helping you to turn around bad spending habits.

v. Save as Much as Possible.




143
 

When engaging in savings you do not have overstretch your finances by try to deprive yourself of the necessities of life. However, it is necessary to cut unnecessary expenses by not indulging in mundane things.

vi. Buy Life insurance Policy

It may be necessary to engage in life insurance policy if you so desire and your religion does not forbid you from doing so. The life insurance policy has dual advantage among others such as using it to secure loan and being treated as tax deductible.

vii. Utilizing Insurance Policy as Protection and Investment

Insurance is necessary to protect a household from unforeseen risks. These risks can be divided into liability, property, death, disability, health and long-term care. Some of these risks may be self-insurable while most will require the purchase of an insurance contract. Determining how much insurance to get, at the most cost effective terms requires knowledge of the market for personal insurance. Since insurance also enjoys some tax benefits, utilizing insurance investment products may be a critical piece of the overall investment planning.

viii. Pay off your Debt

It is necessary not to default in paying your debts or postpone repayment of debts deliberately. It has been argued that paying off debts is a great investment. Basically you have to consider the cost associated with borrowing beside the principal amount of repayment. The debts that are not repaid on their due dates or deliberately ignored has obvious implications.

ix. Invest like a scientist.

The basic formula for successful investment from your savings involves some considerations. It is important to diversify your portfolio, that is, appropriate combinations of investment. This is because it is too risky to invest in one kind of security. The advice is that you go with index funds or exchange-traded funds that contain hundreds of stocks, instead of one or two or even ten stocks. This strategy goes to lessen the risk that any one stock can hurt you.

x. Make use of a Financial Adviser

The real purpose of having a financial adviser is to preclude you from being unemotional about your own money. Smartness in planning and managing your money does not preclude you from being emotional about your money. The financial adviser will help you avoid any potential mistakes.

xi. Stick to Your Goals

You should try to stick to your financial and investment goals; stick to your portfolio of stock. The financial plan in the first place will help you stick to your goals. Another thing is that of automating your decisions so you don?t have to rely on yourself to keep making good


144
 

choices over and over again. Lastly you have to be sure that you leave your plan alone. You have to cultivate financial and spending discipline. Do not indulge in inanities. Curtail your spending habits by spending only on necessities.

xii. Tax planning

Typically, the income tax is the single largest expense in a household. Managing taxes is not a question whether or not taxes will be paid, but when and how much. The government gives many incentives in the form of tax deductions and credits, which can be used to reduce the lifetime tax burden. Most modern governments use a progressive tax. Typically, as one's income grows, a higher marginal rate of tax must be paid. Understanding how to take advantage of the myriad tax breaks when planning one's personal finances can make a significant impact.

3. Mention and explain five steps involved in personal financial planning process.

The five steps involved in personal financial planning process as are follows.

i) Assessment

A person's financial situation is assessed by compiling simplified versions of financial statements including balance sheet and income statements. A personal balance sheet lists the values of personal assets (e.g., car, house, clothes, stocks, bank account), along with personal liabilities (e.g., credit card debt, bank loan, mortgage). A personal income statement lists personal income and expenses.

ii) Goal setting

It is necessary to have multiple goals that include a mix of short- and long-term goals. For example, a long-term goal would be to "retire at age 65 with a personal net worth of some million of naira in the bank account. And a short-term goal would be to save some money for purchasing a new car in the next six months. Setting financial goals helps to direct financial planning. Goal setting is done with an objective to meet specific financial requirements.

iii) Plan Creation

The financial plan details how to accomplish the goals. It could include, for example, reducing unnecessary expenses, increasing the employment income, or investing in the stock market.

vi) Execution

Execution of a financial plan often requires discipline and perseverance. It may be necessary to seek assistance from professionals such as accountants, financial analysts, investment advisers, and lawyers.






145
 
v) Monitoring and reassessment

On the basis of passage of time in reaction to the financial plan execution, it is advisable that the financial plan is monitored for possible adjustments or reassessments. It may be necessary to institute some milestones for the monitoring and evaluation of the execution of the financial plan.

7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Ariely, Dan (July 2009).The End of Rational Economics, Harvard Business Review. Accessed on 14 January, 2016 from https://www.aicpa.org/interestareas/ personalfinancialplanning/… pdf

Kwok, H., Milevsky, M., and Robinson, C. (1994) Asset Allocation, Life Expectancy, and Shortfall, Financial Services Review, 1994, vol 3(2), pg. 109-126.

Opdyke, J.D. (2010). Complete Personal Finance Guidebook, The Wall Street Journal Guidebook, New York: Crown Publishing Group.

Tahira, K. H. (2009). Personal Finance: Past, Present, and Future, Social Science Research Network. Iowa State University - Department of Human Development and Family Studies: 4–16.


































146
 
UNIT 15: MAINTAINING SAVINGS ACCOUNT FOR CASH RESERVES


CONTENTS
1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Cash Savings versus Cash Investment
3.2	Nature of Savings Account.
3.3	Features of Savings Account
3.4	Advantages and Disadvantages of Saving Account

3.4.1 Advantages of Saving Account
3.4.2 Disadvantages of Savings Accounts

3.5	Differences between Savings Account and Current Accounts
4.0	Conclusion

5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This study unit of the course material is used to expose you to the fact that saving in respect of personal finance involves nominal conservation of money for future use. A deposit account paying interest is typically used to hold money for future needs. And such savings can be utilized to make a capital purchase or for investment purposes. This study unit also incorporates the nature of savings account in which accumulated funds can be kept. Furthermore, this unit also features advantages as well as disadvantages that are inherent in savings account, and the differences between savings account and current account.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Differentiate between cash savings and cash investment
•	Discuss the nature of savings account
•	Mention the features of savings account
•	Identify the advantages and disadvantages of savings account

•	Mention the differences between savings account and current account

3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 Cash Savings versus Cash Investment

The act of saving in respect of personal finance corresponds to nominal conservation of money for future use. A deposit account paying interest is typically used to hold money for future needs. Such savings constitutes an emergency fund, which can be utilized to make a capital purchase or for use in meeting others purposes.

147
 

Within personal finance, money that is used to purchase shares, committed in an investment fund or used to buy any asset where there is an element of capital risk is regarded as an investment. This is an important distinction because the investment risk can cause a capital loss when the investment is realized, unlike cash savings.

Cash savings accounts are considered to have minimal risk. In many economies around the world, all commercial banks are required to maintain deposit insurance, which is normally issued by the deposit insurance corporations or agencies as the case may be. The deposit insurance corporation is normally established to prevent the loss of cash deposits in the event of a bank failure. The notable bank failure is at the instance of the Great Depression in the United States of America within 1929-1932. The advent of deposit insurance arrangement has come to prevent such great loss occurring ever again.

The terms saving and investment are used interchangeably, in many instances. For example, many deposit accounts are regarded as investment accounts by some commercial banks for the purposes of marketing. Basically, on one hand, money that is invested (or saved) in cash is regarded as savings. On the other hand, if money is invested (or committed) in any type of asset which can fluctuate in nominal value, then it is regarded as an investment.

A savings account is a kind of bank account held at a retail bank or other designated bank that pays interest but cannot be used directly as money in the narrow sense of a medium of exchange, for example, by writing a cheque. These accounts let customers set aside a portion of their liquid assets while earning a monetary return. For the bank, money in a savings account may not be callable immediately and, in some jurisdictions, does not incur a reserve requirement. Cash in the bank's vaults may thus be used, for example, to fund interest-paying loans.

Current account is used to keep money in the bank but its funds can be accessed by the owner of the account every time he/she desires with the use of cheque. The owner of current account can make payments through standing orders with the bank. The owners of current accounts, in most cases, are not entitled to interest payments by the bank on their standing balances. On the contrary, they are associated with commission on turnover on the basis of the number of transactions on the account in a given period of time.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Differentiate between cash savings and cash investment

3.2 Nature of Savings Account.

Savings account refers to a bank account on which interest is paid. Traditionally, savings account is the type of account for which a bankbook is used to record deposits, withdrawals, and interest payments. Savings accounts are normally opened towards encouraging the people to conserve money and collect their cash for use in the future.

In general terms, savings account involves keeping money in bank account or other depository institution account: from which withdrawals can be made; interest accrues on the account balance; does not have any maturity date; and usually does not require a minimum balance.



148
 
These	features,	though	not	exhaustive,	explain	the	nature	of	savings	account.

Commercial banks, microfinance banks, and other type of bank as the case may be in some other countries like State bank of India, Bank of India, etc. accept cash for the purpose of savings for individual savers. In some other countries around the world, just like in Nigeria in the past, postal departments of the General Post Offices accept deposits by way of opening saving bank account with them for individual savers.

The saving account is generally opened in banks by: salary earners; the persons who have a fixed regular income; and those who depend on transfer incomes from their other people such parents and relations or the government in countries where some people are entitled to social security payments. Furthermore, the savings account facility is also given to students, senior citizens, and pensioners, among other groups of people.

In Nigeria, savings account can be opened by going through the necessary formalities in commercial banks, mortgage banks, and microfinance banks. The initial amount required for deposit varies from N1,000 to N5,000, depending on the particular bank being patronized by an individual. The saving account holder is allowed to withdraw money from the account as and when required. The interest which is given on saving accounts is sometime attractive, but often nominal. Presently, the rate of interest ranges between 2% to 5% per annum, on the average, in Nigeria.

In general terms, the interest rates can also be negotiated just like in the case of fixed deposits account; varying according to the amount of money being deposited in the saving account, scheme opted for, and its maturity range. It is also subject to current trend of banking policies in any country.

Some individuals use savings accounts to save up money for a specific goal, such as a down payment on a home or a future vacation. Others have no specific plans for the money, but use the account as a way to store their cash in a safe place while earning a return on it. Some savings accounts are used as an emergency fund, allowing an individual or family to save money safely to be used in case of emergency circumstances, such as job loss or hospitalization. An ATM card can often be linked to a savings account, but this card can only be used at automated teller machines, not as a debit card to buy things at stores.

3.3 Features of Savings Account

Generally, the main features of savings account in bank include the following.

1.	The main objective of saving account is to promote savings.
2.	There is no restriction on the number and amount of deposits.
3.	Withdrawals are allowed subject to certain restrictions in some instances.
4.	The money can be withdrawn either by withdrawal slip or cheque of the respective bank.

5.	The rate of interest payable is very nominal on saving accounts. At present it is between 2% to 5% per annum, on the average, in Nigeria.

6.	Saving account is of continuing nature. There is no maximum period of holding.


149
 

7.	A minimum amount is required, by some banks, to be kept in savings account to keep it functioning.

8.	There is no loan facility associated with savings account.

9.	Electronic clearing System (ECS) or E-Banking is available which with effect payment for electricity bill, telephone bill and other routine household expenses.

10.	Generally, equated monthly installments (EMI) for housing loan, personal loan, car loan, etc., are paid (routed) through saving bank account.

However, some countries such as Nigeria require details of accounts to be furnished to the Financial Intelligence agency in the event that the amount being deposited exceeds a bench mark of five millions of naira. Also in India, mandatory Permanent Account Number details are required to be furnished for doing cash transactions exceeding 50,000 rupees.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
What are the features of a savings account?

3.4 Advantages and Disadvantages of Saving Account

3.4.1 Advantages of Saving Account

The advantages of saving account include the following. i) Savings accounts are easy to obtain because they generally do not require much formalities such as referees.

ii)	They are a safe way to store money in a bank instead of keeping the cash under the mattress or inside the pillows.

iii)	They often attract some small amount of interest on the money deposited in the accounts.

iv)	The interest payable generally for savings account is more than that of current accounts (checking accounts), if at all it attracts any interests, or money market instruments.

v)	Savings account encourages savings habit among salary earners and others who have fixed income or transfer earnings.

vi)	It enables the depositor to earn income by way of saving bank interest.

vii)	Savings account helps the depositor to make payment by way of transfers or issuing cheques where available.

viii)	It shows total income of salary earners and other persons who are savers during the year.
ix)	Savings account passbook acts as an identity and residential proof of the account holder.
x)	It provides a facility such as Electronic fund transfer (EFT) to other people's accounts.
xi)	It aids to keep records of all online transactions carried out by the account holder.
xii)	It provides immediate funds as and when required through ATM.

3.4.2 Disadvantages of Savings Accounts

While savings account has advantages, it also has some disadvantages which are highlighted as follows.

i)	The liquidity of a savings account as one of its key benefits also makes the funds too readily available, which could tempt you to spend them.



150
 
ii)	Savings account attracts payment of lower interest rates than the current account.

iii)	Savings account is not ideal for use in keeping funds over a long period of time unlike the fixed deposit accounts.

iv)	Savings account is not associated with the chequeing system in most cases because only a few banks provide cheques for savings accounts.

v)	Some banks may introduce restrictions on withdrawals and the least balance to be maintained in savings accounts.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
What are the advantages of a savings account?

3.5 Differences between Savings Account and Current Account

In deposit terminology, the term savings Account refers to a bank account opened with a deposit of liquid funds and without having a given maturity date. Savings accounts usually have some restrictions on the number of withdrawals per statement period, and they tend to pay a relatively low rate of interest. The amount required to open savings account can be very minimal but a substantial amount of money is required to open a current account.

Although the terms of specific savings Accounts can vary among financial institutions and countries, savings Accounts tend to differ from checking accounts because they cannot usually be used as money by allowing the account holder to make a virtually unlimited number of withdrawals per statement cycle via check or debit card. For example, in some countries, only up to six withdrawals from a Savings Account can be made per statement cycle without incurring a penalty, although the number of deposits per cycle is generally not limited.

There are specific requirements that are associated with current accounts. These requirements include provision of references or referees, referees must be current accounts holders, and some banks such as in Nigeria, the referees must not be salary accounts holders even if they are current accounts.

Savings Accounts are provided by retail banks, savings and loan corporations and credit unions that are usually regulated within the country in which they operate. Savings accounts are used by individuals and businesses around the world as a means of storing their liquid funds for future use. On the other hand, current accounts are usually reserved for those who much money such as wealthy individuals, high networth individuals, institutions, businesses and corporate entities.

Current or cheque account does not attract interest payments but the holders are charged commission on turnover (COT) on regular or monthly basis depending on the volume of transactions on the account. Current accounts can be operated with commercial banks, merchant banks, microfinance banks, and other financial institutions depending on the country involved.




151
 

Substantial investment security is provided by savings Accounts held with reputable and insured financial institutions, but as a result of this perceived lack of risk, they usually only offer a low nominal rate of return or interest to the holder on deposits. Higher returns on Savings Accounts can sometimes be obtained from online savings accounts, but the risks in doing so may be greater, especially if the financial institution taking the deposit is uninsured and or poorly capitalized.

Savings account holders in Nigeria are only restricted in withdrawing their money by leaving a minimum balance but in some other banks, no restrictions are imposed due to stiff competition in the banking industry. However, holders of Savings Accounts in the United States, for instance, are permitted only up to six withdrawals per statement cycle without incurring a penalty. Nevertheless, the number of deposits per cycle into a Savings Account is generally not limited.

In Nigeria, savings account depositors are insured by their banks with the National Deposit Insurance Corporation (NDIC) against bank distress or failure. This ensures savings account depositors? access to prescribed refund in any eventuality. Furthermore, In the United States, savings account deposits are protected up to a certain amount by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or FDIC when made with FDIC member financial institutions.

4.0 CONCLUSION

This unit of the course material has provided you with the basic fact that the act of saving in respect of personal finance corresponds to nominal conservation of money for future use. A deposit account paying interest is typically used to hold money for future needs. Money that is used to purchase shares, committed in an investment fund or used to buy any asset where there is an element of capital risk is regarded as an investment. Savings account refers to a bank account with features such as: interest payment by the bank; issuance of a bankbook to record deposits, withdrawals, and interest payments; and lack of loan facility, among others. Savings account encourages savings habit, enables depositor to earn income, helps depositor to make payments, and shows total income of salary earners and other persons during the year, among others. Savings account differs from current account in areas such requirements for opening the accounts, amount required for initial deposits, and payment of interest, among others.

5.0 SUMMARY
In this study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Cash Savings versus Cash Investment;
•	Nature of Savings Account;
•	Features of Savings Account;
•	Advantages and disadvantages of Saving Account; and

•	Differences between Savings Account and Current Account

In the next study unit, you will be taken through personal financial planning.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	Differentiate between cash savings and cash investment

152
 
2.	Discuss the nature of savings account

3.	Mention the differences between savings account and current account

Answers to Self-Assessment Exercises

1. Differentiate between cash savings and cash investment

The terms saving and investment are used interchangeably, in many instances. For example, many deposit accounts are regarded as investment accounts by some commercial banks for the purposes of marketing. Basically, on one hand, money that is invested (or saved) in cash is regarded as savings. On the other hand, if money is invested (or committed) in any type of asset which can fluctuate in nominal value, then it is regarded as an investment.

2. What are the features of a savings account?
The main features of savings account in bank include the following.
i)	The main objective of saving account is to promote savings.
ii)	There is no restriction on the number and amount of deposits.
iii)	Withdrawals are allowed subject to certain restrictions in some instances.
iv)	The money can be withdrawn either by withdrawal slip or cheque of the respective bank.

v)	The rate of interest payable is very nominal on saving accounts. At present it is between 2% to 5% per annum, on the average, in Nigeria.

vi)	Saving account is of continuing nature. There is no maximum period of holding.

vii)	A minimum amount is required, by some banks, to be kept in savings account to keep it functioning.

viii)	There is no loan facility associated with savings account.

ix)	Electronic clearing System (ECS) or E-Banking is available which with effect payment for electricity bill, telephone bill and other routine household expenses.

x)	Generally, equated monthly installments (EMI) for housing loan, personal loan, car loan, etc., are paid (routed) through saving bank account.

3.	What are the advantages of a savings account? The advantages of saving account include the following.

i) Savings accounts are easy to obtain because they generally do not require much formalities such as referees.

ii) They are a safe way to store money in a bank instead of keeping the cash under the mattress or inside the pillows.

iii) They often attract some small amount of interest on the money deposited in the accounts.

iv) The interest payable generally for savings account is more than that of current accounts (checking accounts), if at all it attracts any interests, or money market instruments.

v) Savings account encourages savings habit among salary earners and others who have fixed income or transfer earnings.

vi)  It enables the depositor to earn income by way of saving bank interest.

vii) Savings account helps the depositor to make payment by way of transfers or issuing cheques where available.

viii) It shows total income of salary earners and other persons who are savers during the year. ix) Savings account passbook acts as an identity and residential proof of the account holder. x) It provides a facility such as Electronic fund transfer (EFT) to other people's accounts.


153
 
xi)	It aids to keep records of all online transactions carried out by the account holder.
xii)	It provides immediate funds as and when required through ATM.

7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Akrani,	(2011). Savings Account: Meaning, Features, Advantages. Accessed on 14 January, 2016 from http://www.businessdictionary.com/definition/savings-account.html

Coila, B. (2016). What Is Definition of Savings Account? Accessed on 14 January, 2016 from http://www.livestrong.com/article/58780-definition-savings-account/

Dell'Amore, G. (1983). Household Propensity to Save. In Arnaldo Mauri (ed.). Mobilization of Household Savings, a Tool for Development, Finafrica, Milan.

Kotlikoff, Laurence J. (2008). Saving. In David R. Henderson, Concise Encyclopedia of Economics (2nd ed.). Indianapolis: Library of Economics and Liberty.

Modigliani, F. (1988). The Role of Intergenerational Transfers and the Life-cycle Saving in the Accumulation of Wealth, Journal of Economic Perspectives, 2, 1988.







































154
 
UNIT 16: PLANNING FOR CONTINGENCY FUND




CONTENTS

1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Meaning of Contingency Fund
3.2	Types of Contingency Fund

3.2.1 Short-term Contingency Fund
3.2.2 Long-term Contingency Fund
3.3	Commitments Qualifying for Contingency Fund
3.4	Essential Qualities of Contingency Fund
3.5	Accumulating Your Emergency Fund
3.6	Investing the Emergency Fund
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This study unit of the course material is used to expose you to the important issue of planning for contingency fund, which is also regarded as emergency fund in some literature. Building emergency fund is very essential toward meeting contingencies, which are not envisaged when they will actually take place and involves the use of amount of money. In planning for emergency funds, certain strategies which are to be taken into considerations, such that the regular contribution can be reasonable and the fund being kept in accessible ways, are also discussed in this unit. Furthermore, the unit also discusses the ideal ways through which to invest the contingency fund.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Define of contingency fund
•	List and explain two types of contingency fund
•	Mention and discuss commitments qualifying for contingency fund
•	Identify and explain essential qualities of contingency fund

•	Discuss the accumulating your emergency fund
•	Identify and explain wise ways for investing the emergency fund







155
 
3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 Meaning of Contingency Fund

An integral tenet of good financial planning for an individual involves preparing for the future due to its uncertain nature. Therefore, an indispensable constituent of a concrete financial plan for you is a contingency fund or an emergency fund.

A contingency or an emergency fund is premeditated to cover a financial shortfall with which to take care of an unexpected financial commitment in the foreseeable future. Your emergency fund can serve as an avenue to secure the money you need when you find yourself in dire strait. Since a contingency must be reliable, this therefore, requires that it needs to be held in form of guaranteed investments. This implies that savings accounts are good for emergency funds, while stocks are bad.

A contingency or emergency fund, in general terms, also needs to be held in liquid assets, otherwise short-term, accessible investments. Ideally, you would not need to use the money in your emergency fund o any flimsy commitments, and hence you will have to maintain it for the long-term commitment. Nevertheless, this delicate balance creates an interesting challenge; a long-term account holding short-term, low-interest bearing investments.

It is instructive to note that an emergency fund is not supposed to be a slush fund set aside for large entertainment and leisure purposes. The desire to acquire a new big TV screen cannot be regarded as an emergency regardless the fact that your old TV breaks down.

When you build up some money for contingency purposes, you are bound to have peace of mind. Your money is readily available because it will just be waiting to be called into use when occasion arises. The availability of the fund precludes you from scrambling to come up with money you need and you don?t have to turn to personal loans, which may not be readily available to cover the emergency. Sometime your emergency fund may not be big enough to cover everything but it can still help in reducing the amount of money you must look for from friends and family.

In terms of large your emergency fund should be, personal finance experts recommends that the contingency fund contain three months? worth of expenses. In this economic hard time, the advice is to have at least six months? worth of expenses saved up. However, building an emergency fund can be difficult during a trying economy. If you are trying to get out of debt, one approach is to first build up a reasonable sum for emergency fund, and then redirect your efforts toward eliminating your debt. In the event that you are debt-free, you have to continue building your emergency fund further.

In respect of determining what constitutes six months? worth of expenses, you have to add up the amount you spend each month in your household budget categories and multiply by six. In this respect, make sure you include the amount you pay on your debts or mortgage, utilities, car loans, insurance, groceries, and other essential expenditures. It is also advisable to include entertainment items and incidentals that crop up during the month as well.


156
 

Furthermore, you should account for bills or other expenses that only come due once or a few times per year, for instance, your motor insurance and other paper renewals as well as amount being spent on changing car tyres on periodic basis or once every year.

Basically, therefore, the amount of money you put in each of your short and long-term emergency funds will depend on what you can afford and what you?re comfortable with. For instance, you can keep about N2,000 in the short-term fund, while building up six months? worth of expenses in the long-term fund.


SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
What is Contingency Fund?

3.2 Types of Contingency Fund

Contingency fund can be categorized into main areas such as short-term and long-term. Such distinction is essential towards ensuring that the fund is invested in such a way that will enhance return on the money in investment.

3.2.1 Short-term Contingency Fund

The Short-term Contingency Fund is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated. The essence of the short-term contingency fund should be in an accessible account, which will probably bear little interest. The most important consideration herein is accessibility. You may want an account that is attached to debit card and check-writing privileges as well. The purpose of your short-term emergency fund is for smaller emergencies such as car repairs or replacing a major appliance that has become dysfunctional. It can also be used as a connection to get you through the few days until you can access your long-term emergency funds in case of a more extreme situation.

3.2.2 Long-term Contingency Fund

A long-term emergency fund allows you to save for large-scale emergencies occasioned by events such as loss of job and major natural disaster like an earthquake or fire, and thereby earn a slightly higher level of interest. Accessibility to the fund is still important for consideration. However, it is appropriate to choose investments that take some months or years to liquidate as long as you have a short-term emergency fund to cover you in the interim.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
Differentiate between short-term contingency fund and long-term contingency fund.

3.3 Commitments Qualifying for Contingency Fund

In order to ensure that your contingency fund is there when you need it, you need to be able to identify a true emergency. A true emergency is a situation that requires some sort of immediate


157
 

action, and that can affect your long-term well-being or impact the viability of an important asset such as your home.

Some situations that constitute true emergencies might include the following events.

i) Health related emergency

Emergency on health related ground normally warrants saving for particularly if you are not qualified for treatment under health insurance scheme. Therefore, you can save money on health related issues and put less strain on your emergency fund.

ii)	Need to travel or finance other arrangements

Such sudden need for travelling can arise as a result of a family emergency, such as a death in the extended family system as is the case in the African tradition. In some cases, you may have to go for loan in order to finance the huge amount involved in meeting burial expenses. This can happen when one?s parent is involved. In some cases, you may have to renovate the family house or even build a new one before burial could take place while expenses would be incurred in keeping the dead body in the mortuary.

iii) Major unexpected car repairs

This happens often in terms of meeting for damages caused by a car accident or paying for a new engine. Routine car maintenance, however, should be scheduled into your monthly budget. You could even follow vehicle maintenance tips being published in some newspapers in order to save money.

iv) Failure of a major appliance

Emergency can arise in relation to breakdown of major household appliances such as failure of

the deep freezer, the furnace (for heating the house) suddenly stops working or the major security door has serious problem. You may need to pay for replacement for any of these emergencies quickly as it occurs.

v)	Large and unexpected home repairs

A major home repair may occur as a result of occurrence of natural disasters such as tornado, earthquake, landslide, and volcanic eruption. Such occurrence can spell major destruction to your property, and in some instances, people do lose their entire buildings. In the latter case, reconstruction becomes inevitable. In a minor scenario, if a tree branch falls on your home arising from rainstorm, you will have carry out repairs on the damaged part of the building. Home repairs are vital to address immediately since your home is often your biggest asset. Hence it is also advisable for homeowner to take insurance policy in which the risk is transferred to the insurance company.




158
 
SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
Mention and discuss commitments qualifying for contingency fund.


3.4 Essential Qualities of Contingency Fund

There are essential qualities or considerations for contingency fund that can make it meaningful and available whenever it is needed to meet expenses. Such qualities are as discussed below.

1. Low Risk

Basically, investments often realize a rate of return that is directly proportional to how much risk they carry. This is why you?ll need to be satisfied with low-interest bearing accounts in your emergency fund. In this regard, current account, savings, and money market investments as well as bank cash deposits and even physical cash are viable choices.

Just make sure your bank accounts or bank-guaranteed investments carry the deposit insurance policy. Treasury bills, notes, and bonds have traditionally been good options for safe investments as well. But since the guarantee attached to government-issued instruments has come into question, these may be treated as a very low-risk investment option. This is because government securities are regarded as gilt-edged securities because they are risk free or carry no risk and always guaranteed in respect of their repayment and interest payment.

The same holds true for other highly rated bond and bond funds such as those being issued by blue chip corporate entities. Such investments may constitute a portion of your long-term emergency fund, depending on how comfortable you are in taking risk.

2. Liquidity

This represents how quickly your assets can be converted to usable cash. For instance, a savings account is 100% liquid because it is already in cash and available anytime and anywhere you want it. Bonds, though, have to be sold before you can use them and you must wait for the cash settlement period to pass, one day for government issued securities, three days for all others.

In some cases, cash products can also be problematic. Cash deposits, for example, come with penalties if you withdraw money earlier than the agreed maturity date. It is necessary to understand the penalties of cash deposits you are considering or already own, since they can and do differ. Like bonds, cash deposits should constitute a portion of your long-term emergency fund.

3. Accessibility

To have access to your fund can sometimes be very difficult. The use of ATM can be problematic because your fund can be trapped, debited but did not dispense cash. In order to resolve this problem, you will have to fill a resolution form at the bank and then wait for almost



159
 

one month or three months, if another bank ATM machine has been used, before your money can be credited back to your account.

This experience is one reason it is advisable to create a short-term and a long-term emergency fund. The short-term account can be accessed immediately. And for bigger issues, the short-term account has enough to hold you over while you wait for the long-term funds to mature.

It is advisable that you cultivate the habit of keeping cash on hand, making sure you have a savings withdrawal booklet, and ideally ensure that cheque-writing privileges are attached to your short-term emergency fund. This enhances your accessibility to your money at any time in virtually any place.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 4
Identify and explain essential qualities of contingency fund.

3.5 Accumulating Your Emergency Fund

The task of accumulating the contingency fund can be very difficult because it involves commitment in terms of making regular contribution to the fund. Therefore, one of the most integral aspects to building an emergency fund is the large amount of money you must contribute on regular basis. This implies that you are not supposed to fund your emergency account all at once. This involves gradual accumulation that will eventually become a large sum of money; that is building it up a little at a time. The most important thing is to get started and to remain consistent so that over time you can reach your emergency fund goal.

There are some essential considerations that can help you for effective accumulation of your emergency fund. Such considerations are as identified and discussed below.

i) Break it down.

You have to take decision on how much you want in your emergency fund and figure out how much you can put in each month. Then, the next decision is simply to determine how long it will take to reach your target based on your monthly contribution. Breaking it down this way can make saving for your emergency fund and other goals to become more manageable.

ii) Use wasted money

Some amount of money being spent on social media and other forms of indulgence can amount to mere wastes. This implies that each household wastes some percentage of its income each month. You should determine the money leaks in your budget, for instance, in some items of expenditure such as excessive consumption of drinks, over-ordering food at restaurants, and leaving the lights on, among others. Take necessary steps to avoid them, and then use that money to build up your emergency fund.






160
 
iii) Make it a standing order

Schedule regular payments from your savings or current account to your emergency fund can be simplified by way of standing order. The standing order involves giving instructions to the bank to be deducting the regular amount from your income (salary) and transfer it to your contingency fund. This calls for financial discipline on your part that is inevitable if only you want to build a meaningful contingency fund. The transfer of the regular amount to your contingency fund becomes automatic. This approach saves you the trouble of having to remember to do it yourself every month.

iv) Enhance your account with dividend earnings

Dividends from your stock investments are not just for spending; you can also use them to enhance your emergency fund. Try to build an investment portfolio that includes dividend paying stocks, and deposit those dividends in your emergency fund. This is not the fastest way to fund your emergency account. Nevertheless, do ensure that you are doing other things as well.

v) Use spare change

It is advisable that you have your entire family to be emptying the change from their pockets, perhaps including their small denominations such as five naira and ten naira notes into a savings jar to being kept at home at the end of each day. This enhances your contingency fund especially well if you use mostly cash. At the end of each month, take the money in the savings jar and add it to your emergency fund. It is instructive to note that by using this technique to supplement or boost your emergency fund does not mean that you depend on it entirely to facilitate you towards achieving your goal.

vi) Celebrate milestones

It is also advisable that you celebrate milestones in the process of building your contingency fund. Obviously, this implies that when you reach a milestone, reward yourself with a small treat, such as attending movies or buying a new book or dress for yourself. It is instructive to keep track of your goals and mark special achievements. Even taking a shot at cooking a fun celebratory dinner at home, instead of eating out, can be a good way to reward and motivate yourself to keep going in the task of building the contingency fund.

3.6 Investing the Emergency Fund

It is always profitable to entrust your contingency fund in viable outlets that you can access whenever it is needed. Any contingency fund that cannot be accessed by way of writing a cheque or withdrawing the money through ATM or just simply pulling it out of a safe goes into your long-term emergency fund. It is advisable that you keep your larger, long-term emergency fund in a high-yield deposit accounts or fixed accounts in order to get a slightly higher rate of return.

One strategy that you can exploit is to put a portion of your long-term fund in high-quality bonds. By doing so, you can achieve a better rate of return with minimal risk and can liquidate

161
 

into cash within a few days should you run into an emergency that requires a large amount of money. You can keep your smaller, short-term emergency fund in savings account at a local bank such as microfinance bank. The yield is not as high or comparable with that of the bond but you can be sure of easy access to your money immediately.

Some people also create a cash deposit arrangement in their long-term fund. You can create a cash deposit arrangement by purchasing multiple cash deposits such that one matures every month, or every three months, or at any other interval of your choice. In this way, you are sure of when the money will become available and you will only lose the interest on one cash deposit, as opposed to all of them, should you need to access this money in emergency. Moreover, a cash deposit arrangement allows you to access higher yields that only accompany long-term cash deposits. However, a cash deposit arrangement should only make up a portion of your long-term emergency fund so you can avoid any penalties associated with premature access.

In advance economies, people can consider using a credit card for an emergency if they cannot access their emergency funds in time. Nevertheless, they do so only if they can use credit cards that rewards wisely by paying off the full balance before the due date.

4.0 CONCLUSION

This unit of the course material has provided you with insight into the need to plan for building emergency fund is very essential toward meeting contingencies, which are not envisaged when they will actually take place and involves the use of amount of money. In planning for emergency funds, certain strategies are to be taken into consideration such that the regular contribution can be reasonable, and the fund being kept is accessible. A contingency fund can therefore, make a difference between financial failure and financial success. It is therefore, advisable that you develop financial discipline to accumulate contingency fund. The fund will prepare you for unexpected setbacks and reduce your dependence on borrowing money that in most cases comes at high interest rates. Furthermore, ensure that you carefully examine your expenses and use the information to develop the emergency fund goal; see how much you can save each month and identify unnecessary expenses, or wasteful money. It is also necessary that you make a plan to build up an emergency fund and decide how you want it allocated. Above all, ensure that you use your emergency money wisely.

5.0 SUMMARY

In this study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning of Contingency Fund
•	Short-term Contingency Fund
•	Long-term Contingency Fund

•	Commitments Qualifying for Contingency Fund
•	Essential Qualities of Contingency Fund
•	Accumulating Your Emergency Fund
•	Investing the Emergency Fund

In the next study unit, you will be taken through insurance and risk hedging.

162
 
6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	Differentiate between short-term and long-term contingency fund.

2.	List and explain commitments that qualify for contingency fund
3.	Mention and discuss essential Qualities of Contingency Fund

Answers to Self-Assessment Exercises

1. What is Contingency Fund?

A contingency or an emergency fund is premeditated to cover a financial shortfall with which to take care of an unexpected financial commitment in the foreseeable future. Your emergency fund can serve as an avenue to secure the money you need when you find yourself in dire strait. Since a contingency must be reliable, this therefore, requires that it needs to be held in form of guaranteed investments. This implies that savings accounts are good for emergency funds, while stocks are bad.

2. Differentiate between short-term contingency fund and long-term contingency fund.

The Short-term Contingency Fund is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated. It should be in an accessible account, which will probably bear little interest. The most important consideration herein is accessibility. The purpose of your short-term emergency fund is for smaller emergencies such as car repairs or replacing a major appliance that has become dysfunctional. It can also be used as a connection to get you through the few days until you can access your long-term emergency funds in case of a more extreme situation.

A long-term emergency fund, on the other hand, allows you to save for large-scale emergencies occasioned by events such as loss of job and major natural disaster like an earthquake or fire, and thereby earn a slightly higher level of interest. Accessibility to the fund is still important for consideration but it is appropriate to choose investments that take some months or years to liquidate as long as you have a short-term emergency fund to cover you in the interim.

3. Mention and discuss commitments qualifying for contingency fund.

i) Health related emergency

Emergency on health related ground normally warrants saving for particularly if you are not qualified for treatment under health insurance scheme. Therefore, you can save money on health related issues and put less strain on your emergency fund.

ii)	Need to travel or finance other arrangements

Such sudden need for travelling can arise as a result of a family emergency, such as a death in the extended family system as is the case in the African tradition. In some cases, you may have to go for loan in order to finance the huge amount involved in meeting burial expenses.




163
 
iii) Major unexpected car repairs

This happens often in terms of meeting for damages caused by a car accident or paying for a new engine. Routine car maintenance, however, should be scheduled into your monthly budget. You could even follow vehicle maintenance tips being published in some newspapers in order to save money.

iv) Failure of a major appliance

Emergency can arise in relation to breakdown of major household appliances such as failure of

the deep freezer, the furnace (for heating the house) suddenly stops working or the major security door has serious problem. You may need to pay for replacement for any of these emergencies quickly as it occurs.

v)	Large and unexpected home repairs

A major home repair may occur as a result of occurrence of natural disasters such as tornado, earthquake, landslide, and volcanic eruption. Such occurrence can spell major destruction to your property, and in some instances, people do lose their entire buildings.

4. Identify and explain essential qualities of contingency fund.

i) Low Risk

Basically, investments often realize a rate of return that is directly proportional to how much risk they carry. This is why you?ll need to be satisfied with low-interest bearing accounts in your emergency fund. In this regard, current account, savings, and money market investments as well as bank cash deposits and even physical cash are viable choices.

ii) Liquidity

This represents how quickly your assets can be converted to usable cash. For instance, a savings account is 100% liquid because it is already in cash and available anytime and anywhere you want it. Bonds, though, have to be sold before you can use them and you must wait for the cash settlement period to pass, one day for government issued securities, three days for all others.

iii) Accessibility

To have access to your fund can sometimes be very difficult. The use of ATM can be problematic because your fund can be trapped, debited but did not dispense cash. In order to resolve this problem, you will have to fill a resolution form at the bank and then wait for almost one month or three months, if another bank ATM machine has been used, before your money can be credited back to your account.





164
 
7.0 REFERENCES/FURTHER READINGS

Ariely, Dan (July 2009).The End of Rational Economics, Harvard Business Review. Accessed on 14 January, 2016 from https://www.aicpa.org/interestareas/ personalfinancialplanning/… pdf

Kwok, H., Milevsky, M., and Robinson, C. (1994) Asset Allocation, Life Expectancy, and Shortfall, Financial Services Review, 1994, vol 3(2), pg. 109-126.

Marquit, M. (2016). How to Start & Build Up Your Emergency Fund in Savings. Wall Street Journal, New York. Accessed on 14 January, 2016 from www.moneycrashers.com/start-build-emergency-fund-savings/

Opdyke, J.D. (2010). Complete Personal Finance Guidebook, The Wall Street Journal Guidebook, New York: Crown Publishing Group.

Tahira, K. H. ( 2009). Personal Finance: Past, Present, and Future, Social Science Research Network. Iowa State University - Department of Human Development and Family Studies: 4–16.






































165
 
UNIT 17:	INSURANCE AND RISK HEDGING


CONTENTS

1.0	Introduction
2.0	Objectives
3.0	Main Content
3.1	Conceptualization of Insurance
3.1.1.	Legal Principles of Insurance Contract
3.1.2	Methods of Insurance
3.2	Characteristics of Insurable Risks
3.3	Types of Insurance Policy
4.0	Conclusion
5.0	Summary
6.0	Tutor Marked Assignment
7.0	References/Further Readings

1.0 INTRODUCTION

In the preceding study unit, we discussed planning for contingency funds. This is related to a plan to take care of unforeseen circumstances which are themselves shrouded in risks of business and our lives generally. Therefore, it is pertinent for you to take a legal scheme that will enable you to hedge against risks. This, given the fact that risk refers to any situation whereby there is uncertainty about what outcome will occur in the future; regarding business operations in particular. The subject matter of our discussion in this study unit, therefore, is centred on insurance and risk hedging.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Explain and explain the term investment

•	Identify and discuss the characteristics of investment
•	Mention and explain types of investment

3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 CONCEPTUALIZATION OF INSURANCE

Insurance refers to a means with which take protection from financial loss in business generally. The scheme provides a framework for risk management. First and foremost, insurance scheme is appropriated to hedge against the risk of a contingent, uncertain loss. Risk itself risk refers to any situation which involves uncertainty about what outcome will occur.

In business, some form of risk or a loss is certain to occur. Hence, it becomes obvious that a businessman has to plan to hedge the risk or mitigate it in advance and treat the measure as a

166
 

definite cost to the business. Nevertheless, in the event of uncertainty about the occurrence of a loss, risk would come into play since uncertainty breeds calamity and consequential burden on the business and its fortunes.

Basically, insurance involves pooling funds from several insured entities (known as exposures) to compensate for the losses that may incur. The insured entities are therefore protected from risk for a fee, with the fee being contingent on the frequency and severity of the event occurring. For qualification of an insurable risk, the risk insured against must meet certain characteristics. Insurance scheme is regarded as a financial intermediary, which is a commercial enterprise and a major part of the financial services industry.

The entity providing insurance policy, which engages in insurance business, is known as an insurer, insurance company, or insurance carrier. The individual or entity who subscribes to insurance policy against risks is the insured or policyholder. Fundamentally, the insurance transaction involves the insured who assumes a guaranteed and known relatively small loss in the form of payment to the insurer in exchange for the insurer's promise to compensate the insured in the event of a covered loss. The loss may or may not be financial, but it must be reducible to financial terms. And it must involve something in which the insured secures an insurable interest occasioned by ownership, possession, or pre-existing relationship.

The insured who takes a policy by receiving an insurance contract, which is known as insurance policy, entailing the conditions and circumstances under which the insured will be financially compensated. The sum of money being charged by the insurer to the insured for the coverage established in the insurance policy is called the premium. In the event that the insured suffers a loss, which is potentially covered by the insurance policy, the insured submits a claim to the insurer for processing by a claims adjuster.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Explain the term Insurance.

3.1.1 Legal Principles of Insurance Contract

In the process of taking insurance policy by a company, an entity or even an individual, there are basic legal requirements that must be upheld. Such legal principles of insurance include the following.

1.	Indemnity:– the insurance company indemnifies, or compensates, the insured in the case of certain losses only up to the insured's interest. To "indemnify" Implies making whole again, or to be reinstated to the position that one was in, to the extent possible, prior to the happening of a specified event or peril. Accordingly, life insurance is generally not considered to be indemnity insurance, but rather "contingent" insurance, that is, a claim arises on the occurrence of a specified event

2.	Insurable interest:– the insured typically must directly suffer from the loss. Insurable interest must exist whether property insurance or insurance on a person is involved. The concept requires that the insured have a "stake" in the loss or damage to the life or


167
 

property insured. What that "stake" is will be determined by the kind of insurance involved and the nature of the property ownership or relationship between the persons. The requirement of an insurable interest is what distinguishes insurance from gambling.

3.	Utmost good faith:– also known as uberima fides, it implies that the insured and the insurer are bound by a good faith bond of honesty and fairness. Material facts must be disclosed.

4.	Contribution:– insurers which have similar obligations to the insured contribute in the indemnification, according to some method.

5.	Subrogation:– the insurance company acquires legal rights to pursue recoveries on behalf of the insured; for example, the insurer may sue those liable for the insured's loss. The Insurers can waive their subrogation rights by using the special clauses.

6.	Proximate cause:– the cause of loss (the peril) must be covered under the insuring agreement of the policy, and the dominant cause must not be excluded.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
List and explain the legal principles involved in the contract of insurance.


3.1.2 Methods of insurance

In practical terms, some methods of insurance are as list and explained below.

i) Co-insurance

This implies that all classes of risks insured with insurance company are shared between insurers or insurance companies.

ii) Dual insurance

This implies that risks having two or more policies with same coverage would not pay separately, that is on individual policies; a concept called contribution. The insurance companies, by implication, would contribute together to make up the policyholder's losses. However, in case of contingency insurances like life assurance, dual payment is allowed.

iii) Self-insurance

This refers to situations where companies or organizations retain their risk management in the operations of their business or entities without the need to transfer it to insurance companies.

iv) Reinsurance




168
 

This implies circumstances in which the magnitude of risk insured against by some companies is too high for a single insurance company to bear. Therefore, the insurer transfers some part of or all risks to another insurer called reinsurance company or reinsurer.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
List and explain methods of insurance.

3.2 CHARACTERISTICS OF INSURABLE RISKS

Generally, a risk which is insurable or qualified to be insured by corporate entities or private companies shares seven common characteristics such as listed and explained below.

1. Large number of similar exposure units

Since insurance operates through pooling resources, the majority of insurance policies are provided for individual members of large classes, allowing insurers to benefit from the law of large numbers in which predicted losses are similar to the actual losses. Exceptions include The Lloyd?s of England is an exception to this rule. Lloyd?s is renowned for insuring the life or health of actors, sports figures, and other famous individuals. Nevertheless, all exposures will have particular differences, which may lead to different premium rates.

2. Definite loss

This implies that the loss takes place at a known time, in a known place, and from a known cause. The classic example is death of an insured person on a life insurance policy. Fire, automobile accidents, and worker injuries may all easily meet this criterion while other types of losses may only be specific in theory. An instance is the Occupational disease, which may involve prolonged exposure to injurious conditions for which no specific time, place, or cause is identifiable. Instructively, the time, place, and cause of a loss should be clear enough that with sufficient information, the insurer could objectively verify all three elements.

3. Accidental loss

This connotes that the event that constitutes the trigger of a claim should be fortuitous, or at least outside the control of the beneficiary of the insurance. The loss should be pure, in the sense that it results from an event for which there is only the opportunity for cost or loss. All events that contain speculative elements like ordinary business risks or gambling through lottery, etc, are generally not considered insurable.

4. Large loss

This implies that the size of the loss must be meaningful from the perspective of the insured. Insurance premiums need to cover both the expected cost of losses, plus the cost of issuing and administering the policy, adjusting losses, and supplying the capital needed to reasonably assure that the insurer will be able to pay claims. For small losses, these latter costs may be several



169
 

times the size of the expected cost of losses. There is hardly any point in paying such costs unless the protection offered has real value to a buyer.

5. Affordable premium

This connotes that in the likelihood that an insured event is so high, or the cost of the event so large, that the resulting premium is large relative to the amount of protection offered, then it is not likely that the insurance will be purchased, even if on offer. Furthermore, as the accounting profession formally recognizes in financial accounting standards, the premium cannot be so large that there is not a reasonable chance of a significant loss to the insurer. If there is no such chance of loss, then the transaction may have the form of insurance, but not the substance.

6. Calculable loss

There are two elements that must be at least estimable, if not formally calculable: the probability of loss, and the attendant cost. Probability of loss is generally an practical exercise. Cost has more to do with the ability of a reasonable person in possession of a copy of the insurance policy, and a proof of loss associated with a claim, presented under that policy, to make a reasonably definite and objective evaluation of the amount of the loss recoverable as a result of the claim.

7. Limited risk of catastrophically large losses

This connotes that insurable losses are ideally independent and non-catastrophic. This implies that the losses do not happen all at once, and individual losses are not severe enough to bankrupt the insurer. Insurer companies may prefer to limit their exposure to a loss from a single event to some small portion of their capital base. The capital constrains insurers' ability to offer earthquake insurance just like wind insurance in hurricane zones. However, in a country like the US, the risk associated with flood is insured by the federal government. In commercial fire insurance, it is possible to find single properties whose total exposed value is well in excess of any individual insurer's capital constraint. Therefore, such property insurance policies are generally shared among several insurers, or are insured by a single insurer who syndicates the risk into the reinsurance market.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 4
Mention and discuss the fundamental characteristics of insurable risks.

3.3 TYPES OF INSURANCE POLICY

There are many insurance policies that are available for purchase by individual companies. And any risk that can be quantified can potentially be insured. Specific kinds of risk that may give rise to claims are known as perils. An insurance policy will set out in detail which perils are covered by the policy and those ones that are not covered. Below are non-exhaustive lists of the many different types of insurance that exist.




170
 

Generally, business insurance takes a number of different forms, such as the various kinds of professional liability insurance, also called professional indemnity (PI). There is the business owner?s policy, which packages into one policy many of the kinds of coverage that a business owner needs.

1. Auto insurance

Automobile insurance protects the policyholders against financial loss in the event of an incident involving a vehicle they own, such as in a traffic collision. The coverage of the policy generally includes: property coverage, for damage to or theft of the car; liability coverage, for the legal responsibility to others for bodily injury or property damage; and medical coverage, for the cost of treating injuries, rehabilitation and sometimes lost wages and funeral expenses.

2. Gap insurance

Gap insurance covers the excess amount on a auto loan in an instance where your insurance company does not cover the entire loan. Depending on the company's specific policies it might or might not cover the deductible as well. This policy is designed for use by those who put low down payments, have high interest rates on their loans, and those with 60-month or longer terms. Gap insurance is typically offered by a finance company when the vehicle owner purchases their vehicle, but many auto insurance companies offer this coverage to consumers as well.

3. Income protection insurance

Under this type of coverage, there are some constituent policies such as enumerated below.

i) Disability insurance policy

Disability insurance policies provide financial support in the event of the policy holders becoming unable to work because of disabling illness or injury. It provides monthly support to help pay such obligations as mortgage loans and facility associated with credit cards. Short-term and long-term disability policies are available to individuals, but considering the expense, long-term policies are generally obtained only by those with at least six-figure incomes, such as doctors, lawyers, etc. Short-term disability insurance covers a person for a period typically up to six months, paying a stipend each month to cover medical bills and other necessities.

ii) Long-term disability insurance

Long-term disability insurance covers an individual's expenses for the long term, up until such time as they are considered permanently disabled and thereafter Insurance companies will often try to encourage the person back into employment in preference to and before declaring them unable to work at all and therefore totally disabled.







171
 
iii) Total disability insurance

Total disability insurance provides benefits when a person is permanently disabled and can no longer work in their profession, often taken as an adjunct to life insurance.

iv) Workers’ compensation policy

Workers? compensation insurance replaces all or part of a worker's wages lost and accompanying medical expenses incurred because of a job-related injury.

4. Casualty insurance

Casualty insurance is a policy that insures against accidents, not necessarily tied to any specific property. It is a broad spectrum of insurance that a number of other types of insurance could be classified, such as auto, workers compensation, and some liability insurances.

i) Crime insurance

Crime insurance is a form of casualty insurance that covers the policyholder against losses arising from the criminal acts of third parties. For example, a company can obtain crime insurance to cover losses arising from theft or embezzlement.

ii) Terrorism Insurance

Terrorism Insurance is a policy that provides protection against any loss or damage caused by terrorist activities. This is very popular in the US established in the wake of September 2011 incident; It is meant as a federal program providing a transparent system of shared public and private compensation for insured losses resulting from acts of terrorism.

iii) Kidnap and ransom insurance

Kidnap and ransom insurance is designed to protect individuals and corporations operating in high-risk areas around the world against the perils of kidnap, extortion, wrongful detention and hijacking.

iv) Political risk insurance

Political risk insurance is a form of casualty insurance that can be taken out by businesses with operations in countries in which there is a risk that revolution or other political conditions could result in a loss.

5. Life insurance

This policy also known as life assurance policy provides a monetary benefit to a decedent's family or other designated beneficiary. It may specifically provide for income to an insured person's family, burial, funeral and other final expenses. Life insurance policies often allow the

172
 

option of having the proceeds paid to the beneficiary either in a lump sum cash payment or an annuity. In most states, a person cannot purchase a policy on another person without their knowledge.

Annuities provide a stream of payments and are generally classified as insurance because they are issued by insurance companies. They are regulated as insurance, and require the same kinds of actuarial and investment management expertise that life insurance requires. Annuities and pension that pay a benefit for life are sometimes regarded as insurance against the possibility that a retire will outlive his or her financial resources. In that sense, they are the complement of life insurance and, from an underwriting perspective, are the mirror image of life insurance.

Certain life insurance contracts accumulate cash values, which may be taken by the insured if the policy is surrendered or which may be borrowed against. Some policies, such as annuities and endowment policies, are financial instruments to accumulate or liquidate wealth when it is needed.

6. Property insurance

Property insurance provides protection against risks to property, such as fire, theft or weather damage. This may include specialized forms of insurance such as fire insurance, flood insurance, earthquake insurance, home insurance, inland marine insurance or boiler. The term property insurance may, like casualty insurance, be used as a broad category of various subtypes of insurance such as aviation insurance, crop insurance, and fidelity bond policy, among others.

Home insurance, also commonly called hazard insurance or homeowners insurance provides coverage for damage or destruction of the policyholder's home. In some geographical areas, the policy may exclude certain types of risks, such as flood or earthquake that require additional coverage. Maintenance-related issues are typically the homeowner's responsibility. The policy may include inventory, or this can be bought as a separate policy, especially for people who rent housing. In some countries, insurers offer a package which may include liability and legal responsibility for injuries and property damage caused by members of the household, including pets.

7. Marine insurance

Marine insurance and marine cargo insurance cover the loss or damage of vessels at sea or on inland waterways, and of cargo in transit, regardless of the method of transit. When the owner of the cargo and the carrier are separate corporations, marine cargo insurance typically compensates the owner of cargo for losses sustained from fire, shipwreck, etc., but excludes losses that can be recovered from the carrier or the carrier's insurance. Many marine insurance underwriters will include "time element" coverage in such policies, which extends the indemnity to cover loss of profit and other business expenses attributable to the delay caused by a covered loss.







173
 
8. Liability insurance

Liability insurance is a very broad superset that covers legal claims against the insured. Many types of insurance include an aspect of liability coverage. For example, such policy will normally include liability coverage which protects the insured in the event of a claim brought by someone who slips and falls on the property; automobile insurance also includes an aspect of liability insurance that indemnifies against the harm that a crashing car can cause to others' lives, health, or property. The protection offered by a liability insurance policy is twofold: a legal defense in the event of a lawsuit commenced against the policyholder. And there is the indemnification. This is payment on behalf of the insured in relation to a settlement or court verdict. Liability policies typically cover only the negligence of the insured, and will not apply to results of willful or intentional acts by the insured.

9. Credit insurance

Credit insurance repays some or all of a loan when the borrower is insolvent. Specific types include the following:

a)	Mortgage insurance insures the lender against default by the borrower. Mortgage insurance is a form of credit insurance, although the name "credit insurance" more often is used to refer to policies that cover other kinds of debt.

b)	Many credit cards offer payment protection plans which are a form of credit insurance.

c)	Trade credit insurance is business insurance over the accounts receivable of the insured. The policy pays the policy holder for covered accounts receivable if the debtor defaults on payment.

d)	Collateral protection insurance (CPI) insures property (primarily vehicles) held as collateral for loans made by lending institutions.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 5
List and explain various types of insurance policy.

4.0 CONCLUSION

This unit of the course material has provided you with the basic knowledge about the fact that business operations are shrouded in risks of uncertainty nature of the future. This implies that you should to take a legal scheme that will enable you hedge against such risks. This, as you have understood, is because risk involves any situation whereby there is uncertainty about the outcome of occurrences in the future; regarding business operations in particular. There are many insurance policies which are available for various types of risk in business operations, as have been highlighted and discussed in this study unit. We also discussed the fact that insurance policy involves a contract requiring that certain inherent principles must be taken into consideration in the course of entering into such policy. This is to avoid entering into unforeseeable insurance contract.




174
 
5.0 SUMMARY

In this initial study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:
4	Conceptualization of Insurance
5	Legal Principles of Insurance Contract
6	Methods of Insurance
7	Characteristics of Insurable Risks
8	Types of Insurance Policy

In the next study unit, you will be taken through understanding tax issues.

6.0 TUTOR MARKED ASSIGNMENT
1.	What is investment?

2.	List and explain the characteristics of investment.
3.	Compare and contrast ownership investment and lending investment


7.0 REFERENCES AND FURTHER READING

Gregory  D.  Squires  (2003)  Racial  Profiling,  Insurance  Style:  Insurance  Redlining  and  the
Uneven Development of Metropolitan Areas, Journal of Urban Affairs, 25(4): 391–410.

Seaman, S. M. and Kittredge, C. (1997). Excess Liability Insurance: Law and Litigation. Tort &
Insurance Law Journal, 32 (3): 653–714.

Schindler, R. M. (1994). Consumer Motivation for Purchasing Low-Deductive Insurance. American Marketing Association Marketing and Public Policy Conference Proceedings, Chicago, IL, 4: 147–155.




























175
 
UNIT 18: UNDERSTANDING TAX ISSUES


CONTENT
1.0 Introduction

2.0 Objectives
3.0 Main Content
3.1 Meaning and Essence of Taxation
3.2 Taxation and Fiscal Regulations in Nigeria
3.3 The Tripod of the Nigerian Tax System
3.4 Major Tax issues in Nigeria

4.0 Conclusion
5.0 Summary

6.0 Tutor-Marked Assignment
7.0 References and Further Readings


1.0 INTRODUCTION

Government, all over the world needs revenue to fund and control their economic activities. One of the sources of revenue is taxation. Tax is normally imposed on the citizens, business organizations and corporate entities in order to generate revenue. Tax is collected from the incomes of the workers and the profits of the business organizations and corporate entities, which constitute direct tax. There are other forms of tax (indirect tax) being imposed by the government. Such forms of tax include value added tax (VAT), capital gain tax, property tax, and betting tax, among others. In this study unit, we shall discuss taxation and tax issues.

2.0 OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

•	Explain the essence of tax payment

•	Explain taxation and fiscal regulations in Nigeria

•	Discuss the Tripod of the Nigerian Tax System

•	Identify and discuss major tax issues in Nigeria

3.0 MAIN CONTENT

3.1 MEANING AND ESSENCE OF TAXATION

In order to properly understand the subject matter, let us remind ourselves about the meaning of the focal word „tax?. Tax has been defined as „a monetary charge imposed by the Government on persons, entities, transactions and properties to yield revenue?. That is the primary way the society allocates the burden of government to its people. Tax is a powerful tool for achieving economic and social policy objectives of government and it is a means of transferring resources from the private to the public sector.




176
 

A standard definition of tax is that it is “a compulsory exaction from a taxpayer paid in cash or in kind to the government to provide for the public services of common interest without particular regard to the particular benefit received by the taxpayer.”

Taxation is undoubtedly a veritable instrument for national development. Apart from being a major source of revenue for government to provide goods and services needed by the people, tax policies, can and do stimulate economic growth and job creation through its impact on investment and capital formation in the economy. In this respect, reform of the tax system that ensures effectiveness, equity, and efficiency are necessary conditions for a healthy public finance.

3.1.1 Objectives of a Tax System
i)	To promote fiscal responsibility and accountability

ii)	To facilitate economic growth and development

iii)	To provide the government with stable resources for the provision of public goods and services

iv)	To address inequalities in income distribution
v)	To provide economic stabilization
vi)	To correct market failures or imperfections

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 1
Define Tax and list the objectives of a tax system.

3.2 TAXATION AND FISCAL REGULATIONS IN NIGERIA

The Nigerian Tax System has undergone significance changes in recent times. The tax laws are being reviewed with the aim of repelling obsolete provisions and simplifying the main ones. Under the current Nigerian law, taxation is enforced by the three (3) tiers of government i.e. federal, state and local government with each having its sphere clearly spelt out in the taxes and levies Decree 1998. The importance of tax regulation cannot be overemphasized as most transactions with any ministry, department, or government agency cannot be concluded without evidence of tax clearance, that is, a tax clearance certificate certifying that all taxes due for the three immediately preceding years of assessment have been settled in full. The main bodies recognized by law as tax authorities in Nigeria are the Federal Board of Inland Revenue, State Board of Internal Revenue and Joint Tax Board. A List of taxes and levies for collection by the three tiers of government has been approved by government and published by the Joint Tax Board (JTB) as follows:

1.	Taxes collectible by the federal government i. Companies Income Tax

ii.	Withholding Tax on Companies
iii.	Petroleum Profit Tax
iv.	Value Added Tax (VAT)
v. Education Tax
vi.	Capital Gains Tax – Abuja residents and corporate bodies.
vii.	Stamp duties involving a corporate entity


177
 
viii.	Personal income tax in respect of
a)	Armed forces personnel
b)	Public personnel
c)	Residents of Abuja FCT
d)	External Affairs Officer and

e)	Non Residents.

2.	Taxes/Levies Collective by State Government
i.	Personal Income Tax

a)	Direct (Self and government) assessment
b)	Withholding tax (individuals only)
ii.	Capital gain tax
iii.	Stamp duties (instruments executed by individuals)
iv.	Pools betting, lotteries, gaining and casino tax
v.	Road taxes
vi.	Business premises registration
vii.	Rates in markets where state fiancés are involved
viii.	Naming of street registration fee in state capital

3.	Taxes/Levies collective by local government i. shops and kiosks rates

ii. On and of liquor license
iii.	Slaughter slab fees
iv. Marriage, birth and death registration fees

3.3 THE TRIPOD OF THE NIGERIAN TAX SYSTEM

The Nigeria tax system, like any tax system, is a tripartite structure which comprises of: Tax Policy, Tax Legislation and Tax Administration. Tax policy forms the basis for tax laws while tax administration is the implementation of the tax laws. This shows that in a bid to establish an effective and efficient tax system that will make taxation the pivot for national development, appropriate tax policies and legislations should be put in place and adequately implemented.

3.3.1 Meaning of National Tax Policy

The National Tax Policy is a document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation. It is a clear statement on the principles governing tax administration and revenue collection. It therefore, provides a set of guidelines, rules and modus operandi that would regulate taxation in Nigeria.

3.3.2 Objectives of National Tax Policy

The objectives of the National Tax Policy are to address the myriad of problems bedeviling the Nigerian tax system. It is aimed at creating a tax system that will contribute to the well-being of all Nigerians and taxes which are collected by Government, should directly Impact on the lives


178
 

of the citizens. This can be accomplished through proper and judicious utilization of the revenues collected by government.

The tax system, as envisaged by the National Tax Policy, is expected to meet the following objectives:

i)	To promote fiscal responsibility and accountability
ii)	To facilitate economic growth and development

iii)	To provide the government with stable resources for the provision of public goods and services

iv)	To address inequalities in income distribution.
v)	To provide economic stabilization.
vi)	To pursue fairness and equity.
vii)	To correct market failures.

The Policy document was launched and given credence to in April 2012. However, in a bid to give legal backing to tax policy, there is need to fully crystalise its tenets into more tax laws enacted by the national assembly.

SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 2
What are the objectives of national tax policy in Nigeria?

3.4 Major Tax Issues in Nigeria

According to the World Bank's Doing Business 2011 report, Nigeria ranks 137 out of 183 countries surveyed on the ease of doing business and 134 on the ease of paying taxes. In the 2010 report, Nigeria ranked 134 and 131 on the ease of doing business and paying taxes respectively. Nigeria has been slipping back consistently on the ease of Paying Taxes index which is a function of three main indicators - number of tax payments, time required to comply with tax obligations and total tax rate. The following have been considered to be among the major tax issues in Nigeria:

i) Multiplicity of taxes

This means paying similar taxes on the same or substantially similar tax base. Examples of multiple taxes include Companies Income Tax, Information Technology Tax (NITDA Levy), Education Tax, Nigerian Content Development Levy all of which are based on income or profits and Value Added Tax, Sales Tax and Hotel Consumption Tax all based on sales. Multiple taxes should be distinguished from numerous taxes which mean many but different taxes on different tax bases. Numerous taxes are likely to occur in a federation like Nigeria. To address multiple and numerous taxation earmark taxes should be reduced to the barest minimum and approved list of taxes should be streamlined and adhered to by all tiers of government.

ii) Essence dividend tax

The relevant provision of the law is usually interpreted and applied by the tax authorities to levy tax on a company whose dividend exceeds taxable profit regardless of whether the profit being distributed has already suffered tax (as in the case of dividend income received by a holding company or taxed retained earnings) or whether the profit is tax exempt (as in the case of pioneer profit and capital gains on stocks). The section should be amended to specifically exclude taxed profits and profits exempt from tax.

179
 
iii) Input VAT restriction

Claimable input VAT is limited to VAT on inventory. Input VAT on services, overhead and fixed assets are not creditable but must be expensed or capitalised as the case may be. This increases the true cost of VAT borne by taxpayers on goods and services consumed much beyond the 5% nominal rate. Input VAT should be allowed as claimable on all items except where the taxpayer is the final consumer or does not produce VATable output.

Deduction of VAT at source otherwise known as withholding VAT: The deduction of VAT at source by government and companies in the oil and gas sector from payments to their vendors leaves such vendors with claimable input VAT without adequate output VAT thereby resulting in a perpetual refund position. The obligation for government agencies and oil companies to deduct VAT at source should be removed and compliance by vendors should be enforced using information provided in the VAT and withholding tax returns of the service recipients/customers.

iv) Tax dispute resolution and due process

Where a taxpayer is aggrieved, there is no recourse in most cases as states do not have a body of appeal commissioners in place and the tax appeal tribunal at the federal level is yet to be fully operational. This leaves the taxpayer with the unattractive option of directly approaching the High Court. Also, notwithstanding the due process clearly laid down in the tax legislation, many tax authorities especially at the state and local government levels rarely follow due process in their activities. They often harass and intimidate taxpayers without regard to the provisions of the law. Appeal tribunals and body of appeal commissioners should be constituted and functional at all times. It is critical for due process purposes to establish and enforce a tax assessment and appeal procedure that is independent, fair and efficient to all taxpayers. Speedy resolution of tax disputes is a key factor which must be addressed urgently. The slow pace of tax adjudication in Nigeria makes tax compliance more difficult and exposes the taxpayer to a higher risk of penalty and interest. Government should consider issuing a Taxpayer Bill of Rights or Taxpayers' Charter to include taxpayer obligations, as well as a commitment to professional and legitimate behaviour by tax consultants and tax officials.

v) Personal reliefs and allowances

The Personal Income Tax Act (PITA) provides for a number of tax reliefs and allowances but most of these are unrealistically low such as Children Allowance of N2,500 per child subject to a maximum of 4 children, Utility N10,000, Entertainment N6,000, Transport Allowance N20,000, Rent Allowance N150,000, Meal Subsidy N5,000, and Dependant Relative N2,000. Reliefs and allowances should be reasonable and in tune with current reality. As much as possible, allowances should be a percentage of earnings rather than an absolute amount which has the risk of becoming unreasonably low with time due to inflation and slow reviews and amendments to tax laws in Nigeria.

vi) Reverse charge of VAT

This is a system whereby the recipient of a VATable supply is required to self assess VAT on imported services. This provision does not exist in the Nigerian VAT Act but is being introduced by the FIRS through Information Circulars which are not binding. This is a loophole in the tax law as certain imported services where the provider does not have to be physically present in

180
 

Nigeria can legally escape VAT. The VAT Act should be amended to specifically require the Nigerian recipient of imported services to self account for VAT under reverse charge system.

vii) Tax transparency and accountability

Tax is a compulsory levy designed to generate revenue for public expenditure including infrastructure. Tax paying culture is poor in Nigeria due largely to the lack of transparency and accountability on the part of government as taxpayers' money is rarely seen at work. When people have to pay taxes and also provide their own infrastructure this effectively increases tax rates and costs to taxpayers. Government should be transparent and publish detailed information on tax collection and application of the revenue generated on a regular basis as a mark of accountability and fiscal responsibility. This will encourage voluntary compliance.

viii) Stamp duty

The Act is very ambiguous as to coverage and applicability. A given transaction could fall under more than one category with different rates. Government should assess the level of revenue being generated from stamp duty and if it does not produce substantial revenue, it should be abolished. Alternatively the act should be redrafted for clarity and practicability and restricted to significant transactions such as land and shares. Also, taxpayers should not be forced to pay stamp duty to states where the payment is legally due to the federal government as in the case of land transfer involving a company.

ix) Introduction of new taxes

Different taxes are sometimes introduced in a haphazard manner contrary to the new National Tax Policy. There should be a mechanism to pass all proposed tax laws through a central body perhaps the Joint Tax Board in addition to the existing procedures in place to ensure arbitrary tax laws which are disconnected with the overall policy direction are not introduced.



SELF ASSESSMENT EXERCISE 3
Mention and explain the major tax issues in Nigeria.


4.0 Conclusion

Tax is regarded as a monetary charge imposed by the government on persons, entities, transactions and properties to yield revenue, which is the primary way the society allocates the burden of government to its people. In other words, involves a compulsory exaction from a taxpayer paid in cash or in kind to the government to provide for the public services of common interest without particular regard to the particular benefit received by the taxpayer. In the Nigerian context, the three tiers of government impose and collect distinct types of tax. There are issues that are inherent in the country?s tax system. These include problems such as: multiplicity of taxes; essence dividend tax; input vat restriction; tax dispute resolution and due process; personal reliefs and allowances; reverse charge of vat; tax transparency and accountability; stamp duty; and introduction of new taxes.



181
 
5.0 Summary

In this last study unit of the course material, you have been taught the following topics:

•	Meaning and Essence of Taxation
•	Taxation and Fiscal Regulations in Nigeria

•	The Tripod of the Nigerian Tax System
•	Major Tax issues in Nigeria


6.0 Tutor-Marked Assignment
List and discuss 5 major tax issues in Nigeria.


Answers to self assessment exercises

1. Define Tax and list the objectives of a tax system.

Tax is regarded as a monetary charge imposed by the government on persons, entities, transactions and properties to yield revenue, which is the primary way the society allocates the burden of government to its people. In other words, involves a compulsory exaction from a taxpayer paid in cash or in kind to the government to provide for the public services of common interest without particular regard to the particular benefit received by the taxpayer.

The objectives of a tax system include the following:
i)	To promote fiscal responsibility and accountability
ii)	To facilitate economic growth and development

iii)	To provide the government with stable resources for the provision of public goods and services

iv)	To address inequalities in income distribution
v)	To provide economic stabilization
vi)	To correct market failures or imperfections.

2. What are the objectives of national tax policy in Nigeria?

The tax system, as envisaged by the National Tax Policy, is expected to meet the following objectives:

i)	To promote fiscal responsibility and accountability
ii)	To facilitate economic growth and development

iii)	To provide the government with stable resources for the provision of public goods and services

iv)	To address inequalities in income distribution.
v)	To provide economic stabilization.
vi)	To pursue fairness and equity.

vii)	To correct market failures.







182
 
3. Mention and explain the major tax issues in Nigeria.

The major tax issues in Nigeria include the following:

i) Multiplicity of taxes

This means paying similar taxes on the same or substantially similar tax base. Examples of multiple taxes include Companies Income Tax, Information Technology Tax (NITDA Levy), Education Tax, Nigerian Content Development Levy all of which are based on income or profits and Value Added Tax, Sales Tax and Hotel Consumption Tax all based on sales.

ii) Essence dividend tax

The relevant provision of the law is usually interpreted and applied by the tax authorities to levy tax on a company whose dividend exceeds taxable profit regardless of whether the profit being distributed has already suffered tax (as in the case of dividend income received by a holding company or taxed retained earnings) or whether the profit is tax exempt (as in the case of pioneer profit and capital gains on stocks). The section should be amended to specifically exclude taxed profits and profits exempt from tax.

iii) Input VAT restriction

Claimable input VAT is limited to VAT on inventory. Input VAT on services, overhead and fixed assets are not creditable but must be expensed or capitalised as the case may be. This increases the true cost of VAT borne by taxpayers on goods and services consumed much beyond the 5% nominal rate. Input VAT should be allowed as claimable on all items except where the taxpayer is the final consumer or does not produce VATable output.

Deduction of VAT at source otherwise known as withholding VAT: The deduction of VAT at source by government and companies in the oil and gas sector from payments to their vendors leaves such vendors with claimable input VAT without adequate output.

iv) Tax dispute resolution and due process

Where a taxpayer is aggrieved, there is no recourse in most cases as states do not have a body of appeal commissioners in place and the tax appeal tribunal at the federal level is yet to be fully operational. This leaves the taxpayer with the unattractive option of directly approaching the High Court. Also, notwithstanding the due process clearly laid down in the tax legislation, many tax authorities especially at the state and local government levels rarely follow due process in their activities. They often harass and intimidate taxpayers without regard to the provisions of the law. Appeal tribunals and body of appeal commissioners should be constituted and functional at all times.

v) Personal reliefs and allowances

The Personal Income Tax Act (PITA) provides for a number of tax reliefs and allowances but most of these are unrealistically low such as Children Allowance of N2,500 per child subject to a maximum of 4 children, Utility N10,000, Entertainment N6,000, Transport Allowance N20,000, Rent Allowance N150,000, Meal Subsidy N5,000, and Dependant Relative N2,000. Reliefs and allowances should be reasonable and in tune with current reality. As much as possible,

183
 

allowances should be a percentage of earnings rather than an absolute amount which has the risk of becoming unreasonably low with time due to inflation and slow reviews and amendments to tax laws in Nigeria.

vi) Reverse charge of VAT

This is a system whereby the recipient of a VATable supply is required to self assess VAT on imported services. This provision does not exist in the Nigerian VAT Act but is being introduced by the FIRS through Information Circulars which are not binding. This is a loophole in the tax law as certain imported services where the provider does not have to be physically present in Nigeria can legally escape VAT. The VAT Act should be amended to specifically require the Nigerian recipient of imported services to self account for VAT under reverse charge system.

vii) Tax transparency and accountability

Tax is a compulsory levy designed to generate revenue for public expenditure including infrastructure. Tax paying culture is poor in Nigeria due largely to the lack of transparency and accountability on the part of government as taxpayers' money is rarely seen at work. When people have to pay taxes and also provide their own infrastructure this effectively increases tax rates and costs to taxpayers.

viii) Stamp duty

The Act is very ambiguous as to coverage and applicability. A given transaction could fall under more than one category with different rates. Government should assess the level of revenue being generated from stamp duty and if it does not produce substantial revenue, it should be abolished. Alternatively the act should be redrafted for clarity and practicability and restricted to significant transactions such as land and shares. Also, taxpayers should not be forced to pay stamp duty to states where the payment is legally due to the federal government as in the case of land transfer involving a company.

ix) Introduction of new taxes

Different taxes are sometimes introduced in a haphazard manner contrary to the new National Tax Policy. There should be a mechanism to pass all proposed tax laws through a central body perhaps the Joint Tax Board in addition to the existing procedures in place to ensure arbitrary tax laws which are disconnected with the overall policy direction are not introduced.

7.0 REFERENCES AND FURTHER READINGS

Adam, J. H. (1989). Longman Dictionary of Business English, 2nd edition, Harlow: Longman Group UK Limited.

Anaesoronye, M. (2013, June 12). “Tin makes Tax System Convenient for Taxpayers”, Business Day Newspaper, 11(115): 27.

Odusola, A. (2006). Tax Policy Reforms in Nigeria – Research Paper No. 2006/3, United Nations University – World Institute for Development Economies Research.




184
 

Ogbonna, G.N. (2010). Burning Issues and Challenges of the Nigerian Tax Systems with Analytical Emphasis on Petroleum Profits Tax.

Ogbonna, G.N. and Ebimobowei, A. (2012): Impact of Tax Reforms and Economic Growth of Nigeria: A Time Series Analysis, Current Research Journal of Social Sciences, 4(1-2), 1-4.

Soyode, L. and Kajola, S.O. (2006). Taxation – Principles and Practice in Nigeria, Ibadan:

Silicon Publishing Company.






















































185

December 17, 2025 4:44 PM

Tutor Image Support
___________ derivatives refer to contracts involvIing exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future date.

Swap


When the entrepreneur has the task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development, it is known as ____________
Question 2Select one:

a.
Business Plan

One of the following is an example of a gilt-edge security, except?

real property


Which of the following is not part of E-Banking tools and channels?

cheque

The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

Earnings

The ______________ right cannot be obtained from a text book.

Patent

The Nigeria tax system is a _______ which comprises of: Tax Policy, Tax Legislation and Tax administration

tripartite structure


The isuance of currency in Nigeria is the responsibility of ….........
Question 8Select one:

a.
The Central Bank of Nigeria



_________ holds and trades in money market instruments.

Commercial bank


Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of:

Blue chip

Commodity investment channels around the world include the following except:

Abuja Mercantile Exchange


The money market is the financial market in which financial instruments are traded with maturity of up to ______ year

one (1) 

The _________ are generally fraught with some risk of loss of the volatile nature of their operations.
Question 3Select one:

a.
stocks of banks

Sources of cash flows in property investment are these except:

Mortgage bank option

The description of government intentions and policies presented by financial plan for a given period of time is called:

Fiscal policy

The following four sources of funds are all short term except one:

shares

In Bhave Model, which phase iInvolves converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking, which is the foundation of the creation of any business venture by an entrepreneur?

Opportunity recognition stage


______________are also visible in the energy market other than securities market.

Speculators


Which year did Banking in Nigeria start?

1892

The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person\'s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

Investment




The price at which the sale of an option takes place is known as ______ and is specified at the time the parties enter into the option.

strike price



Personal Financial Planning Process involves the following steps except?

Fund



One of the following is an example of a gilt-edge security, except?

real property



The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

Liquidity



Speaking can be looked at in two major areas: inter-personal and ____________

public speaking


Vocalization consists of three subsections: characterises, segregates and
Answer: sounds

Paralanguage (sometimes called vocalics) is the study of non-verbal cues of the
Answer: voice

The boundary between and gesture, or verbal and non-verbal communication, can be hard to identify.
Answer: language

of signals, such as voice sounds, intonations or pitch, gestures or written symbols which communicate thoughts or feelings.
Answer: communication

Various acoustic properties of such as tone, pitch and accent, collectively known as prosody, can all give off nonverbal cues.
Answer: speech

The study of the role of in non-verbal communication is sometimes referred to as \
Answer: eyes

Encoding is the process of transferring the information you want to communicate into a form that can be sent and correctly at the other end.
Answer: decoded

Kinesic behaviors include mutual gaze, smiling, facial warmth or pleasantness, childlike direct body orientation, and the like.
Answer: behaviours


In a simple, information or content is sent in some from an emisor/ sender/ encoder to a destination/ receiver/ decoder.
Answer: model

A gesture is a non-vocal bodily intended to express meaning.
Answer: movement

Some of the key components of verbal communication are sound, writing, speaking, and
Answer: language

At birth, most people have vocal cords, which produce
Answer: sounds

Characterises are emotions expressed while speaking, such as laughing, crying, and
Answer: language


As meaning is assigned to words, language develops, which leads to the of speaking.
Answer: development

Problems with communication can at every stage of the communication process.
Answer: pop-up

Speech-independent gestures are dependent upon culturally accepted interpretation and have a direct verbal
Answer: translation

Animals do not have a language, but use a language to communicate with each another form of
Answer: written

Between parties, communication includes acts that confer knowledge and experiences, give advice and and ask questions.
Answer: commands


The basis of interaction between people is the
Answer: communication

The linguist George L. Träger developed a classification system which consists of the voice set, , qualities, and
vocalisation.
Answer: voice


________ also plays an important role in an area that has developed in most if not all business settings: hierarchical communication.

Etiquette



A ________ is a reciprocal conversation between two or more entities.

dialogue



Question FBQ1 : According to economists, investment is regarded as savings embarked upon as a result of  	
Answer: delayed consumption

Question FBQ2 : Investment requires	which implies that funds will have to be expended by the person who is investing.
Answer: financial commitments

Question FBQ3 : Arbitrage refers to the practices of taking advantage of a price
	between two or more financial market Answer: difference

Question FBQ4 : In finance, an investment involves utilization of funds in acquisition of	assets
Answer: financial

Question FBQ5 :	is regarded as a monetary charge imposed by the government on persons, entities, transactions and properties to yield revenue Answer: Tax

Question FBQ6 : Financial products floated by the government of a country are known as	securities
Answer: gilt-edge

Question FBQ7 : Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as
	securities Answer: blue chip

Question FBQ8 : Equity capital refers to the	contribution Answer: Owner’s

Question FBQ9 :	means the ease with which an investment can be converted into cash
Answer: Liquidity

Question FBQ10 : A	refers to a financial product which has its value dependent on the outcome of the original financial product as investment by the managers of the funds.
Answer: derivative

Question FBQ11 : Co-operative society as an aggregation of co-operators who	their funds together through regular saving
Answer: pooled

Question FBQ12 : Derivative instruments can be traded over the counter Answer: True

Question FBQ13 : Â Owning a current and savings account have the same requirements

Answer: False

Question FBQ14 : The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate

Answer: Earnings Earnings

Question FBQ15 : The individual or entity who subscribe to insurance policy against rises is called  	
Answer: policy holder

Question FBQ16 : Beta neutral approach is one way to Answer: hedge

Question FBQ17 : Investment is regarded as saving embarked upon as a result of Answer: Debuted consumption

Question FBQ18 : Real estate	is another means of ensuring investment

in real estate with some sort of raising equity financing in smaller amount
Answer: crowding fund

Question FBQ19 : Brokerage is another word for Answer: Arbitrageur

Question FBQ20 : The payment to the holder of a right or owner of an asset for the using the property is called what?
Answer: Royalties

Question FBQ21 : Portfolio optimization is achieved by placing a larger percentage of high return investment in a
Answer: Diversified portfolio

Question FBQ22 : Beta is the historical correlation between a stock and an Answer: index

Question FBQ23 : Prevailing Price of Stock less Original price is equals to

Answer: earning

Question FBQ24 : In venture capital, you do not need to formulate an idea, the idea is already there for you to just take. This statement is 	
Answer: False

Question FBQ25 :	provides some leverage or gearing such that a small movement in the underlying asset value can cause a large difference in the value of the derivative
Answer: Speculation

Question FBQ26 : T-bills normal have a maturity date less than	year(s) Answer: one

Question FBQ27 : What type of derivative is a personalized contract between two parties in which payment takes place at a specific date in the future at today's
pre-determined price as agreed upon by both parties? Answer: Forwards

Question FBQ28 :	portfolio is a situation where investor who is willing to take a given amount of risk can invest more aggressively with a property
Answer: Non-diversified

Question FBQ29 : Hedging is the practice of taking a	in one market of offset and balance against the risk adopted by assuming a position in a contrary market.
Answer: Position

Question FBQ30 :	are derivatives in which the contracts to buy or sell a specified asset on a future date at a price specified today
Answer: Futures

Question FBQ31 :	is when the buyer has a right to buy a certain quantity of the underlying asset, at a specified price on or before a given date in the future, but he has no obligation to carry out this right
Answer: Call option

Question FBQ32 :	is a contract in which the buyer has the right to sell a certain quantity of an underlying asset, at a specified price on or before a given date in the future, but he has no obligation to carry out this right.
Answer: Put option

Question FBQ33 :	are derivatives in relation to options that are contracts which provide the owner the opportunity for an “all-or-nothing†profit from the contract
Answer: Binary options

Question FBQ34 :	derivatives refer to contracts which involve the exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future date
Answer: Swap

Question FBQ35 :	is provided is when a startup seeks funding in between full venture capital rounds
Answer: Bridge financing

Question MCQ1 :	derivatives refer to contracts which involve the exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future dateÂ
Answer: Swaps

Question MCQ2 : The main objective of saving account is to promote	 Answer: Savings

Question MCQ3 : Which of the following is not a type of commodity for investment? Answer: None of the options

Question MCQ4 :	refers to the process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking which can succeed and is invariably capable of attracting investors.Â
Answer: Venture creation

Question MCQ5 :	investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the capital market Answer: Value

Question MCQ6 :	is an investment which is undertaking in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movements in a financial asset
Answer: A hedge

Question MCQ7 :	is a technique that reduces risk by allocating investments among various financial instruments, industries and other categories Answer: Diversification

Question MCQ8 : Brokerage is another word for Answer: Arbitrageur

Question MCQ9 :	Is a type of tax Answer: PAYE

Question MCQ10 : According Gardon (	), there is a remarked difference between capital gains investing and the game of speculation
Answer: 2014

Question MCQ11 :	are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified dateÂ
Answer: Warrants

Question MCQ12 : This is a time draft or postdated instrument payable to a seller of goods, with payment guaranteed by a bankÂ
Answer: Banker’s acceptance

Question MCQ13 : According Gardon (2014), there is a remarked	between capital gains investing and the game of speculation
Answer: Difference

Question MCQ14 : A hedge can be constructed from many types of Answer: financial instruments

Question MCQ15 :	refers to a means with which take protection from financial loss in business generallyÂ
Answer: Insurance

Question MCQ16 : Under the current Nigerian law, taxation is enforced by the which tier of government (a) one (b) five (c) six (d) three
Answer: three

Question MCQ17 : Safety of investment can always be guaranteed Answer: FALSE

Question MCQ18 : Subrogation is the legal principles of  Answer: insurance

Question MCQ19 : Missing one of the legs of the trade and subsequently having to trade it soon after at a worse price is called Â
Answer: execution risk

Question MCQ20 : The	is a document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxationÂ
Answer: National Tax Policy

Question MCQ21 :	investing is the art of buying and selling an asset for a profitÂ
Answer: Capital gains

Question MCQ22 : Building personal cash flows essential involves the act of saving money towards maintaining cash reserves for future	Â
Answer: Utilization

Question MCQ23 :	refers to the practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets
Answer: Arbritrage

Question MCQ24 :	involves contracts that subsist between two parties, which incorporate specific terms
Answer: Derivatives

Question MCQ25 : A popular valuation metric is	with application for example to valuing unlisted companies and mergers and acquisition Answer: EBITDA

Question MCQ26 :	repays some or all of a loan when the borrower is insolvent
Answer: Credit insurance

Question MCQ27 : According to economists, equipment acquired by a firm for production with which to earn income from its operations in the long run is a/an
	?
Answer: Investment

Question MCQ28 : Tax is a monetary levy imposed on individuals to generate revenue for who?

Answer: The government

Question MCQ29 :	products can be used for: insuring against price movements such as in the case of hedging; guiding against exposure to price movements for speculation
Answer: Derivative

Question MCQ30 : Contingency fund can be categorized into	main areas Answer: 2

Question MCQ31 :	is associated with the cliché that you should “not put all your eggs in one basket.â€
Answer: Diversification

Question MCQ32 : There are mainly	types of risk that are associated with investment in the capital market
Answer: Two

Question MCQ33 :	is one of the hardest investments to make because it requires more than just money
Answer: Entrepreneurship

Question MCQ34 : The steps involved in personal financial planning process Include all of the following except  	
Answer: Goal division

Question MCQ35 : The essence of investment hinges on	returns Answer: Expected



BFN203 List of Questions

Latex formatted questions may not properly render

Q1 Commercial paper issued with lowinterest rate thus commercial paper are categorized as
better credit rating

Q2 Special provisions that can have adverse or beneficial effects and are reflected in interest rates does not include
inflation premium

Q3 Legal document required by Securities Exchange Commission stating associated risks and detailed description of issues is classified as
prospectus
Q4 In foreign financial markets, growth is represented by factors such as
a l of the above

Q5 Transaction cost of trading of financial instruments in centralized market is classified as
low transaction costs

Q6 the idea behind a capital adequacy ratio is that banking risk should be borne by
shareholders

Q7 a sudden demand by depositors for notes and coins is an example of
liquidity risk

Q8 pension and life insurance funds hold fewshort terms assets because
short termassets are too risky
Q9 one of the risks cannot be insured
unsystematic

Q10 the ability of banks to process enough resources to meet their recurrent obligations fromtime to time in banking practice is known as
liquidity

Q11 Commercial paper issued with lowinterest rate thus commercial paper are categorized as
better credit rating

Q12 Special provisions that can have adverse or beneficial effects and are reflected in interest rates does not include
inflation premium

Q13 Legal document required by Securities Exchange Commission stating associated risks and detailed description of issues is classified as
prospectus

Q14 In foreign financial markets, growth is represented by factors such as
a l of the above

Q15 Transaction cost of trading of financial instruments in centralized market is classified as
low transaction costs

Q16 the idea behind a capital adequacy ratio is that banking risk should be borne by
shareholders

Q17 a sudden demand by depositors for notes and coins is an example of
liquidity risk

Q18 pension and life insurance funds hold fewshort terms assets because
short termassets are too risky

Q19 one of the risks cannot be insured
unsystematic

Q20 the ability of banks to process enough resources to meet their recurrent obligations fromtime to time in banking practice is known as
liquidity

Q21 Depository institutions such as thrifts includes

a l of above

Q22 objectives of a tax systeminclude the following except
to prevent corruption
Q23 the material wealth of a society is equal to the sumof
a l real assets

Q24 types of commodities that are dealing in the commodities market include the following except
cowries

Q25 for bad debts to be deductible, the following requisite must concur except
the debt must partia ly charged-of with in the taxable year

Q26 a bond issue is broken up so that some investors will receive only payment while others will receive only principal payments which is an example of
b & d

Q27 By hedging a portfolio, a bank manger
reduces interest rate risk

Q28 what describes the degree to which an asset or security can be quickly sold or bought in the market without affecting the asset's price
liquidity

Q29 A retirement annuity is particularly attractive to someone who has
high longevity risk
Q30 Diversification is one way in which insurance companies can protect themselves
Random fluctuation

FBQ1: Another way to	is the market approach Answer: hedge

FBQ2: Investment requires	which implies that funds will have to be expended by the person who is investing.
Answer: financial commitments

FBQ3: Arbitrage refers to the practices of taking advantage of a price  	
between two or more financial market Answer: Difference

FBQ4: Lower risk of investment lowers the risk of an	significantly Answer: investment

FBQ5: Another way to invest wisely in	involves the use of speculation Answer: financial market

FBQ6: In speculation, dealer in	market pay little attention Answer: Financial

FBQ7: The real estate market are well structured as comparable to	market Answer: Financial

FBQ8: Equity capital refers to the	contribution Answer: owners

FBQ9: Real estate	can be risky in nature, as a form of investment Answer: Investment

FBQ10: Derivative refers to contract that	its value forms the performance of an underlying entity
Answer: Originates

FBQ11: Co-operative society as an aggregation of co-operators who	their funds together through regular saving
Answer: pooled

FBQ12:	refers to one part of one’s assets, usually deposits in savings account
Answer: savings

FBQ13:  Cash flow involves generating regular income from	assets Answer: Investment

FBQ14:	can also be done with thrifts and credit society or a cooperative society

Answer: Saving

FBQ15: Capital gains are generated from an appreciation on the value of  	
assets
Answer: Investment

FBQ16: In	securities are traded as short term instrument Answer: money market

FBQ17: There is a remarked difference between	gains investing and speculation Answer: Capital Â

FBQ18:	is another means of ensuring investment in real estate with some sort of raising equity financing in smaller amount
Answer: real estate crowding fund

FBQ19: Money market is the financial market in which	are traded with maturity of up to one year
Answer: financial instrument

FBQ20: Maturities exceed for	year Answer: one year Â

FBQ21: Work of	is types under intellectual property Answer: Art

FBQ22: When maturities exceed	years the market is considered as a Capital market
Answer: Five

FBQ23:	is the exclusive right of the copy right holder. Answer: fair use

FBQ24:	refers to some payment that are made by one company to another company in exchange for the right to use intellectual property
Answer: Royalties

FBQ25:	separating system is intellectual property that qualifies for royalty Answer: Windows

FBQ26: T-bill normal has a maturity date of some month but less than	year Answer: One

FBQ27: Marketable securities refers to money market	instrument Answer: Financial

FBQ28:	portfolio is a situation where investor who is willing to take a given amount of risk can invest more aggressively with a property
Answer: non-diversified

FBQ29: Hedging is the practice of taking a	in one market of offset and balance against the risk adopted by assuming a position in a contrary market.
Answer: Position

FBQ30:	is missing one of the legs of the trade and subsequently having to trade it soon after at a worse price
Answer: execution risk

FBQ31: It is advisable to use a	investment when making a large investment, Answer: Hedge

FBQ32: Under the current Nigerian law, taxation is enforced by the	tiers of government
Answer: Three

FBQ33: Hedging investor is an	which is undertaking in order to reduce the risk if adverse price movement in a financial asset
Answer: Investment

FBQ34: It is advisable to engage services of	since they are professionals in such market
Answer: brokerage firms

FBQ35: The term	is fraught with many definitions but such expositions recognize the fact that investment requirements financial commitments which implies that funds will have to be expended by the person who is investing
Answer: investment

MCQ1: The individual or entity who subscribe to insurance policy against rises is called

Answer: Policy holder

MCQ2: Betaneutral approach is one way to Answer: Hedge

MCQ3: Investment is regarded as saving embarked upon as a result of Answer: Debuted consumption

MCQ4: Investment is done with the intention of generating Answer: Higher Return

MCQ5: Hedging is strategy that can be used to take advantages of wise

Answer: investment

MCQ6: Consumer can be used in other way such as Answer: Hedging

MCQ7: Missing one of the legs of the trade and subsequently having to trade it soon after at a wise price is called
Answer: Execution risk

MCQ8: Brokerage is another word for Answer: Arbitrageur

MCQ9: Crowding fund in very much practice in U.S Answer: Real Estate

MCQ10: The payment to the holder of a right or owner of an asset for the using the property.
Answer: Royalties

MCQ11: Diversification is the sort of thing that suffers from what is called Answer: Double Dip

MCQ12: Portfolio optimisation is achieved by placing a larger percentage of high return investment in a 	
Answer: Diversified portfolio

MCQ13: Beta is the historical correlation between a stock and a/an Answer: Index

MCQ14: A hedge can be constructed from many types of Answer: Financial instruments

MCQ15: A document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation is called
Answer: The National Tax Policy

MCQ16: Under the current Nigerian law, taxation is enforced by the which tier of government (a) one (b) five (c) six (d) three
Answer: Three

MCQ17: The individual or entity who subscribe to insurance policy against rises is the
	or  	
Answer: Insured or policy holder

MCQ18: Subrogation is the legal, principles of Answer: Insurance


MCQ19: Missing one of the legs of the trade and subsequently having to trade it soon after at a worse price is called
Answer: Execution Risk

MCQ20: When you are making a large investment, it is advisable to use  Answer: Hedge

MCQ21: A monetary charge imposed by the government on person, entities transaction and properties to yield revenue is called
Answer: Tax

MCQ22: The practice of taking a position in one market of offset and balance against the risk adopted by assuming a position in a contrary or opposing market or investment marketer
Answer: Hedging

MCQ23: In respect of hedging as stock price a common hedging technique used in the financial market for equity technique
Answer: Long/Short

MCQ24: The historical correlation between a stock and an index is called Answer: Beta

MCQ25: Charge imposed by the government on person, entities transaction and properties to yield revenue is known as
Answer: Monetary

MCQ26: The document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation is known as
Answer: The national tax policyÂ

MCQ27: What are professionals in investment market called? Answer: Brokerage Firms

MCQ28: The reduction in volatility of a financial assets price movements is known as Answer: Diversification

MCQ29: Property regarded as the creations of the intellect for which a monopoly is granted to the designated owner by law.
Answer: Intellectual

MCQ30: A unit of capital ownership in a firm in terms of equity investment by the shareholder
Answer: The ordinary share

MCQ31: Which of the methods can be useful toward marking return on your fund? Answer: Speculation

MCQ32: Which of the following method is used economical by reserving money for future use?
Answer: Saving

MCQ33: What can be used to avoid paying taxes? Answer: Speculation

MCQ34: Which of the following usually buy undervalued securities? Answer: Risker investor

MCQ35: Which of the following is the legal principles of insurance. Answer: Subrogation


Bfn209
Balance sheet shows the present _______ of a business. (Statement)
Profit______ function is one of the acquired roles of the Finance Manager. (planning)
Financial statement is also used for future plans of the _______.(Enterprise)
Risk is the expected _______ of the income flow(variability)
Pandey ______ stated that the basis of the theory of financial management.(2005)
Financial Manager is the person responsible for performing ______ functions.(Finance)
Fixed costs remain constant while _____ costs change in direct proportion to changes in volume of goods. (Variable)
________ is otherwise known as profit and loss account. (Income statement)
________ mechanism system is a vital organ of a market economy. (Price)
Financing Activities consist of cash flows relating to ____ and owners' equity. (Liability)
BUS205
___________ is a means by which power is acquired, exercised and sustained. (Communication)
Non __________ income is used to buy items to meet basic needs. (Discretionary)
_________motivation also causes you to be loyal to certain shops and companies. (Patronage)
__________ is a book in which particulars of all monies received or paid are recorded. (Cash Account)
___________ is the value that products and sellers place on goods or services. (Price)
Social __________ is owed by individuals and not by organizations. (Obligation)
_______ researchers also gather information from a wider group of people. (Market)
The _______ is the total amount supplied by owner of the business or owners equity or net worth. (Capital)
__________ must be attractive. (Packaging)
________include the resources possessed by the firm. (Assets)
BUS207
Verbal communication is one way for people to communicate ______________. (Face to face)

The actual origin of ___________ is subject to considerable speculation(Language)
If a language is about communicating with signals, voice, sounds, gestures, or written symbols, can animal communications be considered as a ___________? (Language)
The basis of _________________ is the interaction between people. (Communication)
Animals do not have a __________ form of a language, but use a language to communicate with each another. (Written)
Some words may be imitative of natural __________, but others may come from expressions of emotion, such as laughter or crying. (Sounds)
Some of the key components of verbal communication are sound, writing, speaking, and ______________. (Language)
A dialogue is a reciprocal conversation between _______ or more entities, (TWO)
As meaning is assigned to words, language develops, which leads to the ___________ of speaking. (Development)
At birth, most people have vocal cords, which produce __________. (Sounds)
BUS106
It could be argued that the _______ school is identical to the management process school. (Empirical)
Art is the imposition of __________. (Pattern)
___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.(Pinciple)
Gilbreth is known for his work on time and _________studies. (Motion)
Decision theory schools believe in _________decision making. (Rational)
The first principles of management were advocated. (Henry fayol)
There are special areas of management that are not subjected to rigous of(Science)

spend his life working on the difference engine (Babbage)

Management can be define as getting thing done through (Organising)

Management can be define as a team or group of individuals in _________(Organisation)

ECO122

Exports are determined by factors outside the control of the ___ economy (Home)

The two components of import demand is fixed, and at the same time it varies with (Income)

The ____ are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers (Spending Decision)

In technical terms, _____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade (Gain from trade)

Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ______ with each other (Trading)
Import demand changes as______ changes (Income)
Because export is exogenous while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are_____ related to national income/national output (Negatively)
_____ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers (Import)
When income rises, the aspect of _____ rises as well and when income falls, it falls (Import demand)
Exports depend on spending decisions made by foreign ____ or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services (Consumer)

ECO231

The demand for goods and services is __ (Direct Demand)

The prices paid to the factors of production are called (All of the above)

Reason for the study of factor pricing are (All of the above)

The demand of factor of product can also be Joint Demand because for producer to produce orange he/she has to demand for all the _(factors of production)

The factors needed in the production process are also known as (Production Service)

The factor pricing is concerned with the determination of prices of services of factors of ______ (Production)

To produce goods and services, ____ need the services of factors of production, like land, labour, capital, and entrepreneur (FIRMs)

The theory of distribution is an attempt to explain how income is distributed among the factors of __ (Production)

The employer of factors of production only uses the factors in the production of goods and services to be finally sold in the ____(Product Market)

When workers are engaged or capital are borrowed, it does not offer any direct satisfaction to the ____ (Producer)

The production concept holds that consumers will value products that are highly (Affordable)

Another important role is the discovery of entrepreneurial talent (Agree)

Marketing's first role is to (Stimulate Aggregate potential demand)

Consumerism is an organized movement of citizens and government to fight wars on poor products(Disagree)

Commodity approach in marketing focuses on (Classes of products)

The major goal of an organization to an extent is (Profit)

The product concept holds that consumers value products that offer (High Quality)

Marketing concept holds that organization must first create to satisfy (Needs and want)
One of the significance of marketing is to provide (impulse purchase)

The purpose of marketing concept is to help organizations (Achieve its goal

BFN203

According Gardon (2014), there is a remarked difference between capital gains investing and the game of speculation

The_________ is a document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation (National tax Policy

investing is the art of buying and selling an asset for a profit (Capital Gain Investing)

__ is a technique that reduces risk by allocating investments among various financial instruments, industries and other categories (Diversification)

some or all of a loan when the borrower is ins (Credit Insurance)

The steps involved in personal financial planning process Include all of the following except________ (Goal Division)

are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date (Warrants)

Is a type of tax (PAYE)

Owning a current and savings account have the same requirements (False)

Ent203

The achievement needs theory was developed by (McCelland)

Which of the following emphasized the risk aspect of entrepreneurship (Cantillon)

Which of the following a pattern of venture capital development (Mid Stage)

Entrepreneurial process include the following stages except? (Profit Planning)

(New Monnies)

VC stands for (Venture Capital)

Which of the following will not support in-house entrepreneurial development in organizations (Bickering)

CIT201
The software that uses the power and speed of a computer machine to perform some mathematical calculations or simulate some real life situations is called a ___ software. (Modeling)

Ent 209

Friedrich Hayek (1937 is a prominent of( Austrian school of thought)

An entrepreneur who is a rebellion and tries to bring in new ways of working and new society is called ____________________ (Reformist)

The Nigerian Bank for Commerce and Industry (NBCI) was set up in 1973 to provide ____________ by way of loans to indigenous persons, institutions and organisations for medium and long term investments (Equity and Loan)

The risk theory proposes that the _________________ the nature of business, the __________________________ (More Risky Higer profit)

The Human Capital Entrepreneurship Theory is hinged on these two factors _______________ and ________________ (Education and Experience)

1. 	One of the credit functions of BOA is the direct lending to qualified loan applicants engaged in agricultural and nonagricultural small busine (correct)
Mkt 205
Certain (question) are often asked while formulating product strategy
In most organizations, __________ is an annual process, typically covering just the year ahead (Strategic planning)
An important element of distribution strategy for banks is __ (Site Location)
High interest s rate on deposits or reduction rates on loans and advances are good examples of pricing ___________ (Pricing Strategy)
The marketing concept rest on ______________pillars (Four)
A good marketing plan should have the following qualities (All of the above)
are attracted through promises and are retained through satisfaction of expectations (Customers)
Place strategies are concerned with ensuring the prompt delivery of the services to the _______ (Target Market)
_ must always come first before other activities (Planning)
described the emergence of services sector and banks experience in service marketing (Gupta)

acc102

These are accounting concepts except.
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________






2. The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________
ans-  Investment

3. The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________
ans-  Original Price

4. What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities.
ans- Bonds

5. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of
ans-  Blue chip

6. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________
ans-  Market Liquidity

7. Which of the following is not a financial asset?
ans- stock

8. Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________
ans- Cash Investment

9. The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________
ans-  Earnings

10. The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________
ans- Liquidity

11. One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security
ans- Real Properties
The money market is the financial market in which financial instruments are traded with maturity of up to ______ year
12.
one (1)

Question FBQ1 : According to economists, investment is regarded as savings embarked upon as a result of ________________
Answer: delayed consumption

Question FBQ2 : Investment requires______ which implies that funds will have to be expended by the person who is investing.
Answer: financial commitments

Question FBQ3 : Arbitrage refers to the practices of taking advantage of a price __________ between two or more financial market
Answer: difference

Question FBQ4 : In finance, an investment involves utilization of funds in acquisition of ________assets
Answer: financial

Question FBQ5 : ________ is regarded as a monetary charge imposed by the government on persons, entities, transactions and properties to yield revenue
Answer: Tax

Question FBQ6 : Financial products floated by the government of a country are known as _______ securities
Answer: gilt-edge

Question FBQ7 : Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as ________ securities
Answer: blue chip

Question FBQ8 : Equity capital refers to the ______ contribution
Answer: Owner’s

Question FBQ9 : _______ means the ease with which an investment can be converted into cash
Answer: Liquidity

Question FBQ10 : A __________ refers to a financial product which has its value dependent on the outcome of the original financial product as investment by the managers of the funds.
Answer: derivative

Question FBQ11 : Co-operative society as an aggregation of co-operators who_______ their funds together through regular saving
Answer: pooled

Question FBQ12 : Derivative instruments can be traded over the counter
Answer: True

Question FBQ13 :  Owning a current and savings account have the same requirements
Answer: False

Question FBQ14 : The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _________
Answer: Earnings Earnings

Question FBQ15 : The individual or entity who subscribe to insurance policy against rises is called ______
Answer: policy holder

Question FBQ16 : Beta neutral approach is one way to
Answer: hedge

Question FBQ17 : Investment is regarded as saving embarked upon as a result of
Answer: Debuted consumption

Question FBQ18 : Real estate ________ is another means of ensuring investment in real estate with some sort of raising equity financing in smaller amount
Answer: crowding fund

Question FBQ19 : Brokerage is another word for
Answer: Arbitrageur

Question FBQ20 : The payment to the holder of a right or owner of an asset for the using the property is called what?
Answer: Royalties

Question FBQ21 : Portfolio optimization is achieved by placing a larger percentage of high return investment in a____
Answer: Diversified portfolio

Question FBQ22 : Beta is the historical correlation between a stock and an
Answer: index

Question FBQ23 : Prevailing Price of Stock less Original price is equals to ________
Answer: earning

Question FBQ24 : In venture capital, you do not need to formulate an idea, the idea is already there for you to just take. This statement is______
Answer: False

Question FBQ25 : _________ provides some leverage or gearing such that a small movement in the underlying asset value can cause a large difference in the value of the derivative
Answer: Speculation

Question FBQ26 : T-bills normal have a maturity date less than _____ year(s)
Answer: one

Question FBQ27 : What type of derivative is a personalized contract between two parties in which payment takes place at a specific date in the future at today's pre-determined price as agreed upon by both parties? 
Answer: Forwards

Question FBQ28 : ________portfolio is a situation where  investor who is willing to take a given amount of risk can invest more aggressively with a property
Answer: Non-diversified

Question FBQ29 : Hedging is the practice of taking a_______ in one market of offset and balance against the risk adopted by assuming a position in a contrary market.
Answer: Position

Question FBQ30 : ________ are derivatives in which the contracts to buy or sell a specified asset on a future date at a price specified today
Answer: Futures

Question FBQ31 : _______ is when the buyer has a right to buy a certain quantity of the underlying asset, at a specified price on or before a given date in the future, but he has no obligation to carry out this right
Answer: Call option

Question FBQ32 : ______ is a contract in which the buyer has the right to sell a certain quantity of an underlying asset, at a specified price on or before a given date in the future, but he has no obligation to carry out this right.
Answer: Put option

Question FBQ33 : _______ are derivatives in relation to options that are contracts which provide the owner the opportunity for an “all-or-nothing” profit from the contract
Answer: Binary options

Question FBQ34 : ________ derivatives refer to contracts which involve the exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future date
Answer: Swap

Question FBQ35 : _______is provided is when a startup seeks funding in between full venture capital rounds
Answer: Bridge financing

Question MCQ1 : __________ derivatives refer to contracts which involve the exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future date 
Answer: Swaps

Question MCQ2 : The main objective of saving account is to promote _________ 
Answer: Savings

Question MCQ3 : Which of the following is not a type of commodity for investment?
Answer: None of the options

Question MCQ4 : ________refers to the process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking which can succeed and is invariably capable of attracting investors. 
Answer: Venture creation

Question MCQ5 : ________ investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the capital market 
Answer: Value

Question MCQ6 : ________ is an investment which is undertaking in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movements in a financial asset
Answer: A hedge

Question MCQ7 : ________ is a technique that reduces risk by allocating investments among various financial instruments, industries and other categories
Answer: Diversification

Question MCQ8 : Brokerage is another word for
Answer: Arbitrageur

Question MCQ9 : _______ Is a type of tax 
Answer: PAYE

Question MCQ10 : According Gardon (_______), there is a remarked difference between capital gains investing and the game of speculation
Answer: 2014

Question MCQ11 : _________ are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date 
Answer: Warrants

Question MCQ12 : This is a time draft or postdated instrument payable to a seller of goods, with payment guaranteed by a bank 
Answer: Banker’s acceptance

Question MCQ13 : According Gardon (2014), there is a remarked ______ between capital gains investing and the game of speculation
Answer: Difference

Question MCQ14 : A hedge can be constructed from many types of 
Answer: financial instruments

Question MCQ15 : _______ refers to a means with which take protection from financial loss in business generally 
Answer: Insurance

Question MCQ16 : Under the current Nigerian law, taxation is enforced by the which tier of government (a) one (b) five (c) six (d) three
Answer: three

Question MCQ17 : Safety of investment can always be guaranteed
Answer: FALSE

Question MCQ18 : Subrogation is the legal principles of 
Answer: insurance

Question MCQ19 : Missing one of the legs of the trade and subsequently having to trade it soon after at a worse price is called  
Answer: execution risk

Question MCQ20 : The _______ is a document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation 
Answer: National Tax Policy

Question MCQ21 : _______investing is the art of buying and selling an asset for a profit 
Answer: Capital gains

Question MCQ22 : Building personal cash flows essential involves the act of saving money towards maintaining cash reserves for future ______ 
Answer: Utilization

Question MCQ23 : _______ refers to the practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets
Answer: Arbritrage

Question MCQ24 : ______ involves contracts that subsist between two parties, which incorporate specific terms
Answer: Derivatives

Question MCQ25 : A popular valuation metric is_______ with application for example to valuing unlisted companies and mergers and acquisition 
Answer: EBITDA

Question MCQ26 : _______ repays some or all of a loan when the borrower is insolvent
Answer: Credit insurance

Question MCQ27 : According to economists, equipment acquired by a firm for production with which to earn income from its operations in the long run is a/an _____?
Answer: Investment

Question MCQ28 : Tax is a monetary levy imposed on individuals to generate revenue for who?
Answer: The government

Question MCQ29 : ______ products can be used for: insuring against price movements such as in the case of hedging; guiding against exposure to price movements for speculation
Answer: Derivative

Question MCQ30 : Contingency fund can be categorized into ___main areas
Answer: 2

Question MCQ31 : _______ is associated with the cliché that you should “not put all your eggs in one basket.”
Answer: Diversification

Question MCQ32 : There are mainly _____ types of risk that are associated with investment in the capital market
Answer: Two

Question MCQ33 : _______is one of the hardest investments to make because it requires more than just money
Answer: Entrepreneurship

Question MCQ34 : The steps involved in personal financial planning process Include all of the following except _____
Answer: Goal division

Question MCQ35 : The essence of investment hinges on _______ returns
Answer: Expected

======
BFN203
======

13. Futures are ___________in which contracts to buy or sell a specified asset on a future date at a specifiedprice  today

	      Arbitrage

	      Hedging

	--->> Derivatives

	      Swap

14. Investment in crude oil is an example of a _________________ investment.

	      Derivative

	--->> Commodity

	      Security

	      Future

15. ____________is a contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity

	--->> Derivative

	      Arbitrage

	      Swap

	      Hedging

16. _______________ investment involves diversifying holdings beside securities.

	--->> Property

	      Derivative

	      Public Offer

	      Private Offer

17. ___________ derivatives refer to contracts involvIing  exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future date.

	      Hedging

	--->> Swap

	      Arbitrage

	      Future

18. The term _____________ may refer to the expected profit in investment.

	--->> Arbitrage

	      Swap

	      Hedging

	      Speculation

19. ._____________ can be used to mitigate risk in the underlying asset in investment.

	      Acquisition

	--->> Speculation

	      Public Offer

	      Private placement

20. The ____________is an investment position intended for offsetting potential losses or gains.

	--->> Hedge

	      Speculation

	      Arbitrage

	      Swap

21. ___________involves the practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets.

	      Swap

	      Hedge

	      Speculation

	--->> Arbitrage

22. ________ involves engaging in risky financial transactions towards earning profit from short term price fluctuations.

	      Hedging

	      Swap

	--->> Speculation

	      Arbitrage

======
BFN203
======

23. Short term securities can only be traded in the ______________ market.

	      Commodity

	      Capital

	--->> Money

	      Exchange

24. ______________ can be earned through original creative works.

	--->> Royalty

	      Commission

	      Interest

	      Dividend

25. Seed Funding is associated with ------------------------------ investors.

	--->> Angel

	      Equity

	      Preferred

	      Private

26. Debentures can only be traded in the _________________ market.

	      Money

	--->> Capital

	      Commodity

	      Future

27. ______________are also visible in the energy market other than securities market.

	      Contractors

	      Traders

	--->> Speculators

	      Mortgages

28. Bonds are sometimes issued with _____________ warrants attached.

	--->> Stock

	      Commission

	      Specified

	      Security

29. Long-term loans that are secured by real property are associated with ___________.

	      Bonds

	--->> Debentures

	      Securities

	      Term loans

30. The ______________ right cannot be obtained from a text book.

	--->> Patent

	      Copy

	      Equity

	      Private

31. Preferred Stock is a form of _______________ investment in a firm.

	      Lending

	--->> Ownership

	      hybrid

	      risky

32. Development loan stock can be used by the ______________ for raising funds.

	      Development Institution

	      Development Agency

	--->> Municipal Authority

	      Corporate Entity

FBQ1: Another way to _______ is the market approach
Answer: hedge

FBQ2: Investment requires______ which implies that funds will have to be expended by the person who is investing.
Answer: financial commitments

FBQ3: Arbitrage refers to the practices of taking advantage of a price __________ between two or more financial market
Answer: Difference

FBQ4: Lower risk of investment lowers the risk of an _________significantly
Answer: investment

FBQ5: Another way to invest wisely in________ involves the use of speculation
Answer: financial market

FBQ6: In speculation, dealer in _________ market pay little attention
Answer: Financial

FBQ7: The real estate market are well structured as comparable to ________ market
Answer: Financial

FBQ8: Equity capital refers to the ______ contribution
Answer: owners

FBQ9: Real estate __________ can be risky in nature, as a form of investment
Answer: Investment

FBQ10: Derivative refers to contract that ___________ its value forms the performance of an underlying entity
Answer: Originates

FBQ11: Co-operative society as an aggregation of co-operators who_______ their funds together through regular saving
Answer: pooled

FBQ12: _________ refers to one part of one’s assets, usually deposits in savings account
Answer: savings

FBQ13:  Cash flow involves generating regular income from ______ assets
Answer: Investment

FBQ14: _________can also be done with thrifts and credit society or a cooperative society
Answer: Saving

FBQ15: Capital gains are generated from an appreciation on the value of _________ assets
Answer: Investment

FBQ16: In _________________securities are traded as short term instrument
Answer: money market

FBQ17: There is a remarked difference between _____ gains investing and speculation
Answer: Capital  

FBQ18: ________ is another means of ensuring investment in real estate with some sort of raising equity financing in smaller amount
Answer: real estate crowding fund

FBQ19: Money market is the financial market in which________ are traded with maturity of up to one year
Answer: financial instrument

FBQ20: Maturities exceed for _______ year
Answer: one year  

FBQ21: Work of ______is types under intellectual property
Answer: Art

FBQ22: When maturities exceed_______ years the market is considered as a Capital market
Answer: Five

FBQ23: ________ is the exclusive right of the copy right holder.
Answer: fair use

FBQ24: ______ refers to some payment that are made by one company to another company in exchange for the right to use intellectual property
Answer: Royalties

FBQ25: _______separating system is intellectual property that qualifies for royalty
Answer: Windows

FBQ26: T-bill normal has a maturity date of some month but less than _____ year
Answer: One

FBQ27: Marketable securities refers to money market_______ instrument
Answer: Financial

FBQ28: ________portfolio is a situation where  investor who is willing to take a given amount of risk can invest more aggressively with a property
Answer: non-diversified

FBQ29: Hedging is the practice of taking a_______ in one market of offset and balance against the risk adopted by assuming a position in a contrary market.
Answer: Position

FBQ30: ______is missing one of the legs of the trade and subsequently having to trade it soon after at a worse price
Answer: execution risk

FBQ31: It is advisable to use a ______ investment when making a large investment,
Answer: Hedge

FBQ32: Under the current Nigerian law, taxation is enforced by the ______ tiers of government
Answer: Three

FBQ33: Hedging investor is an _____which is undertaking in order to reduce the risk if adverse price movement in a financial asset
Answer: Investment

FBQ34: It is advisable to engage services of ______ since they are professionals in such market
Answer: brokerage firms

FBQ35: The term ________ is fraught with many definitions but such expositions recognize the fact that investment requirements financial commitments which implies that funds will have to be expended by the person who is investing
Answer: investment

MCQ1: The individual or entity who subscribe to insurance policy against rises is called ____________
Answer: Policy holder

MCQ2: Betaneutral approach is one way to
Answer: Hedge

MCQ3: Investment is regarded as saving embarked upon as a result of
Answer: Debuted consumption

MCQ4: Investment is done with the intention of generating
Answer: Higher Return

MCQ5: Hedging is strategy that can be used to take advantages of wise
Answer: investment

MCQ6: Consumer can be used in other way such as
Answer: Hedging

MCQ7: Missing one of the legs of the trade and subsequently having to trade it soon after at a wise price is called
Answer: Execution risk

MCQ8: Brokerage is another word for
Answer: Arbitrageur

MCQ9: Crowding fund in very much practice in U.S
Answer: Real Estate

MCQ10: The payment to the holder of a right or owner of an asset for the using the property.
Answer: Royalties

MCQ11: Diversification is the sort of thing that suffers from what is called
Answer: Double Dip

MCQ12: Portfolio optimisation is achieved by placing a larger percentage of high return investment in a____
Answer: Diversified portfolio

MCQ13: Beta is the historical correlation between a stock and a/an
Answer: Index

MCQ14: A hedge can be constructed from many types of
Answer: Financial instruments

MCQ15: A document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation is called
Answer: The National Tax Policy

MCQ16: Under the current Nigerian law, taxation is enforced by the which tier of government (a) one (b) five (c) six (d) three
Answer: Three

MCQ17: The individual or entity who subscribe to insurance policy against rises is the ______ or _______
Answer: Insured or policy holder

MCQ18: Subrogation is the legal, principles of
Answer: Insurance

MCQ19: Missing one of the legs of the trade and subsequently having to trade it soon after at a worse price is called
Answer: Execution Risk

MCQ20: When you are making a large investment, it is advisable to use   
Answer: Hedge

MCQ21: A monetary charge imposed by the government on person, entities transaction and properties to yield revenue  is called
Answer: Tax

MCQ22: The practice of taking a position in one market of offset and balance against the risk adopted by assuming a position in a contrary or opposing market or investment marketer
Answer: Hedging

MCQ23: In respect of hedging as stock price a common hedging technique used in the financial market for equity technique
Answer: Long/Short

MCQ24: The historical correlation between a stock and an index  is called
Answer: Beta

MCQ25: Charge imposed by the government on person, entities transaction and properties to yield revenue is known as
Answer: Monetary

MCQ26: The document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation  is known as
Answer: The national tax policy 

MCQ27: What are professionals in investment market called?
Answer: Brokerage Firms

MCQ28: The reduction in volatility of a financial assets price movements is known as
Answer: Diversification

MCQ29: Property regarded as the creations of the intellect for which a monopoly is granted to the designated owner by law.
Answer: Intellectual

MCQ30: A unit of capital ownership in a firm in terms of equity investment by the shareholder
Answer: The ordinary share

MCQ31: Which of the methods can be useful toward marking return on your fund?
Answer: Speculation

MCQ32: Which of the following method is used economical by reserving money for future use?
Answer: Saving

MCQ33: What can be used to avoid paying taxes?
Answer: Speculation

MCQ34: Which of the following usually buy undervalued securities?
Answer: Risker investor

MCQ35: Which of the following is the legal principles of insurance.
Answer: Subrogation

Building system pricing

Mortgage bank option

Abuja merchantile exchange

Exchange traded group

Switch assets risk

Ordinary share

Products development

Royalties

It is a derivative çontract

Stocks


BFN203 TMA2

Types of commodities for investment include the following except: ANS Stocks

The largest derivation exchanges in the world by volume of transactions include the following except: ANS Exchange -traded group

Commodity investment channels around the world include the following except: ANS Abuja Merchantile Exchange

Intellectual property rights are these except: ANS Royalties

Risk management in property investment include the following except:ANS Building system pricing

Sources of cash flows in property investment are these except:ANS Mortgage bank option

Sources of debt capital are these except: ANS Ordinary shares

Derivatives are used for the following transactional dimensions except: ANS Switch asset risks

Financing stages of venture capital excludes this: ANS Product development
The money used in starting and running a business is Known an ___________
(D) Investment

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative
(C) Swops

Obligations of the government that are issued to cover government budget deficits are known as __________
(A) Treasury Bills

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________
(B) Marketable securities

The money issued by the apex bank on behalf of the government to raise funds for meeting shortfalls in revenue with which to finance recurrent government expenditure is called ____________
(C) Treasury Bills

At which stage of the Model will the potential entrepreneur be interested in testing or discussing his/her business idea with the family, good friends and colleagues.
(B) Test and Persuasion Phase

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
(C) Five

The main bodies recognized by law as tax authorities in Nigeria are all of the following except_______
(A) Local Board of internal revenue

Which phase of Hult model requires that the entrepreneur engages in juggling figures (calculations), preparing relevant budgets, analyzing the market situation and invariably assessing the production process?
(C) Preparation phase

What stimulates economic growth and job creation through its impact on investment and capital formation in the economy?
(C) Vat policies

In Bhave Model, which phase iInvolves converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking, which is the foundation of the creation of any business venture by an entrepreneur.
(D) Opportunity recognition stage

One of the following is not an objective of a tax system
(B) To promote market inefficiency

A monetary charge imposed by the Government on persons, entities, transactions and properties to yield revenue is called___________
(C) Tax

The Nigeria tax system is a tripartite structure which comprises of: Tax Policy, Tax Legislation and _____________
(B) Tax administration

A document which provides a set of guidelines, rules and modus operandi that would regulate taxation in Nigeria is called____________
(D) National tax policy

Which phase of Hult model encourages the entrepreneur towards finally implementing his/her business idea.
(A) Start-up phase

Which of the following is not one of the taxes collectible by the Federal Government
(C) Transportation tax

The money used in starting and running a business is Known an ___________
(D) Investment

When the entrepreneur has the task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development, it is known as ____________
(A) Business Plan

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________
(B) Marketable securities

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
(C) Five

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative
(C) Swops

Which phase represents the beginning of Hult Model of Venture creation?
(B) Idea Phase


BFN203  NOUN EXAM



This is considered as the key component of personal finance.
Financial planning

The largest derivation exchanges in the world by volume of transactions include the following except:
Exchange -traded group

Savings account has the following main features except:
Maximum period of holding a savings account is ten years

Essential qualities of contingency fund include the following except:
High risk

This is not an advantage of speculation in investment.
It is a derivative contract

Financing stages of venture capital excludes this:
Product development

Sources of debt capital are these except:
Ordinary shares

Derivatives are used for the following transactional dimensions except:
Switch asset risks

Commodity investment channels around the world include the following except:
Abuja Merchantile Exchange

______ necessitates swapping only the interest inherent in the cash flows using the same currency between the two parties.
Interest rate swap

Derivative is an example of ownership______________.
Ownership (supposedly INVESTMENT - Ownership INVESTMENT)

Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of
Blue chip

Some of the common variants of derivative contracts are as follows except:
Over-the-counter

One of the basic building blocksof a basic portfoliois:
investment diversification

The entrepreneur constitutes the driving ______________for the recognition of a venture idea.
Force

Relative to venture creation, the role of the entrepreneur does not include:
Commitment of sufficient financial resources

A popular ___________metric is earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortization.
Valuation

______ is the increase in the investor\'s equity ratio as the portion of debt service payments devoted to principal accrue over time.
Equity build-up

The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________
Earnings

The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person¸s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________
Investment

The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________
Original Price

Which of the following is not a financial asset?
Stock

Short-term ______ is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated
Contingency Fund

This is not one of the characteristics of investment.
Lending investment

Disadvantages of Hedging does not include _________
low management fees

All business ventures created must go through _______________ before operations.
Startup

__________ is regarded as savings embarked upon as a result of delayed consumption.
Investment

The entrepreneur constitutes the driving ______________for the recognition of a venture idea.
Force

Venture creation process involves the following except:
start-up phase

An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________
Market Liquidity

Deakins Model of venture creation process does not include _________
Exchange Stage

Prevailing Price of Stock less Original price equals ___________ in such undertaking.
Earnings

Advantages of Hedging include ____________
exposure to markets that can easily forecast past trends

A Treasury is normally managed by the __________ bank on behalf of the government.
Central

Hult Model of Venture Creation Process includes _______
Test and Persuasion Phase

Developing ____________plans for the future is a fundament role of the entrepreneur.
Strategic

Basic financial literacy, as a course, exposes one to the knowledge and understanding of:
how to evaluate projects

The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person¸s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________
Investment

______ involves taking advantage of differences in price of a single asset or identical cash-flows.
Arbitrage

Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________
Cash Investment


Which phase represents the beginning of Hult Model of Venture creation?
Idea phase

When the entrepreneur has the task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development, it is known as?
Business plan

Obligations of the government that are issued to cover government budget deficits are known as __?
Treasury bill

At which stage of the Model will the potential entrepreneur be interested in testing or discussing his/her business idea with the family, good friends and colleagues.?
test and persuasion phase

The money used in starting and running a business is Known an _______investment
c

The money issued by the apex bank on behalf of the government to raise funds for meeting shortfalls in revenue with which to finance recurrent government expenditure is called ________
Treasure bills

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
Five

A financial product which has its value dependent on the outcome of the original financial product as investment by the managers of the funds is called___________?
Derivative

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________?
Marketable securities

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative?
SWOPS



Diversification of ___________ is required towards reduction of business risks.
Portfolio

Derivative is an example of ownership______________.
Ownership

Prevailing Price of Stock less Original price equals ___________ in such undertaking.
Earnings

Developing ____________plans for the future is a fundament role of the entrepreneur.
Strategic

A Treasury is normally managed by the __________ bank on behalf of the government.
Central

Potential entrepreneurs are interested in ___________possible business ideas for creation of ventures.
Identifying

The entrepreneur constitutes the driving ______________for the recognition of a venture idea.
Force

__________ is regarded as savings embarked upon as a result of delayed consumption.
Investment

A popular ___________metric is earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortization.
Valuation

All business ventures created must go through _______________ before operations.
Startup

Short-term ______ is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated
Contingency Fund

______ options are contracts which provide the owner the opportunity for an “all-or-nothing” profit from the contract.
Binary option

The price at which the sale of an option takes place is known as ______ and is specified at the time the parties enter into the option.
strike price

Futures contract is a homogeneous contract that is normally written by a ______ which operates an exchange where the deal can take place.
clearing house

Derivative is a personalized contract between two parties in which payment takes place at a specific date at today\'s called ______
forwards

A contract that offers the owner the right, but not the obligation, to buy, in respect of a specified asset is _________
call option

_____ is when an insurance company compensates, the insured in the case of certain losses only up to the insured\'s interest.
Indemnity

______ implies that all classes of risks insured with an insurance company are shared between insurers or insurance companies.
Co-insurance

_______ implies that risks having two or more policies with same coverage would not pay separately
Dual insurance

____ is measured by the disparity between original price of the investible product and current market price of the product
Capital gain

Value investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the _______ market.
Investment

_______ accounts are associated with commission on turnover on the basis of the number of transactions on the account in a given period of time
Current

Deakins Model of venture creation process does not include _________
Exchange Stage

______ necessitates swapping only the interest inherent in the cash flows using the same currency between the two parties.
Interest rate swap

______ is the increase in the investor\'s equity ratio as the portion of debt service payments devoted to principal accrue over time.
Equity build-up

Disadvantages of Hedging does not include _________
low management fees

Hult Model of Venture Creation Process includes _______
Test and Persuasion Phase

______ involves taking advantage of differences in price of a single asset or identical cash-flows.
Arbitrage

Portfolio ______ is achieved by placing a larger percentage of high return investments in a diversified portfolio.
optimization

Advantages of Hedging include ____________
exposure to markets that can easily forecast past trends

Advantages of Hedging include ____________
exposure to markets that can easily forecast past trends

Short-term ______ is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated
Contingency Fund

_________ is when the insurance company acquires legal rights to pursue recoveries on behalf of the insured
Subrogation

Commercial mortgages are used to finance ______ for business purposes
Real estate

________ is when the cause of loss must be covered under the insuring agreement of the policy, and the dominant cause must not be excluded.
Proximate

Intellectual property rights does not include _______
contract

________ is one of the disadvantages of Diversification.
Double Dip

Value investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the _______
Capital market

A ______ emergency fund allows you to save for emergencies occasioned by events such as loss of job and major natural disaster like an earthquake or fire.Â
long-term

_______implies that the insured and the insurer are bound by a good faith, bond of honesty and fairness.
Uberima fides

_________are mostly sold either at premium or at discount.
Debentures

_______ accounts are associated with commission on turnover on the basis of the number of transactions on the account in a given period of time
Current



The money used in starting and running a business is Known an ___________
(D) Investment

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative
(C) Swops

Obligations of the government that are issued to cover government budget deficits are known as __________
(A) Treasury Bills

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________
(B) Marketable securities

The money issued by the apex bank on behalf of the government to raise funds for meeting shortfalls in revenue with which to finance recurrent government expenditure is called ____________
(C) Treasury Bills

At which stage of the Model will the potential entrepreneur be interested in testing or discussing his/her business idea with the family, good friends and colleagues.
(B) Test and Persuasion Phase

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
(C) Five

The main bodies recognized by law as tax authorities in Nigeria are all of the following except_______
(A) Local Board of internal revenue

Which phase of Hult model requires that the entrepreneur engages in juggling figures (calculations), preparing relevant budgets, analyzing the market situation and invariably assessing the production process?
(C) Preparation phase

What stimulates economic growth and job creation through its impact on investment and capital formation in the economy?
(C) Vat policies

In Bhave Model, which phase iInvolves converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking, which is the foundation of the creation of any business venture by an entrepreneur.
(D) Opportunity recognition stage

One of the following is not an objective of a tax system
(B) To promote market inefficiency

A monetary charge imposed by the Government on persons, entities, transactions and properties to yield revenue is called___________
(C) Tax

The Nigeria tax system is a tripartite structure which comprises of: Tax Policy, Tax Legislation and _____________
(B) Tax administration

A document which provides a set of guidelines, rules and modus operandi that would regulate taxation in Nigeria is called____________
(D) National tax policy

Which phase of Hult model encourages the entrepreneur towards finally implementing his/her business idea.
(A) Start-up phase

Which of the following is not one of the taxes collectible by the Federal Government
(C) Transportation tax

The money used in starting and running a business is Known an ___________
(D) Investment

When the entrepreneur has the task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development, it is known as ____________
(A) Business Plan

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________
(B) Marketable securities

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
(C) Five

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative
(C) Swops

Which phase represents the beginning of Hult Model of Venture creation?
(B) Idea Phase




33. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of

	      Market

	--->> Blue chip

	      Investment

	      Bond

34. The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

	      Returns

	--->> Earnings

	      Dividends

	      Cashflows

35. One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security

	--->> Real Properties

	      Stock

	      Bond

	      Government loan

36. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________

	--->> Market Liquidity

	      Bond Prices

	      Cashflow

	      Stock Liquidity

37. The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________

	      Stock Price

	      Net Income

	--->> Original Price

	      Dividend

38. The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

	--->> Liquidity

	      Conversion rate

	      Investment value

	      Illiquidity

39. What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities.

	      Dividends

	--->> Bonds

	      Stocks

	      Assets

40. The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

	      Derivative

	      Stock Value

	      Ownership

	--->> Investment

41. Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________

	      Bond Investment

	      Current investment

	      Market investment

	--->> Cash Investment

42. Which of the following is not a financial asset?

	      Bonds

	      Bullion

	--->> Stock

	      Real Properties



1. ______________ can be earned through original creative works.

	--->> Royalty

	      Commission

	      Interest

	      Dividend

2. ______________are also visible in the energy market other than securities market.

	      Contractors

	      Traders

	--->> Speculators

	      Mortgages

3. Short term securities can only be traded in the ______________ market.

	      Commodity

	      Capital

	--->> Money

	      Exchange

4. Development loan stock can be used by the ______________ for raising funds.

	      Development Institution

	      Development Agency

	--->> Municipal Authority

	      Corporate Entity

5. Long-term loans that are secured by real property are associated with ___________.

	      Bonds

	--->> Debentures

	      Securities

	      Term loans

6. The ______________ right cannot be obtained from a text book.

	--->> Patent

	      Copy

	      Equity

	      Private

7. Debentures can only be traded in the _________________ market.

	      Money

	--->> Capital

	      Commodity

	      Future

8. Preferred Stock is a form of _______________ investment in a firm.

	      Lending

	--->> Ownership

	      hybrid

	      risky

9. Bonds are sometimes issued with _____________ warrants attached.

	--->> Stock

	      Commission

	      Specified

	      Security

10. Seed Funding is associated with ------------------------------ investors.

	--->> Angel

	      Equity

	      Preferred

	      Private


1. _______________ investment involves diversifying holdings beside securities.

	--->> Property

	      Derivative

	      Public Offer

	      Private Offer

2. The term _____________ may refer to the expected profit in investment.

	--->> Arbitrage

	      Swap

	      Hedging

	      Speculation

3. ___________ derivatives refer to contracts involvIing  exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future date.

	      Hedging

	--->> Swap

	      Arbitrage

	      Future

4. ____________is a contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity

	--->> Derivative

	      Arbitrage

	      Swap

	      Hedging

5. ._____________ can be used to mitigate risk in the underlying asset in investment.

	      Acquisition

	--->> Speculation

	      Public Offer

	      Private placement

6. Investment in crude oil is an example of a _________________ investment.

	      Derivative

	--->> Commodity

	      Security

	      Future

7. The ____________is an investment position intended for offsetting potential losses or gains.

	--->> Hedge

	      Speculation

	      Arbitrage

	      Swap

8. ___________involves the practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets.

	      Swap

	      Hedge

	      Speculation

	--->> Arbitrage

9. ________ involves engaging in risky financial transactions towards earning profit from short term price fluctuations.

	      Hedging

	      Swap

	--->> Speculation

	      Arbitrage

10. Futures are ___________in which contracts to buy or sell a specified asset on a future date at a specifiedprice  today

	      Arbitrage

	      Hedging

	--->> Derivatives

	      Swap

======
BFN203
======

42. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of

	      Market

	--->> Blue chip

	      Investment

	      Bond

43. The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

	      Returns

	--->> Earnings

	      Dividends

	      Cashflows

44. One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security

	--->> Real Properties

	      Stock

	      Bond

	      Government loan

45. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________

	--->> Market Liquidity

	      Bond Prices

	      Cashflow

	      Stock Liquidity

46. The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________

	      Stock Price

	      Net Income

	--->> Original Price

	      Dividend

47. The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

	--->> Liquidity

	      Conversion rate

	      Investment value

	      Illiquidity

48. What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities.

	      Dividends

	--->> Bonds

	      Stocks

	      Assets

49. The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

	      Derivative

	      Stock Value

	      Ownership

	--->> Investment

50. Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________

	      Bond Investment

	      Current investment

	      Market investment

	--->> Cash Investment

51. Which of the following is not a financial asset?

	      Bonds

	      Bullion

	--->> Stock

	      Real Properties



11. What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities.

	      Dividends

	--->> Bonds

	      Stocks

	      Assets

12. Which of the following is not a financial asset?

	      Bonds

	      Bullion

	--->> Stock

	      Real Properties

13. The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

	      Returns

	--->> Earnings

	      Dividends

	      Cashflows

14. One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security

	--->> Real Properties

	      Stock

	      Bond

	      Government loan

15. The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

	      Derivative

	      Stock Value

	      Ownership

	--->> Investment

16. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of

	      Market

	--->> Blue chip

	      Investment

	      Bond

17. The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

	--->> Liquidity

	      Conversion rate

	      Investment value

	      Illiquidity

18. Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________

	      Bond Investment

	      Current investment

	      Market investment

	--->> Cash Investment

19. The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________

	      Stock Price

	      Net Income

	--->> Original Price

	      Dividend

20. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________

	--->> Market Liquidity

	      Bond Prices

	      Cashflow

	      Stock Liquidity

What stimulates economic growth through control of money supply in the economy?
.
monetary policy

Which of the following is not part of E-Banking tools and channels?
.
telepone

The Accountant General of the Federation is vested with the responsibility of keeping:
.
Receipts and payments of the Federation

The following four sources of funds are all short term except one:
.
shares

______ options are contracts which provide the owner the opportunity for an all-or-nothing profit from the contract.
.
Binary option


10/10

This is considered as the key component of personal finance.
Financial planning

The largest derivation exchanges in the world by volume of transactions include the following except:
Exchange -traded group

Savings account has the following main features except:
Maximum period of holding a savings account is ten years

Essential qualities of contingency fund include the following except:
High risk

This is not an advantage of speculation in investment.
It is a derivative contract

Financing stages of venture capital excludes this:
Product development

Sources of debt capital are these except:
Ordinary shares

Derivatives are used for the following transactional dimensions except:
Switch asset risks

Commodity investment channels around the world include the following except:
Abuja Merchantile Exchange

______ necessitates swapping only the interest inherent in the cash flows using the same currency between the two parties.
Interest rate swap

Derivative is an example of ownership______________.
Ownership (supposedly INVESTMENT - Ownership INVESTMENT)

Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of
Blue chip

Some of the common variants of derivative contracts are as follows except:
Over-the-counter

One of the basic building blocksof a basic portfoliois:
investment diversification

The entrepreneur constitutes the driving ______________for the recognition of a venture idea.
Force

Relative to venture creation, the role of the entrepreneur does not include:
Commitment of sufficient financial resources

A popular ___________metric is earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortization.
Valuation

______ is the increase in the investor\'s equity ratio as the portion of debt service payments devoted to principal accrue over time.
Equity build-up

The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________
Earnings

The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person¸s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________
Investment

The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________
Original Price

Which of the following is not a financial asset?
Stock

Short-term ______ is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated
Contingency Fund

This is not one of the characteristics of investment.
Lending investment

Disadvantages of Hedging does not include _________
low management fees

All business ventures created must go through _______________ before operations.
Startup

__________ is regarded as savings embarked upon as a result of delayed consumption.
Investment

The entrepreneur constitutes the driving ______________for the recognition of a venture idea.
Force

Venture creation process involves the following except:
start-up phase

An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________
Market Liquidity

Deakins Model of venture creation process does not include _________
Exchange Stage

Prevailing Price of Stock less Original price equals ___________ in such undertaking.
Earnings

Advantages of Hedging include ____________
exposure to markets that can easily forecast past trends

A Treasury is normally managed by the __________ bank on behalf of the government.
Central

Hult Model of Venture Creation Process includes _______
Test and Persuasion Phase

Developing ____________plans for the future is a fundament role of the entrepreneur.
Strategic

Basic financial literacy, as a course, exposes one to the knowledge and understanding of:
how to evaluate projects

The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person¸s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________
Investment

______ involves taking advantage of differences in price of a single asset or identical cash-flows.
Arbitrage

Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________
Cash Investment


Which phase represents the beginning of Hult Model of Venture creation?
Idea phase

When the entrepreneur has the task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development, it is known as?
Business plan

Obligations of the government that are issued to cover government budget deficits are known as __?
Treasury bill

At which stage of the Model will the potential entrepreneur be interested in testing or discussing his/her business idea with the family, good friends and colleagues.?
test and persuasion phase

The money used in starting and running a business is Known an _______investment
c

The money issued by the apex bank on behalf of the government to raise funds for meeting shortfalls in revenue with which to finance recurrent government expenditure is called ________
Treasure bills

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
Five

A financial product which has its value dependent on the outcome of the original financial product as investment by the managers of the funds is called___________?
Derivative

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________?
Marketable securities

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative?
SWOPS



Diversification of ___________ is required towards reduction of business risks.
Portfolio

Derivative is an example of ownership______________.
Ownership

Prevailing Price of Stock less Original price equals ___________ in such undertaking.
Earnings

Developing ____________plans for the future is a fundament role of the entrepreneur.
Strategic

A Treasury is normally managed by the __________ bank on behalf of the government.
Central

Potential entrepreneurs are interested in ___________possible business ideas for creation of ventures.
Identifying

The entrepreneur constitutes the driving ______________for the recognition of a venture idea.
Force

__________ is regarded as savings embarked upon as a result of delayed consumption.
Investment

A popular ___________metric is earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortization.
Valuation

All business ventures created must go through _______________ before operations.
Startup

Short-term ______ is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated
Contingency Fund

______ options are contracts which provide the owner the opportunity for an “all-or-nothing” profit from the contract.
Binary option

The price at which the sale of an option takes place is known as ______ and is specified at the time the parties enter into the option.
strike price

Futures contract is a homogeneous contract that is normally written by a ______ which operates an exchange where the deal can take place.
clearing house

Derivative is a personalized contract between two parties in which payment takes place at a specific date at today\'s called ______
forwards

A contract that offers the owner the right, but not the obligation, to buy, in respect of a specified asset is _________
call option

_____ is when an insurance company compensates, the insured in the case of certain losses only up to the insured\'s interest.
Indemnity

______ implies that all classes of risks insured with an insurance company are shared between insurers or insurance companies.
Co-insurance

_______ implies that risks having two or more policies with same coverage would not pay separately
Dual insurance

____ is measured by the disparity between original price of the investible product and current market price of the product
Capital gain

Value investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the _______ market.
Investment

_______ accounts are associated with commission on turnover on the basis of the number of transactions on the account in a given period of time
Current

Deakins Model of venture creation process does not include _________
Exchange Stage

______ necessitates swapping only the interest inherent in the cash flows using the same currency between the two parties.
Interest rate swap

______ is the increase in the investor\'s equity ratio as the portion of debt service payments devoted to principal accrue over time.
Equity build-up

Disadvantages of Hedging does not include _________
low management fees

Hult Model of Venture Creation Process includes _______
Test and Persuasion Phase

______ involves taking advantage of differences in price of a single asset or identical cash-flows.
Arbitrage

Portfolio ______ is achieved by placing a larger percentage of high return investments in a diversified portfolio.
optimization

Advantages of Hedging include ____________
exposure to markets that can easily forecast past trends

Advantages of Hedging include ____________
exposure to markets that can easily forecast past trends

Short-term ______ is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated
Contingency Fund

_________ is when the insurance company acquires legal rights to pursue recoveries on behalf of the insured
Subrogation

Commercial mortgages are used to finance ______ for business purposes
Real estate

________ is when the cause of loss must be covered under the insuring agreement of the policy, and the dominant cause must not be excluded.
Proximate

Intellectual property rights does not include _______
contract

________ is one of the disadvantages of Diversification.
Double Dip

Value investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the _______
Capital market

A ______ emergency fund allows you to save for emergencies occasioned by events such as loss of job and major natural disaster like an earthquake or fire.Â
long-term

_______implies that the insured and the insurer are bound by a good faith, bond of honesty and fairness.
Uberima fides

_________are mostly sold either at premium or at discount.
Debentures

_______ accounts are associated with commission on turnover on the basis of the number of transactions on the account in a given period of time
Current



The money used in starting and running a business is Known an ___________
(D) Investment

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative
(C) Swops

Obligations of the government that are issued to cover government budget deficits are known as __________
(A) Treasury Bills

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________
(B) Marketable securities

The money issued by the apex bank on behalf of the government to raise funds for meeting shortfalls in revenue with which to finance recurrent government expenditure is called ____________
(C) Treasury Bills

At which stage of the Model will the potential entrepreneur be interested in testing or discussing his/her business idea with the family, good friends and colleagues.
(B) Test and Persuasion Phase

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
(C) Five

The main bodies recognized by law as tax authorities in Nigeria are all of the following except_______
(A) Local Board of internal revenue

Which phase of Hult model requires that the entrepreneur engages in juggling figures (calculations), preparing relevant budgets, analyzing the market situation and invariably assessing the production process?
(C) Preparation phase

What stimulates economic growth and job creation through its impact on investment and capital formation in the economy?
(C) Vat policies

In Bhave Model, which phase iInvolves converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking, which is the foundation of the creation of any business venture by an entrepreneur.
(D) Opportunity recognition stage

One of the following is not an objective of a tax system
(B) To promote market inefficiency

A monetary charge imposed by the Government on persons, entities, transactions and properties to yield revenue is called___________
(C) Tax

The Nigeria tax system is a tripartite structure which comprises of: Tax Policy, Tax Legislation and _____________
(B) Tax administration

A document which provides a set of guidelines, rules and modus operandi that would regulate taxation in Nigeria is called____________
(D) National tax policy

Which phase of Hult model encourages the entrepreneur towards finally implementing his/her business idea.
(A) Start-up phase

Which of the following is not one of the taxes collectible by the Federal Government
(C) Transportation tax

The money used in starting and running a business is Known an ___________
(D) Investment

When the entrepreneur has the task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development, it is known as ____________
(A) Business Plan

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________
(B) Marketable securities

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
(C) Five

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative
(C) Swops

Which phase represents the beginning of Hult Model of Venture creation?
(B) Idea Phase




43. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of

	      Market

	--->> Blue chip

	      Investment

	      Bond

44. The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

	      Returns

	--->> Earnings

	      Dividends

	      Cashflows

45. One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security

	--->> Real Properties

	      Stock

	      Bond

	      Government loan

46. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________

	--->> Market Liquidity

	      Bond Prices

	      Cashflow

	      Stock Liquidity

47. The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________

	      Stock Price

	      Net Income

	--->> Original Price

	      Dividend

48. The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

	--->> Liquidity

	      Conversion rate

	      Investment value

	      Illiquidity

49. What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities.

	      Dividends

	--->> Bonds

	      Stocks

	      Assets

50. The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

	      Derivative

	      Stock Value

	      Ownership

	--->> Investment

51. Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________

	      Bond Investment

	      Current investment

	      Market investment

	--->> Cash Investment

52. Which of the following is not a financial asset?

	      Bonds

	      Bullion

	--->> Stock

	      Real Properties



11. ______________ can be earned through original creative works.

	--->> Royalty

	      Commission

	      Interest

	      Dividend

12. ______________are also visible in the energy market other than securities market.

	      Contractors

	      Traders

	--->> Speculators

	      Mortgages

13. Short term securities can only be traded in the ______________ market.

	      Commodity

	      Capital

	--->> Money

	      Exchange

14. Development loan stock can be used by the ______________ for raising funds.

	      Development Institution

	      Development Agency

	--->> Municipal Authority

	      Corporate Entity

15. Long-term loans that are secured by real property are associated with ___________.

	      Bonds

	--->> Debentures

	      Securities

	      Term loans

16. The ______________ right cannot be obtained from a text book.

	--->> Patent

	      Copy

	      Equity

	      Private

17. Debentures can only be traded in the _________________ market.

	      Money

	--->> Capital

	      Commodity

	      Future

18. Preferred Stock is a form of _______________ investment in a firm.

	      Lending

	--->> Ownership

	      hybrid

	      risky

19. Bonds are sometimes issued with _____________ warrants attached.

	--->> Stock

	      Commission

	      Specified

	      Security

20. Seed Funding is associated with ------------------------------ investors.

	--->> Angel

	      Equity

	      Preferred

	      Private


21. _______________ investment involves diversifying holdings beside securities.

	--->> Property

	      Derivative

	      Public Offer

	      Private Offer

22. The term _____________ may refer to the expected profit in investment.

	--->> Arbitrage

	      Swap

	      Hedging

	      Speculation

23. ___________ derivatives refer to contracts involvIing  exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future date.

	      Hedging

	--->> Swap

	      Arbitrage

	      Future

24. ____________is a contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity

	--->> Derivative

	      Arbitrage

	      Swap

	      Hedging

25. ._____________ can be used to mitigate risk in the underlying asset in investment.

	      Acquisition

	--->> Speculation

	      Public Offer

	      Private placement

26. Investment in crude oil is an example of a _________________ investment.

	      Derivative

	--->> Commodity

	      Security

	      Future

27. The ____________is an investment position intended for offsetting potential losses or gains.

	--->> Hedge

	      Speculation

	      Arbitrage

	      Swap

28. ___________involves the practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets.

	      Swap

	      Hedge

	      Speculation

	--->> Arbitrage

29. ________ involves engaging in risky financial transactions towards earning profit from short term price fluctuations.

	      Hedging

	      Swap

	--->> Speculation

	      Arbitrage

30. Futures are ___________in which contracts to buy or sell a specified asset on a future date at a specifiedprice  today

	      Arbitrage

	      Hedging

	--->> Derivatives

	      Swap



10/10

This is considered as the key component of personal finance.
Financial planning

The largest derivation exchanges in the world by volume of transactions include the following except:
Exchange -traded group

Savings account has the following main features except:
Maximum period of holding a savings account is ten years

Essential qualities of contingency fund include the following except:
High risk

This is not an advantage of speculation in investment.
It is a derivative contract

Financing stages of venture capital excludes this:
Product development

Sources of debt capital are these except:
Ordinary shares

Derivatives are used for the following transactional dimensions except:
Switch asset risks

Commodity investment channels around the world include the following except:
Abuja Merchantile Exchange

______ necessitates swapping only the interest inherent in the cash flows using the same currency between the two parties.
Interest rate swap

Derivative is an example of ownership______________.
Ownership (supposedly INVESTMENT - Ownership INVESTMENT)

Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of
Blue chip

Some of the common variants of derivative contracts are as follows except:
Over-the-counter

One of the basic building blocksof a basic portfoliois:
investment diversification

The entrepreneur constitutes the driving ______________for the recognition of a venture idea.
Force

Relative to venture creation, the role of the entrepreneur does not include:
Commitment of sufficient financial resources

A popular ___________metric is earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortization.
Valuation

______ is the increase in the investor\'s equity ratio as the portion of debt service payments devoted to principal accrue over time.
Equity build-up

The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________
Earnings

The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person¸s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________
Investment

The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________
Original Price

Which of the following is not a financial asset?
Stock

Short-term ______ is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated
Contingency Fund

This is not one of the characteristics of investment.
Lending investment

Disadvantages of Hedging does not include _________
low management fees

All business ventures created must go through _______________ before operations.
Startup

__________ is regarded as savings embarked upon as a result of delayed consumption.
Investment

The entrepreneur constitutes the driving ______________for the recognition of a venture idea.
Force

Venture creation process involves the following except:
start-up phase

An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________
Market Liquidity

Deakins Model of venture creation process does not include _________
Exchange Stage

Prevailing Price of Stock less Original price equals ___________ in such undertaking.
Earnings

Advantages of Hedging include ____________
exposure to markets that can easily forecast past trends

A Treasury is normally managed by the __________ bank on behalf of the government.
Central

Hult Model of Venture Creation Process includes _______
Test and Persuasion Phase

Developing ____________plans for the future is a fundament role of the entrepreneur.
Strategic

Basic financial literacy, as a course, exposes one to the knowledge and understanding of:
how to evaluate projects

The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person¸s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________
Investment

______ involves taking advantage of differences in price of a single asset or identical cash-flows.
Arbitrage

Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________
Cash Investment


Which phase represents the beginning of Hult Model of Venture creation?
Idea phase

When the entrepreneur has the task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development, it is known as?
Business plan

Obligations of the government that are issued to cover government budget deficits are known as __?
Treasury bill

At which stage of the Model will the potential entrepreneur be interested in testing or discussing his/her business idea with the family, good friends and colleagues.?
test and persuasion phase

The money used in starting and running a business is Known an _______investment
c

The money issued by the apex bank on behalf of the government to raise funds for meeting shortfalls in revenue with which to finance recurrent government expenditure is called ________
Treasure bills

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
Five

A financial product which has its value dependent on the outcome of the original financial product as investment by the managers of the funds is called___________?
Derivative

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________?
Marketable securities

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative?
SWOPS



Diversification of ___________ is required towards reduction of business risks.
Portfolio

Derivative is an example of ownership______________.
Ownership

Prevailing Price of Stock less Original price equals ___________ in such undertaking.
Earnings

Developing ____________plans for the future is a fundament role of the entrepreneur.
Strategic

A Treasury is normally managed by the __________ bank on behalf of the government.
Central

Potential entrepreneurs are interested in ___________possible business ideas for creation of ventures.
Identifying

The entrepreneur constitutes the driving ______________for the recognition of a venture idea.
Force

__________ is regarded as savings embarked upon as a result of delayed consumption.
Investment

A popular ___________metric is earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortization.
Valuation

All business ventures created must go through _______________ before operations.
Startup

Short-term ______ is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated
Contingency Fund

______ options are contracts which provide the owner the opportunity for an “all-or-nothing” profit from the contract.
Binary option

The price at which the sale of an option takes place is known as ______ and is specified at the time the parties enter into the option.
strike price

Futures contract is a homogeneous contract that is normally written by a ______ which operates an exchange where the deal can take place.
clearing house

Derivative is a personalized contract between two parties in which payment takes place at a specific date at today\'s called ______
forwards

A contract that offers the owner the right, but not the obligation, to buy, in respect of a specified asset is _________
call option

_____ is when an insurance company compensates, the insured in the case of certain losses only up to the insured\'s interest.
Indemnity

______ implies that all classes of risks insured with an insurance company are shared between insurers or insurance companies.
Co-insurance

_______ implies that risks having two or more policies with same coverage would not pay separately
Dual insurance

____ is measured by the disparity between original price of the investible product and current market price of the product
Capital gain

Value investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the _______ market.
Investment

_______ accounts are associated with commission on turnover on the basis of the number of transactions on the account in a given period of time
Current

Deakins Model of venture creation process does not include _________
Exchange Stage

______ necessitates swapping only the interest inherent in the cash flows using the same currency between the two parties.
Interest rate swap

______ is the increase in the investor\'s equity ratio as the portion of debt service payments devoted to principal accrue over time.
Equity build-up

Disadvantages of Hedging does not include _________
low management fees

Hult Model of Venture Creation Process includes _______
Test and Persuasion Phase

______ involves taking advantage of differences in price of a single asset or identical cash-flows.
Arbitrage

Portfolio ______ is achieved by placing a larger percentage of high return investments in a diversified portfolio.
optimization

Advantages of Hedging include ____________
exposure to markets that can easily forecast past trends

Advantages of Hedging include ____________
exposure to markets that can easily forecast past trends

Short-term ______ is the type of fund that is invested just for a few days before being liquidated
Contingency Fund

_________ is when the insurance company acquires legal rights to pursue recoveries on behalf of the insured
Subrogation

Commercial mortgages are used to finance ______ for business purposes
Real estate

________ is when the cause of loss must be covered under the insuring agreement of the policy, and the dominant cause must not be excluded.
Proximate

Intellectual property rights does not include _______
contract

________ is one of the disadvantages of Diversification.
Double Dip

Value investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the _______
Capital market

A ______ emergency fund allows you to save for emergencies occasioned by events such as loss of job and major natural disaster like an earthquake or fire.Â
long-term

_______implies that the insured and the insurer are bound by a good faith, bond of honesty and fairness.
Uberima fides

_________are mostly sold either at premium or at discount.
Debentures

_______ accounts are associated with commission on turnover on the basis of the number of transactions on the account in a given period of time
Current



The money used in starting and running a business is Known an ___________
(D) Investment

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative
(C) Swops

Obligations of the government that are issued to cover government budget deficits are known as __________
(A) Treasury Bills

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________
(B) Marketable securities

The money issued by the apex bank on behalf of the government to raise funds for meeting shortfalls in revenue with which to finance recurrent government expenditure is called ____________
(C) Treasury Bills

At which stage of the Model will the potential entrepreneur be interested in testing or discussing his/her business idea with the family, good friends and colleagues.
(B) Test and Persuasion Phase

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
(C) Five

The main bodies recognized by law as tax authorities in Nigeria are all of the following except_______
(A) Local Board of internal revenue

Which phase of Hult model requires that the entrepreneur engages in juggling figures (calculations), preparing relevant budgets, analyzing the market situation and invariably assessing the production process?
(C) Preparation phase

What stimulates economic growth and job creation through its impact on investment and capital formation in the economy?
(C) Vat policies

In Bhave Model, which phase iInvolves converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking, which is the foundation of the creation of any business venture by an entrepreneur.
(D) Opportunity recognition stage

One of the following is not an objective of a tax system
(B) To promote market inefficiency

A monetary charge imposed by the Government on persons, entities, transactions and properties to yield revenue is called___________
(C) Tax

The Nigeria tax system is a tripartite structure which comprises of: Tax Policy, Tax Legislation and _____________
(B) Tax administration

A document which provides a set of guidelines, rules and modus operandi that would regulate taxation in Nigeria is called____________
(D) National tax policy

Which phase of Hult model encourages the entrepreneur towards finally implementing his/her business idea.
(A) Start-up phase

Which of the following is not one of the taxes collectible by the Federal Government
(C) Transportation tax

The money used in starting and running a business is Known an ___________
(D) Investment

When the entrepreneur has the task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development, it is known as ____________
(A) Business Plan

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________
(B) Marketable securities

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
(C) Five

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative
(C) Swops

Which phase represents the beginning of Hult Model of Venture creation?
(B) Idea Phase




31. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of

	      Market

	--->> Blue chip

	      Investment

	      Bond

32. The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

	      Returns

	--->> Earnings

	      Dividends

	      Cashflows

33. One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security

	--->> Real Properties

	      Stock

	      Bond

	      Government loan

34. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________

	--->> Market Liquidity

	      Bond Prices

	      Cashflow

	      Stock Liquidity

35. The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________

	      Stock Price

	      Net Income

	--->> Original Price

	      Dividend

36. The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

	--->> Liquidity

	      Conversion rate

	      Investment value

	      Illiquidity

37. What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities.

	      Dividends

	--->> Bonds

	      Stocks

	      Assets

38. The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

	      Derivative

	      Stock Value

	      Ownership

	--->> Investment

39. Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________

	      Bond Investment

	      Current investment

	      Market investment

	--->> Cash Investment

40. Which of the following is not a financial asset?

	      Bonds

	      Bullion

	--->> Stock

	      Real Properties



41. ______________ can be earned through original creative works.

	--->> Royalty

	      Commission

	      Interest

	      Dividend

42. ______________are also visible in the energy market other than securities market.

	      Contractors

	      Traders

	--->> Speculators

	      Mortgages

43. Short term securities can only be traded in the ______________ market.

	      Commodity

	      Capital

	--->> Money

	      Exchange

44. Development loan stock can be used by the ______________ for raising funds.

	      Development Institution

	      Development Agency

	--->> Municipal Authority

	      Corporate Entity

45. Long-term loans that are secured by real property are associated with ___________.

	      Bonds

	--->> Debentures

	      Securities

	      Term loans

46. The ______________ right cannot be obtained from a text book.

	--->> Patent

	      Copy

	      Equity

	      Private

47. Debentures can only be traded in the _________________ market.

	      Money

	--->> Capital

	      Commodity

	      Future

48. Preferred Stock is a form of _______________ investment in a firm.

	      Lending

	--->> Ownership

	      hybrid

	      risky

49. Bonds are sometimes issued with _____________ warrants attached.

	--->> Stock

	      Commission

	      Specified

	      Security

50. Seed Funding is associated with ------------------------------ investors.

	--->> Angel

	      Equity

	      Preferred

	      Private


51. _______________ investment involves diversifying holdings beside securities.

	--->> Property

	      Derivative

	      Public Offer

	      Private Offer

52. The term _____________ may refer to the expected profit in investment.

	--->> Arbitrage

	      Swap

	      Hedging

	      Speculation

53. ___________ derivatives refer to contracts involvIing  exchange of cash (flows) on or before a specified future date.

	      Hedging

	--->> Swap

	      Arbitrage

	      Future

54. ____________is a contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity

	--->> Derivative

	      Arbitrage

	      Swap

	      Hedging

55. ._____________ can be used to mitigate risk in the underlying asset in investment.

	      Acquisition

	--->> Speculation

	      Public Offer

	      Private placement

56. Investment in crude oil is an example of a _________________ investment.

	      Derivative

	--->> Commodity

	      Security

	      Future

57. The ____________is an investment position intended for offsetting potential losses or gains.

	--->> Hedge

	      Speculation

	      Arbitrage

	      Swap

58. ___________involves the practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets.

	      Swap

	      Hedge

	      Speculation

	--->> Arbitrage

59. ________ involves engaging in risky financial transactions towards earning profit from short term price fluctuations.

	      Hedging

	      Swap

	--->> Speculation

	      Arbitrage

60. Futures are ___________in which contracts to buy or sell a specified asset on a future date at a specifiedprice  today

	      Arbitrage

	      Hedging

	--->> Derivatives

	      Swap

BFN 203 TMA2

Which phase represents the beginning of Hult Model of Venture creation?
Idea phase

When the entrepreneur has the task of taking decisions on the future potentials of the business which enables him to project the future growth and development, it is known as?
Business plan

Obligations of the government that are issued to cover government budget deficits are known as __?
Treasury bill

At which stage of the Model will the potential entrepreneur be interested in testing or discussing his/her business idea with the family, good friends and colleagues.?
test and persuasion phase

The money used in starting and running a business is Known an _______investment
c

The money issued by the apex bank on behalf of the government to raise funds for meeting shortfalls in revenue with which to finance recurrent government expenditure is called ________
Treasure bills

How many phases are in Hult Model of Venture creation process?
Five

A financial product which has its value dependent on the outcome of the original financial product as investment by the managers of the funds is called___________?
Derivative

Money market financial instruments that are easily convertible to physical cash are called__________?
Marketable securities

Which of the following is not an example of a common derivative?
SWOPS

Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price



Question
Investment in real property is:

Answer
Capital Intensive.



Question
Investment in Real property refers to:

Answer
Investing in housing and landed property.



Question
Derivatrives is not used for one of the followings:

Answer
Selling of shares at the stock exchange



Question
One of the following is not a common variants of Derivatrive contracts

Answer
Public offer



Question
A personalised contract between two parties for future payment at present market price.

Answer
Forwards contract



Question
The two types of Derivatives are:

Answer
Over- the- Counter(OTC) derivatives and Exchange-Traded derivatives (ETD)



Question
Derivatrives has the following characteristics, except

Answer
Terms under which payments are to be made between the parties and the contractor.



Question
A Derivatrives in finance means:

Answer
A contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity.



Question
One of the ways to invest wisely in financial assets is through:

Answer
Speculation



Question
In finance palance Arbitrage refer to:

Answer
The practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets.



Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price



Question
Investment in real property is:

Answer
Capital Intensive.



Question
Investment in Real property refers to:

Answer
Investing in housing and landed property.



Question
Derivatrives is not used for one of the followings:

Answer
Selling of shares at the stock exchange



Question
One of the following is not a common variants of Derivatrive contracts

Answer
Public offer



Question
A personalised contract between two parties for future payment at present market price.

Answer
Forwards contract



Question
The two types of Derivatives are:

Answer
Over- the- Counter(OTC) derivatives and Exchange-Traded derivatives (ETD)



Question
Derivatrives has the following characteristics, except

Answer
Terms under which payments are to be made between the parties and the contractor.



Question
A Derivatrives in finance means:

Answer
A contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity.



Question
One of the ways to invest wisely in financial assets is through:

Answer
Speculation



Question
In finance palance Arbitrage refer to:

Answer
The practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets.



Question
Investment in real property is:

Answer
Capital Intensive.



Question
Investment in Real property refers to:

Answer
Investing in housing and landed property.



Question
Derivatrives is not used for one of the followings:

Answer
Selling of shares at the stock exchange



Question
One of the following is not a common variants of Derivatrive contracts

Answer
Public offer



Question
A personalised contract between two parties for future payment at present market price.

Answer
Forwards contract



Question
The two types of Derivatives are:

Answer
Over- the- Counter(OTC) derivatives and Exchange-Traded derivatives (ETD)



Question
Derivatrives has the following characteristics, except

Answer
Terms under which payments are to be made between the parties and the contractor.



Question
A Derivatrives in finance means:

Answer
A contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity.



Question
One of the ways to invest wisely in financial assets is through:

Answer
Speculation



Question
In finance palance Arbitrage refer to:

Answer
The practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets.



Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price



Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price
BFN 203    10MKS. TMA 2

61. Risk management in property investment include the following except:
............Building system pricing

62. Sources of cash flows in property investment are these except:
...........Mortgage bank option

63. Commodity investment channels around the world include the following except:
..........Abuja merchantile exchange

64. The largest derivation exchanges in the world by volume of transactions include the following except:
..............Exchange traded group

65. Derivatives are used for the following transactional dimensions except:
...........Switch assets risk

66. Sources of debt capital are these except:
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,Ordinary share

67. Financing stages of venture capital excludes this:
.............Products development

68. Intellectual property rights are these except:
...................Royalties

69. This is not an advantage of speculation in investment.
.......It is a derivative çontract

70. Types of commodities for investment include the following except:
...........Stocks

BFN203

An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________

Market Liquidity

Which of the following is not a financial asset?

Stock

The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________

Original Price

The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

Investment

Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________

Cash Investment

What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities

Stocks (marked wrong)

One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security

Real Properties

The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

Earnings

Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of

Blue chip

The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

Liquidity






The money market is the financial market in which financial instruments are traded with maturity of up to ______ year
71.
one (1)

Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price



Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price



Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price
Which of the following is not a basic principle of lending?

Short-term borrowing

One of the following is not a Canon of good lending

72.
composure

Hello, Search Course Code Feature Is Now Active for complaints contact solutionboxteam4u2019@gmail.com


Course Code
BFN203


Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price



Question
Savings refers to:

Answer
Part of income that is not spent.



Question
Capital market instrument did not include one of the followings:

Answer
Bankers acceptance



Question
Money market instrument include the following, except.

Answer
Debentures



Question
One of the following is not a factor that determine the rate of royalty.

Answer
Rate of turnover



Question
Royalty is a payment for the use of :

Answer
Intellectual property



Question
One of the following is not an example of Intellectual property.

Answer
Company name



Question
Venture Capitalists are usually interested in companies that have the following qualities.

Answer
All of the above



Question
One of the following is not a source of Debt capital.

Answer
Cash and carry



Question
Debt capital refers to

Answer
The amount of funds in the structure of the capital that is borrowed from outside sources.



Question
Another term for equity capital is:

Answer
Ordinary share



Question
Investment in real property is:

Answer
Capital Intensive.



Question
Investment in Real property refers to:

Answer
Investing in housing and landed property.



Question
Derivatrives is not used for one of the followings:

Answer
Selling of shares at the stock exchange



Question
One of the following is not a common variants of Derivatrive contracts

Answer
Public offer



Question
A personalised contract between two parties for future payment at present market price.

Answer
Forwards contract



Question
The two types of Derivatives are:

Answer
Over- the- Counter(OTC) derivatives and Exchange-Traded derivatives (ETD)



Question
Derivatrives has the following characteristics, except

Answer
Terms under which payments are to be made between the parties and the contractor.



Question
A Derivatrives in finance means:

Answer
A contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity.



Question
One of the ways to invest wisely in financial assets is through:

Answer
Speculation



Question
In finance palance Arbitrage refer to:

Answer
The practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets.



Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price



Question
Savings refers to:

Answer
Part of income that is not spent.



Question
Capital market instrument did not include one of the followings:

Answer
Bankers acceptance



Question
Money market instrument include the following, except.

Answer
Debentures



Question
One of the following is not a factor that determine the rate of royalty.

Answer
Rate of turnover



Question
Royalty is a payment for the use of :

Answer
Intellectual property



Question
One of the following is not an example of Intellectual property.

Answer
Company name



Question
Venture Capitalists are usually interested in companies that have the following qualities.

Answer
All of the above



Question
One of the following is not a source of Debt capital.

Answer
Cash and carry



Question
Debt capital refers to

Answer
The amount of funds in the structure of the capital that is borrowed from outside sources.



Question
Another term for equity capital is:

Answer
Ordinary share



Question
Investment in real property is:

Answer
Capital Intensive.



Question
Investment in Real property refers to:

Answer
Investing in housing and landed property.



Question
Derivatrives is not used for one of the followings:

Answer
Selling of shares at the stock exchange



Question
One of the following is not a common variants of Derivatrive contracts

Answer
Public offer



Question
A personalised contract between two parties for future payment at present market price.

Answer
Forwards contract



Question
The two types of Derivatives are:

Answer
Over- the- Counter(OTC) derivatives and Exchange-Traded derivatives (ETD)



Question
Derivatrives has the following characteristics, except

Answer
Terms under which payments are to be made between the parties and the contractor.



Question
A Derivatrives in finance means:

Answer
A contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity.



Question
One of the ways to invest wisely in financial assets is through:

Answer
Speculation



Question
In finance palance Arbitrage refer to:

Answer
The practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets.



Question
Savings refers to:

Answer
Part of income that is not spent.



Question
Capital market instrument did not include one of the followings:

Answer
Bankers acceptance



Question
Money market instrument include the following, except.

Answer
Debentures



Question
One of the following is not a factor that determine the rate of royalty.

Answer
Rate of turnover



Question
Royalty is a payment for the use of :

Answer
Intellectual property



Question
One of the following is not an example of Intellectual property.

Answer
Company name



Question
Venture Capitalists are usually interested in companies that have the following qualities.

Answer
All of the above



Question
One of the following is not a source of Debt capital.

Answer
Cash and carry



Question
Debt capital refers to

Answer
The amount of funds in the structure of the capital that is borrowed from outside sources.



Question
Another term for equity capital is:

Answer
Ordinary share



Question
Investment in real property is:

Answer
Capital Intensive.



Question
Investment in Real property refers to:

Answer
Investing in housing and landed property.



Question
Derivatrives is not used for one of the followings:

Answer
Selling of shares at the stock exchange



Question
One of the following is not a common variants of Derivatrive contracts

Answer
Public offer



Question
A personalised contract between two parties for future payment at present market price.

Answer
Forwards contract



Question
The two types of Derivatives are:

Answer
Over- the- Counter(OTC) derivatives and Exchange-Traded derivatives (ETD)



Question
Derivatrives has the following characteristics, except

Answer
Terms under which payments are to be made between the parties and the contractor.



Question
A Derivatrives in finance means:

Answer
A contract that originates its value from the performance of an underlying entity.



Question
One of the ways to invest wisely in financial assets is through:

Answer
Speculation



Question
In finance palance Arbitrage refer to:

Answer
The practice of taking advantage of a price difference between two or more financial markets.



Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price



Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price


Try Another Search
TMA3                  7/10

53. The Problem of double counting: the greatest difficulty in measuring national income is that of double counting, which arises from the improper distinction between final and an _____
intermediate product

54. The income approach to the calculation of GDP measures GDP in terms of who receives

None of the Option

55. Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______

,,,,,,,,,,,,corporate and institutional debtors

56. Value added method is used when the value of ______ and ______ produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year

final goods and services

57. Given the open economy model Y = C + I + G + (X – M), the meaning of (X-M) in the model is_____

Export minus Government import

58. Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___

National Income accounting

59. ______ for any firm is the market value of its product or service minus the cost of inputs purchased from other firms

,,,,,,,,,,,,,,Value added

60. The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government in _____

1968

61. The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income

,,,,,,,,,,,National Income/Total Population

62. Expenditure approach measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by _______ and ______ in a particular period of time.

individual private businesses and public sector



























Eco122 tma1 10/10 done

1, was only used as a methodological approach to economic problems

Ans Macro

2, The following person was well known in economics with the general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of 1929.

ans John Maynard Keynes

The Physiocrats adopted __ in the 18th century, in their table Economique to show the circulation of wealth

Ans macro

4, __ was first used in economics by Ragner Frisch in scientific approach

Ans macro

5, __ can be define as the behavior of the whole (aggregate) economy or economic systems rather than individual economic markets.

ans Macroeconomics

6, The most vital differences between micro and macroeconomics is rather than focusing on individual households and firms, it examines conditions within the __ as a whole

ans economy

7, Another name for __ is the net product

ans circulation of wealth

8, __ was originated with the mercantilists in the __ and 17th centuries

Ans: Macro, 16th

9, The following except one is not the goal of macroeconomics

Ans Price Control

10, ___ means is a situation in which everyone that want to work gets work

Ans Full employment
Question:  is an institution which accepts deposits makes business loans and offers related

Answer:Commercial bank



Question: At the end of  the banking system consisted of the Central Bank of Nigeria forty two commercial banks and twenty four merchant banks

Answer:1988



Question: In  several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

Answer:1952



Question: British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in 1912 to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa and to issue a West African currency convertible to

Answer:British pounds sterling



Question: No banking legislation existed  until 1952

Answer:Nigeria



Question: In 1892 Nigerias first bank the  was established

Answer:African Banking Corporation



Question: A financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities either directly by loaning or indirectly through

Answer:capital markets



Question: Transactionary motive is the motive of holding

Answer:money



Question: The following are not functions of money except

Answer:store of value



Question: The following are the characteristics of money except

Answer:Specding ability



Question: Increase in  results in increase in economic welfare

Answer:per capita income



Question: The economic welfare cannot be said to have increased if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of

Answer:labour



Question: If the change in were due to change in prices it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare

Answer: national income



Question: According to AC Pigou an economist assert that there is a close relationship between economic  and national income because both of them are measured in terms of money

Answer:welfare



Question:  attaches great importance to economic welfare because welfare is a very wide term

Answer:AC Pigou



Question: The average propensity to save is an economic term that refers to the proportion of income that is saved rather than  on goods and services

Answer:spent



Question: The income not spent on goods and services for current  is called savings

Answer:consumption



Question:  is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it

Answer:Marginal propensity to consume



Question: In a geometric function the  is actually the slope of the consumption function

Answer:MPC



Question:  consumption represents consumption when income is zero

Answer:Autonomous



Question: Per capita income is defined as the ratio of a countrys income to its population while  is defined as the ratio of a countrys GDP to the population of the country

Answer:GDP per capita



Question:  income does not include the income earned abroad

Answer:Domestic



Question: The income of citizens of a country living abroad is termed factor  from the rest of the world

Answer:income



Question: Mr Tunde Bakare a shoe marker charges N200000 for each shoes that he makes He pays his shop apprentice N20000 per shoe made in return for sweeping the floor and other chores For each shoe made what is the total contribution of Mr Tunde bakares and her apprentice to GDP

Answer:N2000



Question: National income accounting is a term used in economics to refer to the  system that a national government uses to measure the level of the countrys economic activity in a given time period

Answer:book keeping



Question: In an open economy which imports raw materials and other intermediate products at high prices the cost of production of  will always rise

Answer:domestic goods



Question: Rising and falling prices are both bad because they bring unnecessary  to some and undue advantage to others

Answer: loss



Question: One of the goals of  policy is to stabilize the price level

Answer:macroeconomics



Question: In the  the physiocrats adopted it in their table Economique to show the circulation of wealth

Answer:18th century



Question: Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole  or economic systems rather than individual economic markets which is the domain of Microeconomics

Answer:aggregate economy



Question:  is the motive of holding money

Answer:Transactionary motive



Question: Commercial bank is an institution which accepts  makes business loans and offers related

Answer:deposits



Question: British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in  to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa and to issue a West African currency convertible to British pounds sterling

Answer:1912



Question: At the end of 1988 the banking system consisted of the  forty two commercial banks and twenty four merchant banks

Answer:Central Bank of Nigeria



Question: A  is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities either directly by loaning or indirectly through capital markets

Answer:financial institution



Question: No banking legislation existed Nigeria until

Answer:1952



Question: In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a  to facilitate economic development

Answer:central bank



Question: In  Nigerias first bank the African Banking Corporation  was established

Answer:D: 1892



Question: Import demand changes as changes

Answer:income



Question:  depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer:Imports



Question: The  are guided by the level of income price level taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer:spending decisions



Question: In technical terms  is the increase of consumer surplus  plus producer surplus  from lower tariffs  or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer:Gain from trade



Question: The two components of import demand is fixed and at the same time it varies with

Answer:income



Question: When income rises the aspect of  rises as well and when income falls it falls

Answer:import demand



Question: Because export is exogenous while a part of import is an increasing function of income net exports are related to national incomenational output

Answer:negatively



Question: Exports depend on spending decisions made by foreign  or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer:consumers



Question: Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary  with each other

Answer:trading



Question: Exports are determined by factors outside the control of the  economy

Answer:home
Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading

Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the individual economic market. True or False? ___________

63. False*
________ was the economist who developed a general theory of income, output and employment.

64. Keynes*
The term “macro” was first used in economics by Ragner Frisch in the year ___________

65. 1933*
Full employment means the absence of __________ unemployment.

66. Involuntary*
One of the goals of macroeconomics policy is to stabilize the price level. True or False? ___________

67. True*
Macroeconomics is the study of ___________ of an economy as a whole

68. Aggregates*
___________ is the summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals.

69. GDP*
Goods and services produced in the previous years are included in the GDP calculation. True or False? _______________

70. False*
Final good or service is the end product of the ___________ process.

71. Production*
A special type of good that is difficult to class as intermediate or final is a ___________ good

72. Capital*
Social security such as unemployment insurance, scholarships are called ___________ payment

73. Transferred*
Problem of ___________ counting is one of the problems of computation of GDP

74. Double*
The income of citizens of a country living abroad is termed ___________ income from the rest of the world

75. Factor*
Net National Product is Gross National Product minus ___________

76. Depreciation*
Domestic income is ___________ income minus net income earned from abroad

77. National*
__________ income is personal income minus direct taxes.

78. Disposable*
Real gross domestic product is nominal gross domestic product that has been adjusted for _____________

79. Inflation*
________ GDP is the GDP measured in the current market prices of the goods and services.

80. Nominal*
Real GDP is called GDP at ___________ prices

81. Constant*
A particular year when prices are normal or stable is called the _______________ year

82. Base*
National income account provides a basis for national economic policies. True or False ___________________

83. True*
National income is GDP less net factor income from ___________

84. Abroad*
When import is subtracted from export, we have ___________ exports

85. Net*
When consumer expenditure is subtracted from the amount of disposable income, it is referred to as ___________

86. Savings*
The current governor of Central Bank of Nigeria is ___________

87. Godwin Emefiele*
___________ is the use of goods and services by households

88. Consumption*
The lender of last resort and financial adviser to the government is ___________ bank

89. Central*
In the consumption function, C = b0 + b1Y ; b0 is referred to as ___________ consumption

90. Autonomous*
b1 in the consumption function is known as ___________ propensity to consume

91. Marginal*
Autonomous consumption represents consumption when income is ___________

92. Zero*
___________ propensity to consume refers to the percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings

93. Average*
Government policy is not a determinant of savings. True or False ___________

94. False*
Level of national income is a determinant of investment. True or False ______________

95. True*
___________ coincidence of want is a problem associated with trade by barter

96. Double*
The ease with which money can be carried is referred to as ___________

97. Portability*
Money as a ___________ of exchange is the most important function of money

98. Medium*
Money as a unit of ___________ makes it possible to measure the prices of goods and services

99. Account*
The demand for liquidity for day to day transactions is known as ___________ motive for liquidity.

100. Transactionary*
___________ motive is the demand for liquidity for unforeseen circumstances

101. Precautionary*
A financial institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services is a ___________ bank

102. Commercial*
Non-residential investment is not part of gross private domestic investment. Agree or Disagree ___________________

103. Disagree*
___________ investment is the value of investment in buildings, machinery, before taking away depreciation

104. Gross*
National defence, provision of social amenities , policing, internal and external securities are all part of ___________ spending

105. Government*
Value added tax is an example of ___________ tax

106. Indirect*
Personal income tax, capital gains tax are examples of ___________ tax

107. Direct*
Government consumption and investment are part of government spending but excludes ___________ payments.

108. Transfer*
Government ___________ is money received by a government

109. Revenue*
___________ is a compulsory levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms

110. Tax*
A situation where tax rate reduces as the size of income increases is ___________ tax

111. Regressive*
Budget ___________ is a status of financial health in which expenditures exceed revenue

112. Deficit*
Macroeconomics studies the behavior of which economic systems

whole (aggregate)

Macroeconomics examines

All of the options

Objectives of macroeconomics does not include

Individual economic market

When the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time is known as

economic growth

One of the Keynesian concept of full employment involves

Reduction in the real wage rate

___ is the study of individual economic units of an economy

Microeconomics

The major determinant of macroeconomic problems is

Income

Who developed macroeconomics as a distinct method in economic theory?

John Keynes

The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals is

Gross domestic product (GDP)

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?

None of the options

The followings is not included in the calculation of GDP except

current year production

Domestic income does not include:

Income earned abroad

The ratio of a country’s income to its population is known as ___

Per capita income

Personal income minus direct tax is known as

Disposable income

The importance of national income accounting does not include

For poverty alleviation

There are ___ basic approaches to the measurement of GDP

Three (3)

After subtracting depreciation from GNP, what we get is called

Net national product (NNP).

Aggregate consumption in any economy depends on a number of factors except

Capital accumulation

The determinants of savings does not include

Social cost

Saving is income

Not spent

With disposable income of N20,000 and spending of N8,000. What is APC?

0.4

Components of investment includes

All of the options

Which of the following is not a determinant of investment

None of the options

The exchange of good for goods and services for services is called

Barter system

One of these is not a stage in the evolution of money

Standard money

Who formulated the equation of exchange?

Irvin Fisher

The following are functions of money except

Unit of Measurement

The first money deposit bank in Nigeria was established in the year

1891

One of these is not a function of the central bank

Acceptance of deposits

Precautionary demand for money will be directly influenced by

A person’s level of income

One of the following is not a problem associated with the barter system

None of the options

Holding cash for the purchase of bond and securities is referred to as

Speculative demand for money

The first bank in Nigeria was known as

African Banking Corporation

The primary function of commercial bank is to

Accept deposits from every class

Banks that were licensed before Nigeria’s independence in 1960

First generation banks

The expenditure of households on goods and services is referred to as

Personal consumption expenditure

Gross private domestic investment includes

All of the options

Reasons for the downward sloping of the Aggregate Demand Curve

All of the options

The components of aggregate expenditure does not include

Capital accumulation

Factors that lead to increase in government spending excludes.

Political stability

Reasons why government levy taxes exclude

To punish the citizens

One of these is not a disadvantage of international trade

Technical knowledge

Trade between two countries is known as

Bilateral trade

Three approaches of measuring national income account are

Income, output, expenditure

Reasons for increased government expenditure in Nigeria does not include

Good governance

Compulsory levy by government to the citizens is known as

Taxation

The proponent of the theory of Comparative Cost Advantage

David Ricardo

Comparative advantage doctrine is based on the assumptions except

Unequal cost of production

Which arm of the government implements the budget

The Executive

Roles of government budgets exclude

Advisory
Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading
Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.

exogenous; negatively



The problem of ________ arises when applying the Output expenditure

double counting


The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income

National Income/ Total Goods and services

...........National Income/Total Population


Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of ___

corporate organization

Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___

National Income accounting

A _____ company is one which transacts the business of banking which means the accepting for the purpose of lending all investment of deposits of money from the public

banking


Is not one of the characteristics of budget

Proportionality

Financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through _____

capital markets




British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in 1912 to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa and to issue a West African currency convertible to ____

British pounds sterling





______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication

Piguo

An aggregation of an individual\'s income with disregard of direct taxes is referred to as _____

Aggregate income

A summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals of that country is referred to as ____

GDP

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by

Depreciation


The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and _____ is called Gross domestic product

non-nationals

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?

Problem of paid services

Approaches to measuring GDP are ___ in number

3

The following are components of investment except ____

Marginal investment

An example of fiat money is

Paper naira

Money and wealth are the same thing

TRUE




























































If the level of income is 2000, planned export demand equal marginal propensity to import is 0.4 and exogenous import is 340. Calculate the net export.
None of Options??

A public good is associated with ______
Economy of scale??



Mathematically, MPC + MPS = ____
1

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

The meaning of _____ in macroeconomics is disposable income
None of Options

The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income
National Income/Total Population

Value added method is used when the value of ______ and ______ produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year
final goods and services

Given the open economy model Y = C + I + G + (X – M), the meaning of (X-M) in the model is_____
import expenditure minus net exports

The Problem of double counting: the greatest difficulty in measuring national income is that of double counting, which arises from the improper distinction between final and an _____
intermediate product

Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___
National Income accounting

The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government in _____
1968

______ for any firm is the market value of its product or service minus the cost of inputs purchased from other firms
Value added

Expenditure approach measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by _______ and ______ in a particular period of time.
individual private businesses and public sector

The income approach to the calculation of GDP measures GDP in terms of who receives
None of the Option

Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______
None of the Option

Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others
prices

To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages
effective demand

One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level
macroeconomics

______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication
Piguo!

_____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level
Macroeconomics

The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933
Ragner Frisch

John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____
1929

Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets
aggregate economy

According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money
income

Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.
welfare



Macroeconomics problems was dealt with vigorously by ______ economists
Sismondi and Marx

Given S = -bo + BY, where -bo in the model means__________
autonomous

An example of closed economy is____________
Y = C + I

In the early 1933, macro was used in economics by _________
Ragner Frisch

The following economists execept one is not part of those that developed the theory of money and general prices ____________
Smith

The meaning of macro means __________
Aggregate Economy

The prolem of double counting or multiple counting arises when applying the ______ method to etimate national income
Output expenditure

In the 18th century the ________ economist makes use of macroeconomics
physiocrat

Consumption is the use of goods and services by __________
household

The following except one is not the goal of macroeconomics ____________
Full Production

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

An increase in price expectations shifts the long-run aggregate supply curve to the ___.
Right

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

According to the wealth effect, aggregate demand slopes downward (negatively) because
lower prices increase the value of money holdings and consumer spending increases.

Which of the following statements is true regarding the long-run aggregate supply curve? The long-run aggregate supply curve
is vertical because an equal change in all prices and wages leaves output unaffected.

A tax is a ____ levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms as it relates to the incomes, consumption, and production of goods and services
compulsory

Is not one of the characteristics of budget
Proportionality

Given AD = C + I + G + NX , where C = 520 + 0.6Y; I = 120; and G = 200; NX = 12 and T = 150, what is the equilibrium output?
1800

Economists refer to fluctuations in output as the \
Unpredictable

Stagflation occurs when the economy experiences
rising prices and falling output

Which of the following would not cause a shift in the long-run aggregate supply curve?
An increase in price expectations

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?
Problem of paid services

If the banks in an economy operate with a reserve ratio of 20 per cent then the money multiplier is:
5

If Obaka buys a newly built retirement home, this transaction would affect
Investment

The use of goods and services by household is referred to as ____
Consumption

Which of the following is not a function of money?
Hedge against inflation

An example of fiat money is
Paper naira

Reserve requirements that may be imposed on an economy’s banks by its central bank specify that banks’ reserves must be a minimum percentage of their
Deposits

Which of the following policy actions by a central bank is likely to increase the money supply?
Buying government bonds in open market operations

Money and wealth are the same thing
FALSE\'

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by
Depreciation

Microeconomics is the study of individual economic units of an economy whereas macroeconomics is the study of ___ of an economy as a whole.
aggregates

If a tailor buys cloth for N10,000 and thread for N1,000 and uses them to produce and sell N25,000 worth of dresses to consumers, the contribution to GDP is
N25,000

Gross Domestic Product is the sum of the market value of the
Final goods and services.

Gross Domestic Product can be measured as the sum of
Consumption, investment, government purchases, and net exports

Which of the following can be excluded from Nigeria GDP for 2020? The sale of would be
A home built in 2019 by Brains and Harmers at Lugbe and first sold in 2020.

Real GDP is measured in ________ prices while nominal GDP is measured in ________ prices.
base year; current year

An example of a transfer payment is
Unemployment benefits

Nigeria Gross Domestic Product (in contrast to Gross National Product) measures the production and income of
People and factories located within the borders of the Nigeria.

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'



113. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

114. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

115. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

116. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

117. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

118. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

119. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

120. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

121. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

122. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics



21. The ____ of aggregate demand indicates that a change in taxes will shifts the aggregate demand curve in the direction opposite to that of the change in taxes

	      demand curve

	      supply side

	--->> Keynesian analysis

	      savings curve

22. The problem of ________ arises when applying the Output expenditure

	--->> double counting

	      expenditure

	      National income

	      aggregate supply

23. The _____ are negative when there is decrease in the equilibrium GDP

	      net imports

	--->> net exports

	      investment goods

	      Gross Private Investment

24. Along a given aggregate supply curve an increase in the price level leads to an increase in aggregate output because ______

	      workers work more hours, due to the increase in the real wage

	--->> firms increase production in response to higher profits

	      workers work more hours, due to the decrease in the real wage

	      All of the Options

25. Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of ___

	      people

	      Government

	      corporate organization

	--->> None of the Options

26. ______ is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it

	      Consumption

	      Savings

	--->> Marginal propensity to consume

	      Investment

27. In a ____ not all basic needs are generally met by the Private sector

	--->> free market economy

	      economy

	      supply sector

	      None of the Options

28. The british colonial officials established the ______ in 1912

	--->> West African Currency Board

	      Nigerian bank

	      monetary authority

	      CBN

29. A sum of N5000.00 is fixed on a shoe, then the fixed tax of N5000.00 is the ________

	      direct tax

	      indirect tax

	--->> Specific tax

	      Advarolem tax

30. In ____ year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

	      1960

	      1966

	      1955

	--->> 1952



73. Mr Olaoluwa a foreigner buy N800 billion worth of Nigerian exports and Mrs Vivian Odishika a Nigerian buy N700 billion worth of foreign imports in a given year. Therefore, the net exports is_________

	      1Billion

	      22Billion

	      3.2Billion

	--->> None of the Options

74. ______ of import analysis shows that import are purcahses by domestic buyers of goods and services that were produced abroad

	      Investment

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Microeconomics

	      All of the Options

75. The ______ generation banks are licensed before 1960

	--->> first

	      second

	      third

	      fourth

76. In the ______ consumption expenditure, the component of the consumption is the monthly income reportn

	      Firm's

	--->> personal

	      company's

	      overall

77. _______ is said to be the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate use

	      Savings

	      Consumption

	--->> Investment

	      Goods and Services

78. Nigeria purchased N11 billion of gasoline fron Mali last year, but it also sold N28 billion of gasoline to Ghana last year, therefore Nigeria's net gasoline export is _________

	      44.2Billion

	      2.3Billion

	      1.5Billion

	--->> None of the Options

79. The Gross Private domestic investment is the total investment in capital by the _____

	      domestic sector

	--->> investors

	      private sector

	      Government sector

80. The motive of holding money for unforseen contingency is ______

	      Transactionary motive

	      Speculative motive

	      Unforseen motive

	--->> precautionary motive

81. In the theory of final consumption expenditure, the expenditure by resident households on the domestic territory and expenditure by resident household abroad are added together but excludes any non-resideent hoseholds' expenditure on the ______

	--->> domestic territory

	      list of consumers

	      overall expenditrure

	      None of the Options

82. The _____ measures the investment used to calculate Gross domestic product in economic measurement of a nation

	      Gross National Product

	      National investment

	      Investment of a nation

	--->> Gross Private domestic investment




1--- banking legislation

2_ banking

3-- British pounds sterling

4__ Yd

5--- 1952

6--- capital markets

7--- none of the options

8___1988

9___ deposits

10___ African Banking corporation


Book keeping system

None of the options

Gross domestice product

Price stability

Production

None of the options

None of the options

Non-nationals

Full employment

National income accounting
======
ECO122
======

71. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

72. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

73. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

74. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

75. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

76. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

77. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

78. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

79. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

80. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication

Piguo

An aggregation of an individual\'s income with disregard of direct taxes is referred to as _____

Aggregate income

A summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals of that country is referred to as ____

GDP

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by

Depreciation


The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and _____ is called Gross domestic product

non-nationals

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?

Problem of paid services

Approaches to measuring GDP are ___ in number

3

The following are components of investment except ____

Marginal investment

An example of fiat money is

Paper naira

Money and wealth are the same thing

TRUE
======
ECO122
======

71. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

72. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

73. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

74. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

75. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

76. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

77. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

78. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

79. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

80. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

======
ECO122
======

81. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

82. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

83. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

84. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

85. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

86. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

87. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

88. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

89. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

90. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

======
ECO122
======

91. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

92. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

93. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

94. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

95. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

96. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

97. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

98. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

99. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

100. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

101. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

102. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

103. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

104. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

105. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

106. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

107. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

108. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

109. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

110. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

======
ECO122
======

111. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

112. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

113. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

114. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

115. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

116. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

117. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

118. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

119. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

120. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

======
ECO122
======

121. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

122. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

123. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

124. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

125. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

126. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

127. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

128. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

129. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

130. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

======
ECO122
======

131. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

132. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

133. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

134. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

135. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

136. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

137. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

138. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

139. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

140. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

141. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

142. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

143. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

144. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

145. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

146. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

147. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

148. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

149. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

150. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

151. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

152. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

153. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

154. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

155. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

156. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

157. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

158. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

159. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

160. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

======
ECO122
======

161. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

162. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

163. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

164. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

165. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

166. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

167. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

168. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

169. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

170. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

171. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

172. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

173. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

174. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

175. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

176. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

177. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

178. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

179. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

180. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

======
ECO122
======

181. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

182. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

183. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

184. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

185. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

186. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

187. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

188. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

189. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

190. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

======
ECO122
======

191. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

192. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

193. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

194. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

195. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

196. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

197. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

198. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

199. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

200. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

201. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

202. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

203. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

204. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

205. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

206. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

207. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

208. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

209. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

210. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

211. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

212. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

213. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

214. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

215. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

216. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

217. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

218. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

219. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

220. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

======
ECO122
======

221. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

222. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

223. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

224. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

225. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

226. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

227. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

228. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

229. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

230. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

======
ECO122
======

231. Nigeria purchased N11 billion of gasoline fron Mali last year, but it also sold N28 billion of gasoline to Ghana last year, therefore Nigeria's net gasoline export is _________

	      44.2Billion

	      2.3Billion

	      1.5Billion

	--->> None of the Options

232. The _____ measures the investment used to calculate Gross domestic product in economic measurement of a nation

	      Gross National Product

	      National investment

	      Investment of a nation

	--->> Gross Private domestic investment

233. In the ______ consumption expenditure, the component of the consumption is the monthly income reportn

	      Firm's

	--->> personal

	      company's

	      overall

234. Mr Olaoluwa a foreigner buy N800 billion worth of Nigerian exports and Mrs Vivian Odishika a Nigerian buy N700 billion worth of foreign imports in a given year. Therefore, the net exports is_________

	      1Billion

	      22Billion

	      3.2Billion

	--->> None of the Options

235. In the theory of final consumption expenditure, the expenditure by resident households on the domestic territory and expenditure by resident household abroad are added together but excludes any non-resideent hoseholds' expenditure on the ______

	--->> domestic territory

	      list of consumers

	      overall expenditrure

	      None of the Options

236. The ______ generation banks are licensed before 1960

	--->> first

	      second

	      third

	      fourth

237. _______ is said to be the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate use

	      Savings

	      Consumption

	--->> Investment

	      Goods and Services

238. The motive of holding money for unforseen contingency is ______

	      Transactionary motive

	      Speculative motive

	      Unforseen motive

	--->> precautionary motive

239. The Gross Private domestic investment is the total investment in capital by the _____

	      domestic sector

	--->> investors

	      private sector

	      Government sector

240. ______ of import analysis shows that import are purcahses by domestic buyers of goods and services that were produced abroad

	      Investment

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Microeconomics

	      All of the Options

======
ECO122
======

241. In a ____ not all basic needs are generally met by the Private sector

	--->> free market economy

	      economy

	      supply sector

	      None of the Options

242. A sum of N5000.00 is fixed on a shoe, then the fixed tax of N5000.00 is the ________

	      direct tax

	      indirect tax

	--->> Specific tax

	      Advarolem tax

243. Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of ___

	      people

	      Government

	      corporate organization

	--->> None of the Options

244. The british colonial officials established the ______ in 1912

	--->> West African Currency Board

	      Nigerian bank

	      monetary authority

	      CBN

245. Along a given aggregate supply curve an increase in the price level leads to an increase in aggregate output because ______

	      workers work more hours, due to the increase in the real wage

	--->> firms increase production in response to higher profits

	      workers work more hours, due to the decrease in the real wage

	      All of the Options

246. In ____ year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

	      1960

	      1966

	      1955

	--->> 1952

247. The ____ of aggregate demand indicates that a change in taxes will shifts the aggregate demand curve in the direction opposite to that of the change in taxes

	      demand curve

	      supply side

	--->> Keynesian analysis

	      savings curve

248. ______ is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it

	      Consumption

	      Savings

	--->> Marginal propensity to consume

	      Investment

249. The problem of ________ arises when applying the Output expenditure

	--->> double counting

	      expenditure

	      National income

	      aggregate supply

250. The _____ are negative when there is decrease in the equilibrium GDP

	      net imports

	--->> net exports

	      investment goods

	      Gross Private Investment

The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income
National Income/Total Population

Value added method is used when the value of ______ and ______ produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year
final goods and services

Given the open economy model Y = C + I + G + (X – M), the meaning of (X-M) in the model is_____
import export minus export

The Problem of double counting: the greatest difficulty in measuring national income is that of double counting, which arises from the improper distinction between final and an _____
intermediate product

Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___
National Income accounting

The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government in _____
1968

______ for any firm is the market value of its product or service minus the cost of inputs purchased from other firms
Value added

Expenditure approach measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by _______ and ______ in a particular period of time.
individual private businesses and public sector

The income approach to the calculation of GDP measures GDP in terms of who receives
None of the Option

Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______
None of the Option








1--- banking legislation

2_ banking

3-- British pounds sterling

4__ Yd

5--- 1952

6--- capital markets

7--- none of the options

8___1988

9___ deposits

10___ African Banking corporation
Economic growth is measured by the increase in the amount of goods and services in each successive period : time


...........is defined as the process whereby the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time: Economic growth


Rapid _ leads to urbanization and industrialization with their adverse effects on the pattern of living and environment: growth
In an which imports raw materials and other intermediate products at high prices, the cost of production of domestic goods will always rise: open economy
If the change in were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare: national income
_ can be maintained by following acounter-cyclical monetary Policy: Price stability
The economic welfare cannot be said to have increased, if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of : labour
Generally, _ belief in the possibility of continual growth: economists
A country with a _ must be at a Surplus to repay the debt over a reasonably short period of time: net debt





The economic welfare cannot be said to have increased, if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of LABOUR
Generally, belief in the possibility of continual growth ECONOMISTS
If the change in were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare NATIONAL INCOME Economic growth is measured by the increase in
the amount of goods and services in each successive period TIME
Rapid leads to urbanization and industrialization with their adverse effects on the pattern of living
and environment GROWTH
is defined as the process whereby the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time ECONOMIC GROWTH
In an which imports raw materials and other intermediate products at high prices, the cost of production of domestic goods will always rise OPEN ECONOMY
can be maintained by following acounter-cyclical monetary Policy PRICE STABILITY
A country with a must be at a Surplus to repay the debt over a reasonably short period of time NET DEBT
Increase in results in increase in economic welfare PER CAPITA INCOME


The system the national government uses to measure the level of the country\'s economic activity in a given time period is _______ Bookkeeping system None of the options The goods sold in the black market, are excluded although they are priced (they have market value) and fulfil the needs of the people but from the social point of view, they are not useful, Gross domestic product Policy of _____ is to keeps the value of money stable Price stability The profits earned or losses incurred on account of changes in capital assets as a result of the fluctuations in market prices are included in GDP if and only if they are not responsible for the current year? Production A Shoe maker charges N8000.00 for each pairs of shoe he makes. The Shoe maker pays his shop apprentice N500.00 per cloth made in return for sweeping the floor an None of the options A bag of cassava has a market value of N500, which is the price Olusanya Nigeria Ltd paid for the cassava. If the cassava undergo series of production system, which has a market valu OgoOluwa and sons Ltd is into farming production and he produces N6,000 worth of cattle milk. He sold N1,800 worth of milk to his friends and uses the rest of the milk to feed his livestock, None of the options The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and _____ is called Gross domestic product Non-nationals Keynes alternative definition of ______ is a situation in which aggregate employment is inelastic in response to an increase in the effective demand for its output Full employment Another term used for ______ in economics is book keeping system National income accounting



251. ...... is a document that explicitly described the spending decision of the government Vis-A-Vis the projected revenue and the source
83. Budget
2)..... theory states that a country should specialize in the production of  the commodity or service in which it has lower opportunity cost....
84. comparative advantage
3)........ is the difference btw total government expenditure that is taxes minus government expenditure
85. budget balance
4)...... was the proponent of the theory of comparative advantage
86. David Ricardo
87. ..... is when expenditure is greater than revenue
88. deficit budget
6).... defined as the good and service in which a country is more efficient or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources
89. theory of Absolute advantage
7)------is when the rerevenu to be generated is forecasted to be greater than expenditure
T*surplus budget
8)------are known as running cost which the government undertakes in its day-to-day activities
90. Recurrent expenditure
9)-------are receipts of monies from fines taxes fees etc by the government
91. Recurrent revenue
10)-----is needed to perform some allocative function just as the price mechanism performs in the private sector
92. Budget
======
ECO122  NOUN  PQ





252. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

253. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

254. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

255. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

256. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

257. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

258. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

259. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

260. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

261. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics





93. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

94. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

95. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

96. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

97. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

98. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

99. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

100. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

101. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

102. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading

Question
Government ______ is the income available to fund the activities of a government.

Answer
revenue



Question
_____ is a situation in financial planning or the budgeting process where total revenues are equal to or greater than total expenses

Answer
Banalnce Budget



Question
When spending exceeds income, the result is a _____

Answer
budget deficit



Question
A ____ might be used to pay off debt, save for the future, or to make a desired purchase that has been delayed

Answer
budget surplus



Question
_____ a situation in which income exceeds expenditures

Answer
Budget surplus



Question
The ___ is an important economic document of a country

Answer
budget



Question
____ is the difference between total government expenditure, that is, taxes minus government expenditure

Answer
Budget balance



Question
___ is a document that explicitly describe the spending decision of the government vis-à-vis the projected revenue and the source

Answer
Budget



Question
The consultant who can do everything more efficiently than every other person is synonymous with the country that can produce everything more _____ than any other country in the world

Answer
efficiently



Question
____ theory states that a country should specialize in the production of a commodity or service in which it has a lower opportunity-cost

Answer
Comparative advantage



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
Government ______ is the income available to fund the activities of a government.

Answer
revenue



Question
_____ is a situation in financial planning or the budgeting process where total revenues are equal to or greater than total expenses

Answer
Banalnce Budget



Question
When spending exceeds income, the result is a _____

Answer
budget deficit



Question
A ____ might be used to pay off debt, save for the future, or to make a desired purchase that has been delayed

Answer
budget surplus



Question
_____ a situation in which income exceeds expenditures

Answer
Budget surplus



Question
The ___ is an important economic document of a country

Answer
budget



Question
____ is the difference between total government expenditure, that is, taxes minus government expenditure

Answer
Budget balance



Question
___ is a document that explicitly describe the spending decision of the government vis-à-vis the projected revenue and the source

Answer
Budget



Question
The consultant who can do everything more efficiently than every other person is synonymous with the country that can produce everything more _____ than any other country in the world

Answer
efficiently



Question
____ theory states that a country should specialize in the production of a commodity or service in which it has a lower opportunity-cost

Answer
Comparative advantage



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
Government ______ is the income available to fund the activities of a government.

Answer
revenue



Question
_____ is a situation in financial planning or the budgeting process where total revenues are equal to or greater than total expenses

Answer
Banalnce Budget



Question
When spending exceeds income, the result is a _____

Answer
budget deficit



Question
A ____ might be used to pay off debt, save for the future, or to make a desired purchase that has been delayed

Answer
budget surplus



Question
_____ a situation in which income exceeds expenditures

Answer
Budget surplus



Question
The ___ is an important economic document of a country

Answer
budget



Question
____ is the difference between total government expenditure, that is, taxes minus government expenditure

Answer
Budget balance



Question
___ is a document that explicitly describe the spending decision of the government vis-à-vis the projected revenue and the source

Answer
Budget



Question
The consultant who can do everything more efficiently than every other person is synonymous with the country that can produce everything more _____ than any other country in the world

Answer
efficiently



Question
____ theory states that a country should specialize in the production of a commodity or service in which it has a lower opportunity-cost

Answer
Comparative advantage



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading
Get more at (www.puredu.net)
Get more at (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) 8/10

British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in _____ to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa

1912

Rapid _____ leads to urbanization and industrialization with their adverse effects on the pattern of living and environment

growth

The term "macro" was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

Ragner Frisch

_____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

Macroeconomics

Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

aggregate economy

Commercial bank is an institution which accepts _____, makes business loans, and offers related

deposits

_____ equals exports minus imports

Net export

Financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through _____

capital markets

The income not spent on goods and services for current consumption is called _____

savings

_____ can be maintained by following acounter-cyclical monetary Policy

Price stability (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) ECO122
9/10
To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

effective demand

In a geometric function, the MPC is actually the slope of the ______

concumption function

Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

Prices

_____ is the total Supply of goods and services produced within an economy at a given overall price level in a given time period

Aggregate Supply

Domestic income does not include the income earned _____

abroad

In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate _____

economic development

At the end of 1988, the banking system consisted of the_____, forty-two commercial banks, and twenty four merchant banks

Central Bank of Nigeria

Increase in _____ results in increase in economic welfare

per capita income

A financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts ____ and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through capital markets

deposits

_____ equals consumer spending plus investment plus government spending plus exports minus imports

Gross Private domestic investment (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) ECO122
10/10
262. C Piguo attaches great importance to ____ because welfare is a very wide term

economic welfare

_____ equals exports minus imports

Net export

The _____ cannot be said to have increased, if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of people

economic welfare

Increase in per capita income results in increase in _____

economic welfare

John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

1929

A financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts ____ and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through capital markets

deposits

The term "macro" was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

Ragner Frisch

Commercial bank is an institution which accepts _____, makes business loans, and offers related

deposits

Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

Prices

In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate _____

economic development (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) ECO122
10/10
103. C Piguo attaches great importance to _____ because welfare is a very wide term

economic welfare

The income not spent on goods and services for current consumption is called _____

savings

The income not spent on goods and services for current ____ is called savings

consumption

The ________suggested that increasing total investment, total output, total income and total consumption should raise unemployment caused by deficiency of effective demand

Keynesian theory of employment

Consumption is the use of goods and services by ______

household

If Nigeria purchased N20 billion of gasoline from other countries last year, but it also sold N80 billion of gasoline to other countries last year, the Nigeria\'s net gasoline exports will be _______

None of the Option

_____ are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary trading with each other

Gain from trade

A ___ company is one which transacts the business of banking which means the accepting for the purpose of lending all investment of deposits of money from the public

banking

Economic welfare is that part of _____ welfare which can directly or indirectly be measured in money

social

At the end of ____, the banking system consisted of the Central Bank of Nigeria, forty-two commercial banks, and 24 merchant banks

1988 (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) ECO122
10/10
If the change in____ were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare

national income

Average Propensity to consume refers to the percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on ______

savings

The income of citizens of a country living abroad is termed ____ from the rest of the world

factor income

_____ is a single mathematical function used to express consumer spending

Consumption function

_______ an institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services

commercial bank

Various functions of commercial banks can be divided into three main groups; ____, Agency Functions and General utility function.

Primary Functions

Increase in ____ results in increase in welfare

per capita income

________ is used when the value of final good and services produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year

Value added method

Meaning of APC is _____

average propensity to consume

The income not spent on goods and services for current ____ is called savings

consumption (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) 8/10

At the end of 1988, the banking system consisted of the Central Bank of Nigeria, 42 commercial banks, and _____ merchant banks

24

In macroeconomics, _____ is the accumulation of newly produced termed trade surplus entities

goods and services

One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

macroeconomics

commercial bank is an institution which accepts ______, makes business loans, and offers related services

deposits

The term "macro" was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

Ragner Frisch

In _____ several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

1952

Increase in _____ results in increase in economic welfare

per capita income

If the change in ____ were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare

national income

The income not spent on goods and services for current consumption is called _____

savings

At the end of 1988, the banking system consisted of the_____, forty-two commercial banks, and twenty four merchant banks

Central Bank of Nigeria



(www.puredu.net)
ECO 122 TMA 2

Keynes alternative definition of ______ is a situation in which aggregate employment is inelastic in response to an increase in the effective demand for its output

.........full employment

The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and _____ is called Gross domestic product

......non-nationals


A bag of cassava has a market value of N500, which is the price Olusanya Nigeria Ltd paid for the cassava. If the cassava undergo series of production system, which has a market value of N1000.00 (the price the company paid for the cassava). The cassava is then made into Garri worth N3000.00 in the market. The intermediate goods in this analysis is_____

............None of the Options


Another term used for ______ in economics is book keeping system

........National income accounting



Policy of _____ is to keeps the value of money stable

...........price stability


The goods sold in the black market, are excluded although they are priced (they have market value) and fulfil the needs of the people but from the social point of view, they are not useful, and thus, the income received from their sales and purchases is always not included in _____.


...........Gross domestic Product


A Shoe maker charges N8000.00 for each pairs of shoe he makes. The Shoe maker pays his shop apprentice N500.00 per cloth made in return for sweeping the floor and other chores. For each shoe produced, what is the total contribution of the shoe maker and his apprentice to GDP?

............N4000


The system the national government uses to measure the level of the country\'s economic activity in a given time period is _______

.........book keeping System


OgoOluwa and sons Ltd is into farming production and he produces N6,000 worth of cattle milk. He sold N1,800 worth of milk to his friends and uses the rest of the milk to feed his livestock, which he at the end sold to his friends for N8,500. What is OgoOluwa and sons Ltd contribution to GDP?

,,,,,,,,,,,,None of the Options


The profits earned or losses incurred on account of changes in capital assets as a result of the fluctuations in market prices are included in GDP if and only if they are not responsible for the current year’s _________

.............Production


















































Eco 122 tma 2 10/10

263. Price stability

264. Time

265. Net Debt

266. Economic growth

267. Per capital Income

268. Labour

269. Open economy

270. Growth

271. Economists

272. National Income
Eco 122 tma 2 10/10

273. _____ can be maintained by following acounter-cyclical monetary Policy
	Price stability

274. Economic growth is measured by the increase in the amount of goods and services in each successive ____ period
	Time

275. Net Debt

276. is defined as the process whereby the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time
	Economic growth

277. Increase in _____ results in increase in economic welfare
	Per capital Income

278. The economic welfare cannot be said to have increased, if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of ____
	Labour

279. In an ____ which imports raw materials and other intermediate products at high prices, the cost of production of domestic goods will always rise
	Open economy

280. Rapid _____ leads to urbanization and industrialization with their adverse effects on the pattern of living and environmen
	Growth

281. Generally, _____ belief in the possibility of continual growth
	Economists

282. If the change in ____ were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare
	National Income
Eco122 tma3

No _____ existed Nigeria until 1952
	banking legislation

A _____ company is one which transacts the business of banking which means the accepting for the purpose of lending all investment of deposits of money from the public
	banking

British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in 1912 to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa and to issue a West African currency convertible to ____
	British pounds sterling

he meaning of _____ in macroeconomics is disposable income
	Yd

In _____ several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development
	1952

Financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through _____
	capital markets


If the level of income is 2000, planned export demand equal marginal propensity to import is 0.4 and exogenous import is 340. Calculate the net export.
	none of the options

At the end of _____, the banking system consisted of the Central Bank of Nigeria, 42 commercial banks, and 24 merchant banks
	1988

commercial bank is an institution which accepts ______, makes business loans, and offers related services
	deposits

In 1892 Nigeria's first bank, the ______, was established
	African Banking corporation
Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the individual economic market. True or False? ___________

283. False*
________ was the economist who developed a general theory of income, output and employment.

284. Keynes*
The term “macro” was first used in economics by Ragner Frisch in the year ___________

285. 1933*
Full employment means the absence of __________ unemployment.

286. Involuntary*
One of the goals of macroeconomics policy is to stabilize the price level. True or False? ___________

287. True*
Macroeconomics is the study of ___________ of an economy as a whole

288. Aggregates*
___________ is the summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals.

289. GDP*
Goods and services produced in the previous years are included in the GDP calculation. True or False? _______________

290. False*
Final good or service is the end product of the ___________ process.

291. Production*
A special type of good that is difficult to class as intermediate or final is a ___________ good

292. Capital*
Social security such as unemployment insurance, scholarships are called ___________ payment

293. Transferred*
Problem of ___________ counting is one of the problems of computation of GDP

294. Double*
The income of citizens of a country living abroad is termed ___________ income from the rest of the world

295. Factor*
Net National Product is Gross National Product minus ___________

296. Depreciation*
Domestic income is ___________ income minus net income earned from abroad

297. National*
__________ income is personal income minus direct taxes.

298. Disposable*
Real gross domestic product is nominal gross domestic product that has been adjusted for _____________

299. Inflation*
________ GDP is the GDP measured in the current market prices of the goods and services.

300. Nominal*
Real GDP is called GDP at ___________ prices

301. Constant*
A particular year when prices are normal or stable is called the _______________ year

302. Base*
National income account provides a basis for national economic policies. True or False ___________________

303. True*
National income is GDP less net factor income from ___________

304. Abroad*
When import is subtracted from export, we have ___________ exports

305. Net*
When consumer expenditure is subtracted from the amount of disposable income, it is referred to as ___________

306. Savings*
The current governor of Central Bank of Nigeria is ___________

307. Godwin Emefiele*
___________ is the use of goods and services by households

308. Consumption*
The lender of last resort and financial adviser to the government is ___________ bank

309. Central*
In the consumption function, C = b0 + b1Y ; b0 is referred to as ___________ consumption

310. Autonomous*
b1 in the consumption function is known as ___________ propensity to consume

311. Marginal*
Autonomous consumption represents consumption when income is ___________

312. Zero*
___________ propensity to consume refers to the percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings

313. Average*
Government policy is not a determinant of savings. True or False ___________

314. False*
Level of national income is a determinant of investment. True or False ______________

315. True*
___________ coincidence of want is a problem associated with trade by barter

316. Double*
The ease with which money can be carried is referred to as ___________

317. Portability*
Money as a ___________ of exchange is the most important function of money

318. Medium*
Money as a unit of ___________ makes it possible to measure the prices of goods and services

319. Account*
The demand for liquidity for day to day transactions is known as ___________ motive for liquidity.

320. Transactionary*
___________ motive is the demand for liquidity for unforeseen circumstances

321. Precautionary*
A financial institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services is a ___________ bank

322. Commercial*
Non-residential investment is not part of gross private domestic investment. Agree or Disagree ___________________

323. Disagree*
___________ investment is the value of investment in buildings, machinery, before taking away depreciation

324. Gross*
National defence, provision of social amenities , policing, internal and external securities are all part of ___________ spending

325. Government*
Value added tax is an example of ___________ tax

326. Indirect*
Personal income tax, capital gains tax are examples of ___________ tax

327. Direct*
Government consumption and investment are part of government spending but excludes ___________ payments.

328. Transfer*
Government ___________ is money received by a government

329. Revenue*
___________ is a compulsory levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms

330. Tax*
A situation where tax rate reduces as the size of income increases is ___________ tax

331. Regressive*
Budget ___________ is a status of financial health in which expenditures exceed revenue

332. Deficit*
Macroeconomics studies the behavior of which economic systems

whole (aggregate)

Macroeconomics examines

All of the options

Objectives of macroeconomics does not include

Individual economic market

When the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time is known as

economic growth

One of the Keynesian concept of full employment involves

Reduction in the real wage rate

___ is the study of individual economic units of an economy

Microeconomics

The major determinant of macroeconomic problems is

Income

Who developed macroeconomics as a distinct method in economic theory?

John Keynes

The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals is

Gross domestic product (GDP)

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?

None of the options

The followings is not included in the calculation of GDP except

current year production

Domestic income does not include:

Income earned abroad

The ratio of a country’s income to its population is known as ___

Per capita income

Personal income minus direct tax is known as

Disposable income

The importance of national income accounting does not include

For poverty alleviation

There are ___ basic approaches to the measurement of GDP

Three (3)

After subtracting depreciation from GNP, what we get is called

Net national product (NNP).

Aggregate consumption in any economy depends on a number of factors except

Capital accumulation

The determinants of savings does not include

Social cost

Saving is income

Not spent

With disposable income of N20,000 and spending of N8,000. What is APC?

0.4

Components of investment includes

All of the options

Which of the following is not a determinant of investment

None of the options

The exchange of good for goods and services for services is called

Barter system

One of these is not a stage in the evolution of money

Standard money

Who formulated the equation of exchange?

Irvin Fisher

The following are functions of money except

Unit of Measurement

The first money deposit bank in Nigeria was established in the year

1891

One of these is not a function of the central bank

Acceptance of deposits

Precautionary demand for money will be directly influenced by

A person’s level of income

One of the following is not a problem associated with the barter system

None of the options

Holding cash for the purchase of bond and securities is referred to as

Speculative demand for money

The first bank in Nigeria was known as

African Banking Corporation

The primary function of commercial bank is to

Accept deposits from every class

Banks that were licensed before Nigeria’s independence in 1960

First generation banks

The expenditure of households on goods and services is referred to as

Personal consumption expenditure

Gross private domestic investment includes

All of the options

Reasons for the downward sloping of the Aggregate Demand Curve

All of the options

The components of aggregate expenditure does not include

Capital accumulation

Factors that lead to increase in government spending excludes.

Political stability

Reasons why government levy taxes exclude

To punish the citizens

One of these is not a disadvantage of international trade

Technical knowledge

Trade between two countries is known as

Bilateral trade

Three approaches of measuring national income account are

Income, output, expenditure

Reasons for increased government expenditure in Nigeria does not include

Good governance

Compulsory levy by government to the citizens is known as

Taxation

The proponent of the theory of Comparative Cost Advantage

David Ricardo

Comparative advantage doctrine is based on the assumptions except

Unequal cost of production

Which arm of the government implements the budget

The Executive

Roles of government budgets exclude

Advisory
333. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level
ans- macroeconomics

334. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages
ans-  effective demand

335. ___ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level
ans- Macroeconomics

336. __ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication
ans-

337. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets
ans- aggregate economy

338. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others
ans-  prices

339. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.
ans- welfare

340. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933
ans- Ragner Frisch

341. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money
ans- income

342. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____
ans- 1929
______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication

Piguo

An aggregation of an individual\'s income with disregard of direct taxes is referred to as _____

Aggregate income

A summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals of that country is referred to as ____

GDP

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by

Depreciation


The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and _____ is called Gross domestic product

non-nationals

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?

Problem of paid services

Approaches to measuring GDP are ___ in number

3

The following are components of investment except ____

Marginal investment

An example of fiat money is

Paper naira

Money and wealth are the same thing

TRUE
======
ECO122  NOUN  PQ





343. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

344. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

345. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

346. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

347. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

348. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

349. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

350. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

351. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

352. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics





104. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

105. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

106. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

107. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

108. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

109. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

110. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

111. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

112. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

113. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

ECO122 NOUN EXAM






Mathematically, MPC + MPS = ____
1

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

The meaning of _____ in macroeconomics is disposable income
None of Options

The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income
National Income/Total Population

Value added method is used when the value of ______ and ______ produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year
final goods and services

Given the open economy model Y = C + I + G + (X – M), the meaning of (X-M) in the model is_____
import expenditure minus net exports

The Problem of double counting: the greatest difficulty in measuring national income is that of double counting, which arises from the improper distinction between final and an _____
intermediate product

Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___
National Income accounting

The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government in _____
1968

______ for any firm is the market value of its product or service minus the cost of inputs purchased from other firms
Value added

Expenditure approach measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by _______ and ______ in a particular period of time.
individual private businesses and public sector

The income approach to the calculation of GDP measures GDP in terms of who receives
None of the Option

Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______
None of the Option

Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others
prices

To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages
effective demand

One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level
macroeconomics

______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication
Piguo!

_____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level
Macroeconomics

The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933
Ragner Frisch

John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____
1929

Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets
aggregate economy

According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money
income

Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.
welfare



Macroeconomics problems was dealt with vigorously by ______ economists
Sismondi and Marx

Given S = -bo + BY, where -bo in the model means__________
autonomous

An example of closed economy is____________
Y = C + I

In the early 1933, macro was used in economics by _________
Ragner Frisch

The following economists execept one is not part of those that developed the theory of money and general prices ____________
Smith

The meaning of macro means __________
Aggregate Economy

The prolem of double counting or multiple counting arises when applying the ______ method to etimate national income
Output expenditure

In the 18th century the ________ economist makes use of macroeconomics
physiocrat

Consumption is the use of goods and services by __________
household

The following except one is not the goal of macroeconomics ____________
Full Production

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

An increase in price expectations shifts the long-run aggregate supply curve to the ___.
Right

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

According to the wealth effect, aggregate demand slopes downward (negatively) because
lower prices increase the value of money holdings and consumer spending increases.

Which of the following statements is true regarding the long-run aggregate supply curve? The long-run aggregate supply curve
is vertical because an equal change in all prices and wages leaves output unaffected.

A tax is a ____ levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms as it relates to the incomes, consumption, and production of goods and services
compulsory

Is not one of the characteristics of budget
Proportionality

Given AD = C + I + G + NX , where C = 520 + 0.6Y; I = 120; and G = 200; NX = 12 and T = 150, what is the equilibrium output?
1800

Economists refer to fluctuations in output as the \
Unpredictable

Stagflation occurs when the economy experiences
rising prices and falling output

Which of the following would not cause a shift in the long-run aggregate supply curve?
An increase in price expectations

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?
Problem of paid services

If the banks in an economy operate with a reserve ratio of 20 per cent then the money multiplier is:
5

If Obaka buys a newly built retirement home, this transaction would affect
Investment

The use of goods and services by household is referred to as ____
Consumption

Which of the following is not a function of money?
Hedge against inflation

An example of fiat money is
Paper naira

Reserve requirements that may be imposed on an economy’s banks by its central bank specify that banks’ reserves must be a minimum percentage of their
Deposits

Which of the following policy actions by a central bank is likely to increase the money supply?
Buying government bonds in open market operations

Money and wealth are the same thing
FALSE\'

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by
Depreciation

Microeconomics is the study of individual economic units of an economy whereas macroeconomics is the study of ___ of an economy as a whole.
aggregates

If a tailor buys cloth for N10,000 and thread for N1,000 and uses them to produce and sell N25,000 worth of dresses to consumers, the contribution to GDP is
N25,000

Gross Domestic Product is the sum of the market value of the
Final goods and services.

Gross Domestic Product can be measured as the sum of
Consumption, investment, government purchases, and net exports

Which of the following can be excluded from Nigeria GDP for 2020? The sale of would be
A home built in 2019 by Brains and Harmers at Lugbe and first sold in 2020.

Real GDP is measured in ________ prices while nominal GDP is measured in ________ prices.
base year; current year

An example of a transfer payment is
Unemployment benefits

Nigeria Gross Domestic Product (in contrast to Gross National Product) measures the production and income of
People and factories located within the borders of the Nigeria.

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'



91) According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

92) Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

93) Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

94) The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

95) To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

96) ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

97) John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

98) _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

99) Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

100) One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics



114. The ____ of aggregate demand indicates that a change in taxes will shifts the aggregate demand curve in the direction opposite to that of the change in taxes

	      demand curve

	      supply side

	--->> Keynesian analysis

	      savings curve

115. The problem of ________ arises when applying the Output expenditure

	--->> double counting

	      expenditure

	      National income

	      aggregate supply

116. The _____ are negative when there is decrease in the equilibrium GDP

	      net imports

	--->> net exports

	      investment goods

	      Gross Private Investment

117. Along a given aggregate supply curve an increase in the price level leads to an increase in aggregate output because ______

	      workers work more hours, due to the increase in the real wage

	--->> firms increase production in response to higher profits

	      workers work more hours, due to the decrease in the real wage

	      All of the Options

118. Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of ___

	      people

	      Government

	      corporate organization

	--->> None of the Options

119. ______ is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it

	      Consumption

	      Savings

	--->> Marginal propensity to consume

	      Investment

120. In a ____ not all basic needs are generally met by the Private sector

	--->> free market economy

	      economy

	      supply sector

	      None of the Options

121. The british colonial officials established the ______ in 1912

	--->> West African Currency Board

	      Nigerian bank

	      monetary authority

	      CBN

122. A sum of N5000.00 is fixed on a shoe, then the fixed tax of N5000.00 is the ________

	      direct tax

	      indirect tax

	--->> Specific tax

	      Advarolem tax

123. In ____ year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

	      1960

	      1966

	      1955

	--->> 1952



124. Mr Olaoluwa a foreigner buy N800 billion worth of Nigerian exports and Mrs Vivian Odishika a Nigerian buy N700 billion worth of foreign imports in a given year. Therefore, the net exports is_________

	      1Billion

	      22Billion

	      3.2Billion

	--->> None of the Options

125. ______ of import analysis shows that import are purcahses by domestic buyers of goods and services that were produced abroad

	      Investment

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Microeconomics

	      All of the Options

126. The ______ generation banks are licensed before 1960

	--->> first

	      second

	      third

	      fourth

127. In the ______ consumption expenditure, the component of the consumption is the monthly income reportn

	      Firm's

	--->> personal

	      company's

	      overall

128. _______ is said to be the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate use

	      Savings

	      Consumption

	--->> Investment

	      Goods and Services

129. Nigeria purchased N11 billion of gasoline fron Mali last year, but it also sold N28 billion of gasoline to Ghana last year, therefore Nigeria's net gasoline export is _________

	      44.2Billion

	      2.3Billion

	      1.5Billion

	--->> None of the Options

130. The Gross Private domestic investment is the total investment in capital by the _____

	      domestic sector

	--->> investors

	      private sector

	      Government sector

131. The motive of holding money for unforseen contingency is ______

	      Transactionary motive

	      Speculative motive

	      Unforseen motive

	--->> precautionary motive

132. In the theory of final consumption expenditure, the expenditure by resident households on the domestic territory and expenditure by resident household abroad are added together but excludes any non-resideent hoseholds' expenditure on the ______

	--->> domestic territory

	      list of consumers

	      overall expenditrure

	      None of the Options

133. The _____ measures the investment used to calculate Gross domestic product in economic measurement of a nation

	      Gross National Product

	      National investment

	      Investment of a nation

	--->> Gross Private domestic investment




1--- banking legislation

2_ banking

3-- British pounds sterling

4__ Yd

5--- 1952

6--- capital markets

7--- none of the options

8___1988

9___ deposits

10___ African Banking corporation


Book keeping system

None of the options

Gross domestice product

Price stability

Production

None of the options

None of the options

Non-nationals

Full employment

National income accounting


ECO122  NOUN EXAM


Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading


Try Another Search
If the level of income is 2000, planned export demand equal marginal propensity to import is 0.4 and exogenous import is 340. Calculate the net export.
None of Options??

A public good is associated with ______
Economy of scale??



10/10

Mathematically, MPC + MPS = ____
1

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

The meaning of _____ in macroeconomics is disposable income
None of Options

The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income
National Income/Total Population

Value added method is used when the value of ______ and ______ produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year
final goods and services

Given the open economy model Y = C + I + G + (X – M), the meaning of (X-M) in the model is_____
import expenditure minus net exports

The Problem of double counting: the greatest difficulty in measuring national income is that of double counting, which arises from the improper distinction between final and an _____
intermediate product

Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___
National Income accounting

The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government in _____
1968

______ for any firm is the market value of its product or service minus the cost of inputs purchased from other firms
Value added

Expenditure approach measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by _______ and ______ in a particular period of time.
individual private businesses and public sector

The income approach to the calculation of GDP measures GDP in terms of who receives
None of the Option

Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______
None of the Option

Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others
prices

To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages
effective demand

One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level
macroeconomics

______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication
Piguo!

_____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level
Macroeconomics

The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933
Ragner Frisch

John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____
1929

Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets
aggregate economy

According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money
income

Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.
welfare



Macroeconomics problems was dealt with vigorously by ______ economists
Sismondi and Marx

Given S = -bo + BY, where -bo in the model means__________
autonomous

An example of closed economy is____________
Y = C + I

In the early 1933, macro was used in economics by _________
Ragner Frisch

The following economists execept one is not part of those that developed the theory of money and general prices ____________
Smith

The meaning of macro means __________
Aggregate Economy

The prolem of double counting or multiple counting arises when applying the ______ method to etimate national income
Output expenditure

In the 18th century the ________ economist makes use of macroeconomics
physiocrat

Consumption is the use of goods and services by __________
household

The following except one is not the goal of macroeconomics ____________
Full Production

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

An increase in price expectations shifts the long-run aggregate supply curve to the ___.
Right

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

According to the wealth effect, aggregate demand slopes downward (negatively) because
lower prices increase the value of money holdings and consumer spending increases.

Which of the following statements is true regarding the long-run aggregate supply curve? The long-run aggregate supply curve
is vertical because an equal change in all prices and wages leaves output unaffected.

A tax is a ____ levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms as it relates to the incomes, consumption, and production of goods and services
compulsory

Is not one of the characteristics of budget
Proportionality

Given AD = C + I + G + NX , where C = 520 + 0.6Y; I = 120; and G = 200; NX = 12 and T = 150, what is the equilibrium output?
1800

Economists refer to fluctuations in output as the \
Unpredictable

Stagflation occurs when the economy experiences
rising prices and falling output

Which of the following would not cause a shift in the long-run aggregate supply curve?
An increase in price expectations

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?
Problem of paid services

If the banks in an economy operate with a reserve ratio of 20 per cent then the money multiplier is:
5

If Obaka buys a newly built retirement home, this transaction would affect
Investment

The use of goods and services by household is referred to as ____
Consumption

Which of the following is not a function of money?
Hedge against inflation

An example of fiat money is
Paper naira

Reserve requirements that may be imposed on an economy’s banks by its central bank specify that banks’ reserves must be a minimum percentage of their
Deposits

Which of the following policy actions by a central bank is likely to increase the money supply?
Buying government bonds in open market operations

Money and wealth are the same thing
FALSE\'

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by
Depreciation

Microeconomics is the study of individual economic units of an economy whereas macroeconomics is the study of ___ of an economy as a whole.
aggregates

If a tailor buys cloth for N10,000 and thread for N1,000 and uses them to produce and sell N25,000 worth of dresses to consumers, the contribution to GDP is
N25,000

Gross Domestic Product is the sum of the market value of the
Final goods and services.

Gross Domestic Product can be measured as the sum of
Consumption, investment, government purchases, and net exports

Which of the following can be excluded from Nigeria GDP for 2020? The sale of would be
A home built in 2019 by Brains and Harmers at Lugbe and first sold in 2020.

Real GDP is measured in ________ prices while nominal GDP is measured in ________ prices.
base year; current year

An example of a transfer payment is
Unemployment benefits

Nigeria Gross Domestic Product (in contrast to Gross National Product) measures the production and income of
People and factories located within the borders of the Nigeria.

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'



101) According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

102) Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

103) Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

104) The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

105) To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

106) ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

107) John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

108) _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

109) Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

110) One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics



134. The ____ of aggregate demand indicates that a change in taxes will shifts the aggregate demand curve in the direction opposite to that of the change in taxes

	      demand curve

	      supply side

	--->> Keynesian analysis

	      savings curve

135. The problem of ________ arises when applying the Output expenditure

	--->> double counting

	      expenditure

	      National income

	      aggregate supply

136. The _____ are negative when there is decrease in the equilibrium GDP

	      net imports

	--->> net exports

	      investment goods

	      Gross Private Investment

137. Along a given aggregate supply curve an increase in the price level leads to an increase in aggregate output because ______

	      workers work more hours, due to the increase in the real wage

	--->> firms increase production in response to higher profits

	      workers work more hours, due to the decrease in the real wage

	      All of the Options

138. Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of ___

	      people

	      Government

	      corporate organization

	--->> None of the Options

139. ______ is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it

	      Consumption

	      Savings

	--->> Marginal propensity to consume

	      Investment

140. In a ____ not all basic needs are generally met by the Private sector

	--->> free market economy

	      economy

	      supply sector

	      None of the Options

141. The british colonial officials established the ______ in 1912

	--->> West African Currency Board

	      Nigerian bank

	      monetary authority

	      CBN

142. A sum of N5000.00 is fixed on a shoe, then the fixed tax of N5000.00 is the ________

	      direct tax

	      indirect tax

	--->> Specific tax

	      Advarolem tax

143. In ____ year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

	      1960

	      1966

	      1955

	--->> 1952



144. Mr Olaoluwa a foreigner buy N800 billion worth of Nigerian exports and Mrs Vivian Odishika a Nigerian buy N700 billion worth of foreign imports in a given year. Therefore, the net exports is_________

	      1Billion

	      22Billion

	      3.2Billion

	--->> None of the Options

145. ______ of import analysis shows that import are purcahses by domestic buyers of goods and services that were produced abroad

	      Investment

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Microeconomics

	      All of the Options

146. The ______ generation banks are licensed before 1960

	--->> first

	      second

	      third

	      fourth

147. In the ______ consumption expenditure, the component of the consumption is the monthly income reportn

	      Firm's

	--->> personal

	      company's

	      overall

148. _______ is said to be the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate use

	      Savings

	      Consumption

	--->> Investment

	      Goods and Services

149. Nigeria purchased N11 billion of gasoline fron Mali last year, but it also sold N28 billion of gasoline to Ghana last year, therefore Nigeria's net gasoline export is _________

	      44.2Billion

	      2.3Billion

	      1.5Billion

	--->> None of the Options

150. The Gross Private domestic investment is the total investment in capital by the _____

	      domestic sector

	--->> investors

	      private sector

	      Government sector

151. The motive of holding money for unforseen contingency is ______

	      Transactionary motive

	      Speculative motive

	      Unforseen motive

	--->> precautionary motive

152. In the theory of final consumption expenditure, the expenditure by resident households on the domestic territory and expenditure by resident household abroad are added together but excludes any non-resideent hoseholds' expenditure on the ______

	--->> domestic territory

	      list of consumers

	      overall expenditrure

	      None of the Options

153. The _____ measures the investment used to calculate Gross domestic product in economic measurement of a nation

	      Gross National Product

	      National investment

	      Investment of a nation

	--->> Gross Private domestic investment




1--- banking legislation

2_ banking

3-- British pounds sterling

4__ Yd

5--- 1952

6--- capital markets

7--- none of the options

8___1988

9___ deposits

10___ African Banking corporation


Book keeping system

None of the options

Gross domestice product

Price stability

Production

None of the options

None of the options

Non-nationals

Full employment

National income accounting
Bfn209
Balance sheet shows the present _______ of a business. (Statement)
Profit______ function is one of the acquired roles of the Finance Manager. (planning)
Financial statement is also used for future plans of the _______.(Enterprise)
Risk is the expected _______ of the income flow(variability)
Pandey ______ stated that the basis of the theory of financial management.(2005)
Financial Manager is the person responsible for performing ______ functions.(Finance)
Fixed costs remain constant while _____ costs change in direct proportion to changes in volume of goods. (Variable)
________ is otherwise known as profit and loss account. (Income statement)
________ mechanism system is a vital organ of a market economy. (Price)
Financing Activities consist of cash flows relating to ____ and owners' equity. (Liability)
BUS205
___________ is a means by which power is acquired, exercised and sustained. (Communication)
Non __________ income is used to buy items to meet basic needs. (Discretionary)
_________motivation also causes you to be loyal to certain shops and companies. (Patronage)
__________ is a book in which particulars of all monies received or paid are recorded. (Cash Account)
___________ is the value that products and sellers place on goods or services. (Price)
Social __________ is owed by individuals and not by organizations. (Obligation)
_______ researchers also gather information from a wider group of people. (Market)
The _______ is the total amount supplied by owner of the business or owners equity or net worth. (Capital)
__________ must be attractive. (Packaging)
________include the resources possessed by the firm. (Assets)
BUS207
Verbal communication is one way for people to communicate ______________. (Face to face)
The actual origin of ___________ is subject to considerable speculation(Language)
If a language is about communicating with signals, voice, sounds, gestures, or written symbols, can animal communications be considered as a ___________? (Language)
The basis of _________________ is the interaction between people. (Communication)
Animals do not have a __________ form of a language, but use a language to communicate with each another. (Written)
Some words may be imitative of natural __________, but others may come from expressions of emotion, such as laughter or crying. (Sounds)
Some of the key components of verbal communication are sound, writing, speaking, and ______________. (Language)
A dialogue is a reciprocal conversation between _______ or more entities, (TWO)
As meaning is assigned to words, language develops, which leads to the ___________ of speaking. (Development)
At birth, most people have vocal cords, which produce __________. (Sounds)
BUS106
It could be argued that the _______ school is identical to the management process school. (Empirical)
Art is the imposition of __________. (Pattern)
___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.(Pinciple)
Gilbreth is known for his work on time and _________studies. (Motion)
Decision theory schools believe in _________decision making. (Rational)
The first principles of management were advocated. (Henry fayol)
There are special areas of management that are not subjected to rigous of(Science)
spend his life working on the difference engine (Babbage)
Management can be define as getting thing done through (Organising)
Management can be define as a team or group of individuals in _________(Organisation)
ECO122
Exports are determined by factors outside the control of the ___ economy (Home)
The two components of import demand is fixed, and at the same time it varies with (Income)
The ____ are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers (Spending Decision)
In technical terms, _____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade (Gain from trade)
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ______ with each other (Trading)
Import demand changes as______ changes (Income)
Because export is exogenous while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are_____ related to national income/national output (Negatively)
_____ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers (Import)
When income rises, the aspect of _____ rises as well and when income falls, it falls (Import demand)
Exports depend on spending decisions made by foreign ____ or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services (Consumer)
ECO231
The demand for goods and services is __ (Direct Demand)
The prices paid to the factors of production are called (All of the above)
Reason for the study of factor pricing are (All of the above)
The demand of factor of product can also be Joint Demand because for producer to produce orange he/she has to demand for all the _(factors of production)
The factors needed in the production process are also known as (Production Service)
The factor pricing is concerned with the determination of prices of services of factors of ______ (Production)
To produce goods and services, ____ need the services of factors of production, like land, labour, capital, and entrepreneur (FIRMs)
The theory of distribution is an attempt to explain how income is distributed among the factors of __ (Production)
The employer of factors of production only uses the factors in the production of goods and services to be finally sold in the ____(Product Market)
When workers are engaged or capital are borrowed, it does not offer any direct satisfaction to the ____ (Producer)
The production concept holds that consumers will value products that are highly (Affordable)
Another important role is the discovery of entrepreneurial talent (Agree)
Marketing's first role is to (Stimulate Aggregate potential demand)
Consumerism is an organized movement of citizens and government to fight wars on poor products(Disagree)
Commodity approach in marketing focuses on (Classes of products)
The major goal of an organization to an extent is (Profit)
The product concept holds that consumers value products that offer (High Quality)
Marketing concept holds that organization must first create to satisfy (Needs and want)
One of the significance of marketing is to provide (impulse purchase)
The purpose of marketing concept is to help organizations (Achieve its goal
BFN203
According Gardon (2014), there is a remarked difference between capital gains investing and the game of speculation
The_________ is a document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation (National tax Policy
investing is the art of buying and selling an asset for a profit (Capital Gain Investing)
__ is a technique that reduces risk by allocating investments among various financial instruments, industries and other categories (Diversification)
some or all of a loan when the borrower is ins (Credit Insurance)
The steps involved in personal financial planning process Include all of the following except________ (Goal Division)
are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date (Warrants)
Is a type of tax (PAYE)
Owning a current and savings account have the same requirements (False)
Ent203
The achievement needs theory was developed by (McCelland)
Which of the following emphasized the risk aspect of entrepreneurship (Cantillon)
Which of the following a pattern of venture capital development (Mid Stage)
Entrepreneurial process include the following stages except? (Profit Planning)
(New Monnies)
VC stands for (Venture Capital)
Which of the following will not support in-house entrepreneurial development in organizations (Bickering)
CIT201
The software that uses the power and speed of a computer machine to perform some mathematical calculations or simulate some real life situations is called a ___ software. (Modeling)
Ent 209
Friedrich Hayek (1937 is a prominent of( Austrian school of thought)
An entrepreneur who is a rebellion and tries to bring in new ways of working and new society is called ____________________ (Reformist)
The Nigerian Bank for Commerce and Industry (NBCI) was set up in 1973 to provide ____________ by way of loans to indigenous persons, institutions and organisations for medium and long term investments (Equity and Loan)
The risk theory proposes that the _________________ the nature of business, the __________________________ (More Risky Higer profit)
The Human Capital Entrepreneurship Theory is hinged on these two factors _______________ and ________________ (Education and Experience)
1. One of the credit functions of BOA is the direct lending to qualified loan applicants engaged in agricultural and nonagricultural small busine (correct)
Mkt 205
Certain (question) are often asked while formulating product strategy
In most organizations, __________ is an annual process, typically covering just the year ahead (Strategic planning)
An important element of distribution strategy for banks is __ (Site Location)
High interest s rate on deposits or reduction rates on loans and advances are good examples of pricing ___________ (Pricing Strategy)
The marketing concept rest on ______________pillars (Four)
A good marketing plan should have the following qualities (All of the above)
are attracted through promises and are retained through satisfaction of expectations (Customers)
Place strategies are concerned with ensuring the prompt delivery of the services to the _______ (Target Market)
_ must always come first before other activities (Planning)
described the emergence of services sector and banks experience in service marketing (Gupta)
acc102
These are accounting concepts except.








ECO122 List of eExam Questions in the Bank
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 Net exports equals
Q2 Gross Private domestic investment equals consumer spending plus investment plus government spending plus
Q3 Gross Private Domestic investment is a relatively specific measure of
Q4 Gross Private domestic investment measures is used to calculate nation
Q5 If import is greater than exports it is called
in economic measurement of a
Q6 If exports is greater than imports it is called
Q7 Net exports can be seen as
Q8 The Personal Consumption is the largest part of
Q9 The gross domestic product is the summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the and non-nationals
Q10 The second generation banks were bank lincensed between	years
Q11 The first generation bank in Nigeria were lincensed before
Q12 National income accounting provides economists and statisticians with detailed information that can be used to track the health of an
Q13 Central bank of Nigeria began Operations in
Q14 British Colonial Officials established the	in 1912
Q15 Nigeria first bank the African banking corporation was established in
Q16 Per capita income is defined as the ratio of a country’s income to its
Q17 Economic growth is defined as the process whereby the time
Q18 According to Keynes, full employment means the absence of
of a country increases over a long period of
Q19 Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole (aggregate) economy or economic systems rather than individual
Q20 A rise in domestic inflation can plunge the economy into
Q21 Positive net export that is current account surplus can be used to recover the economy from
Q22 The factor that affect trade flows is the changes in
Q23 Mr Olusanya Samuel an American consumer intends to buy Nigeria product wort of N1000.00, given that exchange rate is 50, so the amount of dollars he need for the transaction is
Q24 A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency is called
Q25 A fall in exchange when domestic currency falls relative to foreign currency is called
Q26 When exchange rate rises, import demand is
Q27 When exchange rate fall, import demand becomes
Q28 Given that the amount of naira needed when we want to buy $100 worth of US and the exchange rate falls to $50 and product given that exchange rate is N500.00, the amount of naira needed is
Q29 Given that the amount of naira needed when we want to buy $100 worth of United State of America product given that exchange rate is N500.00, the amount of naira needed is
Q30 The rate at which the naira is exchanged for the dollar is called
Q31 International prices affects
Q32 C + I in macroeconomic modelling means
Q33 (X-M) in macroeconomic modelling means
Q34 Mo in macroeconomic modelling means
Q35 Xo in macroeconomic modelling means
Q36 Import demand is the one that changes as
Q37 Imports is treated as	varaible because firmknowthe amount of intermediate goods or capital goods
Q38 Imports depends on the	decisions of domestic consumers
Q39 Export is treated as exogenous varaible because it is determined by factors outside the control of the
Q40 The spending decisions of the government are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of the
Q41 Export depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic
Q42 An example of closed economy model is
Q43 An example of open economy model is
Q44 Gain fromtade are commonly described as resulting fromspecialization in production from
Q45 Gain fromtrade can be defined further in technical terms as the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from tariffs
Q46 Gain fromtrade are the net benefits to agents fromallowing an increase in	trading with each other
Q47 The theory where a country specialises in the production of a commodity or services in which it has a lower opportunity cost is called
Q48 David Ricardo was the proponent of the theory of
Q49 Adam Smith is well known with the theory of
Q50 The theory where the goods and services in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources is called
Q51 International trade can be defined as	between a country and the rest of the world
Q52 International economics is concerns with economic relationships within and among
Q53 An Open economy is the economy in which there are economic activities between
Q54 National income accounting is a termused in economics to refer to the	system
Q55 The financial statement of the sources and uses of the government is
Q56 The bearer of the burden of tax is called
Q57 The deliberate act of exploiting the loopholes in the tax regulations to manipulate his economic situation in other to pay lower tax is called
Q58 Tax evasion is a deliberate attempt by a tax payer not to pay
Q59 If a Machine tool is N2,000,000 and an ad valoremtax of 8 percent is imposed, then tax paid is
Q60 If a sumof N200.00 is fixed on a shirt, then the fixed tax N200.00 is called the
Q61	is tax levied is proportional to the tax base or income of the individual
Q62 Regressive tax is a situation where	reduces as the size of income decreases
Q63 Progressive tax is a situation where tax rate increases as the size of
Q64 The two types of tax are
Q65 A tax is a	imposed by the government on individuals and business firms as it relates to the incomes,
consumptions and production of goods and services
Q66 Revenue earned by the government are received fromsources such as accumulation of individuals and corporation
on the incomes and wealth
Q67 Government revenue is the	available to fund the activities of a government
Q68 Government Spending also means
Q69 Government Spending is the spending activities carried out by the	of a country
Q70 Aggregate Supply curve shows the relationship between the overall price level
by all firms in an economy and the
Q71 Aggregate Supply is the period
Q72 Aggregate demand is the
produced within an economy at a given overall price level in a given time
in the economy
Q73 Aggregate demand curve is the relationship between	that firms are willing to provide
Q74 In macroeconomics, investment is the accumulation of newly produced	entities
Q75 Gross investment is the value of investment in buildings, machinery before taking away
Q76 Nigeria's first bank, the African Banking Corporation, was established in
1890
1877
1894
1892
Q77 Mr Afees Oyebo purchase a machine tool at N3,000,000 and an ad valoremtax of 21 percent is imposed, calculate the tax Mr Afees Oyebo finally paid on the machone tools.
N430,000 N630,000 N70.00
None of the above
Q78 If a sumof N800.00 is fixed on a shirt, then the fixed tax of N800.00 is the	tax
Custom Duty Free Specific Import
Q79	tax is leveid proportional to the tax base or income of the individual
Progressive Regressive Proportional None of the above
Q80	tax is a situation where tax rate reduces as the size of income increases
Progressive Regressive Proportional Neutal
Q81 The two types of taxes are	and	tax
Direct and Income Company and Indirect Direct and indirect
al of the above
Q82 The first generation bank were banks that were licensed before
1966
1960
1970
1977
Q83	an institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services
Central Bank Merchant Bank Commercial Bank Insurance Company
Q84 Finance and insurance services represented more than	of Nigeria's GDP in 1988
2. 	percent
3. 	percent
4. 	percent
al of the above
Q85 The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government until 1968, began operations on
July Ist 1955
July 1st 1959
June 1st 1959
July 1st 1949
Q86 In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate
Economic growth Economic activities Economic Development None of the above
Q87 British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in
1993
1912
1922
1990
Q88 In	Nigeria's first bank, the African Banking Corporation, was established
1999
1899
1892
1992
Q89	is a situation when you hold money for investment purposes
Precautionary motive Speculative motive Expenses motive
al of the above
Q90 Economists take the study of money seriously because evidence suggests that
The money supply and the price level move clsoely together Money and interest rate movements are related
Business cycle downturns are preceded by downturns in money growth al of the above are true
Q91 Developing countries stand to gain frominternational trade because
Trade enables themto specialize in producing where they have a comparative advantage Trade gives themaccess to the greater variety of goods produced abroad
Trade subjects their local producers to greater competition al of the above are true
Q92 The calculation of goods produced by Nigerian nationals in South Africa and the one produced in Nigeria is called
Gross Nation's Product Gross National Product Gross Domestic Product Al of the above are true
Q93 Macroeconomics as the field of economics that studies the behavior of the
economy
micro-economy aggregate economy multisector economy
Q94	make(s) it more likely that small countries will trade internationally because their costs of getting products over their borders are worth the effort
Technological cost Transport costs Labor costs
al of the above are true
Q95 Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of
Neo-Classical Economist Economics
Keynesian Economist National Income accounting
Q96 The graph that shows the relationship between consumption and income is
Consumption graph Nation income graph Investmentn graph
Savings graph
Q97 Average propensity to consume refers to
the relationship between consumption and savings
the position where a poor person move to a better level
percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings percentage of income that is not spend on goods and services rather than on savings
Q98 Investment in economics can be defined as
the amount invested in a business amount use for daily transaction
the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate consumption net additions to series of investment
Q99 Which of the following is a primary function of money?
to serve as an encouragement to work to serve as a unit of account
to raise funds for the government
to reduce the burden of excessive imports
Q100 The following except one is the most important goals of macroeconomics objective in an economy
Economic growth balanced of payment Price stability Exchange rate
Q101 What is the real GDP IN 2014?
N10,080 N1440 N10,134
none of the above
Q102 GDP valued at current year prices or nominal GDP fromthe analysis above are	and
N1,774 and 9800 N3,731 and N9,230 N3,080 and N9800
none of the above
Q103 Using the analysis above, What is the GDP FOR 2014?
N9,800 N9,230 N1400
none of the above
Q104 Use the following information to answer question 67, 68, 69 and 70. Let us assume that Nigeria produces only two food stuff: Garri and Rice. The prices and quantities of these two food stuff in 2013 and 2014 are as follows: in 2013 the quantity for Garri and Rice produced are 280 and 420 respectively while Prices of Garri and Rice are N70 AND N56 respectively. For 2014; the quantity for Garri and Rice are 560 and 840 respectively while Prices of Garri and Rice are N140 AND N70 respectively. using the analyis above, what is the GDP for 2013
N3,731 N1,774 N3,080
none of the above
Q105 Disposable income or personal disposable income is the actual income which an individual spent on
Personal Expenses Personal savings Personal purchases none of the above
Q106 The british colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in
1922
1933
1912
1927
Q107 In	year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development
1955
1923
1953
1952
Q108 Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of
corporate and institutional debtors corporate organization
commercial banks and institutional customers none of the above
Q109 Economists take the study of money seriously because evidence suggests that
The money supply and the price level move clsoely together Money and interest rate movements are related
Business cycle downturns are preceded by downturns in money growth al of the above are true
Q110 Which of the following is a central issue in macroeconomics?
the deregulation of the banking industry inflation of prescription drug prices
the ef ect of excise taxes on consumers' buying patterns none of the above
Q111 Which of the following is a primary function of money?
to serve as an encouragement to work to serve as a unit of account
to raise funds for the government
to reduce the burden of excessive imports
Q112 The functions of money are
medium of exchange, unit of account, and store of value pricing, contracts, and means of payment
medium of exchange and the ability to buy goods and services medium of exchange, unit of account, and means of payment
Q113 Money can be define as
Anything that can be used to purchase items
Anything that is generaly accepted, as a means of exchange and payment/settlement of debts. the means of exchanging goods for goods
anything that is use for capital goods
Q114 Investment in economics can be defined as
the amount invested in a business amount use for daily transaction
the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate consumption net additions to series of investment
Q115 The formular for savings function is
S = - b0 + BY S= b1 + By
S= b0 + bYd S= -bo + Yd
Q116 Marginal propensity to consume is defined as
the percent change in savings and income
the percentage change in interest rate and consumption the ratio of investment to Savings
the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it
Q117 Average propensity to consume refers to
the relationship between consumption and savings
the position where a poor person move to a better level
percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings percentage of income that is not spend on goods and services rather than on savings
Q118 The graph that shows the relationship between consumption and income is
Consumption graph Nation income graph Investmentn graph Savings graph
Q119 Budget is needed to performsome allocative function just as the     mechanism performs in the private sectoe
Goods Fiscal Price
Al of the above
Q120 The financial plan of the projected expenditures and revenues of a unit of Government to ensure fiscal period is
The supply of goods and services the budget
the Government expenses None of the above
Q121	is the difference between total government expenditure that is taxes minus government expenditure
Budget deficit Budget balance Budget suplus Budget analysis
Q122 Budget is a document that exolicitly describe the spending decision of the government against the project    and the
Deficit and revenue Supply and revenue Revenue and source None of the above
Q123	theory states that a country should specialise in the production of a commodity or service in which it has a lower opportunity cost.
Comparative disadvantage Comparative advantage Absolute Disadvantage None of the above
Q124	is the goods or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources
The theory of comparative cost advantage The theory of Absolute advantage
The theory of international trade Al of the above
Q125	was the main author of Comparative advantage
Adams Smith David Ricardo John Smith
None of the above
Q126 Adams Smith is associatd with the theory of
Comparative advantage Absolute advantage Theory of trade
None of the above
Q127 The following except one are the importance of international trade.
imports serve domestic industry exports acts as agents of growth imports serve foreign consumers None of the above
Q128 Is true that the reason for trade between countries are not in any way different fromreasons individuals trade within a country.
TRUE FALSE
A and B
None of the above
Q129       is a trade relation between a country and the rest of the world
International trade International prices A and B
None of the above
Q130 Spending by foreigners is a component of
Spending
Goods and services Total spending
Al of the above
Q131 Prices of	varies in nature
International transaction Goods and services International goods
Al of the above
Q132 Economy that is in recession can recover by reducing      and increasing export supply.
Import Supply Export demand Import demand Al of the above
Q133 A fall in domestic inflation will help the economy to recover fromrecession through
Decrease in net export Decrease in net import Increase in net export Al of the above
Q134	,	, and	have implication on the output performnace of the domestic economy
exchange rate, inflation and deflation Inflation, deflation and exchange rate policy
exchange rate, domestic inflation and foreign inflation None of the above
Q135 Positive net export (current account surplus) can be used to recover the economy from
Boom Recession
Bad Government None of the above
Q136 Given a planned aggregate demand: AD = C + I + G + NX, where C = 610 + 0.8Y, I = 210, NX = 10 and T = 220. Calculate the equilibrium output.
4200
4700
4000
None of the above
Q137 Depreciation makes	cheaper and	expensive.
Export and import Exchange rate and goods
Importation and exchange rate Al of the above
Q138 Consider a United States of America consumer that intends to buy Nigeria product worth N8000.00, how much dollars does he need for the transaction? Given the exchange rate to be 210.
30
38.1
34.09
None of the above
Q139	is the rate at which the naira is exchange for the dollar
Local currency Exchange price Exchange rate Bureau de change
Q140	and	are affected by international prices.
Import X and Y Export X and Y Import and prices None of the above
Q141 Assuming the income is 2500, planned export demand is 800, marginal propensity to import is 0.2 and exogenous import is 250. Calculate the net export
300
200
100
None of the above
Q142 If the level of income is 1000, planned export demand equal marginal propensity to import is 0.2 and exogenous import is 250. Calculate the net export.
301
300
350
None of the above
Q143 Meaning of Mo in export tarde is
Exogenous M Autonomous M
Imported basic investment goods None of the above
Q144 Meaning of Xo in export trade is
Exogenous X autonomous X Export demand None of the above
Q145 Because is exogenous while a part of import is an inceasing function of  , net export are negatively related to national output
Export, import Import, export Export, income Al of the above
Q146 The two components of import demand are	and	.
Fixed and mixed Mixed and rises Fixed and rises None of the above
Q147 The	are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of foreign consumers.
Decision making process Decision in trade Spending Decision None of the above
Q148 Microeconomics is the study of individual economic units of an economy whereas macroeconomics is the study of	of an economy as a whole
aggregates smal Exports
Al of the above
Q149	is describe as a result of specialization in production fromeconomies of scale, scope, division of labor
International trade Production
Gains from trade Trade Production
Q150	is the benefits to economic agents for allowing an increase in voluntary trading.
Net Output Net input Net Supply Net
eco122 List of Questions
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 If Nigeria purchased N30 billion of gasoline from other countries last year, but it also sold N70 billion of gasoline to other countries last year, the Nigeria's net gasoline exports will be
N40 Billion
Q2 Various functions of commercial banks can be divided into three main groups; Primary Functions, Agency Functions and
General utility function
Q3 The two essential functions that a financial institution must perform to become a bank are accepting deposit and
Lending to the public
Q4 A banking company is one which transacts the business of banking which means the accepting for the purpose of lending all
of deposits of money from the public
investment
Q5 The meaning of Yd in macroeconomics is
disposable income
Q6		an institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services
commercial bank
Q7 At the end of 1988, the banking system consisted of the Central Bank of Nigeria, forty-two commercial banks, and
merchant banks
24
Q8 In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate
economic development
Q9 British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in	to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa and to issue a West African currency convertible to British pounds sterling
1912
Q10 No banking legislation existed Nigeria until
1952
Q11 In	Nigeria's first bank, the African Banking Corporation, was established
1892
Q12 A	is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through capital markets
financial institution
Q13 The following are the motives of holding money except Spending Motive
Q14 The following are not functions of money except
store of value
Q15 The following are the characteristics of money except
individuality
Q16 Increase in per capita income results in increase in
Economic welfare
Q17 The	cannot be said to have increased, if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of labour Economic welfare
Q18 If the change in national income were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in
Economic welfare
Q19 According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national income, because both of them are measured in terms of
money
Q20	attaches great importance to economic welfare because welfare is a very wide term.
Piguo
Q21 Economic welfare is that part of social welfare which can directly or indirectly be measured in
money
Q22 One of the great welfare economists is
A. C. Pigou
Q23 Economic welfare is a state of the mind which reflects human happiness and
satisfaction
Q24 Investment in economics can be defined as the act of producing capital goods which are not for	consumption
immediate consumption
Q25 The inverse of average propensity to save is the Average propensity to consume
Q26 The average propensity to save is an economic term that refers to the proportion of income that is	rather than spent on goods and services
saved
Q27 Determinants of savings are the followings except
Government factor
Q28 The income not spent on goods and services for current consumption is called
savings
Q29 Marginal propensity to consume is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in	that necessitated it income
Q30 Meaning of APS is
None of the above
Q31	refers to the percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings
Average Propensity to consume
Q32 Meaning of APC is
average propensity to consume
Q33 In a geometric fashion, the MPC is actually the slope of the	function Consumption
Q34 The meaning of MPC is marginal propensity to consume
Q35 The marginal propensity to consume, on the other hand measures the rate at which	is changing when income is changing
consumption
Q36 Autonomous consumption represents consumption when income is
zero
Q37	was developed by John Maynard Keynes and detailed most famously in his book The General Theory of Employment, Interest, and Money
Consumption function
Q38	is a single mathematical function used to express consumer spending
Consumption function
Q39 Consumption is distinct from consumption expenditure, which is the	of goods and services for use by households
Purchase
Q40 Consumption is the use of goods and services by
household
Q41 A banking company is one which transacts the business of banking which means the accepting for the purpose of lending all
of deposits of money from the public investment
Q42 The meaning of Yd in macroeconomics is
disposable income
Q43 The	method calculates the total expenditure required to purchase the nation's output
Output ??? expenditure
Q44	measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by individual private businesses and public sector (governments) in a particular period of time
Expenditure approach
Q45	is used when the value of final good and services produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year
Value added method
Q46 The following are three basic approaches to the measurement of GDP except one
Value-added approach
Q47 Disposable income or personal disposable income is the actual income which an individual spent on
consumption
Q48	is defined as the ratio of a country???s income to its population, while GDP per capita is defined as the ratio of a country???s GDP to the population of the country
Per capita income
Q49 Domestic income does not include the income earned
abroad
Q50 The income of citizens of a country living abroad
Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the individual economic market. True or False?
False
was the economist who developed a general theory of income, output and employment.
Keynes
The term “macro” was first used in economics by Ragner Frisch in the year
1933
Full employment means the absence of	unemployment.
Involuntary
One of the goals of macroeconomics policy is to stabilize the price level. True or False?
True
Macroeconomics is the study of	of an economy as a whole
Aggregates
is the summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals.
GDP
Goods and services produced in the previous years are included in the GDP calculation. True or False?
False
Final good or service is the end product of the	process.
Production
A special type of good that is difficult to class as intermediate or final is a	good
Capital
Social security such as unemployment insurance, scholarships are called	payment
Transferred
Problem of	counting is one of the problems of computation of GDP
Double
The income of citizens of a country living abroad is termed	income from the rest of the world
Factor
Net National Product is Gross National Product minus
Depreciation
Domestic income is	income minus net income earned from abroad
National
income is personal income minus direct taxes.
Disposable
Real gross domestic product is nominal gross domestic product that has been adjusted for
Inflation
GDP is the GDP measured in the current market prices of the goods and services.
Nominal
Real GDP is called GDP at	prices
Constant
A particular year when prices are normal or stable is called the	year
Base
National income account provides a basis for national economic policies. True or False
True
National income is GDP less net factor income from
Abroad
When import is subtracted from export, we have	exports
Net
When consumer expenditure is subtracted from the amount of disposable income, it is referred to as
Savings
The current governor of Central Bank of Nigeria is
Godwin Emefiele
is the use of goods and services by households
Consumption
The lender of last resort and financial adviser to the government is	bank
Central
In the consumption function, C = b0 + b1Y ; b0 is referred to as	consumption
Autonomous
b1 in the consumption function is known as	propensity to consume
Marginal
Autonomous consumption represents consumption when income is
Zero
propensity to consume refers to the percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings
Average
Government policy is not a determinant of savings. True or False
False
Level of national income is a determinant of investment. True or False
True
coincidence of want is a problem associated with trade by barter
Double
The ease with which money can be carried is referred to as
Portability
Money as a	of exchange is the most important function of money
Medium
Money as a unit of	makes it possible to measure the prices of goods and services
Account
The demand for liquidity for day to day transactions is known as	motive for liquidity.
Transactionary
motive is the demand for liquidity for unforeseen circumstances
Precautionary
A financial institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services is a
bank
Commercial
Non-residential investment is not part of gross private domestic investment. Agree or Disagree
Disagree
investment is the value of investment in buildings, machinery, before taking away depreciation
Gross
National defence, provision of social amenities , policing, internal and external securities are all part of
spending
Government
Value added tax is an example of	tax
Indirect
Personal income tax, capital gains tax are examples of	tax
Direct
Government consumption and investment are part of government spending but excludes
payments.
Transfer
Government	is money received by a government
Revenue
is a compulsory levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms
Tax
A situation where tax rate reduces as the size of income increases is	tax
Regressive
Budget	is a status of financial health in which expenditures exceed revenue
Deficit
Macroeconomics studies the behavior of which economic systems whole (aggregate)
Macroeconomics examines All of the options
Objectives of macroeconomics does not include Individual economic market
When the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time is known as economic growth
One of the Keynesian concept of full employment involves Reduction in the real wage rate
is the study of individual economic units of an economy Microeconomics
The major determinant of macroeconomic problems is Income
Who developed macroeconomics as a distinct method in economic theory?
John Keynes
The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals is
Gross domestic product (GDP)
Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination? None of the options
The followings is not included in the calculation of GDP except current year production
Domestic income does not include:
Income earned abroad
The ratio of a country’s income to its population is known as
Per capita income
Personal income minus direct tax is known as Disposable income
The importance of national income accounting does not include For poverty alleviation
There are	basic approaches to the measurement of GDP Three (3)
After subtracting depreciation from GNP, what we get is called Net national product (NNP).
Aggregate consumption in any economy depends on a number of factors except Capital accumulation
The determinants of savings does not include Social cost
Saving is income
Not spent
With disposable income of N20,000 and spending of N8,000. What is APC? 0.4
Components of investment includes All of the options
Which of the following is not a determinant of investment None of the options
The exchange of good for goods and services for services is called Barter system
One of these is not a stage in the evolution of money Standard money
Who formulated the equation of exchange? Irvin Fisher
The following are functions of money except Unit of Measurement
The first money deposit bank in Nigeria was established in the year 1891
One of these is not a function of the central bank Acceptance of deposits
Precautionary demand for money will be directly influenced by A person’s level of income
One of the following is not a problem associated with the barter system None of the options
Holding cash for the purchase of bond and securities is referred to as
Speculative demand for money
The first bank in Nigeria was known as African Banking Corporation
The primary function of commercial bank is to Accept deposits from every class
Banks that were licensed before Nigeria’s independence in 1960 First generation banks
The expenditure of households on goods and services is referred to as Personal consumption expenditure
Gross private domestic investment includes All of the options
Reasons for the downward sloping of the Aggregate Demand Curve All of the options
The components of aggregate expenditure does not include Capital accumulation
Factors that lead to increase in government spending excludes. Political stability
Reasons why government levy taxes exclude To punish the citizens
One of these is not a disadvantage of international trade Technical knowledge
Trade between two countries is known as Bilateral trade
Three approaches of measuring national income account are
Income, output, expenditure
Reasons for increased government expenditure in Nigeria does not include Good governance
Compulsory levy by government to the citizens is known as Taxation
The proponent of the theory of Comparative Cost Advantage David Ricardo
Comparative advantage doctrine is based on the assumptions except Unequal cost of production
Which arm of the government implements the budget The Executive
Roles of government budgets exclude Advisory
eco122 TMA1 List of Questions
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 Prices of _______ varies in nature
International transaction
Q2 Economy that is in recession can recover by reducing ______ and increasing export supply.
Import demand
Q3 A fall in domestic inflation will help the economy to recover from recession through _______
Increase in net export
Q4 ______, _______, and _______ have implication on the output performnace of the domestic economy
exchange rate, domestic inflation and foreign inflation
Q5 Positive net export (currnt account surplus) can be used to recover the economy from _____
Recession
Q6 Given a planned aggregate demand: AD = C + I + G + NX, where C = 610 + 0.8Y, I = 210, NX = 10 and T = 220. Calculate the equilibrium output.
4700
Q7 Depreciation makes _____ cheaper and _____ expensive.
Export and import
Q8 Consider a United States of America consumer that intends to buy Nigeria product worth N8000.00, how much dollars does he need for the transaction? Given the exchange rate to be 210.
38.1
Q9 _____ is the rate at which the naira is exchange for the dollar
Exchange rate
Q10 ______ and _____ are affected by international prices.
None of the above
Q11 Assuming the income is 2500, planned export demand is 800, marginal propensity to import is 0.2 and exogenous import is 250. Calculate the net export
None of the above
Q12 If the level of income is 1000, planned export demand equal marginal propensity to import is 0.2 and exogenous import is 250. Calculate the net export.
350
Q13 Meaning of Mo in export tarde is ______
Imported basic investment goods
Q14 Meaning of Xo in export trade is ______
Export demand
Q15 Because ______ is exogenous while a part of import is an inceasing function of ____, net export are negatively related to national output
Export, income
Q16 The two components of import demand are _____ and _____.
None of the above
Q17 The _____ are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of foreign consumers.
Spending Decision
Q18 ______ depends on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas from the purchase of domestic goods and services.
Imports duty
Q19 ______ is describe as a result of specialization in production from economies of scale, scope, division of labor
Gains from trade
Q20 ____ is the benefits to economic agents for allowing an increase in voluntary trading.
Net
eco122 TMA2 List of Questions
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 Which of the following is a primary function of money?
to serve as a unit of account
Q2 Macro was first used in economics by Ragner Frisch in _____
1933
Q3 Money can be define as __________
Anything that is generally accepted, as a means of exchange and payment/settlement of debts.
Q4 Investment in economics can be defined as ________
the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate consumption
Q5 The formular for savings function is __________
S = - b0 + BY
Q6 Marginal propensity to consume is defined as _________
the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it
Q7 Average propensity to consume refers to ________
percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings
Q8 The graph that shows the relationship between consumption and income is _______
Consumption graph
Q9 Budget is needed to perform some allocative function just as the _____ mechanism performs in the private sector.
Price
Q10 The financial plan of the projected expenditures and revenues of a unit of Government to ensure fiscal period is _____
the budget
Q11 _____ is the difference between total government expenditure that is taxes minus government expenditure
Budget balance
Q12 Budget is a document that exolicitly describe the spending decision of the government against the project ____ and the _____
Revenue and source
Q13 _____ theory states that a country should specialise in the production of a commodity or service in which it has a lower opportunity cost.
Comparative advantage
Q14 ______ is the goods or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources
The theory of Absolute advantage
Q15 ______ was the main author of Comparative advantage
David Ricardo
Q16 Adams Smith is associatd with the theory of ______
Theory of trade
Q17 The following except one are the importance of international trade.
imports serve foreign consumers
Q18 The reason for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a __________.
Country
Q19 ______ is a trade relation between a country and the rest of the world
International trade
Q20 Spending by foreigners is a component of ______
Total spending
eco122 TMA3 List of Questions
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 Developing countries stand to gain from international trade because
all of the above are true
Q2 The calculation of goods produced by Nigerian nationals in South Africa and the one produced in Nigeria is called _______
Gross National Product
Q3 Macroeconomics as the field of economics studies the behavior of the ____
aggregate economy
Q4 _______________ make(s) it more likely that small countries will trade internationally because their costs of getting products over their borders are worth the effort
Transport costs
Q5 Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of _______
National Income accounting
Q6 The graph that shows the relationship between consumption and income is _______
Consumption graph
Q7 Average propensity to consume refers to ________
percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings
Q8 Investment in economics can be defined as ________
the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate consumption
Q9 Which of the following is a primary function of money?
to serve as a unit of account
Q10 The following except one is the most important goals of macroeconomics objective in an economy
Exchange rate
Q11 What is the real GDP IN 2014?
N10,080
Q12 GDP valued at current year prices or nominal GDP from the analysis above are ____ and _____
N3,080 and N9800
Q13 Using the analysis above, What is the GDP FOR 2014?
N9,800
Q14 Use the following information to answer question 67, 68, 69 and 70. Let us assume that Nigeria produces only two food stuff: Garri and Rice. The prices and quantities of these two food stuff in 2013 and 2014 are as follows: in 2013 the quantity for Garri and Rice produced are 280 and 420 respectively while Prices of Garri and Rice are N70 AND N56 respectively. For 2014; the quantity for Garri and Rice are 560 and 840 respectively while Prices of Garri and Rice are N140 AND N70 respectively. using the analyis above, what is the GDP for 2013
N3,080
Q15 Disposable income or personal disposable income is the actual income which an individual spent on _____
none of the above
Q16 The british colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in ______
1912
Q17 In _____ year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development
1952
Q18 Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______
none of the above
Q19 Economists take the study of money seriously because evidence suggests that
all of the above are true
Q20 Which of the following is a central issue in macroeconomics?
inflation of prescription drug prices
eco122 TMA4 List of Questions
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 Nigeria's first bank, the African Banking Corporation, was established in _____
1892
Q2 Mr Afees Oyebo purchase a machinee tool at N3,000,000 and an ad valorem tax of 21 percent is imposed, calculate the tax Mr Afees Oyebo finally paid on the machine tools.
N630,000
Q3 If a sum of N800.00 is fixed on a shirt, then the fixed tax of N800.00 is the _____ tax
Specific
Q4 _____ tax is levied proportional to the tax base or income of the individual
Proportional
Q5 ______ tax is a situation where tax rate reduces as the size of income increases
Regressive
Q6 The two types of taxes are _____ and _____ tax
Direct and indirect
Q7 The first generation bank were banks that were licensed before _______
1960
Q8 ______ an institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services
Commercial Bank
Q9 Finance and insurance services represented more than ______ of Nigeria's GDP in 1988
3 percent
Q10 The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government until 1968, began operations on ______
July 1st 1959
Q11 In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate ______
Economic Development
Q12 British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in _____
1912
Q13 In ____ Nigeria's first bank, the African Banking Corporation, was established
1892
Q14 ______ is a situation when you hold money for investment purposes
Speculative motive
Q15 Economists take the study of money seriously because evidence suggests that
all of the above are true
Q16 From the early days of civilization, those in power have always rely on _____ as a method of generating income
Taxation
Q17 ______ is the income available to fund the activities of a governmnet
Government revenue
Q18 ______ Budget is a situation in which income exceeds expenditures
Surplus
Q19 ______ expenditure are expenditures on capital projects
Capital
Q20 Developing countries stand to gain from international trade because
all of the above
BUS322 TMA3
--------- is discussed in performance appraisal when a rater makes an error in judging a person’s
total
personality and/or performance on the basis of a single trait.= Halo=
-------- refers to the contention experienced when a want is satisfied= Satisfaction=
71. A ------------ is the expected pattern of behaviours associated with members occupying a particular
position within the structure of the organization.= Role=
---------- is the pattern of relationships along the positions in the organization and among members of the organization.= Structure=
---------- define role as the behaviour that is associated with a social status position.= Sociologist=
----------- is the set of forces that cause people to behave in certain ways= Motivation=
-------- is an urgent means of achieving a minimum standard of living= Money=
Frederick Herzberg propounded the ----------factor theory= Two=
The principal barriers to communication include the following except one= indiscriminate querries=
Group ------------ are shared values about the kind of behaviours that are acceptable and unacceptable as work.= Norms=


BUS322
Which management function maintains conformity between goals and results. (Controlling)
Which of the following is not a classical management function? (Marketing and Financing)
Which of the management functions is concerned with arranging and allocating work, authority and resources among organizational members? (Organizing)
Who described management as a process of deciding what to do and getting others to do it? (stewant 1981)
Which one of the following is the central problem of an organization? (Cordination)
he most useful view of management is that it is a (Process)
Which management dimension consists of a manager's expertise in computers, accounting, purchasing or marketing? (Technical)
When management deals with the practical application of both knowledge and skill to achieve an objective, it is called: (Art)
Which of the following refers to management (All of the Option)
Which branch of management is concerned with the conceptual and human side of management? (Organisation Behaviour)



BUS322
Which management function maintains conformity between goals and results. (Controlling)
Which of the following is not a classical management function? (Marketing and Financing)
Which of the management functions is concerned with arranging and allocating work, authority and resources among organizational members? (Organizing)
Who described management as a process of deciding what to do and getting others to do it? (stewant 1981)
Which one of the following is the central problem of an organization? (Cordination)
he most useful view of management is that it is a (Process)
Which management dimension consists of a manager's expertise in computers, accounting, purchasing or marketing? (Technical)
When management deals with the practical application of both knowledge and skill to achieve an objective, it is called: (Art)
Which of the following refers to management (All of the Option)
Which branch of management is concerned with the conceptual and human side of management? (Organisation Behaviour)
Bfn203
refers to the process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking which can succeed and is invariably capable of attracting investors. (Venture creation)
The essence of investment hinges on ______ returns (expected)
investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the capital market (Value)
_is associated with the cliché that you should “not put all your eggs in one basket.”(Diversification)
A popular valuation metric is________with application for example to valuing unlisted companies and mergers and acquisition (EBITDA)
A _______ refers to a financial product which has its value dependent on the outcome of the original financial product as investment by the managers of the funds (Derivative)
The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _ (Earning)
Safety of investment can always be guaranteed (False)
There are mainly ______types of risk that are associated with investment in the capital market (Two)
Which of the following is not a type of commodty for investment (None of the Above)

BFN203

According Gardon (2014), there is a remarked difference between capital gains investing and the game of speculation

The_________ is a document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation (National tax Policy

investing is the art of buying and selling an asset for a profit (Capital Gain Investing)

__ is a technique that reduces risk by allocating investments among various financial instruments, industries and other categories (Diversification)

some or all of a loan when the borrower is ins (Credit Insurance)

The steps involved in personal financial planning process Include all of the following except________ (Goal Division)

are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date (Warrants)

Is a type of tax (PAYE)

Owning a current and savings account have the same requirements (False)




Bfn203
refers to the process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking which can succeed and is invariably capable of attracting investors. (Venture creation)
The essence of investment hinges on ______ returns (expected)
investment involves buying undervalued securities while selling overvalued ones out of the investment portfolio in the capital market (Value)
_is associated with the cliché that you should “not put all your eggs in one basket.”(Diversification)
A popular valuation metric is________with application for example to valuing unlisted companies and mergers and acquisition (EBITDA)
A _______ refers to a financial product which has its value dependent on the outcome of the original financial product as investment by the managers of the funds (Derivative)
The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _ (Earning)
Safety of investment can always be guaranteed (False)
There are mainly ______types of risk that are associated with investment in the capital market (Two)
Which of the following is not a type of commodty for investment (None of the Above)



======
BFN203
======

72. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of

	      Market

	--->> Blue chip

	      Investment

	      Bond

73. The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

	      Returns

	--->> Earnings

	      Dividends

	      Cashflows

74. One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security

	--->> Real Properties

	      Stock

	      Bond

	      Government loan

75. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________

	--->> Market Liquidity

	      Bond Prices

	      Cashflow

	      Stock Liquidity

76. The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________

	      Stock Price

	      Net Income

	--->> Original Price

	      Dividend

77. The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

	--->> Liquidity

	      Conversion rate

	      Investment value

	      Illiquidity

78. What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities.

	      Dividends

	--->> Bonds

	      Stocks

	      Assets

79. The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

	      Derivative

	      Stock Value

	      Ownership

	--->> Investment

80. Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________

	      Bond Investment

	      Current investment

	      Market investment

	--->> Cash Investment

81. Which of the following is not a financial asset?

	      Bonds

	      Bullion

	--->> Stock

	      Real Properties

======
BFN203
======

82. The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

	      Returns

	--->> Earnings

	      Dividends

	      Cashflows

83. The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________

	      Stock Price

	      Net Income

	--->> Original Price

	      Dividend

84. Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________

	      Bond Investment

	      Current investment

	      Market investment

	--->> Cash Investment

85. One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security

	--->> Real Properties

	      Stock

	      Bond

	      Government loan

86. The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

	--->> Liquidity

	      Conversion rate

	      Investment value

	      Illiquidity

87. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of

	      Market

	--->> Blue chip

	      Investment

	      Bond

88. What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities.

	      Dividends

	--->> Bonds

	      Stocks

	      Assets

89. Which of the following is not a financial asset?

	      Bonds

	      Bullion

	--->> Stock

	      Real Properties

90. The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

	      Derivative

	      Stock Value

	      Ownership

	--->> Investment

91. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________

	--->> Market Liquidity

	      Bond Prices

	      Cashflow

	      Stock Liquidity

======
BFN203
======

92. The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

	      Returns

	--->> Earnings

	      Dividends

	      Cashflows

93. Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________

	      Bond Investment

	      Current investment

	      Market investment

	--->> Cash Investment

94. One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security

	--->> Real Properties

	      Stock

	      Bond

	      Government loan

95. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________

	--->> Market Liquidity

	      Bond Prices

	      Cashflow

	      Stock Liquidity

96. The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

	      Derivative

	      Stock Value

	      Ownership

	--->> Investment

97. The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________

	      Stock Price

	      Net Income

	--->> Original Price

	      Dividend

98. The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

	--->> Liquidity

	      Conversion rate

	      Investment value

	      Illiquidity

99. Which of the following is not a financial asset?

	      Bonds

	      Bullion

	--->> Stock

	      Real Properties

100. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of

	      Market

	--->> Blue chip

	      Investment

	      Bond

101. What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities.

	      Dividends

	--->> Bonds

	      Stocks

	      Assets

======
BFN203
======

102. What are shares purchased as part ownership in companies. Where certificates are normally issued as proof of ownership of such capital market securities.

	      Dividends

	--->> Bonds

	      Stocks

	      Assets

103. Which of the following is not a financial asset?

	      Bonds

	      Bullion

	--->> Stock

	      Real Properties

104. The fundamental purpose of investment is to generate _____________

	      Returns

	--->> Earnings

	      Dividends

	      Cashflows

105. One of the following is not an example of a gilt-edge security

	--->> Real Properties

	      Stock

	      Bond

	      Government loan

106. The deployment of financial resources towards enhancing a person‟s income or increasing the level of earnings from investible products in the future is called___________

	      Derivative

	      Stock Value

	      Ownership

	--->> Investment

107. Financial products of high networth companies are regarded as _____________securities of

	      Market

	--->> Blue chip

	      Investment

	      Bond

108. The ease with which an investment can be converted into cash is called ___________

	--->> Liquidity

	      Conversion rate

	      Investment value

	      Illiquidity

109. Beattie (2017)identifies three basic groups of investment such as ownership investment, lending investment, and ________

	      Bond Investment

	      Current investment

	      Market investment

	--->> Cash Investment

110. The formula for Earnings is; Prevailing price of stock less_________

	      Stock Price

	      Net Income

	--->> Original Price

	      Dividend

111. An investment in good financial investment is fraught with reasonable level of ___________

	--->> Market Liquidity

	      Bond Prices

	      Cashflow

	      Stock Liquidity


Course Code
bfn203


Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price



Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price



Question
A major advantage of Hedging is:

Answer
Lower the risk of Investment



Question
In financial terms Hedging means:

Answer
Investment made in order to reduce the risk of adverse price movement in financial assets.



Question
One advantage of Diversification is:

Answer
Risk Management



Question
A basic diversified portfolio might include:

Answer
Several investment categories such as stocks, bond and cash.



Question
Investment in Finance means:

Answer
Money or Fund committed into investible securities, financial instruments and all forms of business ventures.



Question
The strategic role of the entrepreneur in creating a new venture revolves around the following:

Answer
All of the above



Question
According to Cambridge Dictionary (2017), Venture Creation is:

Answer
The process of converting a new idea or technology into a business undertaking.



Question
The following are examples of investment except one

Answer
Ownership Investment and Trade Mark



Question
The following characteristic has been identified with investment.

Answer
All of the above



Question
Earn from Investment could be expressed as follows:

Answer
Prevailing price of stock less original price


Try Another Search
BFN209 List of Questions

Latex formatted questions may not properly render

Q1 What is Inventory Management?
Inventory management is a tool to avoid excessive and inadequate levels of inventories and maintain su ficient inventory for the smooth operations of the enterprise in terms of production and sales output
Q2 Identify the one that's not an elementary fact about Receivables
It implies the purchaser must pay at the point os sale of good/serbvice

Q3 What's another name for Trade Debtors?
Account Receivable

Q4 Which alternative is not a motive for holding cash?
Reconciliation motive

Q5 What is not a the source of Cash?
Personal contributions

Q6 Which one is not a step in Cash Management?
Disbursement of cash balances

Q7 What is Cash Management?
Managing cash flow in and out of the orgnaisation

Q8 Which one is not a component of Working Capital Managemenet?
Capital Management

Q9 Who ordinarily is not a user of Financial Statement?
Teachers in public schools

Q10 Which alternative is not a benefit of cash flowanalysis?
To assess the competence of Management

Q11 Which is an element of income statement?
Al alternatives
Q12 Which is not a component of short-term assets?
Creditors Investments

Q13 What is Working Capital Management?
Management of current or short-term assets and short-term liabilities

Q14 In a producing enterprise which one is not an inventory?
Current liabilities

Q15 What are Inventories?
The balance of goods on hand

Q16 What's another name for Accounts Receivables?
Trade debtors

Q17 Why is Pricing important?
It is the main source of revenue for the organisation

Q18 Why is Cost Control important?
It has a tendency to a fect a lother factors.

Q19 Profit planning is related to considering these factors,except
location costs

Q20 Budget is profit plan based

Q21 What itemare you not expected to see on an Income Statement?
Sta f overdraft
Q22 What item is not supposed to be found on a standard Balance Sheet?
Food and Beverages

Q23 The pro forma (typical) financial statement of an enterprise is shown below. It is made up of the following,except:
Sta f loans book.

Q24 Financial statement analysis is used
Sta f appraisal purpose.

Q25 What is a Financial Statement?
It is a statement that records financial activities of a particular business organisation.
Q26 What is the main function of the Securities and Exchange Commission?
It is the apex regulatory organisation for the Nigerian capital market.

Q27 What is the Nigerian CapitalMarket called?
Nigerian Stock Exchange

Q28 What is the Capital market?
It is the meeting point for investors (lenders) and firms (borrowers).

Q29 Which one is excluded? Profit planning is an aid to anticipating the relationships among
Location

Q30 What is meant by the cost structure of the business organization?
The mix of fixed and variable costs.
Q31 Which is least true? Finance decisions influence the
position

Q32 Which one alternative is not true of the Financial Manager?
S/he is the Chief Executive O ficer of the organization.


Q33 Which one alternative may not pass as goal of of the firm?
Perpetuationino fice of the Finance Manager

Q34 In the market economy of a country, what determines prices of goods and service?
Forces of demand and supply

Q35 Which fubction do you consider inappropriate for the Treasurer?
Supervision of Production sta f

Q36 What designation do you consider least appropriate for the head of the finance function?
Managing Director, Finance.

Q37 The smaller business
consolidates many duties in fewer sections and units.

Q38 The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon
the size and magnitude of the business organisation.

Q39 Whichessentially is not the duty of the Finance Manager?
Procurement of raw materials for manufacturing

Q40 Which alternative is not an important routine finance functions?
None of the alternatives

Q41 What is the direction of relationship between Risk and Return in Investment?
Opposite direction

Q42 Which one is not a way of avoiding or reducing risk?
Choosing a completely di ferent course of action or alternative

Q43 Define Political Risk
These are risks of losses as the result of unforeseen intervention by governments.


Q44 Economic risks include the follwing except
damage to physical goods

Q45 What does Technical Risk measure?
The chance that the competence of workers may be doubtful and not reach required standard
Q46 Which is not a common risk in Finance?
Future risk

Q47 Liquidity of an enterprise is affected by the level of management of current asset

Q48 What is dividend-payout ratio?
The proportion of profits distributed as dividend

Q49 The proportion of distribution of profit and the balance retained is subject to the following except
the prevailing political situation

Q50 The capital structure is said to be optimum
when the market value of shares is maximized

Q51 What is meant by Capital Structure? The mix of equity and debt financing

Q52 The  central issue  with Financing Function is  the determination of appropriate proportion of internal (equity) and external (debt)

Q53 Investment proposals should be analysed and evaluated in terms of both
Expected return and risk

Q54 One important aspect of investment decisions is

Prospective profitability of new investment
Q55 Investment decisions involve capital expenditures which are referred to as
Capital budgeting decision

Q56 The Finance functions include the following except
Liability decision

Q57 What is Right Issue?
These are share alotted to existing shareholders as alternative to cash dividends.

Q58 What does the abbreviation SEO represent?
Seasoned Equity O fering

Q59 What does the abbreviation IPO represent?
Initial Public O fering

Q60 Why is preferred share given preference over ordinary share? It has fixed rate of dividend and is ranked higher in payment of dividend
Q61 Which one is not a financial asset?
Services.

Q62 What type of market is Real Market?
For trading on physical or tangible and intangible goods.

Q63 What are the commodities traded at the financial market?
Financial assets

Q64 Which is not a type of shareholder?
Secondary share

Q65 What two markets are you farmiliar with in Finance?

Financial and real assets

Q66 What returns does a shareholder expect fromhis/her investment?
Dividend and capital gains
Q67 Why do people buy shares?
For investment purposes - to make returns or money.

Q68 What's the difference between shareholders and stockholders?
In practice, there's no di ference between the two

Q69 Buyers of shares are called shareholders/stockholders and they are the legal-owners of the business whose shares they hold.
True

Q70 What do shares represent?
Ownership rights of their holders.

Q71 What can a firm/business acquire when it sells shares?
Equity funds

Q72 What's the alternative name for External Finance?
Debt

Q73 What's the alternative name for Internal Finance?
Equity

Q74 There are two types of financing an enterprise can apply, namely
Internal and external

Q75 For the organisation to survive
its income must be greater than the expenses

Q76 What does the Business (Working) Cycle depict?
Demonstrates the way funds flow through business

Q77 All three elements except one must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise.
Education

Q78 What do you understand by this statement: "Money is the common denominator for the full range of activities performed in the business"?
Al aspects of business activities require money

Q79 What originally did the field of finance not cover?
Financial Econometrics

Q80 What is Finance?
It is money a fairs or money matters



BFN209 List of Questions

Latex formatted questions may not properly render

Q1 Business need to hold cash to achieve the following motives except
Social

Q2 The aimof cash management is to maintain adequate control over cash position to be able to keep the enterprise sufficiently liquid and to use excess cash in some profitable way.
True

Q3 Which of the following is a components of short-term liability
creditors

Q4 Which of the following is not a components of short-term asset
creditors

Q5 Working capital management refers to
to the management of current assets and liabilities

Q6 Basic elements of cash flow include the following except
Marketing Activities

Q7 An enterprise???s long- termprojected plan should not reflect its long-termpricing policy.
False

Q8 Pricing policy provides the means in which the enterprise can control to a degree, its relationship with its external environment and at the same time, it is controlling its internal operations accordingly.
True

Q9 Budget is the ?????????... plan base
Profit

Q10 Profit planning is related to considering four main factors, namely
fixed costs, variable costs, se ling price and sales volume.

Q11 Every corporate business Firmstates categorically the following except
turnover

Q12 Profit maximization objective is always clear.
False

Q13 Pandey (2005) summarised profit maximization limitations as follows except
It is certain

Q14 ????????????. is a vital organ of a market economy, showing the goods and services required in the community.
Price mechanism

Q15 In the market economy of a country, prices of goods and services are determined
by the forces of demand and supply.
Q16 The Treasurer is an active participant in long -range financial planning.
True

Q17 The accounting and control function for the finance manager includs the following except
Capital market conditions

Q18 Planning funds for operations and capital budgeting is a joint decision-making process conducted by personnel in the following department except
Account

Q19 The framework and responsibility for pricing/costing policy are jointly determined by the
marketing/sales department and financial planning staf .

Q20 Finance manager's duties include the following except
Sourcing production materials

Q21 Retained earnings is also known as

Undistributed profits

Q22 The following are products of financial market except
Patent

Q23 Shareholders can be of two types and they are ?????????
Ordinary and Preference.

Q24 The return to shareholders consists of ????????????.
dividend and capital gain

Q25 Which one of the following is not an example of external finance
Equity

Q26 Money is not the common denominator for the full range of activities performed in the business.
False

Q27 Money is the medium of exchange in business; the other two elements are
production and marketing.

Q28 Finance evolved from----------
Economics

Q29 Which one of the following is not an example of money or near-money according to Anao (1993).
Fund

Q30 Oyekanmi (2003) defined finance

???as money af airs or money matters???.

FBQ1: Finance plays a very important role in any
----------- activities Answer: Business

FBQ2: A business is a concern, an enterprise, or organization set up by an individual or group of individuals for the purpose of making	from
operations of the concern. Answer: Profit

FBQ3: Finance may be defined as the provision of money at the time it is-----------
Answer: Required

FBQ4: The --------- are expected to be arranged in such a way that fund (money) is always available to make necessary payments as they arise.
Answer: Inflows

FBQ5: Oyekanmi (2003) defined finance “as money affairs or money	â€
Answer: Matters

FBQ6: According to Hornby (2001), finance is the money need or needed to--------- an activity, project, programme etc. and or the management ofmoney.
Answer: Support

FBQ7: -------- evolved from economics as its branch in the early part of the 20th century Answer: Finance

FBQ8: Money is the common ---------- for the full range of activities performed in the business.
Answer: Denominator

FBQ9: ----------- is the medium of exchange in business
Answer: Money

FBQ10: A ------- generates whatever capital it needs and utilizes it in activities which generate returns on invested capital
Answer: Firm

FBQ11: Internal finance is also known to as -------
fund/finance Answer: Equity

FBQ12: External finance is also known to as -------
fund/finance Answer: Borrowed

FBQ13: The equity fund/finance is solely owned
by ------------------
Answer: Shareholders

FBQ14: Buyers of shares are called
------------------------
Answer: Shareholders

FBQ15: Shareholders invest their money in the shares of a company in theexpectation of a return on their invested ----------- .
Answer: Capital

FBQ16: The return for shareholders consists of
----------- and capital gain. Answer: Dividend

FBQ17: In a financial system, the Household are
also referred to as ____
Answer: Consumers.

FBQ18: ----------- represent ownership rights of their holders
Answer: Shares

FBQ19: Shareholders can be of two types that is, preference and ------------
Answer: Ordinary

FBQ20: There are two kinds of markets, namely real assets and ---------
Answer: Financial

FBQ21: ----------- markets are for physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinerywheat, office, gold, buildings etc.
Answer: Real

FBQ22: Intangible ------------ include copyrights, patent, technical know-how.
Answer: Assets

FBQ23: Financial market trades on ------------
assets
Answer: Financial

FBQ24: ---------- shareholders receive dividend at a fixed rate and they enjoy apriority over ordinary shareholders.
Answer: Preference

FBQ25: A ----------- can also obtain equity funds by retaining earnings available forshareholders. Answer: company

FBQ26: ----------- shareholders they enjoy a priority over ordinary shareholders.
Answer: Preference

FBQ27: A ------------ is a certificate stating the amount of money lent by a holder to the company. Answer: Bond

FBQ28: A business organization performs ----------
functions simultaneously andcontinuously in the normal course of its activities.
Answer: Finance

FBQ29: ---------- decisions involve capital expenditures which are referred to ascapital budgeting decision.
Answer: Investment

FBQ30: Capital structure is the mix of equity and
------------
Answer: Debt

FBQ31: The capital structure is said to be

optimum when the market value of shares is
--------------.
Answer: Maximized

FBQ32: The ----------- of profits distributed as dividend is called the dividend-payout ratio.
Answer: Proportion

FBQ33: The ---------- ratio is the retained portion of profits.
Answer: Retention

FBQ34: The --------- policy is determined by its impact on the shareholder’s value.
Answer: Dividend

FBQ35: Liquidity and ------------ affect investment in current assets in business organizations.
Answer: Profitability

FBQ36: ------------------- of an enterprise is affected by the level of management of current asset.
Answer: Liquidity

FBQ37: Risk of illiquidity (lack of liquidity), in extreme situations, can lead to a business
--------------
Answer: Insolvency

FBQ38: -------------- assets if properly/efficiently managed would safeguard the business organization against risk of illiquidity.
Answer: Current

FBQ39: ------------ risks are risks that some accident may destroy or spoil some physical goods created by the work financed.
Answer: Physical

FBQ40: ------------ risks are those risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan,hence it may fall short of achieving the intention
Answer: Technical

FBQ41: The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by aparticular enterprise is provided by an	--.
Answer: Entrepreneur

FBQ42: Partnership and Limited Liability Company are two main ----------- forms under which people join together on equal terms to provide the finance needed for an enterprise, sharing fully in both risks and profits.
Answer: Institutional

FBQ43: ------------------------ and Limited Liability Company are two main institutional forms under which people join together on equal terms to provide the finance needed for an enterprise, sharing fully in both risks and profits.
Answer: Partnership

FBQ44: The ------------------ oversees or manages

the enterprise’s liquid assets, liabilities, payroll and cashier activities, credits and collections, forecasting, capital budgeting and investment and financing.
Answer: Treasurer

FBQ45: The Treasurer is an active participant in long-range financial -------------
Answer: Planning

FBQ46: In ---------- economy of a country, prices of goods and services aredetermined by the forces of demand and supply.
Answer: market

FBQ47: ----------- mechanism (system) is a vital organ of a market economy, showing the goods and services required in the community.
Answer: Price

FBQ48: The ---------- price is where demand and supply match.
Answer: Equilibrium

FBQ49: ------- is the expected variability of the income flow.
Answer: Risk

FBQ50: Business firms are frequently profit oriented with maximization of profitas the proper
-------------
Answer: Objective

MCQ1: ------------------- defined finance “as money affairs or money mattersâ€.
Answer: Oyekanmi (2003)

MCQ2: --------------- is an
example of external finance Answer: Loan

MCQ3: The return to shareholders consists of …………. and capital gain
Answer: dividend

MCQ4: Money is the common denominator for the full range of activities performed in the business.
Answer: true

MCQ5: According to Anao (1993), which one of the following is an example of money or
near-money?
Answer: Certificate of deposits

MCQ6: Which of the following is not a product of financial market?
Answer: Patent

MCQ7: Finance evolved from accounting Answer: false

MCQ8: Undistributed profits is also known as
----------------
Answer: Retained earnings

MCQ9: The capital structure of a firm could be

defined as -------------
Answer: The mix of equity and debt

MCQ10: ------------------ are risks of losses because of unforeseen intervention by governments.
Answer: Political risks

MCQ11: Economic risks are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan
Answer: false

MCQ12: Shareholders can be of two types, namely preference and --------------------
Answer: Ordinary

MCQ13: Financial decisions is concerned with the acquisition and not disposal of assets through commitment or recommitment of funds on a continuous basis.
Answer: False

MCQ14: Finance manager's duties include Answer: Selecting and evaluating projects

MCQ15: Product pricing/costing policy are jointly determined by the --------------
Answer: marketing/sales department and financial planning staff.

MCQ16: The Treasurer is an active participant in

long-range financial planning. Answer: True

MCQ17: The accounting and control function for the finance manager include
Answer: Tax matters

MCQ18: Price mechanism is a vital organ of a
---------------, showing the goods and services required in the community.
Answer: market economy

MCQ19: Which one is not a limitation of profit maximization according to Pandey (2005)?
Answer: It is certain

MCQ20: Profit maximization objective is not always clear to stakeholders of the firm.
Answer: True

MCQ21: The account manager is responsible for performing finance functions in a firm
Answer: false

MCQ22: Which of the following was not always a major events in the life the firm for raising funds Answer: Annual general meeting

MCQ23: Which one of the following is the regulator of the capital market in Nigeria Answer: The Nigerian Securities and ExchangeCommission

MCQ24: -------------------- is the meeting point for investors and firms
Answer: Capital market

MCQ25: ----------- is an example of fixed asset Answer: furniture and fittings

MCQ26: --------------------- is a book in which receipts and payment of money are recorded Answer: Cash book

MCQ27: Which one is not an example of current liability?
Answer: Trade debtors

MCQ28: Profit after tax is	item
Answer: An income statement

MCQ29: The balance sheet is more important than other financial statements to report the activities and performance of the firm Answer: false

MCQ30: Profit planning is not related to
considering -----------------
Answer: Depreciation

MCQ32: Cash flow element include ----------------
Answer: Investing Activities

MCQ33: --------------- refers to the management of current assets and liabilities
Answer: Working capital management

MCQ34: The aim of cash management is not to maintain adequate control over cash position to be able to keep the enterprise sufficiently liquid and to use excess cash in some profitable way. Answer: False

MCQ35: Components of short-term asset are the following except
Answer: Creditors

MCQ36: Business need to hold cash to achieve the	motive
Answer: speculative

MCQ37: A --------------- have the legal right to enter into a contract, sue and be sued in its name. Answer: limited liability company

MCQ38: Operators of companies are by law to register with ---------------
Answer: Corporate Affairs Commission

MCQ39: The promoters of a limited liability company must apply for registration with …….. Answer: Memorandum and Articles of Association

MCQ40: Long-term sources of funds represent Answer: Debenture

MCQ41: Debenture stocks are normally issued under a firm’s seal
Answer: True

MCQ42: --------------------- are the preference shares that allow for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend
Answer: Cumulative preference shares

MCQ43: Which one is not an example of lease financing?
Answer: Debenture lease

MCQ44: ---------------- convey upon the holders the right to convert these shares into equity shares in accordance with the terms of issues.
Answer: Convertible preference shares

MCQ45: Budgeting helps to identify the -----------
desired Answer: Output

MCQ46: Planning helps to identify the ----------
required. Answer: Inputs

MCQ47: A financial plan is a budget that interprets some elements of a plan in financial terms.
Answer: False

MCQ48: ------------------------ is the financing decisions and practices of individual households, businesses and non-business
Answer: micro finance

MCQ49: Debenture stocks is also known as
--------------
Answer: Corporate bonds

MCQ50: ----------- is a creditor to the firm. Answer: A debenture stock holder

MCQ31: An enterprise’s long-term projected plan should reflect its long-term pricing policy.
Answer: True


Bfn209
Balance sheet shows the present _______ of a business. (Statement)
Profit______ function is one of the acquired roles of the Finance Manager. (planning)
Financial statement is also used for future plans of the _______.(Enterprise)
Risk is the expected _______ of the income flow(variability)
Pandey ______ stated that the basis of the theory of financial management.(2005)
Financial Manager is the person responsible for performing ______ functions.(Finance)
Fixed costs remain constant while _____ costs change in direct proportion to changes in volume of goods. (Variable)
________ is otherwise known as profit and loss account. (Income statement)
________ mechanism system is a vital organ of a market economy. (Price)
Financing Activities consist of cash flows relating to ____ and owners' equity. (Liability)
BUS205
___________ is a means by which power is acquired, exercised and sustained. (Communication)
Non __________ income is used to buy items to meet basic needs. (Discretionary)
_________motivation also causes you to be loyal to certain shops and companies. (Patronage)
__________ is a book in which particulars of all monies received or paid are recorded. (Cash Account)
___________ is the value that products and sellers place on goods or services. (Price)
Social __________ is owed by individuals and not by organizations. (Obligation)
_______ researchers also gather information from a wider group of people. (Market)
The _______ is the total amount supplied by owner of the business or owners equity or net worth. (Capital)
__________ must be attractive. (Packaging)
________include the resources possessed by the firm. (Assets)
BUS207
Verbal communication is one way for people to communicate ______________. (Face to face)

The actual origin of ___________ is subject to considerable speculation(Language)
If a language is about communicating with signals, voice, sounds, gestures, or written symbols, can animal communications be considered as a ___________? (Language)
The basis of _________________ is the interaction between people. (Communication)
Animals do not have a __________ form of a language, but use a language to communicate with each another. (Written)
Some words may be imitative of natural __________, but others may come from expressions of emotion, such as laughter or crying. (Sounds)
Some of the key components of verbal communication are sound, writing, speaking, and ______________. (Language)
A dialogue is a reciprocal conversation between _______ or more entities, (TWO)
As meaning is assigned to words, language develops, which leads to the ___________ of speaking. (Development)
At birth, most people have vocal cords, which produce __________. (Sounds)
BUS106
It could be argued that the _______ school is identical to the management process school. (Empirical)
Art is the imposition of __________. (Pattern)
___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.(Pinciple)
Gilbreth is known for his work on time and _________studies. (Motion)
Decision theory schools believe in _________decision making. (Rational)
The first principles of management were advocated. (Henry fayol)
There are special areas of management that are not subjected to rigous of(Science)

spend his life working on the difference engine (Babbage)

Management can be define as getting thing done through (Organising)

Management can be define as a team or group of individuals in _________(Organisation)

ECO122

Exports are determined by factors outside the control of the ___ economy (Home)

The two components of import demand is fixed, and at the same time it varies with (Income)

The ____ are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers (Spending Decision)

In technical terms, _____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade (Gain from trade)

Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ______ with each other (Trading)
Import demand changes as______ changes (Income)
Because export is exogenous while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are_____ related to national income/national output (Negatively)
_____ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers (Import)
When income rises, the aspect of _____ rises as well and when income falls, it falls (Import demand)
Exports depend on spending decisions made by foreign ____ or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services (Consumer)

ECO231

The demand for goods and services is __ (Direct Demand)

The prices paid to the factors of production are called (All of the above)

Reason for the study of factor pricing are (All of the above)

The demand of factor of product can also be Joint Demand because for producer to produce orange he/she has to demand for all the _(factors of production)

The factors needed in the production process are also known as (Production Service)

The factor pricing is concerned with the determination of prices of services of factors of ______ (Production)

To produce goods and services, ____ need the services of factors of production, like land, labour, capital, and entrepreneur (FIRMs)

The theory of distribution is an attempt to explain how income is distributed among the factors of __ (Production)

The employer of factors of production only uses the factors in the production of goods and services to be finally sold in the ____(Product Market)

When workers are engaged or capital are borrowed, it does not offer any direct satisfaction to the ____ (Producer)

The production concept holds that consumers will value products that are highly (Affordable)

Another important role is the discovery of entrepreneurial talent (Agree)

Marketing's first role is to (Stimulate Aggregate potential demand)

Consumerism is an organized movement of citizens and government to fight wars on poor products(Disagree)

Commodity approach in marketing focuses on (Classes of products)

The major goal of an organization to an extent is (Profit)

The product concept holds that consumers value products that offer (High Quality)

Marketing concept holds that organization must first create to satisfy (Needs and want)
One of the significance of marketing is to provide (impulse purchase)

The purpose of marketing concept is to help organizations (Achieve its goal

BFN203

According Gardon (2014), there is a remarked difference between capital gains investing and the game of speculation

The_________ is a document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation (National tax Policy

investing is the art of buying and selling an asset for a profit (Capital Gain Investing)

__ is a technique that reduces risk by allocating investments among various financial instruments, industries and other categories (Diversification)

some or all of a loan when the borrower is ins (Credit Insurance)

The steps involved in personal financial planning process Include all of the following except________ (Goal Division)

are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date (Warrants)

Is a type of tax (PAYE)

Owning a current and savings account have the same requirements (False)

Ent203

The achievement needs theory was developed by (McCelland)

Which of the following emphasized the risk aspect of entrepreneurship (Cantillon)

Which of the following a pattern of venture capital development (Mid Stage)

Entrepreneurial process include the following stages except? (Profit Planning)

(New Monnies)

VC stands for (Venture Capital)

Which of the following will not support in-house entrepreneurial development in organizations (Bickering)

CIT201
The software that uses the power and speed of a computer machine to perform some mathematical calculations or simulate some real life situations is called a ___ software. (Modeling)

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________






======
BUS106
======

112. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

113. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

114. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

115. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

116. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

117. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

118. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

119. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

120. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

121. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

======
BUS106
======

122. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

123. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

124. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

125. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

126. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

127. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

128. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

129. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

130. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

131. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

======
BUS106
======

132. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

133. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

134. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

135. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

136. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

137. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

138. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

139. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

140. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

141. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

======
BUS106
======

142. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

143. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

144. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

145. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

146. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

147. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

148. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

149. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

150. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

151. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

======
BUS106
======

152. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

153. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

154. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

155. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

156. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

157. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

158. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

159. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

160. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

161. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

======
BUS106
======

162. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

163. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

164. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

165. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

166. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

167. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

168. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

169. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

170. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

171. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

======
BUS106
======

172. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

173. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

174. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

175. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

176. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

177. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

178. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

179. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

180. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

181. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

======
BUS106
======

182. ___is a process of breaking an enterprise into smaller groups and levels.

	--->> Departmentation

	      Staffing

	      Centralisation

	      decentralisation

183. The ___could be formal or informal.

	      business

	--->> Orrganisation

	      Enterprise

	      business letter

184. The ____is a  vehicle for the implementation of a plan.

	--->> system

	      management

	      communication

	      information

185. The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

	      system

	      Department

	--->> plan

	      none on the list

186. ____ is the basic to all managerial functions

	--->> Planning

	      Organising

	      Unity of command

	      Decision making

187. An individual, who gets the thing done is a ____.

	      leader

	--->> manager

	      director

	      organiser

188. ___ normally has a network of goals, objectives and targets.

	      Business

	      Management

	      Enterprise

	--->> Organisation

189. ____deals with a qualitaive and quantitative aspect of manpower in terms of placement.

	      Planning

	--->> Organising

	      unity of command

	      none on the list

190. The functions of a___ can be a line or a staff.

	      system

	--->> Department

	      plan

	      none on the list

191. Some business problems arise due to failing on the ___ grounds.

	      management

	      managing

	--->> ethical

	      decision

Bus106 tma2
10/10
192. Control mud be tailored to position...
And. Monitor
193. Company.......... Are also part of the data
Ans. Records
194. In process of planning in an organizations.......
Is being made
Ans. Decision
195. ......... Distribution, expenditure pattern..
Ans. Income
196. Interview is used interchangeable with
Ans. Selection
197. The technique commonly employed by a....
Ans. Support subordinate
198. In process of planning in an organizations...... Is being made
Ans. Decision
199. The manager must comply with the......
Ans. Legal
200. Organization can broadly be classified as
Ans. Formal/informal organization
201. The managerial functions of leading...
Ans. Influencing


11. ) The word  concerns the laying down of policies
Ans => Administration
12. ) Is the process of transferring information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Ans => communication
13. ) The manager must comply with the  requirements for establishing and operating his business
Ans => Legal
14. ) The essence of  lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Ans => control
15. ) Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of
Ans => Board or Director
16. ) Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right person will  activities in their own field
Ans => monitor
17. )  distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumer all effect demans
Ans => income
18. ) Flat shaped structure falls under
Ans => wide span of control
19. )  is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen
Ans => Forecasting
20. ) The very survival of an   dictate that a certain minimum profit has to be made
Ans => organization




BUS106 TMA3
82. .... of management implies that all managers in the hierarchy perform identical function
5. Universality
2) A scholarly grouping of concepts and principles creates a......
6. Theory
3)the theory of management is the synthesis of the concepts and principles in.....
7. management
4)the principles of management help in subordinate...
8. Development
5)Management  system is..... in all formal organization
9. identical
6)Every system is made up of.....
10. Subsystem
7)Important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote in management....
11. Research
8)Management is not an exact..... it deals with people whose behaviours unpredictable and complex
12. Science
9)When the goals of the individual and the goals of the organization are the same we have....
13. goal congruency
10)...... are abstractions formed from generalization
14. Concept





B. .... of management implies that all managers in the hierarchy perform identical function
* Universality
2) A scholarly grouping of concepts and principles creates a......
* Theory
3)the theory of management is the synthesis of the concepts and principles in.....
* management
4)the principles of management help in subordinate...
* Development
5)Management  system is..... in all formal organization
* identical
6)Every system is made up of.....
* Subsystem
7)Important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote in management....
* Research
8)Management is not an exact..... it deals with people whose behaviours unpredictable and complex
* Science
9)When the goals of the individual and the goals of the organization are the same we have....
* goal congruency
10)...... are abstractions formed from generalization
* Concept

1. 	BUS106	Management is as old as _______ organization	,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,human	TMA1
2. 	BUS106	In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______	,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,Africa	TMA1				
3. 	BUS106	The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system	,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,administrative	TMA1				
4. 	BUS106	Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal	lower	TMA1				
5. 	BUS106	What is said of Ghana can be said of ________	Mali	TMA1				
6. 	BUS106	Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except	shoemaking	TMA1				
7. 	BUS106	The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity	pre - occupation	TMA1				
8. 	BUS106	Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________	management	TMA1				
9. 	BUS106	___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management	Fedrick W. Taylor	TMA1				
10. 	BUS106	Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee	output	TMA1				




























======
BUS106
======

91. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

92. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

93. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

======
BUS106
======

11. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

12. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

13. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

14. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

15. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

To a student management is an________________ discipline

academic


Formal leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an _________ figure

91.
authority

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes

scientific

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends

principles



The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

plan


One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management

research



It is often difficult to formulate priniciples in management because of the difficulty in conducting controlled ____________


experiment


The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made


organization




A ___________ leader cannot function without the authority


formal
























..............................

Wide span of control
Communication
Board of directors
Income
Monitor
Legal
Control
Forecasting
Administration
Organization
Question
Free - reign leadership is also called ______________

Answer
Laissez-faire



Question
One way communication without feedback leades to ___________ and communication breakdown

Answer
misunderstanding



Question
___________ encourages subordinates participation in the decision making process

Answer
participative



Question
__________ is needed when the demands of a task on hand are ambiguous

Answer
directive



Question
The ___________ approach defines leadership in terms of his ability to handle a given situation and is based on his skills in that given area

Answer
situational



Question
Theory states that an analysis of leadership involves not only the individual traits and behaviour but also a focus on the situation

Answer
contingency theory



Question
_________ leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an authority figure

Answer
formal



Question
Based on the elements of leadership function the leadership may be defined as _________

Answer
L = F



Question
Direction must be clear and unambigious an from __________ chain of command

Answer
single



Question
In ___________organisation all managerial and worker role are clearly defined

Answer
role - oriented



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
Free - reign leadership is also called ______________

Answer
Laissez-faire



Question
One way communication without feedback leades to ___________ and communication breakdown

Answer
misunderstanding



Question
___________ encourages subordinates participation in the decision making process

Answer
participative



Question
__________ is needed when the demands of a task on hand are ambiguous

Answer
directive



Question
The ___________ approach defines leadership in terms of his ability to handle a given situation and is based on his skills in that given area

Answer
situational



Question
Theory states that an analysis of leadership involves not only the individual traits and behaviour but also a focus on the situation

Answer
contingency theory



Question
_________ leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an authority figure

Answer
formal



Question
Based on the elements of leadership function the leadership may be defined as _________

Answer
L = F



Question
Direction must be clear and unambigious an from __________ chain of command

Answer
single



Question
In ___________organisation all managerial and worker role are clearly defined

Answer
role - oriented



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
Free - reign leadership is also called ______________

Answer
Laissez-faire



Question
One way communication without feedback leades to ___________ and communication breakdown

Answer
misunderstanding



Question
___________ encourages subordinates participation in the decision making process

Answer
participative



Question
__________ is needed when the demands of a task on hand are ambiguous

Answer
directive



Question
The ___________ approach defines leadership in terms of his ability to handle a given situation and is based on his skills in that given area

Answer
situational



Question
Theory states that an analysis of leadership involves not only the individual traits and behaviour but also a focus on the situation

Answer
contingency theory



Question
_________ leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an authority figure

Answer
formal



Question
Based on the elements of leadership function the leadership may be defined as _________

Answer
L = F



Question
Direction must be clear and unambigious an from __________ chain of command

Answer
single



Question
In ___________organisation all managerial and worker role are clearly defined

Answer
role - oriented



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human
Get more at (www.puredu.net)
Get more at (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) 9/10

The major problem that confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of ___.

objectives

In the pre-industrial period, ____________ was practiced by various part of the world including Africa

management

Management is also seen as a process demanding the performance of ______________ function

specific

job specification specifies____________ requirements and list qualifications both physical and mental necessary to perform the job properly

personal

______ is referred to as the father of the social system approach to organisation.

V. Pareto

Not all people can manage ______________

effectively

____are the monetary measurements.

cost standards

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.

Motivator

There is a class relationship between the ______________ school and the decision theory school

mathematical

Organisation is second in the ___________ of functions exercised by management

role (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) 10/10

Gilbreth believed that there was one best way that required _______________ motion

last

The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.

democratic leader

_____________ are people who are primarily responsible for the achievmeent of organizational goals

managers

The main pre - occupation was what to do in order to increase _____________ productivity

employee

The __ is dogmatic and expects compliance and leads by ability to without or give rewards and punishment.

autocratic leader

____ requires technical skill and conceptual ability.

Art

Arts requires___________ skills and conceptual ability

technical

To a student management is an academic _____________

discipline

The fourteen principles of management cover all aspects of _______________

management

In the pre-industrial period, ____________ was practiced by various part of the world including Africa

management (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) BUS106
10/10
To a student management is an academic _____________

discipline

__ are rather seen as best fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.

Principles

job specification specifies____________ requirements and list qualifications both physical and mental necessary to perform the job properly

personal

One of the major advantages of the ____________ revolution is that it gave birth to accelerated rate of resources accumulation

industrial

____ requires technical skill and conceptual ability.

Art

The __________ principles of management were advocated by Henri Fayol\'s

First

Arts requires___________ skills and conceptual ability

technical

The entrepreneur was forced by competition to engage in ______________ performance

crude

To get _________________ put in their best efforts the manager has to understand people their emotional, physical and interllectual needs

people

Decision theory school group believes in _____________ decision making

rational (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) BUS106
10/10
___factors involve working conditions and can trigger dissatisfaction,if inadequate.

Hygiene

The entrepreneur was forced by competition to engage in ______________ performance

crude

___ involves giving a job greater scope or variety and depth.

job enrichment

The ____________ of communication must be clearly set and known to everyone

channels

The __ is dogmatic and expects compliance and leads by ability to without or give rewards and punishment.

autocratic leader

The well - known __________ of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful administrative system

Kingdom

______ is referred to as the father of the social system approach to organisation.

V. Pareto

____ can be defined as getting things done through others.

Management

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __

committees

Not all people can manage ______________

effectively (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) BUS106
6/10
Management is defined as an art by____________

C.C. NWACHUKWU (1992)

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes

scientific

A scholarly grouping of concepts and principles creates a/an______________________

theory

Conflict of interest arises when an executive deals with a company in which_____________

it has vested interest

One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management

research

The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

plan

Marketing objectives increase sales by_____________________

25%

The systems approach to management encourages management to perceive the internal and external environmental factors as an____________whole.

integrated

Areas of management such as planning, decision making and control in the form of mathematical symbols and models is a field called_____________

operational research

Who among these authors created the chat of objectives?

C.C. NWACHUKWU (1992) (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) 9/10

What Taylor and __________ postulated were based on their experience

Fayol

According to Peter Drucker (1954) a ____________ does not handle people

manager

Supervision and _________ are impossible with communication

leader

According to ____________ chase listening is the other half of talking

Stuart

Fedrick W. Taylor is often referred to as the father of __________ management

scientific

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends

principles

Gilbreth believed that there was one best way that required _______________ motion

last

Every organisation is _____

purposive

One of the major advantages of the ____________ revolution is that it gave birth to accelerated rate of resources accumulation

industrial

____ can be defined as getting things done through others.

Management (www.puredu.net)
Bus106 tma2 10/10

Control must be tailored to position ____
Monitor

Company ____are also part of the data
Records

In process of planning in an organizations ____ is being made
Decision

____ Distribution, expenditure pattern.
Income

Interview is used interchangeable with
Selection

The technique commonly employed by a ____
Support subordinate

In process of planning in an organizations ____ Is being made
Decision

The manager must comply with the ____
Legal

Organization can broadly be classified as
Formal/informal organization

The managerial functions of leading ____
Influencing
BUS106 TMA3 10/10

92. The _______ of any organization include: Finance, Material, Human, Information and Time resources
	Resources

93. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies
	Administration

94. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made
	Organization

95. The following are examples of different types of trainning except;
	Chairman Training

96. The _______ of any organization include: Finance, Material, Human, Information and Time resources
	Resources

97. ______________ is another criteria or rule to be observed in the process of drawing up a chart
	Line of authority

98. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future
	Forecasting

99. Company _______ are also part of the data which have to be processed
	Records

100. The following is acriteria or rule for drawing a chart in an organization
	All of the above

101. The managerial function of leading is simply the process of ________ people so that they will contribute to the goals of the organization
	Influencing

______ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Communication

102. Flat shaped structure falls under;
Wide span of control

103. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields
monitor

104. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made
organization

105. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies
administration

106. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Control

107. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business   legal

108. ________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future
forecasting

109. ________distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands
Income

110. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;Board of directors
Board of directors
The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.

111.
democratic leader

Scientific management was intended to bring about a ___________ mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and management

complete

In the pre-industrial period, ____________ was practiced by various part of the world including Africa

management


Henri advocated the __________ principles of management

first

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.

Motivation

The well - known __________ of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful administrative system

Kingdom

_____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future


forecasting

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __

committees

___ techiques and systems are basically the same regardless of what is being controlled

Control
======
BUS106
======

112. ____ requires technical skill and conceptual ability.

	      History

	      Science

	      Philosophy

	--->> Art

113. Every system is made up of _____

	      open system

	--->> subsystem

	      closed system

	      None on the list

114. The___climate in an industry influences the behaviour of a company.

	      policy

	--->> ethical

	      objectives

	      procedural

115. The major problem that confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of ___.

	      patience

	      policy

	--->> objectives

	      procedural

116. ____management uses the methods of science in making decisions and evaluating its consequences.

	      Behavioral

	      Human relations

	      HRM

	--->> Scientific

117. __ is one of the most important human activities that permeate all organisations.

	--->> Managing

	      Planning

	      Organising

	      None on the list

118. ____ can be defined as getting things done through others.

	--->> Management

	      Objectives

	      Organisation

	      none on the list

119. __ are rather seen as best fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.

	      Guildline

	--->> Principles

	      Policy

	      None on the list

120. Every  organisation is _____

	      procedual

	      proactive

	--->> purposive

	      procedural

121. ___of interest occurs whenever an executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest.

	--->> Conflict

	      Dispute

	      Negotiation

	      None on the list

BUS106   NOUN EXAM



To a student management is an________________ discipline

academic


Formal leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an _________ figure

122.
authority

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes

scientific

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends

principles



The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

plan


One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management

research



It is often difficult to formulate priniciples in management because of the difficulty in conducting controlled ____________


experiment


The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made


organization




A ___________ leader cannot function without the authority


formal


.) The word  concerns the laying down of policies
Ans => Administration

.) Is the process of transferring information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Ans => communication

.) The manager must comply with the  requirements for establishing and operating his business
Ans => Legal

.) The essence of  lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Ans => control

.) Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of
Ans => Board or Director

.) Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right person will  activities in their own field
Ans => monitor

.)  distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumer all effect demans
Ans => income

.) Flat shaped structure falls under
Ans => wide span of control

.)  is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen
Ans => Forecasting

.) The very survival of an   dictate that a certain minimum profit has to be made
Ans => organization








Organization
======
BUS106 NOUN EXAM





123. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income


124. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

125. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

126. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

127. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

128. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

129. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

130. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

131. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

132. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment







133. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

134. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

135. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

136. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

137. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

138. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

139. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

140. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

BUS106 NOUN EXAM


All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human
Clear objectives make for consistency and unity of purpose and__________________
b.
direction

Decision making is fundamental in an organization whether it is small enterprise or_______________
141.
multi-national corporation

The management function of leading is simply the process of _ people so that they will contribute to the goals of the organization
Influencing

The resources of any organization include; finance, material, human, information and _
Time

10/10

Training refers to ______________ and mechanical skills
technical

The following are examples of different types of training except;
Chairman training

The management process school of thought perceives management as a process of getting things done through _________ operating in organized groups
people

The __________ principles of management were advocated by Henri Fayol\'s
First

The _____________ of empirical school is the danger of using the past to judge the present
criticism

One of the fore runners of Fedrick Taylor was__________________
Webber --> supposedly Babbage

The fourteen principles of management cover all aspects of _______________
management

_____ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Communication

The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business
legal

The management process school attempts to establish a _________________ frame work
conceptual

Gilbreth believed that there was one best way that required _______________ motion
last

The __ is dogmatic and expects compliance and leads by ability to without or give rewards and punishment.
autocratic leader


The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies
administration

____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Communication

The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business
legal

The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Control

Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;
Board of directors

Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields
monitor

_______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands
Income

Flat shaped structure falls under;
Wide span of control

_____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future
Forecasting

The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made
organization

Managing is one of the most important human activities that _____________________ all organization
permeate

A good ____________ must know the concepts and principles of management
manager

There are special areas of management that are not subject to the ____________ of science
rigours

It is often difficult to formulate priniciples in management because of the difficulty in conducting controlled ____________
experiment

To a student management is an________________ discipline
academic

Management is the __________ or direciton of people towards organizational objectives
guidance

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes
scientific

A principle describe a _____________ or what should be done if something else happen
relationship

One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management
research

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends
principles

Arts requires___________ skills and conceptual ability
technical

It could be argued that the empirical school is ____________ to the management process
identical

Human relations school believes that effective use of human relationship will aid management in realising the organizational ___________
goals

___________ places emphasis on the understanding of employee by management
human relation

Not all people can manage ______________
effectively

To get _________________ put in their best efforts the manager has to understand people their emotional, physical and interllectual needs
people

_____________ are people who are primarily responsible for the achievmeent of organizational goals
managers

There is a class relationship between the ______________ school and the decision theory school
mathematical

Management is also seen as a process demanding the performance of ______________ function
specific

Decision theory school group believes in _____________ decision making
rational

There is no human endeavour that does not require proper_______________ for its proper functioning
management

Managing is one of the most important human activities that _____________________ all organization
permeate

___ techiques and systems are basically the same regardless of what is being controlled
Control

The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.
democratic leader

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.
Motivator

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __
committees

___factors involve working conditions and can trigger dissatisfaction,if inadequate.
Hygiene

The __ is dogmatic and expects compliance and leads by ability to without or give rewards and punishment.
autocratic leader

The__uses his power very little,if at all,giving subordinates ahigh degree of independence in their operations.
free-rein leader

___ involves giving a job greater scope or variety and depth.
job enrichment

____are the monetary measurements.
cost standards

______ is referred to as the father of the social system approach to organisation.
V. ParetoManaging is one of the most important human activities that _____________________ all organization
permeate

A good ____________ must know the concepts and principles of management
manager

There are special areas of management that are not subject to the ____________ of science
rigours

It is often difficult to formulate priniciples in management because of the difficulty in conducting controlled ____________
experiment

To a student management is an________________ discipline
academic

Management is the __________ or direciton of people towards organizational objectives
guidance

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes
scientific

A principle describe a _____________ or what should be done if something else happen
relationship

One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management
research

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends
principles

Arts requires___________ skills and conceptual ability
technical

It could be argued that the empirical school is ____________ to the management process
identical

Human relations school believes that effective use of human relationship will aid management in realising the organizational ___________
goals

___________ places emphasis on the understanding of employee by management
human relation

Not all people can manage ______________
effectively

To get _________________ put in their best efforts the manager has to understand people their emotional, physical and interllectual needs
people

_____________ are people who are primarily responsible for the achievmeent of organizational goals
managers

There is a class relationship between the ______________ school and the decision theory school
mathematical

Management is also seen as a process demanding the performance of ______________ function
specific

Decision theory school group believes in _____________ decision making
rational

There is no human endeavour that does not require proper_______________ for its proper functioning
management

Managing is one of the most important human activities that _____________________ all organization
permeate

___ techiques and systems are basically the same regardless of what is being controlled
Control

The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.
democratic leader

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.
Motivator

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __
committees

___factors involve working conditions and can trigger dissatisfaction,if inadequate.
Hygiene

The __ is dogmatic and expects compliance and leads by ability to without or give rewards and punishment.
autocratic leader

The__uses his power very little,if at all,giving subordinates ahigh degree of independence in their operations.
free-rein leader

___ involves giving a job greater scope or variety and depth.
job enrichment

____are the monetary measurements.
cost standards

______ is referred to as the father of the social system approach to organisation.
V. Pareto

The management process school of thought perceives management as a process of getting things done through _________ operating in organized groups
people

Taylor advocated placing _________________ on a piece work in order to encourage them to earn more
workers

Gilbreth believed that there was one best way that required _______________ motion
last

One of the major advantages of the ____________ revolution is that it gave birth to accelerated rate of resources accumulation
scientific

The management process school attempts to establish a _________________ frame work
conceptual

The __________ principles of management were advocated by Henri Fayol\'s
First

The _____________ of empirical school is the danger of using the past to judge the present
criticism

The entrepreneur was forced by competition to engage in ______________ performance
crude

It could be argued that the empirical school is ____________ to the management process
identical

Taylor believed that each worker was motivated by ______________ need
financial

Taylor advocated placing _________________ on a piece work in order to encourage them to earn more
workers

One of the major advantages of the ____________ revolution is that it gave birth to accelerated rate of resources accumulation
scientific

The entrepreneur was forced by competition to engage in ______________ performance
crude

It could be argued that the empirical school is ____________ to the management process
identical

Taylor believed that each worker was motivated by ______________ need
financial

The main pre - occupation was what to do in order to increase _____________ productivity
employee

The well - known __________ of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful administrative system
Kingdom

In the pre-industrial period, ____________ was practiced by various part of the world including Africa
management

Scientific management was intended to bring about a ___________ mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and management
complete

Scientific management was intended to bring about a ___________ mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and management
complete

Fedrick W. Taylor is often referred to as the father of __________ management
scientific

George Elton _________ is from Austraila
mayo

Henri advocated the __________ principles of management
fourth

The first principles of management were advocated by _____________ and geologist
French engineer

The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies
administration

The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Control

Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;
Board of directors

Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields
monitor

_______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands
Income

Flat shaped structure falls under;
Wide span of control

_____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future
Forecasting

The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made
organization

___ techiques and systems are basically the same regardless of what is being controlled
Control

The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.
democratic leader

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.
Motivator

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __
committees

___factors involve working conditions and can trigger dissatisfaction,if inadequate.
Hygiene

The__uses his power very little,if at all,giving subordinates ahigh degree of independence in their operations.
free-rein leader

___ involves giving a job greater scope or variety and depth.
job enrichment

____are the monetary measurements.
cost standards

______ is referred to as the father of the social system approach to organisation.
V. Pareto

Control must be tailored to position ____
Monitor

Company ____are also part of the data
Records

In process of planning in an organizations ____ is being made
Decision

____ Distribution, expenditure pattern.
Income

Interview is used interchangeable with
Selection

The technique commonly employed by a ____
Support subordinate

In process of planning in an organizations ____ Is being made
Decision

The manager must comply with the ____
Legal

Organization can broadly be classified as
Formal/informal organization

The managerial functions of leading ____
Influencing

142. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands
	marketing
Answer:	Income
	Information
	High income

143. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;
	Emplyees
	Management
Answer:	Board of directors
	Middlemen

144. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields
	process
Answer:	monitor
	controlling
	influence

145. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
	Planning
Answer:	Control
	Organizing
	Management

146. Flat shaped structure falls under;
	Narrow span of control
	Big span of control
Answer:	Wide span of control
	Small span of control

147. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business
	compliance
	registration
	company
Answer:	legal

148. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future
Answer:	forecasting
	planning
	controlling
	management

149. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
	Messaging
Answer:	Communication
	Texting
	Internet



16. The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

	      system

	      Department

	--->> plan

	      none on the list

17. ____ is the basic to all managerial functions

	--->> Planning

	      Organising

	      Unity of command

	      Decision making

18. An individual, who gets the thing done is a ____.

	      leader

	--->> manager

	      director

	      organiser

19. Some business problems arise due to failing on the ___ grounds.

	      management

	      managing

	--->> ethical

	      decision

20. ____deals with a qualitaive and quantitative aspect of manpower in terms of placement.

	      Planning

	--->> Organising

	      unity of command

	      none on the list

21. The ____is a  vehicle for the implementation of a plan.

	--->> system

	      management

	      communication

	      information

22. The ___could be formal or informal.

	      business

	--->> Orrganisation

	      Enterprise

	      business letter

23. ___is a process of breaking an enterprise into smaller groups and levels.

	--->> Departmentation

	      Staffing

	      Centralisation

	      decentralisation

24. ___ normally has a network of goals, objectives and targets.

	      Business

	      Management

	      Enterprise

	--->> Organisation

25. The functions of a___ can be a line or a staff.

	      system

	--->> Department

	      plan

	      none on the list


2) __ are rather seen as best fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.

	      Guildline

	--->> Principles

	      Policy

	      None on the list

3) Every system is made up of _____

	      open system

	--->> subsystem

	      closed system

	      None on the list

4) ___of interest occurs whenever an executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest.

	--->> Conflict

	      Dispute

	      Negotiation

	      None on the list

5) ____management uses the methods of science in making decisions and evaluating its consequences.

	      Behavioral

	      Human relations

	      HRM

	--->> Scientific

6) __ is one of the most important human activities that permeate all organisations.

	--->> Managing

	      Planning

	      Organising

	      None on the list

7) ____ can be defined as getting things done through others.

	--->> Management

	      Objectives

	      Organisation

	      none on the list

8) ____ requires technical skill and conceptual ability.

	      History

	      Science

	      Philosophy

	--->> Art

9) The___climate in an industry influences the behaviour of a company.

	      policy

	--->> ethical

	      objectives

	      procedural

10) The major problem that confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of ___.

	      patience

	      policy

	--->> objectives

	      procedural

11) Every  organisation is _____

	      procedual

	      proactive

	--->> purposive

	      procedural



bus106


Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human


Try Another Search
BUS106   NOUN EXAM



To a student management is an________________ discipline

academic


Formal leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an _________ figure

150.
authority

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes

scientific

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends

principles



The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

plan


One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management

research



It is often difficult to formulate priniciples in management because of the difficulty in conducting controlled ____________


experiment


The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made


organization




A ___________ leader cannot function without the authority


formal


.) The word  concerns the laying down of policies
Ans => Administration

.) Is the process of transferring information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Ans => communication

.) The manager must comply with the  requirements for establishing and operating his business
Ans => Legal

.) The essence of  lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Ans => control

.) Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of
Ans => Board or Director

.) Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right person will  activities in their own field
Ans => monitor

.)  distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumer all effect demans
Ans => income

.) Flat shaped structure falls under
Ans => wide span of control

.)  is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen
Ans => Forecasting

.) The very survival of an   dictate that a certain minimum profit has to be made
Ans => organization








Organization
The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.

151.
democratic leader

Scientific management was intended to bring about a ___________ mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and management

complete

In the pre-industrial period, ____________ was practiced by various part of the world including Africa

management


Henri advocated the __________ principles of management

first

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.

Motivation

The well - known __________ of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful administrative system

Kingdom

_____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future


forecasting

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __

committees

___ techiques and systems are basically the same regardless of what is being controlled

Control
Question:  is as old as human organization

Answer:Management



Question: The scientific management school placed special emphasis upon

Answer:production



Question:  is often referred to as the father of Scientific Management

Answer:Frederick W Taylor



Question: Gilbreth is known for his work on time and  studies

Answer:motion



Question: The first principles of management were advocated by a French engineer and

Answer:geologist



Question: The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into   broad areas

Answer:six



Question:  are people who are primarily responsible for the achievement of organizational goals

Answer:Managers



Question:   is defined as getting things done through others

Answer:Management



Question: Concepts are the corner stone for the development of and theory

Answer: principles



Question: Goals can be differentiated between official and  goals

Answer:operative



Question: Good organizational goals help in policy  and administration

Answer:formulation



Question: A typical employee goals can be divided into  main groups

Answer:two



Question: One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear

Answer:objectives



Question:  of interest arises when an executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest

Answer:Conflict



Question:  making is one of the most crucial activities of management

Answer:Decision



Question: A decision process is not completed until it is

Answer:implemented



Question:  is one of the highly sought after talents in management

Answer:Creative



Question:  is concerned with directing the human efforts towards organisational goal achievement

Answer:Direction



Question: Directing and comprise the managerial function of guiding overseeing and leading people

Answer:leading



Question: Schneider  refers to organisational climate as the entire internal environment of the organisation

Answer:1975



Question: The mathematical techniques used as aid to decision making are often called

Answer:Operations Research



Question:  theory is often called waiting line theory

Answer:Queuing



Question: Planning has been defined previously as one of the five major functions of management

Answer:five



Question: The most comprehensive definition of planning is given by

Answer:Cyril LHudson



Question: The best known definition of management control is given by Anthony in

Answer:1965



Question: indicate the financial expenditures involved per unit of activity

Answer:Cost standards



Question:  can be expressed as a ratio of net profits to sales

Answer:Profitability



Question: Formal organisation can be seen as a direct opposite of  organisation

Answer:informal



Question: the process of passing information and understanding from one person to another

Answer:Communication



Question: Communication may be divided into two namely  and written

Answer:oral



Question: The scientific management school place special emphasis upon

Answer:production



Question:  of enterprises was also practised by the Babylonians

Answer:management



Question: Industrial revoculion was the period of  awakeing

Answer:intellectual



Question: Scientific management was intended to bring about complete mental

Answer:revolution



Question: Management is as old as  organisation

Answer:human



Question: Taylors principles of management include all except

Answer:classification of programmes



Question: Fredrick W Taylor is often referred to as the of scientific management

Answer:father



Question: The pharahoahs are managers who planned organised and direct the work of the

Answer:surbodinates



Question: In the preindustrial period was practised by various parts of the world

Answer:management



Question: A well documented and properly organised management system was that of the

Answer:Egyptians



Question: Management can be define as getting thing done through

Answer:organizing



Question: Art is the imposition of

Answer:pattern



Question:  are best seen as fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend

Answer:principles



Question: There are special areas of management that are not subjected to rigous of

Answer:science



Question: Gilbreth is known for his work on time and studies

Answer:motion



Question: Management can be define as a team or group of individuals in

Answer:Organisation



Question: The first principles of management were advocated

Answer:Henry Fayol



Question: It could be argued that the  school is identical to the management process school

Answer:empirical



Question:  spend his life working on the difference engine

Answer:Babbage



Question: Decision theory schools believe in decision making

Answer:rational
152. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future


forecasting

153. Company _______ are also part of the data which have to be processed

records

154. The _______ of any organization include: Finance, Material, Human, Information and Time resources.

resources

155. The following is a criteria or rule for drawing a chart in an organization

All of the above

156. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made


organization

157. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

administration

158. The resources of any organization include: Finance, Material, Human, Information and ________.


Time resources

159. The managerial function of leading is simply the process of ________ people so that they will contribute to the goals of the organization

influencing

160. ______________ is another criteria or rule to be observed in the process of drawing up a chart

Line of Authority

161. The following are examples of different types of training except;

Chairman training









































1, _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

.........Income


26. Organization can broadly be classified as
..........Formal/Informal organization


27. In the process of planning in an organization ________is being made

.........decision


28. The managerial function of leading is simply the process of ________ people so that they will contribute to the goals of the organization


influencing

29. In the process of _______ in an organization, decision is being made

......
Planning

30. The technique commonly employed by a leader to have human relations between him and his employees are;

......Support subordinates



31. Company _______ are also part of the data which have to be processed


records


9, Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

monitor


Interview is used interchangeable with;

............Selection



10, The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

legal
























bus 106 10/10
m. Wide span of control
n. Communication
o. Board of directors
p. Income
q. Monitor
r. Legal
s. Control
t. Forecasting
u. Administration
v. Organization
[3/4, 2:17 PM] NE
Bus106 TMA 1 10/10

w. ) The word  concerns the laying down of policies
Ans => Administration
x. ) Is the process of transferring information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Ans => communication
y. ) The manager must comply with the  requirements for establishing and operating his business
Ans => Legal
z. ) The essence of  lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Ans => control
aa. ) Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of
Ans => Board or Director
bb. ) Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right person will  activities in their own field
Ans => monitor
cc. )  distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumer all effect demans
Ans => income
dd. ) Flat shaped structure falls under
Ans => wide span of control
ee. )  is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen
Ans => Forecasting
ff. ) The very survival of an   dictate that a certain minimum profit has to be made
Ans => organization
FBQ1: _____ used a mathematical equation to arrive at the conclusion that only a narrow span of management would make for efficient management.
Answer: Graicunas

FBQ2: ________deals with the number of subordinates that an executive can manage effectively.
Answer: Span of control

FBQ3: ________promotes delegation and supervision with predictable results.
Answer: Specialization

FBQ4: One of the major factors that promote decentralization is task  ________
Answer: specialization

FBQ5: Effective _________helps managers to spend less time on specific technical activities
Answer: delegation

FBQ6: The principle of _________is sometimes violated where functional authority exists.
Answer: unity of command

FBQ7: _______means answering for the use of your formal authority by someone else.
Answer: Accountability

FBQ8: Duncan ____has indicated that econometric models are used in predicting the student enrolment at universities.
Answer: 1975

FBQ9: _______models are more complex in nature and involve interrelationships of many variables tied together in a quantitative model.
Answer: Causal

FBQ10: ________are the changes that have taken place as a result of economic booms or depressions.
Answer: Cyclical variations

FBQ11: _____is based on the assumption that past activities are good indication of future activities.
Answer: Time series analysis

FBQ12: ______converts company objectives into individual goals and as a result, it contributes to higher levels of job satisfaction.
Answer: MBO

FBQ13: _________is the last in Maslow’s hierarchy of needs.
Answer: Self-actualisation Need

FBQ14: ________ is that energizing force that induces or compels and maintains behaviour.
Answer: Motivation

FBQ15: ______method is ideal for both employee training and management development.
Answer: Coaching

FBQ16: _______ is the determination of the job to which an accepted candidate is to be assigned and his assignment to that job.
Answer: placement

FBQ17: _______ seek to evaluate the applicant’s ability to apply knowledge judiciously in solving a problem.
Answer: Judgement test

FBQ18: _______ is to solicit necessary information from the prospective applicants to assess the applicant’s suitability to the job.
Answer: Preliminary interview

FBQ19: _________ techniques are the means or media by which management contacts prospective employees or provides necessary information.
Answer: Recruitment

FBQ20: _______ is a process of choosing the right candidate from a pool of applicants.
Answer: Selection

FBQ21: ________include mental dexterity, analytical ability, intuitive judgement, alertness and ability to concentrate.
Answer: Psychological characteristics

FBQ22: ______ is a personal power acquired by expertise in a field or area.
Answer: Expert Power

FBQ23: _________ conducted extensive studies in this area and developed a scale to identify different types of leaders.
Answer: Fiedler’s contingency theory

FBQ24: The __________of leadership has suffered from lack of conclusiveness and over-simplifications.
Answer: trait theory

FBQ25: ________ leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an authority figure.
Answer: formal

FBQ26: Leadership is an integral part of management and plays a vital role in _______operations.
Answer: managerial

FBQ27: ________ is often referred to as the father of Scientific Management.
Answer: Abraham Maslow

FBQ28: The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into _________ broad areas.
Answer: six

FBQ29: Goals can be differentiated between official and ________ goals.
Answer: Operative

FBQ30: One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear ________.
Answer: objectives

FBQ31: A decision process is not completed until it is _____________.
Answer: implemented

FBQ32: __________ is one of the highly sought after talents in management.
Answer: Creative

FBQ33: ___________theory is often called waiting-line theory.
Answer: Queuing

FBQ34: The best known definition of management control is given by Anthony in _________
Answer: 1965

FBQ35: Employment opportunity is created by _____
Answer: Organisations

MCQ1: ________ is as old as human organization.
Answer: Management

MCQ2: The scientific management school placed special emphasis upon _________
Answer: Production

MCQ3: ________ is often referred to as the father of Scientific Management.
Answer: Abraham Maslow

MCQ4: Gilbreth is known for his work on time and _______ studies.
Answer: Motion

MCQ5: The first principles of management were advocated by a French engineer and ______
Answer: Geologist

MCQ6: The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into _________ broad areas.
Answer: Six

MCQ7: ________ are people who are primarily responsible for the achievement of organizational goals.
Answer: Managers

MCQ8: _________is defined as getting things done through others.
Answer: Management

MCQ9: Concepts are the corner stone for the development of________ and theory.
Answer: Principles

MCQ10: Goals can be differentiated between official and ________ goals.
Answer: Operative

MCQ11: Good organizational goals help in policy ________ and administration.
Answer: Formulation

MCQ12: A typical employee goal can be divided into _____ main groups.
Answer: Two

MCQ13: One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear ________.
Answer: Objectives

MCQ14: _______ of interest arises when an executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest.
Answer: Conflict

MCQ15: _______ making is one of the most crucial activities of management.
Answer: Decision

MCQ16: A decision process is not completed until it is _____________.
Answer: Implemented

MCQ17: __________ is one of the highly sought after talents in management.
Answer: Creative

MCQ18: ________ is concerned with directing the human efforts towards organisational goal achievement.
Answer: Direction

MCQ19: Directing and ________comprise the managerial function of guiding, overseeing and leading people.
Answer: Leading

MCQ20: Schneider ________ refers to organisational climate as the entire internal environment of the organisation.
Answer: 1975

MCQ21: The mathematical techniques used as aid to decision making are often called ______
Answer: Operations Research

MCQ22: ___________theory is often called waiting-line theory.
Answer: Queuing

MCQ23: Planning has been defined previously as one of the -------- major functions of management.
Answer: Five

MCQ24: The most comprehensive definition of planning is given by _________
Answer: Cyril L. Hudson

MCQ25: The best known definition of management control is given by Anthony in _________
Answer: 1965

MCQ26: __________indicate the financial expenditures involved per unit of activity.
Answer: Cost standards

MCQ27: ______ can be expressed as a ratio of net profits to sales.
Answer: Profitability

MCQ28: Formal organisation can be seen as a direct opposite of ________ organisation.
Answer: Informal

MCQ29: _________the process of passing information and understanding from one person to another.
Answer: Communication

MCQ30: Communication may be divided into two namely _____ and written.
Answer: Oral

MCQ31: Employment opportunity is created by _____
Answer: Organisations

MCQ32: ______ should help in formulating and articulating ethical norms as part of their social responsibility.
Answer: Nigeria

MCQ33: The areas in which business organisations should play a ________ role in Nigeria are limitless.
Answer: Prominent

MCQ34: _______ tend to increase with increasing task certainty.
Answer: Spans

MCQ35: Mass-production companies have a higher span of management than ________firms.
Answer: Process

Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human
======
BUS106
======

gg. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

hh. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

32. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

jj. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

kk. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

ll. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

mm. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

nn. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

oo. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

pp. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

Text File Report


Created by using CSVFileView

qid	crscode	qdescr	opta	optb	optc	optd	qa	tmano	lecnp	udate	facid

13188	
BUS106	 	is as old as human organization.	
	
	
Management	
	
C	
TMA1	TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:51:35	
F06


13189	

BUS106	The scientific management school placed special emphasis upon	

production	

	

	
	

A	

TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:51:35	

F06

13190	
BUS106	 	is often referred to as the father of Scientific Management.	
	
	
	
Frederick W. Taylor	
D	
TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:51:35	
F06

13191	
BUS106	Gilbreth is known for his work on time and	 studies.	
	
motion	
	
	
B	
TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:51:35	
F06


13192	

BUS106	The first principles of management were advocated by a French engineer and	

geologist	

	

	
	

A	

TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:51:35	

F06



13193	


BUS106	The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into
	broad areas.	


	


	


	


six	


D	


TMA1	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	

2018-
09-27
15:51:35	


F06


13194	

BUS106	 	are people who are primarily responsible for the achievement of organizational goals.	

	

	

Managers	

	

C	

TMA1	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:51:35	

F06

13195	
BUS106	 	is defined as getting things done through others.	
	
Management	
	
	
B	
TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:51:35	
F06


13196	

BUS106	Concepts are the corner stone for the development
of	and theory.	

	

	

	

principles	

D	

TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:51:35	

F06

13197	
BUS106	Goals can be differentiated between official and
	goals.	
	
	
operative	
	
C	
TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:51:35	
F06

13208	
BUS106	Good organizational goals help in policy
	and administration.	
	
	
formulation	
	
C	
TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:52:54	
F06

13209	
BUS106	A typical employee goals can be divided into	main groups.	
	
two	
	
	
B	
TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:52:54	
F06




13210	

BUS106	One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear	.	

	

	

	

objectives	

D	

TMA2	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:52:54	

F06


13211	

BUS106	 	of interest arises when an executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest.	

Conflict	

	

	
	

A	

TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:52:54	

F06

13212	
BUS106	 	making is one of the most crucial activities of management.	
	
Decision	
	
	
B	
TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:52:54	
F06

13213	
BUS106	A decision process is not completed until it is
	.	
	
	
implemented	
	
C	
TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:52:54	
F06

13214	
BUS106	 	is one of the highly sought after talents in management.	
	
	
	
Creative	
D	
TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:52:54	
F06


13215	

BUS106	 	is concerned with directing the human efforts towards organisational goal achievement.	

	

Direction	

	

	

B	

TMA2	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:52:54	

F06


13216	

BUS106	Directing and
	comprise the managerial function of guiding, overseeing and leading people.	

	

	

p	

leading	

D	

TMA2	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:52:54	

F06


13217	

BUS106	Schneider
	refers to organisational climate as the entire internal environment of the organisation.	

1975	

	

	

	

A	

TMA2	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:52:54	

F06


13238	

BUS106	The mathematical techniques used as aid to decision making are often called  		
	

	
Operations Research	

	

C	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06

13239	
BUS106	

theory is often called waiting-line theory.	
	
	
Queuing		
C	
TMA3	TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:57:13	
F06


13240	

BUS106	Planning has been defined previously as one of the five major functions of management.	

	

	

five	

	

C	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06


13241	

BUS106	The most comprehensive definition of planning is given by	
	
	
	
Cyril L.Hudson	

D	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06


13242	

BUS106	The best known definition of management control is given by Anthony in  		

1965	

	

	

	

A	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06




13243	

BUS106	 	indicate the financial expenditures involved per unit of activity.	
	

Cost standards	
	
	

B	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06

13244	
BUS106	 	can be expressed as a ratio of net profits to sales.	
	
	
	
Profitability	
D	
TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:57:13	
F06


13245	

BUS106	Formal organisation can be seen as a direct opposite of


organisation.	

	

informal	

	

	

B	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06


13246	

BUS106	 	the process of passing information and understanding from one person to another.	

	

Communication	

	

	

B	

TMA3	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:14	

F06

13247	
BUS106	Communication may be divided into two namely	and written.	
oral	
	
	
	
A	
TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:57:14	
F06



BUS106 List of Questions

Latex formatted questions may not properly render

Q1 The major organizational goals exclude????????????????????????..
staff lay-off

Q2 A good goal makes the organization while helping to exploit the opportunities to minimize the impact of the
?????????????????????.
risks

Q3 Good goals must possess the following qualities except?????????????????????????????????
they must not specify period of achievement.

Q4 ??????????????????????????????. goal could be implicit and require explicit formulation before they could be realised.
Organisation

Q5 What managers do in organizations includes ?????????????????????
all of the above

Q6 Management function is identical in all ????????????????????????. whether it is a profit-making organization or a "non-profit-making organization.
formal organizations

Q7 In a general sense, the human being is a complex system made up of sub- systems such as the circulatory system, the auditory system, the locomotive system, and so on.
False
Q8 ???????????????????????? is known as the father of scientific management.
Frederick W. Taylor

Q9 A scholarly grouping of concepts and principles creates a??????????????????????????????
theory

Q10 ????????????????????????.. are abstractions formed fromgeneralizations.
Concepts

Q11 Fayol, after more than???????????????????????????.. of practical business experience drewup his principles of management.
40 years

Q12 ???????????????????????????.. are best seen as fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.
Principles

Q13 A successful manager blends experience with ????????????????????????.. in order to achieve a desired result.
science

Q14 ???????????????????????????.. attempts through systematic procedure to establish the relationships between variables and the underlying principles.
Science

Q15 ????????????... is an imposition of order on chaos.
Art

Q16 Gilbreth believed that there was one best way which was believed to be the way that required the
????????????????????????
least motion

Q17 Taylor???s principles of management could be summarized as ???????????????????????????..
a and b above

Q18 A manager will find it difficult to enforce quality or engage in??????????????????????????????. .
overall profit

Q19 A ?????????????????????.. is the selection of alternative course of action fromavailable alternatives in order to achieve a given objective.
decision

Q20 A ???????????????????????????. could be seen as a group of people assembled together to take action on an administrative task.

committee
Q21 What determines whether a decision is to be made by an individual or group is the type of decision to be made, and the importance of the decision to the immediate attainment of ?????????????????????????????? .
organisational objectives

Q22 A decision process is not completed until it is ???????????????????????????????????? .
implemented

Q23 An entrepreneur may decide in the circumstance to select the alternative that ???minimises his risk or involves ???minimum regret??? or gives himoptimum result in the ???????????????????????????????????????. .
short-run

Q24 Stages in Decision Making includes ?????????????????????????????????????????????
all of the above

Q25 A decision made with full knowledge of the occurrence of an event is said to be decision
??????????????????????????????.  .
under certainty

Q26 The course of action that maximises the final desirability is the???????????????????????????????????????.. .
rational decision

Q27 If a quantitative method is used, the value of each alternative is?????????????????????????????????.. .
computed

Q28 In business, there are absolutely no right or wrong decisions but
????????????????????????????????????..   .
intelligent choices

Q29 Factors Determining Unethical Decisions????????????????????????..
Formal company policy

Q30 The King???s affairs were so well organised and so efficiently and effectively run that it was devoid of
?????????????????????????????????????????????   .
bureaucracy


FBQ1: _____ used a mathematical equation to
arrive at the conclusion that only a narrow span of management would make for efficient management.
Answer: Graicunas

FBQ2: ________deals with the number of
subordinates that an executive can manage effectively.
Answer: Span of control

FBQ3: ________promotes delegation and
supervision with predictable results. Answer: Specialization

FBQ4: One of the major factors that promote

decentralization is task Answer: specialization

________


FBQ5: Effective _________helps managers to
spend less time on specific technical activities Answer: delegation

FBQ6: The principle of _________is sometimes
violated where functional authority exists. Answer: unity of command

FBQ7: _______means answering for the use of
your formal authority by someone else. Answer: Accountability

FBQ8: Duncan ____has indicated that
econometric models are used in predicting the

student enrolment at universities. Answer: 1975

FBQ9: _______models are more complex in nature
and involve interrelationships of many variables tied together in a quantitative model.
Answer: Causal

FBQ10: ________are the changes that have taken
place as a result of economic booms or depressions.
Answer: Cyclical variations

FBQ11: _____is based on the assumption that
past activities are good indication of future activities.
Answer: Time series analysis

FBQ12: ______converts company objectives into
individual goals and as a result, it contributes to higher levels of job satisfaction.
Answer: MBO

FBQ13: _________is the last in Maslow’s
hierarchy of needs.
Answer: Self-actualisation Need

FBQ14: ________ is that energizing force that
induces or compels and maintains behaviour. Answer: Motivation

FBQ15: ______method is ideal for both employee
training and management development.

Answer: Coaching

FBQ16: _______ is the determination of the job to
which an accepted candidate is to be assigned and his assignment to that job.
Answer: placement

FBQ17: _______ seek to evaluate the
applicant’s ability to apply knowledge judiciously in solving a problem.
Answer: Judgement test

FBQ18: _______ is to solicit necessary information
from the prospective applicants to assess the applicant’s suitability to the job.
Answer: Preliminary interview

FBQ19: _________ techniques are the means or
media by which management contacts prospective employees or provides necessary information.
Answer: Recruitment

FBQ20: _______ is a process of choosing the right
candidate from a pool of applicants. Answer: Selection

FBQ21: ________include mental dexterity,
analytical ability, intuitive judgement, alertness and ability to concentrate.
Answer: Psychological characteristics

FBQ22: ______ is a personal power acquired by

expertise in a field or area. Answer: Expert Power

FBQ23: _________ conducted extensive studies in
this area and developed a scale to identify different types of leaders.
Answer: Fiedler’s contingency theory

FBQ24: The __________of leadership has suffered
from lack of conclusiveness and over-simplifications.
Answer: trait theory

FBQ25: ________ leadership occurs when a
person is appointed or elected as an authority figure.
Answer: formal

FBQ26: Leadership is an integral part of management and plays a vital role in
_______operations. Answer: managerial

FBQ27: ________ is often referred to as the father
of Scientific Management. Answer: Abraham Maslow

FBQ28: The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into
_________ broad areas. Answer: six

FBQ29: Goals can be differentiated between

official and	goals.
Answer: Operative

FBQ30: One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear
________.
Answer: objectives

FBQ31: A decision process is not completed until
it is	_.
Answer: implemented

FBQ32: __________ is one of the highly sought
after talents in management. Answer: Creative

FBQ33: ___________theory is often called
waiting-line theory. Answer: Queuing

FBQ34: The best known definition of management

control is given by Anthony in Answer: 1965

_________


FBQ35: Employment opportunity is created by
_____
Answer: Organisations

MCQ1: ________ is as old as human organization.
Answer: Management

MCQ2: The scientific management school placed
special emphasis upon _________

Answer: Production

MCQ3: ________ is often referred to as the father
of Scientific Management. Answer: Abraham Maslow

MCQ4: Gilbreth is known for his work on time and
_______ studies. Answer: Motion

MCQ5: The first principles of management were

advocated by a French engineer and Answer: Geologist

______


MCQ6: The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into
_________ broad areas. Answer: Six

MCQ7: ________ are people who are primarily
responsible for the achievement of organizational goals.
Answer: Managers

MCQ8: _________is defined as getting things
done through others. Answer: Management

MCQ9: Concepts are the corner stone for the development of________ and theory.
Answer: Principles

MCQ10: Goals can be differentiated between

official and	goals.
Answer: Operative

MCQ11: Good organizational goals help in policy
________ and administration. Answer: Formulation

MCQ12: A typical employee goal can be divided
into _____ main groups.
Answer: Two

MCQ13: One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear
________.
Answer: Objectives

MCQ14: _______ of interest arises when an
executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest.
Answer: Conflict

MCQ15: _______ making is one of the most
crucial activities of management. Answer: Decision

MCQ16: A decision process is not completed until
it is	_.
Answer: Implemented

MCQ17: __________ is one of the highly sought
after talents in management. Answer: Creative

MCQ18: ________ is concerned with directing the
human efforts towards organisational goal achievement.
Answer: Direction

MCQ19: Directing and ________comprise the
managerial function of guiding, overseeing and leading people.
Answer: Leading

MCQ20: Schneider ________ refers to
organisational climate as the entire internal environment of the organisation.
Answer: 1975

MCQ21: The mathematical techniques used as

aid to decision making are often called Answer: Operations Research

______


MCQ22: ___________theory is often called
waiting-line theory. Answer: Queuing

MCQ23: Planning has been defined previously as one of the -------- major functions of management. Answer: Five

MCQ24: The most comprehensive definition of
planning is given by _________
Answer: Cyril L. Hudson

MCQ25: The best known definition of management control is given by Anthony in

_________ Answer: 1965

MCQ26: __________indicate the financial
expenditures involved per unit of activity. Answer: Cost standards

MCQ27: ______ can be expressed as a ratio of
net profits to sales. Answer: Profitability

MCQ28: Formal organisation can be seen as a

direct opposite of Answer: Informal

________ organisation.


MCQ29: _________the process of passing
information and understanding from one person to another.
Answer: Communication

MCQ30: Communication may be divided into two
namely _____ and written.
Answer: Oral

MCQ31: Employment opportunity is created by
_____
Answer: Organisations

MCQ32: ______ should help in formulating and
articulating ethical norms as part of their social responsibility.
Answer: Nigeria

MCQ33: The areas in which business

organisations should play a Nigeria are limitless.
Answer: Prominent

________ role in


MCQ34: _______ tend to increase with increasing
task certainty. Answer: Spans

MCQ35: Mass-production companies have a

higher span of management than Answer: Process

________firms.


FBQ1:Inbusinessthereareabsolutelynorightorwrong decisions but 	choices
Answer:*Intelligent*

FBQ2: 	organizationisasoldas management
Answer:*Human*

FBQ3: 	alsopracticedmanagementinthepre – industrial period
Answer:*Africa*

FBQ4: In order to increase employee productivity	waswhattodo Answer: *Preoccupation*

FBQ5:Thefatherof scientific management is Fredrick
W. 	--
Answer:*Taylor*

FBQ6:Thefirstprincipleofmanagementasadvocated by 	
Answer:*HenriFayol*

FBQ7: 	basicelementswasidentifiedby frank in on – the – job motions
Answer:*17*

FBQ8:ThearticleofHaroldKoontzisthemanagement theory of 	
Answer:*Jungle*

FBQ9:Anorderlystudyofjobrequirementis Answer: *Job analysis*
FBQ10: 	isanothernameforfree–reign leadership
Answer:*Laissez–faire*

FBQ11:Whichleadershipoccurswhenapersonis appointed as an authority figure
Answer:*Formal*

FBQ12: The process of passing information and understandingfromonepersontoanotherisknownas

Answer:*Communication*

FBQ13: The physical from of though which can be experienced and understood by senses is 	Answer: *Message*

FBQ14: 	suggested that people’s interpretationsofcommunicationscoincideswiththe

alreadyheldbenefitsandattitude Answer: Donald Robert

FBQ15: Theonlywaytoascertainastohowthe message was interpreted is	
Answer:*Feedback*

FBQ16: The other half of taking is 	
Answer:*Listening*

FBQ17:Inthehierarchyoffunctionsexercisedby management organization is 	
Answer:*Second*

FBQ18:Gettingthingsdonethroughothersisknownis Answer: *Management*
FBQ19: 	isseenas agroupof peopleby other
Answer:*Management*

FBQ20: 	overseethefunctionofotherpeoplewho must work in subordinate position
Answer:*Managers*

FBQ21: The 	schoolandthedecisiontheory school has a class relationship

Answer:*Management*

FBQ22: Whenthedemandsofataskonhandare ambiguous 	is needed
Answer:*Directive*

FBQ23: 	isoneof thefore– runnersof Taylor
Answer:*Babbage*

FBQ24:Anexcellentsourceforhighlydisciplined veterans is 	
Answer:*Militarycentres*

FBQ25: 	isreferredtoastechnicaland mechanical skills
Answer:*Training*

FBQ26:Theprocessofchoosingtherightcandidate from a pool of applicant is termed 	
Answer:*Selection*

FBQ27:Themostobvioussourceswhichareprimarily within the organisation itself is 	
Answer:*Internalsources*

FBQ28: 	was intended to bring about a completementalrevolutionwhichmustoccurinthe

mindsoftheworkmenandmanagement Answer: *Scientific management*

FBQ29: 	isinfluencedbyfinalselection Answer: *Past experience*

FBQ30: 	isblamedwhenitsorganization fails
Answer:*Management*

FBQ31:Oneofthemostimportanthumanactivitiesthat permeate all organisation is 	
Answer:*Managing*

FBQ32: 	ensuresthat everymemberofthe group contributes his best
Answer:*Managing*

FBQ33: People who are primarily responsible for the achievement of organizational goals are 	Answer: *Managers*

FBQ34: In making decisions and evaluating its consequences scientific management uses 	method
Answer:*Science*

FBQ35:Thecontent usedinbusinesstohighlightthe

inter–relationshipbetweenthefunctionalareaof management is 	
Answer:The*systems*

FBQ36:Humanrelationsschoolplacesemphasisonthe understanding of employees by 	
Answer:*Management*

FBQ37: 	theoryschoolbelievesinrational decision making
Answer:*Decision*

FBQ38:Asuccessfulmanagerblendsexperience with
	inordertoachieveadesiredresult Answer: *Science*

FBQ39:Mostresearchesinmanagementdealswith
	toestablishvalidityandreliability Answer: *Facts*

FBQ40: A scholarly grouping of concepts and 	
creates a theory Answer:*Principles*

FBQ41:Managementtheoryattempttopresentina concerted manner loose facts about 	behaviour in organization
Answer:*Human*

FBQ42:Manager’sfunctionsaremanagerial,not


Answer:*Technical*

FBQ43: 	controlorganizationactivities Answer: *Managers*

FBQ44:Whenthegoalsoftheindividualandthegoals of the organisations are the same, we have goal

Answer:*Congruency*

FBQ45:Advertisingwillstressqualityandserviceand not 	
Answer:*Price*

FBQ46:Therewasatimeeconomistsbelievedthatthe sole purpose of any business was to maximize 	Answer: *Profit*

FBQ47: Organizations and 	functionbetter when there is goal cogency
Answer:*Individual*

FBQ48: The aim of the civil service is to 	
Answer: *Serve the people*

FBQ49:ThepunishmentfortheviolationofNilesinan organisation is 	
Answer:*Immediatedismissal*

FBQ50: The ethical standards of a company are determined by the ethical standards of the 	Answer: *Executive*

MultipleChoiceQuestions(MCQs):
MCQ1: 	managementschoolplacedspecial emphasis upon production
Answer:Scientific

MCQ2: 	advocatedplacingworkersona piece of work in order to encourage them to earn more Answer: Fedrick

MCQ3:Thegatheringanalysisandcodificationofallrule of thumb and data existing in business is one of 	principles of management
Answer:Taylor

MCQ4: Taylor was 	forhislackof humanitarian concept
Answer:applauded

MCQ5: 	spenthislifeworkingonthe difference engine

Answer:Charles

MCQ6:Divisionoflabourandspecializationisoneof contributions to the field of management
Answer:Frank

MCQ7:	was production was used to illustratethebenefitsofdivisionoflabourpointingout the savings in time
Answer:Needle

MCQ8: 	stressedtheneedforreplacingmanual operations by automatic machinery
Answer:Taylor

MCQ9: 	is knownfor his workontimeand motion studies
Answer:Taylor

MCQ10:WhosebookischeaperbytheDozen Answer: Taylor

MCQ11:Thefollowingarepartofthebasicelementsin on the job motions except
Answer:Sea

MCQ12: 	developed a flow chart which highlightedtheneedforbreakinganoperationintounit

and steps Answer:Frank

MCQ13:Thefirstprinciplesofmanagementwere advocated by 	
Answer:Frank

MCQ14: 	isolatedasetofprinciplesthat have been thought to managers and students of management
Answer:Fayol

MCQ15: Human relations was advocated by 	
Answer:Babbage

MCQ16: Unity of command is one of 	
principleofmanagement Answer: Fayol

MCQ17: Themanagement theoryjungleisthearticleof


Answer:Harold

MCQ18: 	groupedHenriandTaylortothe same school
Answer:Mayo

MCQ19: 	schoolconcentratesonthe

interpersonalrelationshipbetweenmanagersand workers
Answer:Decisiontheory

MCQ20: 	schoolclassifythemselvesas management scientist
Answer:Mathematical

MCQ21: 	isoneofthemostimportant human activities that permeate all organization Answer: Managing

MCQ22: It is the 	responsibilitytoensurethat every member of the group contributes his best Answer: C.EO

MCQ23: 	are people who are primarily responsiblefortheachievementoforganizationalgoals Answer: Employees

MCQ24:Anyorganizationthatfailstorealizeits objective often blames it on 	
Answer:employees

MCQ25: 	istheindividualtoprovidethedynamic force or direction
Answer:Manager

MCQ26: 	isdefinedastheco-ordinatorofall the resources of an organization through the process of planning, organizing, directing and controlling in order to attain organizational objectives
Answer:Manage

MCQ27: 	requiretechnicalskilland conceptual ability
Answer:Art

MCQ28: 	must possestheknow–how in order to create a desired object
Answer:Scientist

MCQ29:Scientificmanagementusesthemethodsof
	inmakingdecisionsandevaluatingits consequences
Answer:hypothesis

MCQ30: 	concept is often used in businesstohighlighttheinterrelationshipbetweenthe functional areas of management.
Answer:Thesystem

MCQ31:Oneofthefollowingisanexampleofasystem Answer: Motor car

MCQ32:Forthe salesdepartmentto meetdelivery

datespromisedtocustomers.Ithastorelyonthe
	target Answer:Maintaining

MCQ33:Thesuccessofanysystemdependsonthe relationship between the system and its	Answer: Production

MCQ34:Themajororganizationalgoalsincludethe following except 	
Answer:Survival

MCQ35: 	is the selection of alternative courseofactionfromavailablealternativesinorderto achieve a given objective
Answer:Selecting

MCQ36:Decisionmakingcanbeclassifiedintothe following except	
Answer:Decisionmakingundercertainty

MCQ37: 	decisionrequiresthedecision maker to acquire a thorough understanding of the problem in order to make an intelligent choice
Answer:Rational

MCQ38:Thefinalselectionisinfluencedbythedecision maker’s	

Answer: Further experience

MCQ39:Factorsinvolvedinsecuringacceptance include the following except	
Answer:Effectivecommunication

MCQ40: 	couldbeseenasagroupofpeople assembled together to take action on an administrative task
Answer:Management

MCQ41:Thesuccessorfailureofacommitteeinmost instanc3s depends on the 	
Answer:Manager

MCQ42:Thesuccessorfailureofacommitteeinmost instanc3s depends on the 	
Answer:Manager

MCQ43: All organizations with more than 	empkoyeeshaveoneformofcommitteeortheother Answer: 30

MCQ44: A 	committeeisonethatcomes up with new ideas, new approaches and new ways of doing thing
Answer:Creative

MCQ45: 	systemisusedindetermining the optimal utilisation of a facility in an intermittent service
Answer:Queeningtheory

MCQ46: 	isameansof ensuringthat the important organizational objctives are accomplished as an when desired
Answer:Selecting

MCQ47: Long range plans are more risk due to 	
environment Answer:Social

MCQ48:Intermediateplanningcoversatimeframeof about 	
Answer:2monthsto6years

MCQ49: 	isanactionplanwhichsetsthe direction that a company will be taking
Answer:Decision

MCQ50:Thefollowingarethetypesofstrategiesexcept Answer: Stability


Bfn209
Balance sheet shows the present _______ of a business. (Statement)
Profit______ function is one of the acquired roles of the Finance Manager. (planning)
Financial statement is also used for future plans of the _______.(Enterprise)
Risk is the expected _______ of the income flow(variability)
Pandey ______ stated that the basis of the theory of financial management.(2005)
Financial Manager is the person responsible for performing ______ functions.(Finance)
Fixed costs remain constant while _____ costs change in direct proportion to changes in volume of goods. (Variable)
________ is otherwise known as profit and loss account. (Income statement)
________ mechanism system is a vital organ of a market economy. (Price)
Financing Activities consist of cash flows relating to ____ and owners' equity. (Liability)
BUS205
___________ is a means by which power is acquired, exercised and sustained. (Communication)
Non __________ income is used to buy items to meet basic needs. (Discretionary)
_________motivation also causes you to be loyal to certain shops and companies. (Patronage)
__________ is a book in which particulars of all monies received or paid are recorded. (Cash Account)
___________ is the value that products and sellers place on goods or services. (Price)
Social __________ is owed by individuals and not by organizations. (Obligation)
_______ researchers also gather information from a wider group of people. (Market)
The _______ is the total amount supplied by owner of the business or owners equity or net worth. (Capital)
__________ must be attractive. (Packaging)
________include the resources possessed by the firm. (Assets)
BUS207
Verbal communication is one way for people to communicate ______________. (Face to face)

The actual origin of ___________ is subject to considerable speculation(Language)
If a language is about communicating with signals, voice, sounds, gestures, or written symbols, can animal communications be considered as a ___________? (Language)
The basis of _________________ is the interaction between people. (Communication)
Animals do not have a __________ form of a language, but use a language to communicate with each another. (Written)
Some words may be imitative of natural __________, but others may come from expressions of emotion, such as laughter or crying. (Sounds)
Some of the key components of verbal communication are sound, writing, speaking, and ______________. (Language)
A dialogue is a reciprocal conversation between _______ or more entities, (TWO)
As meaning is assigned to words, language develops, which leads to the ___________ of speaking. (Development)
At birth, most people have vocal cords, which produce __________. (Sounds)
BUS106
It could be argued that the _______ school is identical to the management process school. (Empirical)
Art is the imposition of __________. (Pattern)
___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.(Pinciple)
Gilbreth is known for his work on time and _________studies. (Motion)
Decision theory schools believe in _________decision making. (Rational)
The first principles of management were advocated. (Henry fayol)
There are special areas of management that are not subjected to rigous of(Science)

spend his life working on the difference engine (Babbage)

Management can be define as getting thing done through (Organising)

Management can be define as a team or group of individuals in _________(Organisation)

ECO122

Exports are determined by factors outside the control of the ___ economy (Home)

The two components of import demand is fixed, and at the same time it varies with (Income)

The ____ are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers (Spending Decision)

In technical terms, _____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade (Gain from trade)

Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ______ with each other (Trading)
Import demand changes as______ changes (Income)
Because export is exogenous while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are_____ related to national income/national output (Negatively)
_____ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers (Import)
When income rises, the aspect of _____ rises as well and when income falls, it falls (Import demand)
Exports depend on spending decisions made by foreign ____ or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services (Consumer)

ECO231

The demand for goods and services is __ (Direct Demand)

The prices paid to the factors of production are called (All of the above)

Reason for the study of factor pricing are (All of the above)

The demand of factor of product can also be Joint Demand because for producer to produce orange he/she has to demand for all the _(factors of production)

The factors needed in the production process are also known as (Production Service)

The factor pricing is concerned with the determination of prices of services of factors of ______ (Production)

To produce goods and services, ____ need the services of factors of production, like land, labour, capital, and entrepreneur (FIRMs)

The theory of distribution is an attempt to explain how income is distributed among the factors of __ (Production)

The employer of factors of production only uses the factors in the production of goods and services to be finally sold in the ____(Product Market)

When workers are engaged or capital are borrowed, it does not offer any direct satisfaction to the ____ (Producer)

The production concept holds that consumers will value products that are highly (Affordable)

Another important role is the discovery of entrepreneurial talent (Agree)

Marketing's first role is to (Stimulate Aggregate potential demand)

Consumerism is an organized movement of citizens and government to fight wars on poor products(Disagree)

Commodity approach in marketing focuses on (Classes of products)

The major goal of an organization to an extent is (Profit)

The product concept holds that consumers value products that offer (High Quality)

Marketing concept holds that organization must first create to satisfy (Needs and want)
One of the significance of marketing is to provide (impulse purchase)

The purpose of marketing concept is to help organizations (Achieve its goal

BFN203

According Gardon (2014), there is a remarked difference between capital gains investing and the game of speculation

The_________ is a document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation (National tax Policy

investing is the art of buying and selling an asset for a profit (Capital Gain Investing)

__ is a technique that reduces risk by allocating investments among various financial instruments, industries and other categories (Diversification)

some or all of a loan when the borrower is ins (Credit Insurance)

The steps involved in personal financial planning process Include all of the following except________ (Goal Division)

are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date (Warrants)

Is a type of tax (PAYE)

Owning a current and savings account have the same requirements (False)

Ent203

The achievement needs theory was developed by (McCelland)

Which of the following emphasized the risk aspect of entrepreneurship (Cantillon)

Which of the following a pattern of venture capital development (Mid Stage)

Entrepreneurial process include the following stages except? (Profit Planning)

(New Monnies)

VC stands for (Venture Capital)

Which of the following will not support in-house entrepreneurial development in organizations (Bickering)

CIT201
The software that uses the power and speed of a computer machine to perform some mathematical calculations or simulate some real life situations is called a ___ software. (Modeling)

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________






TMA3                  7/10

91. The Problem of double counting: the greatest difficulty in measuring national income is that of double counting, which arises from the improper distinction between final and an _____
intermediate product

92. The income approach to the calculation of GDP measures GDP in terms of who receives

None of the Option

93. Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______

,,,,,,,,,,,,corporate and institutional debtors

94. Value added method is used when the value of ______ and ______ produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year

final goods and services

95. Given the open economy model Y = C + I + G + (X – M), the meaning of (X-M) in the model is_____

Export minus Government import

96. Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___

National Income accounting

97. ______ for any firm is the market value of its product or service minus the cost of inputs purchased from other firms

,,,,,,,,,,,,,,Value added

98. The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government in _____

1968

99. The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income

,,,,,,,,,,,National Income/Total Population

100. Expenditure approach measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by _______ and ______ in a particular period of time.

individual private businesses and public sector



























Eco122 tma1 10/10 done

1, was only used as a methodological approach to economic problems

Ans Macro

2, The following person was well known in economics with the general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of 1929.

ans John Maynard Keynes

The Physiocrats adopted __ in the 18th century, in their table Economique to show the circulation of wealth

Ans macro

4, __ was first used in economics by Ragner Frisch in scientific approach

Ans macro

5, __ can be define as the behavior of the whole (aggregate) economy or economic systems rather than individual economic markets.

ans Macroeconomics

6, The most vital differences between micro and macroeconomics is rather than focusing on individual households and firms, it examines conditions within the __ as a whole

ans economy

7, Another name for __ is the net product

ans circulation of wealth

8, __ was originated with the mercantilists in the __ and 17th centuries

Ans: Macro, 16th

9, The following except one is not the goal of macroeconomics

Ans Price Control

10, ___ means is a situation in which everyone that want to work gets work

Ans Full employment
Question:  is an institution which accepts deposits makes business loans and offers related

Answer:Commercial bank



Question: At the end of  the banking system consisted of the Central Bank of Nigeria forty two commercial banks and twenty four merchant banks

Answer:1988



Question: In  several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

Answer:1952



Question: British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in 1912 to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa and to issue a West African currency convertible to

Answer:British pounds sterling



Question: No banking legislation existed  until 1952

Answer:Nigeria



Question: In 1892 Nigerias first bank the  was established

Answer:African Banking Corporation



Question: A financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities either directly by loaning or indirectly through

Answer:capital markets



Question: Transactionary motive is the motive of holding

Answer:money



Question: The following are not functions of money except

Answer:store of value



Question: The following are the characteristics of money except

Answer:Specding ability



Question: Increase in  results in increase in economic welfare

Answer:per capita income



Question: The economic welfare cannot be said to have increased if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of

Answer:labour



Question: If the change in were due to change in prices it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare

Answer: national income



Question: According to AC Pigou an economist assert that there is a close relationship between economic  and national income because both of them are measured in terms of money

Answer:welfare



Question:  attaches great importance to economic welfare because welfare is a very wide term

Answer:AC Pigou



Question: The average propensity to save is an economic term that refers to the proportion of income that is saved rather than  on goods and services

Answer:spent



Question: The income not spent on goods and services for current  is called savings

Answer:consumption



Question:  is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it

Answer:Marginal propensity to consume



Question: In a geometric function the  is actually the slope of the consumption function

Answer:MPC



Question:  consumption represents consumption when income is zero

Answer:Autonomous



Question: Per capita income is defined as the ratio of a countrys income to its population while  is defined as the ratio of a countrys GDP to the population of the country

Answer:GDP per capita



Question:  income does not include the income earned abroad

Answer:Domestic



Question: The income of citizens of a country living abroad is termed factor  from the rest of the world

Answer:income



Question: Mr Tunde Bakare a shoe marker charges N200000 for each shoes that he makes He pays his shop apprentice N20000 per shoe made in return for sweeping the floor and other chores For each shoe made what is the total contribution of Mr Tunde bakares and her apprentice to GDP

Answer:N2000



Question: National income accounting is a term used in economics to refer to the  system that a national government uses to measure the level of the countrys economic activity in a given time period

Answer:book keeping



Question: In an open economy which imports raw materials and other intermediate products at high prices the cost of production of  will always rise

Answer:domestic goods



Question: Rising and falling prices are both bad because they bring unnecessary  to some and undue advantage to others

Answer: loss



Question: One of the goals of  policy is to stabilize the price level

Answer:macroeconomics



Question: In the  the physiocrats adopted it in their table Economique to show the circulation of wealth

Answer:18th century



Question: Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole  or economic systems rather than individual economic markets which is the domain of Microeconomics

Answer:aggregate economy



Question:  is the motive of holding money

Answer:Transactionary motive



Question: Commercial bank is an institution which accepts  makes business loans and offers related

Answer:deposits



Question: British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in  to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa and to issue a West African currency convertible to British pounds sterling

Answer:1912



Question: At the end of 1988 the banking system consisted of the  forty two commercial banks and twenty four merchant banks

Answer:Central Bank of Nigeria



Question: A  is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities either directly by loaning or indirectly through capital markets

Answer:financial institution



Question: No banking legislation existed Nigeria until

Answer:1952



Question: In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a  to facilitate economic development

Answer:central bank



Question: In  Nigerias first bank the African Banking Corporation  was established

Answer:D: 1892



Question: Import demand changes as changes

Answer:income



Question:  depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer:Imports



Question: The  are guided by the level of income price level taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer:spending decisions



Question: In technical terms  is the increase of consumer surplus  plus producer surplus  from lower tariffs  or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer:Gain from trade



Question: The two components of import demand is fixed and at the same time it varies with

Answer:income



Question: When income rises the aspect of  rises as well and when income falls it falls

Answer:import demand



Question: Because export is exogenous while a part of import is an increasing function of income net exports are related to national incomenational output

Answer:negatively



Question: Exports depend on spending decisions made by foreign  or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer:consumers



Question: Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary  with each other

Answer:trading



Question: Exports are determined by factors outside the control of the  economy

Answer:home
Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading

Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the individual economic market. True or False? ___________

101. False*
________ was the economist who developed a general theory of income, output and employment.

102. Keynes*
The term “macro” was first used in economics by Ragner Frisch in the year ___________

103. 1933*
Full employment means the absence of __________ unemployment.

104. Involuntary*
One of the goals of macroeconomics policy is to stabilize the price level. True or False? ___________

105. True*
Macroeconomics is the study of ___________ of an economy as a whole

106. Aggregates*
___________ is the summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals.

107. GDP*
Goods and services produced in the previous years are included in the GDP calculation. True or False? _______________

108. False*
Final good or service is the end product of the ___________ process.

109. Production*
A special type of good that is difficult to class as intermediate or final is a ___________ good

110. Capital*
Social security such as unemployment insurance, scholarships are called ___________ payment

111. Transferred*
Problem of ___________ counting is one of the problems of computation of GDP

112. Double*
The income of citizens of a country living abroad is termed ___________ income from the rest of the world

113. Factor*
Net National Product is Gross National Product minus ___________

114. Depreciation*
Domestic income is ___________ income minus net income earned from abroad

115. National*
__________ income is personal income minus direct taxes.

116. Disposable*
Real gross domestic product is nominal gross domestic product that has been adjusted for _____________

117. Inflation*
________ GDP is the GDP measured in the current market prices of the goods and services.

118. Nominal*
Real GDP is called GDP at ___________ prices

119. Constant*
A particular year when prices are normal or stable is called the _______________ year

120. Base*
National income account provides a basis for national economic policies. True or False ___________________

121. True*
National income is GDP less net factor income from ___________

122. Abroad*
When import is subtracted from export, we have ___________ exports

123. Net*
When consumer expenditure is subtracted from the amount of disposable income, it is referred to as ___________

124. Savings*
The current governor of Central Bank of Nigeria is ___________

125. Godwin Emefiele*
___________ is the use of goods and services by households

126. Consumption*
The lender of last resort and financial adviser to the government is ___________ bank

127. Central*
In the consumption function, C = b0 + b1Y ; b0 is referred to as ___________ consumption

128. Autonomous*
b1 in the consumption function is known as ___________ propensity to consume

129. Marginal*
Autonomous consumption represents consumption when income is ___________

130. Zero*
___________ propensity to consume refers to the percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings

131. Average*
Government policy is not a determinant of savings. True or False ___________

132. False*
Level of national income is a determinant of investment. True or False ______________

133. True*
___________ coincidence of want is a problem associated with trade by barter

134. Double*
The ease with which money can be carried is referred to as ___________

135. Portability*
Money as a ___________ of exchange is the most important function of money

136. Medium*
Money as a unit of ___________ makes it possible to measure the prices of goods and services

137. Account*
The demand for liquidity for day to day transactions is known as ___________ motive for liquidity.

138. Transactionary*
___________ motive is the demand for liquidity for unforeseen circumstances

139. Precautionary*
A financial institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services is a ___________ bank

140. Commercial*
Non-residential investment is not part of gross private domestic investment. Agree or Disagree ___________________

141. Disagree*
___________ investment is the value of investment in buildings, machinery, before taking away depreciation

142. Gross*
National defence, provision of social amenities , policing, internal and external securities are all part of ___________ spending

143. Government*
Value added tax is an example of ___________ tax

144. Indirect*
Personal income tax, capital gains tax are examples of ___________ tax

145. Direct*
Government consumption and investment are part of government spending but excludes ___________ payments.

146. Transfer*
Government ___________ is money received by a government

147. Revenue*
___________ is a compulsory levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms

148. Tax*
A situation where tax rate reduces as the size of income increases is ___________ tax

149. Regressive*
Budget ___________ is a status of financial health in which expenditures exceed revenue

150. Deficit*
Macroeconomics studies the behavior of which economic systems

whole (aggregate)

Macroeconomics examines

All of the options

Objectives of macroeconomics does not include

Individual economic market

When the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time is known as

economic growth

One of the Keynesian concept of full employment involves

Reduction in the real wage rate

___ is the study of individual economic units of an economy

Microeconomics

The major determinant of macroeconomic problems is

Income

Who developed macroeconomics as a distinct method in economic theory?

John Keynes

The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals is

Gross domestic product (GDP)

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?

None of the options

The followings is not included in the calculation of GDP except

current year production

Domestic income does not include:

Income earned abroad

The ratio of a country’s income to its population is known as ___

Per capita income

Personal income minus direct tax is known as

Disposable income

The importance of national income accounting does not include

For poverty alleviation

There are ___ basic approaches to the measurement of GDP

Three (3)

After subtracting depreciation from GNP, what we get is called

Net national product (NNP).

Aggregate consumption in any economy depends on a number of factors except

Capital accumulation

The determinants of savings does not include

Social cost

Saving is income

Not spent

With disposable income of N20,000 and spending of N8,000. What is APC?

0.4

Components of investment includes

All of the options

Which of the following is not a determinant of investment

None of the options

The exchange of good for goods and services for services is called

Barter system

One of these is not a stage in the evolution of money

Standard money

Who formulated the equation of exchange?

Irvin Fisher

The following are functions of money except

Unit of Measurement

The first money deposit bank in Nigeria was established in the year

1891

One of these is not a function of the central bank

Acceptance of deposits

Precautionary demand for money will be directly influenced by

A person’s level of income

One of the following is not a problem associated with the barter system

None of the options

Holding cash for the purchase of bond and securities is referred to as

Speculative demand for money

The first bank in Nigeria was known as

African Banking Corporation

The primary function of commercial bank is to

Accept deposits from every class

Banks that were licensed before Nigeria’s independence in 1960

First generation banks

The expenditure of households on goods and services is referred to as

Personal consumption expenditure

Gross private domestic investment includes

All of the options

Reasons for the downward sloping of the Aggregate Demand Curve

All of the options

The components of aggregate expenditure does not include

Capital accumulation

Factors that lead to increase in government spending excludes.

Political stability

Reasons why government levy taxes exclude

To punish the citizens

One of these is not a disadvantage of international trade

Technical knowledge

Trade between two countries is known as

Bilateral trade

Three approaches of measuring national income account are

Income, output, expenditure

Reasons for increased government expenditure in Nigeria does not include

Good governance

Compulsory levy by government to the citizens is known as

Taxation

The proponent of the theory of Comparative Cost Advantage

David Ricardo

Comparative advantage doctrine is based on the assumptions except

Unequal cost of production

Which arm of the government implements the budget

The Executive

Roles of government budgets exclude

Advisory
Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading
Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.

exogenous; negatively



The problem of ________ arises when applying the Output expenditure

double counting


The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income

National Income/ Total Goods and services

...........National Income/Total Population


Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of ___

corporate organization

Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___

National Income accounting

A _____ company is one which transacts the business of banking which means the accepting for the purpose of lending all investment of deposits of money from the public

banking


Is not one of the characteristics of budget

Proportionality

Financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through _____

capital markets




British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in 1912 to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa and to issue a West African currency convertible to ____

British pounds sterling





______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication

Piguo

An aggregation of an individual\'s income with disregard of direct taxes is referred to as _____

Aggregate income

A summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals of that country is referred to as ____

GDP

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by

Depreciation


The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and _____ is called Gross domestic product

non-nationals

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?

Problem of paid services

Approaches to measuring GDP are ___ in number

3

The following are components of investment except ____

Marginal investment

An example of fiat money is

Paper naira

Money and wealth are the same thing

TRUE




























































If the level of income is 2000, planned export demand equal marginal propensity to import is 0.4 and exogenous import is 340. Calculate the net export.
None of Options??

A public good is associated with ______
Economy of scale??



Mathematically, MPC + MPS = ____
1

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

The meaning of _____ in macroeconomics is disposable income
None of Options

The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income
National Income/Total Population

Value added method is used when the value of ______ and ______ produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year
final goods and services

Given the open economy model Y = C + I + G + (X – M), the meaning of (X-M) in the model is_____
import expenditure minus net exports

The Problem of double counting: the greatest difficulty in measuring national income is that of double counting, which arises from the improper distinction between final and an _____
intermediate product

Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___
National Income accounting

The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government in _____
1968

______ for any firm is the market value of its product or service minus the cost of inputs purchased from other firms
Value added

Expenditure approach measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by _______ and ______ in a particular period of time.
individual private businesses and public sector

The income approach to the calculation of GDP measures GDP in terms of who receives
None of the Option

Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______
None of the Option

Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others
prices

To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages
effective demand

One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level
macroeconomics

______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication
Piguo!

_____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level
Macroeconomics

The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933
Ragner Frisch

John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____
1929

Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets
aggregate economy

According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money
income

Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.
welfare



Macroeconomics problems was dealt with vigorously by ______ economists
Sismondi and Marx

Given S = -bo + BY, where -bo in the model means__________
autonomous

An example of closed economy is____________
Y = C + I

In the early 1933, macro was used in economics by _________
Ragner Frisch

The following economists execept one is not part of those that developed the theory of money and general prices ____________
Smith

The meaning of macro means __________
Aggregate Economy

The prolem of double counting or multiple counting arises when applying the ______ method to etimate national income
Output expenditure

In the 18th century the ________ economist makes use of macroeconomics
physiocrat

Consumption is the use of goods and services by __________
household

The following except one is not the goal of macroeconomics ____________
Full Production

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

An increase in price expectations shifts the long-run aggregate supply curve to the ___.
Right

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

According to the wealth effect, aggregate demand slopes downward (negatively) because
lower prices increase the value of money holdings and consumer spending increases.

Which of the following statements is true regarding the long-run aggregate supply curve? The long-run aggregate supply curve
is vertical because an equal change in all prices and wages leaves output unaffected.

A tax is a ____ levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms as it relates to the incomes, consumption, and production of goods and services
compulsory

Is not one of the characteristics of budget
Proportionality

Given AD = C + I + G + NX , where C = 520 + 0.6Y; I = 120; and G = 200; NX = 12 and T = 150, what is the equilibrium output?
1800

Economists refer to fluctuations in output as the \
Unpredictable

Stagflation occurs when the economy experiences
rising prices and falling output

Which of the following would not cause a shift in the long-run aggregate supply curve?
An increase in price expectations

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?
Problem of paid services

If the banks in an economy operate with a reserve ratio of 20 per cent then the money multiplier is:
5

If Obaka buys a newly built retirement home, this transaction would affect
Investment

The use of goods and services by household is referred to as ____
Consumption

Which of the following is not a function of money?
Hedge against inflation

An example of fiat money is
Paper naira

Reserve requirements that may be imposed on an economy’s banks by its central bank specify that banks’ reserves must be a minimum percentage of their
Deposits

Which of the following policy actions by a central bank is likely to increase the money supply?
Buying government bonds in open market operations

Money and wealth are the same thing
FALSE\'

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by
Depreciation

Microeconomics is the study of individual economic units of an economy whereas macroeconomics is the study of ___ of an economy as a whole.
aggregates

If a tailor buys cloth for N10,000 and thread for N1,000 and uses them to produce and sell N25,000 worth of dresses to consumers, the contribution to GDP is
N25,000

Gross Domestic Product is the sum of the market value of the
Final goods and services.

Gross Domestic Product can be measured as the sum of
Consumption, investment, government purchases, and net exports

Which of the following can be excluded from Nigeria GDP for 2020? The sale of would be
A home built in 2019 by Brains and Harmers at Lugbe and first sold in 2020.

Real GDP is measured in ________ prices while nominal GDP is measured in ________ prices.
base year; current year

An example of a transfer payment is
Unemployment benefits

Nigeria Gross Domestic Product (in contrast to Gross National Product) measures the production and income of
People and factories located within the borders of the Nigeria.

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'



151. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

152. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

153. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

154. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

155. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

156. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

157. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

158. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

159. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

160. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics



33. The ____ of aggregate demand indicates that a change in taxes will shifts the aggregate demand curve in the direction opposite to that of the change in taxes

	      demand curve

	      supply side

	--->> Keynesian analysis

	      savings curve

34. The problem of ________ arises when applying the Output expenditure

	--->> double counting

	      expenditure

	      National income

	      aggregate supply

35. The _____ are negative when there is decrease in the equilibrium GDP

	      net imports

	--->> net exports

	      investment goods

	      Gross Private Investment

36. Along a given aggregate supply curve an increase in the price level leads to an increase in aggregate output because ______

	      workers work more hours, due to the increase in the real wage

	--->> firms increase production in response to higher profits

	      workers work more hours, due to the decrease in the real wage

	      All of the Options

37. Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of ___

	      people

	      Government

	      corporate organization

	--->> None of the Options

38. ______ is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it

	      Consumption

	      Savings

	--->> Marginal propensity to consume

	      Investment

39. In a ____ not all basic needs are generally met by the Private sector

	--->> free market economy

	      economy

	      supply sector

	      None of the Options

40. The british colonial officials established the ______ in 1912

	--->> West African Currency Board

	      Nigerian bank

	      monetary authority

	      CBN

41. A sum of N5000.00 is fixed on a shoe, then the fixed tax of N5000.00 is the ________

	      direct tax

	      indirect tax

	--->> Specific tax

	      Advarolem tax

42. In ____ year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

	      1960

	      1966

	      1955

	--->> 1952



2) Mr Olaoluwa a foreigner buy N800 billion worth of Nigerian exports and Mrs Vivian Odishika a Nigerian buy N700 billion worth of foreign imports in a given year. Therefore, the net exports is_________

	      1Billion

	      22Billion

	      3.2Billion

	--->> None of the Options

3) ______ of import analysis shows that import are purcahses by domestic buyers of goods and services that were produced abroad

	      Investment

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Microeconomics

	      All of the Options

4) The ______ generation banks are licensed before 1960

	--->> first

	      second

	      third

	      fourth

5) In the ______ consumption expenditure, the component of the consumption is the monthly income reportn

	      Firm's

	--->> personal

	      company's

	      overall

6) _______ is said to be the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate use

	      Savings

	      Consumption

	--->> Investment

	      Goods and Services

7) Nigeria purchased N11 billion of gasoline fron Mali last year, but it also sold N28 billion of gasoline to Ghana last year, therefore Nigeria's net gasoline export is _________

	      44.2Billion

	      2.3Billion

	      1.5Billion

	--->> None of the Options

8) The Gross Private domestic investment is the total investment in capital by the _____

	      domestic sector

	--->> investors

	      private sector

	      Government sector

9) The motive of holding money for unforseen contingency is ______

	      Transactionary motive

	      Speculative motive

	      Unforseen motive

	--->> precautionary motive

10) In the theory of final consumption expenditure, the expenditure by resident households on the domestic territory and expenditure by resident household abroad are added together but excludes any non-resideent hoseholds' expenditure on the ______

	--->> domestic territory

	      list of consumers

	      overall expenditrure

	      None of the Options

11) The _____ measures the investment used to calculate Gross domestic product in economic measurement of a nation

	      Gross National Product

	      National investment

	      Investment of a nation

	--->> Gross Private domestic investment




1--- banking legislation

2_ banking

3-- British pounds sterling

4__ Yd

5--- 1952

6--- capital markets

7--- none of the options

8___1988

9___ deposits

10___ African Banking corporation


Book keeping system

None of the options

Gross domestice product

Price stability

Production

None of the options

None of the options

Non-nationals

Full employment

National income accounting
======
ECO122
======

71. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

72. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

73. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

74. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

75. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

76. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

77. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

78. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

79. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

80. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication

Piguo

An aggregation of an individual\'s income with disregard of direct taxes is referred to as _____

Aggregate income

A summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals of that country is referred to as ____

GDP

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by

Depreciation


The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and _____ is called Gross domestic product

non-nationals

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?

Problem of paid services

Approaches to measuring GDP are ___ in number

3

The following are components of investment except ____

Marginal investment

An example of fiat money is

Paper naira

Money and wealth are the same thing

TRUE
======
ECO122
======

71. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

72. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

73. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

74. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

75. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

76. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

77. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

78. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

79. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

80. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

======
ECO122
======

81. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

82. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

83. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

84. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

85. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

86. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

87. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

88. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

89. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

90. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

======
ECO122
======

91. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

92. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

93. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

94. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

95. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

96. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

97. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

98. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

99. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

100. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

101. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

102. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

103. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

104. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

105. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

106. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

107. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

108. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

109. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

110. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

======
ECO122
======

111. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

112. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

113. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

114. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

115. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

116. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

117. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

118. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

119. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

120. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

======
ECO122
======

121. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

122. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

123. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

124. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

125. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

126. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

127. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

128. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

129. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

130. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

======
ECO122
======

131. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

132. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

133. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

134. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

135. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

136. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

137. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

138. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

139. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

140. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

141. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

142. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

143. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

144. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

145. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

146. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

147. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

148. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

149. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

150. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

151. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

152. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

153. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

154. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

155. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

156. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

157. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

158. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

159. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

160. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

======
ECO122
======

161. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

162. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

163. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

164. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

165. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

166. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

167. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

168. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

169. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

170. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

171. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

172. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

173. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

174. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

175. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

176. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

177. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

178. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

179. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

180. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

======
ECO122
======

181. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

182. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

183. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

184. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

185. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

186. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

187. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

188. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

189. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

190. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

======
ECO122
======

191. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

192. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

193. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

194. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

195. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

196. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

197. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

198. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

199. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

200. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

201. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

202. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

203. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

204. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

205. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

206. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

207. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

208. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

209. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

210. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

======
ECO122
======

211. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

212. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

213. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

214. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

215. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

216. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

217. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

218. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

219. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

220. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

======
ECO122
======

221. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

222. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

223. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

224. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

225. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

226. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

227. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

228. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

229. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

230. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

======
ECO122
======

231. Nigeria purchased N11 billion of gasoline fron Mali last year, but it also sold N28 billion of gasoline to Ghana last year, therefore Nigeria's net gasoline export is _________

	      44.2Billion

	      2.3Billion

	      1.5Billion

	--->> None of the Options

232. The _____ measures the investment used to calculate Gross domestic product in economic measurement of a nation

	      Gross National Product

	      National investment

	      Investment of a nation

	--->> Gross Private domestic investment

233. In the ______ consumption expenditure, the component of the consumption is the monthly income reportn

	      Firm's

	--->> personal

	      company's

	      overall

234. Mr Olaoluwa a foreigner buy N800 billion worth of Nigerian exports and Mrs Vivian Odishika a Nigerian buy N700 billion worth of foreign imports in a given year. Therefore, the net exports is_________

	      1Billion

	      22Billion

	      3.2Billion

	--->> None of the Options

235. In the theory of final consumption expenditure, the expenditure by resident households on the domestic territory and expenditure by resident household abroad are added together but excludes any non-resideent hoseholds' expenditure on the ______

	--->> domestic territory

	      list of consumers

	      overall expenditrure

	      None of the Options

236. The ______ generation banks are licensed before 1960

	--->> first

	      second

	      third

	      fourth

237. _______ is said to be the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate use

	      Savings

	      Consumption

	--->> Investment

	      Goods and Services

238. The motive of holding money for unforseen contingency is ______

	      Transactionary motive

	      Speculative motive

	      Unforseen motive

	--->> precautionary motive

239. The Gross Private domestic investment is the total investment in capital by the _____

	      domestic sector

	--->> investors

	      private sector

	      Government sector

240. ______ of import analysis shows that import are purcahses by domestic buyers of goods and services that were produced abroad

	      Investment

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Microeconomics

	      All of the Options

======
ECO122
======

241. In a ____ not all basic needs are generally met by the Private sector

	--->> free market economy

	      economy

	      supply sector

	      None of the Options

242. A sum of N5000.00 is fixed on a shoe, then the fixed tax of N5000.00 is the ________

	      direct tax

	      indirect tax

	--->> Specific tax

	      Advarolem tax

243. Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of ___

	      people

	      Government

	      corporate organization

	--->> None of the Options

244. The british colonial officials established the ______ in 1912

	--->> West African Currency Board

	      Nigerian bank

	      monetary authority

	      CBN

245. Along a given aggregate supply curve an increase in the price level leads to an increase in aggregate output because ______

	      workers work more hours, due to the increase in the real wage

	--->> firms increase production in response to higher profits

	      workers work more hours, due to the decrease in the real wage

	      All of the Options

246. In ____ year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

	      1960

	      1966

	      1955

	--->> 1952

247. The ____ of aggregate demand indicates that a change in taxes will shifts the aggregate demand curve in the direction opposite to that of the change in taxes

	      demand curve

	      supply side

	--->> Keynesian analysis

	      savings curve

248. ______ is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it

	      Consumption

	      Savings

	--->> Marginal propensity to consume

	      Investment

249. The problem of ________ arises when applying the Output expenditure

	--->> double counting

	      expenditure

	      National income

	      aggregate supply

250. The _____ are negative when there is decrease in the equilibrium GDP

	      net imports

	--->> net exports

	      investment goods

	      Gross Private Investment

The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income
National Income/Total Population

Value added method is used when the value of ______ and ______ produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year
final goods and services

Given the open economy model Y = C + I + G + (X – M), the meaning of (X-M) in the model is_____
import export minus export

The Problem of double counting: the greatest difficulty in measuring national income is that of double counting, which arises from the improper distinction between final and an _____
intermediate product

Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___
National Income accounting

The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government in _____
1968

______ for any firm is the market value of its product or service minus the cost of inputs purchased from other firms
Value added

Expenditure approach measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by _______ and ______ in a particular period of time.
individual private businesses and public sector

The income approach to the calculation of GDP measures GDP in terms of who receives
None of the Option

Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______
None of the Option








1--- banking legislation

2_ banking

3-- British pounds sterling

4__ Yd

5--- 1952

6--- capital markets

7--- none of the options

8___1988

9___ deposits

10___ African Banking corporation
Economic growth is measured by the increase in the amount of goods and services in each successive period : time


...........is defined as the process whereby the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time: Economic growth


Rapid _ leads to urbanization and industrialization with their adverse effects on the pattern of living and environment: growth
In an which imports raw materials and other intermediate products at high prices, the cost of production of domestic goods will always rise: open economy
If the change in were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare: national income
_ can be maintained by following acounter-cyclical monetary Policy: Price stability
The economic welfare cannot be said to have increased, if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of : labour
Generally, _ belief in the possibility of continual growth: economists
A country with a _ must be at a Surplus to repay the debt over a reasonably short period of time: net debt





The economic welfare cannot be said to have increased, if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of LABOUR
Generally, belief in the possibility of continual growth ECONOMISTS
If the change in were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare NATIONAL INCOME Economic growth is measured by the increase in
the amount of goods and services in each successive period TIME
Rapid leads to urbanization and industrialization with their adverse effects on the pattern of living
and environment GROWTH
is defined as the process whereby the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time ECONOMIC GROWTH
In an which imports raw materials and other intermediate products at high prices, the cost of production of domestic goods will always rise OPEN ECONOMY
can be maintained by following acounter-cyclical monetary Policy PRICE STABILITY
A country with a must be at a Surplus to repay the debt over a reasonably short period of time NET DEBT
Increase in results in increase in economic welfare PER CAPITA INCOME


The system the national government uses to measure the level of the country\'s economic activity in a given time period is _______ Bookkeeping system None of the options The goods sold in the black market, are excluded although they are priced (they have market value) and fulfil the needs of the people but from the social point of view, they are not useful, Gross domestic product Policy of _____ is to keeps the value of money stable Price stability The profits earned or losses incurred on account of changes in capital assets as a result of the fluctuations in market prices are included in GDP if and only if they are not responsible for the current year? Production A Shoe maker charges N8000.00 for each pairs of shoe he makes. The Shoe maker pays his shop apprentice N500.00 per cloth made in return for sweeping the floor an None of the options A bag of cassava has a market value of N500, which is the price Olusanya Nigeria Ltd paid for the cassava. If the cassava undergo series of production system, which has a market valu OgoOluwa and sons Ltd is into farming production and he produces N6,000 worth of cattle milk. He sold N1,800 worth of milk to his friends and uses the rest of the milk to feed his livestock, None of the options The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and _____ is called Gross domestic product Non-nationals Keynes alternative definition of ______ is a situation in which aggregate employment is inelastic in response to an increase in the effective demand for its output Full employment Another term used for ______ in economics is book keeping system National income accounting



251. ...... is a document that explicitly described the spending decision of the government Vis-A-Vis the projected revenue and the source
12) Budget
2)..... theory states that a country should specialize in the production of  the commodity or service in which it has lower opportunity cost....
13) comparative advantage
3)........ is the difference btw total government expenditure that is taxes minus government expenditure
14) budget balance
4)...... was the proponent of the theory of comparative advantage
15) David Ricardo
16) ..... is when expenditure is greater than revenue
17) deficit budget
6).... defined as the good and service in which a country is more efficient or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources
18) theory of Absolute advantage
7)------is when the rerevenu to be generated is forecasted to be greater than expenditure
T*surplus budget
8)------are known as running cost which the government undertakes in its day-to-day activities
19) Recurrent expenditure
9)-------are receipts of monies from fines taxes fees etc by the government
20) Recurrent revenue
10)-----is needed to perform some allocative function just as the price mechanism performs in the private sector
21) Budget
======
ECO122  NOUN  PQ





252. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

253. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

254. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

255. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

256. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

257. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

258. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

259. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

260. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

261. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics





22) John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

23) Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

24) _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

25) Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

26) To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

27) Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

28) One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

29) The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

30) According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

31) ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading

Question
Government ______ is the income available to fund the activities of a government.

Answer
revenue



Question
_____ is a situation in financial planning or the budgeting process where total revenues are equal to or greater than total expenses

Answer
Banalnce Budget



Question
When spending exceeds income, the result is a _____

Answer
budget deficit



Question
A ____ might be used to pay off debt, save for the future, or to make a desired purchase that has been delayed

Answer
budget surplus



Question
_____ a situation in which income exceeds expenditures

Answer
Budget surplus



Question
The ___ is an important economic document of a country

Answer
budget



Question
____ is the difference between total government expenditure, that is, taxes minus government expenditure

Answer
Budget balance



Question
___ is a document that explicitly describe the spending decision of the government vis-à-vis the projected revenue and the source

Answer
Budget



Question
The consultant who can do everything more efficiently than every other person is synonymous with the country that can produce everything more _____ than any other country in the world

Answer
efficiently



Question
____ theory states that a country should specialize in the production of a commodity or service in which it has a lower opportunity-cost

Answer
Comparative advantage



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
Government ______ is the income available to fund the activities of a government.

Answer
revenue



Question
_____ is a situation in financial planning or the budgeting process where total revenues are equal to or greater than total expenses

Answer
Banalnce Budget



Question
When spending exceeds income, the result is a _____

Answer
budget deficit



Question
A ____ might be used to pay off debt, save for the future, or to make a desired purchase that has been delayed

Answer
budget surplus



Question
_____ a situation in which income exceeds expenditures

Answer
Budget surplus



Question
The ___ is an important economic document of a country

Answer
budget



Question
____ is the difference between total government expenditure, that is, taxes minus government expenditure

Answer
Budget balance



Question
___ is a document that explicitly describe the spending decision of the government vis-à-vis the projected revenue and the source

Answer
Budget



Question
The consultant who can do everything more efficiently than every other person is synonymous with the country that can produce everything more _____ than any other country in the world

Answer
efficiently



Question
____ theory states that a country should specialize in the production of a commodity or service in which it has a lower opportunity-cost

Answer
Comparative advantage



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
Government ______ is the income available to fund the activities of a government.

Answer
revenue



Question
_____ is a situation in financial planning or the budgeting process where total revenues are equal to or greater than total expenses

Answer
Banalnce Budget



Question
When spending exceeds income, the result is a _____

Answer
budget deficit



Question
A ____ might be used to pay off debt, save for the future, or to make a desired purchase that has been delayed

Answer
budget surplus



Question
_____ a situation in which income exceeds expenditures

Answer
Budget surplus



Question
The ___ is an important economic document of a country

Answer
budget



Question
____ is the difference between total government expenditure, that is, taxes minus government expenditure

Answer
Budget balance



Question
___ is a document that explicitly describe the spending decision of the government vis-à-vis the projected revenue and the source

Answer
Budget



Question
The consultant who can do everything more efficiently than every other person is synonymous with the country that can produce everything more _____ than any other country in the world

Answer
efficiently



Question
____ theory states that a country should specialize in the production of a commodity or service in which it has a lower opportunity-cost

Answer
Comparative advantage



Question
____ was the proponent of the theory of Comparative Advantage

Answer
David Ricardo



Question
The law of _____ is defined as the good or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources

Answer
Absolute Advantage



Question
International trade is important as it is a channel of meeting the wants of individuals who are residents in different ___ of the world

Answer
countries



Question
The reasons for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a ____

Answer
country



Question
______ could therefore be safely defined as trade relation between a country and the rest of the world

Answer
International trade



Question
The act of buying goods or services from a foreign country is called _____

Answer
importing



Question
The act of selling goods or services to a foreign country is called ____

Answer
exporting



Question
An ___ economy is an economy in which there are economic activities between domestic community and outside

Answer
open



Question
Gains from international trade brings about increase ______

Answer
output



Question
The _____ states that countries will benefit from trade with a rise in world output without additional factor inputs when countries specialize in the production of those goods in which their opportunity cost is lower

Answer
law of comparative advantage



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading
Get more at (www.puredu.net)
Get more at (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) 8/10

British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in _____ to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa

1912

Rapid _____ leads to urbanization and industrialization with their adverse effects on the pattern of living and environment

growth

The term "macro" was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

Ragner Frisch

_____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

Macroeconomics

Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

aggregate economy

Commercial bank is an institution which accepts _____, makes business loans, and offers related

deposits

_____ equals exports minus imports

Net export

Financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through _____

capital markets

The income not spent on goods and services for current consumption is called _____

savings

_____ can be maintained by following acounter-cyclical monetary Policy

Price stability (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) ECO122
9/10
To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

effective demand

In a geometric function, the MPC is actually the slope of the ______

concumption function

Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

Prices

_____ is the total Supply of goods and services produced within an economy at a given overall price level in a given time period

Aggregate Supply

Domestic income does not include the income earned _____

abroad

In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate _____

economic development

At the end of 1988, the banking system consisted of the_____, forty-two commercial banks, and twenty four merchant banks

Central Bank of Nigeria

Increase in _____ results in increase in economic welfare

per capita income

A financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts ____ and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through capital markets

deposits

_____ equals consumer spending plus investment plus government spending plus exports minus imports

Gross Private domestic investment (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) ECO122
10/10
262. C Piguo attaches great importance to ____ because welfare is a very wide term

economic welfare

_____ equals exports minus imports

Net export

The _____ cannot be said to have increased, if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of people

economic welfare

Increase in per capita income results in increase in _____

economic welfare

John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

1929

A financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts ____ and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through capital markets

deposits

The term "macro" was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

Ragner Frisch

Commercial bank is an institution which accepts _____, makes business loans, and offers related

deposits

Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

Prices

In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate _____

economic development (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) ECO122
10/10
32) C Piguo attaches great importance to _____ because welfare is a very wide term

economic welfare

The income not spent on goods and services for current consumption is called _____

savings

The income not spent on goods and services for current ____ is called savings

consumption

The ________suggested that increasing total investment, total output, total income and total consumption should raise unemployment caused by deficiency of effective demand

Keynesian theory of employment

Consumption is the use of goods and services by ______

household

If Nigeria purchased N20 billion of gasoline from other countries last year, but it also sold N80 billion of gasoline to other countries last year, the Nigeria\'s net gasoline exports will be _______

None of the Option

_____ are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary trading with each other

Gain from trade

A ___ company is one which transacts the business of banking which means the accepting for the purpose of lending all investment of deposits of money from the public

banking

Economic welfare is that part of _____ welfare which can directly or indirectly be measured in money

social

At the end of ____, the banking system consisted of the Central Bank of Nigeria, forty-two commercial banks, and 24 merchant banks

1988 (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) ECO122
10/10
If the change in____ were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare

national income

Average Propensity to consume refers to the percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on ______

savings

The income of citizens of a country living abroad is termed ____ from the rest of the world

factor income

_____ is a single mathematical function used to express consumer spending

Consumption function

_______ an institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services

commercial bank

Various functions of commercial banks can be divided into three main groups; ____, Agency Functions and General utility function.

Primary Functions

Increase in ____ results in increase in welfare

per capita income

________ is used when the value of final good and services produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year

Value added method

Meaning of APC is _____

average propensity to consume

The income not spent on goods and services for current ____ is called savings

consumption (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) 8/10

At the end of 1988, the banking system consisted of the Central Bank of Nigeria, 42 commercial banks, and _____ merchant banks

24

In macroeconomics, _____ is the accumulation of newly produced termed trade surplus entities

goods and services

One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

macroeconomics

commercial bank is an institution which accepts ______, makes business loans, and offers related services

deposits

The term "macro" was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

Ragner Frisch

In _____ several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

1952

Increase in _____ results in increase in economic welfare

per capita income

If the change in ____ were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare

national income

The income not spent on goods and services for current consumption is called _____

savings

At the end of 1988, the banking system consisted of the_____, forty-two commercial banks, and twenty four merchant banks

Central Bank of Nigeria



(www.puredu.net)
ECO 122 TMA 2

Keynes alternative definition of ______ is a situation in which aggregate employment is inelastic in response to an increase in the effective demand for its output

.........full employment

The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and _____ is called Gross domestic product

......non-nationals


A bag of cassava has a market value of N500, which is the price Olusanya Nigeria Ltd paid for the cassava. If the cassava undergo series of production system, which has a market value of N1000.00 (the price the company paid for the cassava). The cassava is then made into Garri worth N3000.00 in the market. The intermediate goods in this analysis is_____

............None of the Options


Another term used for ______ in economics is book keeping system

........National income accounting



Policy of _____ is to keeps the value of money stable

...........price stability


The goods sold in the black market, are excluded although they are priced (they have market value) and fulfil the needs of the people but from the social point of view, they are not useful, and thus, the income received from their sales and purchases is always not included in _____.


...........Gross domestic Product


A Shoe maker charges N8000.00 for each pairs of shoe he makes. The Shoe maker pays his shop apprentice N500.00 per cloth made in return for sweeping the floor and other chores. For each shoe produced, what is the total contribution of the shoe maker and his apprentice to GDP?

............N4000


The system the national government uses to measure the level of the country\'s economic activity in a given time period is _______

.........book keeping System


OgoOluwa and sons Ltd is into farming production and he produces N6,000 worth of cattle milk. He sold N1,800 worth of milk to his friends and uses the rest of the milk to feed his livestock, which he at the end sold to his friends for N8,500. What is OgoOluwa and sons Ltd contribution to GDP?

,,,,,,,,,,,,None of the Options


The profits earned or losses incurred on account of changes in capital assets as a result of the fluctuations in market prices are included in GDP if and only if they are not responsible for the current year’s _________

.............Production


















































Eco 122 tma 2 10/10

263. Price stability

264. Time

265. Net Debt

266. Economic growth

267. Per capital Income

268. Labour

269. Open economy

270. Growth

271. Economists

272. National Income
Eco 122 tma 2 10/10

273. _____ can be maintained by following acounter-cyclical monetary Policy
	Price stability

274. Economic growth is measured by the increase in the amount of goods and services in each successive ____ period
	Time

275. Net Debt

276. is defined as the process whereby the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time
	Economic growth

277. Increase in _____ results in increase in economic welfare
	Per capital Income

278. The economic welfare cannot be said to have increased, if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of ____
	Labour

279. In an ____ which imports raw materials and other intermediate products at high prices, the cost of production of domestic goods will always rise
	Open economy

280. Rapid _____ leads to urbanization and industrialization with their adverse effects on the pattern of living and environmen
	Growth

281. Generally, _____ belief in the possibility of continual growth
	Economists

282. If the change in ____ were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in economic welfare
	National Income
Eco122 tma3

No _____ existed Nigeria until 1952
	banking legislation

A _____ company is one which transacts the business of banking which means the accepting for the purpose of lending all investment of deposits of money from the public
	banking

British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in 1912 to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa and to issue a West African currency convertible to ____
	British pounds sterling

he meaning of _____ in macroeconomics is disposable income
	Yd

In _____ several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development
	1952

Financial institution is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through _____
	capital markets


If the level of income is 2000, planned export demand equal marginal propensity to import is 0.4 and exogenous import is 340. Calculate the net export.
	none of the options

At the end of _____, the banking system consisted of the Central Bank of Nigeria, 42 commercial banks, and 24 merchant banks
	1988

commercial bank is an institution which accepts ______, makes business loans, and offers related services
	deposits

In 1892 Nigeria's first bank, the ______, was established
	African Banking corporation
Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the individual economic market. True or False? ___________

283. False*
________ was the economist who developed a general theory of income, output and employment.

284. Keynes*
The term “macro” was first used in economics by Ragner Frisch in the year ___________

285. 1933*
Full employment means the absence of __________ unemployment.

286. Involuntary*
One of the goals of macroeconomics policy is to stabilize the price level. True or False? ___________

287. True*
Macroeconomics is the study of ___________ of an economy as a whole

288. Aggregates*
___________ is the summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals.

289. GDP*
Goods and services produced in the previous years are included in the GDP calculation. True or False? _______________

290. False*
Final good or service is the end product of the ___________ process.

291. Production*
A special type of good that is difficult to class as intermediate or final is a ___________ good

292. Capital*
Social security such as unemployment insurance, scholarships are called ___________ payment

293. Transferred*
Problem of ___________ counting is one of the problems of computation of GDP

294. Double*
The income of citizens of a country living abroad is termed ___________ income from the rest of the world

295. Factor*
Net National Product is Gross National Product minus ___________

296. Depreciation*
Domestic income is ___________ income minus net income earned from abroad

297. National*
__________ income is personal income minus direct taxes.

298. Disposable*
Real gross domestic product is nominal gross domestic product that has been adjusted for _____________

299. Inflation*
________ GDP is the GDP measured in the current market prices of the goods and services.

300. Nominal*
Real GDP is called GDP at ___________ prices

301. Constant*
A particular year when prices are normal or stable is called the _______________ year

302. Base*
National income account provides a basis for national economic policies. True or False ___________________

303. True*
National income is GDP less net factor income from ___________

304. Abroad*
When import is subtracted from export, we have ___________ exports

305. Net*
When consumer expenditure is subtracted from the amount of disposable income, it is referred to as ___________

306. Savings*
The current governor of Central Bank of Nigeria is ___________

307. Godwin Emefiele*
___________ is the use of goods and services by households

308. Consumption*
The lender of last resort and financial adviser to the government is ___________ bank

309. Central*
In the consumption function, C = b0 + b1Y ; b0 is referred to as ___________ consumption

310. Autonomous*
b1 in the consumption function is known as ___________ propensity to consume

311. Marginal*
Autonomous consumption represents consumption when income is ___________

312. Zero*
___________ propensity to consume refers to the percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings

313. Average*
Government policy is not a determinant of savings. True or False ___________

314. False*
Level of national income is a determinant of investment. True or False ______________

315. True*
___________ coincidence of want is a problem associated with trade by barter

316. Double*
The ease with which money can be carried is referred to as ___________

317. Portability*
Money as a ___________ of exchange is the most important function of money

318. Medium*
Money as a unit of ___________ makes it possible to measure the prices of goods and services

319. Account*
The demand for liquidity for day to day transactions is known as ___________ motive for liquidity.

320. Transactionary*
___________ motive is the demand for liquidity for unforeseen circumstances

321. Precautionary*
A financial institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services is a ___________ bank

322. Commercial*
Non-residential investment is not part of gross private domestic investment. Agree or Disagree ___________________

323. Disagree*
___________ investment is the value of investment in buildings, machinery, before taking away depreciation

324. Gross*
National defence, provision of social amenities , policing, internal and external securities are all part of ___________ spending

325. Government*
Value added tax is an example of ___________ tax

326. Indirect*
Personal income tax, capital gains tax are examples of ___________ tax

327. Direct*
Government consumption and investment are part of government spending but excludes ___________ payments.

328. Transfer*
Government ___________ is money received by a government

329. Revenue*
___________ is a compulsory levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms

330. Tax*
A situation where tax rate reduces as the size of income increases is ___________ tax

331. Regressive*
Budget ___________ is a status of financial health in which expenditures exceed revenue

332. Deficit*
Macroeconomics studies the behavior of which economic systems

whole (aggregate)

Macroeconomics examines

All of the options

Objectives of macroeconomics does not include

Individual economic market

When the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time is known as

economic growth

One of the Keynesian concept of full employment involves

Reduction in the real wage rate

___ is the study of individual economic units of an economy

Microeconomics

The major determinant of macroeconomic problems is

Income

Who developed macroeconomics as a distinct method in economic theory?

John Keynes

The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals is

Gross domestic product (GDP)

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?

None of the options

The followings is not included in the calculation of GDP except

current year production

Domestic income does not include:

Income earned abroad

The ratio of a country’s income to its population is known as ___

Per capita income

Personal income minus direct tax is known as

Disposable income

The importance of national income accounting does not include

For poverty alleviation

There are ___ basic approaches to the measurement of GDP

Three (3)

After subtracting depreciation from GNP, what we get is called

Net national product (NNP).

Aggregate consumption in any economy depends on a number of factors except

Capital accumulation

The determinants of savings does not include

Social cost

Saving is income

Not spent

With disposable income of N20,000 and spending of N8,000. What is APC?

0.4

Components of investment includes

All of the options

Which of the following is not a determinant of investment

None of the options

The exchange of good for goods and services for services is called

Barter system

One of these is not a stage in the evolution of money

Standard money

Who formulated the equation of exchange?

Irvin Fisher

The following are functions of money except

Unit of Measurement

The first money deposit bank in Nigeria was established in the year

1891

One of these is not a function of the central bank

Acceptance of deposits

Precautionary demand for money will be directly influenced by

A person’s level of income

One of the following is not a problem associated with the barter system

None of the options

Holding cash for the purchase of bond and securities is referred to as

Speculative demand for money

The first bank in Nigeria was known as

African Banking Corporation

The primary function of commercial bank is to

Accept deposits from every class

Banks that were licensed before Nigeria’s independence in 1960

First generation banks

The expenditure of households on goods and services is referred to as

Personal consumption expenditure

Gross private domestic investment includes

All of the options

Reasons for the downward sloping of the Aggregate Demand Curve

All of the options

The components of aggregate expenditure does not include

Capital accumulation

Factors that lead to increase in government spending excludes.

Political stability

Reasons why government levy taxes exclude

To punish the citizens

One of these is not a disadvantage of international trade

Technical knowledge

Trade between two countries is known as

Bilateral trade

Three approaches of measuring national income account are

Income, output, expenditure

Reasons for increased government expenditure in Nigeria does not include

Good governance

Compulsory levy by government to the citizens is known as

Taxation

The proponent of the theory of Comparative Cost Advantage

David Ricardo

Comparative advantage doctrine is based on the assumptions except

Unequal cost of production

Which arm of the government implements the budget

The Executive

Roles of government budgets exclude

Advisory
333. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level
ans- macroeconomics

334. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages
ans-  effective demand

335. ___ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level
ans- Macroeconomics

336. __ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication
ans-

337. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets
ans- aggregate economy

338. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others
ans-  prices

339. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.
ans- welfare

340. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933
ans- Ragner Frisch

341. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money
ans- income

342. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____
ans- 1929
______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication

Piguo

An aggregation of an individual\'s income with disregard of direct taxes is referred to as _____

Aggregate income

A summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals of that country is referred to as ____

GDP

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by

Depreciation


The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and _____ is called Gross domestic product

non-nationals

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?

Problem of paid services

Approaches to measuring GDP are ___ in number

3

The following are components of investment except ____

Marginal investment

An example of fiat money is

Paper naira

Money and wealth are the same thing

TRUE
======
ECO122  NOUN  PQ





343. Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

344. _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

345. The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

346. According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

347. Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

348. John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

349. Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

350. ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

351. To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

352. One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics





33) John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

34) Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

35) _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

36) Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

37) To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

38) Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

39) One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics

40) The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

41) According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

42) ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

ECO122 NOUN EXAM






Mathematically, MPC + MPS = ____
1

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

The meaning of _____ in macroeconomics is disposable income
None of Options

The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income
National Income/Total Population

Value added method is used when the value of ______ and ______ produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year
final goods and services

Given the open economy model Y = C + I + G + (X – M), the meaning of (X-M) in the model is_____
import expenditure minus net exports

The Problem of double counting: the greatest difficulty in measuring national income is that of double counting, which arises from the improper distinction between final and an _____
intermediate product

Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___
National Income accounting

The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government in _____
1968

______ for any firm is the market value of its product or service minus the cost of inputs purchased from other firms
Value added

Expenditure approach measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by _______ and ______ in a particular period of time.
individual private businesses and public sector

The income approach to the calculation of GDP measures GDP in terms of who receives
None of the Option

Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______
None of the Option

Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others
prices

To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages
effective demand

One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level
macroeconomics

______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication
Piguo!

_____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level
Macroeconomics

The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933
Ragner Frisch

John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____
1929

Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets
aggregate economy

According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money
income

Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.
welfare



Macroeconomics problems was dealt with vigorously by ______ economists
Sismondi and Marx

Given S = -bo + BY, where -bo in the model means__________
autonomous

An example of closed economy is____________
Y = C + I

In the early 1933, macro was used in economics by _________
Ragner Frisch

The following economists execept one is not part of those that developed the theory of money and general prices ____________
Smith

The meaning of macro means __________
Aggregate Economy

The prolem of double counting or multiple counting arises when applying the ______ method to etimate national income
Output expenditure

In the 18th century the ________ economist makes use of macroeconomics
physiocrat

Consumption is the use of goods and services by __________
household

The following except one is not the goal of macroeconomics ____________
Full Production

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

An increase in price expectations shifts the long-run aggregate supply curve to the ___.
Right

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

According to the wealth effect, aggregate demand slopes downward (negatively) because
lower prices increase the value of money holdings and consumer spending increases.

Which of the following statements is true regarding the long-run aggregate supply curve? The long-run aggregate supply curve
is vertical because an equal change in all prices and wages leaves output unaffected.

A tax is a ____ levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms as it relates to the incomes, consumption, and production of goods and services
compulsory

Is not one of the characteristics of budget
Proportionality

Given AD = C + I + G + NX , where C = 520 + 0.6Y; I = 120; and G = 200; NX = 12 and T = 150, what is the equilibrium output?
1800

Economists refer to fluctuations in output as the \
Unpredictable

Stagflation occurs when the economy experiences
rising prices and falling output

Which of the following would not cause a shift in the long-run aggregate supply curve?
An increase in price expectations

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?
Problem of paid services

If the banks in an economy operate with a reserve ratio of 20 per cent then the money multiplier is:
5

If Obaka buys a newly built retirement home, this transaction would affect
Investment

The use of goods and services by household is referred to as ____
Consumption

Which of the following is not a function of money?
Hedge against inflation

An example of fiat money is
Paper naira

Reserve requirements that may be imposed on an economy’s banks by its central bank specify that banks’ reserves must be a minimum percentage of their
Deposits

Which of the following policy actions by a central bank is likely to increase the money supply?
Buying government bonds in open market operations

Money and wealth are the same thing
FALSE\'

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by
Depreciation

Microeconomics is the study of individual economic units of an economy whereas macroeconomics is the study of ___ of an economy as a whole.
aggregates

If a tailor buys cloth for N10,000 and thread for N1,000 and uses them to produce and sell N25,000 worth of dresses to consumers, the contribution to GDP is
N25,000

Gross Domestic Product is the sum of the market value of the
Final goods and services.

Gross Domestic Product can be measured as the sum of
Consumption, investment, government purchases, and net exports

Which of the following can be excluded from Nigeria GDP for 2020? The sale of would be
A home built in 2019 by Brains and Harmers at Lugbe and first sold in 2020.

Real GDP is measured in ________ prices while nominal GDP is measured in ________ prices.
base year; current year

An example of a transfer payment is
Unemployment benefits

Nigeria Gross Domestic Product (in contrast to Gross National Product) measures the production and income of
People and factories located within the borders of the Nigeria.

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'



91) According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

92) Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

93) Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

94) The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

95) To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

96) ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

97) John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

98) _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

99) Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

100) One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics



43) The ____ of aggregate demand indicates that a change in taxes will shifts the aggregate demand curve in the direction opposite to that of the change in taxes

	      demand curve

	      supply side

	--->> Keynesian analysis

	      savings curve

44) The problem of ________ arises when applying the Output expenditure

	--->> double counting

	      expenditure

	      National income

	      aggregate supply

45) The _____ are negative when there is decrease in the equilibrium GDP

	      net imports

	--->> net exports

	      investment goods

	      Gross Private Investment

46) Along a given aggregate supply curve an increase in the price level leads to an increase in aggregate output because ______

	      workers work more hours, due to the increase in the real wage

	--->> firms increase production in response to higher profits

	      workers work more hours, due to the decrease in the real wage

	      All of the Options

47) Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of ___

	      people

	      Government

	      corporate organization

	--->> None of the Options

48) ______ is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it

	      Consumption

	      Savings

	--->> Marginal propensity to consume

	      Investment

49) In a ____ not all basic needs are generally met by the Private sector

	--->> free market economy

	      economy

	      supply sector

	      None of the Options

50) The british colonial officials established the ______ in 1912

	--->> West African Currency Board

	      Nigerian bank

	      monetary authority

	      CBN

51) A sum of N5000.00 is fixed on a shoe, then the fixed tax of N5000.00 is the ________

	      direct tax

	      indirect tax

	--->> Specific tax

	      Advarolem tax

52) In ____ year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

	      1960

	      1966

	      1955

	--->> 1952



53) Mr Olaoluwa a foreigner buy N800 billion worth of Nigerian exports and Mrs Vivian Odishika a Nigerian buy N700 billion worth of foreign imports in a given year. Therefore, the net exports is_________

	      1Billion

	      22Billion

	      3.2Billion

	--->> None of the Options

54) ______ of import analysis shows that import are purcahses by domestic buyers of goods and services that were produced abroad

	      Investment

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Microeconomics

	      All of the Options

55) The ______ generation banks are licensed before 1960

	--->> first

	      second

	      third

	      fourth

56) In the ______ consumption expenditure, the component of the consumption is the monthly income reportn

	      Firm's

	--->> personal

	      company's

	      overall

57) _______ is said to be the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate use

	      Savings

	      Consumption

	--->> Investment

	      Goods and Services

58) Nigeria purchased N11 billion of gasoline fron Mali last year, but it also sold N28 billion of gasoline to Ghana last year, therefore Nigeria's net gasoline export is _________

	      44.2Billion

	      2.3Billion

	      1.5Billion

	--->> None of the Options

59) The Gross Private domestic investment is the total investment in capital by the _____

	      domestic sector

	--->> investors

	      private sector

	      Government sector

60) The motive of holding money for unforseen contingency is ______

	      Transactionary motive

	      Speculative motive

	      Unforseen motive

	--->> precautionary motive

61) In the theory of final consumption expenditure, the expenditure by resident households on the domestic territory and expenditure by resident household abroad are added together but excludes any non-resideent hoseholds' expenditure on the ______

	--->> domestic territory

	      list of consumers

	      overall expenditrure

	      None of the Options

62) The _____ measures the investment used to calculate Gross domestic product in economic measurement of a nation

	      Gross National Product

	      National investment

	      Investment of a nation

	--->> Gross Private domestic investment




1--- banking legislation

2_ banking

3-- British pounds sterling

4__ Yd

5--- 1952

6--- capital markets

7--- none of the options

8___1988

9___ deposits

10___ African Banking corporation


Book keeping system

None of the options

Gross domestice product

Price stability

Production

None of the options

None of the options

Non-nationals

Full employment

National income accounting


ECO122  NOUN EXAM


Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading



Question
Let us assume that planned aggregate demand is given by: AD = C + I + G + NX, Let C = 610 + 0.8Y; I = 220; and G = 800; NX = 10 and T = 250. Calculate the equilibrium output.

Answer
None of the above



Question
A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency, is called ________

Answer
exchange rate depreciation



Question
When imported goods and services are purchased from abroad, though we pay in local currency in the local market, importers actually purchase those imported goods with the currency of the ____ country from which such goods are purchased.

Answer
foreign



Question
Exports and imports are both affected by _______

Answer
international prices



Question
There are two components of import demand, the one that is fixed, and the one that _____ with income

Answer
varies



Question
___ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers

Answer
imports



Question
The spending decisions are guided by the level of ____ , price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers

Answer
income



Question
___ depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services

Answer
Exports



Question
____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade

Answer
Gain from trade



Question
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ___ with each other

Answer
trading


Try Another Search
If the level of income is 2000, planned export demand equal marginal propensity to import is 0.4 and exogenous import is 340. Calculate the net export.
None of Options??

A public good is associated with ______
Economy of scale??



10/10

Mathematically, MPC + MPS = ____
1

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

The meaning of _____ in macroeconomics is disposable income
None of Options

The following except one is the formular of Per Capita Income
National Income/Total Population

Value added method is used when the value of ______ and ______ produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year
final goods and services

Given the open economy model Y = C + I + G + (X – M), the meaning of (X-M) in the model is_____
import expenditure minus net exports

The Problem of double counting: the greatest difficulty in measuring national income is that of double counting, which arises from the improper distinction between final and an _____
intermediate product

Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of ___
National Income accounting

The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government in _____
1968

______ for any firm is the market value of its product or service minus the cost of inputs purchased from other firms
Value added

Expenditure approach measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by _______ and ______ in a particular period of time.
individual private businesses and public sector

The income approach to the calculation of GDP measures GDP in terms of who receives
None of the Option

Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______
None of the Option

Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others
prices

To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages
effective demand

One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level
macroeconomics

______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his general theory publication
Piguo!

_____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level
Macroeconomics

The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933
Ragner Frisch

John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____
1929

Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets
aggregate economy

According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money
income

Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.
welfare



Macroeconomics problems was dealt with vigorously by ______ economists
Sismondi and Marx

Given S = -bo + BY, where -bo in the model means__________
autonomous

An example of closed economy is____________
Y = C + I

In the early 1933, macro was used in economics by _________
Ragner Frisch

The following economists execept one is not part of those that developed the theory of money and general prices ____________
Smith

The meaning of macro means __________
Aggregate Economy

The prolem of double counting or multiple counting arises when applying the ______ method to etimate national income
Output expenditure

In the 18th century the ________ economist makes use of macroeconomics
physiocrat

Consumption is the use of goods and services by __________
household

The following except one is not the goal of macroeconomics ____________
Full Production

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

An increase in price expectations shifts the long-run aggregate supply curve to the ___.
Right

Because export is ___ while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are ___ related to national income/national output.
exogenous; negatively

According to the wealth effect, aggregate demand slopes downward (negatively) because
lower prices increase the value of money holdings and consumer spending increases.

Which of the following statements is true regarding the long-run aggregate supply curve? The long-run aggregate supply curve
is vertical because an equal change in all prices and wages leaves output unaffected.

A tax is a ____ levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms as it relates to the incomes, consumption, and production of goods and services
compulsory

Is not one of the characteristics of budget
Proportionality

Given AD = C + I + G + NX , where C = 520 + 0.6Y; I = 120; and G = 200; NX = 12 and T = 150, what is the equilibrium output?
1800

Economists refer to fluctuations in output as the \
Unpredictable

Stagflation occurs when the economy experiences
rising prices and falling output

Which of the following would not cause a shift in the long-run aggregate supply curve?
An increase in price expectations

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'

Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination?
Problem of paid services

If the banks in an economy operate with a reserve ratio of 20 per cent then the money multiplier is:
5

If Obaka buys a newly built retirement home, this transaction would affect
Investment

The use of goods and services by household is referred to as ____
Consumption

Which of the following is not a function of money?
Hedge against inflation

An example of fiat money is
Paper naira

Reserve requirements that may be imposed on an economy’s banks by its central bank specify that banks’ reserves must be a minimum percentage of their
Deposits

Which of the following policy actions by a central bank is likely to increase the money supply?
Buying government bonds in open market operations

Money and wealth are the same thing
FALSE\'

Diamond Bank has, in the past, always operated with a reserve ratio of 25 per cent. It has now been taken over by Access Bank which operates with a reserve ratio of 12½ per cent. Assuming that Diamond Bank adopts the business practices of its new owner, what will be the effect on money supply in Nigeria in which Diamond Bank operates?
Money supply will increase because Diamond Bank will increase its loans.

The value of plant and equipment worn out in the process of manufacturing goods and services is measured by
Depreciation

Microeconomics is the study of individual economic units of an economy whereas macroeconomics is the study of ___ of an economy as a whole.
aggregates

If a tailor buys cloth for N10,000 and thread for N1,000 and uses them to produce and sell N25,000 worth of dresses to consumers, the contribution to GDP is
N25,000

Gross Domestic Product is the sum of the market value of the
Final goods and services.

Gross Domestic Product can be measured as the sum of
Consumption, investment, government purchases, and net exports

Which of the following can be excluded from Nigeria GDP for 2020? The sale of would be
A home built in 2019 by Brains and Harmers at Lugbe and first sold in 2020.

Real GDP is measured in ________ prices while nominal GDP is measured in ________ prices.
base year; current year

An example of a transfer payment is
Unemployment benefits

Nigeria Gross Domestic Product (in contrast to Gross National Product) measures the production and income of
People and factories located within the borders of the Nigeria.

For an economy as a whole, income equals expenditure because the income of the seller must be equal to the expenditure of the buyer.
TRUE\'



101) According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national _____, because both of them are measured in terms of money

	--->> income

	      calculation

	      profit

	      All of the Options

102) Piguo attaches great importance to economic _____ because welfare is a very wide term.

	      goods

	--->> welfare

	      activities

	      None of the Options

103) Rising and falling ____ are both bad because they bring unnecessary loss to some and undue advantage to others

	      demand and supply

	      supply

	--->> prices

	      All of the Options

104) The term “macro” was first used in economics by _____ in 1933

	      Keynes

	      Etilla Shuabu

	--->> Ragner Frisch

	      Adams Smith

105) To achieve full employment, Keynes advocated increase in ______ to bring about reduction in real wages

	      supply

	      welfare

	--->> effective demand

	      None of the Options

106) ______ gave an alternative definition of full employment at another place in his  general theory publication

	      Adams Smith

	--->> Piguo

	      Keynes

	      John Mills

107) John Maynard Keynes developed a general theory of income, output and employment in the wake of the Great Depression of ____

	      1933

	      1922

	      1928

	--->> 1929

108) _____ examines economy-wide phenomena such as changes in unemployment, national income, rate of growth of gross domestic product, inflation and price level

	      National income

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Miroeconomics

	      All of the Options

109) Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole ______ or economic systems rather than individual economic markets

	      aggregate demand

	      aggregate supply

	      aggregate money

	--->> aggregate economy

110) One of the goals of ______ policy is to stabilize the price level

	      economics

	      monetary

	      Miroeconomics

	--->> macroeconomics



63) The ____ of aggregate demand indicates that a change in taxes will shifts the aggregate demand curve in the direction opposite to that of the change in taxes

	      demand curve

	      supply side

	--->> Keynesian analysis

	      savings curve

64) The problem of ________ arises when applying the Output expenditure

	--->> double counting

	      expenditure

	      National income

	      aggregate supply

65) The _____ are negative when there is decrease in the equilibrium GDP

	      net imports

	--->> net exports

	      investment goods

	      Gross Private Investment

66) Along a given aggregate supply curve an increase in the price level leads to an increase in aggregate output because ______

	      workers work more hours, due to the increase in the real wage

	--->> firms increase production in response to higher profits

	      workers work more hours, due to the decrease in the real wage

	      All of the Options

67) Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of ___

	      people

	      Government

	      corporate organization

	--->> None of the Options

68) ______ is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it

	      Consumption

	      Savings

	--->> Marginal propensity to consume

	      Investment

69) In a ____ not all basic needs are generally met by the Private sector

	--->> free market economy

	      economy

	      supply sector

	      None of the Options

70) The british colonial officials established the ______ in 1912

	--->> West African Currency Board

	      Nigerian bank

	      monetary authority

	      CBN

71) A sum of N5000.00 is fixed on a shoe, then the fixed tax of N5000.00 is the ________

	      direct tax

	      indirect tax

	--->> Specific tax

	      Advarolem tax

72) In ____ year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development

	      1960

	      1966

	      1955

	--->> 1952



73) Mr Olaoluwa a foreigner buy N800 billion worth of Nigerian exports and Mrs Vivian Odishika a Nigerian buy N700 billion worth of foreign imports in a given year. Therefore, the net exports is_________

	      1Billion

	      22Billion

	      3.2Billion

	--->> None of the Options

74) ______ of import analysis shows that import are purcahses by domestic buyers of goods and services that were produced abroad

	      Investment

	--->> Macroeconomics

	      Microeconomics

	      All of the Options

75) The ______ generation banks are licensed before 1960

	--->> first

	      second

	      third

	      fourth

76) In the ______ consumption expenditure, the component of the consumption is the monthly income reportn

	      Firm's

	--->> personal

	      company's

	      overall

77) _______ is said to be the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate use

	      Savings

	      Consumption

	--->> Investment

	      Goods and Services

78) Nigeria purchased N11 billion of gasoline fron Mali last year, but it also sold N28 billion of gasoline to Ghana last year, therefore Nigeria's net gasoline export is _________

	      44.2Billion

	      2.3Billion

	      1.5Billion

	--->> None of the Options

79) The Gross Private domestic investment is the total investment in capital by the _____

	      domestic sector

	--->> investors

	      private sector

	      Government sector

80) The motive of holding money for unforseen contingency is ______

	      Transactionary motive

	      Speculative motive

	      Unforseen motive

	--->> precautionary motive

81) In the theory of final consumption expenditure, the expenditure by resident households on the domestic territory and expenditure by resident household abroad are added together but excludes any non-resideent hoseholds' expenditure on the ______

	--->> domestic territory

	      list of consumers

	      overall expenditrure

	      None of the Options

82) The _____ measures the investment used to calculate Gross domestic product in economic measurement of a nation

	      Gross National Product

	      National investment

	      Investment of a nation

	--->> Gross Private domestic investment




1--- banking legislation

2_ banking

3-- British pounds sterling

4__ Yd

5--- 1952

6--- capital markets

7--- none of the options

8___1988

9___ deposits

10___ African Banking corporation


Book keeping system

None of the options

Gross domestice product

Price stability

Production

None of the options

None of the options

Non-nationals

Full employment

National income accounting
Bfn209
Balance sheet shows the present _______ of a business. (Statement)
Profit______ function is one of the acquired roles of the Finance Manager. (planning)
Financial statement is also used for future plans of the _______.(Enterprise)
Risk is the expected _______ of the income flow(variability)
Pandey ______ stated that the basis of the theory of financial management.(2005)
Financial Manager is the person responsible for performing ______ functions.(Finance)
Fixed costs remain constant while _____ costs change in direct proportion to changes in volume of goods. (Variable)
________ is otherwise known as profit and loss account. (Income statement)
________ mechanism system is a vital organ of a market economy. (Price)
Financing Activities consist of cash flows relating to ____ and owners' equity. (Liability)
BUS205
___________ is a means by which power is acquired, exercised and sustained. (Communication)
Non __________ income is used to buy items to meet basic needs. (Discretionary)
_________motivation also causes you to be loyal to certain shops and companies. (Patronage)
__________ is a book in which particulars of all monies received or paid are recorded. (Cash Account)
___________ is the value that products and sellers place on goods or services. (Price)
Social __________ is owed by individuals and not by organizations. (Obligation)
_______ researchers also gather information from a wider group of people. (Market)
The _______ is the total amount supplied by owner of the business or owners equity or net worth. (Capital)
__________ must be attractive. (Packaging)
________include the resources possessed by the firm. (Assets)
BUS207
Verbal communication is one way for people to communicate ______________. (Face to face)
The actual origin of ___________ is subject to considerable speculation(Language)
If a language is about communicating with signals, voice, sounds, gestures, or written symbols, can animal communications be considered as a ___________? (Language)
The basis of _________________ is the interaction between people. (Communication)
Animals do not have a __________ form of a language, but use a language to communicate with each another. (Written)
Some words may be imitative of natural __________, but others may come from expressions of emotion, such as laughter or crying. (Sounds)
Some of the key components of verbal communication are sound, writing, speaking, and ______________. (Language)
A dialogue is a reciprocal conversation between _______ or more entities, (TWO)
As meaning is assigned to words, language develops, which leads to the ___________ of speaking. (Development)
At birth, most people have vocal cords, which produce __________. (Sounds)
BUS106
It could be argued that the _______ school is identical to the management process school. (Empirical)
Art is the imposition of __________. (Pattern)
___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.(Pinciple)
Gilbreth is known for his work on time and _________studies. (Motion)
Decision theory schools believe in _________decision making. (Rational)
The first principles of management were advocated. (Henry fayol)
There are special areas of management that are not subjected to rigous of(Science)
spend his life working on the difference engine (Babbage)
Management can be define as getting thing done through (Organising)
Management can be define as a team or group of individuals in _________(Organisation)
ECO122
Exports are determined by factors outside the control of the ___ economy (Home)
The two components of import demand is fixed, and at the same time it varies with (Income)
The ____ are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of the foreign consumers (Spending Decision)
In technical terms, _____ is the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from lower tariffs or otherwise liberalizing trade (Gain from trade)
Gains from trade are the net benefits to agents from allowing an increase in voluntary ______ with each other (Trading)
Import demand changes as______ changes (Income)
Because export is exogenous while a part of import is an increasing function of income, net exports are_____ related to national income/national output (Negatively)
_____ depend on the spending decisions of domestic consumers (Import)
When income rises, the aspect of _____ rises as well and when income falls, it falls (Import demand)
Exports depend on spending decisions made by foreign ____ or overseas firms that purchase domestic goods and services (Consumer)
ECO231
The demand for goods and services is __ (Direct Demand)
The prices paid to the factors of production are called (All of the above)
Reason for the study of factor pricing are (All of the above)
The demand of factor of product can also be Joint Demand because for producer to produce orange he/she has to demand for all the _(factors of production)
The factors needed in the production process are also known as (Production Service)
The factor pricing is concerned with the determination of prices of services of factors of ______ (Production)
To produce goods and services, ____ need the services of factors of production, like land, labour, capital, and entrepreneur (FIRMs)
The theory of distribution is an attempt to explain how income is distributed among the factors of __ (Production)
The employer of factors of production only uses the factors in the production of goods and services to be finally sold in the ____(Product Market)
When workers are engaged or capital are borrowed, it does not offer any direct satisfaction to the ____ (Producer)
The production concept holds that consumers will value products that are highly (Affordable)
Another important role is the discovery of entrepreneurial talent (Agree)
Marketing's first role is to (Stimulate Aggregate potential demand)
Consumerism is an organized movement of citizens and government to fight wars on poor products(Disagree)
Commodity approach in marketing focuses on (Classes of products)
The major goal of an organization to an extent is (Profit)
The product concept holds that consumers value products that offer (High Quality)
Marketing concept holds that organization must first create to satisfy (Needs and want)
One of the significance of marketing is to provide (impulse purchase)
The purpose of marketing concept is to help organizations (Achieve its goal
BFN203
According Gardon (2014), there is a remarked difference between capital gains investing and the game of speculation
The_________ is a document which sets broad parameters for taxation and ancillary matters connected with taxation (National tax Policy
investing is the art of buying and selling an asset for a profit (Capital Gain Investing)
__ is a technique that reduces risk by allocating investments among various financial instruments, industries and other categories (Diversification)
some or all of a loan when the borrower is ins (Credit Insurance)
The steps involved in personal financial planning process Include all of the following except________ (Goal Division)
are options to purchase common stock at a specified price up to a specified date (Warrants)
Is a type of tax (PAYE)
Owning a current and savings account have the same requirements (False)
Ent203
The achievement needs theory was developed by (McCelland)
Which of the following emphasized the risk aspect of entrepreneurship (Cantillon)
Which of the following a pattern of venture capital development (Mid Stage)
Entrepreneurial process include the following stages except? (Profit Planning)
(New Monnies)
VC stands for (Venture Capital)
Which of the following will not support in-house entrepreneurial development in organizations (Bickering)
CIT201
The software that uses the power and speed of a computer machine to perform some mathematical calculations or simulate some real life situations is called a ___ software. (Modeling)
Ent 209
Friedrich Hayek (1937 is a prominent of( Austrian school of thought)
An entrepreneur who is a rebellion and tries to bring in new ways of working and new society is called ____________________ (Reformist)
The Nigerian Bank for Commerce and Industry (NBCI) was set up in 1973 to provide ____________ by way of loans to indigenous persons, institutions and organisations for medium and long term investments (Equity and Loan)
The risk theory proposes that the _________________ the nature of business, the __________________________ (More Risky Higer profit)
The Human Capital Entrepreneurship Theory is hinged on these two factors _______________ and ________________ (Education and Experience)
* One of the credit functions of BOA is the direct lending to qualified loan applicants engaged in agricultural and nonagricultural small busine (correct)
Mkt 205
Certain (question) are often asked while formulating product strategy
In most organizations, __________ is an annual process, typically covering just the year ahead (Strategic planning)
An important element of distribution strategy for banks is __ (Site Location)
High interest s rate on deposits or reduction rates on loans and advances are good examples of pricing ___________ (Pricing Strategy)
The marketing concept rest on ______________pillars (Four)
A good marketing plan should have the following qualities (All of the above)
are attracted through promises and are retained through satisfaction of expectations (Customers)
Place strategies are concerned with ensuring the prompt delivery of the services to the _______ (Target Market)
_ must always come first before other activities (Planning)
described the emergence of services sector and banks experience in service marketing (Gupta)
acc102
These are accounting concepts except.








ECO122 List of eExam Questions in the Bank
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 Net exports equals
Q2 Gross Private domestic investment equals consumer spending plus investment plus government spending plus
Q3 Gross Private Domestic investment is a relatively specific measure of
Q4 Gross Private domestic investment measures is used to calculate nation
Q5 If import is greater than exports it is called
in economic measurement of a
Q6 If exports is greater than imports it is called
Q7 Net exports can be seen as
Q8 The Personal Consumption is the largest part of
Q9 The gross domestic product is the summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the and non-nationals
Q10 The second generation banks were bank lincensed between	years
Q11 The first generation bank in Nigeria were lincensed before
Q12 National income accounting provides economists and statisticians with detailed information that can be used to track the health of an
Q13 Central bank of Nigeria began Operations in
Q14 British Colonial Officials established the	in 1912
Q15 Nigeria first bank the African banking corporation was established in
Q16 Per capita income is defined as the ratio of a country’s income to its
Q17 Economic growth is defined as the process whereby the time
Q18 According to Keynes, full employment means the absence of
of a country increases over a long period of
Q19 Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the whole (aggregate) economy or economic systems rather than individual
Q20 A rise in domestic inflation can plunge the economy into
Q21 Positive net export that is current account surplus can be used to recover the economy from
Q22 The factor that affect trade flows is the changes in
Q23 Mr Olusanya Samuel an American consumer intends to buy Nigeria product wort of N1000.00, given that exchange rate is 50, so the amount of dollars he need for the transaction is
Q24 A rise in exchange rate when domestic currency rises relative to foreign currency is called
Q25 A fall in exchange when domestic currency falls relative to foreign currency is called
Q26 When exchange rate rises, import demand is
Q27 When exchange rate fall, import demand becomes
Q28 Given that the amount of naira needed when we want to buy $100 worth of US and the exchange rate falls to $50 and product given that exchange rate is N500.00, the amount of naira needed is
Q29 Given that the amount of naira needed when we want to buy $100 worth of United State of America product given that exchange rate is N500.00, the amount of naira needed is
Q30 The rate at which the naira is exchanged for the dollar is called
Q31 International prices affects
Q32 C + I in macroeconomic modelling means
Q33 (X-M) in macroeconomic modelling means
Q34 Mo in macroeconomic modelling means
Q35 Xo in macroeconomic modelling means
Q36 Import demand is the one that changes as
Q37 Imports is treated as	varaible because firmknowthe amount of intermediate goods or capital goods
Q38 Imports depends on the	decisions of domestic consumers
Q39 Export is treated as exogenous varaible because it is determined by factors outside the control of the
Q40 The spending decisions of the government are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of the
Q41 Export depend on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas firms that purchase domestic
Q42 An example of closed economy model is
Q43 An example of open economy model is
Q44 Gain fromtade are commonly described as resulting fromspecialization in production from
Q45 Gain fromtrade can be defined further in technical terms as the increase of consumer surplus plus producer surplus from tariffs
Q46 Gain fromtrade are the net benefits to agents fromallowing an increase in	trading with each other
Q47 The theory where a country specialises in the production of a commodity or services in which it has a lower opportunity cost is called
Q48 David Ricardo was the proponent of the theory of
Q49 Adam Smith is well known with the theory of
Q50 The theory where the goods and services in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources is called
Q51 International trade can be defined as	between a country and the rest of the world
Q52 International economics is concerns with economic relationships within and among
Q53 An Open economy is the economy in which there are economic activities between
Q54 National income accounting is a termused in economics to refer to the	system
Q55 The financial statement of the sources and uses of the government is
Q56 The bearer of the burden of tax is called
Q57 The deliberate act of exploiting the loopholes in the tax regulations to manipulate his economic situation in other to pay lower tax is called
Q58 Tax evasion is a deliberate attempt by a tax payer not to pay
Q59 If a Machine tool is N2,000,000 and an ad valoremtax of 8 percent is imposed, then tax paid is
Q60 If a sumof N200.00 is fixed on a shirt, then the fixed tax N200.00 is called the
Q61	is tax levied is proportional to the tax base or income of the individual
Q62 Regressive tax is a situation where	reduces as the size of income decreases
Q63 Progressive tax is a situation where tax rate increases as the size of
Q64 The two types of tax are
Q65 A tax is a	imposed by the government on individuals and business firms as it relates to the incomes,
consumptions and production of goods and services
Q66 Revenue earned by the government are received fromsources such as accumulation of individuals and corporation
on the incomes and wealth
Q67 Government revenue is the	available to fund the activities of a government
Q68 Government Spending also means
Q69 Government Spending is the spending activities carried out by the	of a country
Q70 Aggregate Supply curve shows the relationship between the overall price level
by all firms in an economy and the
Q71 Aggregate Supply is the period
Q72 Aggregate demand is the
produced within an economy at a given overall price level in a given time
in the economy
Q73 Aggregate demand curve is the relationship between	that firms are willing to provide
Q74 In macroeconomics, investment is the accumulation of newly produced	entities
Q75 Gross investment is the value of investment in buildings, machinery before taking away
Q76 Nigeria's first bank, the African Banking Corporation, was established in
1890
1877
1894
1892
Q77 Mr Afees Oyebo purchase a machine tool at N3,000,000 and an ad valoremtax of 21 percent is imposed, calculate the tax Mr Afees Oyebo finally paid on the machone tools.
N430,000 N630,000 N70.00
None of the above
Q78 If a sumof N800.00 is fixed on a shirt, then the fixed tax of N800.00 is the	tax
Custom Duty Free Specific Import
Q79	tax is leveid proportional to the tax base or income of the individual
Progressive Regressive Proportional None of the above
Q80	tax is a situation where tax rate reduces as the size of income increases
Progressive Regressive Proportional Neutal
Q81 The two types of taxes are	and	tax
Direct and Income Company and Indirect Direct and indirect
al of the above
Q82 The first generation bank were banks that were licensed before
1966
1960
1970
1977
Q83	an institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services
Central Bank Merchant Bank Commercial Bank Insurance Company
Q84 Finance and insurance services represented more than	of Nigeria's GDP in 1988
* 	percent
* 	percent
* 	percent
al of the above
Q85 The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government until 1968, began operations on
July Ist 1955
July 1st 1959
June 1st 1959
July 1st 1949
Q86 In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate
Economic growth Economic activities Economic Development None of the above
Q87 British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in
1993
1912
1922
1990
Q88 In	Nigeria's first bank, the African Banking Corporation, was established
1999
1899
1892
1992
Q89	is a situation when you hold money for investment purposes
Precautionary motive Speculative motive Expenses motive
al of the above
Q90 Economists take the study of money seriously because evidence suggests that
The money supply and the price level move clsoely together Money and interest rate movements are related
Business cycle downturns are preceded by downturns in money growth al of the above are true
Q91 Developing countries stand to gain frominternational trade because
Trade enables themto specialize in producing where they have a comparative advantage Trade gives themaccess to the greater variety of goods produced abroad
Trade subjects their local producers to greater competition al of the above are true
Q92 The calculation of goods produced by Nigerian nationals in South Africa and the one produced in Nigeria is called
Gross Nation's Product Gross National Product Gross Domestic Product Al of the above are true
Q93 Macroeconomics as the field of economics that studies the behavior of the
economy
micro-economy aggregate economy multisector economy
Q94	make(s) it more likely that small countries will trade internationally because their costs of getting products over their borders are worth the effort
Technological cost Transport costs Labor costs
al of the above are true
Q95 Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of
Neo-Classical Economist Economics
Keynesian Economist National Income accounting
Q96 The graph that shows the relationship between consumption and income is
Consumption graph Nation income graph Investmentn graph
Savings graph
Q97 Average propensity to consume refers to
the relationship between consumption and savings
the position where a poor person move to a better level
percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings percentage of income that is not spend on goods and services rather than on savings
Q98 Investment in economics can be defined as
the amount invested in a business amount use for daily transaction
the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate consumption net additions to series of investment
Q99 Which of the following is a primary function of money?
to serve as an encouragement to work to serve as a unit of account
to raise funds for the government
to reduce the burden of excessive imports
Q100 The following except one is the most important goals of macroeconomics objective in an economy
Economic growth balanced of payment Price stability Exchange rate
Q101 What is the real GDP IN 2014?
N10,080 N1440 N10,134
none of the above
Q102 GDP valued at current year prices or nominal GDP fromthe analysis above are	and
N1,774 and 9800 N3,731 and N9,230 N3,080 and N9800
none of the above
Q103 Using the analysis above, What is the GDP FOR 2014?
N9,800 N9,230 N1400
none of the above
Q104 Use the following information to answer question 67, 68, 69 and 70. Let us assume that Nigeria produces only two food stuff: Garri and Rice. The prices and quantities of these two food stuff in 2013 and 2014 are as follows: in 2013 the quantity for Garri and Rice produced are 280 and 420 respectively while Prices of Garri and Rice are N70 AND N56 respectively. For 2014; the quantity for Garri and Rice are 560 and 840 respectively while Prices of Garri and Rice are N140 AND N70 respectively. using the analyis above, what is the GDP for 2013
N3,731 N1,774 N3,080
none of the above
Q105 Disposable income or personal disposable income is the actual income which an individual spent on
Personal Expenses Personal savings Personal purchases none of the above
Q106 The british colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in
1922
1933
1912
1927
Q107 In	year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development
1955
1923
1953
1952
Q108 Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of
corporate and institutional debtors corporate organization
commercial banks and institutional customers none of the above
Q109 Economists take the study of money seriously because evidence suggests that
The money supply and the price level move clsoely together Money and interest rate movements are related
Business cycle downturns are preceded by downturns in money growth al of the above are true
Q110 Which of the following is a central issue in macroeconomics?
the deregulation of the banking industry inflation of prescription drug prices
the ef ect of excise taxes on consumers' buying patterns none of the above
Q111 Which of the following is a primary function of money?
to serve as an encouragement to work to serve as a unit of account
to raise funds for the government
to reduce the burden of excessive imports
Q112 The functions of money are
medium of exchange, unit of account, and store of value pricing, contracts, and means of payment
medium of exchange and the ability to buy goods and services medium of exchange, unit of account, and means of payment
Q113 Money can be define as
Anything that can be used to purchase items
Anything that is generaly accepted, as a means of exchange and payment/settlement of debts. the means of exchanging goods for goods
anything that is use for capital goods
Q114 Investment in economics can be defined as
the amount invested in a business amount use for daily transaction
the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate consumption net additions to series of investment
Q115 The formular for savings function is
S = - b0 + BY S= b1 + By
S= b0 + bYd S= -bo + Yd
Q116 Marginal propensity to consume is defined as
the percent change in savings and income
the percentage change in interest rate and consumption the ratio of investment to Savings
the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it
Q117 Average propensity to consume refers to
the relationship between consumption and savings
the position where a poor person move to a better level
percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings percentage of income that is not spend on goods and services rather than on savings
Q118 The graph that shows the relationship between consumption and income is
Consumption graph Nation income graph Investmentn graph Savings graph
Q119 Budget is needed to performsome allocative function just as the     mechanism performs in the private sectoe
Goods Fiscal Price
Al of the above
Q120 The financial plan of the projected expenditures and revenues of a unit of Government to ensure fiscal period is
The supply of goods and services the budget
the Government expenses None of the above
Q121	is the difference between total government expenditure that is taxes minus government expenditure
Budget deficit Budget balance Budget suplus Budget analysis
Q122 Budget is a document that exolicitly describe the spending decision of the government against the project    and the
Deficit and revenue Supply and revenue Revenue and source None of the above
Q123	theory states that a country should specialise in the production of a commodity or service in which it has a lower opportunity cost.
Comparative disadvantage Comparative advantage Absolute Disadvantage None of the above
Q124	is the goods or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources
The theory of comparative cost advantage The theory of Absolute advantage
The theory of international trade Al of the above
Q125	was the main author of Comparative advantage
Adams Smith David Ricardo John Smith
None of the above
Q126 Adams Smith is associatd with the theory of
Comparative advantage Absolute advantage Theory of trade
None of the above
Q127 The following except one are the importance of international trade.
imports serve domestic industry exports acts as agents of growth imports serve foreign consumers None of the above
Q128 Is true that the reason for trade between countries are not in any way different fromreasons individuals trade within a country.
TRUE FALSE
A and B
None of the above
Q129       is a trade relation between a country and the rest of the world
International trade International prices A and B
None of the above
Q130 Spending by foreigners is a component of
Spending
Goods and services Total spending
Al of the above
Q131 Prices of	varies in nature
International transaction Goods and services International goods
Al of the above
Q132 Economy that is in recession can recover by reducing      and increasing export supply.
Import Supply Export demand Import demand Al of the above
Q133 A fall in domestic inflation will help the economy to recover fromrecession through
Decrease in net export Decrease in net import Increase in net export Al of the above
Q134	,	, and	have implication on the output performnace of the domestic economy
exchange rate, inflation and deflation Inflation, deflation and exchange rate policy
exchange rate, domestic inflation and foreign inflation None of the above
Q135 Positive net export (current account surplus) can be used to recover the economy from
Boom Recession
Bad Government None of the above
Q136 Given a planned aggregate demand: AD = C + I + G + NX, where C = 610 + 0.8Y, I = 210, NX = 10 and T = 220. Calculate the equilibrium output.
4200
4700
4000
None of the above
Q137 Depreciation makes	cheaper and	expensive.
Export and import Exchange rate and goods
Importation and exchange rate Al of the above
Q138 Consider a United States of America consumer that intends to buy Nigeria product worth N8000.00, how much dollars does he need for the transaction? Given the exchange rate to be 210.
30
38.1
34.09
None of the above
Q139	is the rate at which the naira is exchange for the dollar
Local currency Exchange price Exchange rate Bureau de change
Q140	and	are affected by international prices.
Import X and Y Export X and Y Import and prices None of the above
Q141 Assuming the income is 2500, planned export demand is 800, marginal propensity to import is 0.2 and exogenous import is 250. Calculate the net export
300
200
100
None of the above
Q142 If the level of income is 1000, planned export demand equal marginal propensity to import is 0.2 and exogenous import is 250. Calculate the net export.
301
300
350
None of the above
Q143 Meaning of Mo in export tarde is
Exogenous M Autonomous M
Imported basic investment goods None of the above
Q144 Meaning of Xo in export trade is
Exogenous X autonomous X Export demand None of the above
Q145 Because is exogenous while a part of import is an inceasing function of  , net export are negatively related to national output
Export, import Import, export Export, income Al of the above
Q146 The two components of import demand are	and	.
Fixed and mixed Mixed and rises Fixed and rises None of the above
Q147 The	are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of foreign consumers.
Decision making process Decision in trade Spending Decision None of the above
Q148 Microeconomics is the study of individual economic units of an economy whereas macroeconomics is the study of	of an economy as a whole
aggregates smal Exports
Al of the above
Q149	is describe as a result of specialization in production fromeconomies of scale, scope, division of labor
International trade Production
Gains from trade Trade Production
Q150	is the benefits to economic agents for allowing an increase in voluntary trading.
Net Output Net input Net Supply Net
eco122 List of Questions
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 If Nigeria purchased N30 billion of gasoline from other countries last year, but it also sold N70 billion of gasoline to other countries last year, the Nigeria's net gasoline exports will be
N40 Billion
Q2 Various functions of commercial banks can be divided into three main groups; Primary Functions, Agency Functions and
General utility function
Q3 The two essential functions that a financial institution must perform to become a bank are accepting deposit and
Lending to the public
Q4 A banking company is one which transacts the business of banking which means the accepting for the purpose of lending all
of deposits of money from the public
investment
Q5 The meaning of Yd in macroeconomics is
disposable income
Q6		an institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services
commercial bank
Q7 At the end of 1988, the banking system consisted of the Central Bank of Nigeria, forty-two commercial banks, and
merchant banks
24
Q8 In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate
economic development
Q9 British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in	to help finance the export trade of foreign firms in West Africa and to issue a West African currency convertible to British pounds sterling
1912
Q10 No banking legislation existed Nigeria until
1952
Q11 In	Nigeria's first bank, the African Banking Corporation, was established
1892
Q12 A	is a financial intermediary that accepts deposits and channels those deposits into lending activities, either directly by loaning or indirectly through capital markets
financial institution
Q13 The following are the motives of holding money except Spending Motive
Q14 The following are not functions of money except
store of value
Q15 The following are the characteristics of money except
individuality
Q16 Increase in per capita income results in increase in
Economic welfare
Q17 The	cannot be said to have increased, if the increase in national income is due to exploitation of labour Economic welfare
Q18 If the change in national income were due to change in prices, it would be difficult to measure the real change in
Economic welfare
Q19 According an economists A.C Piguo, assert that there is a close relationship between economic welfare and national income, because both of them are measured in terms of
money
Q20	attaches great importance to economic welfare because welfare is a very wide term.
Piguo
Q21 Economic welfare is that part of social welfare which can directly or indirectly be measured in
money
Q22 One of the great welfare economists is
2) C. Pigou
Q23 Economic welfare is a state of the mind which reflects human happiness and
satisfaction
Q24 Investment in economics can be defined as the act of producing capital goods which are not for	consumption
immediate consumption
Q25 The inverse of average propensity to save is the Average propensity to consume
Q26 The average propensity to save is an economic term that refers to the proportion of income that is	rather than spent on goods and services
saved
Q27 Determinants of savings are the followings except
Government factor
Q28 The income not spent on goods and services for current consumption is called
savings
Q29 Marginal propensity to consume is defined as the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in	that necessitated it income
Q30 Meaning of APS is
None of the above
Q31	refers to the percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings
Average Propensity to consume
Q32 Meaning of APC is
average propensity to consume
Q33 In a geometric fashion, the MPC is actually the slope of the	function Consumption
Q34 The meaning of MPC is marginal propensity to consume
Q35 The marginal propensity to consume, on the other hand measures the rate at which	is changing when income is changing
consumption
Q36 Autonomous consumption represents consumption when income is
zero
Q37	was developed by John Maynard Keynes and detailed most famously in his book The General Theory of Employment, Interest, and Money
Consumption function
Q38	is a single mathematical function used to express consumer spending
Consumption function
Q39 Consumption is distinct from consumption expenditure, which is the	of goods and services for use by households
Purchase
Q40 Consumption is the use of goods and services by
household
Q41 A banking company is one which transacts the business of banking which means the accepting for the purpose of lending all
of deposits of money from the public investment
Q42 The meaning of Yd in macroeconomics is
disposable income
Q43 The	method calculates the total expenditure required to purchase the nation's output
Output ??? expenditure
Q44	measures the total value of all, expenditures on goods and services by individual private businesses and public sector (governments) in a particular period of time
Expenditure approach
Q45	is used when the value of final good and services produced in the economy are added together, of particular period usually a year
Value added method
Q46 The following are three basic approaches to the measurement of GDP except one
Value-added approach
Q47 Disposable income or personal disposable income is the actual income which an individual spent on
consumption
Q48	is defined as the ratio of a country???s income to its population, while GDP per capita is defined as the ratio of a country???s GDP to the population of the country
Per capita income
Q49 Domestic income does not include the income earned
abroad
Q50 The income of citizens of a country living abroad
Macroeconomics studies the behavior of the individual economic market. True or False?
False
was the economist who developed a general theory of income, output and employment.
Keynes
The term “macro” was first used in economics by Ragner Frisch in the year
1933
Full employment means the absence of	unemployment.
Involuntary
One of the goals of macroeconomics policy is to stabilize the price level. True or False?
True
Macroeconomics is the study of	of an economy as a whole
Aggregates
is the summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals.
GDP
Goods and services produced in the previous years are included in the GDP calculation. True or False?
False
Final good or service is the end product of the	process.
Production
A special type of good that is difficult to class as intermediate or final is a	good
Capital
Social security such as unemployment insurance, scholarships are called	payment
Transferred
Problem of	counting is one of the problems of computation of GDP
Double
The income of citizens of a country living abroad is termed	income from the rest of the world
Factor
Net National Product is Gross National Product minus
Depreciation
Domestic income is	income minus net income earned from abroad
National
income is personal income minus direct taxes.
Disposable
Real gross domestic product is nominal gross domestic product that has been adjusted for
Inflation
GDP is the GDP measured in the current market prices of the goods and services.
Nominal
Real GDP is called GDP at	prices
Constant
A particular year when prices are normal or stable is called the	year
Base
National income account provides a basis for national economic policies. True or False
True
National income is GDP less net factor income from
Abroad
When import is subtracted from export, we have	exports
Net
When consumer expenditure is subtracted from the amount of disposable income, it is referred to as
Savings
The current governor of Central Bank of Nigeria is
Godwin Emefiele
is the use of goods and services by households
Consumption
The lender of last resort and financial adviser to the government is	bank
Central
In the consumption function, C = b0 + b1Y ; b0 is referred to as	consumption
Autonomous
b1 in the consumption function is known as	propensity to consume
Marginal
Autonomous consumption represents consumption when income is
Zero
propensity to consume refers to the percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings
Average
Government policy is not a determinant of savings. True or False
False
Level of national income is a determinant of investment. True or False
True
coincidence of want is a problem associated with trade by barter
Double
The ease with which money can be carried is referred to as
Portability
Money as a	of exchange is the most important function of money
Medium
Money as a unit of	makes it possible to measure the prices of goods and services
Account
The demand for liquidity for day to day transactions is known as	motive for liquidity.
Transactionary
motive is the demand for liquidity for unforeseen circumstances
Precautionary
A financial institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services is a
bank
Commercial
Non-residential investment is not part of gross private domestic investment. Agree or Disagree
Disagree
investment is the value of investment in buildings, machinery, before taking away depreciation
Gross
National defence, provision of social amenities , policing, internal and external securities are all part of
spending
Government
Value added tax is an example of	tax
Indirect
Personal income tax, capital gains tax are examples of	tax
Direct
Government consumption and investment are part of government spending but excludes
payments.
Transfer
Government	is money received by a government
Revenue
is a compulsory levy imposed by the government on individuals and business firms
Tax
A situation where tax rate reduces as the size of income increases is	tax
Regressive
Budget	is a status of financial health in which expenditures exceed revenue
Deficit
Macroeconomics studies the behavior of which economic systems whole (aggregate)
Macroeconomics examines All of the options
Objectives of macroeconomics does not include Individual economic market
When the real per capita income of a country increases over a long period of time is known as economic growth
One of the Keynesian concept of full employment involves Reduction in the real wage rate
is the study of individual economic units of an economy Microeconomics
The major determinant of macroeconomic problems is Income
Who developed macroeconomics as a distinct method in economic theory?
John Keynes
The summation of all the values of goods and services produced in a country by the nationals and non-nationals is
Gross domestic product (GDP)
Which of the following is not a problem of national income determination? None of the options
The followings is not included in the calculation of GDP except current year production
Domestic income does not include:
Income earned abroad
The ratio of a country’s income to its population is known as
Per capita income
Personal income minus direct tax is known as Disposable income
The importance of national income accounting does not include For poverty alleviation
There are	basic approaches to the measurement of GDP Three (3)
After subtracting depreciation from GNP, what we get is called Net national product (NNP).
Aggregate consumption in any economy depends on a number of factors except Capital accumulation
The determinants of savings does not include Social cost
Saving is income
Not spent
With disposable income of N20,000 and spending of N8,000. What is APC? 0.4
Components of investment includes All of the options
Which of the following is not a determinant of investment None of the options
The exchange of good for goods and services for services is called Barter system
One of these is not a stage in the evolution of money Standard money
Who formulated the equation of exchange? Irvin Fisher
The following are functions of money except Unit of Measurement
The first money deposit bank in Nigeria was established in the year 1891
One of these is not a function of the central bank Acceptance of deposits
Precautionary demand for money will be directly influenced by A person’s level of income
One of the following is not a problem associated with the barter system None of the options
Holding cash for the purchase of bond and securities is referred to as
Speculative demand for money
The first bank in Nigeria was known as African Banking Corporation
The primary function of commercial bank is to Accept deposits from every class
Banks that were licensed before Nigeria’s independence in 1960 First generation banks
The expenditure of households on goods and services is referred to as Personal consumption expenditure
Gross private domestic investment includes All of the options
Reasons for the downward sloping of the Aggregate Demand Curve All of the options
The components of aggregate expenditure does not include Capital accumulation
Factors that lead to increase in government spending excludes. Political stability
Reasons why government levy taxes exclude To punish the citizens
One of these is not a disadvantage of international trade Technical knowledge
Trade between two countries is known as Bilateral trade
Three approaches of measuring national income account are
Income, output, expenditure
Reasons for increased government expenditure in Nigeria does not include Good governance
Compulsory levy by government to the citizens is known as Taxation
The proponent of the theory of Comparative Cost Advantage David Ricardo
Comparative advantage doctrine is based on the assumptions except Unequal cost of production
Which arm of the government implements the budget The Executive
Roles of government budgets exclude Advisory
eco122 TMA1 List of Questions
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 Prices of _______ varies in nature
International transaction
Q2 Economy that is in recession can recover by reducing ______ and increasing export supply.
Import demand
Q3 A fall in domestic inflation will help the economy to recover from recession through _______
Increase in net export
Q4 ______, _______, and _______ have implication on the output performnace of the domestic economy
exchange rate, domestic inflation and foreign inflation
Q5 Positive net export (currnt account surplus) can be used to recover the economy from _____
Recession
Q6 Given a planned aggregate demand: AD = C + I + G + NX, where C = 610 + 0.8Y, I = 210, NX = 10 and T = 220. Calculate the equilibrium output.
4700
Q7 Depreciation makes _____ cheaper and _____ expensive.
Export and import
Q8 Consider a United States of America consumer that intends to buy Nigeria product worth N8000.00, how much dollars does he need for the transaction? Given the exchange rate to be 210.
38.1
Q9 _____ is the rate at which the naira is exchange for the dollar
Exchange rate
Q10 ______ and _____ are affected by international prices.
None of the above
Q11 Assuming the income is 2500, planned export demand is 800, marginal propensity to import is 0.2 and exogenous import is 250. Calculate the net export
None of the above
Q12 If the level of income is 1000, planned export demand equal marginal propensity to import is 0.2 and exogenous import is 250. Calculate the net export.
350
Q13 Meaning of Mo in export tarde is ______
Imported basic investment goods
Q14 Meaning of Xo in export trade is ______
Export demand
Q15 Because ______ is exogenous while a part of import is an inceasing function of ____, net export are negatively related to national output
Export, income
Q16 The two components of import demand are _____ and _____.
None of the above
Q17 The _____ are guided by the level of income, price level, taste and fashion of foreign consumers.
Spending Decision
Q18 ______ depends on spending decisions made by foreign consumers or overseas from the purchase of domestic goods and services.
Imports duty
Q19 ______ is describe as a result of specialization in production from economies of scale, scope, division of labor
Gains from trade
Q20 ____ is the benefits to economic agents for allowing an increase in voluntary trading.
Net
eco122 TMA2 List of Questions
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 Which of the following is a primary function of money?
to serve as a unit of account
Q2 Macro was first used in economics by Ragner Frisch in _____
1933
Q3 Money can be define as __________
Anything that is generally accepted, as a means of exchange and payment/settlement of debts.
Q4 Investment in economics can be defined as ________
the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate consumption
Q5 The formular for savings function is __________
S = - b0 + BY
Q6 Marginal propensity to consume is defined as _________
the ratio of the change in consumption to the change in income that necessitated it
Q7 Average propensity to consume refers to ________
percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings
Q8 The graph that shows the relationship between consumption and income is _______
Consumption graph
Q9 Budget is needed to perform some allocative function just as the _____ mechanism performs in the private sector.
Price
Q10 The financial plan of the projected expenditures and revenues of a unit of Government to ensure fiscal period is _____
the budget
Q11 _____ is the difference between total government expenditure that is taxes minus government expenditure
Budget balance
Q12 Budget is a document that exolicitly describe the spending decision of the government against the project ____ and the _____
Revenue and source
Q13 _____ theory states that a country should specialise in the production of a commodity or service in which it has a lower opportunity cost.
Comparative advantage
Q14 ______ is the goods or service in which a country is more efficient or can produce more than the other country or can produce the same amount with other country using fewer resources
The theory of Absolute advantage
Q15 ______ was the main author of Comparative advantage
David Ricardo
Q16 Adams Smith is associatd with the theory of ______
Theory of trade
Q17 The following except one are the importance of international trade.
imports serve foreign consumers
Q18 The reason for trade between countries are not in any way different from reasons individuals trade within a __________.
Country
Q19 ______ is a trade relation between a country and the rest of the world
International trade
Q20 Spending by foreigners is a component of ______
Total spending
eco122 TMA3 List of Questions
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 Developing countries stand to gain from international trade because
all of the above are true
Q2 The calculation of goods produced by Nigerian nationals in South Africa and the one produced in Nigeria is called _______
Gross National Product
Q3 Macroeconomics as the field of economics studies the behavior of the ____
aggregate economy
Q4 _______________ make(s) it more likely that small countries will trade internationally because their costs of getting products over their borders are worth the effort
Transport costs
Q5 Consumption, Savings and Investment is the theory of _______
National Income accounting
Q6 The graph that shows the relationship between consumption and income is _______
Consumption graph
Q7 Average propensity to consume refers to ________
percentage of income that is spent on goods and services rather than on savings
Q8 Investment in economics can be defined as ________
the act of producing capital goods which are not for immediate consumption
Q9 Which of the following is a primary function of money?
to serve as a unit of account
Q10 The following except one is the most important goals of macroeconomics objective in an economy
Exchange rate
Q11 What is the real GDP IN 2014?
N10,080
Q12 GDP valued at current year prices or nominal GDP from the analysis above are ____ and _____
N3,080 and N9800
Q13 Using the analysis above, What is the GDP FOR 2014?
N9,800
Q14 Use the following information to answer question 67, 68, 69 and 70. Let us assume that Nigeria produces only two food stuff: Garri and Rice. The prices and quantities of these two food stuff in 2013 and 2014 are as follows: in 2013 the quantity for Garri and Rice produced are 280 and 420 respectively while Prices of Garri and Rice are N70 AND N56 respectively. For 2014; the quantity for Garri and Rice are 560 and 840 respectively while Prices of Garri and Rice are N140 AND N70 respectively. using the analyis above, what is the GDP for 2013
N3,080
Q15 Disposable income or personal disposable income is the actual income which an individual spent on _____
none of the above
Q16 The british colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in ______
1912
Q17 In _____ year several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate economic development
1952
Q18 Merchant banks are set up primarily to cater for the needs of _______
none of the above
Q19 Economists take the study of money seriously because evidence suggests that
all of the above are true
Q20 Which of the following is a central issue in macroeconomics?
inflation of prescription drug prices
eco122 TMA4 List of Questions
Latex formatted questions may not properly render
Q1 Nigeria's first bank, the African Banking Corporation, was established in _____
1892
Q2 Mr Afees Oyebo purchase a machinee tool at N3,000,000 and an ad valorem tax of 21 percent is imposed, calculate the tax Mr Afees Oyebo finally paid on the machine tools.
N630,000
Q3 If a sum of N800.00 is fixed on a shirt, then the fixed tax of N800.00 is the _____ tax
Specific
Q4 _____ tax is levied proportional to the tax base or income of the individual
Proportional
Q5 ______ tax is a situation where tax rate reduces as the size of income increases
Regressive
Q6 The two types of taxes are _____ and _____ tax
Direct and indirect
Q7 The first generation bank were banks that were licensed before _______
1960
Q8 ______ an institution which accepts deposits, makes business loans, and offers related services
Commercial Bank
Q9 Finance and insurance services represented more than ______ of Nigeria's GDP in 1988
3 percent
Q10 The Central Bank of Nigeria, which was statutorily independent of the federal government until 1968, began operations on ______
July 1st 1959
Q11 In 1952 several Nigerian members of the Federal House of Assembly called for the establishment of a central bank to facilitate ______
Economic Development
Q12 British colonial officials established the West African Currency Board in _____
1912
Q13 In ____ Nigeria's first bank, the African Banking Corporation, was established
1892
Q14 ______ is a situation when you hold money for investment purposes
Speculative motive
Q15 Economists take the study of money seriously because evidence suggests that
all of the above are true
Q16 From the early days of civilization, those in power have always rely on _____ as a method of generating income
Taxation
Q17 ______ is the income available to fund the activities of a governmnet
Government revenue
Q18 ______ Budget is a situation in which income exceeds expenditures
Surplus
Q19 ______ expenditure are expenditures on capital projects
Capital
Q20 Developing countries stand to gain from international trade because
all of the above
======
BFN209
======

161. The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

	      Cash flow

	      Diversification

162. Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______

	      Treasury bills

	      Certificate of deposit

	--->> Promissory notes

	      Bonds

163. Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.

	      Cambridge's dictionary

	--->> The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      Webster’s third International Dictionary

164. The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____

	      Marketing

	--->> Strategy

	      Production

	      Operation

165. The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

	--->> Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	      Diversification

	      Expansion

	      Promotion

166. Who defined finance as the  system that  includes  the  circulation of  money, the  granting of credit,  the  making  of  investments  and  the  provision  of  banking facilities?

	--->> Webster’s third International Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      Cambridge's dictionary

167. There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and _______

	      Currency market

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real assets market

168. The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____

	      A general term to denote the theory and practice of monetary credit, banking and promotion of operations in the most comprehensive sense.

	      To raise money necessary to organise, re-organise or expand an enterprise whether by sales of stocks, bonds, notes, etc.

	--->> A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

	      Originally applied to raising money by taxes or bonds issues and the administration of revenues and expenditure by government.

169. The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______

	      Anticipation of financial needs of the organisation

	      Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	--->> Investment Analysis

	      Allocation of financial resources within the organisation

170. Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real markets

	      Currency market

======
BFN209
======

171. Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______

	      Treasury bills

	      Certificate of deposit

	--->> Promissory notes

	      Bonds

172. The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______

	      Anticipation of financial needs of the organisation

	      Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	--->> Investment Analysis

	      Allocation of financial resources within the organisation

173. The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____

	      A general term to denote the theory and practice of monetary credit, banking and promotion of operations in the most comprehensive sense.

	      To raise money necessary to organise, re-organise or expand an enterprise whether by sales of stocks, bonds, notes, etc.

	--->> A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

	      Originally applied to raising money by taxes or bonds issues and the administration of revenues and expenditure by government.

174. The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

	--->> Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	      Diversification

	      Expansion

	      Promotion

175. Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.

	      Cambridge's dictionary

	--->> The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      Webster’s third International Dictionary

176. The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

	      Cash flow

	      Diversification

177. The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____

	      Marketing

	--->> Strategy

	      Production

	      Operation

178. Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real markets

	      Currency market

179. Who defined finance as the  system that  includes  the  circulation of  money, the  granting of credit,  the  making  of  investments  and  the  provision  of  banking facilities?

	--->> Webster’s third International Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      Cambridge's dictionary

180. There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and _______

	      Currency market

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real assets market

======
BFN209
======

181. The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____

	      Marketing

	--->> Strategy

	      Production

	      Operation

182. Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______

	      Treasury bills

	      Certificate of deposit

	--->> Promissory notes

	      Bonds

183. Who defined finance as the  system that  includes  the  circulation of  money, the  granting of credit,  the  making  of  investments  and  the  provision  of  banking facilities?

	--->> Webster’s third International Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      Cambridge's dictionary

184. The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

	--->> Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	      Diversification

	      Expansion

	      Promotion

185. Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real markets

	      Currency market

186. The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

	      Cash flow

	      Diversification

187. There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and _______

	      Currency market

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real assets market

188. The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______

	      Anticipation of financial needs of the organisation

	      Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	--->> Investment Analysis

	      Allocation of financial resources within the organisation

189. Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.

	      Cambridge's dictionary

	--->> The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      Webster’s third International Dictionary

190. The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____

	      A general term to denote the theory and practice of monetary credit, banking and promotion of operations in the most comprehensive sense.

	      To raise money necessary to organise, re-organise or expand an enterprise whether by sales of stocks, bonds, notes, etc.

	--->> A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

	      Originally applied to raising money by taxes or bonds issues and the administration of revenues and expenditure by government.

======
BFN209
======

191. The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

	      Cash flow

	      Diversification

192. There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and _______

	      Currency market

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real assets market

193. Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______

	      Treasury bills

	      Certificate of deposit

	--->> Promissory notes

	      Bonds

194. Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.

	      Cambridge's dictionary

	--->> The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      Webster’s third International Dictionary

195. The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______

	      Anticipation of financial needs of the organisation

	      Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	--->> Investment Analysis

	      Allocation of financial resources within the organisation

196. Who defined finance as the  system that  includes  the  circulation of  money, the  granting of credit,  the  making  of  investments  and  the  provision  of  banking facilities?

	--->> Webster’s third International Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      Cambridge's dictionary

197. The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____

	      A general term to denote the theory and practice of monetary credit, banking and promotion of operations in the most comprehensive sense.

	      To raise money necessary to organise, re-organise or expand an enterprise whether by sales of stocks, bonds, notes, etc.

	--->> A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

	      Originally applied to raising money by taxes or bonds issues and the administration of revenues and expenditure by government.

198. The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

	--->> Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	      Diversification

	      Expansion

	      Promotion

199. The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____

	      Marketing

	--->> Strategy

	      Production

	      Operation

200. Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real markets

	      Currency market

======
BFN209
======

201. Who defined finance as the  system that  includes  the  circulation of  money, the  granting of credit,  the  making  of  investments  and  the  provision  of  banking facilities?

	--->> Webster’s third International Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      Cambridge's dictionary

202. The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

	--->> Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	      Diversification

	      Expansion

	      Promotion

203. The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____

	      Marketing

	--->> Strategy

	      Production

	      Operation

204. The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______

	      Anticipation of financial needs of the organisation

	      Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	--->> Investment Analysis

	      Allocation of financial resources within the organisation

205. Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.

	      Cambridge's dictionary

	--->> The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      Webster’s third International Dictionary

206. The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____

	      A general term to denote the theory and practice of monetary credit, banking and promotion of operations in the most comprehensive sense.

	      To raise money necessary to organise, re-organise or expand an enterprise whether by sales of stocks, bonds, notes, etc.

	--->> A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

	      Originally applied to raising money by taxes or bonds issues and the administration of revenues and expenditure by government.

207. There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and _______

	      Currency market

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real assets market

208. The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

	      Cash flow

	      Diversification

209. Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______

	      Treasury bills

	      Certificate of deposit

	--->> Promissory notes

	      Bonds

210. Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real markets

	      Currency market

======
BFN209
======

211. Any activity that requires ___________ affects the financial resources of a firm or business

	      Financial risks

	--->> Cash budgeting

	      Capital gains

	      Cash flow

212. The financial asset traded in the financial market promises future benefits in the form of ______________

	--->> Cash payments

	      Capital gains

	      Cash flow

	      Financial growth

213. Financial Institutions and _________ are the major external sources of long-term funds in a business or firm

	      Factoring

	--->> Capital market

	      Money market

	      Capital gain

214. Shareholders invest their money in the shares of a company in the expectation of a return on their __________

	      Cash flow

	      Financial risk

	--->> Invested capital

	      Economic growth

215. The ownership rights of holders in an organisation is known as __________

	      Rights issue

	      Public issue

	--->> Shares

	      Internal Finance

216. Which of the following is not one of the three types of leases

	--->> Investment lease

	      Sale and leaseback

	      Operating lease

	      Financial lease

217. The two kinds of markets in exitence are Financial market and _________

	--->> Real Assets market

	      Capital market

	      Currency market

	      Debt market

218. The shareholders return on the shares of a company consists of Dividend and __________

	      Cash flow

	      Rights issue

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

219. The essential features of a partnership are all of the following except________

	      Life of partnership is limited because it is a legal entity

	      Partnership is not separated from the partners.

	--->> Partnership involves one person coming into business

	      Setting-up cost is low and it is easy to form

220. Borrowed fund or finance in a business is known as ________

	      Equity

	      Risk

	      Investment

	--->> Debt

FBQ1: Finance plays a very important role in any ----------- activities
Answer: Business

FBQ2: A business is a concern, an enterprise, or organization set up by an individual or group of individuals for the purpose of making -------- from operations of the concern.
Answer: Profit

FBQ3: Finance may be defined as the provision of money at the time it is-----------
Answer: Required

FBQ4: The --------- are expected to be arranged in such a way that fund (money) is always available to make necessary payments as they arise.
Answer: Inflows

FBQ5: Oyekanmi (2003) defined finance “as money affairs or money -------- ”
Answer: Matters

FBQ6: According to Hornby (2001), finance is the money need or needed to--------- an activity, project, programme etc. and or the management ofmoney.
Answer: Support

FBQ7: -------- evolved from economics as its branch in the early part of the 20th century
Answer: Finance

FBQ8: Money is the common ---------- for the full range of activities performed in the business.
Answer: Denominator

FBQ9: ----------- is the medium of exchange in business
Answer: Money

FBQ10: A ------- generates whatever capital it needs and utilizes it in activities which generate returns on invested capital
Answer: Firm

FBQ11: Internal finance is also known to as ------- fund/finance
Answer: Equity

FBQ12: External finance is also known to as ------- fund/finance
Answer: Borrowed

FBQ13: The equity fund/finance is solely owned by ------------------
Answer: Shareholders

FBQ14: Buyers of shares are called ------------------------
Answer: Shareholders

FBQ15: Shareholders invest their money in the shares of a company in theexpectation of a return on their invested ----------- .
Answer: Capital

FBQ16: The return for shareholders consists of ----------- and capital gain.
Answer: Dividend

FBQ17: In a financial system, the Household are also referred to as ____
Answer: Consumers.

FBQ18: ----------- represent ownership rights of their holders
Answer: Shares

FBQ19: Shareholders can be of two types that is, preference and ------------
Answer: Ordinary

FBQ20: There are two kinds of markets, namely real assets and ---------
Answer: Financial

FBQ21: ----------- markets are for physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinerywheat, office, gold, buildings etc.
Answer: Real

FBQ22: Intangible ------------ include copyrights, patent, technical know-how.
Answer: Assets

FBQ23: Financial market trades on ------------  assets
Answer: Financial

FBQ24: ---------- shareholders receive dividend at a fixed rate and they enjoy apriority over ordinary shareholders.
Answer: Preference

FBQ25: A ----------- can also obtain equity funds by retaining earnings available forshareholders.
Answer: company

FBQ26: ----------- shareholders they enjoy a priority over ordinary shareholders.
Answer: Preference

FBQ27: A ------------ is a certificate stating the amount of money lent by a holder to the company.
Answer: Bond

FBQ28: A business organization performs ---------- functions simultaneously andcontinuously in the normal course of its activities.
Answer: Finance

FBQ29: ---------- decisions involve capital expenditures which are referred to ascapital budgeting decision.
Answer: Investment

FBQ30: Capital structure is the mix of equity and ------------
Answer: Debt

FBQ31: The capital structure is said to be optimum when the market value of shares is --------------.
Answer: Maximized

FBQ32: The ----------- of profits distributed as dividend is called the dividend-payout ratio.
Answer: Proportion

FBQ33: The ---------- ratio is the retained portion of profits.
Answer: Retention

FBQ34:  The --------- policy is determined by its impact on the shareholder’s value.
Answer: Dividend

FBQ35: Liquidity and ------------ affect investment in current assets in business organizations.
Answer: Profitability

FBQ36: ------------------- of an enterprise is affected by the level of management of current asset.
Answer: Liquidity

FBQ37: Risk of illiquidity (lack of liquidity), in extreme situations, can lead to a business --------------
Answer: Insolvency

FBQ38: -------------- assets if properly/efficiently managed would safeguard the business organization against risk of illiquidity.
Answer: Current

FBQ39: ------------ risks are risks that some accident may destroy or spoil some physical goods created by the work financed.
Answer: Physical

FBQ40: ------------ risks are those risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan,hence it may fall short of achieving the intention
Answer: Technical

FBQ41: The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by aparticular enterprise is provided by an ------------------.
Answer: Entrepreneur

FBQ42: Partnership and Limited Liability Company are two main ----------- forms under which people join together on equal terms to provide the finance needed for an enterprise, sharing fully in both risks and profits.
Answer: Institutional

FBQ43: ------------------------ and Limited Liability Company are two main institutional forms under which people join together on equal terms to provide the finance needed for an enterprise, sharing fully in both risks and profits.
Answer: Partnership

FBQ44: The ------------------ oversees or manages the enterprise’s liquid assets, liabilities, payroll and cashier activities, credits and collections, forecasting, capital budgeting and investment and financing.
Answer: Treasurer

FBQ45: The Treasurer is an active participant in long-range financial -------------
Answer: Planning

FBQ46: In ----------  economy of a country, prices of goods and services aredetermined by the forces of demand and supply.
Answer: market

FBQ47: ----------- mechanism (system) is a vital organ of a market economy, showing the goods and services required in the community.
Answer: Price

FBQ48: The ---------- price is where demand and supply match.
Answer: Equilibrium

FBQ49: ------- is the expected variability of the income flow.
Answer: Risk

FBQ50: Business firms are frequently profit oriented with maximization of profitas the proper -------------
Answer: Objective

MCQ1: ------------------- defined finance “as money affairs or money matters”.
Answer: Oyekanmi (2003)

MCQ2: --------------- is an
example of external finance
Answer: Loan

MCQ3: The return to shareholders consists of …………. and capital gain
Answer: dividend

MCQ4: Money is the common denominator for the full range of activities performed in the business.
Answer: true

MCQ5: According to Anao (1993), which one of the following is an example of money or near-money?
Answer: Certificate of deposits

MCQ6: Which of the following is not a product of financial market?
Answer: Patent

MCQ7: Finance evolved from accounting
Answer: false

MCQ8: Undistributed profits is also known as ----------------
Answer: Retained earnings

MCQ9: The capital structure of a firm could be defined as -------------
Answer: The mix of equity and debt

MCQ10: ------------------ are risks of losses because of unforeseen intervention by governments.
Answer: Political risks

MCQ11: Economic risks are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan
Answer: false

MCQ12: Shareholders can be of two types, namely preference and --------------------
Answer: Ordinary

MCQ13: Financial decisions is concerned with the acquisition and not disposal of assets through commitment or recommitment of funds on a continuous basis.
Answer: False

MCQ14: Finance manager's duties include
Answer: Selecting and evaluating projects

MCQ15: Product pricing/costing policy are jointly determined by the --------------
Answer: marketing/sales department and financial planning staff.

MCQ16: The Treasurer is an active participant in long-range financial planning.
Answer: True

MCQ17: The accounting and control function for the finance manager include
Answer: Tax matters

MCQ18: Price mechanism is a vital organ of a ---------------, showing the goods and services required in the community.
Answer: market economy

MCQ19: Which one is not a limitation of profit maximization according to Pandey (2005)?
Answer: It is certain

MCQ20: Profit maximization objective is not always clear to stakeholders of the firm.
Answer: True

MCQ21: The account manager is responsible for performing finance functions in a firm
Answer: false

MCQ22: Which of the following was not always a major events in the life the firm for raising funds
Answer: Annual general meeting

MCQ23: Which one of the following is the regulator of the capital market in Nigeria
Answer: The Nigerian Securities and ExchangeCommission

MCQ24: -------------------- is the meeting point for investors and firms
Answer: Capital market

MCQ25: ----------- is an example of fixed asset
Answer: furniture and fittings

MCQ26: --------------------- is a book in which receipts and payment of money are recorded
Answer: Cash book

MCQ27: Which one is not an example of current liability?
Answer: Trade debtors

MCQ28: Profit after tax is  --------------- item
Answer: An income statement

MCQ29: The balance sheet is more important than other financial statements to report the activities and performance of the firm
Answer: false

MCQ30: Profit planning is not related to considering -----------------
Answer: Depreciation

MCQ32: Cash flow element include ----------------
Answer: Investing Activities

MCQ33: --------------- refers to the management of current  assets and liabilities
Answer: Working capital management

MCQ34: The aim of cash management is not to maintain adequate control over cash position to be able to keep the enterprise sufficiently liquid and to use excess cash in some profitable way.
Answer: False

MCQ35: Components of short-term asset are the following except
Answer: Creditors

MCQ36: Business need to hold cash to achieve the ------------- motive
Answer: speculative

MCQ37: A --------------- have the legal right to enter into a contract, sue and be sued in its name.
Answer: limited liability company

MCQ38: Operators of companies are by law to register with ---------------
Answer: Corporate Affairs Commission

MCQ39: The promoters of a limited liability company must apply for registration with ……..
Answer: Memorandum and Articles of Association

MCQ40: Long-term sources of funds represent
Answer: Debenture

MCQ41: Debenture  stocks  are normally issued under a firm’s seal
Answer: True

MCQ42: --------------------- are the preference shares that allow for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend
Answer: Cumulative preference shares

MCQ43: Which one is not an example of lease financing?
Answer: Debenture lease

MCQ44: ---------------- convey upon the holders the right to convert these shares into equity shares in accordance with the terms of issues.
Answer: Convertible preference shares

MCQ45: Budgeting helps to identify the ----------- desired
Answer: Output

MCQ46: Planning helps to identify the ---------- required.
Answer: Inputs

MCQ47: A financial plan is a budget that interprets some elements of a plan in financial terms.
Answer: False

MCQ48: ------------------------ is the financing decisions and practices of individual households, businesses and non-business
Answer: micro finance

MCQ49: Debenture  stocks  is also known as --------------
Answer: Corporate bonds

MCQ50: ----------- is a creditor to the firm.
Answer: A debenture stock holder

MCQ31: An enterprise’s long-term projected plan should reflect its long-term pricing policy.
Answer: True


Course Code
bfn209


Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur


Try Another Search
A new capital a company re-acquires from the existing shareholders after distributing all earnings to shareholders is known as _____
Rights Shares

____shows the present statement of a business and the financial condition of an accounting entity as at a particular point in time.
Balance sheet

_____ are not owners of the company, but they provide money to enterprises as loan which are debt.
Creditors



The mix of equity and debt id called?
capital structure

____is the pillar upon which all economic activities stand
Finance

Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except ___
Promissory notes


BFN209 tma1 10/10
The risk that threatens the complete or partial loss of the postponed fruits of effort can be classified into the following except____
Financial risks

Finance functions include the following EXCEPT.
expenditure function

The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____
A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

Finance evolved from economics as its branch in the early part of the _____ century
20th

Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.
The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

Another name for the management of money is __________
Finance

The management of Finance is the pillar upon which all ________ activities stand
Economic

Money is the medium of exchange in business, the other two elements are production(operation) and ___________
Marketing

the provision of money at the time it is required isdescribed as ?.
finance

__is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares
Rights Shares

One of the following is not a medium of exchange in business
Investment


91. The internal finance in a business is also known as ____
11. Equity

2)The following are the fields of finance except __
2) Production/Operation

3)The proportion of profits from a firm distributed as dividend is called the_____
c) Dividend payout ratio

4)A type of finance which is solely owned and contributed by the stakeholders (within)and is also known as equity finance is called ____
c) Internal Finance

7)Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are ____
d) Preference shareholders

8)the field of finance originally covers which of the following
intruments of Finance

10)The common denominator for the full range of activities performed in business is known as __
3) Money


The internal finance in a business is also known as ________
Equity

Without the existence of ___________ No business can survive
Finance

The management of Finance is the pillar upon which all ________ activities stand
Economic

_________ defined Finance as
Oyekanmi (2003)

Another name for the management of money is __________
Finance

One of the following is not a medium of exchange in business
Investment

__________ activities in a business provide goods and services to customers
Operation

In any private or public institution _________ plays an important role
Finance

The common denominator for the full range of activities performed in business is known as __________
Money

The following are all forms of near-money except ________
Preference shares

Buyers of shares are called _______________ and they are the legal-owners of the business whose shares they hold.
Shareholders

____________are for physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, buildings
Capital market

The common denominator for the full range of activities performed in the financcial sector is ___________
Money

Capital expenditures which are referred to as capital budgeting decision are reffered to as _____________
Investment decisions

_________invest their money in the shares of a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital.
Shareholders

____________ is called borrowed fund or finance and referred to also as debt.
External Finance

The return on shareholder\'s investment in shares consists of Dividend and ___________
Capital gain

Money is the medium of exchange in business, the other two elements are production(operation) and ___________
Marketing

The proportion of profits from a firm distributed as dividend is called the_____________
Dividend payout ratio

A type of finance which is solely owned and contributed by the stakeholders (within)and is also known as equity finance is called ____________
Internal Finance


BFN209

1:External finance all the following EXCEPT?
.........equity

2: the provision of money at the time it is required isdescribed as ?.
.................finance

3: The mix of equity and debt id called?
............capital structure

4: Finance functions include the following EXCEPT.
.........expenditure

5:Finance evolved from economics as its branch in the early?
.............20th centruy

6:internal finance is known as ?
..............equity fund

7: which of the following is the common denominator for the full range of activities performed in the business?
............money

8: Finance functions include the following EXCEPT?
.......expenditure  function

9: the field of finance originally covers which of the following?
..........instrument of finance

10: The risk that threatens the complete or partial loss of a business entity can be classified under the following headings Except?
..........presidential risk
BFN209 TMA1

* Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called Real Markets (Ans)
* Who defined finance as the system that includes the circulation of money, the granting of credit, the making of investments and the provision of banking facilities : Answer Webster third international dictionary.
* There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and (ans) Real assets markets
* The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except (ans) acquisition of financial resources for the organization.
* Who define finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure. Ans: The shorter Oxford English Dictionary
* The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories (ans)A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis
* Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except Ans: promissory notes.

* The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except____investment analysis
* The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except Ans(strategy)
* The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and (ans) capital gain.


10/10
Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur
======
BFN209
======

2) The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

	      Cash flow

	      Diversification

3) Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______

	      Treasury bills

	      Certificate of deposit

	--->> Promissory notes

	      Bonds

4) Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.

	      Cambridge's dictionary

	--->> The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      Webster’s third International Dictionary

5) The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____

	      Marketing

	--->> Strategy

	      Production

	      Operation

6) The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

	--->> Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	      Diversification

	      Expansion

	      Promotion

7) Who defined finance as the  system that  includes  the  circulation of  money, the  granting of credit,  the  making  of  investments  and  the  provision  of  banking facilities?

	--->> Webster’s third International Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      Cambridge's dictionary

8) There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and _______

	      Currency market

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real assets market

9) The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____

	      A general term to denote the theory and practice of monetary credit, banking and promotion of operations in the most comprehensive sense.

	      To raise money necessary to organise, re-organise or expand an enterprise whether by sales of stocks, bonds, notes, etc.

	--->> A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

	      Originally applied to raising money by taxes or bonds issues and the administration of revenues and expenditure by government.

10) The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______

	      Anticipation of financial needs of the organisation

	      Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	--->> Investment Analysis

	      Allocation of financial resources within the organisation

11) Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real markets

	      Currency market





b) Who defined finance as the  system that  includes  the  circulation of  money, the  granting of credit,  the  making  of  investments  and  the  provision  of  banking facilities?

	--->> Webster’s third International Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      Cambridge's dictionary

c) The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

	--->> Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	      Diversification

	      Expansion

	      Promotion

d) There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and _______

	      Currency market

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real assets market

e) Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______

	      Treasury bills

	      Certificate of deposit

	--->> Promissory notes

	      Bonds

f) Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.

	      Cambridge's dictionary

	--->> The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      Webster’s third International Dictionary

g) The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

	      Cash flow

	      Diversification

h) The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______

	      Anticipation of financial needs of the organisation

	      Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	--->> Investment Analysis

	      Allocation of financial resources within the organisation

i) Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real markets

	      Currency market

j) The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____

	      Marketing

	--->> Strategy

	      Production

	      Operation

k) The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____

	      A general term to denote the theory and practice of monetary credit, banking and promotion of operations in the most comprehensive sense.

	      To raise money necessary to organise, re-organise or expand an enterprise whether by sales of stocks, bonds, notes, etc.

	--->> A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

	      Originally applied to raising money by taxes or bonds issues and the administration of revenues and expenditure by government.

======
BFN209
======

12) Any activity that requires ___________ affects the financial resources of a firm or business

	      Financial risks

	--->> Cash budgeting

	      Capital gains

	      Cash flow

13) The financial asset traded in the financial market promises future benefits in the form of ______________

	--->> Cash payments

	      Capital gains

	      Cash flow

	      Financial growth

14) Financial Institutions and _________ are the major external sources of long-term funds in a business or firm

	      Factoring

	--->> Capital market

	      Money market

	      Capital gain

15) Shareholders invest their money in the shares of a company in the expectation of a return on their __________

	      Cash flow

	      Financial risk

	--->> Invested capital

	      Economic growth

16) The ownership rights of holders in an organisation is known as __________

	      Rights issue

	      Public issue

	--->> Shares

	      Internal Finance

17) Which of the following is not one of the three types of leases

	--->> Investment lease

	      Sale and leaseback

	      Operating lease

	      Financial lease

18) The two kinds of markets in exitence are Financial market and _________

	--->> Real Assets market

	      Capital market

	      Currency market

	      Debt market

19) The shareholders return on the shares of a company consists of Dividend and __________

	      Cash flow

	      Rights issue

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

20) The essential features of a partnership are all of the following except________

	      Life of partnership is limited because it is a legal entity

	      Partnership is not separated from the partners.

	--->> Partnership involves one person coming into business

	      Setting-up cost is low and it is easy to form

21) Borrowed fund or finance in a business is known as ________

	      Equity

	      Risk

	      Investment

	--->> Debt

l) The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

	--->> Lendings

	      Trade advances

	      Creditors

	      Borrowings

m) The dividend rate for _________ shareholders is not fixed and can vary from year to year depending on the board of directors.

	      Preference

	      Cumulative Preference

	--->> Ordinary

	      Participating Cumulative shares

n) ________is an artificial creature, invisible, intangible, and existing only in contemplation of law. As a legal (artificial) person, it is separate from the owners. It can enter into a contract, sue and be sued in its name.

	--->> limited liability company

	      Agency Relationship

	      partnership

	      Sole proprietorship

o) Cash management is concerned with the managing of the following except________

	      Cash flows into and out of the enterprise

	      Cash flows within the enterprise

	--->> All of the above

	      Cash  balances  held  by  the  enterprise  at  a  point  of  time  by financing deficit or investing surplus cash.

p) _______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

	      Convertible preference shares

	      Participating Cumulative shares

	      Participating Non-Cumulative shares

	--->> Cumulative preference shares

q) The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

	      Transaction motive

	--->> Budgetary motive

	      Precautionary motive

	      Speculative motive

r) The Memorandum of Association of a company must contain the following information except_____-

	      objects for which the company is formed

	      address of the registered office of the effect that the ‘liability’ of the members or shareholders is ‘limited’

	--->> address of the company and the reason why it is in existence

	      name of the company, with the term “Limited” as the last word of the name

s) The following are the main components of working capital management except______

	      Cash Management

	--->> Fixed income

	      Receivables Management

	      Inventory Management

t) The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

	      CBN

	      SEC

	--->> NSE

	      CSCS

u) ___________may be made to attract new and existing shareholders to contribute equity capital

	--->> Public issue

	      External finance

	      Rights issue

	      Preference shares



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur
22) There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and _______
ans-  Real assets market
23) Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________
ans- Real markets
24) Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.
ans-  The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary
25) The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______
ans-  Investment Analysis
26) The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____
ans-  Capital gain
27) Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______
ans-  Promissory notes
28) Who defined finance as the system that includes the circulation of money, the granting of credit, the making of investments and the provision of banking facilities?
ans- Webster’s third International Dictionary
29) The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____
ans- A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis
30) he three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____
ans-  Strategy
31) : The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____
ans-
32) which of the following is the common denominator for the full range of activities performed in the business?

money

33) Finance functions include the following EXCEPT?

liquidity function

34) External finance all the following EXCEPT?

debt

35) The mix of equity and debt id called?

capital structure

36) the provision of money at the time it is required isdescribed as ?.

finance

37) Finance functions include the following EXCEPT.

liquidity function


Budget is
38)
profit plan based

A type of finance which is solely owned and contributed by the stakeholders (within)and is also known as equity finance is called ____________
d.
Internal Finance

The capital structure is said to be optimum
39)
when the market value of shares is maximized

The financing decisions and practices of the entire economy are related to ___________
40)
Micro Finance

Investment proposals should be analysed and evaluated in terms of both
v)
Expected return and risk

Define Political Risk
d.
These are risks of losses as the result of unforeseen intervention by governments

What is Cash Management?
w)
Managing cash flow in and out of the orgnaisation

Capital market is a metting point for lenders and ............. of long term funds
x)
borrowers

The central issue with Financing Function is the
y)
determination of appropriate proportion of internal (equity) and external (debt)

One important aspect of investment decisions is
c.
Prospective profitability of new investment

Profit planning is related to considering the following main factors except
z)
goodwill


Capital structure is also know as what?
c)
gearing

The dividend rate for ordinary shareholders is not fixed and can vary from year to year depending on the _____________
d.
Board of directors

What is the direction of relationship between Risk and Return in Investment?
c.
Opposite direction

The main components of Working capital management include .................
d.
all of the options

What do shares represent?
d)
Ownership rights of their holders

Finance is better described as what?
e)
money mangement
BFN209  NOUN EXAM





A new capital a company re-acquires from the existing shareholders after distributing all earnings to shareholders is known as _____
Rights Shares

____shows the present statement of a business and the financial condition of an accounting entity as at a particular point in time.
Balance sheet

_____ are not owners of the company, but they provide money to enterprises as loan which are debt.
Creditors



The mix of equity and debt id called?
capital structure

____is the pillar upon which all economic activities stand
Finance

Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except ___
Promissory notes


BFN209 tma1 10/10
The risk that threatens the complete or partial loss of the postponed fruits of effort can be classified into the following except____
Financial risks

Finance functions include the following EXCEPT.
expenditure function

The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____
A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

Finance evolved from economics as its branch in the early part of the _____ century
20th

Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.
The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

Another name for the management of money is __________
Finance

The management of Finance is the pillar upon which all ________ activities stand
Economic

Money is the medium of exchange in business, the other two elements are production(operation) and ___________
Marketing

the provision of money at the time it is required isdescribed as ?.
finance

__is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares
Rights Shares

One of the following is not a medium of exchange in business
Investment


92. The internal finance in a business is also known as ____
12. Equity

2)The following are the fields of finance except __
4) Production/Operation

3)The proportion of profits from a firm distributed as dividend is called the_____
c) Dividend payout ratio

4)A type of finance which is solely owned and contributed by the stakeholders (within)and is also known as equity finance is called ____
c) Internal Finance

7)Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are ____
d) Preference shareholders

8)the field of finance originally covers which of the following
intruments of Finance

10)The common denominator for the full range of activities performed in business is known as __
5) Money


The internal finance in a business is also known as ________
Equity

Without the existence of ___________ No business can survive
Finance

The management of Finance is the pillar upon which all ________ activities stand
Economic

_________ defined Finance as
Oyekanmi (2003)

Another name for the management of money is __________
Finance

One of the following is not a medium of exchange in business
Investment

__________ activities in a business provide goods and services to customers
Operation

In any private or public institution _________ plays an important role
Finance

The common denominator for the full range of activities performed in business is known as __________
Money

The following are all forms of near-money except ________
Preference shares

Buyers of shares are called _______________ and they are the legal-owners of the business whose shares they hold.
Shareholders

____________are for physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, buildings
Capital market

The common denominator for the full range of activities performed in the financcial sector is ___________
Money

Capital expenditures which are referred to as capital budgeting decision are reffered to as _____________
Investment decisions

_________invest their money in the shares of a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital.
Shareholders

____________ is called borrowed fund or finance and referred to also as debt.
External Finance

The return on shareholder\'s investment in shares consists of Dividend and ___________
Capital gain

Money is the medium of exchange in business, the other two elements are production(operation) and ___________
Marketing

The proportion of profits from a firm distributed as dividend is called the_____________
Dividend payout ratio

A type of finance which is solely owned and contributed by the stakeholders (within)and is also known as equity finance is called ____________
Internal Finance


======
BFN209 NOUN PQ
======

2) The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

	--->> Lendings

	      Trade advances

	      Creditors

	      Borrowings

3) The dividend rate for _________ shareholders is not fixed and can vary from year to year depending on the board of directors.

	      Preference

	      Cumulative Preference

	--->> Ordinary

	      Participating Cumulative shares

4) ________is an artificial creature, invisible, intangible, and existing only in contemplation of law. As a legal (artificial) person, it is separate from the owners. It can enter into a contract, sue and be sued in its name.

	--->> limited liability company

	      Agency Relationship

	      partnership

	      Sole proprietorship

5) Cash management is concerned with the managing of the following except________

	      Cash flows into and out of the enterprise

	      Cash flows within the enterprise

	--->> All of the above

	      Cash  balances  held  by  the  enterprise  at  a  point  of  time  by financing deficit or investing surplus cash.

6) _______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

	      Convertible preference shares

	      Participating Cumulative shares

	      Participating Non-Cumulative shares

	--->> Cumulative preference shares

7) The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

	      Transaction motive

	--->> Budgetary motive

	      Precautionary motive

	      Speculative motive

8) The Memorandum of Association of a company must contain the following information except_____-

	      objects for which the company is formed

	      address of the registered office of the effect that the ‘liability’ of the members or shareholders is ‘limited’

	--->> address of the company and the reason why it is in existence

	      name of the company, with the term “Limited” as the last word of the name

9) The following are the main components of working capital management except______

	      Cash Management

	--->> Fixed income

	      Receivables Management

	      Inventory Management

10) The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

	      CBN

	      SEC

	--->> NSE

	      CSCS

11) ___________may be made to attract new and existing shareholders to contribute equity capital

	--->> Public issue

	      External finance

	      Rights issue

	      Preference shares


Hello, Search Course Code Feature Is Now Active for complaints contact solutionboxteam4u2019@gmail.com


Course Code
BFN209


Question
The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

Answer
Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation



Question
________ is a dynamic and evolving art of making daily financial decisions and control in households, businesses, non-business organisations and government.

Answer
Financial Management



Question
Shareholders can be of two types Ordinary and _______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The functions of _______include sourcing and application of funds, and demands that money is used in the firm wisely

Answer
Finance



Question
The following are areas of operating decisions in profit planning except____

Answer
marketing



Question
_______is a selection of objectives and the means of achieving them

Answer
Planning



Question
The class of shares which ranks above equity shares are ______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The following are three types of leases except_____

Answer
Investing lease



Question
Two major external sources of long-term funds are Financial Institutions and ________

Answer
Capital market



Question
______shares convey upon the holder the right to convert shares into equity shares in accordance with the terms of issues

Answer
Convertible preference shares



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

Answer
Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation



Question
________ is a dynamic and evolving art of making daily financial decisions and control in households, businesses, non-business organisations and government.

Answer
Financial Management



Question
Shareholders can be of two types Ordinary and _______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The functions of _______include sourcing and application of funds, and demands that money is used in the firm wisely

Answer
Finance



Question
The following are areas of operating decisions in profit planning except____

Answer
marketing



Question
_______is a selection of objectives and the means of achieving them

Answer
Planning



Question
The class of shares which ranks above equity shares are ______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The following are three types of leases except_____

Answer
Investing lease



Question
Two major external sources of long-term funds are Financial Institutions and ________

Answer
Capital market



Question
______shares convey upon the holder the right to convert shares into equity shares in accordance with the terms of issues

Answer
Convertible preference shares



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

Answer
Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation



Question
________ is a dynamic and evolving art of making daily financial decisions and control in households, businesses, non-business organisations and government.

Answer
Financial Management



Question
Shareholders can be of two types Ordinary and _______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The functions of _______include sourcing and application of funds, and demands that money is used in the firm wisely

Answer
Finance



Question
The following are areas of operating decisions in profit planning except____

Answer
marketing



Question
_______is a selection of objectives and the means of achieving them

Answer
Planning



Question
The class of shares which ranks above equity shares are ______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The following are three types of leases except_____

Answer
Investing lease



Question
Two major external sources of long-term funds are Financial Institutions and ________

Answer
Capital market



Question
______shares convey upon the holder the right to convert shares into equity shares in accordance with the terms of issues

Answer
Convertible preference shares



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur


Try Another Search
BFN209

The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______

Investment Analysis

The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____

Capital gain

Who defined finance as the system that includes the circulation of money, the granting of credit, the making of investments and the provision of banking facilities?

Webster’s third International Dictionary

The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____

Strategy

There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and ______

Real assets market

Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.

The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____

A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______

Promissory notes

Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________

Real markets



___relates to financing decisions and practices of individual households, businesses and non-business organisations

Micro Finance
___ defines finance as the art and science of managing money

Gitman (2000)
____ is very important to the firm in the acquisition of long-term funds.

Capital Market
__ relates to the financing decisions and practices of the entire economy



Macro Finance
__ tried to narrow the definition of finance by defining it as the study of the nature and use of the means of payment.

Christy and Roden (1973)
A __ performs the traditional function of managing a firm’s cash position to guarantee liquidity

Financial Manager
Financial market and ___ are the two kinds of markets

Real assets market
The ____ is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital*Nigeria stock exchange*
___ is the management of current or short-term assets and short-term liabilities of a firm

Working Capital
The Financial Manager's roles are all Financial Management, Profit planning and ___

Fund allocation
____shows the present statement of a business and the financial condition of an accounting entity as at a particular point in time.

Balance sheet
Internal Finance which is also known as equity fund/finance is referred to as ___

Equity
Shareholders invest their money in the shares of a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital. The return consists of dividend and_____

capital gain
____shareholders receive dividend at a fixed rate and they enjoy a priority over ordinary shareholders.

Preference
_____is the management of current or short-term assets and short-term liabilities of a firm

Working Capital
The Financial Manager's roles are Financial management, Profit planning and ____

Fund allocation
Finance decisions influence Growth, Size and ____

Productivity
Shareholders invest their money in the shares of a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital. The return consists of dividend and_____

capital gain
____shareholders receive dividend at a fixed rate and they enjoy a priority over ordinary shareholders.

Preference
Shareholders invest their money in the shares of a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital. The return consists of dividend and_____

capital gain
____consists of all transactions plus other events that are not investing or financing activities.

Operating Activities
Profit planning is the operating decisions in the areas of ___, costing of the volume of output and the firm’s product lines selection.

Pricing
The proportion of profits distributed as dividend is called ____

dividend-pay-out ratio
____are risks that some accident may destroy or spoil some physical goods created by the work financed.

Physical Risks and Finance
Investment decisions involve capital expenditures which are referred to as ____

capital budgeting decision
Shareholders can be of two types ____and Preference

Ordinary
The main components of Working capital management are Cash management, Receivables management and ___

Inventory management
____activities consist of cash flows relating to liability and owners’ equity.

Financing
The____ enables management to explain the changes in cash and cash equivalent production.

cash statement
_____is a tool to avoid excessive and inadequate levels of inventories and maintain sufficient inventory for the smooth operations of the enterprise in terms of production and sales output.

Inventory management
Profit planning is related to considering four main factors: fixed costs, variable costs, selling price and ____

sales volume
The____ is the retained portion of profits

retention ratio
The_____ is determined by its impact on the shareholder’s value.

dividend policy
____ is called borrowed fund/finance and is solely owned/contributed by the stakeholders within

External Finance
A firm/business can sell shares to acquire ____

equity funds
____may be defined as the provision of money at the time it is required.

Finance
_____provides the means in which the enterprise can control its relationship with its external environment and at the same time, it is controlling its internal operations accordingly (control-in-the-small).

Pricing policy
The management of current or short-term assets and short-term liabilities of a firm is called_____

working Capital
_____ is a dynamic and evolving art of making daily financial decisions and control in households, businesses, non-business organisations and government.

Financial management
There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and ___

Real assets market
____involves graphing the variables to identify the pattern for a given number of years

Model identification
____helps to identify the inputs required

12) Budgeting *
The____ is very important to the firm in the acquisition of long-term funds.

Capital market
_____are entitled to fixed dividend payment as different from equity shareholders which are entitled to variable dividend payments.

Ordinary shareholders
_____ allow for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Cumulative preference shares
____risks arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Technical Risks and Finance
____shows the present statement of a business and the financial condition of an accounting entity as at a particular point in time.

Balance sheet
___ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

External Finance
____shares convey upon the holder the right to convert shares into equity shares in accordance with the terms of issues

Convertible preference shares
____is the amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning

Profit
____may be defined as the provision of money at the time it is required.

Finance

___ can be likened to a lubricant

Finance

Internal Finance known to as equity fund/finance is referred to as ____.

Equity

A firm/business can sell ___ to acquire equity funds.

Shares

Real markets are for physical or ____ assets.

Tangible

___ shareholders receive dividend at a fixed rate and they enjoy a priority over ordinary shareholders.

Preference

Public issue may be made to attract new and the existing shareholders to contribute equity __

Capital

Investment decisions involve capital expenditures which are referred to as capital ___ decision.

Budgeting

___ and profitability affect investment in current assets in business organizations.

Liquidity

Political Risk and Finance are risks of ___ as a result of unforeseen intervention by governments.

Losses

____ mechanism system is a vital organ of a market economy.

Price

Risk is the expected ___ of the income flow.

Variability

Pandey __ stated that the basis of the theory of financial management.

2005

Financial Manager is the person responsible for performing __ functions.

Finance

Profit____ function is one of the acquired roles of the Finance Manager.

Planning

Fixed costs remain constant while ___ costs change in direct proportion to changes in volume of goods.

Variable

Financial statement is also used for future plans of the ___.

Enterprise

Balance sheet shows the present ___ of a business.

Statement

____ is otherwise known as profit and loss account.

Income statement

Financing Activities consist of cash flows relating to __ and owners’ equity.

Liability

Pricing policy provides the means in which the enterprise can control to a __

Degree

Working capital management refers to the management of current or _-term assets and short-term liabilities.

Short

Cash management focuses on managing ___ in and out of an enterprise.

Cash flows

Business need to hold cash to achieve the following transactions, precautionary and ____

Speculative

Short-term sources of funds represent __ liabilities funds owed.

Current

___ could be used to raise short-term funds in a number of ways.

Stocks

Shares which rank above equity shares are the __ shares.

Preference

Planning involves the ____ of objectives and the means of achieving them.

Selection

Estimation of parameters is the determination of the functional relationship or __ expression

Algebraic

Finance evolved as a branch of economics in the later part of the ____ Century.

19th

____helps to identify the output desire

Planning

______ helps to identify the inputs required

Budgeting

____ are normally redeemed after a fixed period of time.

Redeemable preference shares

____ is a class of shareholders entitled to participate in the residual profit of a firm in addition to the cumulative fixed dividend rate

Participating Cumulative Preference Shares

A promissory note is also known as ___

Bill finance

Finance decisions influence all of the following except____

Control

____consists of cash flows relating to liability and owners’ equity.

Financing Activities

The following are steps in forecasting process except___

Factoring

Finance is related to the following disciplines except __

Geography

The following are various types of preference shares except____

Ordinary shares

___is a selection of objectives and the means of achieving them

Planning

The following are three types of leases except___

Investing lease

One of the following is not a function of the finance manager

Pricing

Two major external sources of long-term funds are Financial Institutions and ____

Capital market

The following are sources of short-term funds except____

Trade finance

The class of shares which ranks above equity shares are __

Preference shares

The following are the motives for holding cash except___

Budgetary motive

___is the meeting point for investors(lenders) and firm's borrowers

Capital market

____is a statement that records the financial activities of a particular business organisation

Financial statement
The following are the fields of finance except __

Production/Operation
Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur
Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur
Question
The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

Answer
Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation



Question
________ is a dynamic and evolving art of making daily financial decisions and control in households, businesses, non-business organisations and government.

Answer
Financial Management



Question
Shareholders can be of two types Ordinary and _______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The functions of _______include sourcing and application of funds, and demands that money is used in the firm wisely

Answer
Finance



Question
The following are areas of operating decisions in profit planning except____

Answer
marketing



Question
_______is a selection of objectives and the means of achieving them

Answer
Planning



Question
The class of shares which ranks above equity shares are ______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The following are three types of leases except_____

Answer
Investing lease



Question
Two major external sources of long-term funds are Financial Institutions and ________

Answer
Capital market



Question
______shares convey upon the holder the right to convert shares into equity shares in accordance with the terms of issues

Answer
Convertible preference shares



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

Answer
Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation



Question
________ is a dynamic and evolving art of making daily financial decisions and control in households, businesses, non-business organisations and government.

Answer
Financial Management



Question
Shareholders can be of two types Ordinary and _______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The functions of _______include sourcing and application of funds, and demands that money is used in the firm wisely

Answer
Finance



Question
The following are areas of operating decisions in profit planning except____

Answer
marketing



Question
_______is a selection of objectives and the means of achieving them

Answer
Planning



Question
The class of shares which ranks above equity shares are ______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The following are three types of leases except_____

Answer
Investing lease



Question
Two major external sources of long-term funds are Financial Institutions and ________

Answer
Capital market



Question
______shares convey upon the holder the right to convert shares into equity shares in accordance with the terms of issues

Answer
Convertible preference shares



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur



Question
The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

Answer
Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation



Question
________ is a dynamic and evolving art of making daily financial decisions and control in households, businesses, non-business organisations and government.

Answer
Financial Management



Question
Shareholders can be of two types Ordinary and _______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The functions of _______include sourcing and application of funds, and demands that money is used in the firm wisely

Answer
Finance



Question
The following are areas of operating decisions in profit planning except____

Answer
marketing



Question
_______is a selection of objectives and the means of achieving them

Answer
Planning



Question
The class of shares which ranks above equity shares are ______

Answer
Preference shares



Question
The following are three types of leases except_____

Answer
Investing lease



Question
Two major external sources of long-term funds are Financial Institutions and ________

Answer
Capital market



Question
______shares convey upon the holder the right to convert shares into equity shares in accordance with the terms of issues

Answer
Convertible preference shares



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
_______allows for dividend payment to be deferred if a firm does not make adequate profit to pay such dividend.

Answer
Cumulative preference shares



Question
The following are the motives for holding cash except_______

Answer
Budgetary motive



Question
Cash management is concerned with the management of the following except________

Answer
None of the above



Question
The following are some of the various types of preference shares except_____

Answer
Non convertible preference shares



Question
The ________is the market that serves as an intermediary between fund-raisers and suppliers of capital

Answer
NSE



Question
The short-term liabilities of a firm includes all of the following except______

Answer
Lendings



Question
The following are the main components of working capital management except______

Answer
Fixed income



Question
One of the following is not contained in the memorandum of association of a company

Answer
address of the company and the reason why it is in existence



Question
The finance function to staff and departments will be dependent upon the size and _______of the business organisation.

Answer
magnitude



Question
A person responsible for performing finance functions In a modern firm is known as ___________

Answer
Financial Manager



Question
______is when a company distributes all its earnings to shareholders and acquires new capital from same source by issuing new shares

Answer
Rights issue



Question
Shareholders that receive dividend at a fixed rate and enjoy priority over ordinary shareholders are known as ________

Answer
Preference shareholders



Question
The following are the elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of resources of the enterprise except _______

Answer
Investment



Question
__________ is the provision of money at the time it is required

Answer
Finance



Question
A market that promises future benefits in the form of cash payments is known as _________

Answer
Retail market



Question
_______ is called borrowed fund and is also referred to as a debt

Answer
External Finance



Question
The amount a business can spend in a period and be as “well off” at the end of the period than as at the beginning is known as ________

Answer
Profit



Question
_______ are risks that arise from the fact that the producer’s skill or that of the subordinates may not be up to the expected level for the plan, hence it may fall short of achieving the intention.

Answer
Technical risks



Question
The following are three ways of avoiding or reducing risk except____

Answer
Investing in a risky investment



Question
The simplest form of finance is where the whole of finance required by a particular enterprise is provided by _______

Answer
Entrepreneur

Cash management, Receivables management and Inventory management are main components of which of the following?
.
cash flow

What is a Financial Statement?

.
It is a statement that records financial activities of a particular business organisation.

What returns does a shareholder expect from his/her investment?
.
Dividend and capital gains

The limitations of profit maximization include ,,,,,,,,

.
vague

What does the abbreviation IPO represent?

.
Initial Public Offering

What can a firm/business acquire when it sells shares?

.
Equity funds

Which of the following is not a main component of the financial statements?
.
statement of profit

What\'s the difference between shareholders and stockholders?
.
In practice, there\'s no difference between the two

What designation do you consider least appropriate for the head of the finance function?
.
Managing Director, Finance.

Identify the one that\'s not an elementary fact about Receivables

.
It implies the purchaser must pay at the point os sale of good/serbvice

The ____________ of a firm is said to be at optimum when the market value of shares are maximized.
.
Capital structure

Which fubction do you consider inappropriate for the Treasurer?
.
Supervision of Production staff

The following are steps in the process of forecasting except_____
.
Factoring

The shareholders return on the shares of a company consists of Dividend and __________
.
Capital gain

======
BFN209 NOUN EXAM




13) The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____

	      Marketing

	--->> Strategy

	      Production

	      Operation

14) The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

	      Cash flow

	      Diversification

15) The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______

	      Anticipation of financial needs of the organisation

	      Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	--->> Investment Analysis

	      Allocation of financial resources within the organisation

16) Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real markets

	      Currency market

17) The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

	--->> Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	      Diversification

	      Expansion

	      Promotion

18) Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______

	      Treasury bills

	      Certificate of deposit

	--->> Promissory notes

	      Bonds

19) Who defined finance as the  system that  includes  the  circulation of  money, the  granting of credit,  the  making  of  investments  and  the  provision  of  banking facilities?

	--->> Webster’s third International Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      Cambridge's dictionary

20) The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____

	      A general term to denote the theory and practice of monetary credit, banking and promotion of operations in the most comprehensive sense.

	      To raise money necessary to organise, re-organise or expand an enterprise whether by sales of stocks, bonds, notes, etc.

	--->> A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

	      Originally applied to raising money by taxes or bonds issues and the administration of revenues and expenditure by government.

21) There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and _______

	      Currency market

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real assets market

22) Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.

	      Cambridge's dictionary

	--->> The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      Webster’s third International Dictionary




6) Who defined finance as the  system that  includes  the  circulation of  money, the  granting of credit,  the  making  of  investments  and  the  provision  of  banking facilities?

	--->> Webster’s third International Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      Cambridge's dictionary

7) The following are ways of raising funds in the scope of Financial Management during major events in the life of the firm except _____

	--->> Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	      Diversification

	      Expansion

	      Promotion

8) There are two kinds of markets, Financial market and _______

	      Currency market

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real assets market

9) Financial market trades on financial assets which promises future benefits in all of the following except _______

	      Treasury bills

	      Certificate of deposit

	--->> Promissory notes

	      Bonds

10) Who defined finance as to lend, to settle debt, pay ransom, furnish, and procure.

	      Cambridge's dictionary

	--->> The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

	      The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance

	      Webster’s third International Dictionary

11) The money shareholders invest in a company in the expectation of a return on their invested capital consists of dividend and_____

	      Fixed income

	--->> Capital gain

	      Cash flow

	      Diversification

12) The following are three key financial decisions of Financial Management according to Christy and Roden, (1973), except______

	      Anticipation of financial needs of the organisation

	      Acquisition of financial resources for the organisation

	--->> Investment Analysis

	      Allocation of financial resources within the organisation

13) Physical or tangible assets such as plant, machinery wheat, office, gold, and buildings are called_________

	      Financial markets

	      Stock market

	--->> Real markets

	      Currency market

14) The three elements that must be held in balance to enable optimum utilization of the resources of the enterprise are all of the following except_____

	      Marketing

	--->> Strategy

	      Production

	      Operation

15) The Encyclopedia of Banking and Finance classified finance into three categories except_____

	      A general term to denote the theory and practice of monetary credit, banking and promotion of operations in the most comprehensive sense.

	      To raise money necessary to organise, re-organise or expand an enterprise whether by sales of stocks, bonds, notes, etc.

	--->> A general term to denote the theory and practice of ralationship management and investment analysis

	      Originally applied to raising money by taxes or bonds issues and the administration of revenues and expenditure by government.

======
BUS106
======

202. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

203. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

204. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

205. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

206. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

207. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

208. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

209. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

210. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

211. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

======
BUS106
======

212. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

213. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

214. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

215. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

216. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

217. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

218. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

219. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

220. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

221. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

======
BUS106
======

222. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

223. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

224. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

225. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

226. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

227. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

228. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

229. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

230. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

231. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

======
BUS106
======

232. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

233. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

234. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

235. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

236. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

237. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

238. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

239. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

240. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

241. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

======
BUS106
======

242. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

243. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

244. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

245. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

246. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

247. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

248. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

249. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

250. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

251. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

======
BUS106
======

252. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

253. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

254. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

255. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

256. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

257. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

258. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

259. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

260. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

261. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

======
BUS106
======

262. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

263. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

264. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

265. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

266. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

267. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

268. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

269. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

270. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

271. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

======
BUS106
======

272. ___is a process of breaking an enterprise into smaller groups and levels.

	--->> Departmentation

	      Staffing

	      Centralisation

	      decentralisation

273. The ___could be formal or informal.

	      business

	--->> Orrganisation

	      Enterprise

	      business letter

274. The ____is a  vehicle for the implementation of a plan.

	--->> system

	      management

	      communication

	      information

275. The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

	      system

	      Department

	--->> plan

	      none on the list

276. ____ is the basic to all managerial functions

	--->> Planning

	      Organising

	      Unity of command

	      Decision making

277. An individual, who gets the thing done is a ____.

	      leader

	--->> manager

	      director

	      organiser

278. ___ normally has a network of goals, objectives and targets.

	      Business

	      Management

	      Enterprise

	--->> Organisation

279. ____deals with a qualitaive and quantitative aspect of manpower in terms of placement.

	      Planning

	--->> Organising

	      unity of command

	      none on the list

280. The functions of a___ can be a line or a staff.

	      system

	--->> Department

	      plan

	      none on the list

281. Some business problems arise due to failing on the ___ grounds.

	      management

	      managing

	--->> ethical

	      decision

Bus106 tma2
10/10
282. Control mud be tailored to position...
And. Monitor
283. Company.......... Are also part of the data
Ans. Records
284. In process of planning in an organizations.......
Is being made
Ans. Decision
285. ......... Distribution, expenditure pattern..
Ans. Income
286. Interview is used interchangeable with
Ans. Selection
287. The technique commonly employed by a....
Ans. Support subordinate
288. In process of planning in an organizations...... Is being made
Ans. Decision
289. The manager must comply with the......
Ans. Legal
290. Organization can broadly be classified as
Ans. Formal/informal organization
291. The managerial functions of leading...
Ans. Influencing


21. ) The word  concerns the laying down of policies
Ans => Administration
22. ) Is the process of transferring information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Ans => communication
23. ) The manager must comply with the  requirements for establishing and operating his business
Ans => Legal
24. ) The essence of  lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Ans => control
25. ) Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of
Ans => Board or Director
26. ) Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right person will  activities in their own field
Ans => monitor
27. )  distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumer all effect demans
Ans => income
28. ) Flat shaped structure falls under
Ans => wide span of control
29. )  is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen
Ans => Forecasting
30. ) The very survival of an   dictate that a certain minimum profit has to be made
Ans => organization




BUS106 TMA3
83. .... of management implies that all managers in the hierarchy perform identical function
15. Universality
2) A scholarly grouping of concepts and principles creates a......
16. Theory
3)the theory of management is the synthesis of the concepts and principles in.....
17. management
4)the principles of management help in subordinate...
18. Development
5)Management  system is..... in all formal organization
19. identical
6)Every system is made up of.....
20. Subsystem
7)Important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote in management....
21. Research
8)Management is not an exact..... it deals with people whose behaviours unpredictable and complex
22. Science
9)When the goals of the individual and the goals of the organization are the same we have....
23. goal congruency
10)...... are abstractions formed from generalization
24. Concept





C. .... of management implies that all managers in the hierarchy perform identical function
* Universality
2) A scholarly grouping of concepts and principles creates a......
* Theory
3)the theory of management is the synthesis of the concepts and principles in.....
* management
4)the principles of management help in subordinate...
* Development
5)Management  system is..... in all formal organization
* identical
6)Every system is made up of.....
* Subsystem
7)Important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote in management....
* Research
8)Management is not an exact..... it deals with people whose behaviours unpredictable and complex
* Science
9)When the goals of the individual and the goals of the organization are the same we have....
* goal congruency
10)...... are abstractions formed from generalization
* Concept

43. 	BUS106	Management is as old as _______ organization	,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,human	TMA1
44. 	BUS106	In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______	,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,Africa	TMA1				
45. 	BUS106	The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system	,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,administrative	TMA1				
46. 	BUS106	Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal	lower	TMA1				
47. 	BUS106	What is said of Ghana can be said of ________	Mali	TMA1				
48. 	BUS106	Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except	shoemaking	TMA1				
49. 	BUS106	The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity	pre - occupation	TMA1				
50. 	BUS106	Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________	management	TMA1				
51. 	BUS106	___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management	Fedrick W. Taylor	TMA1				
52. 	BUS106	Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee	output	TMA1				




























======
BUS106
======

91. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

92. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

93. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

======
BUS106
======

53. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

54. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

55. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

56. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

57. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

To a student management is an________________ discipline

academic


Formal leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an _________ figure

91.
authority

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes

scientific

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends

principles



The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

plan


One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management

research



It is often difficult to formulate priniciples in management because of the difficulty in conducting controlled ____________


experiment


The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made


organization




A ___________ leader cannot function without the authority


formal
























..............................

Wide span of control
Communication
Board of directors
Income
Monitor
Legal
Control
Forecasting
Administration
Organization
Question
Free - reign leadership is also called ______________

Answer
Laissez-faire



Question
One way communication without feedback leades to ___________ and communication breakdown

Answer
misunderstanding



Question
___________ encourages subordinates participation in the decision making process

Answer
participative



Question
__________ is needed when the demands of a task on hand are ambiguous

Answer
directive



Question
The ___________ approach defines leadership in terms of his ability to handle a given situation and is based on his skills in that given area

Answer
situational



Question
Theory states that an analysis of leadership involves not only the individual traits and behaviour but also a focus on the situation

Answer
contingency theory



Question
_________ leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an authority figure

Answer
formal



Question
Based on the elements of leadership function the leadership may be defined as _________

Answer
L = F



Question
Direction must be clear and unambigious an from __________ chain of command

Answer
single



Question
In ___________organisation all managerial and worker role are clearly defined

Answer
role - oriented



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
Free - reign leadership is also called ______________

Answer
Laissez-faire



Question
One way communication without feedback leades to ___________ and communication breakdown

Answer
misunderstanding



Question
___________ encourages subordinates participation in the decision making process

Answer
participative



Question
__________ is needed when the demands of a task on hand are ambiguous

Answer
directive



Question
The ___________ approach defines leadership in terms of his ability to handle a given situation and is based on his skills in that given area

Answer
situational



Question
Theory states that an analysis of leadership involves not only the individual traits and behaviour but also a focus on the situation

Answer
contingency theory



Question
_________ leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an authority figure

Answer
formal



Question
Based on the elements of leadership function the leadership may be defined as _________

Answer
L = F



Question
Direction must be clear and unambigious an from __________ chain of command

Answer
single



Question
In ___________organisation all managerial and worker role are clearly defined

Answer
role - oriented



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
Free - reign leadership is also called ______________

Answer
Laissez-faire



Question
One way communication without feedback leades to ___________ and communication breakdown

Answer
misunderstanding



Question
___________ encourages subordinates participation in the decision making process

Answer
participative



Question
__________ is needed when the demands of a task on hand are ambiguous

Answer
directive



Question
The ___________ approach defines leadership in terms of his ability to handle a given situation and is based on his skills in that given area

Answer
situational



Question
Theory states that an analysis of leadership involves not only the individual traits and behaviour but also a focus on the situation

Answer
contingency theory



Question
_________ leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an authority figure

Answer
formal



Question
Based on the elements of leadership function the leadership may be defined as _________

Answer
L = F



Question
Direction must be clear and unambigious an from __________ chain of command

Answer
single



Question
In ___________organisation all managerial and worker role are clearly defined

Answer
role - oriented



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human
Get more at (www.puredu.net)
Get more at (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) 9/10

The major problem that confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of ___.

objectives

In the pre-industrial period, ____________ was practiced by various part of the world including Africa

management

Management is also seen as a process demanding the performance of ______________ function

specific

job specification specifies____________ requirements and list qualifications both physical and mental necessary to perform the job properly

personal

______ is referred to as the father of the social system approach to organisation.

V. Pareto

Not all people can manage ______________

effectively

____are the monetary measurements.

cost standards

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.

Motivator

There is a class relationship between the ______________ school and the decision theory school

mathematical

Organisation is second in the ___________ of functions exercised by management

role (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) 10/10

Gilbreth believed that there was one best way that required _______________ motion

last

The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.

democratic leader

_____________ are people who are primarily responsible for the achievmeent of organizational goals

managers

The main pre - occupation was what to do in order to increase _____________ productivity

employee

The __ is dogmatic and expects compliance and leads by ability to without or give rewards and punishment.

autocratic leader

____ requires technical skill and conceptual ability.

Art

Arts requires___________ skills and conceptual ability

technical

To a student management is an academic _____________

discipline

The fourteen principles of management cover all aspects of _______________

management

In the pre-industrial period, ____________ was practiced by various part of the world including Africa

management (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) BUS106
10/10
To a student management is an academic _____________

discipline

__ are rather seen as best fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.

Principles

job specification specifies____________ requirements and list qualifications both physical and mental necessary to perform the job properly

personal

One of the major advantages of the ____________ revolution is that it gave birth to accelerated rate of resources accumulation

industrial

____ requires technical skill and conceptual ability.

Art

The __________ principles of management were advocated by Henri Fayol\'s

First

Arts requires___________ skills and conceptual ability

technical

The entrepreneur was forced by competition to engage in ______________ performance

crude

To get _________________ put in their best efforts the manager has to understand people their emotional, physical and interllectual needs

people

Decision theory school group believes in _____________ decision making

rational (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) BUS106
10/10
___factors involve working conditions and can trigger dissatisfaction,if inadequate.

Hygiene

The entrepreneur was forced by competition to engage in ______________ performance

crude

___ involves giving a job greater scope or variety and depth.

job enrichment

The ____________ of communication must be clearly set and known to everyone

channels

The __ is dogmatic and expects compliance and leads by ability to without or give rewards and punishment.

autocratic leader

The well - known __________ of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful administrative system

Kingdom

______ is referred to as the father of the social system approach to organisation.

V. Pareto

____ can be defined as getting things done through others.

Management

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __

committees

Not all people can manage ______________

effectively (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) BUS106
6/10
Management is defined as an art by____________

C.C. NWACHUKWU (1992)

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes

scientific

A scholarly grouping of concepts and principles creates a/an______________________

theory

Conflict of interest arises when an executive deals with a company in which_____________

it has vested interest

One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management

research

The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

plan

Marketing objectives increase sales by_____________________

25%

The systems approach to management encourages management to perceive the internal and external environmental factors as an____________whole.

integrated

Areas of management such as planning, decision making and control in the form of mathematical symbols and models is a field called_____________

operational research

Who among these authors created the chat of objectives?

C.C. NWACHUKWU (1992) (www.puredu.net)
(www.puredu.net) (www.puredu.net) 9/10

What Taylor and __________ postulated were based on their experience

Fayol

According to Peter Drucker (1954) a ____________ does not handle people

manager

Supervision and _________ are impossible with communication

leader

According to ____________ chase listening is the other half of talking

Stuart

Fedrick W. Taylor is often referred to as the father of __________ management

scientific

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends

principles

Gilbreth believed that there was one best way that required _______________ motion

last

Every organisation is _____

purposive

One of the major advantages of the ____________ revolution is that it gave birth to accelerated rate of resources accumulation

industrial

____ can be defined as getting things done through others.

Management (www.puredu.net)
Bus106 tma2 10/10

Control must be tailored to position ____
Monitor

Company ____are also part of the data
Records

In process of planning in an organizations ____ is being made
Decision

____ Distribution, expenditure pattern.
Income

Interview is used interchangeable with
Selection

The technique commonly employed by a ____
Support subordinate

In process of planning in an organizations ____ Is being made
Decision

The manager must comply with the ____
Legal

Organization can broadly be classified as
Formal/informal organization

The managerial functions of leading ____
Influencing
BUS106 TMA3 10/10

92. The _______ of any organization include: Finance, Material, Human, Information and Time resources
	Resources

93. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies
	Administration

94. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made
	Organization

95. The following are examples of different types of trainning except;
	Chairman Training

96. The _______ of any organization include: Finance, Material, Human, Information and Time resources
	Resources

97. ______________ is another criteria or rule to be observed in the process of drawing up a chart
	Line of authority

98. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future
	Forecasting

99. Company _______ are also part of the data which have to be processed
	Records

100. The following is acriteria or rule for drawing a chart in an organization
	All of the above

101. The managerial function of leading is simply the process of ________ people so that they will contribute to the goals of the organization
	Influencing

______ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Communication

102. Flat shaped structure falls under;
Wide span of control

103. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields
monitor

104. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made
organization

105. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies
administration

106. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Control

107. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business   legal

108. ________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future
forecasting

109. ________distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands
Income

110. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;Board of directors
Board of directors
The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.

111.
democratic leader

Scientific management was intended to bring about a ___________ mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and management

complete

In the pre-industrial period, ____________ was practiced by various part of the world including Africa

management


Henri advocated the __________ principles of management

first

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.

Motivation

The well - known __________ of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful administrative system

Kingdom

_____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future


forecasting

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __

committees

___ techiques and systems are basically the same regardless of what is being controlled

Control
======
BUS106
======

112. ____ requires technical skill and conceptual ability.

	      History

	      Science

	      Philosophy

	--->> Art

113. Every system is made up of _____

	      open system

	--->> subsystem

	      closed system

	      None on the list

114. The___climate in an industry influences the behaviour of a company.

	      policy

	--->> ethical

	      objectives

	      procedural

115. The major problem that confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of ___.

	      patience

	      policy

	--->> objectives

	      procedural

116. ____management uses the methods of science in making decisions and evaluating its consequences.

	      Behavioral

	      Human relations

	      HRM

	--->> Scientific

117. __ is one of the most important human activities that permeate all organisations.

	--->> Managing

	      Planning

	      Organising

	      None on the list

118. ____ can be defined as getting things done through others.

	--->> Management

	      Objectives

	      Organisation

	      none on the list

119. __ are rather seen as best fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.

	      Guildline

	--->> Principles

	      Policy

	      None on the list

120. Every  organisation is _____

	      procedual

	      proactive

	--->> purposive

	      procedural

121. ___of interest occurs whenever an executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest.

	--->> Conflict

	      Dispute

	      Negotiation

	      None on the list

BUS106   NOUN EXAM



To a student management is an________________ discipline

academic


Formal leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an _________ figure

122.
authority

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes

scientific

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends

principles



The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

plan


One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management

research



It is often difficult to formulate priniciples in management because of the difficulty in conducting controlled ____________


experiment


The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made


organization




A ___________ leader cannot function without the authority


formal


.) The word  concerns the laying down of policies
Ans => Administration

.) Is the process of transferring information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Ans => communication

.) The manager must comply with the  requirements for establishing and operating his business
Ans => Legal

.) The essence of  lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Ans => control

.) Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of
Ans => Board or Director

.) Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right person will  activities in their own field
Ans => monitor

.)  distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumer all effect demans
Ans => income

.) Flat shaped structure falls under
Ans => wide span of control

.)  is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen
Ans => Forecasting

.) The very survival of an   dictate that a certain minimum profit has to be made
Ans => organization








Organization
======
BUS106 NOUN EXAM





123. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income


124. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

125. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

126. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

127. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

128. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

129. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

130. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

131. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

132. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment







133. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

134. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

135. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

136. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

137. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

138. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

139. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

140. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

BUS106 NOUN EXAM


All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human
Clear objectives make for consistency and unity of purpose and__________________
b.
direction

Decision making is fundamental in an organization whether it is small enterprise or_______________
141.
multi-national corporation

The management function of leading is simply the process of _ people so that they will contribute to the goals of the organization
Influencing

The resources of any organization include; finance, material, human, information and _
Time

10/10

Training refers to ______________ and mechanical skills
technical

The following are examples of different types of training except;
Chairman training

The management process school of thought perceives management as a process of getting things done through _________ operating in organized groups
people

The __________ principles of management were advocated by Henri Fayol\'s
First

The _____________ of empirical school is the danger of using the past to judge the present
criticism

One of the fore runners of Fedrick Taylor was__________________
Webber --> supposedly Babbage

The fourteen principles of management cover all aspects of _______________
management

_____ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Communication

The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business
legal

The management process school attempts to establish a _________________ frame work
conceptual

Gilbreth believed that there was one best way that required _______________ motion
last

The __ is dogmatic and expects compliance and leads by ability to without or give rewards and punishment.
autocratic leader


The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies
administration

____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Communication

The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business
legal

The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Control

Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;
Board of directors

Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields
monitor

_______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands
Income

Flat shaped structure falls under;
Wide span of control

_____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future
Forecasting

The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made
organization

Managing is one of the most important human activities that _____________________ all organization
permeate

A good ____________ must know the concepts and principles of management
manager

There are special areas of management that are not subject to the ____________ of science
rigours

It is often difficult to formulate priniciples in management because of the difficulty in conducting controlled ____________
experiment

To a student management is an________________ discipline
academic

Management is the __________ or direciton of people towards organizational objectives
guidance

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes
scientific

A principle describe a _____________ or what should be done if something else happen
relationship

One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management
research

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends
principles

Arts requires___________ skills and conceptual ability
technical

It could be argued that the empirical school is ____________ to the management process
identical

Human relations school believes that effective use of human relationship will aid management in realising the organizational ___________
goals

___________ places emphasis on the understanding of employee by management
human relation

Not all people can manage ______________
effectively

To get _________________ put in their best efforts the manager has to understand people their emotional, physical and interllectual needs
people

_____________ are people who are primarily responsible for the achievmeent of organizational goals
managers

There is a class relationship between the ______________ school and the decision theory school
mathematical

Management is also seen as a process demanding the performance of ______________ function
specific

Decision theory school group believes in _____________ decision making
rational

There is no human endeavour that does not require proper_______________ for its proper functioning
management

Managing is one of the most important human activities that _____________________ all organization
permeate

___ techiques and systems are basically the same regardless of what is being controlled
Control

The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.
democratic leader

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.
Motivator

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __
committees

___factors involve working conditions and can trigger dissatisfaction,if inadequate.
Hygiene

The __ is dogmatic and expects compliance and leads by ability to without or give rewards and punishment.
autocratic leader

The__uses his power very little,if at all,giving subordinates ahigh degree of independence in their operations.
free-rein leader

___ involves giving a job greater scope or variety and depth.
job enrichment

____are the monetary measurements.
cost standards

______ is referred to as the father of the social system approach to organisation.
V. ParetoManaging is one of the most important human activities that _____________________ all organization
permeate

A good ____________ must know the concepts and principles of management
manager

There are special areas of management that are not subject to the ____________ of science
rigours

It is often difficult to formulate priniciples in management because of the difficulty in conducting controlled ____________
experiment

To a student management is an________________ discipline
academic

Management is the __________ or direciton of people towards organizational objectives
guidance

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes
scientific

A principle describe a _____________ or what should be done if something else happen
relationship

One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management
research

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends
principles

Arts requires___________ skills and conceptual ability
technical

It could be argued that the empirical school is ____________ to the management process
identical

Human relations school believes that effective use of human relationship will aid management in realising the organizational ___________
goals

___________ places emphasis on the understanding of employee by management
human relation

Not all people can manage ______________
effectively

To get _________________ put in their best efforts the manager has to understand people their emotional, physical and interllectual needs
people

_____________ are people who are primarily responsible for the achievmeent of organizational goals
managers

There is a class relationship between the ______________ school and the decision theory school
mathematical

Management is also seen as a process demanding the performance of ______________ function
specific

Decision theory school group believes in _____________ decision making
rational

There is no human endeavour that does not require proper_______________ for its proper functioning
management

Managing is one of the most important human activities that _____________________ all organization
permeate

___ techiques and systems are basically the same regardless of what is being controlled
Control

The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.
democratic leader

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.
Motivator

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __
committees

___factors involve working conditions and can trigger dissatisfaction,if inadequate.
Hygiene

The __ is dogmatic and expects compliance and leads by ability to without or give rewards and punishment.
autocratic leader

The__uses his power very little,if at all,giving subordinates ahigh degree of independence in their operations.
free-rein leader

___ involves giving a job greater scope or variety and depth.
job enrichment

____are the monetary measurements.
cost standards

______ is referred to as the father of the social system approach to organisation.
V. Pareto

The management process school of thought perceives management as a process of getting things done through _________ operating in organized groups
people

Taylor advocated placing _________________ on a piece work in order to encourage them to earn more
workers

Gilbreth believed that there was one best way that required _______________ motion
last

One of the major advantages of the ____________ revolution is that it gave birth to accelerated rate of resources accumulation
scientific

The management process school attempts to establish a _________________ frame work
conceptual

The __________ principles of management were advocated by Henri Fayol\'s
First

The _____________ of empirical school is the danger of using the past to judge the present
criticism

The entrepreneur was forced by competition to engage in ______________ performance
crude

It could be argued that the empirical school is ____________ to the management process
identical

Taylor believed that each worker was motivated by ______________ need
financial

Taylor advocated placing _________________ on a piece work in order to encourage them to earn more
workers

One of the major advantages of the ____________ revolution is that it gave birth to accelerated rate of resources accumulation
scientific

The entrepreneur was forced by competition to engage in ______________ performance
crude

It could be argued that the empirical school is ____________ to the management process
identical

Taylor believed that each worker was motivated by ______________ need
financial

The main pre - occupation was what to do in order to increase _____________ productivity
employee

The well - known __________ of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful administrative system
Kingdom

In the pre-industrial period, ____________ was practiced by various part of the world including Africa
management

Scientific management was intended to bring about a ___________ mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and management
complete

Scientific management was intended to bring about a ___________ mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and management
complete

Fedrick W. Taylor is often referred to as the father of __________ management
scientific

George Elton _________ is from Austraila
mayo

Henri advocated the __________ principles of management
fourth

The first principles of management were advocated by _____________ and geologist
French engineer

The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies
administration

The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Control

Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;
Board of directors

Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields
monitor

_______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands
Income

Flat shaped structure falls under;
Wide span of control

_____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future
Forecasting

The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made
organization

___ techiques and systems are basically the same regardless of what is being controlled
Control

The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.
democratic leader

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.
Motivator

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __
committees

___factors involve working conditions and can trigger dissatisfaction,if inadequate.
Hygiene

The__uses his power very little,if at all,giving subordinates ahigh degree of independence in their operations.
free-rein leader

___ involves giving a job greater scope or variety and depth.
job enrichment

____are the monetary measurements.
cost standards

______ is referred to as the father of the social system approach to organisation.
V. Pareto

Control must be tailored to position ____
Monitor

Company ____are also part of the data
Records

In process of planning in an organizations ____ is being made
Decision

____ Distribution, expenditure pattern.
Income

Interview is used interchangeable with
Selection

The technique commonly employed by a ____
Support subordinate

In process of planning in an organizations ____ Is being made
Decision

The manager must comply with the ____
Legal

Organization can broadly be classified as
Formal/informal organization

The managerial functions of leading ____
Influencing

142. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands
	marketing
Answer:	Income
	Information
	High income

143. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;
	Emplyees
	Management
Answer:	Board of directors
	Middlemen

144. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields
	process
Answer:	monitor
	controlling
	influence

145. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
	Planning
Answer:	Control
	Organizing
	Management

146. Flat shaped structure falls under;
	Narrow span of control
	Big span of control
Answer:	Wide span of control
	Small span of control

147. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business
	compliance
	registration
	company
Answer:	legal

148. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future
Answer:	forecasting
	planning
	controlling
	management

149. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
	Messaging
Answer:	Communication
	Texting
	Internet



58. The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

	      system

	      Department

	--->> plan

	      none on the list

59. ____ is the basic to all managerial functions

	--->> Planning

	      Organising

	      Unity of command

	      Decision making

60. An individual, who gets the thing done is a ____.

	      leader

	--->> manager

	      director

	      organiser

61. Some business problems arise due to failing on the ___ grounds.

	      management

	      managing

	--->> ethical

	      decision

62. ____deals with a qualitaive and quantitative aspect of manpower in terms of placement.

	      Planning

	--->> Organising

	      unity of command

	      none on the list

63. The ____is a  vehicle for the implementation of a plan.

	--->> system

	      management

	      communication

	      information

64. The ___could be formal or informal.

	      business

	--->> Orrganisation

	      Enterprise

	      business letter

65. ___is a process of breaking an enterprise into smaller groups and levels.

	--->> Departmentation

	      Staffing

	      Centralisation

	      decentralisation

66. ___ normally has a network of goals, objectives and targets.

	      Business

	      Management

	      Enterprise

	--->> Organisation

67. The functions of a___ can be a line or a staff.

	      system

	--->> Department

	      plan

	      none on the list


2) __ are rather seen as best fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.

	      Guildline

	--->> Principles

	      Policy

	      None on the list

3) Every system is made up of _____

	      open system

	--->> subsystem

	      closed system

	      None on the list

4) ___of interest occurs whenever an executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest.

	--->> Conflict

	      Dispute

	      Negotiation

	      None on the list

5) ____management uses the methods of science in making decisions and evaluating its consequences.

	      Behavioral

	      Human relations

	      HRM

	--->> Scientific

6) __ is one of the most important human activities that permeate all organisations.

	--->> Managing

	      Planning

	      Organising

	      None on the list

7) ____ can be defined as getting things done through others.

	--->> Management

	      Objectives

	      Organisation

	      none on the list

8) ____ requires technical skill and conceptual ability.

	      History

	      Science

	      Philosophy

	--->> Art

9) The___climate in an industry influences the behaviour of a company.

	      policy

	--->> ethical

	      objectives

	      procedural

10) The major problem that confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of ___.

	      patience

	      policy

	--->> objectives

	      procedural

11) Every  organisation is _____

	      procedual

	      proactive

	--->> purposive

	      procedural



bus106


Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human


Try Another Search
BUS106   NOUN EXAM



To a student management is an________________ discipline

academic


Formal leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an _________ figure

150.
authority

_______________ management uses the methods of science in making decision and evaluating its consequenxes

scientific

___________ are best seen as fundamental or general truth in which the other truth depends

principles



The effectiveness of a ___depends on how it is implemented.

plan


One of the most important impacts of principles is that it helped to promote ______________ in management

research



It is often difficult to formulate priniciples in management because of the difficulty in conducting controlled ____________


experiment


The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made


organization




A ___________ leader cannot function without the authority


formal


.) The word  concerns the laying down of policies
Ans => Administration

.) Is the process of transferring information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Ans => communication

.) The manager must comply with the  requirements for establishing and operating his business
Ans => Legal

.) The essence of  lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Ans => control

.) Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of
Ans => Board or Director

.) Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right person will  activities in their own field
Ans => monitor

.)  distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumer all effect demans
Ans => income

.) Flat shaped structure falls under
Ans => wide span of control

.)  is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen
Ans => Forecasting

.) The very survival of an   dictate that a certain minimum profit has to be made
Ans => organization








Organization
The__consults with his subordinates on proposed actions encourages participation from them.

151.
democratic leader

Scientific management was intended to bring about a ___________ mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and management

complete

In the pre-industrial period, ____________ was practiced by various part of the world including Africa

management


Henri advocated the __________ principles of management

first

___factors which originate from the nature of the job itself can create job satisfaction.

Motivation

The well - known __________ of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful administrative system

Kingdom

_____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future


forecasting

On the job management development can be achieved by appointing staff into __

committees

___ techiques and systems are basically the same regardless of what is being controlled

Control
Question:  is as old as human organization

Answer:Management



Question: The scientific management school placed special emphasis upon

Answer:production



Question:  is often referred to as the father of Scientific Management

Answer:Frederick W Taylor



Question: Gilbreth is known for his work on time and  studies

Answer:motion



Question: The first principles of management were advocated by a French engineer and

Answer:geologist



Question: The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into   broad areas

Answer:six



Question:  are people who are primarily responsible for the achievement of organizational goals

Answer:Managers



Question:   is defined as getting things done through others

Answer:Management



Question: Concepts are the corner stone for the development of and theory

Answer: principles



Question: Goals can be differentiated between official and  goals

Answer:operative



Question: Good organizational goals help in policy  and administration

Answer:formulation



Question: A typical employee goals can be divided into  main groups

Answer:two



Question: One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear

Answer:objectives



Question:  of interest arises when an executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest

Answer:Conflict



Question:  making is one of the most crucial activities of management

Answer:Decision



Question: A decision process is not completed until it is

Answer:implemented



Question:  is one of the highly sought after talents in management

Answer:Creative



Question:  is concerned with directing the human efforts towards organisational goal achievement

Answer:Direction



Question: Directing and comprise the managerial function of guiding overseeing and leading people

Answer:leading



Question: Schneider  refers to organisational climate as the entire internal environment of the organisation

Answer:1975



Question: The mathematical techniques used as aid to decision making are often called

Answer:Operations Research



Question:  theory is often called waiting line theory

Answer:Queuing



Question: Planning has been defined previously as one of the five major functions of management

Answer:five



Question: The most comprehensive definition of planning is given by

Answer:Cyril LHudson



Question: The best known definition of management control is given by Anthony in

Answer:1965



Question: indicate the financial expenditures involved per unit of activity

Answer:Cost standards



Question:  can be expressed as a ratio of net profits to sales

Answer:Profitability



Question: Formal organisation can be seen as a direct opposite of  organisation

Answer:informal



Question: the process of passing information and understanding from one person to another

Answer:Communication



Question: Communication may be divided into two namely  and written

Answer:oral



Question: The scientific management school place special emphasis upon

Answer:production



Question:  of enterprises was also practised by the Babylonians

Answer:management



Question: Industrial revoculion was the period of  awakeing

Answer:intellectual



Question: Scientific management was intended to bring about complete mental

Answer:revolution



Question: Management is as old as  organisation

Answer:human



Question: Taylors principles of management include all except

Answer:classification of programmes



Question: Fredrick W Taylor is often referred to as the of scientific management

Answer:father



Question: The pharahoahs are managers who planned organised and direct the work of the

Answer:surbodinates



Question: In the preindustrial period was practised by various parts of the world

Answer:management



Question: A well documented and properly organised management system was that of the

Answer:Egyptians



Question: Management can be define as getting thing done through

Answer:organizing



Question: Art is the imposition of

Answer:pattern



Question:  are best seen as fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend

Answer:principles



Question: There are special areas of management that are not subjected to rigous of

Answer:science



Question: Gilbreth is known for his work on time and studies

Answer:motion



Question: Management can be define as a team or group of individuals in

Answer:Organisation



Question: The first principles of management were advocated

Answer:Henry Fayol



Question: It could be argued that the  school is identical to the management process school

Answer:empirical



Question:  spend his life working on the difference engine

Answer:Babbage



Question: Decision theory schools believe in decision making

Answer:rational
152. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future


forecasting

153. Company _______ are also part of the data which have to be processed

records

154. The _______ of any organization include: Finance, Material, Human, Information and Time resources.

resources

155. The following is a criteria or rule for drawing a chart in an organization

All of the above

156. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made


organization

157. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

administration

158. The resources of any organization include: Finance, Material, Human, Information and ________.


Time resources

159. The managerial function of leading is simply the process of ________ people so that they will contribute to the goals of the organization

influencing

160. ______________ is another criteria or rule to be observed in the process of drawing up a chart

Line of Authority

161. The following are examples of different types of training except;

Chairman training









































1, _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

.........Income


68. Organization can broadly be classified as
..........Formal/Informal organization


69. In the process of planning in an organization ________is being made

.........decision


70. The managerial function of leading is simply the process of ________ people so that they will contribute to the goals of the organization


influencing

71. In the process of _______ in an organization, decision is being made

......
Planning

72. The technique commonly employed by a leader to have human relations between him and his employees are;

......Support subordinates



73. Company _______ are also part of the data which have to be processed


records


9, Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

monitor


Interview is used interchangeable with;

............Selection



10, The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

legal
























bus 106 10/10
m. Wide span of control
n. Communication
o. Board of directors
p. Income
q. Monitor
r. Legal
s. Control
t. Forecasting
u. Administration
v. Organization
[3/4, 2:17 PM] NE
Bus106 TMA 1 10/10

w. ) The word  concerns the laying down of policies
Ans => Administration
x. ) Is the process of transferring information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver
Ans => communication
y. ) The manager must comply with the  requirements for establishing and operating his business
Ans => Legal
z. ) The essence of  lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined
Ans => control
aa. ) Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of
Ans => Board or Director
bb. ) Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right person will  activities in their own field
Ans => monitor
cc. )  distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumer all effect demans
Ans => income
dd. ) Flat shaped structure falls under
Ans => wide span of control
ee. )  is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen
Ans => Forecasting
ff. ) The very survival of an   dictate that a certain minimum profit has to be made
Ans => organization
FBQ1: _____ used a mathematical equation to arrive at the conclusion that only a narrow span of management would make for efficient management.
Answer: Graicunas

FBQ2: ________deals with the number of subordinates that an executive can manage effectively.
Answer: Span of control

FBQ3: ________promotes delegation and supervision with predictable results.
Answer: Specialization

FBQ4: One of the major factors that promote decentralization is task  ________
Answer: specialization

FBQ5: Effective _________helps managers to spend less time on specific technical activities
Answer: delegation

FBQ6: The principle of _________is sometimes violated where functional authority exists.
Answer: unity of command

FBQ7: _______means answering for the use of your formal authority by someone else.
Answer: Accountability

FBQ8: Duncan ____has indicated that econometric models are used in predicting the student enrolment at universities.
Answer: 1975

FBQ9: _______models are more complex in nature and involve interrelationships of many variables tied together in a quantitative model.
Answer: Causal

FBQ10: ________are the changes that have taken place as a result of economic booms or depressions.
Answer: Cyclical variations

FBQ11: _____is based on the assumption that past activities are good indication of future activities.
Answer: Time series analysis

FBQ12: ______converts company objectives into individual goals and as a result, it contributes to higher levels of job satisfaction.
Answer: MBO

FBQ13: _________is the last in Maslow’s hierarchy of needs.
Answer: Self-actualisation Need

FBQ14: ________ is that energizing force that induces or compels and maintains behaviour.
Answer: Motivation

FBQ15: ______method is ideal for both employee training and management development.
Answer: Coaching

FBQ16: _______ is the determination of the job to which an accepted candidate is to be assigned and his assignment to that job.
Answer: placement

FBQ17: _______ seek to evaluate the applicant’s ability to apply knowledge judiciously in solving a problem.
Answer: Judgement test

FBQ18: _______ is to solicit necessary information from the prospective applicants to assess the applicant’s suitability to the job.
Answer: Preliminary interview

FBQ19: _________ techniques are the means or media by which management contacts prospective employees or provides necessary information.
Answer: Recruitment

FBQ20: _______ is a process of choosing the right candidate from a pool of applicants.
Answer: Selection

FBQ21: ________include mental dexterity, analytical ability, intuitive judgement, alertness and ability to concentrate.
Answer: Psychological characteristics

FBQ22: ______ is a personal power acquired by expertise in a field or area.
Answer: Expert Power

FBQ23: _________ conducted extensive studies in this area and developed a scale to identify different types of leaders.
Answer: Fiedler’s contingency theory

FBQ24: The __________of leadership has suffered from lack of conclusiveness and over-simplifications.
Answer: trait theory

FBQ25: ________ leadership occurs when a person is appointed or elected as an authority figure.
Answer: formal

FBQ26: Leadership is an integral part of management and plays a vital role in _______operations.
Answer: managerial

FBQ27: ________ is often referred to as the father of Scientific Management.
Answer: Abraham Maslow

FBQ28: The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into _________ broad areas.
Answer: six

FBQ29: Goals can be differentiated between official and ________ goals.
Answer: Operative

FBQ30: One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear ________.
Answer: objectives

FBQ31: A decision process is not completed until it is _____________.
Answer: implemented

FBQ32: __________ is one of the highly sought after talents in management.
Answer: Creative

FBQ33: ___________theory is often called waiting-line theory.
Answer: Queuing

FBQ34: The best known definition of management control is given by Anthony in _________
Answer: 1965

FBQ35: Employment opportunity is created by _____
Answer: Organisations

MCQ1: ________ is as old as human organization.
Answer: Management

MCQ2: The scientific management school placed special emphasis upon _________
Answer: Production

MCQ3: ________ is often referred to as the father of Scientific Management.
Answer: Abraham Maslow

MCQ4: Gilbreth is known for his work on time and _______ studies.
Answer: Motion

MCQ5: The first principles of management were advocated by a French engineer and ______
Answer: Geologist

MCQ6: The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into _________ broad areas.
Answer: Six

MCQ7: ________ are people who are primarily responsible for the achievement of organizational goals.
Answer: Managers

MCQ8: _________is defined as getting things done through others.
Answer: Management

MCQ9: Concepts are the corner stone for the development of________ and theory.
Answer: Principles

MCQ10: Goals can be differentiated between official and ________ goals.
Answer: Operative

MCQ11: Good organizational goals help in policy ________ and administration.
Answer: Formulation

MCQ12: A typical employee goal can be divided into _____ main groups.
Answer: Two

MCQ13: One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear ________.
Answer: Objectives

MCQ14: _______ of interest arises when an executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest.
Answer: Conflict

MCQ15: _______ making is one of the most crucial activities of management.
Answer: Decision

MCQ16: A decision process is not completed until it is _____________.
Answer: Implemented

MCQ17: __________ is one of the highly sought after talents in management.
Answer: Creative

MCQ18: ________ is concerned with directing the human efforts towards organisational goal achievement.
Answer: Direction

MCQ19: Directing and ________comprise the managerial function of guiding, overseeing and leading people.
Answer: Leading

MCQ20: Schneider ________ refers to organisational climate as the entire internal environment of the organisation.
Answer: 1975

MCQ21: The mathematical techniques used as aid to decision making are often called ______
Answer: Operations Research

MCQ22: ___________theory is often called waiting-line theory.
Answer: Queuing

MCQ23: Planning has been defined previously as one of the -------- major functions of management.
Answer: Five

MCQ24: The most comprehensive definition of planning is given by _________
Answer: Cyril L. Hudson

MCQ25: The best known definition of management control is given by Anthony in _________
Answer: 1965

MCQ26: __________indicate the financial expenditures involved per unit of activity.
Answer: Cost standards

MCQ27: ______ can be expressed as a ratio of net profits to sales.
Answer: Profitability

MCQ28: Formal organisation can be seen as a direct opposite of ________ organisation.
Answer: Informal

MCQ29: _________the process of passing information and understanding from one person to another.
Answer: Communication

MCQ30: Communication may be divided into two namely _____ and written.
Answer: Oral

MCQ31: Employment opportunity is created by _____
Answer: Organisations

MCQ32: ______ should help in formulating and articulating ethical norms as part of their social responsibility.
Answer: Nigeria

MCQ33: The areas in which business organisations should play a ________ role in Nigeria are limitless.
Answer: Prominent

MCQ34: _______ tend to increase with increasing task certainty.
Answer: Spans

MCQ35: Mass-production companies have a higher span of management than ________firms.
Answer: Process

Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human



Question
All organiztions are _______

Answer
purposive



Question
___________ is the imposition of a pattern a vision of a whole on many disparate parts so as to create a representation of that vision

Answer
art



Question
__________ is defined as getting thing done through others

Answer
management



Question
To a student __________ is an academic discipline

Answer
management



Question
Some people see__________ as a group of people

Answer
organizer



Question
All people who oversee the function of other people who must work in subordinate position are ________

Answer
managers



Question
There is a class relationship between the _________ school and the decision theory school

Answer
mathematical



Question
The study of group dynamics and interpersonal relationship is ___________ to management

Answer
not limited



Question
What Taylor and Fayol postulated were based on _______

Answer
their experience



Question
__________ is the article of Harold Koontz

Answer
The management theory society



Question
Scientific management is to increase the ____________ of the average employee

Answer
output



Question
___________ is often referred to as the father of scientific management

Answer
Fredric W. Taylor



Question
Scientific management was intended to bring about a complete mental revolution which must occur in the mind of the workmen and __________

Answer
management



Question
The main _____________ was what to do in order to increase employee productivity

Answer
pre - occupation



Question
Egyptian carried out activities such as the following except

Answer
shoemaking



Question
What is said of Ghana can be said of ________

Answer
Mali



Question
Ghana's judicial system had both a _______ court and a court of appeal

Answer
lower



Question
The well - known kingdom of Ghana, Mali and Songhai are kown to have had a wonderful _______ system

Answer
administrative



Question
In the pre-industrial period, management was practiced by various part of the world including_______

Answer
Africa



Question
Management is as old as _______ organization

Answer
human
======
BUS106
======

gg. _______ distribution, expenditure patterns, saving capability of consumers all affect demands

	      marketing

	--->> Income

	      Information

	      High income

hh. The manager must comply with the_____ requirements for establishing and operating his business

	      compliance

	      registration

	      company

	--->> legal

74. Control must be tailored to positions, this is necessary so that the right persons will _______activities in their own fields

	      process

	--->> monitor

	      controlling

	      influence

jj. Providing scheme of control is the responsibility of;

	      Emplyees

	      Management

	--->> Board of directors

	      Middlemen

kk. The essence of ___________ lies in checking existing actions againsts some desired results which have been determined

	      Planning

	--->> Control

	      Organizing

	      Management

ll. _____________ is aimed at calculating or predicting what is likely going to happen in the future

	--->> forecasting

	      planning

	      controlling

	      management

mm. Flat shaped structure falls under;

	      Narrow span of control

	      Big span of control

	--->> Wide span of control

	      Small span of control

nn. The word ________ concerns the laying down of policies

	      manager

	--->> administration

	      management

	      director

oo. ____________ is the process of transfering information from a sender to a receiver with the information being understood by the receiver

	      Messaging

	--->> Communication

	      Texting

	      Internet

pp. The very survival of an _______ dictates that a certain minimum profit has to be made

	      Eenvironment

	--->> organization

	      industry

	      investment

Text File Report


Created by using CSVFileView

qid	crscode	qdescr	opta	optb	optc	optd	qa	tmano	lecnp	udate	facid

13188	
BUS106	 	is as old as human organization.	
	
	
Management	
	
C	
TMA1	TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:51:35	
F06


13189	

BUS106	The scientific management school placed special emphasis upon	

production	

	

	
	

A	

TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:51:35	

F06

13190	
BUS106	 	is often referred to as the father of Scientific Management.	
	
	
	
Frederick W. Taylor	
D	
TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:51:35	
F06

13191	
BUS106	Gilbreth is known for his work on time and	 studies.	
	
motion	
	
	
B	
TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:51:35	
F06


13192	

BUS106	The first principles of management were advocated by a French engineer and	

geologist	

	

	
	

A	

TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:51:35	

F06



13193	


BUS106	The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into
	broad areas.	


	


	


	


six	


D	


TMA1	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	

2018-
09-27
15:51:35	


F06


13194	

BUS106	 	are people who are primarily responsible for the achievement of organizational goals.	

	

	

Managers	

	

C	

TMA1	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:51:35	

F06

13195	
BUS106	 	is defined as getting things done through others.	
	
Management	
	
	
B	
TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:51:35	
F06


13196	

BUS106	Concepts are the corner stone for the development
of	and theory.	

	

	

	

principles	

D	

TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:51:35	

F06

13197	
BUS106	Goals can be differentiated between official and
	goals.	
	
	
operative	
	
C	
TMA1	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:51:35	
F06

13208	
BUS106	Good organizational goals help in policy
	and administration.	
	
	
formulation	
	
C	
TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:52:54	
F06

13209	
BUS106	A typical employee goals can be divided into	main groups.	
	
two	
	
	
B	
TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:52:54	
F06




13210	

BUS106	One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear	.	

	

	

	

objectives	

D	

TMA2	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:52:54	

F06


13211	

BUS106	 	of interest arises when an executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest.	

Conflict	

	

	
	

A	

TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:52:54	

F06

13212	
BUS106	 	making is one of the most crucial activities of management.	
	
Decision	
	
	
B	
TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:52:54	
F06

13213	
BUS106	A decision process is not completed until it is
	.	
	
	
implemented	
	
C	
TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:52:54	
F06

13214	
BUS106	 	is one of the highly sought after talents in management.	
	
	
	
Creative	
D	
TMA2	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:52:54	
F06


13215	

BUS106	 	is concerned with directing the human efforts towards organisational goal achievement.	

	

Direction	

	

	

B	

TMA2	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:52:54	

F06


13216	

BUS106	Directing and
	comprise the managerial function of guiding, overseeing and leading people.	

	

	

p	

leading	

D	

TMA2	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:52:54	

F06


13217	

BUS106	Schneider
	refers to organisational climate as the entire internal environment of the organisation.	

1975	

	

	

	

A	

TMA2	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:52:54	

F06


13238	

BUS106	The mathematical techniques used as aid to decision making are often called  		
	

	
Operations Research	

	

C	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06

13239	
BUS106	

theory is often called waiting-line theory.	
	
	
Queuing		
C	
TMA3	TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:57:13	
F06


13240	

BUS106	Planning has been defined previously as one of the five major functions of management.	

	

	

five	

	

C	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06


13241	

BUS106	The most comprehensive definition of planning is given by	
	
	
	
Cyril L.Hudson	

D	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06


13242	

BUS106	The best known definition of management control is given by Anthony in  		

1965	

	

	

	

A	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06




13243	

BUS106	 	indicate the financial expenditures involved per unit of activity.	
	

Cost standards	
	
	

B	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06

13244	
BUS106	 	can be expressed as a ratio of net profits to sales.	
	
	
	
Profitability	
D	
TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:57:13	
F06


13245	

BUS106	Formal organisation can be seen as a direct opposite of


organisation.	

	

informal	

	

	

B	

TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:13	

F06


13246	

BUS106	 	the process of passing information and understanding from one person to another.	

	

Communication	

	

	

B	

TMA3	

TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	
2018-
09-27
15:57:14	

F06

13247	
BUS106	Communication may be divided into two namely	and written.	
oral	
	
	
	
A	
TMA3	
TENF06S0202:Sam
Baba Tende	2018-
09-27
15:57:14	
F06



BUS106 List of Questions

Latex formatted questions may not properly render

Q1 The major organizational goals exclude????????????????????????..
staff lay-off

Q2 A good goal makes the organization while helping to exploit the opportunities to minimize the impact of the
?????????????????????.
risks

Q3 Good goals must possess the following qualities except?????????????????????????????????
they must not specify period of achievement.

Q4 ??????????????????????????????. goal could be implicit and require explicit formulation before they could be realised.
Organisation

Q5 What managers do in organizations includes ?????????????????????
all of the above

Q6 Management function is identical in all ????????????????????????. whether it is a profit-making organization or a "non-profit-making organization.
formal organizations

Q7 In a general sense, the human being is a complex system made up of sub- systems such as the circulatory system, the auditory system, the locomotive system, and so on.
False
Q8 ???????????????????????? is known as the father of scientific management.
Frederick W. Taylor

Q9 A scholarly grouping of concepts and principles creates a??????????????????????????????
theory

Q10 ????????????????????????.. are abstractions formed fromgeneralizations.
Concepts

Q11 Fayol, after more than???????????????????????????.. of practical business experience drewup his principles of management.
40 years

Q12 ???????????????????????????.. are best seen as fundamental or general truth on which other truths depend.
Principles

Q13 A successful manager blends experience with ????????????????????????.. in order to achieve a desired result.
science

Q14 ???????????????????????????.. attempts through systematic procedure to establish the relationships between variables and the underlying principles.
Science

Q15 ????????????... is an imposition of order on chaos.
Art

Q16 Gilbreth believed that there was one best way which was believed to be the way that required the
????????????????????????
least motion

Q17 Taylor???s principles of management could be summarized as ???????????????????????????..
a and b above

Q18 A manager will find it difficult to enforce quality or engage in??????????????????????????????. .
overall profit

Q19 A ?????????????????????.. is the selection of alternative course of action fromavailable alternatives in order to achieve a given objective.
decision

Q20 A ???????????????????????????. could be seen as a group of people assembled together to take action on an administrative task.

committee
Q21 What determines whether a decision is to be made by an individual or group is the type of decision to be made, and the importance of the decision to the immediate attainment of ?????????????????????????????? .
organisational objectives

Q22 A decision process is not completed until it is ???????????????????????????????????? .
implemented

Q23 An entrepreneur may decide in the circumstance to select the alternative that ???minimises his risk or involves ???minimum regret??? or gives himoptimum result in the ???????????????????????????????????????. .
short-run

Q24 Stages in Decision Making includes ?????????????????????????????????????????????
all of the above

Q25 A decision made with full knowledge of the occurrence of an event is said to be decision
??????????????????????????????.  .
under certainty

Q26 The course of action that maximises the final desirability is the???????????????????????????????????????.. .
rational decision

Q27 If a quantitative method is used, the value of each alternative is?????????????????????????????????.. .
computed

Q28 In business, there are absolutely no right or wrong decisions but
????????????????????????????????????..   .
intelligent choices

Q29 Factors Determining Unethical Decisions????????????????????????..
Formal company policy

Q30 The King???s affairs were so well organised and so efficiently and effectively run that it was devoid of
?????????????????????????????????????????????   .
bureaucracy


FBQ1: _____ used a mathematical equation to
arrive at the conclusion that only a narrow span of management would make for efficient management.
Answer: Graicunas

FBQ2: ________deals with the number of
subordinates that an executive can manage effectively.
Answer: Span of control

FBQ3: ________promotes delegation and
supervision with predictable results. Answer: Specialization

FBQ4: One of the major factors that promote

decentralization is task Answer: specialization

________


FBQ5: Effective _________helps managers to
spend less time on specific technical activities Answer: delegation

FBQ6: The principle of _________is sometimes
violated where functional authority exists. Answer: unity of command

FBQ7: _______means answering for the use of
your formal authority by someone else. Answer: Accountability

FBQ8: Duncan ____has indicated that
econometric models are used in predicting the

student enrolment at universities. Answer: 1975

FBQ9: _______models are more complex in nature
and involve interrelationships of many variables tied together in a quantitative model.
Answer: Causal

FBQ10: ________are the changes that have taken
place as a result of economic booms or depressions.
Answer: Cyclical variations

FBQ11: _____is based on the assumption that
past activities are good indication of future activities.
Answer: Time series analysis

FBQ12: ______converts company objectives into
individual goals and as a result, it contributes to higher levels of job satisfaction.
Answer: MBO

FBQ13: _________is the last in Maslow’s
hierarchy of needs.
Answer: Self-actualisation Need

FBQ14: ________ is that energizing force that
induces or compels and maintains behaviour. Answer: Motivation

FBQ15: ______method is ideal for both employee
training and management development.

Answer: Coaching

FBQ16: _______ is the determination of the job to
which an accepted candidate is to be assigned and his assignment to that job.
Answer: placement

FBQ17: _______ seek to evaluate the
applicant’s ability to apply knowledge judiciously in solving a problem.
Answer: Judgement test

FBQ18: _______ is to solicit necessary information
from the prospective applicants to assess the applicant’s suitability to the job.
Answer: Preliminary interview

FBQ19: _________ techniques are the means or
media by which management contacts prospective employees or provides necessary information.
Answer: Recruitment

FBQ20: _______ is a process of choosing the right
candidate from a pool of applicants. Answer: Selection

FBQ21: ________include mental dexterity,
analytical ability, intuitive judgement, alertness and ability to concentrate.
Answer: Psychological characteristics

FBQ22: ______ is a personal power acquired by

expertise in a field or area. Answer: Expert Power

FBQ23: _________ conducted extensive studies in
this area and developed a scale to identify different types of leaders.
Answer: Fiedler’s contingency theory

FBQ24: The __________of leadership has suffered
from lack of conclusiveness and over-simplifications.
Answer: trait theory

FBQ25: ________ leadership occurs when a
person is appointed or elected as an authority figure.
Answer: formal

FBQ26: Leadership is an integral part of management and plays a vital role in
_______operations. Answer: managerial

FBQ27: ________ is often referred to as the father
of Scientific Management. Answer: Abraham Maslow

FBQ28: The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into
_________ broad areas. Answer: six

FBQ29: Goals can be differentiated between

official and	goals.
Answer: Operative

FBQ30: One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear
________.
Answer: objectives

FBQ31: A decision process is not completed until
it is	_.
Answer: implemented

FBQ32: __________ is one of the highly sought
after talents in management. Answer: Creative

FBQ33: ___________theory is often called
waiting-line theory. Answer: Queuing

FBQ34: The best known definition of management

control is given by Anthony in Answer: 1965

_________


FBQ35: Employment opportunity is created by
_____
Answer: Organisations

MCQ1: ________ is as old as human organization.
Answer: Management

MCQ2: The scientific management school placed
special emphasis upon _________

Answer: Production

MCQ3: ________ is often referred to as the father
of Scientific Management. Answer: Abraham Maslow

MCQ4: Gilbreth is known for his work on time and
_______ studies. Answer: Motion

MCQ5: The first principles of management were

advocated by a French engineer and Answer: Geologist

______


MCQ6: The Management Theory Jungle has classified the major schools of management into
_________ broad areas. Answer: Six

MCQ7: ________ are people who are primarily
responsible for the achievement of organizational goals.
Answer: Managers

MCQ8: _________is defined as getting things
done through others. Answer: Management

MCQ9: Concepts are the corner stone for the development of________ and theory.
Answer: Principles

MCQ10: Goals can be differentiated between

official and	goals.
Answer: Operative

MCQ11: Good organizational goals help in policy
________ and administration. Answer: Formulation

MCQ12: A typical employee goal can be divided
into _____ main groups.
Answer: Two

MCQ13: One of the major problems confronting the Nigerian Civil Service is the lack of clear
________.
Answer: Objectives

MCQ14: _______ of interest arises when an
executive deals with a company in which it has vested interest.
Answer: Conflict

MCQ15: _______ making is one of the most
crucial activities of management. Answer: Decision

MCQ16: A decision process is not completed until
it is	_.
Answer: Implemented

MCQ17: __________ is one of the highly sought
after talents in management. Answer: Creative

MCQ18: ________ is concerned with directing the
human efforts towards organisational goal achievement.
Answer: Direction

MCQ19: Directing and ________comprise the
managerial function of guiding, overseeing and leading people.
Answer: Leading

MCQ20: Schneider ________ refers to
organisational climate as the entire internal environment of the organisation.
Answer: 1975

MCQ21: The mathematical techniques used as

aid to decision making are often called Answer: Operations Research

______


MCQ22: ___________theory is often called
waiting-line theory. Answer: Queuing

MCQ23: Planning has been defined previously as one of the -------- major functions of management. Answer: Five

MCQ24: The most comprehensive definition of
planning is given by _________
Answer: Cyril L. Hudson

MCQ25: The best known definition of management control is given by Anthony in

_________ Answer: 1965

MCQ26: __________indicate the financial
expenditures involved per unit of activity. Answer: Cost standards

MCQ27: ______ can be expressed as a ratio of
net profits to sales. Answer: Profitability

MCQ28: Formal organisation can be seen as a

direct opposite of Answer: Informal

________ organisation.


MCQ29: _________the process of passing
information and understanding from one person to another.
Answer: Communication

MCQ30: Communication may be divided into two
namely _____ and written.
Answer: Oral

MCQ31: Employment opportunity is created by
_____
Answer: Organisations

MCQ32: ______ should help in formulating and
articulating ethical norms as part of their social responsibility.
Answer: Nigeria

MCQ33: The areas in which business

organisations should play a Nigeria are limitless.
Answer: Prominent

________ role in


MCQ34: _______ tend to increase with increasing
task certainty. Answer: Spans

MCQ35: Mass-production companies have a

higher span of management than Answer: Process

________firms.


FBQ1:Inbusinessthereareabsolutelynorightorwrong decisions but 	choices
Answer:*Intelligent*

FBQ2: 	organizationisasoldas management
Answer:*Human*

FBQ3: 	alsopracticedmanagementinthepre – industrial period
Answer:*Africa*

FBQ4: In order to increase employee productivity	waswhattodo Answer: *Preoccupation*

FBQ5:Thefatherof scientific management is Fredrick
W. 	--
Answer:*Taylor*

FBQ6:Thefirstprincipleofmanagementasadvocated by 	
Answer:*HenriFayol*

FBQ7: 	basicelementswasidentifiedby frank in on – the – job motions
Answer:*17*

FBQ8:ThearticleofHaroldKoontzisthemanagement theory of 	
Answer:*Jungle*

FBQ9:Anorderlystudyofjobrequirementis Answer: *Job analysis*
FBQ10: 	isanothernameforfree–reign leadership
Answer:*Laissez–faire*

FBQ11:Whichleadershipoccurswhenapersonis appointed as an authority figure
Answer:*Formal*

FBQ12: The process of passing information and understandingfromonepersontoanotherisknownas

Answer:*Communication*

FBQ13: The physical from of though which can be experienced and understood by senses is 	Answer: *Message*

FBQ14: 	suggested that people’s interpretationsofcommunicationscoincideswiththe

alreadyheldbenefitsandattitude Answer: Donald Robert

FBQ15: Theonlywaytoascertainastohowthe message was interpreted is	
Answer:*Feedback*

FBQ16: The other half of taking is 	
Answer:*Listening*

FBQ17:Inthehierarchyoffunctionsexercisedby management organization is 	
Answer:*Second*

FBQ18:Gettingthingsdonethroughothersisknownis Answer: *Management*
FBQ19: 	isseenas agroupof peopleby other
Answer:*Management*

FBQ20: 	overseethefunctionofotherpeoplewho must work in subordinate position
Answer:*Managers*

FBQ21: The 	schoolandthedecisiontheory school has a class relationship

Answer:*Management*

FBQ22: Whenthedemandsofataskonhandare ambiguous 	is needed
Answer:*Directive*

FBQ23: 	isoneof thefore– runnersof Taylor
Answer:*Babbage*

FBQ24:Anexcellentsourceforhighlydisciplined veterans is 	
Answer:*Militarycentres*

FBQ25: 	isreferredtoastechnicaland mechanical skills
Answer:*Training*

FBQ26:Theprocessofchoosingtherightcandidate from a pool of applicant is termed 	
Answer:*Selection*

FBQ27:Themostobvioussourceswhichareprimarily within the 

December 17, 2025 4:43 PM